Archive of Our Own

Chapter Text

It was there... lurking in the corner. Staring at me with so much desire and hunger like it wanted to eat me, devour me and I had this crippling feeling like... like it would enjoy every second, every bite it would take out of my skin, my body, my flesh. But it had never touched me. They had never even approached me. And yet, their presence alone never failed to make me fear for my life... for my sanity. 

There were women, men and children equal. They looked dead, with their pale skin and their thin limbs. They always wore black and white attires that were a size too big, but I dare say I think it fit them before. But they're souls, ghosts, invisible monsters, and they're my demons. I should never have to think they were somehow alive creatures - humans - before they ended up here, in front of me with the only purpose of haunting me until my last day on this earth. 

...

I swore I just heard someone call my name. It's faint, but present. And yet, the demon's mouth is not forming any words, even though sometimes I see it form some. As if it were trying to tell me something, but I can't quite hear the words. It's almost like they are too far away from me... out of reach. I cannot see who is talking to me...

"Lone!" an echo.

It's an echo that called my name. A distant voice. Maybe it's the demons'. 

"Lone!" 

No. I recognize this voice. And it doesn't belong to any monster. It's my...

"Mother. I'm fine" I said, finally coming back to my body, my mother standing in front of me.

She looked effrayed. She was stealing a few glances in the direction my eyes were glued on just a few seconds ago. She was shaking me, yelling my name. I wonder where I went for me to not hear her. It's as if she were too far away... like those monsters when their mouths move. Is she becoming one of them? Or am I venturing too close to my demons?

"You don't look fine" she said, worry filling her eyes little by little. "Come sit."

She took my hand in hers and pulled me over to the couch. I sat with her, wondering what that was for. Did she want to talk to me? Does this mean I have to talk about... them? 

"What's wrong, Lone? I've seen you act surprised a few times over the past few years. But lately, it's gotten worse. You're scared of the dark, and you've never been scared of it. Sometimes, you suddenly become so pale I think you might faint. And often, I also see you staring at a corner of the room you're in, fear in your eyes. It's like you're paralyzed. What is going on, my precious child?"

She was begging me to explain why I was acting the way I was. I wanted to tell her that if she was seeing the same things as me, she'd understand why the only thing keeping me sane was the light. But I owed her more. So I opened my mouth, and pronounced the words that would certainly send me to my death if I was talking to anyone that wasn't my mother.

"I... I think I'm insane. Mother... I see things I shouldn't be able to see" I whispered, tears creating themselves in my eyes. "I see people. I don't know who they are... But they scare me."

I was hugging myself, as if I were trying to protect myself from anything that might bring me harm. I couldn't face my mother's eyes, so I closed mine. I didn't want to set my eyes upon her realization that her youngest child might actually be insane. But her arms soon joined mine around my body and she leaned her head over mine. And at one point, I could feel the watery feeling of her tears falling on my head, wetting my hair. My eyes shot open. She was crying...

"It's gonna be okay, Lone. Believe me, okay? Everything's gonna be fine, my sweet girl" she reassured me, and I could feel the honesty of a mother. 

When, finally, she took my face in hers, pulling me away from our embrace, she stared right into my eyes, claiming my attention. 

"You will listen to me, Lone. I want you to write your feelings on paper. I want you to spill them out. And if it requires any more effort for you to understand what you're going through, then explode. Explode, if it's what it takes for you to free yourself. And then, you are going to burn the letter, sending it to the heavens. When they will hear you, your demands, your silent begging, they will free you, my daughter. Once it has completely disappeared will it reach them. Then, you shall be free..."

She let out the last words in a whisper so low that I thought she didn't say them. She let go of my face and got up. She took my hand in hers.

"Do you want me to fetch you a paper and a pen?"

"Yes, mother, I beg of you. I don't want to be scared anymore" I begged as I was looking into her eyes.

"I promise, you won't be scared anymore" she breathed out.

She slowly let go of my hand and walked out of the room, leaving me utterly alone.

I wished she wouldn't have. I wanted to get rid of them, but now... I could feel their hate from behind me. I didn't want to turn around towards them. I didn't want to face my fears once more, because they felt multiplied by what I had just accepted to do. But it offered one satisfaction ; it would get rid of them.

When my mother came back, she had brought ink, a pen and a few sheets of paper. She then left me alone in the setting sun. I wrote and then I crushed it between my hands. It wasn't good enough. It wasn't my feelings. I was writing nonsense... because I wanted to be freed as soon as possible. But I was not taking my time and I knew that if I dared approach the fireplace with any of those letters I just wrote, I would be instantly declined by the heavens before my supposed feelings reached them. So I spent hours before paper, with words scrambling in my head, the pen in between my fingers, having to refill the ink a few times here and there. The closer I was to my freedom, the closer the demons were. I could feel their presence still. How enormous they seemed in such a small room. And I couldn't concentrate. With the pressure they were placing upon my shoulders, I felt their desire to torture me for the sentences I had already written. 

It was three hours later, when I took a loud, long, exhausted breath, did I have the courage to chase the demons away. If even for a few minutes could they leave me alone with my mind, I would be able to explode. So I did. For five minutes straight, without interruption, I wrote until my fingers were too tired to press the pen against the paper. Until my whole body was worned out. Once I was done, I stood up, leaving the pen in the small jar of ink and edged near the fireplace. I took a match, lit it and threw it. I looked at the folded letter I had just written and finally, before they could reach me, I let it fall from my hands. I stayed until it had become ash. 

And when I quit the room, the sun had completely set. I have never felt that safe walking in the halls of my parents' house in the complete dark of the night.

Chapter Text

6 years later

I would have chosen a forever freedom over a transient one. Shortly after that first night when my mother told me to write my feelings - my terror and my fear - down on paper, the demons came back. I didn't tell mother, but I kept her words close, and I continued writing my thoughts and throwing them in the fire. I would wait until the paper was only ash and their presence would disappear. I did that at least 50 times over the last six years. Writing and throwing had become a monthly habit. 

I hadn't told my father or my sister. It was a secret only my mother and I shared. My father would call me crazy and I would be his greatest disappointment. He and mother didn't succeed in procreating a boy, an heir to our family, so his line would end with me and my older sister. Still, he loved us very much, but I doubt he would accept hearing his last daughter was a crazy kind of monster. His monster, his failure. My sister, in her case, couldn't bother less. She had always kept her eyes on her own self all her life, without giving a care in the world to anything that didn't concern her. At least, the ring on her left hand would get rid of my bully. I couldn't wait to attend that wedding ; I would be clapping to her depart. I still pity that man that fell in love with such a person. 

I was writing those words down, because as much as these monsters were my demons, they were not my only ones. I was wishing for the wedding day to come faster and I was hoping I would find myself someone to love as well so I could get as far away as I could from a potential traitor. A person of my own blood. But I couldn't push away the only person to ever believe in my sanity : my mother. I put the pen back in the jar of ink and took the paper in my hands and read through the lines one, two and three times, until I was sure the entirety of my thoughts reflected the exact way I was feeling. I could feel their presence behind me. Even if the moonlight had never been this strong, it still left the other part of my room in the darkness. So I stood up from my chair and folded the letter. I took the lantern standing on my desk, its light glowing through the little windows and opened my door to even more darkness. I fought my fears and dived into the dark of the hallways. I tried my best to ignore their moving mouths and their eyes that could pop out of their skull at any moment. I arrived in the living room less than a minute later. I stood there, near the doors, the lantern up close to my face. I had to do this. I put the lantern down on the table and approached the fireplace. I was cold, on my naked feet, my nightgown the only piece of clothing convering my frail body. I took a match between my fingers, lighting the red end of it and brought it close to my face, the red and orange mysterious light as mesmerising as always. And then, I threw it amonst the woodlogs, the fire growing as the seconds passed, warming my cold limbs.

I lowered my eyes to the folded letter and then kneeled in front of the fire. I slowly brought it to the glowing red and one corner of the slightly yellow coloured paper caught the fire. Between my fingers, I watched it consume my thoughts and when, finally, I was ready to let them go, a hand suddenly grabbed my wrist. I felt my heart pounding against my chest, warning me that it was scared. I turned my head toward the presence. Its eyes were as bloodshot as always, its mouth was moving, but I couldn't hear anything out of it, except a faint whisper. I couldn't distinguish any words. I struggled against its hold on my wrist. I took my attention back to the paper, whose fire was dangerously approaching my fingers. I didn't want to let it fall, so I was fighting, but it was unnecessary, it was too strong. But even through the fear in my eyes and my trembling body, my senses were not dull. I recognised the fact that it was touching me. They had never done such a thing before. They had never even set foot away from their corner in the dark. But now that it was in the light, I could see its details. And I could guess one thing ; it was certainly dead. 

Before I knew it, the fire was hitting my thumb and I had no choice but to let the paper fall on the ground... on the carpet. I tried to extinguish the fire with my feet or my left hand, but the demon pushed me away, my head hitting the table hard enough so that the lantern I had brought to the living room fell on the floor, immediately lighting the carpet in fire and then the couch. My head was spinning, everything was blurred. I tried standing up, but my feet could barely hold me. I could see the fire spreading. And then a voice.

"Lady Lone! Lady Lone, we have to go!", the servant screamed.

It was Min-Ren, my servant ; the woman who always took care of me. 

"The fire...", was the only thing that left my mouth.

"I know... I know, Lady Lone! But we have to leave the manor, or else we will burn with it!" 

She drapped a cloak on my shoulders, turning my face away from the disaster. We walked out of the room and before we disappeared in the hallway, I looked one last time and saw the demon with my letter in its hands. It had not burn... not completely. 

Min-Ren kept her arms around me, leading me out of the manor. But I soon realised what I had done.

"Min-Ren! Wait, we have to go back. My mother, my father... Si-Yook, too. We have to go get them!", I begged her, pulling on her hand, trying to turn around.

But she kept dragging me the opposite way.

"It's too late, Lady Lone", she said. 

I suddenly stopped struggling and brought my eyes to her face, watching her reaction. Sadness drowned her expression. Grief and sorrow.

"It's too late for them, Lady Lone. They're already dead."

"No! It's impossible. The fire hasn't caught up to them yet!"

"It wasn't the fire that killed them. They were murdered."

Far behind us, standing amongst the flames, I could see them... the demons. They were smiling wickedly, their eyes were glowing red. Min-Ren was trying to pull me toward the exit.

"Come on, Lady Lone! We are almost out", she screamed, coughing.

The fire was spreading and so was the smoke. If we didn't get out soon, we would die in here. So I gave strength to my legs, and I tried my best to pull us toward the doors. She was loosing strength, too, but I couldn't let her down. I couldn't let us down.

"Come on - *cough*, Min-Ren, *cough*, we have to get out!" 

"Go on ahead, Lady Lone, *cough*, you can get out safely!" 

"No! I'm not leaving you here!"

I looked around, trying to see if there were any servants around that were getting out as well, but it looked like the manor was empty.

"What happened to the other servants?", I finished my sentence, coughing, the sound escaping my throat a dangerous alarm.

"I don't know! *cough*. It was weird... It's as if they were pulled by something. They disappeared in the dark and then died screaming in pain.", she let out another cough, the terror in her expression sending shivers down my nape, on my arms, through my entire body. 

Once we arrived in front of the closed doors, I slowly put Min-Ren down on the floor and pulled on the handles as hard as I could, coughing my lungs out, the smoke becoming more dense as the fire spread through the house. Debris were falling, the protraits were breaking, the lamps were shattering. A minute later, when the doors finally opened under my pulling, the cold draft of the night hitting my skin, I took a sharp breath, I was relieved I was alive. I looked back at Min-Ren, laying on the ground, looking outside with a relieved expression and a happy smile. 

"We need to get out fast", I told her. "Or else, the house will scrumble on us."

I tried to get to her, but she was pulled back by something. She looked up to me in terror, the relief entirely gone. 

"Min-Ren?", I asked and I tried to grab her hands as fast as I could, but she flew back into the darkness, her screams hitting my ears with such power.

The next second, the only thing I knew was that I was thrown out of the house by another kind of force. It felt like the air had arms. Then, my body hit the ground, a feeling of nausea appearing in my stomach. My breath was cut short. Then, a few seconds later, when my senses were returned to me, I sat up. Meters in front of me, the doors closed, pushing the smoke to my face. I had to shield my eyes from the ash and the debris leaving the house. When I pulled my arms away from my face, a demon was standing in front of me. It was the same one who held my wrist earlier on. My fear turned into anger.

"Why did you do this?!", I screamed.

"You cannot get rid of us, Lady Lone", it spoke.

"Leave me alone!"

"We did all this for you. Your sister was mean to you, your father was your ennemy and your mother took you away from us! It was written in the letters!"

"No!", I screamed, tears falling down my cheeks."Why did you have to kill all of them?!"

"We could not. We had to leave one alive so she could get you out."

"Then why kill her?! She helped save me, didn't she?"

"Yes, but you wouldn't be accused of murder if she was still here, wouldn't you? She would have defended you until her very last breath"

"What?", I asked in confusion.

It looked down to my hands. And I followed its gaze. My eyes widened when I saw the knife I was holding and the blood that was drenching my clothes.

"This is revenge, Lady Lone. For casting us aside for the last 6 years. Now, you only have to hope someone will believe you and will save you."

I looked at it with so much hate and anger. I wouldn't give them the chance to torment me again. 

"I hope I die before someone stops the executor from offering me my death on a silver platter"

It gave me a sly smile before disappearing. Dawn had broke.

Chapter Text

I was thrown to the ground, shackles joining my hands behind my back, the man behind me pulling on the chains the only thing keeping me from landing face first into the brownish ground. It had rained and the mud had splashed my clothes ; the dress that had been soiled by the smoke coming from the fire. The dress that had made me the killer of the second most important family in all Kouka Kingdom, drenched in blood. But I didn't care anymore, I was just waiting for Death to come claim me. 

"Lady Lone, daughter of Lady Jie-Roon and Lord Han-Rae, you are accused of murdering Lady Jie-Roon, Lord Han-Rae and Lady Si-Yook who was to be married in less than two full moons. You are also accused of murdering the entirety of the staff at the Hakkon House. Your punishment for such a crime has been decided. You are to be hanged before noon today."

I could not care less for whoever was speaking. I would gladly put the noose around my neck myself so I could save them their words so they could skip to another criminal. I am to be hanged, and I have never been that excited for such a doomed future. I just wanted to be over with it, so I could go on with my life in the afterlife, so I could explain myself to my mother.

"Any last words, Lady Lone?" he asked me.

But with the shadow in my eyes, my apparent refusal to answer him was showed to him, to them all, in the next few seconds filled with utter silence. I raised my head up to him, daring him to end my life himself. But my head suddenly turned to the scream of a man in deep grief.

"Burn her! Burn the murderer!" it was my sister's fiance. 

He was trying to climb over the line of soldiers. He wanted to get his revenge. I understood him. I understood him as I watched the demon stare at me from afar, his wicked smile the only monstrosity on his face from where he stood. In this moment, I wished everyone could see him, see what caused it all. I looked back to my sister's fiance, whose screams didn't stop. People joined him, pushed against the barrier that kept them from harassing me. I couldn't believe I was protected and defended even in a moment like this. I let a small laugh escape my lips. So he stopped screaming. They all did. They looked at me with so much hate and disgust, some even had fear haunting their eyes. But none shadowed mine. With a smile on my face, the executioner looked down at me.

"Why don't you let them kill me here and now?!" I screamed to him, everyone listening to me. "And let this be over quicker!"

He was disgusted by my reaction. He was outraged by the fact that I was giving him an order, me, Lady Lone, a murderer, a criminal. He looked to his soldiers as if he was about to order them to let them pass, to let them destroy me themselves, but I didn't let my smile fade. Until time stopped... or at least, it looked like it.

"Enough!" A voice shouted. One I recognized. But I couldn't quite place it.

Accompanied by two men, Soo-Won made his way to us. What was my childhood friend doing here? And why was he guarded like Princess Yona of King Il would be? 

"What is happening here?!" 

The executioner got down on one knee, and so did everybody else. I frowned, confused. Keeping his head down, the executioner answered to Soo-Won.

"Lord Soo-Won... This girl has killed her entire family last night, including the entire staff at the Hakkon House. She is to be hanged before noon today, it was decided."

"Nonsense!" he yelled, his eyes moving to mine. My confusion was obvious to him, but he nodded to me, asking me, through his eyes, if I was fine. I didn't dare answer. "Free her from these shackles at once!"

"But, Sir...! We found her kneeling in front of the Hakkon House, drenched in blood, a knife in her hands! She killed her family and burned them down with her home!"

Soo-Won turned his attention to the executioner, his anger nothing I have seen before coming from my sweet innocent friend. "Do you dare disobey your soon-to-be king's orders, Loon-Hi?"

SOON-TO-BE KING?! What the hell happened here? What happened to King Il and Princess Yona? Was Hak still at the castle? What happened? And why didn't such news reach us at Hakkon House?! 

The executioner didn't dare answer him.

"I know this woman and she dit not kill her family, no matter what you say!"

The executioner rapidly looked up to Soo-Won, fear filling his eyes, slowly realizing that the monster that I was would not be punished for her monstruous sins. 

"Sir! Then, how do you explain the knife and the blood?"

"She picked up the blade in shock when she found the dead bodies of her parents. Then, trying to see if they were still alive, her hands pressing on their wounds, trying to save them ; the blood got on her hands. She then wiped it on her dress. So, as I said previously, I personnaly know Lady Lone, and she never would have killed her family!"

I didn't want to be saved, but here he was, offering me my second chance at life. But, alive, walking the same earth of the people who think I have no business breathing, I will be hated and despised by everyone until my very last breath. I didn't want to know why Soo-Won decided to slide with the truth, the truth that I hadn't even spoken, but if he claimed to know me, no... he did not.

"Free her!" he ordered, and so the soldiers kneeling got up and ran to me, taking the shackles off. 

They fell to the ground and I stood up, my legs wobbling under me. I turned my head, my attention landing on the same demon that kept following me. His smile as he was waving the letter in front of him will haunt me forever. It will remind me that I will never again be freed from them, so even if they freed me from these shackles, I would still not be freed. Soo-Won then approached me as he was taking his cloak off his shoulders.

"Lord Soo-Won!" it came from General Joo-Doh, whom was guarding my friend since they've arrived.

"It's okay, General Joo-Doh. You have nothing to fear. She won't do anything to me."

He threw his cloak over my shoulders and put his arm around me, claiming my protection. But not everyone was agreeing with his decision... the soon-to-be king's decision.

"She killed my fiancee! How dare you not punish her for her sins?!" it was my sister's fiance. I would never forgive myself for the truth I was hiding from him. I would never forgive myself for not offering him closure.

I turned toward him, making Soo-Won stop in his tracks. It reminded me when Min-Ren was pushing me toward the exit, trying to save my life. I would have loved to fight for hers like she fought for mine. Sadness found its way to my face and the only words that could get out of my mouth were : "I'm sorry".

Even through the silence, my whisper was loud enough so that he heard.

"Come", Soo-Won whispered into my ear, pulling me forward. So I followed him and behind me, anger unleashed itself. The screams were louder than before, their violence now accompanied by their unfilled desire of revenge. But I couldn't do anything for that. The soldiers would follow their King's orders. They would not let them harm me...

A few hours ago

In the waking sun, the fire still burned. The house was not my home anymore. It no longer looked like it. Everything was falling apart and I didn't know how I was supposed to look strong. Was I really supposed to look like the murderer I apparently was before them all? Was I suppposed to prove to them that I deserved whatever punishment I was to be given and that I was proud of it? How was I supposed to accept this pain if, as my demon said, a certain someone saved me from my death? But I didn't want to be saved. I didn't want to face my monsters again. I didn't want to live with them until my very last breath. How can I escape it in any other way than to die? Is there even another way?... 

Even as voices reached me from where I kneeled, an hour or two later, maybe even three, I did not dare move a muscle. The shock and fatigue that had hit me earlier did not leave me. And so, I heard them stop in their tracks and point their arrows at me.

"Lady! Lady, put your hands in the air and turn around slowly!", they ordered me.

"How about you shoot me here and now, soldiers? I am to die today anyway, whatever way you use", I said.

"Lady, we will not repeat ourselves. Lift your hands and turn around!"

And so I did. I lifted my hands in the air and slowly got up to my feet, turning toward the people behind me. Their arrows pointed at me didn't scare me. 

"Drop the knife!"

And so I did. They approached me and searched me for any other potential weapon.

"We will now guide you to Hiryuu Castle, where your punishment awaits."

And so they guided me toward the castle and threw me in a cell. I lay there, refusing to move. My body ached and did nothing but ache. Once they closed the door, I spoke.

"My name is Lady Lone, daughter of Lady Jie-Roon and Lord Han-Rae and I plead guilty to murdering my family and the staff of Hakkon House. I ensured their deaths by burning my home to the ground."

The guards outside my cell had stopped to listen to my words. From the corner of my eyes, I could see their movements... they looked at each other, confused by the "so-called" truth I was speaking. Then, they left... And I cried without anyone noticing. 

Chapter Text

The rage had not stopped. Being in the midst of so much action in a short period of time had never been something I was used to. I had a peaceful childhood, even with a blade between my hands. Growing up, even though the demons were my daily life, I enjoyed getting older as the years passed. We were happy, my mother, my father, my sister and I. There was a time when my sister and I were bestfriend, but something in her clicked one day and she turned her back to me. She slowly started to take up more space in our family until she was the only one my parents looked at. I had lost my family, our bond. So I had no other choice but to turn to my friends. They were the only ones who never abandonned me or pushed me away. I learned how to fight, how to defend myself, even though King Il had banned war. And so weapons were almost as forbidden as the term. Hak and Soo-Won still carried them around, and so I followed. My father agreed and sometimes trained me here and there when my sister decided to manage herself. He had fought in the war, too... alongside Soo-Won's late father. Soo-Won... Soo-Won that was dragging me around the castle, his arm still around my shoulders as he was giving orders.

"Prepare a room for my friend here please, Ko-Tae! Bring fresh new clothes please, San! Would you ming helping Lady Lone wash herself please, Nami" he ordered around, nodding to the servant in question who approached me without hesitation.

Nami took the cloak off my shoulders and started to lead me away from everyone. I stopped in my tracks, confused.

"Wait, Soo-Won!" I shouted and he turned around with an innocent smile. I was then mute in front of his change of expression.

"Yes?", he asked.

"What happened here? Nothing got to us... to Hakkon House. Where are Princess Yona and Hak? What happened to King Il?" I breathed out, my head spinning.

My friend approached me slowly and put a hand on my shoulder. "You should take it slow, my friend. You need to relax, you seem exhausted."

He gave me a smile and walked away as Nami pushed me toward what was probably the bathing room. I obviously needed a shower and a change of clothes.

Later That Day

After bathing in the hot water and brushing the soap everywhere on my body and shampooing my hair with so much force I was completely hopeless after that, Nami helped me dress into a new gown, into a new nightgown and I watched as the other dress, my blood drenched nightgown was taken away to be burned to ash. I was glad. I had no interest in keeping a nightmare filled piece of clothing. Nami then accompanied me to my room, but I didn't see her leave as my eyes closed instantly and my mind drift off to sleep. I had not slept at all last night because of the accident, so I was as sleep deprived as I could be. I slept through the day and when I woke up, I was still heavily tired. Even though my eyes stayed close for long, my mind could not relax, not when the nightmares were all that I remembered. Nami kept me company, brought me my first meal, took me on a walk, listened as I talked about how happy I was about my life before all this. She didn't dare ask me about anything. But I asked her about her life, if it was hard for her to live as a Castle's servant. She seemed completely honest and genuine with me. She showed no fear. And eventually, I couldn't stop myself from being curious.

"Why aren't you scared of me, of what I did, Nami?"

She kept looking in front of us or at her feet. She would barely look at me.

"Because the young Lord is persuaded you did not commit the crime you supposedly did."

"But what of your own thoughts, your own opinion?"

"Answer me honestly, then, Lady Lone. Did you commit the crime you supposedly commited?"

"No, I did not."

I spoke truth as Soo-Won, but Nami had still no way to believe me, or to prove our words. 

"Even though you said the contrary in the cell? Word travelled fast. Everyone knew..."

"Then, I knew I was about to die... and I wanted to make it quick. Now... I don't even know."

"You do"

I looked at her, eyebrows furrowed. She turned to look at me and stopped in her tracks, taking my hands in hers.

"Deep in your heart, Lady Lone, you wanted to survive. That's why you didn't contradict Lord Soo-Won when he interrupted the moment before your death", she said, then started walking again, her eyes flying away from mine.

I followed after her. Silence filled the space between us, but then, I spoke more words. Words I hadn't told Soo-Won... probably because I didn't have time. I haven't seen him since this morning, when he left me in Nami's care.

"I don't even know how the blood splashed my nightgown and the knife ended in my hand... I don't even... I didn't even go in my parents' or sister's rooms. The servant tending to me since I was young was the one who saved me. She led me outside the mansion, but she couldn't make it out on time... As all the other servants..."

I didn't mention the flying or the presence of my demons. 

"You're one lucky girl, Lady Lone. You should try to accept it."

I shaked my head. That wasn't true. "I am a cursed child, Nami. There's no luck in my blood, on my skin, in my bones. I... I am cursed."

She didn't dare repeat her words, probably because she knew that I wasn't telling the whole truth of my story. She didn't push and led me back to my room, where I spent the rest of the day. When night fell upon Kouka, I didn't have to pray to the Heavens above to let me sleep. But then again, the only thing haunting my sleep was brutal nightmares... ones that I felt were going to follow me for a long while.

The Next Day

I had bathed, eaten breakfast and I had not seen Soo-Won yet after yesterday. Nami was keeping me company and she didn't seem to bother. I was brushing my hair, savoring its silken soft texture between my fingers.

"Let me ask you a question, Lady Lone"

She had also become slightly more opened to me. She asked me questions sometimes, making conversation easier. I had shown her my interest in wanting to know how she found life at the castle and in her life in general. My friendly desire to make conversation probably propelled her to enlighten her curiosity.

"Go on, Nami, I'm listening."

"Do you think you'll end up marrying Lord Soo-Won? Now that your parents are dead. Don't you have to find youself a husband?"

I blushed at her remark. But she was right. Now that I was alone, I had to find a husband...

"I have no interest in marrying Lord Soo-Won, Nami. He is one of my childhood friends ; I cannot do this to our friendship. But if it is a last resort, then I won't have a choice."

"What do you plan to do for now, then?"

"I've always wanted a love match, like my sister had...", mentioning my sister immediately brought back the memories of the incident. I tried to chase away my grief, offering her a smile. "But now that I've become the most feared criminal, I have no chance of finding a husband."

"It's not entirely true. The General Hak of the Wind Tribe is the most feared criminal. Added to his title "The Thunder Beast", he killed King Il and kidnapped Princess Yona."

My jaw fell and I frowned. I felt tears stinging my eyes.

"What? Impossible..", was all that left my mouth.

Hak respected King Il... He would never have killed him and kidnapped Princess Yona, whom we all knew loved her more than anything, even when he tried to hide it.

"Oh, sorry, Lady Lone.. You didn't know that..."

"It's okay... I had to learn it one way or another..."

But I had no time to feel the pain of their loss that I heard steps approaching my room. I lifted my head, thinking Soo-Won would appear at the door, but instead, words found their way to my room. "Why would King Il call in a meeting with the Five Tribes?", someone asked. 

"I don't know, Lord Geun-Tae."

Lord Geun-Tae?! The General of the Earth Tribe? What's he doing here?!

"Is he preparing for a war and asking the Tribes for their help?"

His excited shouting faded in the wind as he walked farther away from my room.

"What the hell was that?", I asked.

"Lord Soo-Won has organised a meeting with the Tribes, Lady Lone. I thought you knew."

"No, I did not. I haven't seen Soo-Won since yesterday. When is it supposed to begin?"

"In a few minutes"

"I should go. I want to know what's to be said."

But Nami stopped me in my tracks. 

"You are not to attend this meeting, Lady Lone. You will stay here with me until they have left."

I sighed, sitting back down. I continued brushing my hair and putting on jewelry to see which one suited me better. And then, suddenly...

"I'm thirsty, Nami"

"No problem, then, Lady Lone. Since the servants are all attending to our guests, I will be the one fetching you a cup of tea. Just wait here, I'll be back in a few minutes."

And she disappeared behind the door. I slowly stood up as I heard her leave toward the servants' quarter and waited a few more seconds to make sure she didn't come back to lock me in my room if she caught me, and then I opened the door slowly, making my way out. I walked around, trying to find where the meeting was being held, until I heard multiple male voices. Soo-Won had just entered the room. I stopped in front of the doors, then taking a peek in, recognizing every General, even Elder Mundok... I then leaned my back against the doors, listening to the meeting.

"His Majesty was murdered by someone 6 days ago", Soo-Won began. "We don't know where Princess Yona or General Hak are.

"Lord Soo-Won... Then surely he...", Lord Geun-Tae started, but got cut off by Soo-Won.

"We are currently searching for them. Please leave this matter to us. Contact the castle if you find them. You are not permitted to harm them or mention this to anyone outside."

"But...", Lord Geun-Tae again tried to step in.

"If this matter is made public, then it will cause confusion within the kingdom. It will only instigate conflicts between the tribes, won't it?

"Even if we don't do that, there is already instability within the kingdom. We don't know when the country of Keitai to the North or Xing and Sei to the south will attack us", Lord Joon-Gi of the Water Tribe countered.

They continued their conversation, mentioning the previous actions of the late King Il and the strength they lost in King Il's rein. But what really striked me were the words of the Lord of the Fire Tribe.

"We also... need a new king"

Silence fell amongst the group, until Soo-Won's adviser, whose name I didn't know, spoke up.

"While it is a matter of concern... Princess Yona is currently absent. There is one who has royal blood flowing through them... right here", he said, probably talking about Soo-Won. "Lord Soo-Won alone. Lord Soo-Won is the son of Emperor Il's brother, Lord Yu-Hon. Originally, he would have been the crowned Prince. Even though it's to crown a new king... there shouldn't be a problem."

The Generals slowly agreed to that decision, Fire Tribe first, but Elder Mundok showed some resistance. I wonder if he knew something...

"I'm tired", he said, excusing himself.

But the other tribes didn't want to let him leave without his approval. But Mundok was no longer General, it was Hak... his grandson, who had the title. But none cared, they wanted his approval, or else, they would be suspecting a revolt coming from the Wind Tribe. Soo-Won showed to be only a little deceived by him, but Mundok told him that if he was to marry Princess Yona, he would gladly accept his crowning without hesitation. But he knew that Hak would never leave the Castle without a reason and that because of that, he could not approve his ascension to the throne.

"3 days from now... the coronation ceremony will be held. If I don't get the approval of the Wind Tribe, then we won't go through with it. However, I believe without a doubt that you will attend 3 days from now, Elder Mundok."

But Mundok changed the subject, which surprised me.

"I also heard about the incident at Hakkon House. You saved Lady Lone from being hanged for her crimes. Like Hak, I've always thought of you two as my grandchildren, and I refuse to believe Lady Lone had a part in this. But marrying her would be an alternative."

Soo-Won didn't answer. And I walked away before Mundok could see me and alert everyone. So I followed him to the stables, where he was mounting his horse.

"Elder Mundok...", I called.

He slowly turned around, recognizing my voice.

"Lone...", he called, relief spreading through his face, opening his arms to me. 

I took refuge against his chest, remembering how warm it used to be for us as kids. I have also thought of him as my grandfather and have always cherished him. Tears flowed down my cheeks.

"How are you?", he asked me, pushing me at arms' length, breaking the hug.

"As well as I could be after witnessing my family's death and fleeing Hakkon House as it burned down and almost being hanged for my sins."

"If Soo-Won wouldn't have saved you, I would have given him more reason not to accept his ascension to the throne."

"Do you know what happened to Yona and Hak?", I asked, my bottom lip trembling.

"No. But I am returning to Fuuga this instant and I have a feeling they're waiting for me there", he whispered.

I let out of sigh of relief.

"Make sure they're safe, Elder Mundok, please... I have lost my family... I don't want to lose my friends as well."

He mounted his horse, preparing to leave.

"I'll make sure they're okay, Lone, I promise."

He touched my cheek with his hand, offering me a smile and then he left, galloping toward Fuuga, where I hope Hak and Yona were waiting. Anger soon replaced my sadness and I started searching throughout the entire castle for Soo-Won. I would describe my anger as rage for the grudge I held for not telling me about King Il, Yona and Hak. I passed the Fire Tribe's General, ignoring him completely and bumped into Soo-Won a few hallways after. Disgust and anger gave me the energy to push him against the wall, each opening of his cloack emprisoned in the balls of my hands. His shock as his head hit the wall didn't stop me.

"Why didn't you tell me?! Why would you accuse Hak of such crimes?! He's our friend, Soo-Won! How dare you think he did it!"

He looked down to me, breathing heavily.

"You know..."

"Yes, I know! I learned from Nami that everyone thought he killed King Il and kidnapped Princess Yona! Then you confirmed it at the damn meeting! What is your problem?!"

His eyes shut up to people arriving behind me. I turned around, my hands still gripping his cloak. It was the General and the adviser. Soo-Won lift his hand in the air, stopping them from coming closer.

"It's okay, General Joo-Doh, Adviser Kye-Sook. I can handle this."

"WHY?!", I screamed, turning back to his face, tears burning my eyes.

"I cannot tell you everything, Lone, but that's what happened. You can't deny it, I know what happened. I was there."

I mocked him with a laugh. "Physically perhaps, but mentally, you were nothing but absent. Have we not known the same person since we were young?! We both know Hak and we both know that he would have never done that!"

"Look, Lone, I cannot tell you what you want to hear."

"I want the truth! I want the real criminal! I want Yona and Hak to be freed! Don't you want that, too?!"

I saw pain glimmer in his eyes for one second but then it was gone.

"Hak deserves the death penalty for his crimes and when Yona is retrieved, dead or alive, she shall return to Hyriuu Castle."

"How dare you say those words with a straight face?", I asked, freeing him of my grip.

Nami then arrived, running. She was exhausted, sweat piling down her forehead. 

"I swear to God, Lord Soo-Won. I left for two minutes to fetch her tea. When I came back, she was gone! I'm sorry"

I turned back to watch Soo-Won's expression at what she said. He was serious, but I was disgusted. How dare he betray my trust this way?! He then looked down to me and said, his eyes fixing mine :

"Nami, bring back Lady Lone to her room. And for yourself, Lady Lone, I shall keep you occupied in the next few days. If you want, you will be able to pick up training where you left it."

Memory

"Look, Lone!", I turned around to see what Princess Yona wanted.

She wanted me to look at the snow ball she had succeeded in making then threw it at Hak's face, who was laying on the ground, making what seemed to be an angel. I sustained a laugh, but as Yona exploded, I could not restrain myself anymore and joined her, bending myself in two, a hand on my stomach. Soo-Won then picked up snow and tried to make a ball with it, but failed as the snow fell from his hand to the ground, returning with the rest.

"How did you do it, Yona? Mine can't even stay in my hand!", Soo-Won complained.

But Yona and I were still laughing. Hak propped himself on his elbows.

"You're such children!", he shouted.

I stopped laughing, approaching him, leaning over his face. "Like you're much more older than me, dumbass"

"Even Soo-Won is older than you, so don't try!", he claimed.

"Only a few months more!"

A snow ball landed in Hak's face as he fell to the ground. "Shut up", Yona defended me. "Lone is almost stronger than you, Hak!"

"In her dreams", he teased.

"It's not because I'm a girl and younger than you that I can't be stronger than you!", I said.

"You can't be stronger than the future General of the Wind Tribe", he said, confident as he put his hands behind his head and crossed his legs. I slowly lowered myself to the ground and made a snow ball in my hands. I stood back up and threw it in his face with as much strength as I could. It splashed in his face and I laughed so hard I thought I would never stop. Yona joined me in my laughter. Hak stood up, and I soon realized I had triggered him. I stopped laughing when I saw the snow ball in his hands.

"Guys, there's no need to start a fight!", Soo-Won tried to convince us it wasn't necessary but Hak already threw the snow ball, landing on my back as I was running away.

"Come on, Yona! We need to run away from the big, fat monster!", I screamed as our hands joined.

It didn't take us long before we fell face first into the snow. We turned around, seeing as Hak was approaching us, two snow balls in his hands. We started screaming, making snow balls and throwing them at him, trying to save ourselves. It ended up in a fight. And we all ended up sick, laying in bed for 2 days...

Chapter Text

I had refused to see Soo-Won after the fight we had yesterday. I had ran through time by reinforcing my swordsmanship skills, which I had not been practicing because we all had been occupied with the preparations regarding my sister's wedding. A  small thought toward her fiancee made me stop swinging my blade around as General Joo-Doh was blocking my attacks with his double-edged sword. He had to brake in his movements to avoid hitting me gravely. He deepened his frown, making it almost undistinguishable that he was confused.

"What is wrong with you?" he asked.

"Nothing", I shook my head, taking back my fighting stance.

He also prepared to fight, swinging his sword around him. I smile, running for him, bringing my blade up into the sky as I was jumping off the ground, giving myself momentum, making my body spin until I ended up in front of Joo-Doh again, my simple sword hitting his double-edged one. Our blades didn't slide against each other as we both put our entire strength into our weapon, trying to break the other's stance and defense.

"You look concerned, Lady Lone", he then told me. 

I squinted at him, not losing my concentration on our swords.

"I am not!", I countered, sliding my blade against his as I pushed myself away from the harm the sharpness of the blade could bring me.

Anger drove me to hit him over and over, but it didn't destabilize him enough to not be able to defend himself. From up, and down. From the right, and the left. In diagonal from every side. But it didn't stop him from dodging my moves with both sides of his weapon. But he was backing off.

"This is not your usual strategy, Lady Lone. You're angry"

"And you are not angry enough!", I screamed, hitting him from above. 

He defended himself with the steal-made stick between the two blades of his sword, his hands on either side of it, far away enough from my sword. If he wouldn't have had his weapon, I would have split his head in two equal pieces. But he didn't seem scared, no hint of fear glinting in his eyes. I didn't loosen my grip on the hilt even so. 

"You are soft today, General Joo-Doh."

"Am I?", he asked me, one of his brows lifting, as if he were surprised. 

"I've known you more agressive before... as my teacher"

"I thought I would go easy on you today, since you have not been practicing for a while."

My expression became more serious as I lifted the sword up and hit him again in less than a second. He seemed startled, replacing his stance so he didn't fall to the ground under my hit.

"What is it, General Joo-Doh? Am I too fast for you?", I asked, a cocky grin lifting the corners of my lips.

"No", he said, lifting his head up to look at me with a different sort of smile. "Just proud. I kind of missed that double hits of yours. I still can't believe you are almost as strong as The Thunder Beast."

"Why? Because I'm a woman?" 

"No. Because even I fear you sometimes. You are another kind of crazy."

I escaped a small laugh at that, but I didn't let it fool me. I didn't lose my concentration as he tried to take this opportunity to push against my sword. Then, using one of my favorite strategies, I acted as if he really pushed me away, stumbling over my feet. As he was about to end the fight, I strengthened my stance and my grip on my sword, swinging it around, spinning my body, hitting and defending as fast as I could. General Joo-Doh was destabilized enough that he defended himself last second, the sharp blade of my sword only a few centimeters away from hitting him. I then lowered the sword, hitting near his hand on one side, near enough that he took it off, but he was not fast enough to put it back as I used this opportunity to disharm him, taking his loosened grip on his sword into my advantage. Fast, smooth and full of power, my next hit sent his sword flying into the air. And before it could hit the ground, I brought my blade near his throat. A few feet away behind me, the sword hit the ground, one of the blades piercing the dirt.

"Game over, General Joo-Doh. I win... again."

"Unbelievable... I train every day to protect the King, but you haven't even practice in whoever knows how many weeks and you still beat me."

I lowered my sword, bringing it to my side. I started walking away and he followed after me.

"As I said earlier, you are another kind of crazy. It should be your name, like General Hak has one. Remind me why you don't have one again?", he pulled his double-edged sword out of the ground.

"Because I am a woman, General Joo-Doh. And because I am not recognized as a young General and that I have no one else to see my strength other than you, General Hak, Lord Soo-Won and my late father, the only ones who ever bothered to look at my potential on a battlefield", I said, my amusement from earlier leaving place to disppointment and sadness. 

"Then, I guess it's to your advantage then. I will pity everyone who underestimate you, Lady Lone. As long as your strength is hidden, you will defeat everyone in your path... whoever you may have to kill to defend yourself."

He arrived beside me and I stopped in my tracks, looking up at him, smiling.

"Thank you, General Joo-Doh."

"No need to thank me, Lady Lone. I'm only telling the truth."

"Anyway, aren't you supposed to guard your soon-to-be King? Why agree to train with me?", I asked out of utter curiosity. 

"Because training would have been way too boring for you otherwise, Lady Lone. I have once been your teacher and I was one of the only ones with whom sparring hadn't finished in less than 10 seconds. You even beat your own father ; I still remember, after all these years, the proud smile on his lips when he realized how strong you were. And to this day, General Hak has been the only one who has beaten you."

"Lord Soo-Won didn't bother getting rid of you for a few hours, then?"

"No. His security is high enough. As long as he doesn't step out of the Castle's perimeter, he'll be fine."

"I see Lady Lone has once again beaten you, General Joo-Doh", someone said, making my head shot up toward Soo-Won.

I still hadn't forgave him after yesterday. The friend at my side straightened, taking back his seriousness.

"Maybe I should make her the General of the Sky Tribe instead of you, General Joo-Doh", he joked. 

I lifted an eyebrow, and Joo-Doh only looked at me in confusion.

"No offense, Lord Soo-Won, but you can't make a Lady your servant", I said, walking toward him.

"At least, you would be less tense than General Joo-Doh and more friendly", Soo-Won added. "Talking about that, why are your expressions so different when you're with Lady Lone than with me, General Joo-Doh?"

"Obviously because I'm funnier to be with than you, Lord Soo-Won", I said, passing beside him. 

He followed after me, sliding to my side. General Joo-Doh caught up to us, staying a few feet away behind us.

"Are you still angry at me?", he asked.

I looked up at him. "What is your first guess, Lord Soo-Won?"

But he didn't have time to answer, because a servant stopped us dead in our tracks, almost bumping into us in the mean time. 

"What's wrong, Bae-Roon?", Soo-Won asked, concern crippling over his face at the nervous expression and the heavy breathing of the servant.

"The second son of the General of the Fire Tribe, Master Kan Tae-Jun has some news for you, Your Majesty."

"Lead the way, please."

And so he led us to where he was waiting. My hand was resting on my sword placed in my sheath. 

"Oh my, I'm sorry to have kept you waiting, Lord Tae-Jun! What brought you here today?"

I had stilled when I realized the aura surrounding the second son of the Fire Tribe. Soo-Won showed only a little surprise, but his joyous welcome rapidly switched to worried seriousness. He kept approaching the young Lord.

"I apologize... for coming two days before your important coronation ceremony... I came because... there was something I wanted to give you at all costs", he announced, handing him a well folded handkerchief.

As he unfolded it, the bright red hair laying upon the white soft fabric was enough to block the air from finding a way to my lungs. Tears soon appeared at the corner of my eyes.

"Princess Yona... has died."

As the facts he was speaking became more and more of a reality, shaking my head from one side to the other over and over, refusing to believe my bestfriend had died.

"On the border of the Fire and Wind... in the northern mountains... we pursued General Hak and Princess Yona... We almost had them, but...the two of them fell to the bottom of the valley."

"What?!", General Joo-Doh exclaimed.

I brought my hand to my sword and unsheathed it. The blind rage refused to dissipate as I was only a few seconds away from separating his head from his body.

"How dare you...?", I asked him, my breathing an unsteady rhythm. "You killed my bestfriends..."

I lunged for him, my sword a few centimeters away from his neck, but General Joo-Doh stopped me in time as his sword only grazed Lord Tae-Jun's skin. I took my sword away, looking the General with grief in my eyes, but when I looked back at the young Lord, there was nothing but anger haunting my heart.

"You will never be forgiven. You killed my bestfriends... You shall never be forgiven...", I said, a cold rage stealing my soul. 

"That's right... I killed them...", the grief and regret marking his expression didn't stop me from wanting to kill him... like he killed Yona and Hak. "Please pass your judgement on me..."

I looked back at Soo-Won, but he didn't answer.

"Lord Soo-Won?", General Joo-Doh called.

"Rest at the Castle for today. I want you to attend the coronation ceremony in two days."

I looked at Soo-Won with disbelief in my eyes, in every trait of my face, but I couldn't say anything. I ran away before I could break down. 

"NO! Punish me! Please!!", Lord Tae-Jun screamed. 

General Joo-Doh's protest and the call for Soo-Won's attention were the last things I heard before I was out of ear reach. I locked myself in my room, and I cried all night. I refused to eat dinner and when I succumbed to sleep, I surprisingly didn't have a nigthmare. I dreamed of flowers... flowers in a pot. Someone was putting them on a table for decoration and then I woke up. Sitting up, sweat bedding my forehead, my breathing fast and uneven, I realized it was still night. I stood up and approached the doors, that I slid opened to let some fresh air come in the room. I sat down on the floor, looking up at the sky, the moonlight as bright as it could be. Suddenly, in the corner of my eyes, I saw something that wasn't there before. I turned my head to my nightstand only to notice the flowers.

"I wonder who put them there", I wondered. 

"I did", I turned toward Soo-Won in a jump, but I didn't reproach him anything. He was sitting, his back against the wall, looking at me.

"How long have you been in my room?", I asked.

"A few hours..."

"Won't it alert the guards if you suddenly disappear two days before your coronation ceremony? I personnaly don't want to be accused of anything, Soo-Won, so I suggest you leave now."

"Here is the only place I can hide."

"And I do not approve of it", I simply said, looking up to the moon again.

"You know, I, too, am sad of Yona's and Hak's death."

"Don't mention it. I don't want to hear about it."

"You don't believe me...", well, at least he realized that.

"Let's put it simply, no. You prove it by chasing them as if they were monsters. I wish I could hear their side of the story."

"What do you mean?"

"It is none of your business. You can go, now."

"And if I refuse?"

I looked at him, frowning.

"What the hell is wrong with you?", I asked.

"I don't know what you're talking about."

"Oh! You know perfectly what I'm talking about. What changed you? I miss my old friend... You're the only one left..."

He looked away, not daring to answer. 

"Why didn't you punish him?"

"Huh?"

"Lord Kan Tae-Jun? Why didn't you punish him?", I repeated.

"Because he deserves a second chance."

"And Hak and Yona didn't?"

"It's not like that... You don't understand."

"Get out", I ordered him, that cold rage coming back.

"Wait, Lone, let me explain myself."

"You had all the time to explain yourself, but you didn't. And now it's too late, so get out."

"Lone..."

"Get out! I don't want to see you!"

He got up reluctantly and passed beside me to get out, disappearing at a corner. I stayed there for a little while, wondering if they could see me from above. I let the tears slide free on my cheeks, unable to keep the pain in, as if it were too strong. 

"I can't... I can't deal with this... Hak... Yona... Why did you have to go, too?"

The coronation ceremony was held two days later. Elder Mundok attended the ceremony with the new General of the Wind Tribe, younger than Hak. All emotions had been robbed from me. I had suffered losses that I never thought I would go through some day. I didn't know what to believe anymore. I couldn't differentiate the truths from the lies. What was I even doing on this Earth? What was my purpose...?

I should have stood up that day and pled guilty until the rope had strangled the life out of me. I should have been right. But still, far into a corner, I could see them... the demons, their hunger... But I offered them no fear as I turned my head toward the crown sitting atop his head. And I listened, as he gave his speech. How did it end up like this, I wonder? We were so happy, as children... Why couldn't we have stayed children? I would have pressed 'pass' a million times if I knew what I was getting into when I wished I would grow up faster. I now wish to go back in time, where my parents are and where my sister is, where Yona and Hak are and where the real Soo-Won is... Where everyone is...

Why can't I just go back?...

Chapter Text

After the coronation ceremony in which Soo-Won was declared the new King of Kouka, it didn't take long for everyone to leave. Sure, there was a feast, but no matter who's fault it was, I could not attend it. Guards took me back to my room and kept me locked in it for the rest of the day. The only person that visited me in the next few hours was Nami, the servant that had been tending to me since I was saved from being hanged. Though the guards at my door wore heavy armor and dangerous weapons, I didn't know if it was for my safety or for the safety of the people attending the party. So it was unfortunately impossible for me to talk to Elder Mundok. I wanted to ask him if he had seen Yona and Hak, but it's not like it mattered anymore. Reminding myself of their deaths was the only way to stay sane while I was locked in my room. I didn't need to know if they were safe since they were probably laying at the bottom of the cliff, bloody and dead... I shook my head, chasing away these thoughts. When I opened my watery eyes, my head was hurting. My gaze followed the dark presence lingering in the darkest corner of my room. It was there, staring at me with the maniac smile it always knew how to wear. 

"What do you want from me, now?", I asked of it. "You don't bother me for a week, you stay as far away from me as you possibly can, but it's only now that you decide to approach me?"

I kept my attention wholly toward it, waiting for an answer. But it didn't give me one. Its lips suddenly started moving, forming words, but like I couldn't before ; nothing, no sound, no words reached my ears. I squeezed my eyes shut, reopening them to see if it had disappeared. But it was still there, his lips continued moving. I tried to remember how I heard it speaking the night my family died and my home burned to the ground, but I couldn't recall any effort that I could have done to be able to hear it... and its hideous words. I had concentrated millions of times before and it had never worked. So I didn't bother. But I wanted to hear what it had to say. I needed to. While fire was devouring my house, the demon foreshadowed into my future. It knew that I would be saved, however it would happened. It would not just offer my death only to have no one else to torment. Their revenge was not to kill me after my entire family, it was to give me the hope that I would join them but then, save me afterward, only to torment me for the rest of my life. And since I cannot push them away anymore, I might as well get closer to them.

I then heard a cough coming from behind me. I jumped, put a hand on my mouth to muffle the sound of my screaming as I turned around to see who the hell was in my room. But blending in the dark, there was a small individual. I squinted to try to see who it was, but it didn't help me. 

"Who are you?", I asked, my breath uneven.

The small person took his time to sit in a cross-legged position on the floor, and came forward only a little bit. The face I then saw seemed unreal. It looked so much like mine, but the traits that were similar to mine sat on a little boy's face. I squinted even more, trying to see if I would remember where I once saw this face before, if I even saw it some time in my life. 

"Who are you?", I repeated, a little less tense.

It smiled at me. 

"He's scaring you, isn't he?", he asked, pointing toward the demon standing in the corner.

His words reminded me of the other's presence and I turned my head toward it in a sudden movement. It hadn't move.

"Don't worry, it cannot come any closer."

"How do you know that? It did once", I said, as if he would know what that demon did, what they all did. "You should know. Aren't you one of them?"

"Me? Yes and no", he simply said.

"What does that even mean?", I was so confused and my face betrayed me on this fact. The little boy was visibly taking his time explaining it to me. 

"Yes, I'm dead. Yes, I'm a ghost. But no, I do not torment you."

"They all torment me."

"No, they don't. I don't. It must count for something."

"Why wouldn't you?"

"Have you ever seen me with the others?"

I thought, as hard as I could, to remember if I had once seen it amongst all the others. But a face as familiar as his wouldn't go unnoticed.

"No. Who are you? What are you? How are you even here if I never saw you before?"

"Like I said, I'm dead, a ghost, whatever you would like to call me."

"Don't you have a name?"

"Yes, I do. My name is Aro."

"Aro? I recognize this name..."

I tried to remember as hard as I could where I had heard it, but it didn't came to mind.

"You can't remember it ; you were too young."

"Explain yourself", I ordered.

"Miscarriage. Our mother miscarried in the third trimester. Our parents had promised, even before Si-Yook, our older sister, was even born, that they would try until they had a boy. The damage that was done to her body when she miscarried me was serious enough that she lost her womb, stealing her ability to have children. Our father thought they were cursed. But they had always planned to name their first boy Aro..."

"Our? You keep saying "our". What is that nonsense you even speak of?"

"It is not nonsense, Lady Lone. I am your late brother who never had the chance to see the sun through his human eyes."

"How do you say that with a straight face?"

He sighed, his face devoid of any fight.

"You don't believe me, do you?", he asked.

"No, I don't... I'm sorry."

"You've believed in demons or monsters... You've believed that they killed your family and burned your house down. You saw unspeakable things inside that house that night and you can't even believe that I am your brother?"

"Exactly."

He shook his head, rolling his eyes, sighing again. 

"How do you explain that I can see you, but I can't see my parents, then? If they're dead, I should be able to see them, shouldn't I?"

"No, not necessarily. Look, you can only see the dead that have unfinished business..."

"English, please?"

"Our parents and our sister, before they died, probably forgave their killer before their last heartbeat."

"How do you forgive monsters like them?", I exclaimed, finding no reasonable explanation throughout his words.

The doors to my room suddenly opened, letting the moonlight penetrate the room, two shadows blocking some part of it.

"Who are you talking to?", one of them asked.

"No one! I was probably just mumbling in my sleep."

"Okay... Then, how about you try to keep that mouth of yours shut while you sleep, Lady, before you freak me out enough to give up my guard and defy the King's orders."

He closed the doors before I could protest. I turned my head toward the little boy, who was still there, in the dark.

"Soo-Won ordered my imprisonment?", I said to myself in disbelief. 

"That man is not the person you have always believed him to be, sister"

I lifted my head toward him.

"Stop giving me such a headache, would you? Please", I almost begged of him.

"Sorry. It wasn't my purpose, Lady Lone. But I really need you to understand why I'm here. Would you like me to come back later?"

"No. No... It's fine. You can stay... You're the only one that hasn't scared me... yet."

"And I'm not here to scare you... I promise. I just want to help you."

"How do you plan to help me?"

"I'm here to accompany you through everything. But only in the dark. The other demons... you can't hear them, because they don't want you to. Me, on the other hand, I do."

"But how do you appear in front of me as a little boy, if you never got to be alive?"

"Because I've grown up in death like I would have grown up in life."

"How old would you have been, then?"

"Right now, I'm 10 years old."

"Right... I had a big gap with Si-Yook, too."

Then, I remembered our previous conversation before the guards interrupted us.

"You said Soo-Won wasn't the person I thought he was, what were you talking about?"

"I cannot tell you that sort of thing, Lady Lone. You have to discover it on your own."

"Then what can you tell me?", I was slightly disappointed. I was impatient.

"I can only tell you small details that will guide you."

I sighed, deceit taking hold of me. 

"I shall then spy on the new King... Isn't that punishable by death, though?"

"Yes. Indeed, it is. But do remember that you are one of his childhood friends. You can wander through this castle as you please."

"Not really. Didn't you see the guards placed by my door?"

"They won't be there forever. But I will tell you another thing...You did spy on the King once... during the Meeting of the Tribes."

And he slowly backed off into the dark of my room. 

"Wait, Aro, I still need you", I called after him, as low as possible so I did not attract the guards' attention.

"You shall call my name again when night has fallen and you require my company or help. For now, you must sleep. The next days aren't going to be easy for you."

His presence entirely vanished, but the other demon's persisted as I tried to sleep. 

A Few Days Later

I had tried to keep in mind the words that Aro told me. I didn't call his name after that, because I didn't need his help. But he haunted my thoughts day and night. If what he said was true, then I could have had a brother... my father would have been proud... Everything would have been different... I also didn't encounter Soo-Won, or General Joo-Doh, or Adviser Kye-Sook during those days. I had trained on my own every time I could. The guards that were in front of my doors soon went back to their job of wandering around the castle grounds, fulfilling their boring purpose of guarding every square inch of the King's property. I had put my ear against every door, every wall to see if they weren't talking about something that would reveal why my brother was so sure Soo-Won wasn't the person I always knew he was. But I had to agree with him. I have had my own doubts about him since he saved me ; that dark aura nothing like the sweet, innocent one that always surrounded him. And it's exactly two weeks after I talked to my brother that I knew what he meant when he said Soo-Won wasn't who he seemed to be. That man... was not my childhood friend.

"When are you going to tell her?", the General asked him.

"She looks mad enough at me. I cannot add another reason to the list of why she hates me", Soo-Won answered.

"She could be an important ally", the adviser countered.

"Her friends are dead. Her family is dead. She has nothing else, no one else!. She might as well be on our side", Joo-Doh continued.

"Be on our side?", Soo-Won was in disbelief. "I killed King Il and I put the blame on Hak and also accused him on kidnapping Princess Yona. How can you even imagine she would be on our side?!", he screamed into a whisper.

My jaw fell. Tears, my new companion before falling asleep at night, appeared at the corner of my eyes, soon sliding along my cheeks as they grazed the sensible paths my other tears had stained. I brought my hands to my mouth, muffling my sobs as I listened to the rest of the conversation.

"You cannot wait any longer!", the Adviser told him, his voice impatient. "She could hear it from someone else. Then, she would be way more angry at you for not telling her yourself."

"She would be angry if I told her. I refuse to tell her, not until she feels better."

"Then ask her in marriage. It'll brighten her mood", Joo-Doh suggested.

A moment of silence...

"I can't do that."

"Why not? Isn't she your childhood friend? What would be wrong about you two getting married?", Kye-Sook asked.

"I was serious, by the way. Just make her your wife", Joo-Doh added.

"And risk revolt? The people think she killed her family! I cannot offer her people who hate her!"

"You could almost read it in the stars that's what's gonna happen", Joo-Doh wrongly predicted. "She has no where to go. She will stay here, no matter the cost. So tell her the truth and then ask her to be your wife."

Another moment of silence...

"I will try", he whispered.

As steps approached the doors, I ran away, using the dark of the night as cover. When I finally reached my room, I hid under the blankets and let the tears, the pain and the fear escape. The reality slammed in. He had killed the King. He had accused my bestfriend of killing a man he respected and kidnapping the girl he loved. And he was to ask me to marry him. I could not refuse his demand... he was my King... But I refused to be his Queen...

I refuse to be his Queen. 

I slowly brought my hand up to my face and wiped away the tears, any grief that had shown in my eyes, in my trembling ; gone. I threw the blankets off me and stood up, determined. I would not accept dying here as a murderer's and usurpor's wife. He may have been my childhood friend. But visibly, that young and sweet soul died years ago. I walked over to my sword and slightly separated the blade from the sheath and looked at the mirroring effect on the clean sharp blade.

"I shall be no one's queen."

I closed it and put it back against the wall. Suddenly, I heard a knock against my door. Nervous, I slowly tiptoed my way to the doors of my room and opened them. To my relief, it was just Nami standing in front of me. I did my best to offer her a smile.

"Is everything okay, Lady Lone? Do you need anything before I retreat to the servants' quarter to sleep?", she asked me.

"No. I'm fine, Nami. You can go to sleep. I'll see you tomorrow", lie.

She offered me her brightest smile.

"I wish you a good night sleep, then"

"I wish you the same, Nami."

I closed the doors as she was leaving. I leaned my back against them, sighing in relief. I would not sleep tonight, though. I would not stay one more moment in this castle. 

Chapter Text

Sleep was the least of my concern as I was preparing to leave. I put the clothes I usually put on when I train on and placed my sword a bit below my waist, letting it sit on my hips. I already knew I would have to stop by the kitchen to gather some provisions for a few weeks as I traveled through Kouka. I had already planned that I first would go see if my bestfriends' bodies were still at the bottom of the cliff. I would use a different way to get there and probably the safest one (obviously). But I wanted to be sure, I wanted to confirm what had been said. And if their bodies were still laying on the ground, I would offer them a proper burial to honor them... because they deserved it. 

I had created a bag with my blankets. It wasn't heavy, it looked solid enough to hold everything I wanted to bring. And even if I wanted a bag, I didn't know where they kept them and I didn't want to risk waking up someone while searching for them. Moreover, all my belongings had burned down with my house, so I had nothing.

I had always been better with the sword, but I had also planned to stop by the armory to steal a bow and arrows so I could hunt for food. It had been part of my father's training so I wasn't worried I would do well out in the world alone. I had traveled with my family, but mostly with father. He had brought me through every tribe, through the poorest territories of Fire to the richest, through the beauty of my bestfriend's home, Wind, through the charming and calming territories of Water and the mysterious and yet beautiful cities and villages of Earth. But my favorite place had always been the city of Awa Port. There were a few ports in Water, but I never could have compared Awa to the others. Awa just offered me some kind of freshness no other place could bring me. It felt good and it looked good. The sea, the merchants, the friendly aura, the air... I loved it all. And I hope it still was what I knew it to be. 

As I repeated to myself what I needed, made sure I was a 100% ready, knocks sounded at my door. I stiffened, suddenly nervous. Did Nami come back to make sure I was okay? It was night, everybody should be asleep. Alarmed by the fact that I was not dressed for the night, I destroyed the bag made of my blankets and threw one over my shoulders, making sure it was covering my whole body, hiding the unusual attire I was wearing. I made sure to appear tired, to show the person who had woken me up that they had deranged me. I approached the doors and knocks came again. I opened the doors, revealing a very nervous Soo-Won. You better be kidding me...-

"Hi, Lady Lone. Did I wake you up?", he asked, realising the way I answered him and his incessant knocks. He seemed like he regretted coming here. 

I hoped, standing in that spot, that he would not ask me in marriage right here and then. I would not be able to refuse... Soo-Won, I would be, but my King... it was another kind of problem. My heart was beating as fast as I've ever felt it. I could hear its beats in my head. It was making my head spin, as if I would lose consciousness because I was too nervous for my body to handle it. 

"Does it seem to you that I was awake?", I asked, pointing at my face, talking to my friend.

His lips pursed. "No... I'm sorry."

"You shouldn't be sorry for anything as my King. Though, I will not apologize for the way I spoke to you", I said, a little smile tugging on my lips.

He smiled as well, a soft laugh escaping his lips. I lost mine as I slowly realized that I wouldn't be doing this if I hadn't overheard their conversation about our potential marriage and the fact he killed the King. If he had kept that sweet soul, I would never be preparing to leave this place. But since he had bad intentions, I had no one left. 

"Don't worry about that. You're still my childhood friend."

"You take your new title so lightly."

"No, I don't. I realize the importance behind it. But it doesn't stop me from acting the way I have always had with my friends."

I then lost every possible glimpse of happiness, or joy. I could not hide my disappointment anymore. "What are you doing here, anyway, My King?", I asked, looking up at him, now speaking to the King.

"I wanted to speak with you", he revealed. "Can I come in?"

"I'm sorry, Lord Soo-Won, but I've had an exhausting day training with the sword. I am in extreme need of sleep. Could we talk tomorrow?"

Sad... He seemed sad.

"Sure, Lady Lone. Whatever you wish. Goodnight, then."

"Goodnight...", I gave him a small smile, bowing my head. I waited for him to have turned the corner before I slid the doors closed, leaning my body against them as I slid to the ground. I sighed, my nervosity fading as the seconds past. That was close... I took a few breaths before I jumped to my feet, dropped the blankets away from my shoulders, and put it in the same way I had before, recreating the bag. I reviewed everything I needed and headed straight to my doors, opening them slightly as I looked around, making sure no one would see me leave. I got out, slowly and quietly closed the doors and found my way to the kitchen first. Lucky me, I hadn't encountered any guards on the way there and there was no one guarding the room. I envelopped in a cloth bread, some slices of cheese and some other foods. I then put it the self-made bag and got out of the kitchen. I wouldn't need any meat from here, since I would be hunting for it. So, I found my way to the armory, more silently than when I walked to the kitchen. There were more guards near that part of the Castle. It didn't tickle my curiosity, because it was obvious why they were placed there to begin with. So I distracted them as I was waiting around the corner, hiding from their sight. I threw something in the opposite direction of where I was.

"You five, go check it out!", someone whisper-yelled.

I peered my head over the corner as I witnessed five out of seven of the guards disappearing to go check out what the noise had been. The two other guards were standing a few feet in front of the doors to the armory. That was an idiotic placement, but I took my chances, and uncovered myself, sliding my back across the wall, my steps as light as feathers. When I arrived in front of the doors, I realized that it would be another challenge to open them. Using my speed as an advantage, I quickly opened the door and closed it behind me as swiflty as I could, leaning my back against the other door I had not opened. For them, this would have probably looked like light wind ; they would have looked at the doors and seen them closed. I waited a few seconds, making sure they wouldn't come to open the doors and then I ventured in the room, trying to find what I needed. Coming here often with my father as a child, I patted my way to the bows and arrows. I put the bow over my shoulders and took three stacks of arrows, putting two in my self-made bag. I would prevent not having enough on me at some point. Yes, I will make them myself when I would need new ones, but I needed to be sure I was prepared for any complications. As I realised the trouble I had to go through to get out of the armory, my heart started beating faster. Of course there would be a slight mistake in my plan. I would have to bruise some people. So I approached the doors and slightly opened one of them. I soon noticed the presence of the five guards that came back. So I didn't waste time ; I pulled the door opened and ran.

"Hey, you!", one of the guards screamed at me. "Stop right there!"

I turned the corner and leaned against the wall. 

"Go after her!"

Guards soon came running and when the sound of their boots seemed close enough, I pulled my boot over the wall and I witnessed, as each and every one of them fell to the ground one after the other. One looked at me, anger filling his traits, the other guards all on top of him.

"You little brat!", he called as I gave him a mischievous smile. 

"See ya!", I said, offering them a wave of my hand before running.

"Catch that little pest!", he screamed, ordering the other guards. "And tell the King that his protegee stole from him! Tell him that she has betrayed him!"

His voice became quieter as I ran throughout the Castle, finding my way to the gates. I was sure everyone heard him and they would soon all be looking for me. As I neared the gates, I stopped, noticing the usual guards standing in front of them. I hid.

"Find her!", General Joo-Doh screamed. For the first time since I escaped my room, shivers went down my spine. But, it was worry that haunted his words. But the glint of anger still loomed over his tone. "She must not leave here!"

"Where could she have gone?", Adviser Kye-Sook asked.

"Nowhere far. We have to find her."

"And how come she suddenly wanted to leave? It doesn't make sense."

General Joo-Doh was watching straight in front of him, his double-edged sword in his right hand. "Somehow, it does make sense..."

Soo-Won then appeared, anger filling his eyes. It could destroy everyone in his path if he wished to. He went past the General and his Adviser.

"Wait, Lord Soo-Won, where are you going?", the Adviser asked.

"To make sure she is found."

He stopped right in front of the people guarding the gates. "I need everyone to find her. She must not be far. Catch her and bring her to me", he ordered them.

They then ran from their post with the clear purpose of finding me.

"What are you going to do to her?", the General asked.

"What I will do to her is none of your business."

"Did you speak to her?", the Adviser asked. 

"I tried to, but she refused me ; said she was tired. I should have known..."

"You can't predict that sort of thing", the General said.

"But she is my friend! I should have predicted it!", he screamed, shame blinding his eyes. 

"She seemed prepared well enough", the Adviser said. "As if she had been preparing her escape for some while, now. She stole from the kitchen and from the heavily guarded armory. She is skilled."

"Don't talk about her like she's an ennemy, Kye-Sook", Soo-Won warned him. 

"Isn't she what she is? Now, maybe you'll think twice before you cut in her execution"

His words made Soo-Won jump.

"I am not giving her the death sentence."

"You won't, but the people will. It is not your choice anymore. She has killed her family and has commited treason. The crown dictates that that sort of crime must be punished by death."

"My King!", one of the guards screamed. "We might have found evidence!"

Their attention shot up toward the guard and they ran to them, disappearing. Above, thunder screamed. I hadn't noticed the grey clouds covering the sky when I got out of my room. Maybe, they just appeared... Luckily, it would start raining soon and it would erase my steps. I ran to the gates and pushed and pushed until they opened. At that moment, as a bolt of lightning speared the sky and another loud thud of thunder sounded, heavy rain fell from the sky. So I didn't waste much more time and I ran.

"Stop there, Lady Lone!"

I stopped in my tracks, not even ten feet away from the gates. I didn't dare turn around. Yet, I knew who that screaming voice belonged to. 

General Joo-Doh.

"If you take another step, Lady Lone, I will be obliged to kill you", I felt the restrain in his voice, knowing desperatly he didn't want to say those words. "As the Sky Tribe's General, I give you the order to turn around and come back!"

My breathing shaky, I slowly turned around, my hands in the air. He was prepared to fight.

"Please, come back into the castle, Lady Lone! We can save you before it's too late!"

"I am not going back there, General Joo-Doh! It's either you let me leave or you are forced to kill me right here and now."

From where I was, I could see the pain in his eyes as I pronounced the last words.

"Just- Please! Come back! I do not want to have to kill you!"

"It's pointless, General Joo-Doh! I cannot come back... If I stay, it's either I die or I'm married to my monster of a friend."

His eyes widened, surprise hitting his expression. "You heard our conversation..."

"Yes, I did. But completely by accident. That's why I cannot force myself to stay here and suffer through a boring life as a Queen whose people hate her for a crime she didn't commit."

He only stared at me with pain in his eyes, realizing he could not change my mind.

"Isn't it ironic? Until now, I have never commited a crime. But this one might actually be worst than the one I was wrongly accused for."

He didn't say anything. 

"I will leave, now, General Joo-Doh. And I hope you reconsider your choice of killing me. For the sake of both of us."

I turned toward the path engraved into the ground and started walking. 

"Stop! Please, Lady Lone! I beg of you, please! Stop!"

It was the last words I heard from his mouth as I walked farther away from the Castle. In the end, he didn't have the strength to kill me...

Chapter Text

My days are resumed to : Wake up, eat a small breakfast that I probably hunted for the day before ; if I'm lucky I would take a bath, then cover some ground, trying to hide for the Castle's guards, my last meal a little before sundown so I could hunt, and lastly, I would find a place to sleep, normally in the forest and spend the night. 

The hardest part though, was to get where I wanted to go without crossing any guards. I would certainly already be there if every path I tried to take wasn't haunted by at least two guards' presence. Which made me think that they somehow knew where I had planned to go. So I had no choice but to linger in town, well undercover as I tried to listen to people. A few days ago, I heard something about a guy who could grant any wish. Not with any magic trick, though, but with realistic manners. Apparently, he had wonderful connections that allowed him to make a lot of things possible. He didn't seem real at all, but I would still try. And so, I searched for him for days, trying to find clues in people's words and looking around, thinnking I could recognize him in a crowd full of men and women alike, when I didn't even know what he looked like. 

It was a few hours after the sun had set, when normally, I would have been laying down on the ground, trying to fall asleep, that his shadows brightened against the earth. I had recently found out that he would probably appear at night, even though he existed in the daylight in everybody's minds.

When I felt his power, his presence, I understood why he held such importante in this town. You didn't need a description to know when he stood beside you. But, in my case, he was walking a few feet ahead as I followed him as discreetly as I could. When he finally headed into a dark alley, I place my hand on my sword's hilt, preparing to unsheath it if I ever needed to. We were the only ones there, the sound of our boots the only noise present between us. He suddenly slowed down and approached a door engraved in the wall on our right. Let's just say, if you weren't searching for it or had no knowledge of it ever existing, you wouldn't find it. 

Before he could go in, I pushed myself in his direction, unsheathing my sword as I pulled on his cloack, and slammed him against the wall, dangerously placing the blade against his neck. I couldn't hide my surprise when I realized how young he looked. He looked infinitely beautiful. He seemed to only be a few years older than me. But what unsettled me the most was his expression. He had a grin plastering his face. He wasn't alarmed by the blade I kept close to his skin. He kept his calm.

"Lady Lone", he said my name. "I was waiting for you to make a move."

I thew myself off of him, positionning my body in my fighting stance, my blade prepared to hit. He rubbed the spot where my blade was seconds ago.

"How do you know me?", I asked.

"Everyone knows you, Lady Lone. Everyone knows what happened at Hakkon House. But I personally made my own research. I've been waiting for you for a few days now. I honestly thought you would find me sooner."

I frowned ; what the hell was he talking about? He realized my concern before I could express it.

"I need to know everything about my clients, Lady Lone. I've been following you. I know you've been trying to walk past the guards blocking your way to the bottom of the cliff where your friends died."

"Did you see their bodies?", I asked, hope glinting in my eyes as I lowered my sword, letting down my guard.

"No. I don't know anything about the late Son and Princess. All I know is that they're dead. They were more discreet than you, so they weren't considered as clients."

Deceit replaced my hope. I'll have to find out on my own, which brought me back to reality. 

"Can you help me?"

"The question is not whether or not I can help you, it's whether or not you can endure everything". He soon realized what he'd said. "But, looking back at your history, I doubt you would not be able to go through even more pain... or maybe not. Maybe you're not strong enough."

"I am."

"Are you sure?", he asked.

"Yes. What would you require of me?"

"Your death."

I freezed. I was not waiting for this. 

"Shall we go inside to discuss more about this? There are ears everywhere since you fled the Castle, Lady Lone, even more than before."

I pushed away my worry and took back the strength I had lost as he revealed to me the price I would have to pay to get to my friends. I sheathed my sword and let him lead the way. He opened the door and went in as I followed, letting the door close with a loud thud. The hallway was dim, barely any light illuminating it.

"There are no risks of people following us?", I asked.

"Don't worry about that. We are all protected."

I didn't say anything else. We walked for a few minutes until we reached another door. He placed his hand on the handle, but didn't open it yet. He turned toward me.

"I trust you, Lady Lone. I know you wish your identity to be kept a secret in this town, and it's the same for us."

"Yet, everyone knows who you are..."

"Yes, but only a few know where we are. Only people who are worthy of our help."

I stayed silent.

"We are a big group of people. And we also have a lot of connections outside of this building. We're gonna use everything we have to help you."

I didn't answer, but his words were now part of me. He opened the door, revealing a lively and colorful room full of people dancing, singing and drinking. This looked more like a bar or a club than anything else.

"Follow me", he ordered and I stayed behind him as we walked.

He stopped at the bar, where a man stood while he was drying a glass with a cloth. When he was done, he threw the piece of cloth over his shoulders, slamming the glass on the counter, in the young guy's face.

"The usual, Na-Ho?", the barman asked, not noticing me standing behind. 

"Not necessary. I'm here to see the boss."

That's only then that he looked at me. "She finally found you."

"Took her a while, but yes, she did."

"I'm gonna call for her. She should be in her office."

The barman disappeared, leaving Na-Ho and me alone. I took this chance to ask him a question : "The boss? I thought you were the boss. The way everyone was talking about you."

"No, I'm only her assistant. But I almost have as much power as she has. I do the research, I organize the plans, I always take care of the clients, staying with them every step of the way."

"You call us clients, but you haven't mentionned how I would have to pay you for your help."

"Logically, Lady Lone, you can't pay if you're dead. We can't leave any trace of our clients behind. Otherwise, our help would have been ruined. Your payment is the strength you give us."

"You seemed to have already planned how it would go", I realized.

"Indeed. It took a little more time for you to appear, so I used it to plan everything beforehand."

"How much time will it take, then?"

"Considering every detail, I would say that by tomorrow evening, you should be able to get to your friends' bodies."

I only nodded in thanks as the barman suddenly came back.

"The boss is ready to see you", he announced upon arriving.

"Thank you, man", Na-Ho said, walking away toward another door. The barman went back to his job.

Na-Ho slid the doors open and let me in before closing them behind us. He pressed his hand behind my back, leading me toward another set of doors at the end of a short hallway. Na-Ho opened the doors without knocking, which surprised me. The woman in the room was seated on a small cushion in front of a long low table. She had a pen in one hand, dipping the tip of it in a small bottle of ink, similar to the one I used when I wrote my letters to the Heavens. She had multiple sheets of paper spread on the table. She was young ; as young as Na-Ho. She looked strong still, kind and proud.

"So you are Lady Lone, the last member of the Hakkon House family", she said, examining me, the usual long cloak of Kouka, the hood still covering my head. Hiding behind my cloak was my sword, which I knew she sensed it. "I am Rin, the Leader of our group."

"The pleasure's mine", I said, respectfully bowing before her.

"Oh, please, girl. You have more importance than I ever will ; I should be the one bowing before you."

"Not anymore", I said, straightening my upper body. "You should know ; everyone does."

"Such a tragedy, yes. The only person who should be punished for this crime is the one who made Hakkon House fall."

I frowned, surprised. "How come you believe in this truth while everyone else think I did it?"

"Because we know everything about everyone, girl. Everyone may only represent our clients, but we still know everything about them."

"Your reasons and your proof might be enough to free me from my crimes", I said, throwing my thoughts into a whisper.

"Unfortunately, no. We can do everything but that. Our existence is secret, our help is not offered on a silver platter, so don't expect us to go scream the truth upon every rooftop so you can go back to Hiryuu Castle alongside your King."

"I have no desire to go back to Kuuto. Never."

"You know, he didn't want any harm", Na-Ho cut in.

He certainly meant Soo-Won. "He didn't want any harm?  To me or to Hak and Yona?"

"To you. I know nothing of how he felt toward your two other friends."

"It didn't stop him from planning to ask me in marriage."

"He didn't want to ; the General and your King's Adviser pressured him. He knew you didn't feel the same as he did."

"The same as he did?", I asked, confused. "What the hell are you talking about?"

Na-Ho looked to Rin and back to me over and over again. Rin did the same, as if it were obvious.

"He was in love with you", Na-Ho revealed, making my jaw drop.

"No, no, you got it wrong ; we're childhood friends."

"Believe it or not, he does love you."

I kept shaking my head from side to side, waving away that horrible truth. "Can we just talk about the plan you created, Na-Ho?", I said, talking to my new friend, if I could even call him that.

Na-Ho gave me a small smile, answering my question.

"Take a seat, then. We shall discuss this plan", Rin offered, pointing to the cushions on the other side of the low table, opposite hers. So we sat in front of her.

"This plan has for purpose to erase your name, kill you without killing you", Na-Ho revealed, going straight to the point.

"How do you plan to do that, exactly?", I asked, confused, slightly doubting their abilities. 

"We will publicly announce your death. In this very town. Since you are a Wanted Criminal, the news of your death will travel fast, reaching the Castle in a few hours, and the rest of the country in a little more time."

"Please, Na-Ho, do not linger ; speak already", Rin said, visibly impatient.

"Tomorrow, a few hours before sundown, we will begin. Someone will be disguised as you and some of our people will be running after you... well, technically, attracting the attention of the people around. The disguise will be wearing heavy protection hidden beneath her cloak. Eventually, we will start shooting arrows, because we won't be able to get her to stop."

"How is it gonna look, though, if villagers shoot illegally at her?", I asked.

"We have a good amount of uniforms belonging to each of the tribes. We won't use the Castle guards' though, since it would be obvious to them that none of them shot", Rin explained.

"And who's gonna wear the disguise?", I asked. "I say it because you need someone who looks a lot like me physically and also considering my physical abilities."

"You mean your speed", Rin said, perfectly aware of everything concerning the plan. "We have a jewel that can run almost as fast as you can. Though, her face doesn't exactly mirror your features as others might, we have a darling who has the best hand when talking about make-up."

I nodded, impressed by their readiness.

"As she receives multiple arrows in the back, she will fall to the ground as we approach her body. We will be the ones taking care of it, declaring your death. It won't be long before they each leave their posts, returning to the Castle", Na-Ho finished.

"I guess they are that desperate to get rid of me."

"According to them, you would have had what you deserved. The only difference is that your punishment will not be delivered by the crown", Rin said.

"And what about my identity?", I asked. "If I'm dead, I cannot be called Lone, can I?"

"We always leave this choice to our clients", Na-Ho revealed. "It's either you change one or two letters in your name and you still use it... or a part of it at least. The other alternative would be to keep Lone to yourself but change your name wherever you go, having only one or multiple. So, you would have one name in a place and another in a different place. Your backstory, though, you do whatever you want with it."

I nodded, this new reality slowly sinking in. Tomorrow, I would be dead. Tomorrow, I would be free. I wouldn't have to deal with any guards everywhere I would go as Lady Lone. I would be no Lady. I would be Sou-Ri or Van or Alna to anyone who asked, a member of the Water Tribe, born close to the water, in a friendly port city. My mother died giving birth to me and my father forgot me as he drank, hour after hour, day after day. I am an only child, with no family left. I'm just a normal traveler, looking for a peaceful life. But right now, I was still the young criminal, traitor to the crown. 

And I needed to rest before the big day.

Chapter Text

Na-Ho had pulled me away after discussing with Rin about the plan. He wanted to leave the poor woman alone, considering the ton of work she still had to do during the day. He had brought me to meet the members of the team that would help us tomorrow. I had an interesting conversation with the girl who would disguise as me. Everyone seemed so eager to finally have a job after a few weeks. They did like to party all day, but sometimes, something else to distract them is favorable. They do realize how much their missions represent pure danger, but the adrenaline they take in it gives them joy and excitement. That's why they always look like no risks, no matter the importance of it, would stop them. I looked up to them, to their strength, to their will. I would forever be in their debt for what they accepted to do for me ; one of the most Wanted Criminal of Kouka Kiingdom. In these moments, I smiled... I genuinely smiled since I left the Castle, since I learned of my bestfriends' deaths. I felt accepted and it showed. In my face, in my movements and in my thoughts. I had tossed away my problems, reliving the parts of my life where I was innocent ; a young girl with a family and friends and no problems except for her demons. Even that part appealed to me. It didn't let any grief show through my features. I was happy and I would not let them ruin it.

But, even with the smile on my face, my honest laugh, my innocent thoughts, it didn't stop the nightmares from visiting me once more. The horror of it. Their faces, looking at me as if I really did it, I really killed them, the knife between my hands, stabbing them over and over again until the only noise left was the squeaking of the bed and the plunging of the blade in their flesh, their skin. Soo-Won's face as he killed the previous King, accused Hak of his own crime and chased our bestfriends with so much intent and anger that he killed them. In the end, as much as Kan Tae-Jun was their killer, it didn't cast away Soo-Won from the picture. He was the sole reason why they had died in the first place.

That's when I woke up, drenched in sweat, the nightgown one of the girls had given me a useless piece of clothe now. I couldn't go back to sleep into such uncomfortable clothes. So I got up and opened the doors of the room they had lent me. It was pure silence in the building. The sound : the music had died down at the first hours of the day. As I passed beside the bar, there was only a couple of people seated at the bar, drinking from their mid-filled glasses, what looked like grief dancing in their eyes. I made my way to the showers, turned the wooden sign to "Women" and the other one to "Occupied", and went through the doors. I chose a box and put my sweaty nightgown in it, leaving me utterly naked. I pulled my hair up, leaving a few strands falling here and there, on my neck or on my forehead, my cheeks, my collarbones. And I made my way to the showers. When I entered the room, surprise filled my expression as I took in another woman's presence. Her back to me, her arms united on the edge of the big bath, her head resting on them. I silently made my way to it, letting my cold sweaty feet touch the hot water. I went deeper into the water until it went up to my neck, leaving the little strands of hair floating around me. It's only then that the woman turned around to see who had joined her, a faint sleepy smile on her face. She offered me a silent welcome and I recognized her. It was Ori, my disguise. She leaned her back against the wall of the bathtub, still looking at me.

"Couldn't sleep?", she asked me.

"Nightmares", I told her. "The usual"

"Yeah", she sighed in relief, escaping a laugh. "I understand. I went through them at some point, too. Not funny."

"No, indeed ; it's not. What about you?"

"The couple in the room beside mine were at it... again", she said, losing her smile, her irritation as clear as water. "I thought I could distract myself by coming here for a few hours... I don't know what to expect when I go back."

"There's only one way to know", I said. "If it hasn't stopped, come back."

"I'll have to sleep at some point", she said, worried. "We have a big day tomorrow."

"Indeed we have..."

Silence fell and I took this moment to lean my head onto the edge of the bathtub, closing my eyes. It has been a while since I had the chance to take a real bath.

"I suppose you flipped the wooden signs to "Women" and "Occupied"", she suddenly said, making me lift my head, opening my eyes.

"If I don't want to be bothered by annoying men, I sure will", I said, answering her. "I guess it wasn't the same for you if you didn't even bother to change them."

"No, it wasn't. I won't push away a little attention. With the lives we have, we would be satisfied with the men seating at the bar all day everyday, an alcohol filled glass in their hands, another prepared for them even before the one they have is empty."

She looked sad, looking in the distance as if she could see her future embedded in the walls of the bathroom. "How about you, girl? Did you have any luck out there? I heard the new King has a thing for you... Oh, how I would like to be rich, floating in pretty jewels and in endless money. And be married to a King... what a dream. What got to your head girl for you to refuse a man like that?"

My lips pursed. Maybe it was shame or maybe regret. Regret that could never make them understand. The nightmared and horror filled man that would have been my husband if ever he had had the chance to ask me. I didn't know how to be truthful ; my every words could be used against me.

"If you want him, he's all yours", I only said.

Her expression lightened when she saw my face. I felt like she understood...

"With what I heard about him, he would have no interest other than you. He doesn't seem like the man who would desperately be looking for a woman to marry and force her to be his wife, and make children like it's raining on a cloudy day."

"I don't love him"

"You wish for a love match, then. Such a rare possibility in this world."

"My sister had one. But she died before she could even marry him. Her fiance never forgave me and he never will. He would kill me himself if he could."

She smiled, realizing the irony. "He won't have the chance to."

I only nodded.

"What do you plan to do after you technically die?", she then asked me.

"Whatever life pushes my way. Wherever the wind drives me..."

"You should be a poet, then", she was laughing. "But you would be way to recognizable. If your sketched face ends up on paper, you're doomed."

"Yeah", I laughed. "Better skip it."

We laughed in unison. A yawn reached my face and I remembered I was tired. So, I found my way outside of the bathtub and pulled on a towel, wrapping it around my body. When I turned toward her, she was looking at me. The little hairs were sticking to my neck and my face, droplets falling on the ground.

"Aren't you tired?", I asked her.

"Very much", she said, giving her body a push, getting out of the bathtub just like I did a few seconds ago. She gripped another towel, wrapping it around herself. "I assume the nightgown one of the girls gave you is hopeless now."

I gave her a shy smile.

"Yeah..."

"Follow me, then." She took her own nightgown and we headed toward her room, a few doors away from mine. The noises she was hearing a few hours ago seemed to have gone down to snores. She ruffled through her things and finally handed me a new nightgown a minute later.

"Thank you", I said.

She talked again before I could walk away toward my room. "Try not to join me in the showers again if they ever decide to wake up before dawn", she said, pointing toward the door beside hers.

I escaped a low laugh. "I'll try... See you tomorrow, Ori."

"See you tomorrow, Lone." She waved a hand at me and disappeared in her room.

I walked to mine and let the towel fall to the floor as I slid the nightgown over my head. I sat on my mattress, thinking about my conversation with Ori, what I got to know about her. And then, another person flashed in my mind.

"What do you think about them, Aro?", I said, my voice only a whisper.

I felt him appear near me. I couldn't see him, since we were both in the complete darkness. I didn't feel comfortable going to sleep yet. A few hours ago, there was the light from the party room, but now, nothing.

"Their souls are darkened, that's for sure", he said and I felt his regret. "But their help is genuine, precisely Na-Ho and Ori."

"I presume tomorrow will go well then?", I asked, hoping he would offer me some positive information.

"I think so. There's nothing that would say otherwise."

"Good."

"I thought you forgot about me. I was worried for a while."

"I was nervous in the last two weeks, Aro. I have been trying to escape the Castle's Guards everyday and it's not the easiest task... There was a lot on my mind, that's what I'm trying to say."

"It's okay. At least, you called my name tonight."

"Where do you go when I don't call for you?", I asked, pure curiosity filling my senses.

"I stay within range, but you don't see me. I keep an eye on you and your surroundings."

"I presume I should thank you for this."

"...Not necessarily. I mean, I'm doing it voluntarily."

"I'm still thanking you. I don't know anyone in this world who would do the same as you're doing right now."

"The late Son Hak and Princess Yona would have done the same as me."

The thought of them brought a smile to my face. Remembering our childhood. Hak's teasing, Yona's complaining. And Soo-Won's presence. I lost my smile, however sad it was and let my thoughts be poisoned by him. My nemesis...

"You're wondering if Soo-Won would do the same, too?", he suddenly asked me, taking me by surprise.

"Is it bad to think about him after all that happened?"

"No, it's completely normal, in fact. But considering his new position, what you mean to him, I think he wouldn't hesitate."

"I'd rather he would", I found myself saying.

He stayed silent. But he was not gone yet. I knew he was there. 

"You should sleep, Lady Lone. You have a big day tomorrow."

I stared at nothing in particular, my eyes set in the dark, trying to see if there were any demons in the room. I don't know if I wanted to sleep just yet. But he was right, I should rest, considering what would happen tomorrow. It would certainly take a lot of energy. So I said ; "You're right. I'll call for you tomorrow evening, after I'm settled for the night."

"I'll wait for you, then."

He slowly disappeared, his comforting presence leaving a hole in the room, in my safety. I lay on the mattress, my eyes wide open, as if they could stop them from approaching. They slowly closed as the hours passed. I didn't have any nightmares during this second part of my sleep, but it was filled with ill intentions, uncomfortability. And when I woke up for the last time, I could hear chatter on the other side of the door. It was time to wake up, now. We were today and today was the day I would die. 

I got out of bed and put on my clothes, wrapping my sword around me, beneath my cloak. I folded the nightgown and put one bag strap over my shoulder, deciding I would not come back in this room. I opened the door, closing it behind me. I made my way toward Ori's room, finding it empty of her presence. I left the nightgown on her bed and got out of her room, heading toward the boss's office. We would be to meet there first thing in the morning, so I made my way there. The guards at her doors let me pass and I walked the little length of the hallway before pushing on the last doors to her office, not knocking as Na-Ho had done the day before. They were all looking at me now ; everyone on the team. I was the last to arrive. They were all standing in front of a seated Rin. She was the first to speak. 

"Well, we were waiting for you, Lady Lone. You can put your bag on the floor near the wall and join us."

And so I did. And I approached Ori, who seemed ready for today. "You slept well?", I asked.

"Like a baby. You?"

"Good... somehow."

She smiled in answer.

"So", the boss started, her leader-like tone filling the room. "Now that you are all here, we shall discuss the last preparations. You four...", she said, pointing to the four guys on the right. "... you will be wearing the usual uniform of the Wind Tribe guards. As for you, Na-Ho, you are to accompany Lady Lone until the end ; you will be wearing plain clothes, like the citizens of the town. And lastly, concerning Ori and Lady Lone, it's a much more complicated matter."

I nodded, aware of it. 

"Lady Lone, do you care about your clothes, the self-made bag you made out of... blankets?, or anything that you own?", she asked me.

"I hold no emotional attachment to anything I presently own, boss."

"Perfect. So if you don't bother, you will be giving your clothes and your bag to Ori. Concerning your weapons, we would like to give back the bow and the remaining of the arrows that you took. Your sword, you can keep it."

"I assume you will be providing everything that I need?", I asked.

"Yes. You will be given fresh new clothes and a real bag to carry everything you desire to bring with you. I know there's still a little food left in that bag of yours, and we will be giving some for your journey."

"I thank you for your help, Rin", I said, bowing my head.

She offered me a smile, pure happiness decorating her face.

"We will also give you another set of arrows, as well as a new bow... and a knife, if you ever need it. I see you're wearing no jewelry, which will save us one problem. And for you, Ori, you better put on the protections Na-Ho designed for you before we begin with the plan."

"Yes, ma'am", Ori said. 

"Well then,", Rin said, clapping her hands, dismissing us. "you have until noon to fill your bellies. And when it hits 12, I want you to begin. Na-Ho, you are in charge of the team. I am counting on you."

"Yes, ma'am."

"Now, go", she ordered us, chasing us away with a sharp wave of her hand.

I stayed behind, desiring of a small conversation with her, before I never see her again. She realized what I was doing as everyone hurried through the doors to go eat some breakfast until their stomachs exploded. 

"What is it?", she asked me, her voice calm, the leader from previously tucked aside.

"You're not coming with us? Seeing as you're young and strong, I thought you were to join us"

A sad smile appeared on her face.

"Everyone in here has a backstory, girl. Mine is slightly different, though, a little more... violent. Do you wish to hear it?"

"I would very like to"

"Well, then, ready your ears. When I was young, my family was poor, which was the case of more than half the people in this building. My mother had died from an unknown illness a few years after I was born. My father threw me out of the house with a kick to my back at the age of 8. I had to take care of myself. I had barely to eat, barely to drink, almost died a few times. But I guess you should expect so when you are born in Fire territories. I could barely move. I was bones walking. One day, a man approached me ; I was 12. He said he could help me, and I, naive as I was back then, believed him. He brought me back to his house and before I knew it, he would make money thanks to me... by selling my body. I was raped by him and multiple other people throughout the years, men and women alike. I tried to flee at the age of 18, but I got into an incident that paralyzed me from the waist and below. I could not walk anymore. Na-Ho was the one who found me. We became friends and we soon started talking about something we could build ; this", she said, looking around. "It became real one year later. We had bought this bulding with the money I had stolen from the man who kidnapped me and made me his toy. We started searching for people who would like to join us, people like us ; poor and who would like to help people in need. It's been 6 years now, and I don't regret a thing."

I was smiling, though her story saddened me. 

"I'm sorry for what you went through at such a young age."

A smile brighter than mine appeared on her face. "Don't worry, they all got what they deserved. Every one of them."

Good, I thought. "Well, then, I'll leave to do your thing. It was a pleasure to meet you", I said as I walked toward the door.

"Wait, Lady Lone", she called after me. I turned toward her.

"What is it?", I asked.

"Don't hesitate to let the arrow fly or your sword swing."

I smiled at her, nodded slowly and waved my hand, leaving her alone with her ton of papers.

"You ready?", Na-Ho asked me, his hand placed on the door, ready to push it. 

I took a deep breath. The four guards had gone out a few minutes ago, acting as if they were on duty. Ori had probably just walked out of the alley, disguised as me. I was truly impressed by the make-up skills of the girl they talked about ; Ori was my mirror. I turned toward Na-Ho and nodded. He pushed the door and we got out. He looked around, making sure no one was near, watching us. He looked up and his eyes met another of their men and they both nodded, which meant we were clear. 

"Let's go!", he whisper screamed, taking my hand in his, leading me toward the exit of the alley. As we looked around, checking both sides of the street, the four guards were making contact with Ori.

"Hey, you", they called after her. 

They touched her shoulder and turned her toward them. Seeing as it was me beneath the hood, two of them pulled out their swords while the others readied their bows, giving Ori enough time to start to run. 

"Stop there! We got you, Lady Lone!" they screamed while the people around finally looked.

We could hear their gasps and their murmurs. Everyone was letting them pass, none of them wanted to be trampled on or pushed aside violently. 

"Now's our chance", he told me as we walked out in the street, acting as if we were surprised and disappearing again.

"It's an order, Lady Lone! Stop right there, or we're gonna have to shoot!"

Ori looked back at them, making her hood flap off her head, revealing her face to everyone. The guards around, as much Castle's ones or Wind Tribe's ones, were flustered as they watched the scene develop under their eyes. They didn't dare intercept. As the two archers took their positions, my hearbeat accelerated. 

"Lady Lone, this is your last chance!"

But she didn't stop, so they pulled on the arrow and unleashed them, taking out another one as the other flew... and landed in Ori's back, both of them. Two others soon made their way to her back, making her fall instantly. But the loud thud following her fall took us all by surprise ; this wasn't what we rehearsed. She was supposed to carefully fall to the ground, make sure she didn't get hurt, but it visibly wasn't the case, because it looked like she dropped dead...- I turned toward Na-Ho, worry drawing itself upon my face. The same look sat upon his. The guards rushed over, their bows and swords still in their hands. One of them put two fingers to her neck, checking her pulse. People around were waiting for their judgment, what it would result in ; her death or her barely alive body. They looked up, hidden fear glinting in their eyes... hidden fear for us...

"She's dead. Lady Lone has died."

I felt Na-Ho tense beside me.

"No. She was supposed to wear the protection. I thought she put it on", Na-Ho said, visibly alerted. 

Fear shone in my eyes. Other guards came along, checking if their facts were true. They even checked themselves, which confirmed, for us, that Ori had really died. One tear slowly fell down my cheek, remembering the sad expression in her eyes before she went out of the building, as if she were apologizing to me. The conversation we had the night before made me realize the sad life she knew she was living, how she wanted more, how she wasn't happy... I wondered if I could have had stopped this from happening. But Na-Ho's tug brought me back to reality.

"Lady Lone, I'll take care of this later, but we have to go now, or else, you might get discovered", he told me, pulling on my hand gently.

I turned toward him, sadness pearling in my eyes as I debated my next move. But I had no choice to go with him ; I could not let Ori's sacrifice be ruined by my worry. And so I let him pull me away toward an unknown destination as I felt a wave of wind pass beside my ear and I heard her voice.

"Live your life now, Lone. I hope mine wasn't given for nothing. You're worth it."

I had to restrain the tears from spilling ; I could not let these words enter one ear and go out the other, so I looked up, drying my eyes, waving my tears away as I reluctantly followed Na-Ho. 

I was dead.

And I planned to stay dead.

Chapter Text

It was morning.

My name had stayed behind me... as well as Ori. I had talked with Aro last night and I had asked him if he had seen Ori, but he had told me that he felt her leave, fly up to the heavens. That she forgave everyone in this life and made her way to endless happiness. She apparently thanked me for this opportunity and to not put the blame on myself. A message she passed on, the very same essence following her as she was leaving the earth. She was truthful ; or else she wouldn't have made her way to the skies ; she would have stayed down to torment me until I died, like every one of them. It's what Aro told me and I hung to it as I walked through the trees of the Fire Tribe territory. I was keeping close to the cliff, the high moutains where they fell from. But I found no trace of their deaths. Aro couldn't tell me anything about them when I asked him. He made some research, but he wound up with absolutely nothing. So I continued my research by myself. 

It looked like their bodies had already been taken to be buried or cremated. It's as if their dead bodies were never here, as if Kan Tae-Jun had lied... But-

What if they survived?

No. I'm just trying to persuade myself of an unrealistic lie. No one can survive such a fall, not even Hak. The outcome is inevitable. So I continued searching, but unless there were someone living in these woods - which I believed to be unlikely - their bodies would still be lying somewhere near. 

"Ow!", I heard, followed by a loud thud.

My reflexes made my feet run, hope penetrating my limbs, but as I arrived toward someone that didn't look like Yona or Hak, I stopped dead in my tracks and hid behind a tree. The man seemed dirty, his blonde hair falling in front of his eyes. He had the rest tied in a small braid. He looked so innocent. He slowly got to his feet and looked around. As he was about to take a step, he tripped on nothing and fell again. I frowned.

What the-

This is unreal. It is impossible for a human being to inhabit that much clumsiness. I sighed ; this man would definitely do no harm to me and he looked like he needed help. So I approached him and offered him a hand.

"Need help?", I asked.

He looked up, my eyes meeting hair. But I was sure he was looking at me, he saw my face, its details, who I was. He brought his hand to mine and I pulled him up.

"Do you live near here?"

"Yes, just a little farther that way", he told me as I was holding onto him.

Once we arrived at his little house, I took the spectacle in. It looked like it needed a little cleaning... and him too. I slowly let go of his arm and helped him sit on the edge. Let's hope he wasn't as clumsy seated than he was standing. I walked in, dipping my hands in the cold water that was stored. I found a cloth near and drowned it in it. When I finally came back to his injured body, he accepted the cloth I gave him and rubbed his face with it, getting rid of the dirt. As he gave it back to me, I went back to the water, put it in again and washed away the traces of dirt. 

"Thank you, Lady Lone, for your kindness", he said and my back straightened. I turned around, unsheathing my sword, leaving the cloth in the water as I kept away.

"How do you know me?", I asked, ready to strike.

"Because they told me."

What?! Who told him? Hak and Yona? No. Impossible. They were dead.

"Who are you talking about?"

"The Gods up there. They talk to me"

"What are you ; some kind of priest?!"

"I am. My name is Ik-Soo and I was chased away from the castle because my condition was... special."

"I understand them", I said, slowly putting down my sword. "It's not everyday that you see a priest who conveys the voice of God."

I sheathed my sword and picked up the cloth, twisting it to get most of the water out. When I turned back around, he was looking at me.

"You believe me?"

"Why wouldn't I? The Gods have answered my prayers for the past six years. I suppose you know that, too."

"Yes. They told me everything. You're apparently dead."

"Yes ; I made a call for help and... let's just say, I used illegal methods"

"But you're safe, now, aren't you?"

"I suppose... As long as you don't try to reveal my identity"

"You have nothing to fear of me, Lady Lone. I shall protect what I know of you."

I gave him a smile, grateful. I spent the rest of the day helping him clean his house and giving him a hand with changing and taking a bath. He was sitting on the edge, watching the sun set through the trees when I joined him. He had a drawing between his hands. 

"Ik-Soo", I called and handed him a bowl full of food as he turned toward me, putting the drawing away.

I sat beside him, looking in no direction in particular.

"You remind me so much of him...", he whispered, tears sliding down his face.

I looked down at the drawing on his other side. "Who is it?"

He turned to me and smiled. "He was my bestfriend. He lived in a poor village of Fire. He threw a rock at me one day, trying to steal from me. He was just a child"

I smiled, pain and sadness tainting it. It was sad that even children had to use violence to survive in this cruel world.

"I helped him design sandals", he said, pointing down at his feet. They seemed new. "He did them better than I ever made them, the first time. I came back later and he begged me to bring him with me. So I did."

"How old is he, now?" 

"He's fifteen."

"And where is he?"

"He left on an adventure. I told him to go."

I sadly nodded.

"His name's Yoon", he said, picking up the drawing and folding it over and over. He handed it over to me. "Keep it, please. If ever you find him out there, it will be a sign that I'm doing good, that I'm still alive. I hope it will be enough to reassure him."

I took the folded paper and tucked it in my sash. 

"You really cared about each other, huh?"

"We still do."

I smiled ; a never-ending feeling of love between two people even when they're apart. Oh, how I would love to have that sort of bond.

"You're wondering if you'll ever feel like that again?", he suddenly said, taking me by surprise.

I looked down, ashamed of being so opened to someone I barely knew, even though he knew me better than I ever will. 

"Yes", I said, shy.

"You will ; if that can reassure you. Much more powerful than any other relationship who've had since the beginning of your life. And you'll even find some old energies in other people's souls. At least, that's what the Gods keep telling me. They won't give me names."

I only smiled... and nodded, over and over again, too tired to let the words out. He understood and suggested we prepare to go to sleep. I tiredly nodded again and retreated, hoping he would restrain from being clumsy even for one minute, for him to get to his futon and fall asleep without waking up again during the next hours.

I've never closed my eyes so fast as I did that night. I was exhausted. And I felt secure, like nothing bad could reach me. I felt Aro's protective attention on me. No disgustingly horrible presence lurked in the corner and no nightmares haunted my sleep. It was the calmest night I've had in forever and I felt my energy regenerate itself. I felt full.

I heard some sort of voice calling me. I didn't know where it came from, but it sounded like a chant. Such a beautiful melody, coming from an unknown place, an unknown mouth. I wouldn't doubt it would come from a beautiful person, as pretty as her voice. I followed it, after waking up and watering my face. Ik-Soo had disappeared. I walked through the trees, getting farther and farther before I could even realize it. When I finally arrived at the last line of trees, I passed through, the nature revealing to me the valley expanding in front of me, I couldn't hide the awe finding its way to my face. There he was, also, his pale figure sitting cross-legged, his blond hair so organized and desorganized at the same time. I approached him, but stayed a few steps back as he was probably receiving the voice of God. He opened his eyes a few seconds later, inviting me by his side. And so, I sat next to him.

"Who's singing?", I asked.

"So you hear it, too?"

I looked up at him, frowning. "Because no one else can actually hear this?"

"No, only me... usually", he said, looking down to me at the last word. "Well, it makes sense. I hear the voice of God, you hear the voices of the dead. Somehow... these two jobs are related"

"Jobs? Mine's a curse"

"I wouldn't consider it like that, Lady Lone. God tells me he offered you this gift because it would be of use to you."

"I hate it", I whispered, looking down at my hands as I played with my fingers, trying to untie this boring sort of feeling inside of me. I've had this conversation before a thousand times and it always resulted in me not accepting this "gift". It wouldn't end differently this time. Ik-Soo seemed to realize my uneasiness. 

"God also told me something else... about you."

I suddenly looked up from my fingers as my hands stopped moving, resting on my lap. I was waiting for his next words. What could God have to say about me that would be so important that he would share it with the priest? 

"He showed me a way to guide you in your next steps. I see water... ocean and happiness. Endless happiness and acceptation. You are surrounded by many people, each one of their energy different from the other. They're special, in a way... like you are. Maybe not in the same way, but they are. I also see adventure and hate. But love in that hate. It's so weird... Usually, they're clearer about what they tell me, but this time it's like they're keeping things to themselves, things they do not want you to know... But, just know, Lady Lone ;

...you are not alone...

...there will always be someone by your side. And I don't see your death anytime soon. You will live such a happy life, full and complete."

I nodded as tears fell down my cheeks, one by one as they were falling to my hands, wetting my fingerprints. For the first time in forever, I've believed someone who told me my life would get easier. Maybe not outright, but soon... soon it will be, I'm sure of it. I just have to wait, and be patient. 

"I know where to go next, then."

"I'm glad you do. Not many people do. I hope you will find what you seek."

"Thank you, Ik-Soo", I said, as I was standing up. I put a hand on his shoulder, my back turned to the valley. "I hope you can handle yourself from now."

He looked up to me, a smile on his face. He placed a hand on mine. "You don't have to worry about me, Lady Lone. I shall pursue my life as best I can. Fly... while you still can."

I gave him a nod, smiled and walked away as the voice followed me, its hypnotizing song grazing my ears. 

I had walked the rest of the day after eating. My empty stomach was screaming for food by the time I got back to Ik-Soo's little house. I would have been farther west if I hadn't been pushed back by the Castle's guards, but what was more important now was to get to the view Ik-Soo mentionned. He said he saw the ocean, so I had decided I would head toward Awa Port, in hopes to find my future there. Whatever it was. 

I had stopped at the edge of the mountains of the Fire Tribe. Up on a low cliff, a small village down below me, I was looking up at the night sky, the stars vibrating, replacing the usual bright light of the moon, who was only a sliver in the sky tonight. I was smiling through the tears as I was trying to let the words out.

"Hey... mother... I wonder if you can hear my voice from where you are. I'm sorry for what happened at Hakkon House ; I wish I could go back in time and stop this from ever happening. I know better things are in reserve for me, but I just want my friends and family back... I want you all back... at my side, with me... forever. If only I could go back in time..."

Looking down at my hands like I could still see their blood, I don't know what I was thinking.

"It feels wrong, what happened... It doesn't feel real ; I wish you would be there to tell me. I can see everyone else, but not you. It would have been easier for me to go through life if you had been my side, mother, even in death. I miss you and I hope you think the same... up there. But a lot of things happened since you burned down with Hakkon House. As I was about to be hanged for what I did, Soo-Won saved me, and he was about to be king ; he had killed the previous king, making the Princess and Hak flee. He had put the blame on Hak... Once I knew that, I left the Castle. But it wasn't only because of that ; he wanted to ask me in marriage, but I didn't want to be married to a monster like him, even though I was no different in a way."

I looked up again, letting the tears slide freely down and down, until I felt empty.

"Then I was dead. I actually died. Everyone thinks I am... I think it's better like that... but I've been thinking since then that what am I doing on this earth if I do not even exist anymore? But there was that priest who told me I will have a purpose... that I just have to chase it. But if I don't want to chase it? What if I just want to curl up somewhere and rot? I don't know what to do anymore..."

A few seconds passed. Silence filled the trees, except for the sound of the birds. Until I heard footsteps. Light, but they were there. But before I could turn around to see who they were, or get up to defend myself, a bag of tissue blinded me. I kicked and punched and struggled against their strength, but they had the element of surprise on their side... I could not beat that. 

"Stop moving, you stupid brat", he said, punching me in the face so hard I almost lost consciousness. Then, another punch in the gut. The pain blinded all my other senses and it wasn't long before I couldn't move anymore. My breath had been cut short... I slowly closed my eyes, my hands on the bag slowly soften their handle and fell to the ground as my mind wandered off somewhere else entirely.

Chapter Text

My head was hurting...

I felt nauseated.

I felt cold.

I could feel the traces of earth sticking to my skin.

I could feel the bruises already appearing on my stomach and my left cheek. Breathing hurt, reacting to the pain hurt. 

I tried to soften my face as best as I could as I slowly opened my eyes. I greeted the light in, but there was almost none so it didn't blind me. I looked up to see that my arms were attached with ropes to the ceiling. I gripped them and pulled on them as hard as I could, but it couldn't be helped ; I was tied solidly. And so I looked down. My feet were barely touching the ground.

I soon realized it ; the white cloth wrapped around my head, so tight in my mouth it would stop me from screaming. So whoever they were, they didn't want me to be found or heard by anyone. At the reminder of my kidnapping, a ball of stress slowly formed itself in my stomach, right under my newly appeared bruise. My breathing fastened and tears started to fall down along my cheeks, grazing the sensitive spot on my left one. I tried to calm my breaths, to diminish the pain, but in that position, I was hopeless. 

Noise from outside made me shoot my head up toward the door, my breathing worse. They were back. I mentally prepared myself for their arrival. A few seconds later, they slid the door open, coming in, throwing the results of their hunt on the floor a little farther. One of the guys soon lifted his head toward me, realizing I was awake. 

"Oh, so you're finally awake, Lady Lone", he said.

My eyes widened. But I couldn't let the words out, the barrier that was the cloth blocking my voice. I wanted to ask him how he knew that. Everyone knew I was dead, so how come he knew my identity? He saw my terror and approached me. My whole body stiffened, as if ready to fight, even when I was unable to do anything right now. He pulled the cloth out of my mouth, leaving it resting on my neck, on my collarbones. 

"What do you want to say in your defense, girl?", he said again. 

"I don't know what you're talking about. I am no Lady Lone, so let me go", I said, hoping they would believe me and untie me so I could run as far away as I could. 

"Nuh huh huh", the same guy said, moving his finger in front of my face, telling me to not play with him. "We heard you talking yesterday, girl ; we know damn well you're the Lady Lone everyone's talking about. The crazy bitch who slaughtered her whole family and burned down her home with it. People say you fucked with the new king to get saved. You should have died, girl."

"Moreover, you look identical to the poster they put around everywhere in town a week before your so-called death", another added.

"Yeah and? I had a hard life and I somehow look like that Lady who died, okay? Just let me go and I'm not gonna tell anyone", I tried so hard to defend myself, but they looked like they wouldn't change their mind on my identity.

"Lying won't do you no good, girl. Whether you deny it or not, you're the Lady we know you are", a third one said. 

I gave up then. So I sneered at them, trying to prove I was not a poor and fragile girl. If I was untied, I would unsheath my sword and slash through their necks, beheading them with no pity.

"You will regret it, you will see. Once I get out of these ropes, you're dead. You hear me? You're dead!", I screamed, spitting in the guy's face in front of me. 

Anger spread through his entire face in a matter of seconds. He took out a small blade and brought it to my right cheek. "You stupid bitch. Do that again, and that knife is going through you."

"Come on, now, Lan. We want her unscathed"

"What is the problem with her being bloody when we offer her to the Castle. We'll only lose a few pennies of the amount we're to be promised."

They put a damn ransom on my head, too? What an explainable way to explain why I was kidnapped in the first place.

"She's a Lady, Lan. Maybe she deserves death, but she's still important. We'll lose all the money, then, if there's a scratch on her"

"You know I'm supposed to be dead, right? They most certainly took away the ransom anyway", I said, trying to escape going back to the castle.

The guy named Lan turned his head back to me. "You know... you're right", he said, hope returning to my eyes as he turned away. "We could just keep her to ourselves, give us a little pleasure, play with her for a while before we get rid of her", he then proposed, sending horror filled shivers down my back. I felt the need to throw up right then and there. I hoped the other guy would defend me. "It's not everyday you get to do that with a Lady"

"Let's just remind you that I'm no Lady anymore"

He turned back to me again, his impatience showing, as if he could kill me right here and now, with that knife in his hand, his knuckles whitening as he gripped it even harder. His companions wouldn't even be able to stop him. He slowly approached, and I hoped that was him trying to contain his anger. And I wished in that moment that I would have just shut my mouth. Maybe that was enough of me defending myself, it wouldn't even get me anywhere. My next swallow got caught in my throat, making it hard for me to breathe. His face was mere inches from mine and I was trying not to cough. I felt threatened ; he could do anything to me right now and I'm sure he wouldn't restrain himself. And I couldn't even defend myself even if I wanted to, because I didn't have my sword-

Wait. I don't have my sword... Slightly moving my left leg so they wouldn't notice, the absence of my blade bouncing on my thigh made my heart race even faster. Of course they wouldn't leave it on ; they were bandits. They would steal everything that was worth to keep. And my life looked like a perfect target.

"Anything else to say, Lady?", his voice was mocking me. He was daring me. But I kept my lips shut, I wouldn't talk anymore, even if I had to betray the Castle to get free. I wanted him to back off. But I couldn't make a move that might bring me my prematured death. Maybe I would have liked to keep my previous mindset from before, when I was kneeling in the mud, shackles joining my arms behind my back, just before Soo-Won saved me or after my family was killed and I promised I wouldn't let my demons ruin my life even more. I couldn't hide my fear, but I tried to diminish it as best as I could. 

Soon, he backed off and joined his companions again. And I took this opportunity to look around for my stuff... my sword and relief spread through me as I realized their presence in a corner of this shed. Turning my head back, neutralizing my expression, I kept an eye on the five guys standing not too far away from me. They were talking, whispering so I couldn't listen.

And while they weren't looking, I tried to loosen the tension in my arms. After staying up for so long, I wasn't surprised they would tire. My feet would soon tire themselves out trying to keep my toes to the ground so I could breathe, even a little. But until they would leave, even for a little while, I wouldn't be able to pull on the ropes to lift me up so breathing wouldn't be that hard. It was a privilege in my condition. I wouldn't even die by their hands at this point, I would die of suffocation. But maybe that was better than getting tortured until my very last breath. Who knows what they might do to me. But I didn't want to die...

"And I don't see your death anytime soon. You will live such a happy life, full and complete."

I didn't question his ability, I never intend to, but I have a feeling that what I'm going to go through in the next days... weeks or maybe months isn't gonna be the easiest experience. It might actually be my worst... And I was scared how this would end, how it would leave me. 

The same guy approached me again, a playful smile on his face, his knife up ready to leave a scratch... or worse. I contained any fear that might show, any anger, any tears that might fall. I tried my best to not give them any sort of excitement. He pressed the blade on my right cheek, almost in the exact same spot where he previously put it and keeping his maniac expression, he said : 

"We're gonna go prepare the meat so we can eat tonight", he started explaining as he looked down to the cloth still sitting around my neck. "And when we come back, we're gonna decide what to do with you", as he finished his sentence, his eyes went down my body with hungry eyes and I was sure I would throw up soon. 

He took away the knife, put it back in his belt and rolled up the cloth to mute me again. And I looked at them as they left, leaving me alone once again. It's only then that I pulled on the ropes, lifting me up so I could breathe. It was harder than I expected, because my hands weren't tied together, but well apart and it made me work harder. And it made the muscles of my abdomen work, the bruise hurting even more, letting me fall back the first time I tried to lift myself up. The pain made my eyes go blurry, but I had to stay awake. I fought it, I didn't want to be at their mercy. It made everything worse. The pain, my breathing, my vision, my nervosity. Everything. I felt like I was on the verge of death, and maybe I was. But after reminding myself, for the millionth time, Ik-Soo's words, it was enough to slow down my heartbeats and my heavy breathing. So I fought the pain and I pulled myself up, again and again and again, until pain became an habit and my senses came back to me. And until they came back, I pulled myself up, taking deep breaths and slowly got down, taking a few seconds off, before going at it again. I lost track of time at some point, but I know it was still daytime when I heard their footsteps on the other side of the door. And so I stopped and let myself hang low, my toes now lifting my whole body again. I would have a few hours before my legs would lose the strength to keep me up.

I looked at them as they walked in, almost as they had when I woke up. 

"So", one of them said. "It's not like it's your choice, but should we get you back to the Castle... or should we keep you to ourselves?"

Visibly, even if I wanted to answer, I couldn't ; the cloth was still in my mouth. They completely stepped in, slid the door closed behind them and they comfortably installed themselves around the little room. One of them sat on the floor in a corner and started sharpening his knives, another stayed up on his feet, leaning against a wall, crossing one leg over the other, spinning one knife between his fingers. The one who had stopped the leader from killing me on the spot earlier today sat near the door and waited as the other stayed up near the door, his arms crossed. The leader, the one who kept threatening me, was standing in front of me, ready to make conversation. They were all wearing a maniacal smile. But my eyes kept their unbothering look ; at least they tried, because it wasn't the easiest thing to do. He only had to lift his arm from where he was, pull on the cloth to make it fall around my neck. 

"Do you have an opinion on this?", he asked me and I chose not to respond. 

I felt the sting on my cheek following his slap. The hit made my head tilt to the side and it made it more unbearable once I realized he had hurt my left cheek... again. I slowly brought my attention back to him and I stared at him. "Did your mother ever tell you to never hit a woman?"

I knew I would trigger his anger even more, but I didn't care. He had triggered mine first and I knew that he didn't know what I would do to each one of them when I got out of these ropes. It would amount to nothing compared to what they would do to me. He didn't slap me again though, nor did he punch me or kick me or touch me. He only wanted to talk and he wanted me to answer only when he wanted me to talk at all. 

"So, we either have the choice to bring you back to the Castle, earn the money placed on your head and get rid of you. You would die not much later, too. But if we keep you, you get to eat, to drink, but not without a cost. You get to live... but not without a cost either. It's not your choice, I will repeat", an order not to speak. "so we will silently make a choice while we speak. How's that?"

"Perfect"

"Good. So! Why even flee the castle in the first place?"

Oh? So I guess I'm supposed to be an open book now. I wonder if it would be smart to lie. I wasn't really loving that my life could be their toy to play with.

"Because I was gonna get hanged"

Another mark left on my left cheek. The hit was faster this time, angrier. 

"Liar!", he shouted. "There's more to it! The King had protected you ; he wasn't gonna let you go anytime soon. So you learned something, tell us"

I had no choice, but I still didn't want to tell the truth.

"TELL US!", he screamed, making me shut my eyes.

"Because he had planned to marry me! He was the one who killed the previous king and he put the blame on his bestfriend. That's why!"

"Ouhh, interesting..."

I regret it.

"So maybe...", he hesitated, realizing the potential hidden in his intentions. "Maybe we could soil you and then get you back to the Castle. The King's not gonna want to marry you, you're gonna die from shame. That's so bad, too. Oh, I actually love this..."

He seemed excited. I wanted to throw up. I couldn't tell if it was from my hunger or his disgusting words anymore.

"Or maybe he would end up deciding to hang you in the end. A soiled unmarried woman in this world is so much worse than a woman who killed her entire family"

One look at one of his companion. A nod. They were taunting me, teasing me. They already knew what they were gonna do with me. 

"Maybe you would have been better marrying the man ; you wouldn't be here today"

I didn't care. 

"Or maybe, if you would have been more discreet, we wouldn't have caught you yesterday"

I don't care.

"Oh, wait! Maybe, if you wouldn't have killed your entire family"

"I don't care!", I screamed.

I opened my eyes. He was still looking at me. As if waiting for an answer. But I didn't care. I didn't say it out loud. I couldn't. They were only taunting me, see if I would break, no- They were waiting for me to break. But I wouldn't be giving them the pleasure to watch me break. 

"Fine", he said. "I think you've heard enough. And I think you know you're never going back to the Castle anyway"

Good. At least I wouldn't have to see his face when he realizes I am still alive but ruined. I would never have to see his face when the noose is around my neck. I would never have to see his face again.

"You're staying here, until your very last breath and I think you're gonna regret opening your mouth last night. I think you're gonna beg for your life until the very end. And since we're safe to do whatever we like to you, to your body, to your mind, we're gonna start with this", he said as he took out his knife. He walked over to me, lifting the blade up and up. 

Once he was close enough, he placed the tip of the small sword under my right eye and pressed, a small drop of blood peering from the miniscule wound. And he pressed harder and harder, making me wince. He shook his head, the knife still pressed against my skin, blood falling on the blade, its silverish color tainted with red. 

"Not enough. Maybe a little deeper", he pressed again and I had to keep the tears from falling down. And I had to keep my head up, or else, the knife would penetrate my eye, blinding me or killing me. I didn't like either of these potential outcomes. 

And then, he pulled the knife down, down and down my cheek, drawing a scar, leaving a mark. It hurt, it hurt so bad, that I tried to shut my lids as hard as I could to bring my attention to another type of pain, but it wasn't enough. So I had no choice to endure, endure until he was done. He slid the knife against my jaw, finally leaving my skin. I felt the blood rush out, felt it fall. It slid down on my neck, in the small crevices of my collarbones, on my clothes, finding its way under them, flowing between my breasts, descending on my stomach, tickling my bruise, a bit pooling in my navel, but continued down and down on my legs until it reached the floor. My vision was getting blurry, the pain unbearable. He had cut so deep and so slowly that I felt everything. I had felt the skin tearing, separating. I had felt the blood rushing to my cheek, happy to finally get out of this prison that was my body. I felt dizzy, disgusting and I knew, deep down, that I would feel worse than that... because that...

That was just the beginning...

Chapter Text

It's been a few days, but each time they approach me, the next moments last an eternity.

I am so tired. When I'm not up, my wrists tied by ropes to the ceiling, I'm down on the floor trying to fight the pain of whatever they're doing to me. But the most haunting part is their weight on me, their horrible stench that's slowly becoming mine, the bruises they make when they grip me, either it is my arms, my legs, my waist, my hips, my breasts, my face. It's not just the cuts, the beating or the burns, it is their mark of pleasure, of their excitement on me, in me. I feel disgsuting. I feel like not even a bath could take this trash scent and feeling off me... not even time. 

The shaking of my entire body suddenly stopped, my eyes stayed closed with exhaustion. There was only one left before I could go back up. I couldn't wait to go back up... 

"It's your turn, Nano", the guy who just finished said.

"Nah, put her back up. I'll have my take later"

I didn't have the feeling to throw up anymore. Instead, my body was destroying itself. But at least, I would be going back up. WIth the help of two of the other guys, they lifted me up and attached my wrists... again. I couldn't count the amount of times they had done that process in the last few days. Tightening as best as he could, it still didn't feel like the same hold it always had. But with the low amount of strength I had left, I could barely pull on the ropes.

The long scar from my eye to my jaw was slowly healing, closing up, but I knew it would always stay there. Whenever I would look in the mirror, or in a surface of water, it would remind me of the pain and his knife and the long seconds he took pushing the blade through my skin, down and down. They had done more minor cuts to my arms and legs, as if to test if their blades were sharp enough. Sometimes, it held that reason. On other terms, they did it for fun, for the pleasure to see me bleed. They had also played with fire, brought it close to my skin, close enough to leave burns. Not as bad as the other things, though, thankfully... But I still think about how I'm gonna get out of here, out of these bonds, out of their presence. I hated it, I hated it more than when I learned Soo-Won wanted to make me his wife. 

"Doesn't she start to feel and look less good?", I heard one of them say.

"Yeah, that's probably because you're going too hard"

An echo of laughter. 

"Okay, but he's right. She's dying ; she's not worth anything anymore"

"Yeah, we should get rid of her soon. Her smell's gonna get too close to someone who could find her"

"Okay, then", the leader said. I would always recognize his voice. I heard it in my dreamless nights. His voice haunted every corner of my sleep. "We'll keep her for one or two days more, then we'll kill her. She's already supposed to be dead ; it won't be a problem to hide her body."

They were talking as if I were already dead. But I was still there, even when I was dripping blood and looked barely alive, I was still there. They had not killed me yet and it was never gonna happen. I wasn't gonna let it happen.

"Hey, Tou-Rie? What time is it?", he asked.

I could barely see, but I heard the door open, a quick few seconds before it closed again.

"A few hours before sunset", Tou-Rie answered. 

"Okay, time to hunt!", the leader shouted, getting up on his feet. "Feed her and give her some water so she doesn't die in the next few hours while we're gone."

Oh! Energy. It will be easier for me to try and get out of the ropes. I had to use everything in my advantage right now, because it might be too late 24 hours from now, maybe even less. I heard some noise and then footsteps. Closer and closer to me. Whoever it was, he lifted my chin with one finger, my eyes still half closed with exhaustion and he approached a bowl to my lips.

"Drink", he told me as I parted my lips to cold and reassuring water. I felt it go down my throat, feeling better the more sips I was taking. He violently took it away from my mouth a few seconds later. "Wouldn't want you drinking all of our water, would we?"

He walked away and came back with a few pieces of meat and fed them to me. I felt my stomach fill, giving my body something to digest. For the next hour or two, I would have more energy if they finally decided to leave. I would be able to breath, swallow and think better than a few minutes ago. Yes, technically, I would need more food, but I could do with this. Anyway, I had no time to lose ; this would be the first and last time that the ropes would be loosely tight like it was. It was the first and only chance I would have to get free and I could not let it go. 

After giving me a few pieces of food, he gave me a little more water, to make it all go down easier. And then he backed away, they all did. I heard the door sliding open then close ; they were gone. Hope filling my limbs through my nose, I let the air in and opened my eyes, slowly looking around, pulling on my sore arms, making me wince. It has been a while since I haven't had this much energy. I felt strong enough to do anything. And I wouldn't let this strength go to waste. I am not going to let them go unpunished. If I can't bring them in front of justice, then I will bring justice to them, and it will be much more fair than whatever "legal" way can give them, can bring to them. I will honor the women before me, I will give them the rest they deserve, closure, even in death, and I will protect every women who would have been harassed by these pigs. It is not only for myself. It will never be just for me. 

Setting aside the pain, I concentrated on my very first task, find a way to get out of one set of ropes. If I got out of one, I could get out of the other. I had one or two hours before they came back. Until then, I had to do everything I could. I looked up to my wrists and pulled on them lightly to see which one was less tight. Lucky me, my right hand seemed to be the easiest path to freedom. I looked down to my feet, found a way to place myself without pulling on my right wrist, which would tighten the hold of the ropes. I pushed my left foot as hard as I could into the ground to lift myself up, trying to balance myself with my left hand, giving myself the right to pull on the rope tied to this wrist. It wasn't easy and it required every ounce of my strength. I gritted my teeth, pain seering through every pore of my body. I felt like giving up, I felt exhausted, I felt like sleeping in the hopes of never waking up, I felt like drinking and eating. But if I kept going, I would be able to do all that, to sleep, eat and drink like I could just a few days ago. I could be free, not without trauma, not without rest, but I would be alive. I would walk the earth like I never have before, and I would thank Ik-Soo for making me truly believe I would survive. And I will.

I slightly backed away from my right wrist, trying to give myself momentum without ruining my chances. And I pushed myself as hard as I could, jumping as high as I could, trying to grab a faraway point on the rope holding my right wrist prisoner. The first time failed and I bounced back on the ground, just a few millimeters away from disaster. If I had lost my balance, not planned for this to happen, the rope would have tighten. I redid the same thing again, slightly moving to the left and pushed myself harder, targeting that place on the rope where I wanted to grip. But I had totally forgotten about the other wrist and the sudden stop took me by surprise and I hadn't planned for that. I had put the goal higher than I should have had, but I still reached for the rope, because this was my last chance, my balance was lost and I would fall down like a dead body, my feet incapable of holding me back up again and the ropes would have been way to tight to undo. So I reached for it and the thread scratched against my skin for a few centimeters before I got hold of it, my hand closed firmly on it. It wasn't as high as I hope it would be, but it would have to do. So I didn't waste time before I pulled on the rope and approached my teeth to it, pulling on it, trying to undo the knot. I was stongly pulling on my left arm's muscles and it hurt, so bad I might dislocate a bone if I didn't free myself anytime soon. As the seconds went by, and the solid grips I had on the small parts of the rope was slowly freeing me, I felt closer and closer to the normal happy life I had been promised. And so I continued pulling with my teeth, keeping his words in my mind, reminding me of them every ten seconds that passed, each time I felt like giving up, every time I felt like I had no chance. But I was so close, I would be free. I just had to pull ; Oh! I succeeded in getting out the first length of the thread out of a knot. There were only a few left and I could take care of the other hand. The hand gripping the rope felt more tired the more time I was taking. I was scared I would let go soon, so I fastened my pace, pulling and pulling until another length of rope got out of a knot, then another and then the last.

I slowly reached my feet for the floor again, lowering my body. I let go of the rope that had tied my right hand and looked up to my left one. That was another challenge now, but I had my fingers to completely free myself. Pulling and pulling and falling, I had tighten the thread around my left hand so much it cut my blood circulation. As soon as I got out, I would have to leave it a couple of minutes to come back, but not long, because if they had found something interesting to eat in the first thirty minutes of their hunt, they would be coming back soon. If I could guess how much time they had been gone now, I would say above half an hour and time was slowly running out. Reminding myself of these statistics, it made my heart beat faster. It attacked me like fireworks exploding right next to me ; the time I had taken to free myself of the rope on my right hand and I don't know if I had enough strength to pull on the tightened thread around my other emprisonned wrist. 

Without my will, tears appeared at the corner of my eyes. I wouldn't be able to do it. I had lost. I was so exhausted, the strength I had left had quit my body trying to encourage myself, to give my body hope that I could get out. But as soon as they came back, they were killing me, they were ending my life there and then, because I was hopeless ; I had no way of getting out. I was doomed... I leaned my whole weight on the last thread of rope left, tying my left wrist to the ceiling and let the water droplets fall down my cheeks. But they didn't go far ; they fell straight to the ground after a road halfway through my face. I felt on the verge of death and I probably was. Sleep danced in my eyes and I felt so tired I might pass out. I didn't have any strength left in my body anymore. I had lost my chances...

"No! Get up, Lone! Get up, I order you!", I heard faintly, not enough to make me raise my head. It was in my head, all of this was happening in my head. I created that voice as a last resort to give me hope... but it wouldn't work. I couldn't force myself to do something I couldn't do. My body wouldn't cooperate. 

"I swear to the Heavens, Lone, if you don't get back up on your feet, you're gonna hear from me, even in death!", who was even talking? I could barely recognize the voice, but it was the one of a child, screaming in pain, tears building up in their mouth. Who did that voice belong to? I don't know, but I wanted to. 

"Please! Lone! Get up! Our parents wouldn't like to see you enter the gates of afterlife that early in your life. Please! I beg of you! Don't let yourself die like this! You still have a chance! I bet even Si-Yook is rooting for you up there. No no no no! Lone, come back! Don't fall asleep, please! You're supposed to be strong, remember?! You're supposed to go through life with your sword and swing it around without any pity, remember?! COME BACK! LONEE!", an echo of a voice, but I knew who was talking. I knew who was ordering me to not give up. And I suddenly opened up my eyes, taking a deep breath.

"Aro!", I called, making him appear in front of me. "You reached me..."

"Yeah, I did", he said, not believing it himself, his sad tears transforming into happy ones. He tried not to smile brightly ; he seemed so relieved. "And you're going to lift yourself up and untie that rope"

"I don't know how", I said, desperation in my voice. "I've lost all my strength, I can barely push..."

"No, you can do everything. You can control it. Remember, Lone, you can do everything."

"I can do everything", I repeated, slowly and repeatedly nodding my head, believing it on my own. "I can do everything."

"You can do everything, Lone, you can do this."

"I can do this, I have the strength to. I know I can. I can do this."

"Yes, you can."

Giving it my all, I pushed to my feet and slowly, assuredly brought myself up.

"That's it! Keep it like that. Slow and sure, you got this!"

"I got this", I repeated over and over, until my right arm reached up, pulling on the rope, trying to untighten it even just a little. I kept pulling as Aro kept encouraging me, sending words of affirmation my way. But, alarmed, a few minutes later, I lifted my head up sharply, fear resettling itself.

"They're back", I whispered. "How much time as it been?"

"Over an hour, Lone."

I took a deep breath, preparing myself for this. "I need to do this alone... in case it goes down the wrong way."

"No. No! Lone, you need me!"

He slowly disappeared and I gave him a small smile imprinted with pain and love. I mimed a "See you soon" with my lips, hoping he'd understand. The door slid opened in a fast movement, like I've always known them in the last few days. A loud thud as it fell on the other side, slightly sliding back. The guy pushed it completely off, before he lifted his head up. It was the leader. The shock and surprise that settled on his face dared me to smile.

"You- How did you get out of the ropes?!", he shouted loud enough so the others could hear. They rushed to the door, anger filling their senses. Lan approached me dangerously, ready to kill me, his fists up ready. I gripped the untied bit of rope with my other hand and with miraculous strength, I pulled myself up and rolled my legs around his neck, twisting it in a swift move, as I'd always known my body to be. My speed slowly came back into me, my habits slightly changed in the last couple of days. I looked down at his dead body, his soul probably wishing it was me laying there in lieu of him. I reached for the knife tucked in the same place he always kept it and brought it to the rope.

"Oh, no, you are not getting away with this", said another guy, his knife ready to plunge into my skin. I averted my eyes from the rope I was cutting and pulled myself up once more to push my bare feet against his chest. He fell to the ground, hitting his friends with him as he went ; they had been following their leader close behind, giving me more time to cut the rope, breaking me free a few seconds later. I rapidly untied it, the knots now falling apart easily since there were two ends perfectly able to fit out of the knots. My hand was numb, but I couldn't waste any thoughts on this. I ran for my stuff, but my weak body wasn't as fast as I'd hoped it to be ; one of the men caught me from behind, placing his knife against the skin of my neck. A swift easy kill for him, but he had to waste words. 

"You thought you were gonna win this, huh, stupid bitch? Maybe I should fuck you one more time just to prove to you how powerless you are against men our size. Yes, you killed our leader, but it didn't mean you would get free of us"

"Don't underestimate me, bandit. The only person to have beaten me on a bare-hand fight or with swords is The Thunder Beast"

I didn't give him time to react as I pushed my elbow into his stomach, the pain sharp enough to offer me time to get out of his hold. I turned around, kicking where it truly hurt. "Maybe rethink your intentions the next time you try to harass a woman... again"

Pain left him kneeling on the ground, his hands covering his crotch. As if it would help. I turned around, gripping the hilt of my sword, freeing it from the scabbard and turning toward the man again. "Or maybe you won't have a next time"

Without any mercy, I cut through his neck, separating his head from the rest of his body. The head fell to the ground, rolling a little farther away. Death filling my eyes, blood coating my face, my shredded clothes, going down my throat, I looked up to the other bandits, who seemed ready to fight. "You wanna keep underestimating me again, bandits? Or you want me to give you the chance to run away, tail between your legs as I chase after you."

"You got luck with these two, it won't be a piece of cake to fight three of us at the same time", one of them said, a maniacal smile drawing itself on each of their lips. I smiled as well, but dropped it a second later.

"Seems like child's play to me"

Using my speed to my advantage as best as I could, I ran to them and slashed two of their throats, leaving them to fall to the ground to bleed out until they died. I slowly looked toward the other guy who had gotten away from my blade. I was nearest the door than he was, so I closed it. He suddenly felt nervous, watching death dancing in my eyes.

"Nobody will hear your screams ; don't bother wasting your last sound on such a useless shout for help", I said as the dying sounds of the two other guys reached our ears. 

"We should have killed you before!", he said, and I frowned. I recognized his voice. It had relieved me a little more over an hour ago. 

"Nah, put her back up. I'll have my take later"

I giggled, finding it funny. I took one step over to him and he fell to the ground, tripping over his own feet. Oh? I had only taken one step, and yet, he thought that was the killing blow. He backed away to the wall, his breaths heavy and short.

"Maybe you should have had your last take before you regretted not to, huh, little guy?", I teased, slowly leaning over, a few feet away, my hands resting on my knees. 

"Please don't kill me! I'll do anything! Seriously anything! Whatever you ask of me!"

I lost my smile. "So you can roam this earth and continue ruining lives? I sure as hell won't accept that", I said, swinging my sword.

"No-!", he screamed, his last word a mere "no" shouted in hopes that I would save him. What a stupid thought.

My clothes were in shambles, was the first thing I realized while looking around. I walked over to my stuff and kneeled. I picked up my coat, glad they hadn't touched it. It had been probably too small for them to wear it, anyway. But I'm glad they hadn't gotten rid of it. I took my bag, not surprised to find it empty, but I would be okay. My bow was still there, but the arrows had all been used by these filthy men. I suddenly remembered the small purse full of coins they had stolen yesterday or the day before ; I didn't quite remember, but I then searched through their things, finding it hidden beneath a pile of clothes. I would need it ; really sorry to whoever it belonged. I would have to make a quick travel into town to replenish my needs. As I slid the purse into my bag, I headed toward the door, but a faint sound came to my ears as I stopped in front of the exit, no other sound than silence floating over the room. But I thought I heard breathing and I turned around. I had seen them all died ; which pig had still dared to breathe after my strike to end their life. I soon remembered that I had twisted the leader's neck, and maybe it hadn't killed him entirely, but only left him in unbearable pain. I slowly walked over to him, stepping over the dead bodies and turned his bodies over. He was, in fact, still alive... but barely. His eyes were blinking a few times here and there, but other than his barely audible breathing, I wouldn't have been able to tell if he were alive or not. I scoffed, rolling my eyes.

"You're lucky I found you before heading out. You deserve worse than death"

"Why... didn't you go... then?", he talked in bits, death slowly taking his life away. 

"Because I couldn't risk anybody finding you alive. You would live to see another day in that case. I can't afford that"

He didn't say anything, the pain destroying him. I kneeled down beside him and held up the sword over his face. "In your next life, each time you will try to hurt a woman or even have bad intentions toward any of them, I want you to remember my legs snapping your neck and then my sword opening a hole in your skull."

With a soft grunt, I pulled the blade down his head, killing him instantly. I stood up and walked toward the door, sliding it open, leaving their dead bodies untouched. I wanted- no, I needed someone to find them and realize someone got rid of monsters. The worst kind of monsters out there, even worse than Soo-Won, worse than my demons. And I gave the world a favor by ending each of their lives.

"I hope you have a good death" 

Chapter Text

It has been almost two weeks. 

Two weeks since I was freed.

Freed from the shackles that kept me up for an eternity. Freed from their weight on me. Freed from their knives sliding down my skin. Freed from their hands everywhere on my body.

But not freed from the nightmares, or the sleepless nights. Not one night passed since I killed them that I genuinely wanted to fall asleep. I would end up closing my eyes only from exhaustion. But as soon as their imaginary bodies approached me, I was back to reality, where I could barely control my breaths and I felt like dying all over again. Beads of sweat perling my body, from my scalp to the bottom of my feet. Each one of my limbs shaking uncontrollably. It always took me a few minutes to calm down, for me to stand up and walk, for me to feel safe, to remind myself that they cannot reach me anymore. And they can't ; except for one. Aro told me they all made their up to the Heavens, except one. And I felt it the first night. Felt his presence, lurking behind a tree, watching me with a wicked smile on his face. He would haunt me, until my very last day on this earth. He became one of them... and I had expected it. I had known it and yet ; even in death, he followed me, made this life become my worst nightmare. 

I hated the moon, the stars and the dark skies. I hated the clouds, or the thunder. The rain and the wind. The sun became my best friend, blue became my favorite color. Night became part of my nightmares, asleep or awake and day became my solace... my only one indeed. I felt myself die from within every day that went by. I was alone. Utterly alone and I felt like I couldn't be saved. But I kept asking myself if maybe I was my own salvation. I kept asking the shadows around me if what Ik-Soo said wasn't just to hide the truth, to give me the hope to keep on living, to fight for my life. I kept wondering if I should have died in that shed, if Ik-Soo's words were only trying to change the future course of actions or the previous one... And maybe because of that I shouldn't have breathed a day more that day. Maybe I shouldn't be walking toward Awa City right now. Maybe their cuts, their beating, or their weight on me should have killed me. Maybe I could have been up in the Heavens with my family, apologizing over and over again for what happened at Hakkon House. I would have been with Yona and Hak, far and far away from Soo-Won. I would have been safe, no trauma present to torment me until my last breaths. I would have been at peace...

But maybe Ik-Soo was truthful and I deserved these steps and these breaths. I deserved these words and these looks. I deserved these drinks and these foods. Because I fought for it until the very end, even when I needed someone's hand on my shoulder for me to keep going, to never give up. I earned it... and yet I still wondered if I really did. 

I was a few hours from Awa now. I had entered the territories of Earth a few days ago. My body and mind required rest and so I had done the least I could every day. I had lost a lot of weight during the days I was chained up. I had lost my strength and my daily habits. My body had tired itself to the worst after killing the bandits, but I had been under adrenaline, my sudden freedom offered to me on a silver platter. So I had taken it, but I had gone over my limits, earning days and weeks of recovery as I was moving west everyday that passed. I had also done my best to travel as far away from the Castle as I could. Even if I was supposedly dead, I didn't want anyone who knew me to find me. Not in my condition, I would not survive... I would not be able to flee or to even fight my way out. With my wounds, my opponents would be more ready than me to fight and they would know my weaknesses. My minor cuts had completely healed, but the long scar on my right cheek was still fragile. When I caught myself laying on my right side, my face touching the rough touch of the ground, I usually flinched, shoting back up in a seated position. I always forgot it. I didn't feel it, except when I touched it, when I grazed it. I had been used to live with a silky smooth skin, but now, I had to get used to something else ; a different body that somehow and sometimes felt like it wasn't mine. I hated it, hated what it had become, but I refused to give up, not after everything I had gone through. 

Night had fallen. My back was leaning on a tree. My eyes were fixed forward, his standing body a few feet in front of me. He wasn't moving ; he never had. But I was scared if I took away my gaze even for a second, he would be mere inches from my face, his hand around my throat the second I looked back. And in the last two weeks, Aro found a way to counter the rule where I had to call his name for him to appear. Every night, he would arrive at my side and watch over me. As if I needed to know he did. The first night after I had run away, he had blamed me for casting him away when the bandits arrived.

"Nothing's going to happen to me tonight either, Aro. You know that, right?", I said as I felt his presence appear at my side. He sat beside me, his legs crossed, his hands joined at his feet.

"You're stubborn, Lady Lone, we never know what might happen"

"For the millionth time, Aro, do not call me Lady. I am not that title anymore"

"And yet, I wish you were"

"I heard that. If you wanted me not to hear you, you should have disappeared first"

"On the contrary, sister"

"Anyway, I'm dead, Aro, you know damn well I can't be a Lady anymore. Mother and Father died, our sister too. I fled from the castle and found a way to die, so I'm no Lady. I'm only Lone... to you"

"You know that's not what I'm talking about, Lone"

I didn't say anything. Even if I knew what he was referring to, I refused to argue on that subject again. We can't go back to the past to correct previous mistakes, but he seemed to think not.

"Are you gonna ignore me?"

"Why shouldn't I? What I have once said went through an ear and got out the other... visibly. No offense, but I'm not wasting my words on something you don't understand"

"Maybe because I don't know what happened in that shed?"

"And I've already said that I don't want to talk about it"

"I just- I just want to know why you've changed so much. I don't recognize you"

I sadly smiled. He was 10 years old, and he lived in death less than he would have lived in life. He didn't know a thing about a monster's behavior. I didn't want to ruin his stay by my side, traumatize him by what I had gone through. He was way too young for that. 

"What are you going to do in the future?", he asked me, which made me turn my head in his direction. "What are you going to do when people ask? Ask about the scar's backstory. It's visible..."

"I'm gonna stay as mysterious as it is", I said, offering him a smile. 

Sad, he only looked down at his feet, at his hands and smiled with that grim look on his face. 

"I could have lost you in that shed, right?", he asked, taking me by surprise. It was the first time he asked me about a potential death. I guess he wanted to brush it away with a simple wave of his hand... the possibility that I could have died. But now that he realized my answers will be kept brief, he probably thought a different approach would be - maybe - more acceptable. But he was already aware of how it felt to die...

"Yes...", I simply answered. 

"Would you have gone up to the Heavens, or would you have stayed down here, roaming the earth with me?"

"Who knows...", I said with a shrug. "We will know when the time comes. If I ever forgive everyone who did me wrong, if I ever feel like my time on this earth has truly been fulfilling. I didn't die, my choice at the time will forever be different than the one I will make when my time comes. Maybe then, like you said, your unfinished business will be completed and you will find your way to the Gods. Join our family"

"Maybe..."

He didn't agree with my answer, wasn't feeling it to be honest. But I wouldn't know how to truly answer his question ; I had no way to know. He became sadder and sadder each day that passed, as if my feelings were rubbing onto him, as if he could feel my very emotions. I hoped not. I crossed my fingers that he couldn't feel my pain. Maybe he was just worried. Worried about the fact that it could very well kill me. That secret... That it could make me take up a sword and push it through my skin until my heart stopped beating. Maybe that's why he asked me where I would go when I die. 

"I don't know, Aro. To be honest with you, I haven't got a goddamn clue if I were to fly up to the Heavens or stay down here. I don't know, because that day is far enough away from me"

He looked up at me, and I could see stars slowly appearing in the dark color of his eyes. That's what he wanted to hear... and I meant it. I meant every word I said. 

"I haven't fought my way out of these freaking ropes only to die a little while later. You can count on me, Aro, I'm not going anywhere"

He smiled at me and I could see the fight in his face ; he was trying not to cry... His hand fell near my leg, resting on the ground. His next words made me see through this action.

"You should sleep"

It was a diversion. He was bringing my attention away by putting his hand there and saying those words. He knew I couldn't sleep. But I felt his energy... he was sad, he was grieving what he could have lost... and he wanted to hug me, wanted to touch me, wanted to lay that hand on my knee to reassure me, but also reassure himself. I couldn't imagine what it was like to never feel human touch. He had died before experiencing it. He didn't know what it was like and yet, his body was already used to using physical touch for any reason, as he would have been able to do in life. 

"You know I won't be able to sleep, Aro"

From the corner of my eye, I could see him nodding, but refusing to say anything else. I smiled, hating to see this expression on his face. Not when he just made me forget about my problems. About the guy that stood feet before me. Remembering him, I turned my head in his direction and stared. 

"Stay with me, Aro... Please"

His eyes filled with surprise, he turned his head up toward me and looked at me with a smile. 

"Of course, Lone"

I didn't sleep all night, as usual. I dozed off for a few minutes at some point, a noise making me come back. A bird had flew near us. It was nearly dawn, his standing body was slowly disappearing. As I turned my head toward where Aro sat, I realized he was sleeping, his body leaning against the tree. I couldn't stop my mind and my body from envying this rest he was able to get. I was also surprised to realize he was able to sleep. His peaceful face didn't mirror my situation. He would soon disappear as well. As soon as the sun bathed the forest, he would be gone from my sight. And slowly, but surely, it was going up and up into the sky. And so I leaned in and gave him a ghost of a kiss on his forehead. Even if he couldn't feel it, I know I did it. 

"See you tonight, Aro", I whispered, getting up. I gathered my things and the next thing I knew after sparing a look for my late brother was that I was walking toward Awa Port. There were only three to four hours before I could reach it. First thing I did after getting out of the forest, I stopped by a village and ate breakfast, which would have me ready to continue on my way. 

I was one or two kilometers away from Awa, I knew it, smelled the sea breeze even that far ; it was becoming stronger and stronger. I was zigzaging between the trees, trying to keep going forward, not rotating my direction. I hoped it would get me where I wanted to go. My head started to hurt, my body started to weaken. I needed to eat. Once in Awa, the first thing I would do would sign in in an inn, so I can keep my things somewhere, and since I still had money to last me a few years, I would be fine for a while. I would eat, fill my stomach and then, I will see how it goes. I had planned to stop at Awa and stay there, for no matter how much time, but until I felt like changing places. Until I felt like I didn't feel secure. 

The forest was becoming less dense the more I walked. And soon, the sun peered through the trees and blinded me, welcoming me into a new place. My hand over my eyes, I slightly opened them, looking around. A smile appeared on my face at the sight that was offered to me. Below, the city of Awa Port was full of life, merchants everywhere, citizens walking here and there, buying stuff or just looking. And right in front of me was the sea. A magnificent immensity of water and the reflection of the sun made it sparkle. This view is what I had fought for, it is what I was waiting for. I was glad to be standing here and I hoped Aro could feel it. I hoped he knew that I was happy, even if it were just a little.

Chapter Text

I didn't waste time before I made my way to the city. I had been so absorbed by the beauty of it from above that I hadn't seen the details hiding in the shadows. The lack of smiles on people's faces was blatant, the presence of joy was completly, utterly missing. When I first wished to come here and meet the same people I always did, wandering the streets when I was younger, I'd imagined them to be as happy and full of life as they were back then. Offering the widest of smiles to any traveler who arrived at the city, conversations so full of purpose. Now, they all seemed empty, like life here had been stolen by someone, or some people. It looked like something so important happened that it ruined everyone's life. And I had been walking between the streets for only fifteen minutes, but I wished I understood where that pain, that grief came from.

I continued to make my way farther and farther through the port, the colors dimmer than I remembered them to be. As my eyes set down for a few seconds, my peripheral vision still hidden by the hood of my cloak, I heard someone call for me.

"Hey, miss!"

As I turned my head toward the merchant, the old man standing behind the small booth waved to me, hurrying me to come forward. He looked like a wise man and the small smile he offered me seemed coated by years of experience and I knew, thanks to that, that his was truthful. And so, I approached the merchant and let my eyes float over what he was selling.

Third Person POV

And not far behind her, following the same path she did, a dark haired man passed by. His blue and black clothes didn't stand out much, but if Lone had seen him, her eyes would have made him stand out. This man had left his group on the cliff above the city to take a sweep through the streets to buy a few things for them while they attempted to find the person who holds the power of the Green Dragon of legend. They had planned to stay there for a while, but in no way were they considering standing out as one in the city of Awa. Not when one had bright red hair, another held immense strength in his right hand, his fingers as claws, plus one guy who would walk around in a mask, one who was the Thunder Beast who was supposed to be dead walking around with his usual weapon and finally, one young pretty boy. A suspicious group indeed. But unfortunately, Lone had not ran into Hak, and neither did he run into his childhood bestfriend. And so he continued on his way, while Lone bought an item from the kind old man who had called out to her a few minutes ago. As she left the booth, she continued on her way with no purpose whatsoever.

Lone's POV

I had been walking around the city, looking around, buying nice and cute stuff that seemed worth it. I was living a normal life ; this was a normal life. I smiled each time I reminded myself of such a beautiful thought. Oh, how I had wished to have a normal life. And now, it was daylight, no demons in sight to bother me or my calmed mind. I was at peace, even though the desolated expressions on people's faces did not mirror mine. I promised myself then that I would know what was happening in this once lively city. I took that opportunity to find an inn. My bag, as light as it could be, started to feel heavier as the hours passed. I needed rest. Way too exhausted to even search for a decent one, I picked the first one I saw and made my way into it. I then approached the worker, walking in between the tables and chairs on which often sat people. 

"I'd like a room, please"

The madam on the other side was on a certain speed limit, 'cause she was on snail mode right now. She slowly raised an eyebrow, as if surprised. She definitely looked like she hated her job. I slightly cringed at the expression on her face while she looked at me. 

"A room for one?", she asked, a high pitched voice reaching my ears.

"Yes", I nodded, my lips pursed.

She soon handed me a key. I gently took it away from her hands, slightly scared she might close her fingers on it like a trap. She saw the scar, she saw my darkened face. She was suspicious, I had no doubt. 

"Here you go. Have a great stay."

I nodded, trying not to look rude and rapidly made my way up to the rooms. I unlocked my door and made my way in. I closed the door behind me, leaning against it, falling to the ground. I took a few breaths, finally relieved to be able to sit, my legs no longer obligated to stand despite their strength. But it was suffocating in here ; I could barely breathe. So I stood up, escaping a sigh and opened the small window. The wave of freah air that made its way in reassured me greatly. I then made my way to the bed, letting me fall limply on the mattress after throwing my bag away on the ground. At least, I would have a bed tonight. Or maybe now. Now definitely felt like a good time to sleep, to be honest. 

"P- Please stop!!", someone screamed. 

I sat up in alert, perfectly aware that that sound came from outside. 

"What? We're Awa officers", a guy said as I stood up and made my way to the window. I leaned over, my eyes meeting an image these guys would have never hoped I had witnessed. 

"Just who do you think it's thanks to that you can go on living your life?", the other said, his voice slightly different. 

I cringed. I felt my blood boiling in my veins. Even if I didn't want to interfere, I couldn't let that woman be harassed by pigs like officers who thought they had every right in the world to do anything they desired just because they felt like it. But I took a deep breath, calming myself, fully returning back in my room. I couldn't ruin this new image. I couldn't let my life go to waste again. I had fought hard for this... Maybe someone would help her. Surely, there will be someone who will help her. You can't just let a woman be harassed by monsters, can you?

Monsters.

"Tell me how much I can buy you for. That's not bad, is it?"

And that one just pulled my last straw.

I turned back toward the window and ran to it. Grabbing the upper part of it, I slid my body through the hole and jumped out, landing perfectly on my feet. I couldn't say I didn't feel the ground crumble under me, because I sure felt like I would fall to the ground. But for that woman, I would not run. Not ever.

"You're bothering me... let me go!", the woman screamed before her gaze turned to mine.

The officers turned their heads toward me as I lowered mine, hiding my face as best as I could.

"She said you were bothering her. So. Let. Her. Go."

They laughed. "And who are you to order us around?", one of them asked.

I chuckled and unsheathed my sword. I took one big step to them and knocked one of them out with the hilt of my sword. He fell to the ground like a doll and as the other guy stood there, afraid and shocked, I approached him and hit him on the head. Next thing I knew, he was falling to the ground like his companion. And as I turned around to see if the woman was fine, there was already someone with her, playing doctor... or whatever the hell it was he was doing. But what shocked me most was that... his hair was green?!

Third Person POV 

Lone hid her face, propelling her gaze forward. Even with only one look toward the green haired man, she found him heavily suspicious. Trying to act as innocent as she could, she continued on her way, refusing to go back into the inn. Yes, sure, he could have seen her jump out the window, but if she returned right now, he would see her face and she couldn't let that happen. The only problem was jumping from the window weakened her legs even more. It was only a matter of minutes before they gave up on her. 

"Hey, miss! How can I thank you for your help?", the woman called after Lone.

'Great', she thought. That woman probably attracted more attention to her than she would have preferred. Now that man's gaze could linger on her back, way too curious to let her go. 

"Stay here, would you? I'm gonna be back as soon as I can. I promise", the green haired man said, a seductive note to his voice. And then, footsteps... louder and louder toward Lone. She tried to reassure herself, tried to believe that he was just following the same path as she did. But no, he was not.

"Hey... Miss...", he called after her, the same playful voice accompanying his words. "What's your name?"

"I'd suggest you leave me alone", she said, keeping her face hidden from his gaze. 

"Or what? You're gonna knock me out like you did to those officers?"

"If I do, are you gonna leave me alone?"

"I've never been beat by a woman, so it would be a first. But how much better does it feel than being hit by a man, according to you?"

"Seeing as you are also a pervert, I might kill you as well. Like I should have done to those men."

"I'd like to see you try", he was teasing, daring her to try. And she wouldn't let his words go unheard. 

She turned around, her hands gripping his coat as she pulled him in an alley just beside where they stood and threw a hand in her sash to take out a knife, bringing it dangerously close to his neck as she pressed her left forearm on his chest. She lifted her head up to him, meeting his gaze. His eyes grew more serious as the seconds passed and he realized that death itself was dancing in hers. The scar along her cheek was something he realized a few seconds later. It just brought more to his questions. 

"I can't believe I'm about to say this, but I'm actually scared to die."

No response. He slightly frowned, turning his head to the side in question, in wonder. 

"Who are you?", he asked, desperately needing to know. It wasn't just curiosity that made those words get passed his lips... it was a need. He had never met a woman capable of being such a threat. Everyone he met usually dulled in his presence. What had happened to this girl that made her become so scared and fearless at the same time. But he welcomed back his cocky smile, acting as if he didn't just see something in that woman's eyes.

She pushed herself away from him and put the knife back where it had been before she took it out. "You never met me."

The next thing he knew, the woman had disappeared in the blink of an eye. She was so fast and swift. She made no sound, disguising herself against the wind. Confused, the green haired man brought his hand up behind his head and scratched.

"I guess I should go back to the girl."

As he walked back to where the guards had been knocked out, he tried looking out for the woman, but he didn't see a single trace left behind. And once he arrived, the girl was no where to be seen, but there was a man, crouched near one of the unconscious bodies of the two officers. 

"Where did she go?", the green haired man asked, making the other man's head lift up.

"I told her she could leave. Get to a safe place before other officers come. Talking about officers, that woman had skills... strength. The only thing bothering me is the fact that she was barely able to stand."

"What?", the pervert said, turning around as if she would be there standing behind him. He was surprised.

"Her legs almost gave out when she jumped out the window."

"What an eye"

"It doesn't add up..."

"What doesn't add up?"

"Her speed, her form... that sword... I only know one person that represents that description... But it's impossible", he whispered, making it impossible for the green guy to hear anything he said.

The dark haired man stood up fast, looking in the direction Lone had run toward. "We should run. Officers could get here soon."

"In fa-"

"Hey, there! Stop! Don't move!"

"Shit! All that only to get in trouble anyway", the dark haired man commented. 

Without any word to the other, they both started running as officers followed them from behind. One of them stopped to make sure their companions were fine while the others continued on their way. But soon, officers came running from forward, making the men stop in their tracks.

"We're trapped"

"There's only one way to get out of this", the green man countered.

The other man sighed, categorically refusing to admit he was right. While the green guy jumped, knocking two of them out with his foot, the dark haired man used his fists and his strength to knock out the others. And they were running again.

"Are you a soldier? It seems you've gone through some considerable training."

"No, I'm just a traveler."

"A traveler...?"

"How about you? You don't seem ordinary yourself."

"Eh?! I'm not ordinary, as in I'm beautiful?"

"No, that's not what I'm saying."

They finally both turned in an alley as they slowed down to a stop.

"Did we lose them?", the dark haired man asked.

"Anyway, looks like we did. But I gotta go now."

"Wait-"

"Look behind you, who's that?", the green haired man teased, bringing his hand to his forehead as if to see farther.

The man fell for that. And when he realized, he turned around, realizing he was gone. He sighed, looking around in disbelief.

"Who even was that?", he asked himself. "Anyway, I really need to get back to Yona and the others. Though that woman intrigues me..."

He ended up going back to Yona and the others, but one thing Hak knew, was that Lady Lone, one of his childhood friends, had died a few weeks back. The news had reached Awa in a matter of hours and Yona had cried for two days after that. He had been hurt, deeply. Lone always was like a sister to him... But what he didn't know was that the woman who jumped out the window and hit two officers was really the person he had thought it was. 

Chapter Text

I really hope today will be different than yesterday.

After I ran away from the green haired guy, I slowly made my way back to the inn and to the comfort of my borrowed room, earning a few looks from the worker, since I hadn't used the door to get out in the first place. I was even lucky to have kept my door unlocked after I arrived, because I didn't have my key on me when I decided to jump out the window. But anyway, when I arrived back to my room, I fell on the mattress and slept throughout the day. It had been long since I had slept like I did. It was a dreamless sleep filled with uncomfortability from his ghostly presence somewhere in a shadowed corner of my room. But I slept is what counts. I had eaten a bit after I woke up, part of the few people already assembled around the tables. I'm glad my somewhat scary and not approachable appearance stopped anyone from joining me as I drank and ate. I had made my way back to my room afterwards, resting until I fell asleep... again. It was a few hours before dawn when I woke up again, disturbed by a myriad of disturbing events that my mind forced on me to witness. Dressed in a nightgown, I had brought a chair to the window and had stared out at the stars and the moon slowly disappearing as I decided what I would do during this new day, slightly hoping I would not meet that weird man again. Even though walking the streets trying to get to know more about this city wasn't gonna be easy.

But as I walked around in the city and I felt a hand tap my shoulder, I debated running away as fast as I could or turning around and putting a knife to the throat of whoever was bothering me in this early hour of the morning. I slowly turned around, not enough for them to see my face, but as I recognized the female presence behind me, I fully turned around toward her.

"You...", was the only word that got out of my mouth when my eyes met hers. 

"I wasn't sure if it was you under the hood... But the scar gave it away", she says, offering me a small timid smile. "I wanted to thank you for saving me yesterday. I owe you."

I shook my head in disagreement. "No, you don't owe me anything. I only did what I thought was good."

I remembered how much I had hesitated before throwing myself out of the window. "But you look so small with the cloak on. Yet, you hold so much strength...", she wondered.

I smiled at her comment. If she had seen me two weeks ago, she would have held so much more awe. I brush the thought, my expression changing. Maybe I could trust her. I wanted to know a lot about this place ; this place that was most certainly her home. 

"Hey", I called out. "Do you mind explaining what is going on here? I mean, in Awa?"

"Yeah! Sure. Do you mind following me? I wouldn't want indiscreet ears to hear us."

"Sure. Lead the way."

We ended up in a small house, that I came to the conclusion was hers. She offered me a seat and she joined me with tea. I accepted the cup she was pushing my way as I debated where to start. 

"I heard that the Lord of Awa was Yang Kum-Ji."

She gave me a sad smile. "Yes..."

"So the officers are all under his power, I suppose?" 

"Indeed. They are violent and sometimes ransack stores and take away women who catch their eye. And we can do nothing about it. The whole town lives in fear of Kum-Ji. We have to go day after day in hopes that everything we do is enough not to anger him or his officers."

"It's not a life..."

"We don't have a choice... It's been like that since the last king... But now that there's a new king... I still believe this town is in for no change... We're stuck with him."

"Maybe you're not...", I say, mostly to myself, thinking about Soo-Won. He proved he was not the person I always knew him to be. He's not the sweet child I grew up with. But maybe he can bring some changes to this country. "Is there no one that help you...? In any way?"

She took a few seconds to think and then she looked at me. 

"Yeah... I mean, they're pirates."

"Pirates?", I asked in shock. "Pirates are helping you?"

"As hard as it is to believe, they're not attacking us. In fact... the only thing they are attacking is Yang Kum-Ji's boats..."

"So there are people who help you... Do you know anything about what is on these ships?"

"There are rumors floating around the city"

"And what are they?"

"They think Kum-Ji is transporting important merchandise to Kaitei country... to the north."

"Important merchandise?", I wondered aloud, curious of what he may want to transport to Kai that would be so important. 

"Human trafficking", she said, her throat tight as she said the words. "Women and children."

"Pardon?", I succeeded in saying, disbelief washing away my confusion. "Are these rumors true?"

"Nobody knows. I'm sorry."

"Do you think Kum-Ji to be as cruel as this? Be honest."

Silence. Utter silence coming from her. She was hesitating. She knew his officers, knew what they could do... and yet, I really hoped that this place's lord was not following through with the damn rumors. 

"Yes."

Her answer had me pinned to the floor, realizing what this meant. The cruelty of Kum-Ji and his cronies was unbelievably demonic. But I shouldn't be surprised. After seeing what they were trying to do to this woman yesterday, it just proved to me how men can be monsters, low-lives. And I'm gonna help. I will not accept any other woman or child to be trafficked to another country so they can go through worse than I did. I won't accept. So I looked up to the woman sitting in front of me and I stared at her, perfectly knowing that death was dancing in my eyes. 

"Do you know anything about the pirates?"

"Unfortunately, no...", she answered, her voice trembling. 

"Thank you for this information. I will take my leave now."

I stood up and walked to the door. Before sliding the door opened, I half turned my head to her, my face still hidden beneath my hood. "Be careful..."

And I vanished, making my way out of her house within seconds, closing the door as I moved away from her home. I had planned on going back to the inn to plan my next move, but I was interrupted by someone. As I halted in my steps, my eyes opened only to see the green-haired man standing in front of me, while he was not the last time I had my eyes opened. 

Where did he came from?

The disgust on my face didn't wave him away.

"I highly suggest you step out of my way, pervert. I am in no mood for your curiousness."

"We'll have to change that name you give me. My real one is Jea-Ha. What's yours?", he said, a hand covering his heart as he slightly bowed. 

"What am I, your queen? You might as well lick my boots while you're at it", I complained as I made my way around him.

"For you, I'd be on my knees in an instant", he whispered in my ear as he followed near behind me. 

"How many times have you offered that horrible line and to how many women?", I pointed, not daring a look in his direction.

"Actually... none. Usually, they're the ones on their knees."

I rolled my eyes as I couldn't suppress a small smile, amused.

"I'm sorry I'm not up to your standards, but I have better shit to do than stare at you in awe, thinking you're the best man to ever exist. Now, since that's the case ; leave. me. alone."

"And why should I do that?", he asked, challenging me even further.

"Maybe because I just asked you to? Visibly, harassment is unknown to you and I think it would be a good idea for you two to get to know each other", I said as I turned around towards him, making him stop in his tracks, almost bumping right into me. "And weirdly, for no reason in particular, I'm the one introducing them to you."

"What's the fun in getting to know something that has never even approached me in all my life? Every other girl would argue with you that I'm the most attractive man they've ever met."

I lifted an eyebrow and crossed my arms over my chest. "Hmm? Is that so?", I wondered sarcastically, a playful smile decorating my lips.

"That is very so."

"Then prove it", I said, dropping the smile.

"You're in for a very dangerous game, do you realize that?"

"I don't know, you tell me"

"Perfect. Just watch"

"I'm right here"

And as he slowly approached a small group of women, I made my way into an alley, hiding not far away from him. I heard the women's gigglings, their timid words and I could even hear the blushing that appeared across their faces.

"Okay, girls, I promise to meet you all later. But I really need to get back to an important someone, so see you later."

"See you later, Jea-Ha", they all said in unison, a sing-song voice accompanying their words of farewell.

And as I heard them walk away, I felt his footsteps approach where we once stood.

"Hey-"

I could feel his cocky smile spreading. 

"Smart little thing...", he mumbled, walking away. 

I giggled as I made my way back to the inn, not encoutering any glimpse of this 'Jae-Ha'. And I hoped I never will again.

Third Person POV

The next day, Lone is standing in front of a board, staring at two pictures drawn side by side. She was watching their faces, reading their description. She didn't remember the other man drawn and didn't bother paying it more attention as she concentrated on Jea-Ha's, restraining a laugh as she turned her head in multiple angles, trying to make sense of this poor drawing. But what reassured her was that at least, hers was not drawn amongst these faces. Her victims had probably not gotten a good look at her face, but they still put a small description between the two men. "Mysterious woman wearing a cloak". Sure, that was gonna help. She laughed quietly as her head turned to the sides to verify that no one was staring weirdly at her. But her eyes landed on the green-haired man approaching her direction and nervosity spreaded to her face as she swiftly ran away to hide somewhere far away from him. She watched him walk by the board and as his eyes swiftly navigated it, he stopped and walked back before it.

He stared and stared. And then laughed loudly.

"AAAAHAHAHA! It's not pretty, but I know!! I understand what it wants to say!!"

Lone watched him, rolled her eyes, shook her head in disbelief and walked away to go buy some things.

"Well, it'll be easy to persuade him now that he's a wanted man. There's no where he can run."

"Who will be easy to persuade?", someone said from behind him.

He turned his head in Hak's direction, not even thinking it could be him. "Hnnn? Well, I never got his name-wait- WHOAAA!!"

Hak might have just realized the mistake he had made. "Are you in any position to be laughing? They posted a description of your face too, didn't they?"

Fast, his head turned toward the board again, eyeing for the pictures. "Me?", he asked, his eyes landing on the description beside Hak's. "Hahaha! This face looks funny, too."

"It's your face. It looks just like you."

"I couldn't quite hear you."

"It's your face. It looks just like you", he repeated.

"They have bad eyesight."

"Seriously", Hak agreed.

Jae-Ha's eyes swiped between his description and Hak's and squinted as he read the few words. "Oh!", he exclaimed as Hak approached the board as well. 

"Who's that supposed to be?", Hak asked.

"It's the woman who saved the other girl!" 

"Her? Well, I guess it's normal for her to be on there... More than us... Though, she isn't drawn..."

"I mean, she was hidden. The only thing they know is that she's mysterious and wears a cloak. Nobody's gonna search for her. But, talking about her! I saw her yesterday ; she's quite the woman."

"Did she lose consciousness like all your other girlfriends at the sight of your face?"

"No, it's the contrary... She's so mean..."

"Well I would be, too, if I were her. An annoying brat such as you isn't worth the hype."

"I wonder if she left Awa Port... I have been trying to find her all day", Jae-Ha mutters, ignoring Hak's words.

"Maybe I should have done just like she did..."

"Oh yeah!", Jae-Ha exclaimed. "Talking about finding her, I've been trying to find you, too! Wow, how lucky am I..."

"Oh? I'm not going to a shop like that again. Go by yourself."

"No, no. You're wrong. Actually, today... I want you!", he shouted, gripping the man's wrist with his two hands as people around stared at them, whispering among each other.

"I don't swing that way. Sorry", he nonchalantly said, walking away from the green-haired man.

"Ahhhh, wait, wait! You're wrong! You've got it all wrong! I think you're a great man! This isn't the right place so let's go someplace where nobody's around...", he tried rescuing the situation, grabbing Hak at the waist and shoulder. Hak was trying to push him away with all the strength he had, but it was useless. 

"What the hell are you planning to do by going to a place where nobody's around?!!!"

"I-", but he couldn't finish.

"Shut up!!", he screamed, punching Jae-Ha in the face with no mercy whatsoever. "The more you talk, the more I understand that 'mysterious' woman."

But as he lay on the ground, bleeding, Hak became slightly worried of what he might have just done. But a few seconds later, using his feet to lift himself up, he was standing, a horrible grin spread across his face as he continued bleeding. 

Hak was disgusted. "You're a pervert, aren't you?!"

"Oh, that name sounds familiar... But that punch just now... felt great..."

Alarmed by his quiet voice, Hak couldn't hear a thing he was saying and quickly decided it was best to run away from this creep. But as he felt the white dragon's presence nearing, Jae-Ha jumped away, landing on a rooftop as he finally could breathe more normally. 

Farther away from there, Lone had just thanked a merchant with a smile as she walked away with food she brought to her mouth in an instant, glad to taste something as delicious as this.

Chapter Text

Third Person POV

The narrator agrees with this ; it's ridiculous that Hak, Yona and Lone are walking the same streets, but they still manage to never encounter each other. Yona and Lone hiding their hair, their face or their scars under a hood while Hak walks around like he isn't one of the most researched people in all Kouka. Unbothered Thunder Beast is the daily life of the Princess and the previous General's small group. Yet, somehow, a member always ends up alarmed when another member's about to attract more attention that they're supposed to.

But the narrator also agrees with this : this is certainly not voluntary... ;)

And yet, as Hak and Yona go on different paths again after the incident in a store where a little child lost his life, neither of them was awaiting the next events of the day. And as Lone walks not so far from Hak, the only thing separating their paths a wall of bricks, they both don't realize how close they are to discovering the truth. And even as two people wearing cloaks walk in each other's steps, the only thing separating them being thick clothes covering their entire bodies, their heads, their faces, deeming them impossible of recognition. But in someone's mind, when someone's known and has been declared to be dead, the simple idea of them actually being alive is usually an illusion of the eyes, a deep desire within the heart that only hope can bring to life. Hope and love. Caring and memories. Memories that hold so much importance that not even death can make them die... disappear. It haunts you more than usual, staying with you until you realize that what you've lost can never be found again, that you have to move on whatever your heart tells you. Eventually, what happens in the past stays in the past, even if we share our thoughts, our feelings, our hurt. It stays what it will always and forever be considered like ; memories. Parts of life that we've always cherished more than some other that hold less importance. 

And the next seconds will forever be engraved in each of their minds as a relief they've been wanting to take grasp of...

Lone's POV

I have been walking around without any purpose whatsoever, enjoying the fresh air that entered and left my lungs. I took advantage of the strength my legs held when I walked. I felt different, I felt safe. This felt like my true salvation ; my way out of these nightmares, out of this horror. A beautiful ending to a life that might have not always been that pretty. And that's what I desired, what I've been searching for, what I've been seeking. 

And as I turned a corner, I stopped dead in my tracks as words reached my ear, accompanied by the ringing of a familiar voice.

"Thank you for waiting, Hak."

I freezed. I can't move. What was going on? What was my mind doing? Why was it only now, in this town that it decided to make me hear things? I could continue on my way and ignore that voice, ignore those words. Or I could wander toward it, toward them. 

"Oh? Who is that?"

A wonder, a sweet angel voice belonging to a timid, fragile and weak girl. Yet, that can't be possible. My feet won't drag me forward, won't give me the opportunity to witness such a dream. And then I heard grunts of pain and the beating of my heart reached my skull, my brain, vibrating through my entire body. Who could that pain belong to? 

"What's wrong?", a manly voice asked, practically unbothered.

"Hey. Are you okay?", that same sweet voice, worried. "You're really burning up...!", concern, confusion.

"Thank you... young lady. I'm fine now..."

That voice made me freeze even more. My heart skipped a beat. A flirty and yet hurt voice, full of pain. I recognized it. And despite these presences being at the same place at the same time, the impossibility of hearing those voices despite them having completely been erased, I jumped forward and turned in a small alley. I halted again, my breath catching in my throat as I witnessed what was happening before me. A small figure hidden beneath a cloak, a tall one by her side, the dark of his hair the exact same I've always stared that. And then, just before them, a green-haired man that only sent chills down my back. I didn't dare say a word as I watched.

"Ryokuryuu...? You're Ryokuryuu, right?", she asked and I knew, I was sure. It's her. It's them both. It's Hak and Yona.

But the green-haired man didn't answer. Instead, he looked beyond their shoulders and his eyes landed on me, meeting mine. They looked me up and down with a grin, even though I saw the pain written across it. 

"You couldn't get enough of me, darling?", he asked, confusing the others. "Looks like you've found me. I won't have to go through the problem of searching for you..."

But I was not listening, I was only staring at them, at the back of their heads. And when their gaze followed his, they slowly turned and as my mind put a name on evertyhing that they were, I felt myself weaken with relief considerably. They were fully turned toward me now, eyes widening every second as they took me in, realized who I was. Then, thanks to a magical wind passing by, it swept over my hood, waving it off my head, discovering my face, my hair, my scar. Everything that I'd been trying to hide. I first saw the tears begininng to appear at the corner of her eyes, then I felt mine.

"Lone?", she said in a tiny voice, as if scared to be wrong. I smiled, happy to hear that name coming from her mouth, making everything more real than it was, than it could be. "Is that you?"

I nodded, as tears blurred my vision. I saw spots. Spots of red, blue and green, but I saw them. I could not answer in any other way. My throat was blocked, I could barely swallow. Then she took a step toward me, slowly closing the distance. And then, as I approached as well, our proximity chased our doubts away. I wrapped my arms over her shoulders as I felt hers wrap around my waist. She was squeezing me tightly, as if she was using every strength she could muster. And I did, too. I had always been taller than her. Her body had always felt like a child's, even at 15. But now, she was 16, a runaway, and yet she didn't look like the princess I've always known her to be. Weak and fragile and a complete crybaby. My spoiled childhood bestfriend didn't look like the princess I grew up with. And as I brought her at arms' length, I slowly took off the hood away from her head and looked at her. Her hair was short, her face was gentle, as gentle as always, but I could see the fight in her eyes, in her traits. 

Then, I looked to my side to a grinning Hak and as his fist bounced off my head, I was grinning as well.

"I knew it was you who beat those damn officers", he said.

I shook my head in disbelief. "Always the emotional one, huh, Hak?", I teased, looking back at Yona. 

She was thinking. "Wait, the description in between the posters was you?"

I nodded, my lips pursed. I didn't know if I should be ashamed or proud, but I still smiled. 

"Can someone explain to me what is happening here?", the green guy asked.

I then fully turned toward him, resting my fists on my hips as I raised an eyebrow. "A reunion, what do you think? Or are you too blind to realize that? Or is it just when people are annoyed by your presence that your eyes seem to ignore their annoyance?"

"Since it doesn't happen really often, not to say never, I assumed you would warm up to me."

"Looks like it isn't gonna happen anytime soon", Hak pointed out.

I giggled, looking back at Hak with a 'thank you' smile. And then my eyes caught on a group of two people. I rapidly pulled the hood back on my head by reflex. And as Yona took their presences in, she slowly pulled back hers as well, though she didn't look alarmed. My eyes examined the small boy, as if I had seen his face somewhere. I thought, I thought ; and before I knew it, my hand was reaching beneath my sash and unfolding the paper with precaution. It was one of the few things that hadn't been destroyed by their filthy hands. They hadn't even known it was there in the first place. I held it up beside his face. He was looking at me suspiciously, untrusting of my presence. His name was Yoon. I approached him and offered him the drawing. I gave him a small smile and after he examined the whole paper, his eyes dragged up to me with hope. I nodded, giving him a silent answer to his silent question.

"He was kind enough to offer me shelter for one night. And without him, I would never be here today, giving you this drawing. He's clumsy as hell, but he'll be fine", I said and I saw water rise in his eyes. He laughed lightly, making me smile. 

"Thank you"

I slightly bowed and turned toward everyone else. Hak and Yona were smiling, though Jae-Ha and the white guy weren't moving much, confused. 

"I think I will make my way away, now", the green haired guy said as he winked at me. 

"Princess! This is the Green Dragon!", the white guy suddenly shouted. 

Hak was behind him in an instant as he kept a chokehold on him. "You'll be on your way, huh?"

"I'm Ryokuryuu..."

Hak loosened his hold, letting him go. "You were Ryokuryuu...?", he asked, visibly confused. And I was even more confused.

"Wait, what? Ryokuryuu as in the Green Dragon of Legend?", I asked.

Hak looked up at me. "We'll explain to you later I promise"

I nodded, even more confused as they went on with their conversation. 

"Oh, you're the one from that wanted poster?", Yona realized. "I heard about you from Hak... and wanted to meet you. I'm glad you turned out to be Ryokuryuu. I'm Yona. What's your name?"

"It's nice to meet you. My name is Jae-Ha", he introduced himself, making me cringe because of how he said it. He seemed in a transe, worse than the flirting. "I didn't want to meet you at all", harsh. "...young lady."

"Did you know I was here?", Yona asked, slightly surprised.

"I didn't think you were this cute of a girl, but I've been feeling the presence of Hakuryuu and Seiryuu around here lately, so I knew"

Hakuryuu ; the white dragon, which I assumed was the guy standing not too far, listening to the conversation. My eyes ventured down to his arm, the one that's said to contain the power of the white dragon's claws. Impressive. But Seiryuu wasn't anywhere with them. The one possessing the power of the blue dragon's eyes. Indeed, dangerous...

"If they came along with their master, I was planning to say ; "I have no interest in serving you. Please go home.""

They all stayed silent. The princess was the one to break the silence. "I'm not Hakuryuu or Seiryuu's master. Right now, they are lending me their powers. I came because I want to ask you to lend me your power, too"

"I'm glad I seem reliable to a cute girl... or two...", he said, shifitng his gaze to me for a few seconds. I frowned, showing him how much I disliked him. I couldn't tell that I could take of myself, because he already knew that. He was just teasing me, triggering me ; and it was working. "But I'm sorry. I don't happen to have the ambition to... live and die for King Hiryuu's sake like Hakuryuu does. I'll choose the people I need to protect... and I'll decide for myself where I'll die. So I'm not interested in lending you my power, miss."

"Jae-Ha. You don't need to act so menacing. It's alright"

I was as surprised as Jae-Ha could be. Yona would have fought for him. Like she would fight for anything she asked and the King would give without question. What a change... "Eh..."

"I understand. I'll give up on you"

"Princess...!", the Hakuryuu screamed.

"I'm just asking a favor of him. It's not a command"

"You're stepping back rather quickly...", he looked almost annoyed she didn't put up a fight. 

"Should have chosen a different kind of person for that conversation, you green pervert", I said, offering him a grin. He looked at me, shaking his head in disbelief. 

"You're telling me outright. Not listening to you is an unsightly thing to do. It's really, really too bad. I wonder why? When I meet one of the four dragons... it feels really hard to separate from them", there was the princess I knew. Complaining about what she can't have. And yet, there was an old part of her I didn't see in this conversation. 

"I feel bad, too. You're the first cute girl I've met in a while... or more like the second...", he said, sparing an eye in my direction. A comment I rolled my eyes at. "Besides, I was planning on making him and her a friend...", he added, looking at Hak then at me again.

"Not listening to me is an unsightly thing to do", Hak said, echoing Yona's words. 

"And you already know my opinion on this problem", I voiced.

"Hak? Lone?", Yona asked, visibly confused.

"He says he's a pirate", a pirate? Could he be someone I was unconsciouly looking for. "He's been annoying me for a while, telling me to meet his captain"

"That's cold", Jae-Ha said. 

"Has been annoying me on different circumstances, though", I commented, mad at him for not telling me he was a pirate.

"I would have annoyed you with this, too, if you hadn't hid from me all day", he said, giving me his cocky smile.

"A pirate?", Yona asked. "Jae-Ha... I want to talk to your captain"

"Why? So you can give Hak and Lone to us?"

"No, I'm not handing them over", blunt. "You're the ones who are fighting against Lord Yang Kum-JI, right?"

I was impatiently waiting for an answer. Because if they were, I would be fighting on their side in an instant, without hesitation.

"Yesterday, I saw a government officer kill a child. I remember that, and even now I can't stop shaking with anger... and at me, who couldn't do anything. I don't want to see another child murdered for no reason. Is there something we can do to help you all fight against Kum-Ji?"

"I see. I'll set aside young miss' request to cooperate for now. If you bring Hak and Lone to us, you'll be able to meet the captain. Tomorrow... come to our ship", he said as he strode away.

Don't worry, green guy, I will be there, accompanied by them or not.

Chapter Text

I have left the inn and joined Yona and Hak on the cliff at the edge of the forest. I have met everyone. We have discussed about many, many things, but they mostly explained to me what happened the night of Yona's sixteenth birthday until I discovered them. They explained the purpose of their journey, and it made sense. It made sense even when we were talking about prophecies and dragons and powers. Anyone sane enough would have pushed this possibility aside. But I was the least sane person this world had known. Yona and Hak did not know about my... ability to see the dead. And nor did I plan on telling them. This was my sweet secret, never to be told, to be whispered or to be written. It was to stay an untold truth between very few people who understood what I bore. 

We have laughed and smiled and discussed until it was time for supper. We ate, sat around a fire. The sun had gone down, no trace of it above the darkened sea. The only light present was the stars, the moon and the flames dancing, bringing so much meaning to the silence surrounding us. At least, it did to me. I remembered falling against the table, knocking the lamp off of it, illuminating the room with a new sort of light. A deadly one. It felt as though it happened an eternity ago. It didn't feel like a few weeks, it felt like years, decades... centuries. It felt as though I had died and been reborn again and again. It felt like a memory of an ancient life. After all I'd gone through, from my leave of the castle to my arrival at Awa Port, I'd almost forgotten about the accident at Hakkon House. Almost. The gentle memory of my mother and her silk like hair, her deep ocean eyes, the smile so sweet and innocent she used to give me. The hours spent with my father training, his harsh words of an unborn heir he couldn't bring to the world ; a thought toward Aro, my late brother who never could see the light and never could know the beauties and the uglies of living. My bully of a sister, her plans of marriage ; her once sweet words and face becoming a swirl of ugliness coated by lies and mockery, insults and hate.

Everyone had finished eating, Yoon had taken each of our plates and put them in water. I watched him go, watched them all go. They were sitting around the fire, staring at the bright light emanating from it, the flames going up and up into the sky. Yona was squeezing her cloak around herself harder and harder, as if she were cold. It was, indeed, a chill night. Unusual for a summer night. She had that look on her face in which you could see she was lost in her thoughts. Of memories, just like I was moments before. The white dragon was screaming away bugs and such, the blue dragon stayed still, petting his squirrel that was named Ao. His mask made me wonder what was under it, the color of his eyes, their intensity. My thoughts wandered to the green dragon, his annoying personnality, his flirty smiles, the stares. And then I realized the grave mistake I had just done. I shook my head violently and ignored his cocky smile and his smart words. 

"You couldn't get enough of me, darling?", or something like that. I could't quite remember ; the only thing haunting my mind was their presence right in front of me. I closed my eyes hard enough to believe it would whisk away his face. And then, I was brought back to reality by a gentle, soft voice. 

"Lone... It's your turn. Tell us your story", Yona said, still staring at the fire. And then she turned her attention toward me as she realized that I wasn't speaking. She was pleading, with her eyes, her face. I saw her gaze drift to my scar, watched her eyes as they lingered on my right cheek. "I want to know."

I sighed, bringing my cloak tighter around my shoulders. I could feel Aro's presence behind me. He wanted to know what happened ; the story behind the scar, but little did he know I was gonna keep that part out. For my sake. For everyone's sake. 

I lifted my head up and realized they were all looking at me. They were all interested. Maybe not all in my story, but in my scar. I smiled, slowly nodded as I decided I was gonna tell them my story, just like Yona had asked. "The information by which your father had died had never reached Hakkon House", I started as I looked at Yona. "My family had died and I had not known that yours had, too. I didn't have a clue as I ran out of my burning house. Everyone was gone by the time I had gone out", my eyes were now solely on the fire, my mouth forming the words. I was remembering Min-Ren and the fear in her eyes, the fear replacing the hope and the relief. I remembered her body as it was dragged in the house by an invisible force. "I was taken to the palace, thrown in a cell and as far as they knew, I was the one who murdered my family and the staff at Hakkon House and burned my house down. I was waiting for death to come claim me. I wanted to die in that very moment ; not of shame, not of guilt, but because I was scared and grieving. I wanted to die until Soo-Won saved me. I would have rather kept on arguing with him, argue that I had done it than accept his help if I had known what he had done. I will skip my boring stay at the castle, however calm it was. The day I left, I had overheard a conversation between Soo-Won, his advisor Kye-Sook and the General, Joo-Doh", I remembred Joo-Doh's screams under the rain, his begging for my going back into the castle, the one I went against. I remembered the guilt in his eyes as he said he would have to kill me, and the despair in his face when he realized he couldn't. "They thought I would make a great ally. They thought I would be on their side. They were trying to persuade Soo-Won to tell me about what truly happened. They were trying to persuade him to tell me he had killed King Il and that he put the blame on Hak, also accusing him of kidnapping Princess Yona. But the worst was ; he wanted to marry me. By force or not. I couldn't say no ; I could not refuse the King. I would have to go against my will, my desires. I escaped getting married that night, when he came knocking at my door. I hated him ; I always will. So I fled. It's funny to say this, but I had planned on finding your bodies", I said as I offered a smile to Yona and Hak before returning my gaze to the fire. "I wanted to make sure they got a proper burial. You deserved that much. But I encountered a problem ; several castle guards blocking my way whatever way I used. And I met a group of people. I'll spare you the details, but they made sure I 'technically' died. They orchestrated my death. But the person who acted as me actually died that day. She had sacrificed herself. I had a feeling she wasn't happy, but I never thought she wanted to die", I remembered the realization when we knew something was wrong. I remembered her words as she flew past me and up into the Heavens. "I made my way toward where your bodies had been said to lay dead. But I found nothing ; instead I found a clumsy priest", I continued as I glanced toward Yoon. "Without me telling him, he knew everything about me. Things I couldn't have known until I lived them. And then I left, and slowly, surely, made my way to Awa Port"

I looked up at Yona. The look in her eyes told me she was deceived. She listened to my story. But did not hear what she was waiting for the most. She wanted the reason behind my injured cheek, wanted to know what her bestfriend had gone through. The others knew, too, but didn't ask. I stood up abruptly and made my way toward the forest. 

"I'm going for a walk. Going to be back in a few minutes"

I wasn't entirely truthfull. I had revisited every moment of my life telling them my story ; the simple reminder of what I had gone through was enough to make panic rise inside of me. I had needed a breath of fresh air, even if that were one of the only things surrounding us, I felt crushed by a lack of it. The people listening, looking at me as if they could see through me and know exactly what happened ; a part of my story I didn't want to tell. The scar was the proof they all needed to know the moment existed. If it hadn't been there, I wouldn't have to pretend like nothing had happened. I wouldn't have to pretend that the torture I went through for several days hadn't existed. But it did, and even if they didn't know what exactly, they knew, thanks to that cut sliding from my eye to my jaw. It ruined my face. It was only a couple of minutes later, when I was far away from them, that I let my short heavy breaths show. I let the tears fall along my cheeks. My bottom lip was trembling, my legs could barely hold me up. I slid down against a tree, my breathing fast and uneven. I couldn't control the tears, the panic, my breathing. I couldn't control anything. I hated this. I hated everything. I hated myself. 

I hate myself.

Then, after what seemed like an eternity, I got hold of my breaths. My cheeks had dried. I was fixing a faraway point, my gaze not drifting away as I inhaled and exhaled like my life depended on it. Slow and steady until I was calmed down enough. His presence appeared at the corner of my eyes. I tried to ignore it. But then, Aro walked right in front of me, his fists on his hips, looking down at me with deception.

"You have to be kidding me, Lone"

I was in no mood for this. "Please, Aro, if you have to scold me for anything, do it another day. I'm way too exhausted to endure that right now"

"Why didn't you tell them?"

"For the same reason I didn't tell you, little brother. And as far as I know, it is none of your business what I decide to keep to myself. This secret stays with me, even if the scar betrays me"

"Anyway, they are going to worry. You've been gone for way more than a few minutes"

"Nothing will happen to me, Aro. I can take care of myself"

"I know. But how would you feel if one of them got away from you again and didn't return for a long while?"

I felt my chest thighten. He was right. 

"I will be going back soon, trust me. Just give me time to appear presentable. My eyes probably look red and puffy... ugly"

"Okay, change of subject then. What about that pervert guy? What was his name again? Jae-Ha?"

"What about him?", I asked innocently.

"Are you kidding me? The guy's litteraly flirting with you"

I raised an eyebrow. "He's flirting with everybody, Aro. I don't know if you realized, but I'm just another girl he has to make fall in love with him"

"And you are?"

"I am not in love with someone who considers women as a hobby"

"It's not really a hobby. He just admires them"

"Well, he has a special way of showing them he does, but that doesn't go right by me. You don't have to be a prostitute to fall in the arms of a guy like that. Everyone does"

"And you will, too?"

"Have you not heard me? I wish for true love, not a one-sided relationship with someone who sees me only for my beauty. Or someone who only admires me", I finished, mocking Aro.

"Aren't you gonna tell him off?"

I stood up, patting the dirt off my cloak. I started my way toward Awa, Aro's footsteps echoing behind me.

"So?"

"I already did. And he visibly didn't understand well"

"So what are you gonna do?"

"Who knows? One day, I'll grow tired enough to tell him off again. Right now, he's entertainment"

"So you're gonna play with him?"

"Play with him? What's the problem with that? He's doing the same with me"

"Which makes you no better than him"

"Nuh uh. If I were really no better than him, I would not show him I don't care... or that I'm not interested"

"If you say so...", he finally said, raising his hands in the air in surrender as I arrived near the group a few minutes later. 

"You all right, Lone?", Yoon asked me.

I offered him a smile, my gaze drifting to the sea spreading before me. "Yes. Much better"

He nodded, letting me know he understood. He seemed relieved. Yona was still by the fire, alone. Hak and the others had gone to sleep. "I'm going to sleep. Make sure to drown out the fire before you go, too", Yoon said.

"Sure will", I let him know as I approached Yona. I sat not too far away from her, my gaze lingering on the fire. I saw her look up at me, a neutral expression on her face, but I could tell, without even seeing it, that she was sad and tired. But she looked back toward the fire a few seconds later. 

"Is it that bad... whatever happened to you?", it didn't take me by surprise. I was waiting for this, somehow. I knew she was the only one capable of asking this question outright, even if I felt like not talking about it. A small smile appeared on my face. Like the one an older sister would wear for her younger sister to tell her everything's alright, that she didn't have to worry about anything. The only difference in that situation was that I was at least gonna explain to her how bad it had been.

"Yes... Yona. It is the worst thing I've had to go through in all my life. I've debated letting myself die. I almost did... But I'm here now, so there's nothing to worry about"

"I'm sorry you had to go through that..."

"It's not your fault. If I had been more careful, it wouldn't have happened..."

She looked up at me, tears slowly swelling her eyes. If her question hadn't surprised me, that surely did. I turned toward her, my own tears threatening to appear at the corner of my eyes. She threw her arms around my neck. I stayed still until my arms wrapped around her waist. 

"I wish I could have been there for you, Lone!", she cried against my shoulder. "I wish you would have been with us since we fled the castle!"

I let her cry on my shoulder for a few minutes. If the others were deranged by her screams and cries and sorries, they didn't complain. After a while, she unwrapped her arms and looked me in the eyes. She smiled and got up. She fell asleep near Hak. I put out the fire and joined them. 

Though, I stayed far enough away from them so that when I woke up, in the middle of night, panting and sweating, I wouldn't have to wake anyone because of my sudden movements. I looked around, a little giddy. Then, putting a hand on my chest, where my heart should be, I took a few minutes to calm my breaths. I had had another nightmare. I stood up and made my way to the cliff. I kept my sword with me ; I didn't want to risk anything. I sat on the edge and crossed my legs. I don't know how much time I've slept, but I wish the sun would rise soon. 

"You had a nightmare?", someone asked, making me jump. But Hak's familiar voice restrained me from pointing my sword at him. He took a place beside me, looking toward the horizon. 

"Like always... A usual thing during the last few weeks, let's just say... What about you?"

"I always keep an eye open. I heard you wake up, so I decided to join you"

"What a kind move..."

"Oh, I can go back to sleep if you want", he said, pointing back toward the others.

"No. No... Stay. Makes me feel less alone"

Silence fell, but I could guess he was preparing his next words. 

"Must have been hard... being alone all this time. I heard your conversation with Yona earlier last night"

"I never thought I would see you alive again, so it kinda makes me forget my loneliness. Doesn't mean I would do it all over again though"

"I wouldn't, either... But, you know, the scar doesn't look that bad"

I smiled sadly, bringing my hand to my right cheek, grazing the fragile skin around the scar. "I hate it...", there was no point in hiding that truth away from him.

"It makes you appear more mysterious and dare I say, sexier"

"Oh please, shut up!", I shouted, leaning against him to push him with my shoulder playfully. 

"No, I'm for real, Lone. Use this scar as a trophy. Use it as a threat, a weapon. That wound, added with the look in your eyes... the new one ; you won't be underestimated"

"Okay? And what does the fact that I'm sexier have anything to do with that?"

"You've grown more mature in the last weeks, Lone. Like Yona. The scar on your cheek's like Yona's hair"

"So you admit Yona's sexier, too?", I asked, teasing him. 

He shook his head, trying to block out the words I just said. 

"You know, you're the only one who can say that to me without me actually threatening you for it"

I chuckled. "Oh, that's because I'm your favorite"

"Or maybe because you're a woman"

"Hahaha", I fake laughed. "Keep lying to yourself, Hak"

"Okay, that's it. I'm going back to sleep"

"You're gonna leave me alone?"

"I sure am. You're annoying"

"And you love me for it"

"Stop talking, or I'll have to mark an "x" on 'Never hit a woman'"

A little while after he was gone, I kept smiling. Maybe it was me realizing I hadn't lost people I extremely cared for. Maybe it was me acting with old friends like I always did, everyday of my life, until King Il's death. Or maybe it was just a new beginning, with our friendship the only thing following us from the past. Because for me, in that moment, nothing from my past has followed me here, right now. 

Chapter Text

We were all standing there, on the pirates' boat, in front of them. If my eyesight didn't betray me, the captain of this crew was that woman, her hair-up with her pipe in her hand. She was old, kind of looked like she should be retired, but I guessed that if she was up, standing before us with that determined look on her face, it's because that meant she earned her place. Her trust, though, didn't look like it would be easily earned. 

"I'm Yona. Are you the captain?", Yona asked, presenting herself. 

"...I am... Captain Gi-Gan", she looked distrustful. Like she wanted us off her boat this instant. 

"I heard something from Jae-Ha. He said you want to cooperate with us",  Yona said.

"Yes", the captain agreed. 

The captain approached us and stopped before Shin-Ha. 

"What's with that mask?"

I wondered right then if she was going to try to rip it off his face and what would be his reaction about that. 

"Take it off", but she did it herself, making Shin-Ha bring his hands up to his face, instantly hiding his eyes. And as she tried to get him to take his hands away, I couldn't restrain a small laugh. Yoon came to Shin-Ha's defense.

"O-oh, he's an extremely shy person!"

She suddenly let go of him, turning toward us, toward Yoon, as if she was specifically talking to him.

"The thing that matters to me the most is trust"

Obviously.

"Who would ask for the help of people who can't be trusted?"

"But..."

I turned my attention toward Hak, waiting for his next words. He was grinning stupidly.

"We're strong, captain"

She looked like she was considering something. I backed away a few steps to let them get the spotlight. Gi-Gan's men were surrounding them slowly. This was a show of their abilities. And she wasn't gonna be deceived. 

"If this is all they have we'll definitely win", one of them said.

"Captain, we're outnumbered no matter how you look at it", another added.

"You're right. This is too much. Right?", Hak said, making me grin.

"Yes", Ki-Ja seemed to agree.

"I alone am enough to take them all down", they both said at the same time.

The other men seemed insulted, as if they really believed they were strong enough to defeat Hak, the white dragon and the blue dragon by themselves. "Just try it!!", one screamed. And I watched as each one of them got beat up to the ground. They were lucky they went soft on them, because they would have been dead otherwise. My arms were crossed on my chest, watching the halo of bodies surrounding the three men. Jae-Ha was leaning against a door, watching them. 

"How are you feeling, Captain Gi-Gan?", he asked. She didn't look impressed ; she kept her neutral expression.

"Do you want us now?", Hak asked her, as though daring her to refuse them, despite their strength. He knew he had made an impression. 

"It's no use, Captain. Their strength is abnormal", one of the bodies laying on the ground said.

"They're like three of me", Jae-Ha bragged, although I wouldn't put it like that. He then looked up at me, his eyes piercing. I could see the silent question in his gaze. Why didn't I join them? I won't have anything to prove now. I looked away, following the captain's movements.

"You pass", she said as Yona and Yoon seemed relieved. "Don't relax too quickly, you brats. What can you do?"

"I don't like violence, so I don't fight", Yoon answered. "Other than that, I can do anything. Cooking, sewing, hunting, treating the wounded, and if I have the ingredients, I can make explosives. I'm also a pretty boy"

I watched her as her gaze passed to me. "What about you?", she asked, pointing her pipe toward me. So I lifted my head, letting some light reflect on my face. For a few seconds, she looked at me, straight in my eyes. And for less than one, her gaze lingered on my scar, realizing its presence. She slightly smiled. The soft look in her eyes made me freeze. This woman... she knew. She knew what I've been through without even asking. She looked at me, stared in my eyes, barely looked at my scar. But she saw death dancing in them. Dancing in my eyes. She saw the pain and understood it. But for my own sake, I had to answer. 

"I can fight. I'm stronger than you might think"

"Oh, I don't underestimate your abilities. With a cut like this, girl, you've got a lot on your back, and yet, you still walk with your head high. I like you", she said, loud enough for others to hear. And then, as her eyes shifted to Yona, I looked at my friend.

"And you? What can you do?"

"Me...? What... I can do..."

I could see the sweat rolling down her face as she tried to find things she could do on her own. I felt bad for her, but this was her challenge, this was her fight ; not mine.

"Nothing, huh? Someone who can't do anything here will be a hindrance."

"I-"

"Kum-Ji had a large number of difficult people working for him in this town. But if you don't have the strength, then even if you fight back, you will only lose your life. It's impossible for a little girl like you. Go home"

Even if her words were harsh, they were true, no matter the way you looked at it. But seeing how she had grown, I knew Yona could find a way to prove herself.

"If this person cannot join then we-", the white dragon started, making me look right at him, frowning.

"Ki-Ja", Yona interrupted him. She couldn't let herself be continuously protected by other men, other people, because in that case, she won't be able to fight for herself. But if it ended with her not being able to prove herself, then I will find a way she will. "It's fine. It's as captain Gi-Gan says. But there's a reason I can't retreat, either"

I could see, in the corner of my eyes, some of the men's faces lighting with surprise. But on mine, a smile grew and as my attention drifted to the captain, I could see she saw the resolve in Yona's heart.

"Isn't that nice? How about I give you a job... that will prove whether or not you'll be useful... or whether you'll be a person I can place my trust in? A high-risk job"

"A high-risk job...?", Yona asked, curious.

"Yes. Right now, you're extra baggage that serves no purpose. If the baggage is to fight alongside us against Kum-JI... I'll need to see if you are appropriately prepared to do it"

"Prepared..."

I kept staring at them, a little confused of how much importance that test held. The riddle in the captain's voice made me impatient.

"Understood", Yona agreed. "What should I do?"

"How about you go and pick the senjusou?"

And as I looked around at her crew, the men were really making their worried opinions show. 

"Captain, that's a bit too much..."

"Don't interrupt me! Senjusou grows on the vanishing cape. It's a medicinal remedy that can cure the sick and wounded three times faster than normal"

I could see in Yoon's eyes how excited he looked, but he did not seem to realize the way Yona would use to get there. I've been to Awa Port a few times when I was young, and any normal traveler would say they don't know what the vanishing cape was or where it was, but I knew almost everything about this beautiful city and I sure knew what it looked like.

"It's a valuable medicine within Kouka Kingdom that only grow on the vanishing cape. The people in Awa who know about it are small in number", of course I didn't know about it until now... "Because there is a small amount, it must not be completely plucked. Of course, Kum-Ji must not come to know of it. They would sell it and place an outrageously high tax on it. If we have that plant, our injured comrades will recover quicker. It's something we'll greatly need for future battles. The guy who usually picks it has been injured. If you do it in his place... You'll be accepted"

"I understand"

"Oh, I forgot to tell you", she said as she approached Yona near enough that their faces were only a few centimeters apart. Her pipe was pointing above her chest. She was slightly leaned toward her. Yona was listening. "The senjusou grows on the side of a very steep cliff. Nobody is to lend you a hand in getting it. And you are to go alone"

"Wha...?!", Yoon and Ki-Ja shouted, visibly concerned. I was frowning, worried. "So that was your plan from the start!", Yoon said, turning toward our red head friend. "Yona, this is crazy!"

I wanted to agree with him, help him in dissuading her from getting it, but I had to give her a chance to do this. I had to believe in her.

"Yoon, please...", Yona called his name, trying to wave away his worries. "This is my job"

"That's the spirit", Gi-Gan said, a smile decorating her lips. "Jae-Ha, guide her"

"Yeah, yeah", he reluctantly agreed, rubbing the back of his head. I watched him as he approached Yona, daring him to not keep an eye out for her. His gaze met mine and he winked at me, making me flinch.

"Well, then... I'll be leaving for a bit. I'll be back soon, okay?", Yona said enthusiastically, as Jae-Ha led her off the boat.

"Is it alright to let her go?", Yoon asked.

"We have no choice", I finally chimed in. "This is her fight, whether we like it or not. I know your blood is telling you to save her or whatever, but you need to understand that she can't always rely on you all"

"She's right", Hak agreed, even though he looked heavily worried. He had not said a thing about Yona's decision, had not reacted, had not even flinched or jumped in surprise until now. He knew he had to let her go, just as much as I did, even if it was dangerous. I sat beside him.

"I'm pretty sure Jae-Ha's gonna stay close enough to be able to save her if something happens", I said, trying to reassure him as much as myself.

"I don't care if that droopy-eyed pervert is there to keep an eye out for her, I would have to be there to keep still"

I gave up trying to calm him down. It was of no use. For the next minutes, I was pacing back and forth, waiting for her to appear in front of me. The more time she was taking, the more worried I grew. Smaller conversations were going on between Yoon and the two dragons. A few others between the crew members. I had let my hood down ; it helped me breathe better. It let my hair fly with the light wind. To my surprise and satisfaction, it didn't earn me weird looks and judgement, which made me feel good. And as the minutes went by, and the voices were low, there was one question that had me looking toward the captain, loud enough so everyone could hear.

"What's wrong, Captain?", one of them asked. 

My eyes set on the woman, watching as her eyes traveled over the sea. She seemed alarmed, worried.

"The sea has become rough"

"Huh? Really?", he asked again, visibly confused. The sea looked as calm as it had a few mintues before, but I wasn't gonna doubt the intuition of a pirate.

"At this rate, that girl will be in trouble if she doesn't hurry up."

And the next second, Hak was up and away, running toward where Yona and Jae-Ha had been seen to go. 

"Thunder Beast!", Yoon called.

"Hak!", I called after him, running in the same direction he did.

"Lone!", I heard my name being called, but I ignored it. I had to stop Hak before he made a mistake. But I also had to make sure Yona was okay. I needed to be sure nothing was gonna happen to her. They all followed us, some slower than others. When we all arrived, the captain was standing between Hak and Yoon. Yoon looked like he was about to throw up, the white dragon had already fainted, while the others looked as calm as they always were. I had some difficulties trying to keep a straight face as my eyes set on the steep cliff I had only seen once. It had looked smaller and less dangerous in my memories. This was frightening.

"Hey... The senjusou grows in this type of place...?", Yoon asked, trying to convince himself that it wasn't true, that there was no way that it could be real.

"I said it was a steep cliff, didn't I?", the captain repeated.

"It's too steep!!", Yoon screamed.

The wind was harsh, the water threatening. Yona would be pushed off this cliff with a small wave. I had to agree with Yoon on this one. But I couldn't object to what my bestfriend had agreed to. Not now, not until she was truly dead. And I really hope I'll never have to object.

"This is too much! The sea is rough, and the raging winds could have blown her away!", Yoon shouted, making it even worse.

"I am going down to help her", the white dragon said.

His words had me moving in front of him, blocking his path to Yona.

"Get out of my way! I have to save her!", he screamed at me, trying to find a way around me. I unsheathed my sword. As much as I didn't want to do this, I had to. I pointed the blade at his throat. The captain was turned toward us.

"That girl took on this job to earn my trust. Do you all want to tread on her resolve?"

"So back off, please", I said, pleading with my eyes, looking at Ki-Ja.

"Don't you want to save her? She's your bestfriend, isn't she?"

"Yona is just a girl!", Yoon cried out.

"Even women have times when they must fight", the captain said, making my gaze fly toward her. "Don't underestimate them"

I could see the chills going down Yoon's back ; the expression on his face said that much. He looked scared, scared of her. 

"Are you fine with this, Hak?", Ki-Ja asked, turning to the guy in question. "Even if Lone won't help her, surely you would save her, right? Hak!"

He had that look on his face ; like he wanted to do something but he knew he couldn't. He didn't look approachable. 

"Yona...", Yoon murmured, tears appearing in his eyes, as if he somehow knew that Yona was dead. And that if she weren't yet, she was going to. 

"Don't despair, yet!", I shouted. "Believe in her, a little, would you? She's way stronger than in your thoughts, you stupid brats!"

Then, I saw the blue dragon pat Yoon on the shoulder. He was pointing in a direction, which I immediately looked in. I squinted, trying to see what Shin-Ha was seeing, but I couldn't see anything.

"Yona!!", Yoon called, finally noticing her presence.

A relieved smile appeared on my face, making me breathe more easily as I realized she was still alive. 

"You all came!", Yona screamed, happy to see us. Yoon was the first one to run towards her, his arms out, ready to hug her. But she wasn't entirely done with this test. 

"Where is the senjusou?", the captain asked.

"Right here", Yona said, pulling a small bag out of her cloak.

"Indeed, it is", Gi-Gan confirmed as she looked within the bag after taking it away from Yona's hands as she offered it to her. "Then, did you keep your promise...?"

"No", my eyes widened. "I received help from Jae-Ha"

As I looked toward him, he looked as alarmed as I was.

"Yona!", he screamed, trying to dissuade her from making a mistake. 

"A big wave suddenly came and almost threw me out to sea... Jae-Ha rescued me", she didn't feel ashamed of being honest. She was ready to take responsibility for all of it. "I wasn't able to use my own strength"

"Does that meant you're giving up?", the captain asked, visibly confused of what Yona wanted to do. What was her purpose exactly?

"No. I'll go get it again by myself"

I only smiled, but I watched the captain's expression. She was surprised, but then exploded laughing. "If Jae-Ha had stood by and let a girl who had fallen into the sea die, I would have thrown him into the sea myself", she approached her, examining her. "Your eyes are red. You cried a great deal, didn't you?"

"Salt water just got into my eyes!", she said, but I could see she was ashamed of that. 

"Your hands are injured, and your legs are wobbly. You have guts, don't you? People like you never abandon their comrades even when they're in the face of danger. I don't dislike idiots like that. Get on the boat"

I smiled as I heard people cheer her on. And as her eyes met mine, finally, she smiled. I approached her and wrapped my arms around her, earning complaints from the guys around.

"I'm proud of you, Yona", I said, as her arms wrapped around my waist. 

I broke the hug a few seconds after, watching her fall to her knees as she let out an exhausted sigh. 

"You should get some rest, Yona!", the white dragon screamed, alarmed by her sudden fall. I shook my head as I walked away, toward the edge of the cliff. I kept my gaze on the sea, on the bright sun mirroring against its bluish color. I smiled, realizing how much of a good day today was. 

Chapter Text

I'm staring in nothing in particular. I'm staring at my own thoughts. How I was ready to let Yona die so she could earn the captain's trust. I don't know what I was thinking. I only now realize how mean and horrible I had been to myself. Realizing the violent death that could have taken Yona away from me, I feel disgusting at my previous reaction. I can't stop thinking about how I would have lost her, and how torturous it would have been to remind me everyday that I was part of the reason why she had died. I kept trying to remind myself, though, that she hadn't, that she had survived, even if it was with shaky legs, injured hands and red eyes. She was there, I was there and that's all that mattered. But it didn't chase away my worries. I don't know what I would have done if she would have perished among the waves.

I was standing near the edge of the cliff, looking straight in front of me, thinking. Thinking and thinking and thinking until I could get back to the boat. My feet refused to move, refused to bring me away. But maybe I didn't want to. Maybe until the guilt was gone, I couldn't allow myself to walk, to walk away from the horror of my thoughts. I kept staring and thinking until a voice reached my ears.

"You have the strength, but do you have the will to use it?"

I turned around and there she was. The old woman, the captain of the pirates. She might have seen me, thought about why I would have been standing there, at the edge of the cliff. I felt ashamed of how vulnerable I looked like to her. 

"You think my reasons for joining you are not as convincing as Yona's?"

"Maybe... Maybe not. You tell me"

"I don't want to stand by while other women are being treated like toys, like entertainment. I don't want to stand by while the officers in this town, as well as Kum-Ji, keep thinking it is their right to act like dogs, animals, however right it may look to them"

"There's that look you had earlier. I was wondering if it were just an act ; if I could believe the pain behind them"

"I wouldn't fake that pain", it felt like I was being accused of something I hadn't done. I was angry... angry at this woman for believing it was an act, for believing my past was just a joke.

"I sure as hell don't know the exact story behind those eyes, but I know some of the lines. Guessed them"

"Why am I not surprised? You look old enough to have experienced a few things yourself"

She was looking at me in wonder. She had a small smile floating on her lips, as if she weren't sure she wanted it there. As if she were hesitating. She knew I was not the type of woman to let myself be brought down by another, and if I ever was, I would be up in no time, not giving them the chance to realize that I had not succumbed to them.

"What happened to them?", she asked out of pure curiousness. I could see its glints, its marks in her eyes, but that was it. There was nothing else on her face that would tell me she wanted to know. It was telling me enough about that woman. She had learned to disguise her feelings, her past, her emotions. She recognized her younger self in me, knew what it had been like to act as if nothing ever happened, as if the pain was not there. I turned toward the horizon, leaving her to gaze at my back.

"I killed them", I said coldly. She found her way to my side and we soon shared the same view. "Every single one of them"

"How many?"

"Five"

She did not answer. She did not apologize for what I had gone through. And I was glad she didn't. Until the men were brought down to their knees and begging for our forgiveness, begging to offer us their apologies, I would not accept any from any men or women on this earth. I felt her reaction to be the only one I would ever accept with wide arms. Then, she turned toward me.

"I think you blame yourself for not suggesting you help your friend, earlier"

I kept silent, turning my attention toward her. I hated the way she could read me like a book. 

"But I think that's because you believe the same thing as I did. I think you know women have to fight to survive, and that it's necessary in this life. I think you hated the way these boiys were trying to get rid of that war for her. The war standing atop her shoulders. It was her fight, and you hated that they almost stole it away from her"

After a few seconds, I nodded, slowly and hesitantly, but I nodded.

"I feel guilty. What if she had died?"

"Then, it would have meant she was not strong enough for this life. She chose a different path than most women, like you did, which means she has to fight for each step to stay on that path. Below is a precipice, dangerous, deadly, unwelcoming. There are far worse things that can happen in one's life than retrieving that medicinal plant, and you know it. You've gone through it. And there's worse than that, still, and I know you know that"

I escaped a small laugh, rolling my eyes.

"How do I stop you from reading me like an open book, Captain Gi-Gan?"

"Years and years of experience. As you get older, you learn to hide it more. And it gives you the ability to see yourself in the younger ones. As I do with you"

I nodded in understanding. "Did you tell anyone? Of what you went through"

"No. And do not take my answer to be yours. Because you do whatever you like with this... secret of yours. You can tell it, you can keep it, you can hide it in riddles, in lies, in wonders, or you can draw it, write it, sing it, dance it. You can do whatever you want with it, but do not base your choice off of mine. Do not ever base your choices off of other people's"

I could see myself through this woman. I could relate to her every words, and sentences. I could relate to her. 

"Can I bother you ladies with my beautiful and charming presence?"

I turned toward that male voice.

"Do not call me lady", I said.

"You should revisit your ways of calling out to women", Gi-Gan stated, turning toward Jae-Ha.

"Why? They work each and every time"

"Stop lying to yourself", I said.

"Oh, I doubt that", the Captain added. 

He seemed pensive. He was slowly approaching us.

"You two sound like two versions of the same person. How lucky am I?"

"The only thing you'll be lucky to have is a bruise on your face"

"Why, do me the honor to have your hands on me, Lady Lone"

He was near enough that I leaned forward, pointing my finger to his chest as I said my next words.

"Call me 'Lady Lone' one more time, and I'll stick to what I had planned on doing the first time we met"

"Oh, I would beg to be killed by your hands, Lone", he was staring at me with his usual smirk, as if he knew he was winning the game.

"Do you?", the captain asked." 'Cause I've just heard you retracting the noble title"

Jae-Ha turned to look at her, straightening his back.

"Did I?"

"You did, I assure you", I added, returning his attention back to me in an instant, his flirty expression back on like it had never disappeared. 

"Well, if I die, I won't have the chance to make you two fall in love with me. It would be a pity, would it not?", he spoke like he was only speaking to me. He was looking at me, even when he meant both of us women.

"I think not"

"Stop flirting with me, or I'll give you a reason to die. And I'll kill you myself", the captain threatened.

She always talked with unbothered calm. Even when she was pushing him away over and over again. She looked like she was tired of his manners, but not of his presence. I had no idea for how long these two had known each other, but I was sure she had warmed up to him. And I wondered, for less than a second, if I ever would as well.

"I hate when your attention is away from me. What are you even contemplating, Lone?", Jae-Ha asked, bringing me back to reality. I frowned, looking up at him. The sound of my bare name on his lips made me flinch.

"Should we not get back to the boat?", I said, going around him, completely running away from his questions and his eyes. I would do anything, right now, to avoid his gaze. I would do anything to stop looking at him. He did not stop me as I ran back to the boat, and I thanked the Heavens that he did not.

Jae-Ha 's POV

I watched her as she ran away. The hood of her cloak bouncing on her back as she ran, her dark hair floating around her head.

"What are you on, you stupid brat?", Captain asked, as she walked passed me, following the same path Lone used.

"What do you mean? I am not on anything. I am completely sober", I said, following her.

"Sure you are. Your flirting looks forced, as if you're unsure"

"Unsure of what exactly, Captain? Of whether or not I want your attention?", I teased.

"Stop this, Jae-Ha, you know who I'm talking about"

"No, be more precise, please. I have had a lot of relationships before, and I do not know which one you are talking about"

"Relationships? Please, you've never had anything serious with anyone before. Or maybe you hope there would be more than one night stands with that girl ; that's why you hesitate"

"What? Me? Come on, Captain, you know me better than this. I make people fall in love, I am charming, I am attractive. I have my fun, that's all"

"That's exactly my point. I know you. And I know when you are flawlessly flirting. I know when your only purpose is to bring them to your bed or let them dull enough so you can get into theirs"

"No, it's a bonus. They want to. I'd rather spend quality time with a woman, than sleep with her"

"Isn't that the same thing for you?"

"Come on, captain, you cannot compare quality time over quantity..."

"Sure. So what's your purpose now?"

"To please, to do what I do best. Make girls fall in love with me. Be charmed by me"

"And I reckon you only know of one who has never fallen for your charm"

"Well, Captain, you speak of yourself so highly!"

"Shut your mouth, we're not talking about me. I don't count"

"Well, then, we're talking about Lone?"

"Yes, obviously. What are you gonna do about her?"

"What am I- Captain. I'm going to make her succumb to my charms"

I could see one of her eyebrows rise within the corner of my eye. "What if you succumb to hers, first? She sure is different than the others"

"It doesn't usually happen. So why would it, now?"

"The day you're gonna stop pretending you're immune to love, you're gonna come beg for me to console you when that girl rejects you for good"

"I have no idea of what you speak, captain"

"Yeah, those girls didn't either"

I had no idea what she was talking about, truly. But when we were back on the boat, my eyes searched for her. It's like I could not control my gaze. It's like I could not stop my mind from wanting to see her. And when my eyes stopped on her hidden figure, wrapped in her cloak, my eyes lingered on her face. She kept a hand on the ramp, her eyes watching the horizon. Her hair was driven by the wind. It wasn't strong. But it was strong enough to raise a few strands of hair. Her gaze seemed soft. She looked pensive. And I wanted to go toward her, I wanted to walk to her, talk to her, flirt with her, but I was way too scared I would bother her. Why would I be scared of that, though? It had never been a concern of mine before, so why would I restrain myself from approaching her? From talking to her. I wanted to. And as I was about to take a step forward, I was stopped.

"Hey, Jae-Ha! You need to show us how you throw your knives! We've been thinking about a new way we could fight."

I saw her gaze shift toward mine just before I turned to look toward them. Why did they have to interrupt me? And as I brought my eyes back to her, she was already looking at the sea. I looked at her... no, I stared at her until I could not see her anymore, until she was out of my line of sight, wishing she would just turn and meet my gaze. But she did no such thing...

Chapter Text

"It's exquisite, Yoon, thank you", I said as I brought the chopsticks to my mouth.

The young boy slightly blushed, proud to be praised. His food has always been good. These days, I found myself choosing his cooking instead of the professional cooks at Hakkon House or the Castle. Plus, he took this opportunity to make a meal with seafood. I had eaten seafood before, but whatever Yoon used to compliment his meals made the seafood soup a hundred times better than I had anticipated. 

"Well, thank you, Lone. I'm glad you like it"

"Delicious...!", Yona sang.

"Well, of course. It's my pirate deluxe seafood soup! With all these fancy ingredients, there's no way it wouldn't be good"

I laughed. "No need to explain yourself, Yoon. Your cooking will stay one of the best!", I said.

"Ki-Ja thinks it's good, too", Yona exclaimed, turning toward the white dragon.

"W-w-w- what kind of bug is this?!", he screamed, a crab leg between his chopsticks.

"That's crab! Watch and learn from Shin-Ha. He can devour anything"

"I don't think using Shin-Ha as an example is quite useful, Yoon", I said to Yoon as I turned toward Ki-Ja, his face pale. "Look, just eat it. It's not gonna hurt you ; it's dead. And moreover, it's delicious"

"This is really good, kid! Come be my wife!", one of the pirates shouted before Ki-Ja could answer.

"No way. Not to a rogue who has no job. By the way, does anyone know what happened to my honey?"

"Aaah, this pirate soup is nice and warm", Hak said, as if diverting Yoon's attention away from him. I squinted, leaning toward him.

"Do you have anything to do with this?", I asked. 

He leaned in, looking around as if to make sure certain people were far enough not to hear.

"I might have used a big part of it to help Yona get rid of the splinters in her hands"

"Uh-huh? You don't need all of the bottle to do that, Hak. What the hell happened?"

He straightened up and lifted the bowl over his mouth, sliding the food with his chopsticks directly in his mouth. Then, he put the bowl down and got up. I was still waiting for my answer.

"Wow. I'm full. I think I'm gonna go for a walk. What about a swim?", I shook my head and rolled my eyes as he walked away. My eyes landed on Yona, as she walked over to the captain and offered her some food.

I watched them lean over the ramp, their mouths moving even when I couldn't hear them. I found some comfort in watching them acting as serene as they could be. It looked to me like a conversation between mother and daughter. It seemed to me like an honest conversation. After a while, I emptied the food in my bowl and picked up Hak's. I approached Yoon and gave him the bowls.

"Yoon, do you need help with the dishes?" I asked.

"No, but thank you for offering your help"

"Of course", I said as I turned to leave. My eyes met someone else's. I stopped in my tracks, surprised. He looked like he had been staring for a while. He was leaning against a wall, and I could barely distinguish the blue of his eyes because of the distance separating us and the dark of the night. My smile dropped slowly as I held my gaze. With a single look, I dared him to move, to break this contact. He seemed to understand, because he suddenly grinned. He wanted to play. But as I blinked, and I opened my eyes, he was jumping away. I ignored him and went back to sit where I had been sitting. I lost myself in my thoughts, rethinking the previous events of the day. When I was up on the cliff with Gi-Gan and Jae-Ha, when he came back after I had run away, and I barely met his gaze as he had been called by some of the other pirates. I had been so surprised that I had turned my head back toward the sea and I stared at it, refusing to let my mind wander off to his face just before he took his attention away from me. It still stuck with me. And now, this... 

I was distracted from my thoughts as a chill wind passed by me. I lifted me head, only to see Shin-Ha walking toward the ramp, staring toward the horizon. I frowned, looking up at him. And as Yona came back from whatever discussion she had with Gi-Gan, she called his name.

"Shin-Ha... What's wrong?", she said as I stood up. Confused, I slowly walked closer to them.

"Boats", he said, deepening my frown. "Boats have gathered at the harbour"

I knew everybody had listened to him. I stood beside him and looked forward at what I couldn't see. 

"How many are there?", I asked as I turned my head toward him.

"7..."

"7 boats?!", someone shouted, making me run back to the others.

"People with weapons are on board"

I turned toward the captain as she spoke. "That damn Kum-Ji! Does he plan on intimidating us? Gather the brats"

"I'm gonna go find Hak", I said, running toward where I had seen him leave earlier.

"Kum-JI is probably planning to go through with a large-scale trafficking deal soon. The recipient will be the Kai Empire", the captain stated.

"The Kai Empire?!", Yona exclaimed, seeming surprised.

"Kum-Ji has had relations with them over the years, since he became the lord of this city", I said, looking at my friend. "It's only normal that he has clients over there. Given his cruelty, it would only be normal to think of the Kai Empire as a recipient in this case. Awa is close to the country"

"Exactly", Gi-Gan approved, looking toward me. "Kum-Ji has been slowly building up manpower. Perhaps it's because the upcoming transaction is of utmost importance to him. And also so he can finally crush the pirates who have confronted him all these years. If shots are fired at the harbour, the people living in the area will end up getting hurt, so we will attack Kum-JI's boat instead. The deal will go down in the middle of the ocean between Awa and the Kai Empire"

"The problem is we don't know when it will be carried out", Jae-Ha added, visibly worried. "And we don't know what boat the girls will be on"

"That's right", the captain said. "Kum-Ji will have people at the dealing that can be used as hostages. If we recklessly attack the boats, the people being sold will get mixed up in the fight. On the other hand, the girls will be taken to the Kai Empire if we stand by and do nothing. Is there any other way to ensure the safety of those women?"

"But the possibility of Kum-Ji being there for this important deal is high, right?", one of the pirate shouted, making me turn my head toward the captain, hope and anger shining in my eyes.

"Finding him and stopping him ought to be quick for us, right?", another added. "After all..., this time we have allies backing us up!"

"Stop him?", I asked, their heads turning toward me with curiosity, as if I was going to counter their words. "By stopping him, I hope you mean killing him..."

"Do what you want, but we still need a little more information", she said as she turned toward the wall to retrieve a knife. "For us, this is the perfect opportunity. We will beat down Yang Kum-Ji and the officers who have oppressed the people of Awa and have corrupted this town for more than ten years. No matter what it takes. We will restore freedom to this town", with a swing, she stabbed her knife through the wood of the table on which the map was laying. "This time, I too will take up my blades. Follow me until the very end... you brats!"

As her men shouted in agreement, I only smiled. Turning on my heels, I found my way out of the room. I arrived on deck and walked to the ramp, staring at the dark and calm sea spreading before me. The moon was high up into the sky. The stars were making it brighter, illuminating the water just a little to make it sparkle. And as I heard footsteps behind me, my heart began beating faster. I had thought they were not following me, but my hand grabbed the hilt of my sword and I unsheathed it, bringing the tip of the blade to the person's throat, rotating on my heels. Jae-Ha had his hands lifted into the air, as if in surrender, a grin pulling on the corner of his lips. 

"What the hell are you doing out here?", I asked as I willed my heart to a calmer beat.

"Making sure you were okay. It's night"

"And we're on a boat... with people we know... so there's nothing to worry about"

"Exactly. So why are you so on edge?", I squinted my eyes at him, angry. I didn't answer, though. And when his eyes finally drifted away from mine, he looked down at the blade still mere inches from his neck.

"Are you gonna lower your sword?"

"Should I? Considering how much of a pervert you are, I'd choose otherwise", even then, I lowered in an sheathed it. 

"With such slim limbs and see-through skin, I'm surprised you can still find the strength to bring a sword to my neck"

"After seeing me jump out of a window and knock out two guards, you're still surprised at how much power I wield?"

He squinted as well, slowly losing his smile.

"Who are you? What have you gone through that made you so cold?"

"I am fighting everyday to become as strong as I was when I left the castle", I let out, turning to lean against the ramp. Jae-Ha joined me.

"What happened when you left it?"

"Something I'd rather not talk about"

"Is 'what you don't want to talk about' what or who gave you that scar?"

"You're asking too many questions"

"I just want to know"

"And I don't want you to"

"Why not?"

"Stop pushing"

"What if I don't?"

"It won't get you anywhere, Jae-Ha, so stop pushing"

"Men"

Stunned by his answer, I backed away from the ramp and looked at him with anger and fear. "What?", I asked, as he turned toward me.

"Men did this to you?"

I stayed silent. I kept staring at him and I could see the worry in his eyes. I tried to shut out my emotions... the memories. 

"This look in your eyes..."

"What about it?"

"Nothing. I'm sorry"

He looked away, toward the sea, the sky. Whatever was in front of him. I saw a smile making his way back to his face.

"Ah, it's not funny being serious. I'm sorry for that. I shouldn't have pushed you"

I frowned, confused by his sudden change of expression. "What the hell is wrong with you?"

He turned his head toward me, his flirty expression back on his face. "Men can be the worst monsters you'll ever encounter. But this can't stop me from making you fall in love with me, Lone"

I lifted both my eyebrows and leaned my side against the ramp. "What makes you think I'll ever love you one day?"

"It's written in the stars", he teased, looking up into the sky. I couldn't stop myself from laughing.

"Yeah? And you gave that line to how many women?", I asked, visibly amused.

"None"

"I bet you answer each one of them this when they ask you that question"

"No, I'm serious, Lone. If you didn't hear me before, I don't even have the time to say that to them that they're already at my feet. But who knows, maybe it is really written in the stars?"

"What?"

"Us"

I scoffed, shaking my head in annoyance. "And I'm serious when I say that I won't ever fall in love with you, Jae-Ha, so get over me before you fall for me"

Jae-Ha's POV

I watched her as she walked away. I sighed, losing my playful expression, turning my head toward the sea. "I'm afraid it might too late"

I thought back to the expression on her face. The look in her eyes. As if you could see death itself moving around in her gaze. It felt like it was her only defense. At least, I think that's what she thinks. She has a sword and a strength that would impress anyone ; why didn't she use it? What doesn't she use it? I keep asking myselt what this woman would have done to deserve whatever punishment she got. I kept thinking about her face, the anger and the fear in it when I first met her. She had been so scared back then, looked like she was capable of doing anything to me in that moment.

And I kept wondering as I went to bed, locking myself in my room. 

I tossed and turned all night, trying to find sleep. I wondered at some point if she had difficulty sleeping as well. I had to fight the urge to go knock on her door and ask whether or not she was awake. It's ridiculous how much it infuriates me ; that I would want to do that. I suddenly remembered the previous conversation I had with Captain Gi-Gan before the blue dragon saw the boats.

"I want to, but he said he didn't want to leave with me", Yona had said.

"He still can't leave the nest, huh?", the captain asked, amused.

"That's not true, captain. I really prefer being on my own. When the pirates disband, I'll just set out on my own. What will happen to me if I start hanging out with those monstruous dragons? I would consider it if it were just Yona and I traveling together. Oh, but...", I said as I jumped off of where I was sitting. "Babysitting wears me out. Maybe I would do it it if you were a ltitle older"

"You're a bully! Just like Hak", she said, frustrated as she walked away.

"That's interesting..."

"How unusual. When you see women, you usually spout nothing but sweet talk. Is it because of Lone? Have you become uneasy because of her?"

"Lone who?"

She scoffed, not amused by my diversion. 

But she didn't have time to answer because Shin-Ha had realized the presence of the boats at the harbour. And yet, I wonder... if the captain was right. If I have become uneasy because of Lone?

"Lone who?"

I smacked my hand over my face.

What is my problem?

Chapter Text

We have been carrying things around all morning. Some others were training, with Shin-Ha's help or Hak's, who couldn't bother offering it for free. Yoon was scolding the injured, nursing them in some way. 

Personnally, I had been of extra help only. It's not like I didn't want to train, it's that I was too scared that I would have lost all my strength and skills. I have been waiting to gain some weight before training again, and I felt like my swordsmanship had taken a great hit. From the corner of my eyes, I watched Yona struggle with a heavy bag with what I guessed was flour in it. I approached her and took it off her shoulders. 

"It's fine Yona. Let me take care of it"

I was surprised when I struggled to lift it up. Before, I would have been able to support twice maybe thrice that weight. And I realize, for the hundredth time since that day, that it'll take some time to heal fully. And whether I'd like to admit it or not ; I wasn't helping myself. 

"You can take a break, you know!", one of the pirates said, passing beside me with Ki-Ja.

"Leave this task to us, Yona", I said, as I started walking with the boys.

"You mean, leave this task to me!", Ki-Ja beamed, trying to take the bag of flour away from me. Throwing it over my shoulder, I lifted an eyebrow.

"Come on, White Snake, I bet I'm stronger than you", I said.

"Don't call me White Snake!"

"Why not? Hak does, why shouldn't I?", I laughed, making it visible I was laughing at him.

"And you're not stronger than me!", he suddenly reacted, remembering the other half of my sentence.

"All your strength is in your right arm, you stupid dragon. Your left arm is merely stronger than a child's"

"You can't compare the strength of the Hakuryuu!"

"Oh, hell yes I can!", I shouted as I threw the bag off my shoulder and on the ground. "And I just did"

I walked away without giving him another chance to object. The other crew members that were moving things around were discouraging him of starting a fight with me, reminding him of his job for today. When I get back towards the others, Yona is no where to be seen. 

"Where is Yona?", I asked.

"Gone to town with Jae-Ha", a pirate said.

Surprised, I only nodded. I shrugged as I slowly made my way towards the people who were training. I unsheathed my sword, swinging it, grazing the ground with it as dust lifted off in the air. 

"Hey, Lone! Wanna exchange blows?", I looked to the side, watching as a few of the pirates had their sword lifted, ready to fight. I thought for merely two seconds before I had made my choice. 

This would be fun. I wouldn't refuse warming up.

"Sure", I accepted. "But I don't promise you anything. I haven't trained for a few weeks", I said as I put a hand on my shoulder and rolled it back and forth, my sword in hand.

"That should be easy, then", one of them said.

I grinned. Let's just hope I still have plenty of strength to fight each one of them off.

"Who's first?"

"I am!"

He approached me and I lifted an eyebrow. They were waiting on the side while another was standing between us.

"3, 2, 1, FIGHT!", he screamed as I watched my opponent jump towards me. I was a little startled by his sudden take of action, but I shouldn't expect less from a pirate. I blocked each one of his attacks, before pushing him away effortlessly with one hand behind my back. Sliding toward him, I hit the hilt of the sword where his fingers weren't and stared as it went flying, hitting the ground not far away.

"What the hell was that?"

"She moved so fast!"

"I didn't even see her!"

"Again!", my opponent said before going to retrieve his sword.

I looked at him, unsurprised. "Maybe you should leave your comrades here get a taste before you spar with me again", I said. "Or maybe train a little more before you come back only to get beaten by a woman"

"You're dreaming! You were just lucky!", he shouted as he joined his friends.

"Sure... Lucky. Who's next?"

Another one made his way in front of me, while the made-up referee of this little game shouted for us to commence. I made a swift move to approach my opponent, dropping low as I kicked my leg, sliding my foot against the ground as I rotated, bringing him down as my foot hit his legs. He fell to the ground, and as I brought my blade to his throat, the match was over before it had began. 

"She didn't use her sword to render him powerless!", one complained.

"Aren't we supposed to use swords?"

"You must be capable of anything to defeat your opponent", I said. "You need to use your head and your body. Sometimes, the sword is only an accessory, as well as the bow and arrow, or knives, daggers or spears, whatever you usually use on a battlefield"

"Okay! So I'll go next!", another one said as he came out of the crowd, coming to stand before me.

"Fight!"

And he was in front of me in a matter of milliseconds. He was fast! But it didn't faze me ; I had my sword up as his ricocheted with mine. He jumped a few feet away from me, before charging toward me again. Before he could even realize it, I was moving out of the way before his sword met mine. I was standing behind him, but he had enough time to react, as he turned around, attacking me. I kept a straight face as I slid my blade across his, making him almost stumble to the ground. I was behind him in less than a second, my blade against his neck. But before he could use his body to attack me, I hit the back of his knees, making him fall to the ground. 

"You're dead", I said, finally. He was up, standing in front of me with an embarassed smile. He rubbed the back of his head. "But impressive. The average person can't even hold a fight for more than 10 seconds"

He smiled a new smile, proud of himself. For an hour afterward, I sparred against every crew member, except the wounded and I beat every single one of them. Some others even wanted to challenge me again and I let them, until they were too tired to even stand. My warm up had turned into my full training. 

"Come on, Lone! Go a little easier on them!", Yoon shouted. "I don't think we have enough Senjusou for this!"

"Get over it, Yoon. Most of their injuries are minor cuts and bruises... or their egos, so you don't have to use Senjusou"

My eyes met with Jae-Ha's. It was clear he had been staring at me for a while. He had seen me fight against them. But what struck me most was that he was back from town. I wanted to ask him what he had learned, since I heard from Yona that their visit into town was fruitful, but a hand landed on my shoulder. I turned around, meeting Hak's eyes.

"So, how do you feel about a little match between us?"

"Really?", I asked, forgetting all about my previous intentions. "I don't know why you always sound so excited about fight me when you win every single time"

"It's because you're the only person who has come closest to beat me in a fight. I always enjoy exchanging blows with you, as long as you don't try to kill me"

"I don't know, Hak, I'm exhausted. I'll bet you'll change your mind after this if we fight. I used all my strength on them"

"Come on, it'll be fun"

I looked at him and I could see the pleading in his eyes.

"Fine! But don't go easy on me because I said I was exhausted. I won't forgive you"

"Never", he teased as he swung his spear around him. 

I shook my head and waited for him to swing first, and I didn't wait long, because I had only the time to take a fighting stance. He aimed his spear above my head. I ducked easily. I saw his slight movement as he lowered it, making me jump the second before I saw it pass below me. The next swing was supposed to hit my head again, but as I ducked this time, I brought my sword high as I hit his spear away from me. I attacked from right and left, as fast as I could for a few seconds, watching him defend as he backed away the more I hit. From the corner of my eye, I could see the people gathering. Seeing my eyes detach from his, Hak took this opportunity to push me away, but he knew damn well that my focus had not been pulled away. We had fought too many times for him not to know that. And it's for that same reason that I knew that fighting against a spear was hard. He brought the spear above his head, aiming above mine. I backed away enough for him to hit the ground. I put a foot on the blade as I felt it lift from the ground, bringing me with it. He brought it up and up, forcing me to jump off. I landed, turning around towards him, lucky to even be able to block his next attack, which almost sent me flying. I kept my ground as he hit harder and harder the more hits he sent my way. 

"Careful, Hak!", I heard Yoon complain again. "You could kill her!"

My eyes catched Jae-Ha's gaze and the grave expression in them. He seemed heavily worried, ready to jump in if ever something happened. I felt anger rise in me. I was tired of men thinking I couldn't defend myself. His eyes, whatever meaning they held, I had to prove to him that I could take care of myself and that I didn't need his damn help. My next option wasn't defending myself. And dangerous as it may look, I broke my defense as I watched his spear swing toward me. I dropped to the ground, swinging my whole body with my sword. I used the back of the blade to hit his leg so I didn't hurt him bad, destabilizing him enough so I could get back up and attack him. He defended himself just as my blade would have reached his face.

"That's gonna leave a hell of a bruise, Lone"

"Consider yourself lucky I didn't cut your leg off"

He laughed and pushed me away. I was about to attack again, but I didn't see his spear dangerously coming for me and I barely had the time to dodge it that I felt the tip of his blade scratch skin. I looked down only to see a small cut a little below my right breast.

"Oh come on, Hak, you cut through my clothes!", I said as I ran toward him, ready to hit him. He seemed ready to stop it and hit it with another. He only had a large grin dancing above his lips. I took this opportunity to jump and use his shoulders as support and I flung myself above his head, watching his spear starting to reach me. With my hand on his shoulder, I brought him down with me. Luckily for him, I was not as small as Yona, but still a few inches shorter than him. I brought my sword against his neck, but before I could even make a next move to bring him down, he was lifting me up. I had no choice but to retract my sword. I tried to free myself of his hold on my hand in mid-air. I realized, a few seconds before hitting the ground, that I had no choice but to find another way to avoid hitting it. If I hit it, I would lose. The air would be pushed out of my lungs and I would see the blade of his spear come for my throat before I could even roll away. So, I threw my sword to the ground and gripped his hand that was holding my own and twisted my body, voluntarily letting myself fall and slide on the ground between his legs, forcing him to let me go. I got up, air still flowing in my lungs.

"How are you gonna defeat me, now, Lone? With no sword"

"I had never planned on defeating you, remember?", I said with a grin, running towards him. I watched as his spear was swung toward me. I saw his hand go further along the handle, bringing the other end to hit me, so I would not die by his blade. Even when I knew I could be hit, I moved a little to the side, and swung my fist back as I brought it to his stomach, the end of his spear hitting my leg in the process. I restrained a cry of pain, but lucky me, it had not broken, and before he could beat me, I sent my fist flying under his jaw, giving me a few seconds to fetch my sword that was laying not to far away from us. But before I could even reach it, I received a hit in the legs that made me fall to the ground on my front. I tried to crawl toward my sword, but I felt his footsteps approach me. He tugged on my left boot and I turned on my back and rolled over twice, avoiding his spear, before he put his boot against my neck and the blade of his spear above my head. I was breathing hard, exhausted. But even then, I was still close enough to my sword. I reached my left arm over to it and before he could see, I had brought it to his head. 

"We're both dead", I said, earning a grin from him. I laughed as I felt his boot lift off my neck. He backed off and offered me his hand. I took it and let him help get me on my feet. I wiped the dirt off my clothes and my hair with one hand as I watched him walk away. "Nuh-uh!", I screamed as he turned.

I swung my sword, the blade grazing the skin of his arm. "That's for cutting me"

"We're even, then", he said. "But I'm impressed"

I laughed wildly at his words, throwing my head back. 

"No, I'm for real. For a girl who said she was exhausted, you were better this time than all the others times we fought. How do you think we both ended up losing and winning, huh?"

I looked down at my feet, losing my smile. "I don't know, Hak. I haven't trained in a long time and if you didn't see, I don't particularly have enough meat on my bones"

"But you're still strong. Stronger, I might add"

I considered his words as I watched him walk before me. I had stopped in my tracks, thinking. I remembered that day and the unbelievable amount of strength that had possessed me as I killed every monster that had touched me, that had brought a knife against my skin. 

That made me stronger?

I looked up into the sky as I watched the sun slowly set over the sea. I smiled and made my way to the ship.

That night we were all reunited. All in one small room. The captain repeated all that Jae-Ha and Yona had learned today. About how Kum-Ji's boats would sail three days from now. They explained how the girls eventually came to be trapped and kidnapped by Kum-Ji as they were innocently trying to find a job, but were picked by officers who deemed them pretty enough to be sent to Kai as merchandise. Jae-Ha had added that when he asked the employee that worked at the shop, he said they stopped hiring at noon on the day after tomorrow.

"So three days from now... at least we have an idea, but Kum-Ji's a greedy man. If there's high merchandise on the line... he will wait until the very last moment", the captain said. "If he's going to move the boats, it will be in the middle of the night when the sun has set. But... we don't know on which boat the girls will be on"

"From the boat... if someting like a firework is fired from the boat the women are on, will we be able to rescue the women a little more quickly?", I frowned.

"That may work. But who will fire it?", the captain asked. 

"I will", Yona said, making me freeze as I felt my heart skip a beat. "I'll sneak into the human trafficking camp. I will launch the firework. Other than bringing down Kum-Ji, the goal this time is to save the women being sold, right? We need to quickly find the boat they're on and take them to a safe place. For that purpose, I will creep into the boat to let you know which boat it is"

"Wait. I'm a little against that idea", Hak said.

"Right!", Ki-Ja agreed. "Penetrating the stronghold of Kum-JI and his officers... such a thing is too dangerous!"

"I'm against it, too", Yoon said.

"Yoon", Yona called his name.

"To launch the firework means you'll have to carry an explosive onto the boat you've captured, then you'll have to go up on deck by sneaking past the lookouts from within the boat! If they find you, they'll kill you! It's absolutely impossible!!", Yoon shouted, but still Yona kept a straight unbothered expression. She wasn't gonna change her mind that easily.

"It will be difficult overall to let your comrades know where you are with a small firework you manage to bring on", Hak added.

"If Shin-Ha is there, he should be able to see my signal, no matter how far away I am", Yona countered.

Hak didn't say anything else as he looked at me, asking me silently to support him.

"I mean, it has potential", I let out. "It's worth it. It may be dangerous, but it's possible", I added as I looked toward Yoon.

"But, still-!", Yoon tried to say, but got cut off.

"The enemy's number is large. We don't have time to look inside one boat to the next. It will be too late if the women are handed over to the Kai Empire while we're fighting!", Yona shouted. "To stop that from happening, by going in amongst the women to ensure their safety, that's a job only I can do, right? Captain Gi-Gan, please, let me fight, too"

I smiled, crossed my arms over my chest and dared the captain to refuse her. I saw the surprise sweep over the captain's face before she smiled as well. "If we are to succeed, we must certainly be able to rescue the women", she said.

"Captain?", Jae-Ha asked, scared she would agree with Yona's request.

"However, going in alone is reckless. One other person, at least, should sneak in with you in order for this plan to work"

"I will", both Hak and Ki-Ja said, as I face-palmed myself.

"I was going to say it had to be someone who can wear female clothing and look feminine", the captain added. "This is Kum-Ji's most important merchandise, afterall. If you're not as beautiful as the other girls, you'll be turned down at the front gate"

"I will", they said again as Jae-Ha decided to join. I was pinching the bridge of my nose by this point.

"Don't you listen to what people tell you? Are you that impossibly confident? The brawn has increased by one more person this time, too. Well, there is one other among the less skilled men here", she said as she looked toward Yoon. "And you can handle gunpowder. You'll be undeniably helpful"

"Eh? Wait a mintue! When it comes to women's clothing, I definitely wouldn't lose to the girls around there, but our opponent is a corrupt overlord. I'm still against Yona going, you know? Even if I join her, we don't know whether or not the plan will work..."

"Then, we throw in another person. Another person able to protect the two of you", the captain added as she looked toward me. I held her gaze as I took a deep breath.

"No", I instantly answered. "I won't be able to go in"

She was looking at me with a look that said that I could do everything if I wanted to. I shook my head. "I- You could use me to fight Kum-JI's men off. You can't discard me..."

"I am not discarding you, I'm sending you on a different boat"

"But still, I will be turned away by the employees. I have no chance of entering that place. I won't be considered as pretty enough to sell high. I'm damaged...", despite my best efforts, I could not cast away the pain from my voice.

"That's not true. That scar can be hidden with enough makeup. We will make it happen. Nonetheless, you don't realize the beauty you hold, Lone. With or without the scar", she said.

"I agree", Jae-Ha said as I looked toward him, daring him to say another word. He lifted his hands up in the air as if in surrender. 

I looked back toward the captain, then toward Yoon and Yona, who were hoping I'd say yes. I closed my eyes, took a deep breath and looked at Gi-Gan again.

"Fine. I'll do it"

"Wonderful", she said. "We're infiltrating tomorrow, so go to sleep, get rest ; you'll need it"

I was brushing my hair, going over the strands I'd already brushed, rethinking my decision. Even without the trace of the scar against my skin, I would still feel as ugly and dirty as I've always felt, my ugliness would show through my confidence. I tried to find why I even accepted to come, why I accepted to help. I don't know anymore if I did it for me, for Yona and Yoon, or for those women. I was long lost in my thoughts when I heard a knock on my door.

"Come in!"

I thought it would be Yona. We were sleeping in the same room. She was still outside, breathing some fresh air, but as I saw Jae-Ha open the door and lean against the door frame, I realized Yona probably wouldn't have knocked. We shared a room, it was as much hers as it was mine...

"What do you want?", I asked, returning to brushing my hair.

"Does it hurt?", he asked, pointing to his own ribs on his right side. He was talking about the scar that Hak had given me.

"It's no pain that I'm already used to"

"Does it still hurt, though?"

"No, it doesn't"

"You know, you aren't ugly"

I straightened my neck and put down the hair brush on the small table. "So you came to knock on my door only to tell me that?"

"I wanted you to know. Indeed, you... you are beautiful"

I rolled my eyes. "Sure. I'll listen to one of the many sentences you give every girl. I'm not in for your bullshit, Jae-Ha. I'm exhausted, get out"

"No. I'm not kidding. It's not just a word thrown at you. I'm not expecting you to fall to my feet in thanks... or jump in my bed. I want you to understand it. You are pretty, with or without the scar"

"I don't care whether or not you mean it when you speak. I'm exhausted, Jae-Ha"

"I would put the highest number on your head if I were Kum-Ji. I would sell you for more than the others"

I sighed, tired of hearing him. He had that small flirty smile on his face. 

"I'm exhausted, Jae-Ha", I repeated, harder this time.

"Goodnight, then"

I didn't say anything as he closed the door and left me to my thoughts. 

"I would put the the highest number on your head if I were Kum-JI. I would sell you for more than the others"

I slept on those words and I was surprised, when I woke up, that I didn't have any nightmares. I couldn't see his presence anywhere, not in any corner of my dream. He was no where. Only peace and that annoying droopy eyed pervert.

Chapter Text

Watching oneself in a glass is not the same as watching oneself in a surface of water. The image is much clearer, revealing parts of yourself you'd rather not look at. I'd escaped a mirror since that day my family died and Hakkon House burned down to cinders. I hadn't wanted to look into the eyes of a monster. And even today, despite me not being as much of a monster anymore, I still was a victim. Victim of horrors I wouldn't wish on anyone, certainly not on those women who had been promised a job but instead got trapped into something the opposite of their previous dreams. Each of my thoughts had belonged to them since we had discussed the rest of the plan, since last night. 

And as I looked at my reflection, I still thought of them. The scar on my cheek was still fragile, somewhat fresh, but the gentle touch of the brush on my skin didn't stir up any pain. I stayed still as Yoon spread the makeup over my cheek, slowly but surely hiding the cut sliding from my eye to my jaw. I could see through the glass someone who resembled me, but who wasn't quite me. It had been before, and the paint reminded me of that person. I looked like her, yet I was so very different. I stared and lost myself in my reflection, until Yoon stepped back, brush still in hand and contemplated my face, what he had succeeding in doing, in hiding. He seemed proud. But as I looked in the mirror, I did not see me, I did not see who I was. 

"That should do it", he said, laying the brush down on the small table before the mirror after watering away the remnants of the paint. I watched as he did it all. Until he walked toward the door. He put his hand on the doorframe and turned toward me. "I'm gonna go prepare myself to leave. We'll be on deck in half an hour, if you want to see us off before we go", he said, leaving me in my room as I kept my eyes on the other person across from me. 

We had planned for Yoon and Yona to go in first, so we could escape the suspicious looks. Two friends was nice, one accompanying the other so they could share a job together, but three ; too much, too suspicious, and certainly not subtle. So Yona and Yoon were to go first, because they had less strength alone, on their own. They would be safer together. As for I, I could take care of myself... at least, better than they could. So I would go in alone, a few hours later than they did.

I did not see them off. I stayed in my room, rethinking over and over again the mask I would have to put on when I'd enter that damn shop, the fake smile I'd have to force on my lips. As if I did not know what they were doing, the horror of their lack of mercy, of pity, of humanity toward us girls, women who did not deserve this. As if I did not hate them. I could already picture my princess-perfect smile plastered on my face, looking at the employee all too happy to have found a worthy high-paying job, not knowing I would be kidnapped not long after that. If my lack of confidence wouldn't show through my face, if the shadow of my scar didn't appear through the makeup, I would be fine. I would be pretty enough to sell high. Then, my thoughts went back on the words that had been said yesterday evening. Ones I'd dreamed on all night. 

"I would put the highest number on your head if I were Kum-Ji. I would sell you for more than the others"

And as I still thought about that now, I realized how much of sweet talk that was about something that wasn't as sweet. Knocks ripped me away from my mind, an undesirable action. I turned toward the door and looked at Jae-Ha, who was leaning against the doorframe, his arms crossed over his chest.

"I couldn't restrain myself from realizing the lack of your presence on deck. Couldn't say goodbye to your friends?", he straightened when he saw the rest of my face. I did not give him time to comment on it.

"I couldn't care less if my presence was missed, surely not by you. As to my friends, I'll see them in a few hours, so why does it matter?"

"So you could wish them good luck? Say "see you soon", with a bright smile on your face? Like you meant them. The words and the smile"

"Why?", I asked, not daring to end the question, just because I was lazy, because I didn't feel strong enough to finish it.

"Why what?"

I stayed silent. And he repeated. "Why what, Lone?"

"Why do you concern yourself with anything that I am? You could have restrained yourself from coming over here. You could have restrained yourself from bothering me, like you always do"

"What if I say that I care? I've rarely seen a woman as broken as you are, not to say never. Because, really, you're the first woman I've seen hurt like you are"

"You don't care, Jae-Ha. Stop feeding me this bullshit. I already know your attachment to caring for women you don't know. Apart from jumping in their beds, your only concern is to make sure they are alright, that they are going to be alright. But I am not, but you know that already ; you said it. And I don't need your help, or anyone's for that matter. I don't want you to make me feel better, as if that's possible", I said as I lost myself once again in my reflection, bringing my hand to my cheek without touching the makeup.

I could see I hurt him, hurt his feelings, brought him down like he wasn't worth more than how I'd described him. 

"What is going on with you?", he asked.

I could hear the real meaning behind those words ; "What is wrong with you?"

"You are cold. You're not the same person"

"I am always cold"

"Then, you're colder"

But I was already contemplating his other words. "How do you want me to be the same person I am when the only thing that truly is me is hidden beneath fake skin?"

"So this is the you before the scar?"

"This is the me lost between the two", I said, not even caring what words came out of my mouth.

A short silence fell between us until he spoke again. "You say you hate the scar, how it makes you ugly and yet, you hate when it is not there, when it is hidden. I don't understand"

"There's nothing for you to understand, Jae-Ha. I lost myself with that scar. Whether I like it or not, it is there, it is there to remind me of what I went through, and for me to wave it away, to hide it with paint, it's denying who I am, what happened to me"

He did not say a single thing to that. "Rest, Lone. I'm gonna come fetch you when it's time"

And he left. And I did not move. Not until it was time to leave.

It felt like I was being dragged, pushed forward though I did not want to move. I felt like a puppet, its strings being pulled by the master, whoever they were. I was walking behind Jae-Ha, head down, completely absent from this time and place. I tried to muster most of my strength into my will. It was hard, because I was scared and I know that they had been, too. Yona and Yoon, before leaving this boat. Every step they tried to make, I know they were scared, because even I was. But I also knew the women were scared, and I tried to remind myself, over and over, that I was doing this for them. Would it ever help me? I don't know. I don't know if it could bring me closure, some sort of acceptance, of forgiveness. But in this exact moment, I could tell you that I had no plan to ever decide to live with it, for I was not ready. 

I arrived on deck. I was completely ready. The last part of the plan was the worst. I had to walk through town and enter that shop with the sole desire to get a job. I had to keep the horror, the fear and the hatred away from my eyes, for my traits. I had to keep his eyes away from my right cheek. I had to do a lot just to appear as I was supposed to. I was still lost in my thoughts, about how I could ever make this work. But maybe, I was overthinking it...

Was I...?

"Lone?", Hak called my name, bringing me back to reality. I looked up at him ; he seemed nervous and I could see the shift in his eyes, when he realized I had not been entirely there. He knew I was not feeling good.

"Are you okay? Do you want us to retract you from this mission?", he asked.

Yes.

"No"

"Are you sure? You look... absent"

I looked up at him, realizing how much I could hurt him if I did this wrong. How much I could hurt Yona and Yoon. And me. I realized I didn't want that to happen. I couldn't let that happen.

"I am present. You can trust me... Hak", I said with a new sort of confidence I forced on. Watching his expression from the corner of my eyes, I saw his eyes relax, calm under my words. It worked. And somehow, this false confidence succeeded in adding to my real confidence ; the one hiding beneath the paint.

"I trust you, Lone", and I knew then, that I could not, and would not fail this mission. Because his trust had been placed within me... And I could not let it go.

"Lone", captain Gi-Gan called, coming forward. We turned toward her, my eyes locking with hers.

"Yes, Captain"

She approached until she was a few feet away from me, from us. Hak and I. 

"Are you ready?"

"Yes", I answered.

Her eyebrows lowered over her eyes, shadowing her gaze. "Are you truly ready?", she asked again, making me wonder if she heard my short conversation with Hak earlier. If she had somehow sensed the fear in my voice. I stood straighter, lifting my head up slightly.

"I am ready", she smiled and nodded, proud and happy. 

"Then, go. We will see you tomorrow night"

"Yes, Captain"

She walked away and I offered one last look to Hak before I walked off the boat. I did not look behind me as I walked away and ventured into town. I looked down at the kimono I was wearing. I hated how feminine it looked. It was tight, tighter than my usual clothes. But somehow, Yona and Yoon hadn't needed the same kimono as I did. I made no promise that it would be returned unripped though. I could feel the absence of my sword at my hip. I missed the cold touch of it against my leg. I didn't have any weapons on me ; I would only have to use my body to defend myself, or Yoon or Yona, which was much harder, much difficult to do when I did not have the weapons to move faster. My hair had been braided up. I was not used to it not falling loosely on the skin of my neck and shoulders. I hated it. But I continued walking and as I approached the shop, I wished I could have spinned on my heels. But I willed the thought away and closed the gap between my feet and the door. 

I felt it screaming for me, felt it begging for me to open it. I was looking down at it, debating again, as I felt my hand reach for it. I slided it open and made my way in, closing the door behind me. One swift move, fast, so I didn't have the time to decide I wanted out. 

"Hi! How may I help you?", someone said. 

And I turned toward the worker as he scrutinized me from head to toe. I tried to wave away the disgust I felt driving through my entire spine. I silently screamed at my smile to keep itself raised. I could not be bothered to offer a genuine smile, even if I wanted to.

"Hi. I'm actually looking for a job and I heard you were hiring?", I said plainly, a voice I did not know belonged to me speaking the words with confidence.

And I knew I did not have to act more. I knew I had given him enough. 

"Oh, yes. Absolutely. If you'd like to follow me, please?", he asked, a wicked grin finding its way to his lips as he turned around. He led me into an empty room and left me all alone in it as he told me to wait for a while. I innocently nodded, making sure I still looked like how I'd imagined I should look. And then, before I could even realize it, the floor was collapsing and I was met with pure, utter darkness.

***

**

*

Two years ago

"Oi!! Lone!", he shouted her name, visibly happy to finally see her again.

She turned toward the sound of his voice and as her eyes met his, she could not have been more happy.

"Soo-Won! You finally came to see us!", she exclaimed, running towards him, her arms wrapping around his neck. His arms wrapped around her waist.

"Of course. I wouldn't miss Hak's birthday and yours!", he said as he spun her around in his arms. 

"Look who decided to pay us a visit", Hak said, his glaive leaning against the edge of the balcony as he crossed his arms over his chest, and an ankle over the other. He had a grin displayed on his face.

"You always had the greatest talent in the entire world, huh, Hak?", she said, her fists pressed against her hips.

"And what is it?", he asked, lifting an eyebrow.

"You always appear at the worst time possible. I was speaking with Soo-Won! Now, I won't even be able to say a word"

"That's not true. You always succeed to speak, somehow", he said, pushing himself off the edge of the balcony, taking his glaive with him.

"That's the point, Hak. Maybe, it's time to revisit your way to treat people", she teased, walking away, sticking her tongue out as Hak did the same, turning her back to her. He was now looking at Soo-Won, who was trying to glance over his shoulder. He lifted an eyebrow. His jaw fell.

"No! Are you..?", he said, gesturing to him. Soo-Won flushed, just completely entirely flushed red.

"No! No. That's not what you think!", he tried to dissuade him, waving his hands in front of him. 

"Hmmm..", Hak thought. "Here I was, thinking it would be nice for you to marry Princess Yona, so I could protect you both. But... maybe it would be more appropriate for you to become Lord Lone!"

"Keep your voice down!", Soo-Won whisper-screamed, looking around to see if other people had heard what his bestfriend had said.

"Oh! So you do-"

"No, don't speak another word!"

"Fine, fine", Hak finally said, raising his hands in the air as if in surrender. "But you are in love wtih Lone"

***

"What are they doing?", Lone said, watching Soo-Won chase after Hak, flustered, from Yona's bedroom. 

"Who?", the princess asked, lifting her head from whatever she was doing.

"Hak and Soo-Won. Soo-Won's running after Hak. I wonder what could have triggered him like that"

"Who knows?", Yona only shrugged, turning her head toward the mirror to again look at the redness of her hair. Lone looked away, sighing desperately. Yona ended up pouting, which made Lone roll her eyes. 

"Stop staring at yourself that much, Yona, you're gonna start thinking you're ugly"

"This hair is enough to make-"

"Just! Stop talking. I don't want to hear another word"

Yona then stared at Lone and ran over to her, leaning over the window to look outside at what Lone was staring at. 

"They seem to be having fun", Yona exclaimed, examining her friend's face.

She took a deep breath, shaking her head as if she were coming back to reality. "Yeah, they do"

"What was that?", Yona asked.

"What was what?", Lone asked innocently.

"That look on your face. I seem to have seen it before...", she teased, making Lone look in her direction.

"What are you talking about?"

Yona started counting on her fingers. "When you watched Soo-Won practice the bow with Hak, or when you watched Soo-Won and Hak fight... with fists or swords. Oh, no, wait! Also, when you watched Soo-Won play a board game with Hak. I kept wondering if it was because of Hak, but I caught you staring at solely Soo-Won sometimes, so I finally came to a realization ; you're in love with Soo-Won"

"Oh! God, no! Yona!", she screamed, hiding her face in her palms. "That is ridiculous!"

"It is not!"

"Ugh! Fine, go back to complaining on your red hair, I don't care anymore"

"I do, though. This is more interesting"

Chapter Text

Even with my eyes open, I couldn't see anything. The only thing my vision met was the dark color of a bag, its feeling over my head suffocating me. They were pushing me, whoever they were. A hand on my shoulder, occasionally against my stiffened back. It took every inch of my strength to restrain my fist to fly up to his jaw, so I concentrated on the path I had to follow. When finally, a door swung open and the cloth was ripped away from around my head, I looked around, desperately searching their eyes. When I met Yona's, I had to restrain a smile of relief. This was still a play after all. A hard push on my back almost made me fall to the ground. And then the sound of a door closing.

"Yona", I called. "Yoon", I lowered to the floor and sat.

"We're here", Yoon said as I heard footsteps.

It took a few minutes for my eyes to adjust to the darkness. And when I could see them, my hands went instantly to Yona's cheeks as I cupped her face. 

"Thank God, you're alright", I said, bringing her forehead to mine.

"Apart from a swollen ankle, I should be fine", she said, which probably was an attempt to reassure me. At least, she was being honest. My eyes drifted to her ankle and anger swept through me. 

"How about you? Nothing bad happened?", she asked.

"No, nothing. I'm fine"

I saw her nod and then, as Yoon spoke, my head turned toward him, my eyes meeting his.

"Kum-Ji came here", he said. My brows furrowed at his words.

"What?"

"He came here, thought Yona could have been the princess"

"Does he know?", I asked.

"No", Yona said, her voice soft. "Though Yoon got hit trying to protect me"

"Other than that, we should be fine", Yoon added. 

I didn't say anything. I was looking around, watching the scared girls around us, all sitting in silence.

"So you know each other?", a voice spoke.

My eyes landed on the woman who's lips were moving. I frowned. 

"They know about us. We told them", Yona said.

"Why would they send three of their people? Wasn't two enough?", she asked, distant, confused.

I looked at her, frowning. "I'm mostly here to protect you all. To defend my friends as they complete their mission. And to fight Kum-Ji's forces from here"

"This is ridiculous. Will sending you to help us really be useful? Aren't a woman? You're just like us...", I could tell from her voice that she didn't want to be mean ; she was scared, so scared she couldn't think straight, couldn't think of all the possibilities. And I understood that more than anything.

"Don't underestimate me, girl. Too many have, some have lost their lives because of it"

She didn't say another word. And I looked back at Yona and Yoon. We stayed silent throughout the rest of the day and night. Until we were ordered to get out. I lost my friends as they blindfolded us and tied our wrists together. The feeling of the ropes against my skin made me feel nauseated. I fought against the familiar feeling and waited, trying to keep my calm. I wanted to fight against the ties, wanted to get out of them immediately, wanted to imagine myself fighting against the horror those ropes brought, but I stayed still. Until Ao came to find me. The boat had started moving by then. As she jumped on my lap, I smiled slightly. She made her way at my back and ate up the ropes, freeing me instantly. And the first thing I did wasn't take off the blindfold, it was shaking away the horrible feeling off my skin. And then I brought my hands to my face, taking the cloth away from my eyes, clearing my vision. Yona and Yoon were already setting up the trap as I looked around to see the women intact. 

"Stay still, act as innocent as you can", I said through the small crowd. "We're gonna get you out, I promise. Just don't say a word"

I approached my friends, and as they nodded, I hit my fists against the wall of the boat a few times, before the guard on the other side of the door pushed the door opened and let his eyes roam over the room.

"Hey! What's all the commotion?!", he screamed. And he soon realized that everything seemed normal. All the women he could see were tied up, perfectly calm. Until Yoon threw a needle into his neck.

"Wh- What was that?", he shouted, giving me time to wrap the rope around his feet, giving Yona the green flag to pull on it. And as she did, the man fell to the floor with a loud thud. Lying on it, he slightly turned around toward Yona.

"You little..", he called. He rapidly got up, his knife unsheathed, pointed toward Yona. "You think you can get away with that and live?!"

"As if you're gonna be able to stab someone", I said, appearing at his side. I grabbed his wrist hard enough to make him drop the weapon in his hand. And before it could hit the floor, I grabbed it, bringing the blade close to his neck. I could see the fear in his eyes before I used the butt of the knife to hit him on his head. I let go of his wrist, making him fall to the floor, unconscious. Around us, the women were taking their blindfold off, Ao having cut off the ropes of each one of their wrists.

"Close the door! Hurry!!", Yoon shouted, two girls running for it, shutting it, just as Yoon had asked.

"I-is he dead?", one of the women asked.

"No, I hit him with an anesthetic needle from the start, so he just fainted. He won't be up for another twelve hours with this"

"Honestly... are you planning on escaping?", a woman said. I turned toward her as she watched Yona. She then approached her.

"You're shaking... and you leg is injured too, isn't it? Even with that, you were able to do that. Why?"

"I... came to help you all", Yona said, fear and pain stealing her gaze.

"Even with cuts all over your body, exhaustion your only companion, as long as you have the will to survive, you can do much more than that", I said as her head turned toward me. She frowned, but didn't say anything.

"Lone... it's okay", Yona said, and then looked at the woman. "Letting my comrades know where this boat is located is my job. Just hold on. We'll... help you without fail. Let's go", she said, looking up at me and Yoon.

"Alright", Yoon agreed, but my hand was already on the doorknob.

"W- wait", the woman said. "I... I will... help, too", but I was already out of the room, making sure nobody was around.

 I got back in, walking toward the unconscious guard. My hands placed under his armpits, I dragged him out, letting him lean on the wall, looking asleep. "We're lucky", I said. "It looks like all the main fighting forces have been stationed on other boats. From here, we just need to climb the stairs and get up onto the deck"

"Captain Gi-Gan will begin to move, which will distract the officers there, and we'll quickly set off the fireworks", Yoon added. I only nodded in agreement. "So, will you be okay? Um...", Yoon asked, looking at the other woman.

"Yu-Ri. I can't let children like you do something as dangerous as going up against the officers alone", she said, making me chuckle.

"Well, these children sure have a lot more strength than you think they do", I said, a grin pulling on the corner of my mouth.

"I'm Yoon. Don't do anything to ruin our plan, okay"

"I'm... uh... Lina"

"Lone", I said, not bothering to let another unknown name pass my lips.

We went far enough to realize the other officers' presence. Yoon was the one who would act as the decoy. Once I saw him come back, hiding behind a wall, I looked toward Yu-Ri and Yona, giving them the sign they needed to detach the ropes restraining the barrels. As they did so, the officers made their way into the room, confused while they watched it all unfold. The barrels were enough to knock them down on the floor, but then Yoon leaned over them, ready to shoot a needle in each of their necks. But he was too slow, and the boat wavered, making us fall. Yoon fell against a wall. I was close enough to Yona, so I hold on to her, trying to spare her the pain of another injury. But as her hand grabbed me, the sleeve of her kimono slid across my face. And not far, Yu-Ri was falling against the barrels, hitting the men burying below them. The horror on Yoon's face as his eyes drifted from Yu-Ri to me. I frowned as my gaze traveled to Yu-Ri and the officer not so far away from her. And it's only then that I realized that I did not have the knife in my hand anymore.

Shit.

"Ow... that hurt", Yu-Ri said, a hand covering her mouth, a knife reaching for her throat.

"Don't move", the man said.

"Yu-Ri...!", Yona screamed.

Yoon was looking at me, shock on his face. But I was more preoccupied by Yu-Ri's situation than by whatever Yoon was trying to tell me. 

"No Awa woman is gonna make a mockery out of us. If you had only escaped, we would have just captured you. But this time you need to be punished!"

And then, their eyes landed on me. "Oh, what's that?", he had a wicked grin on his face. "You would rather take the risk of coming onto this boat with makeup on than stay away? What sullied beauty. I guess we won't have a choice, then"

And I realized. I realized what Yoon was trying to say. The makeup had been wiped away somehow. And I remembered Yona's sleeve brushing against my cheek. It was just below my eye, but it must have ruined a part of the makeup. I brought my hand to my cheek, feeling even more vulnerable now.

"We're precious merchandise, aren't we?", Yoon shouted, trying to dissuade them from harming us in any way. Yu-Ri might be safe, but I was not. "If you decide to injure us on your own accord, Lord Kum-Ji will..."

"Shut up!! We'll make an example out of you! We'll kill you so those from Awa will never try to defy us again!"

"Stop! She had nothing to do with us!", Yona shouted.

"These three were only going along with what I told them to do", Yoon said, and I threw my head in his direction, fear coating my tongue, dancing before my eyes. "They really have nothing to do with this. So forgive them"

"What?", an officer asked.

"I'm actually a pirate", his swords traveled down my spine, leaving cold chills in their leave. "I infiltrated this boat as a spy", he said, taking the stuffing out of under his clothes, revealing a part of him we did so well in hiding.

"A male?!"

"A pirate?!"

"Yoon, no!", I screamed, but he looked toward me, sharp eyes meeting mine. He didn't want me to interfere.

"You bastard", one of them called, kicking him in the gut. "You know what'll happen to you, right?!"

"Ah... Hold on. Hold on", he let out, a hand raised in silent plea. "I have something to say. I placed an explosive on the deck of the boat"

"...what?"

"If I don't stop it, it'll explode soon"

"You're lying! There wasn't something like that on deck!"

"Of course. Only I know where it is"

"What do we do?", one officer asked the other.

"Take those girls back to the room. I'll take this guy to the deck"

I watched as Yoon's arms got tied up behind his back. When my eyes met his, he winked and I saw his eyes roam over my right cheek, to the tip of my scar showing. He was warning me. I shook my head, a grimace deforming my face. 

I would not go back to that room and let him be taken on deck.

I will not let him be a sacrifice. I had to do something, quick! But what?

"What'll happen to him once they know where the explosive is?", Yona asked.

"They'll lop off his head and give him back to the pirates", I felt my blood become cold and I froze at the words. I saw the sorry expression on his face as he looked back toward us one last time. And then, Yona tried to reach for him. But got stopped in her tracks by the officer who was supposed to bring us back to the room. I watched as she bit into his arm.

"You bitch!", he screamed, kicking her off of him. 

"Oh, fuck this! I don't care anymore", I said, pure rage taking control of me. The officer was now looking at me as I reached for the bottom of my too tight kimono and ripped off the tissue, leaving the skin below my knees uncovered. A distraction as Yona took a bow and arrows and made her way to the deck. 

"Wait...", the officer called, trying to reach for her. 

"Hey!", I screamed. Slowly, I wiped away the makeup away from my cheek with the piece of my kimono, revealing the long, ugly scar lingering on the right side of my face. And behind him, Yu-Ri's shadow appeared above his head and hit him. I dipped my chin in her direction once, thanking her silently. She did the same and I made my way toward the deck as well, no weapon in hand. When I arrived, Yona had shot an arrow toward them. I frowned, looking around for any sign of Yoon and realized his presence beneath one of their foot.

"Get away from Yoon. I'll shoot down anyone who gets close to him"

"What's this? The girl from before? What can she do with such a flimsy arrow...?", the man who had been down with us said. I slowly walked toward Yona, head down, death completely still in my eyes. As I placed myself before her, I raised my fists up and placed myself in a fighting stance. The officer laughed. They all laughed.

"And you, too? What do you think you can do with your weak hands?"

But they soon dropped their smiles, their grins and their confidence, watching Yona's raised bow, the look in her eyes and my own. Our determination.

"Yona! Lone! My explosive! Hurry... take it to that fire", Yoon screamed. Yona took a step and offered me the bow. She made her way toward Yoon, confusing the other men on board. I aimed the next arrow at them, my presence, my simple action enough to threaten them, warn them. Yona's hand reached into Yoon's sash.

"Hey!", someone behind me said. I turned, lowering the bow, ready to use my fists, but piercing pain went through me as I looked down to see a knife plunged into my stomach. The bow I had in my hands fell to the ground. I looked up to meet the officer's eyes, pain deforming my face, death disappearing from my stare. My breaths were suddenly short and unsteady. 

"Lone!", Yoon screamed and Yona stopped in her tracks as she was about to light the firework. It was near enough to the fire but she did not move. My back was against the officer's chest, his arm in a chokehold against my neck. He was slowly dragging me to the edge. The officers had not moved from their places, thanks to the arrow I had pointed at them, but they were now trying to walk toward her, slowly and carefully.

"Drop that firework or I'll throw her into the sea!", the officer holding me shouted. "She's already injured. If I throw her in the water, it's only a matter of time before she dies!"

Yona was looking at me with pain in her eyes, lost between me and the firework. But I was looking at her with determination in my face.

"Do it, Yona. Launch it", I said, weakly.

"DO IT AND SHE DIES!", the officer repeated.

"I can't...", Yona cried, looking at me as tears appeared in the corner of her eyes. "I can't launch it... I can't do it!"

"Yona! Launch the damn firework!", I screamed. 

"Do not launch it"

"Yona", I said harshly. 

She closed her eyes, her lips trembling. Tears were sliding down my cheeks as I offered her a light smile. "I'm sorry", she whispered.

And she reached toward the fire, the firework catching and launching into the sky. 

"NO!", the officer shouted. The arm against my neck loosened and I allowed myself to look up into the sky and witnessed the beauty of the fireworks, the color spreading into the dark night sky. A small and proud smile spread over my lips, tears still slidng along my cheeks. And then, two hands against my shoulders pushed me to the edge. Panic rose in my stomach. 

"Lone!", Yona cried out, trying to reach for me.

"Yona", I called, looking at her as my back collided against the edge of the boat and I fell backward, my feet flying over the ramp. I heard Yona's scream of pain, of despair. I might have seen her rush to the ramp, trying to reach for me with one arm, in vain. And I might have seen the guards holding her back. The oxygen was pushed out of my lungs as my back collided with the cold water. The shock was enough to make me lose my senses. I closed my eyes as I painfully made my way to the surface, my hand on my wound. i winced. 

How much strength do I have left before I go under and never come back up?

As soon as Shin-Ha saw the succesfully launched fireworks, he reached for me. I didn't need to hear his words for me to understand what he was trying to say. I let him jump on my back. I waited until he pointed in the direction where he saw the fireworks, then I jumped. From boat to boat, I jumped, searching desperately for the boat on which the women were on. But I could not see it yet. Despite my attempts at going faster, I could only go as fast as my foot let me. And then, as I watched Shin-Ha's arm swing beside my face, pointing in the same direction he was leading to, I raised my head, hoping to see the boat and as my eyes landed on it, determination swayed in me. 

In the exact moment my feet touched the wood of the deck, Shin-Ha jumped off my back and started fighting. As for I, my eyes were searching desperately for any sign of them, of her. I saw Yona being pulled away by the arms and I ran to her, kicking and fighting away each of the guards that stopped her. I watched her as she ran to Yoon, helping him get rid of the restraints around his arms. She couldn't stop the tears from escaping her eyes. I looked around, but could not find any sign of her, could not find her presence. I looked toward Yona again, at Yoon.

"Yona, where's Lone?", fear appeared in her eyes, as if she recalled what had happened to her. She looked up at me, sorrow filling her gaze. Hesitantly, I repeated, harsher than before. "Where's Lone?"

"She got stabbed", I froze on the spot as Yoon said the words, pain possessing his throat, blocking his next words.

"Where is she now?", I asked, but they wouldn't talk. I turned toward the guards that were approaching us and I kicked and threw small knives in their direction as I screamed her name over and over, desperate to hear an answer. "LONEEE!"

And I turned toward my friends again. "Where is she?! Yona, tell me!"

"She got pushed off the boat, Jae-Ha", she said, but I didn't care that she had no hope left in her, didn't care that she didn't have any fight left in her.

"Where?", I asked again and I waited impatiently until she pointed in the direction she saw her fall. And I jumped from where I was, reaching for the ramp. I made my way over it and let myself fall toward the water.

Chapter Text

Third Person POV

His feet hit the water first. The impact brought him a few inches under water, as he desperately tried to look for Lone with every passing second. But his eyes could not see anything through the bubbles floating around him. So he made his way up and let air penetrate his lungs before looking all around himself. 

"Lone!", he called and then, his eyes landed on a barely floating figure a few feet away from him, still in the water. In the dark of the night, searching for her presence was not an easy task. He reached for her as she went under the water. He saw the relief in her eyes as she saw him. Barely, but she did. She trusted him enough to offer him her life, the control of it, whether or not it could continue. "No!", he screamed and he did not hesitate before driving his body downward in the water, blindly searching for her body in the darkened sea. His hand gripped the side of her kimono and kicking at the water over and over, he brought her up with him, fighting for both their lives. Over the water, Jae-Ha brought her body close to his, pressing himself against her so he could be able to lift her head up above possible death. He could see through the small slits of her eyes that she was looking at him. Death was no longer dancing in her eyes, it wasn't there at all. The fight in her face, in her gaze had disappeared, it had vanished. The fear she had felt and had spit on him the day before was gone as well, replaced by sadness. She looked ready to accept any fate that might come her way. She barely looked like she wanted to live. Maybe she hadn't even considered it a possibilty. But there he was, holding on to her like his life depended on it. He had jumped into the water without hesitating and had saved her without a second thought.

"Jae-Ha...", she let out, a weak sound that made his gut twist in pain and worry.

"Yona said you'd been stabbed", he said, then started searching for any wound, slowly, trying not to hurt her even more. When he hit the spot where the blade had hit her on her stomach, she winced in pain, her vision blurring. She felt dizzy in his arms. "It's okay, Lone. You're gonna be fine, okay? We're gonna save you"

"You... are going to save... m-me?", she asked, as if hope sparked in her eyes at last.

"Yes", he shouted, happy to see her will coming back to her. "I am going to save you, yes. Yes, I am"

He saw her smile lightly before her head started to dip backward as her lips soon went limp. Consciousness was starting to leave her body.

"No! No, Lone! Fight! Fight, Lone! I refuse to let you win 1 to 0, Lone, do you hear me?! You better stay awake. If you die, then I’ll have to admit there was one woman in my life who never admired me or ever felt attracted to me or ever fell in love with me. Lone, I’m supposed to make you fall in love with me, so don’t die!”, he said, all while giving her small slaps on her un-scarred cheek, trying to bring her back from whatever slumber she almost succumbed to. When she raised her head again in reflex, she looked weak and fragile.

Through a sad smile, she said : "Then, make sure to make it happen in our next life", he knew she barely had any fight in her, any life. But he would do anything just to keep her with him a little longer.

"I don't care about a promise in another life, Lone! I care about the promises we'll make in this one!", he screamed, worry dancing in his eyes.

"You have to go fight with the others... They need you...", she said as she limply let her hand land on his arm, as if she were trying to push him away.

"Don't you understand?”, he asked, almost desperate. But he couldn’t tell her the truth, couldn’t let his other thoughts follow these words. He couldn’t bring himself to tell her more, couldn’t bring himself to tell her that he cared more about her life than the safety of the women on this boat just mere meters away from them. Because, somehow, he knew they would be fine, but her. She wouldn’t be if he decided to join his dragon friend. And he could not accept that. But saving her had never been a choice, it had always been an obligation, and he knew that now. And yet, this action didn’t stand amongst all his other reasons. He didn’t do it for respect toward women. He didn’t do it to see her in awe before him, kneeling in front of him, kissing his boots in thanks for saving her. He didn’t do it because of some promise he made to himself to always protect women, to always make sure they lived the way they deserved to. In fact, he didn’t care if she still hated him after this, didn’t care if she offered him the silent treatment for no reason, didn’t care how she acted afterwards, as long as she stayed alive. As long as she was still breathing after this battle, so he could tease her, and admire her from afar. As long as he could still look around hoping to catch her gaze. As long as he could still look at her, stare at her like she bore the same beauty a night sky bore, or the sea with a setting sun. He just wanted her to stay alive so he could still hope she would fall in love with him. So she would feel even an ounce of attraction toward him. 

And as if she understood what he was trying to say, as if she heard his thoughts, she said, “It’s fine, Jae-Ha. I’ve come near death a few times before that I’m not scared anymore. Please... I trust you, Jae-Ha, save those women. But, promise me-“, she winced in pain, the dizziness overtaking her. 

“Lone. Promise you what?”

”Promise me… that you will… you will not let me rot at the bottom of this sea…”, she said as her eyes fluttered close.

“You will not die, Lone. I refuse to let you, do you hear me?! You don’t get to tell me to abandon you here! It’s my choice, not yours!”

She tried to smile, but she was so weak she couldn’t lift the corners of her mouth. “It still is mine, Jae-Ha… I get to decide whether I want to live or not”

“You’re not hearing me… You’re so fucking stubborn it’s unbelievable"

"Hurry up! We need to leave!", he heard someone scream. As he let his head turn toward the voice, he noticed a small boat not too far away from them. And on it was Kum-Ji and one of his men. Jae-Ha gritted his teeth as he watched them paddle away.

"Well... it would be fun to tear them limb from limb, but I won't let it worry me. I'll return to my estate and reorganize my company..."

And his other words became a blur to his ears as he turned toward Lone once again, his worried eyes roaming over her face in horror and in pain. He could see through her opened eyes that she was looking toward Kum-Ji, proof of anger slowly making its way to her face. In her next push against his arm, she seemed stronger, more determined to let him go. "You have to go, Jae-Ha", but he only pulled her more tightly against him, the pressure against her wound making her wince. "This is a once in a lifetime possibility... You have to kill him, while you still can"

He looked between Kum-Ji's boat and Lone's weak body over and over again, reminding himself of all the pain he had to witness in the last few years. He couldn't decide, but he knew she could. "Are you sure?", he asked.

She nodded without hesitation, a small weak and fragile smile appearing on her face. "I'm sure"

He closed his eyes and put his lips against her forehead, pressing a kiss on her skin. "I'm sorry, Lone. I'll come back to get you, I promise", and he let her go, swimming toward Kum-Ji's boat, fighting the tears that threatened to fall on his cheeks, fighting the pain that tore at his heart, his mind. 

"My Lord!", his officer screamed. "He's coming this way!"

Jae-Ha went to take some of his daggers as he watched Kum-Ji take out his bow, knocking an arrow on its string. 

"I've wished a thousand times over the years to kill that flying beast", he heard him say as he threw his daggers over the water at where Kum-Ji stood. He grimaced when he succeeded in escaping the small knives and tried to swim away as he witnessed his arrow leaving the bow. But he was too slow and the arrow scraped against the skin of his cheek. Barely, but enough to draw blood. The next seconds felt like a blur, as he kept his eyes on the Lord of this city, and watched as his grip on the bow loosened and he looked up. Jae-Ha followed his gaze, realizing Yona's presence on deck, a bow between her hands, an arrow pointed in Kum-Ji's direction. And Jae-Ha was looking when the arrow flew and landed in the man's chest, in his heart and he fell into the water.

He was dead.

Finally, he thought. Finally. It's over.

She wasn't scared. She wasn't scared when he left her. When her body fully went under and she had to keep her breath in. She knew she didn't have any strength left in her body, knew she couldn't fight anymore. But she hung onto his words. Hung onto the promise he made, believed he meant every word, believed he would come get her when all of this was done and save her, even when she believed she couldn't do anything more than this. Wait and fall deeper and deeper into the sea, the darkness slowly envelopping her. Her head was turned up toward the surface, her eyes barely open as she witnessed the small light of the night leave her vision. She closed her eyes and waited. She felt the blood leave her body, felt the wound begging to be treated. She felt her heart begin to beat slower, felt her body relax when it realized she finally got to get some rest after all this fight. She felt reassured. And when she opened her eyes, she met his. Met Aro's. Even through the water, she could see his tears. She smiled slightly, showing him that she wasn't scared and reached a hand up to his cheek, even if she couldn't touch it. His bottom lip was trembling. He knew, after their fight, not to force her to do something she didn't want to do, so he only stayed and looked at her with pain in his eyes. 

After a while, her eyes fluttered closed. Her lifted hand left his imaginary cheek and he watched as she coughed for air, but only met water. Her body fought against the water making its way into her lungs, fought for air, begged to live, but her mind had already made its choice. Her heart already knew what Lone wanted. And then, her heart stopped beating, she stopped fighting and her eyelids gave up and revealed her dead eyes. She was dead. She had succumbed to the water. Any fight had officially left her...

Chapter Text

Her eyes wandered over to him in the water. After having shot an arrow toward the Lord of Awa and succeeded in killing him, Yona had noticed Jae-Ha's presence in the water. She had looked around him, looked farther, trying to catch a glimpse of Lone's body. But she didn't see anything. She scanned Jae-Ha's face for any answer, anything that would tell her what happened to Lone, but she didn't find anything. Her head turned toward Shin-Ha as he finished slaying the last of their enemies. His head lifted up toward her, meeting her eyes.

"Shin-Ha, go find Lone, please!", she shouted and he turned toward the side of the ship where he had previously seen Jae-Ha jump and he sheathed his sword, making his way toward the edge, scanning the sea before jumping in as well. Diving in head first, he swimmed deeper and deeper within the dark sea, trying to catch a glimpse of Lone's body. He saw the blood first on his right. And didn't wait before he swam toward it, deeper and deeper still. 

It took Jae-Ha a few seconds before he was back in this reality. Despite his desire to save Lone, his mind had wandered off somewhere he didn't want it to go. The speed with which he had been killed, how it all had happened. It had taken him by surprise, so much that he forgot about Lone. But when memory of her pleading face came back to mind, he knew what he had to do. He began swimming back toward where he had left her, and, catching sight of the rising sun, dived into the water. Deeper, when he finally reached Shin-Ha, he grabbed his boot. When his masked friend turned to look at him, he assessed his presence, then pointed in the direction he saw Lone. Jae-Ha hurried him to go back up, silently asking him to go make sure the others were all right. And then, he swam deeper and deeper, the pressure in his ears becoming more unbearable the deeper he went. He was following the small thread of blood and when his eyes landed on Lone's falling body, he knew her heart had stopped beating. But he wouldn't stop hoping until she was really gone. He hurried in the dense water, but his lungs were starting to beg for air. He watched as her back hit against the solid ground of the sea. And he wished he would have been faster in this water, faster, smoother. He felt useless, powerless against the pressure. And when he reached her, he gripped the edges of her kimono and screamed in her face, screamed her name, willed her to come back. and then, his feet hit the sand-made bottom and he jumped. He did not go as high or as far as he would have hoped to go, but it made him save a couple more seconds. A few meters before he reached the surface, Shin-Ha joined him and he helped him carry her weight through the rest of the way. The blue dragon held her while Jae-Ha breathed and then he took her from his arms. He was gripping her by the edges of her kimono still, her head had fallen backward due to her state. He screamed her name, begged her to come back. He shook her, but it wouldn't help. 

"Loneeeeee!"

It sounded like an echo. It reverberated through my skull. And yet, I couldn't reach it, couldn't touch it. I could only hear it, and somehow see a blur. A mixt of blue and green and the feeling of water. The knowledge of air, but nothing more. It didn't come in and didn't go out of me. And that's when I opened my eyes as I sat up in horror. I looked around myself but I wasn't in the water, wasn't in a familiar room. I couldn't see Jae-Ha, or Shin-Ha, or Yona or Hak. Nobody. I was utterly alone in...

Hell? Was this hell?

"Your soul has not yet abandonned life", a sweet and gentle voice made its way to my ears. The familiarity of it, the comfort it brought made me whirl in her direction. Tears were already blurring my vision as I met my mother's eyes. I stood up and ran in her direction. Nobody would have had the time to implore me to go toward her, it was a need only my body understood. I wrapped my arms around her neck and I felt hers wrap around my waist. I burried my face in her neck as I let the sobs take control over me. And then, after a while, I broke our hug and I receded away from her.

"How are you here? Where am I, even?", I asked.

"Somewhere between life and death. As to how I am here, before you ; it's thanks to you. Your... ability. I fought hard trying to convince your soul to stay, to give you another chance. I fear you have forgotten what the Priest said"

I thought about how life had promised me love and happiness. About how I had fought to escape pure torture. I brought my hand up to my scarred cheek.

"I'm so sorry this has happened to you, my sweet child", she said, grief pearling in her eyes. My mind seemed to recall the lack of her presence among the dead. 

"But... How did I not see you before? I can see you now, but... I don't understand"

"I hear your unborn brother told you a lot about our situation, but not all"

"What are you talking about?"

Sadness, regret, fear is what replaced that grief. Her face, her eyes pleaded with me not to ask more.

"Mother... what are you talking about?", I asked again, even more curious now.

"Aro told you that you couldn't see us because we had willingly made our way to the Heavens... But, for us to do that, we have to forgive the ones who killed us, the ones who 'ruined' our lives"

I shook my head in disbelief. "I asked Aro how it was possible for you to forgive those demons... he never answered me"

"It's because your demons cannot kill. They cannot touch you... they have never been able to. They are dead..."

"What?"

Reluctantly, she asked her next question. "Do you wish to know what really happened the night Hakkon House fell?"

"What really happened? What are you talking about? How could I have forgotten what really happened?"

"The shock, the reality. Your demons have played with the truth, they have twisted it to your liking. You have replaced awful memories with more... acceptable ones. Your mind refused to accept the truth of what really happened"

"Was it worse then? Was it worse than what I have always thought happened?"

"I cannot tell you. It is for you to decide how to treat the information, the reality"

"I... I want to know", I hesitated and then I closed my eyes, willing my mind to recall the events of that night, the twisted memories. And I untwisted them.

***

I was seated at my small desk, writing yet another letter to burn. The ink was running out, its faded color against the paper bringing me back to reality. I dipped it again in the pot and wrote more and more words. But I threw the pen in its pot and leaned against my chair. This was ridiculous. I couldn't write from the heart. I took the paper in my hands and ripped it. I ripped it until there was only shreds of it, spilled on my desk. I would take care of that tomorrow, I was too tired right now. Too tired my mind won't let me write the exact words. I pushed against the desk, hearing the scraping of the chair against the floor. I walked toward my bed and fell on it, sighing. The fire in the lamp was still burning. And as I closed my eyes, sleep took over me. But their whispers, their presence.. I could feel them through my every bones. My eyes shot opened at the feeling of breathing against my face. My eyes met with discoloured ones. Dead ones. I brought a hand to my mouth in horror, restraining a scream from escaping. This is just a nightmare. A nightmare... I closed my eyes again, willed my body to wake up, but when I opened them again, my eyes met glowing eyes in the complete darkness. Scared, I sat up, the presence dissipating. I threw myself on my desk to light another small fire in my lamp. I was desperate for a small sun, a small hope in this darkness. When I lifted it up to chase away any demons, I was met with circles and circles of death. They were surrounding me, staring at me neutraly. But this is just a nightmare... This is not happening. Wake up! Wake up!

I ran to my door, trying to ignore their presence all around me, hunging over my shoulder. The chills that traveled across my skin made me want to cry. I wasn't feeling good. I ran to the kitchens, knowing damn well if any protection were offered to me, the most effective one would be somewhere in the kitchen. I opened drawer after drawer, their handle feeling numb against my sweaty skin. I grabbed a big, long and large knife and looked at my reflection in its clean blade. My breathing was heavy. Holding the lamp near my face, I walked through the hallways, stabbing away any demons that dared approach me too much. My feet dragged me to my sister's room. I opened her door and reached her mat, almost joining her under the covers.

"Sister! Sister! Please, I'm scared! They're everywhere", I screamed. 

It's just a nightmare. Just a nightmare.

Her body sat up on her bed. I was expecting a scolding, her begging for me to go back to my room, but the voice that I heard was no where near being hers. "You're scared? Let me reassure you, my darling little sister", it said and as I lifted my head, I screamed in horror. I raised the knife in the air and I let it plunge in its body, multiple times, over and over again. When I opened my eyes, my sister's dead body was laying on the mattress, blood everywhere ; on my hands, on my nightgown, on her sheets, splashes of it everywhere on her face, her bare legs, the wall, the ceiling. I screamed. I screamed, cried, fought against this nightmare. I ran away. I ran out of her room and reached our parents'. I barged in as I did my sister.

"Mother! Si-Yook is dead! They killed her! Mother!", I screamed, jumping on the bed. I shook their bodies under my hands, trying desperately to wake them up. Yet, I was faced with other demons. They were in the bed, all around in the room. I swung the knife, up and down, from the right to the left, chasing them away. And when I stopped hearing their whispering, their presence, I opened my eyes. I met theirs... I met their dead eyes. My father's and my mother's. They were opened, looking at me in horror.

"NO!", I screamed. I got out of bed, knife still in hand, blood on my hands, on my nightgown. Blood everywhere. I cried. They wouldn't stop sliding down my cheeks. I kept crying, kept screaming for help, as if anyone would help me. "I just want to wake up! LET ME WAKE UP!!"

I picked up the lamp I had dropped near their opened door and ran down the hallway. This is just a nightmare. It's just a nightmare. I made my way to the living room and I opened the doors and placed the lamp on the low table. I approached the hearth and light a fire. I looked at it, looked at the knife, at my bloodied hands. I angled the knife, the blade toward my stomach. If I die... I'll wake up, right?

....right?

A hand grabbed my wrist, and stopped my hands from plunging the knife into my stomach. I opened my eyes and met Min-Ren's. The horror in her eyes told me enough. My eyes shifted between reality and lies. I could see the demon's hand on my wrist, stopping me from throwing my letter in the fire, from freeing myself. And on the other side, I could see Min-Ren's in its place, her hand on my wrist, stopping me from stabbing myself, killing myself in this nightmare so I could come back in my bed, so I could wake up, so I could be free from this horror. But this isn't it, right? This isn't a nightmare..., is it?

Reality hit me and I stumbled backward. I felt dizzy, my eyes blurred. I fell to the ground, my head hitting the table. A sharp sound, glass shattering. I looked to my right. Fire. Heat. Dangerous. If I stayed here, I was gonna die. Si-Yook, my mother and my father are gonna die, too. But I don't move. I can't move.

"Lone!", I heard. I turned my head toward Min-Ren. I found strength to get up and followed her. Into the darkness, I saw the dead bodies sprawling on the floor, the ones of the servants.. of everyone working in this mansion. Far away, I could see their souls being restrained away. Their hands were reaching for me, as if begging me to run, to flee. "Lady Lone! We must go!", she shouted and I followed.

"But! Si-Yook! My parents! We have to save them!"

Min-Ren was fully turned toward me now, stopped, her sorry eyes gleaming. "Lady Lone... They are gone..."

And I remembered. Rememebred the knife, remembered my arms, remembered the blood. I remembered everything. While I thought I was in a nightmare, while I thought I was stabbing the demons away from me... I was killing everyone in Hakkon House.

I am the real killer of Hakkon House...

I tried to reach for Min-Ren, tried to find something to support me as I stumbled on my weak feet, on the fear and hatred weighing on my shoulders. But my hand passed through hers. My bottom lip trembled as I looked up to her.

"You... you are dead, too?", I asked, tears blurring my vision.

She offered me a sad smile, but no hatred, no accusation gleamed in her eyes. She... she forgave me.

"I got killed by the fire in the living room while trying to stop you from killing yourself"

"I'm so sorry. I'm sorry, Min-Ren"

"It's okay, Lady Lone. But I saw your parents and sister for a few seconds before they went to the Heavens. They wanted me to conjure you a message"

The fire was slowly approaching us. "But we need to go, Lady Lone! We need to go while you can still live"

Dragging my eyes toward Min-Ren, dragging my eyes away from the fire, I ran, ran with her as I tried to escape death for the first time. When we reached the doors, I used every bit of my strength to open it, until fresh air slammed against me.

"Min-Ren-!"

"Lady Lone, what your family wanted to say-!"

Dead arms wrapped around her waist, her neck, a hand clapped over her mouth as they brought her away, farther into the house. Demons appeared a few feet before me. They were walking toward me, faster and faster each step they took. Walking backwards, I tried to escape them. Step after step, until my foot hit a stone and I fell on my back, pushing the air out of my lungs. 

"My sweet child... I'm sorry I couldn't be of any more help to you... I love you and I hope, one day, you forgive yourself"

"Lone... I'm sorry I couldn't teach you more of the sword, more about fighting. I am so proud of you, my little girl"

"Hey, little sister. I didn't really hate you. I guess I was just jealous... Somehow. I'm sorry I've been such a shitty sister, you deserved better. I hope you can forgive me... like I forgive you"

Drop...

Drop...

Drop...

Tear after tear...

Water mixed with blood...

Cold blade, cold metal against cold skin...

And I'm asking myself ...

What the hell...

Did I do...?

Chapter Text

He's throwing her body on the deck of the pirate boat. He's soaked, from head to toe. As well as Shin-Ha. Lone is laying on the ground, water dripping from her hair on the wood, darkening its pale brown to a more darker color. Blood is staining her kimono. She has lost a lot of blood, it is undeniable. The lower part of her clothes had been ripped, that the others could tell. Yona was sobbing ; Hak had an arm over her shoulders, trying to calm her grief as much as his. But Jae-Ha put his two hands above her chest and started pushing against it with a steady rhythm. Then, after a few, he put his mouth against hers and forced oxygen to go down to her lungs. He kept at it for an unbearable and unbeleivable amount of time. But no one dared to stop him.

"Maybe we can try to give her some senjusou", Yoon said, pain slowly starting to show on his face.

"No, it won't work", the captain said, pip between her fingers. "If we want to heal that wound, we need her alive"

"Then, what do we do?", Yona asked, panic rising in her voice.

"We keep trying", Jae-Ha said between gritted teeth. "I am not letting her go, Yona"

"Then... if she comes back-!", she said, hope shining in her eyes.

"Prepare the medical tools to keep her here", Gi-Gan added.

"I'm on it!", Yoon screamed, running toward where he kept his things. 

Jae-Ha kept pushing against her chest ; he would not give up. Even if it was too late, he would continue until he was too exhausted to stand ; he would continue until he would fall unconscious, he would continue until he died as well. He needed her to come back, for his sake, but also for the people who still cared for her. She needed to come back.

Lone's POV

I had fallen to my knees, hands raised to my face, hiding the shame distorting my traits. I was scared, I was pained. I was my own monster.

"How did I get so lost in reality to forget I was in it?", I let out through an unsteady breath. My mother was still here. But I couldn't dare look up at her eyes and witness the hatred and the pain she was feeling toward me. 

"Because you believed you were dreaming. Their presence was overwhelming you, it blurred your vision", she said in her usually sweet and gentle voice.

"Why? Why do you not resent me all? For what I have done to our family, to our lives? Why do you not blame me?", I asked.

"Because, my sweet child, it is not your fault. Even if you are crazy, what you have done is not your fault. You were born able to see the dead and they know it. You have always had a brave and kind heart, Lone. Don't believe anything anyone tells you. You were not in control that night. You were scared. You thought you were defending yourself against these demons"

"But I killed you. I killed my family, and truly believed I was innocent...", the tears were cold and wet against my cheeks, as realization kept hitting me over and over again. "I should have died... I should have died"

"Don't say that. You were given another chance at life for a reason"

"What good can I do to this world? I am a monster, I played the fool. Why am I still breathing?"

I lifted my head at last and she was before me, kneeling on the ground, hands on her thighs. She had no hatred glimming in her eyes, nothing blinded her vision, not rage or fear. She was calm, serious. I freezed at the image offering itself to me. I freezed at the reflection I saw in her eyes. I freezed at the way she looked at me, as she has always done. 

"Lone, I have always loved you. You were always my most sensitive child, and yet, the strongest. You are still in this world because you deserve your place in it. There is something you must achieve before you join us. And neither of us will blame you ; we will embrace your presence, we will remind you that we never stopped loving you. You deserve more. You deserve better"

"I only deserve hatred and death"

"Why do you think so?", she asked, sadness grazing her skin, her traits.

"Because... because I killed you all... And I hid away the memories, to make me think that I didn't. I am a monster"

"No, you are not"

"Why do you think so?", I asked, repeating the words she had sent my way a few seconds ago.

"Because you are gentle, you are kind. Even with a sword between your hands, even with that fierce look in your eyes, you are an angel. Those demons, your demons have been darkening your soul, but it doesn't make it evil"

"I am not a monster?", I asked, as if I needed confirmation again.

"No. You are not a monster", she said, even more gently now. 

"I am not a monster", I said, still numb. I refused to believe them, but I let the words sink in, I let their meaning penetrate my skin. I am not a monster to them. I am not a monster.

She smiled, happy to hear me say the words. But then, worry started to etch itself on her face. 

"You should go back. They're waiting for you", she said.

"What if I don't wanna go back?"

"You do. Your soul does. Because it wouldn't have stayed even after I kept begging it to stay. A small part of you wants to live, Lone. Honor it. But I feel the bigger part of it overtaking you. It's trying to go, it's trying to reach its hand toward Death. Lone, be true to yourself ; do you want to leave them?"

"No... I don't want to", I said without hesitation. 

"Do you want to throw away everything you have built?"

"No"

"Do you want to live?"

I looked down at my hands and remembered the blood splattered on them, the knife laying on the grass. I remembered the tears as they fell uncontrolably as I kneeled before my home, at what I had done. I stayed there until dawn broke, and the house was nothing but rubbles and ash. Until the Castle guards came to fetch me away from the site, from this murder scene. And I thought of everything that happened afterward, of all the pain and grief and joy I went through. I remembered Jae-Ha's words through all of this, remembered the promise he made. I regretted thinking of that, regretted thinking of him. But I looked up at my mother once again. 

"Yes... Yes, I want to live"

"Lone", Yona cried. "Please, come back... come back to us"

"You're supposed to beat me before you can go, Lone", Hak said, restraining the tears. "Come on, come back"

"Come back to me, Lone", Jae-Ha said. "Come back to us, I beg of you"

He kept pushing. He kept blowing air into her mouth. He kept trying to bring her back. Some had already given up on her, but Jae-Ha wouldn't, nor would Yona and Hak. Yoon was kneeling on her other side, ready if ever she came back, ready to tend to her wound, ready to keep her alive, but he did not believe her breaths would come back. He did not believe the blood in her veins would start flowing again. And when, finally, Jae-Ha's arms gave up, exhausted, he rested his head on her stomach, the only sound they could hear being his sobs. Yona silently hid her face in Hak's chest, searching comfort despite both their grief. He wrapped his arms around her shaking body, his eyes silently pleading Lone's body to come back to life. And right before she shot right up in a sitting position, Jae-Ha felt her chest lift up and down for a brief second, making him straighten his back. Then, she was throwing up the water that had killed her as she welcomed air back into her lungs. But shock overtook her, she felt naked, barren. She turned her head from left to right in a frenzy. Her breaths were uneven, uncontrollable. And when she saw Yoon's hands trying to reach for her, trying to calm her down, she pushed her hands and feet into the wood of the deck, backing up, desperately trying to search for safety. Her back hit against something. No, not something. 

Someone.

Arms wrapped around her, trying their best to comfort her. "Lone, it's me. It's me. It's all of us. You're okay", Jae-Ha's voice said in her ear. Her back was leaning against his chest, her arms had been shackled by his, unmoving, except for her forearms, which she brought her hands to meet his own arms. "Breathe in... Breathe out", he said, slowly, bringing her back to reality. Calming her down as he did so. When her breathing had steadied, she seemed to recall the wound at her stomach, because she winced. She fought her way out of Jae-Ha's embrace.

"I'm fine", she said sharply. 

"No, you're not", Yoon said. "I need to stitch up your wound and then give you some Senjusou so you heal faster"

She nodded, accepting silently. She layed down on the deck again, not without gritting her teeth against the pain. She ignored Jae-Ha's gaze as she welcomed Yona and Hak to her side. She wiped away the tears sliding down the cheeks of her friend. Yona was relieved, happy, which made Lone happy. "I will go fetch you your clothes", Yona said, standing up to walk toward their room. Hak was sitting near Lone, looking at her with sadness in his stare, flecks of joy piercing holes in it. 

"I really thought you were dead", he said.

"I did, too", she answered, honest, a sad smile appearing on her face. 

"Here you go, Lone", Yoon said. "All stitched up. Just wait here, I'm gonna give you some senjusou"

She looked at him and smiled. "Thank you", she whispered.

When Yona came back, Lone was standing. Yona pushed her clothes into her hands, hurrying her to change, but Lone only laughed lightly. "I'm not going to change in front of them all", she said, turning away, her face turning grim.

"I would love to see that", Jae-Ha teased, head leaning against his fist, his elbow resting on the ramp of the boat, watching Lone as she walked away.

"Already back to your normal self as if nothing had happened, huh?", Lone commented, still walking toward the room she was sharing with Yona.

"I don't know what you're talking about", she rolled her eyes, but did not turn. 

No one joined her in the room. No one saw her change. And no one saw her break down in tears as she sobbed violently. No one saw her...

Chapter Text

A few hours have passed into this new day. I can hear the laughs of joy, the screams of freedom, the alcohol dipped cries. I stayed in my room after I got changed, kept still in its comfort, its safety. I was looking through the small window, at the vast ocean on the other side of this wall. I was seated on pillows, hugging my legs to my chest protectively. I kept recalling the blood, the demons, the knife, kept recalling the fire, my house, my family. I kept recalling the true memories. I had died, and came back to life with a different view of my past. A different view of the beginning of my journey. And it made sense. My mind continuously showed me what my hurt heart wanted to see. That it wasn't my fault, not entirely, but theirs. My mind had made me believe they were able to touch, to possess, to move things and people with their mind, as if they posessed magic. They were dead. They couldn't do one single thing that I thought of while I hid away the truth. I felt every bit the fool, that I could lie to myself with such impossibilities, and yet it was true, what I had remembered. A small figure appeared in the room then. I didn't turn my attention to him, couldn't face his prying eyes. 

"You knew, didn't you?", I asked, blame coating my tongue.

He didn't answer. I knew that he knew. I was just trying to see if he had the courage to lie to my face. He had known all this time and kept the secret away from me. 

"Why didn't you say anything?", I asked, suddenly turning my full attention toward him. He looked sorry.

"Because I didn't want to hurt you"

"I'm already hurt, Aro. I can't believe you'd rather see me revel in a lie, than know the truth"

"You wouldn't have been able to handle the truth"

"And I'm much more fit to handle it now?", I asked, turning my gaze away from him. "How could you look at me with those kind eyes when you knew what I had done?"

He couldn't find a proper answer. And I couldn't stand his presence. "Leave, Aro. I don't want to see you"

"But-"

"Leave", I blew in a whisper.

He heard me, because he faded in the light that the small window offered. Knocks came at the door a few minutes afterward. "Come in", I said, hoping not to see the green hair of my annoying savior.

But I was glad to see Yona walk up to me. "Are you fine? You seem lost, distant since you came back to life... Did something happen while you were... gone?"

"Would you believe me if I said nothing happened?", I asked, not fighting the voice begging me not to say more.

"No", she said flatly, completely honest, without hesitation. 

I traveled my gaze away from her face, from her eyes and made myself look out, at the blue sea, at the blue sky, at its white clouds, at the shining sun, at everything that wasn't my friend standing beside me. She carefully took a place in front of me, tucking her legs close to her chest just like I did, but in no way for the same reason I did. "I want to know everything", she said instantly, sure and sharp. I was surprised by her sudden demand. So much that when I turned my head toward her, I couldn't hide it, couldn't hide the expression on my face, the fear and the grief making its way to my traits.

"You might not look at me the same after I tell you everything", I said, a sad smile creeping over my lips. "I am ashamed of what I have done, of what I went through. They are horrors I wish on no one in this world"

"I don't care. You are my bestfriend... and I care about you deeply. I can't stomach looking at you and see you hurt, and not comprehend this pain you constantly go through. I am sure... I am certain I want to know. Please, Lone, share your story with me"

My face was dropping the more shame I felt. My eyes moved from her eyes, her face, to my fingers, nervously fidgeting. I wanted to tell her, wanted her to know everything, and even though I wasn't forcing any information on her, I knew she would regret staying to hear the words. But she asked me... I shall tell her.

"Since I was a child, I've been... seeing things", I started hesitantly. "I still do see these things. They haunt me, everyday, but mostly at night. They have took upon my dreams, made them nightmares. They have only stood in dark corners of everywhere I went, but it made those corners more dreadful than they already were. I've been seeing dead people for years, now. I still see them. I would have been considered too dangerous to be let into this world if higher ranked people knew about this... part of me. I would have been considered crazy by my own father if he had ever known. My mother knew... she was the only one who knew", I said each word without looking her in the eyes. I didn't want to see the disgust, the shame, the fear, the hatred. I didn't want to see the distortion in her face while I told her everything. So I kept my eyes on the ocean, willed my vision to blur enough to hide her face. 

"Since that night, when Hakkon House fell, I've believed much less evil things had happened... to my family, to me. I had lied to myself, until... until I died and got to know the truth. As weird as it might sound, I saw my mother and by my demand, I saw everything I had done. I thought those monsters had killed my family, I thought it was because of them that I was about to die, that I was about to be wrongfully accused. That's what I thought in the beginning. But I forgot something trivial ; they can't touch, can't even kill. They speak, they exist, they move... but they don't touch ; they don't kill. I've seen through my own eyes, through the horror I thought was a nightmare. I killed my family because they overwhelmed me. I thought I was innocent, and yet ; I'm every bit the murderer. Whether it is my fault or not, I killed them, I was the one who plunged that knife in them over and over again thinking it was these demons. I mistook their bodies for these monsters. I have done such a horrible thing... and yet, it was so unlike me that Soo-Won believed I didn't do it. I was on his side, believed his words, when he said he knew me, while I didn't even know myself. I heard everything that had happened... to you, to your father, to Hak. I defended you like it was my mission in life, but he didn't care. I did, until the night where everything changed, once again. I knew that he had killed the king, put the blame on Hak, also accusing him of kidnapping you, but I didn't believe any of it. Then, I heard he wanted to marry me. I was in pure shock. I ran away, not without The General trying to stop me. He threatened me, said he would kill me if I didn't go back into the Castle. I offered him my life, because there was no way I was going into this Castle to die. He didn't have the strength to kill me. He didn't even had the chance to. My period in the Wind Tribe territory was difficult. I couldn't go around the Castle guards, I couldn't leave the village. Until I heard something about a secret organization that made your every wish come true. Apparently, they already knew I was searching for them, they already knew of my presence. I didn't spend much time there, but enough to meet the one who would disguise herself as me. She was pained, not happy. But I never thought she might want to kill herself. I was so shocked that she had truly offered her life so mine could go on. She might have did it for me, but I believe she did it for herself too, saw in this mission an opportunity to leave this world, to free herself from this miserable life...", I dipped my head down, my eyes staring straight into my lap. She didn't talk, didn't cut in. She kept silent, even made me think I was speaking to a wall. I still wasn't able to look her in the eye. I shook my head, remembering her limp body as it fell to the ground in a concerning thud. I remembered how it shouldn't have sounded like that, remembered how this accident shouldn't have happened at all.

"I then made my way to the bottom of the cliff where I heard your bodies were still laying. I didn't found them, but I found Ik-Soo, that clumsy priest", I smiled lightly. "But he was so kind. I helped him and he helped me. He told me that I wouldn't die anytime soon, told me that I would live a happy life. That I would find love. I don't remember it all, but these words marked me. But shortly after...", it was difficult to bring up this part of my life. I looked up toward the window, tears blinding my view. "I was kidnapped... I was tortured. This scar on my face was the first time they ever ran their knife down my body. They were five ; their leader did this to me. And then, they spent the next days raping me continuously, torturing me over and over. They knew I was the Lady Lone that had died ; they kept debating whether or not they should bring me back to the Castle, but they ended up deciding to keep me for themselves. I was their toy to play with", my sobs had become too uncontrollable. My bottom lip was trembling, I squeezed my eyes tightly, remembering each and everyone of my pleas to the Heavens, to let me go, to let me live. "I kept remembering what Ik-Soo had said to me, to give me hope through it all. I barely had anything to eat, anything to drink. It was difficult ; I was weak. But then, they made a decision about when they would kill me. I fought... hard. I almost gave up. But thanks to my dead brother who never got to see the sun, to breathe, I survived. He screamed at me, begged me to keep going. I killed them all, without mercy. I don't regret the pain I inflicted upon them, I don't regret killing them ; I never will. After that, I made my way to Awa, slowly ; I was healing, so it was difficult for me to go forward with my usual strength, will... everything. I had not eaten a lot, I was bonier than I am today. Eating is remembering their hands feeding me, the same ones they put on me. It has been difficult, nearly impossible. But I was glad I was alive. I saw him in my nightmares, saw him standing in the dark when I was awake. I still see him. He still haunts me. I have never talked about this to anyone, I had never planned to", I said as I finally forced myself to look at my friend. 

She was silently crying. Tears kept going down her face, her mouth was barely open, but I could see her bottom lip trembling, just as mine had. The surprise on my face pushed her to wrap her arms around my neck. Surprised and shocked by her reaction, I wrapped mine around her waist hesitantly, slowly. She was crying against my shoulder, she didn't say a word, didn't apologize for what I went through, she only stroked my hair in an effort to reassure me. And it worked. 

"I am so happy that you told me everything... I will keep this to me... I will bring it to my grave... I promise"

I closed my eyes as a tear escaped and pulled her tightly to me, thanking her for listening, thanking her for keeping all that I had just said to herself. Then, other knocks came on the door. I jumped, not wanting anyone to see me as vulnerable as I was. 

"What are you both doing?", Hak. "The party's outside", he opened the door and I could feel his alarm as he realized the tears and pain upon Yona's face. "What happened?", he asked. Yona pulled back and wiped her tears, the corners of her lips lifting up in a genuine smile. 

"I'm fine. We were just talking ; it became very emotional"

"Okay... But like I said, the party's outside", he pointed a thumb behind him.

"I'm coming", Yona said as she stood up and joined Hak. I looked in her direction and with a hand on the doorframe, she turned toward me. "Are you coming?"

"I'll join you later", I said, offering her a small smile. She did the same before disappearing with Hak.

Chapter Text

It was a challenge to go against the very desire of my bones. I should probably respect their wish to stay still, unmoved, unbothered. But somehow, as I got up, it was not the grunting of my entire body that begged me to leave it alone, it was my suddenly lightened steps when I walked that surprised me, made me want to continue walking, only to make sure the weight really had been lifted. As if my confiding in my friend had been the key to feeling better. Though I felt more liberated, I would think twice before telling anyone else my story. 

When I arrived on deck, the sea-salt filled air greeted me. It reached my lungs deeper than when I had been in my borrowed room. It felt good, though it made me dizzy for an instant. I found my way to the stairs and walked them down. I tried to keep my eyes up, away from my hands, away from the awful memories. As I looked around, I realized they were all having fun, witnessed their laughing, their drinking, and I felt foreign. My whole body, my mind felt foreign. I wanted to get back on the boat and hide away, cry and sulk until I was too exhausted to keep going, until sleep stole the pain away from me, but I had told Yona I would come and I didn't want to worry her, so I stayed. 

Maybe a small part of me wanted to be a part of this, wanted to have fun and drink and laugh like nothing else mattered. But everything else did matter. I did not accept the possibility of letting my mind wander off elsewhere while I forgot about what I did. Mother would probably say something like ; "It's okay, my sweet child. We forgive you. You should forgive yourself. Now go on with your life, and live it to the fullest. Keep a thought or two for us, but live before this tragedy." Maybe she was right, maybe she wasn't. Whether or not I lived while ignoring this crime, it still haunted me. The sheer fact that I killed my family had me asking myself who I actually was. Yona looked like she didn't blame me either. She looked like she would be on my mother's side, screaming at me that I was innocent, that the way I was born was nothing I could control, but what if it was? What if I had grown up learning to control the fear it brought me, the anger? What if I refreined myself from writing these letters every other day? What if I had grown up with the knowledge, but had refused for them to ruin my life? The simple belief had been enough to send them away, but maybe their constant return was a sign.

But then I remembered the last letter I had written. In this reality, I had shredded the words, in the other, I had been stolen the chance to burn it. But it wasn't the paper that had been placed in my hands at that time... it was the knife. The knife that had apparently appeared in my hands, the blood that had splashed itself over my gown, in my hands, on my arms, my skin right after I got out of Hakkon House. I had thought, back then, that they had put it in my hands themselves, but as I remembered my mother telling me of the tricks they played with my mind, I also remembered the demon who had supposedly held my wrist, talked to me, and waved the damn unexisting half burnt letter in his hand every chance he got. I had never been stolen the chance to free myself of their presence. It was all a play of the mind, a play of the heart. And even now, I could still decide to sit down in front of yellowed paper and black ink and pour my emotions into words... written words. I could still send that message to the Heavens, could still free myself every once in a while to feel better. 

But it wouldn't make me feel better...

Would it?

I have complained of their presence everytime they came back. Today, it became a habit that still haunted my dreams, but their constant presence made my life easier, because I was waiting for it. I had been used to it. I raised my head as pirates asked me to move gently, as I had been standing right before the stairs leading up to the boat. My eyes landed on a shadowed piece of land, on the demon standing right before the small shop. He was grinning at me, but it did not startle me like it would have before. I didn't smile back at it. I only looked away. Looked toward a small woman who was running over to me. She had a cheerful smile on her face, reminding me of the win we had stolen from Kum-Ji, from his men and the mercenaries he had employed. She was weighing a plate of multiple drinks in her hand and she stopped in front of me. 

"Would you like a drink? You look like you would need it", she said. I looked at her, at the drinks she presented me, offered me. I considered the offer... she was right. I needed one. I reached my hand toward the plate and took a drink from her.

"Thank you", I said, earning me a welcoming smile in return. And once she was gone parading to the next person, I took a big sip of the drink I had in my hands.

I didn't know how much time had passed. I did not know how many drinks I'd accepted, but no one tried to stop me from reaching my hand toward another and another as the sun danced toward the sea. But contrary to the others, I did not have fun losing my mind to alcohol, it brought me deeper in melancholy, the pain sinking its claws into my skin, deep into my bones. It was softened pain that awaited me in the depths of these glasses, but it was pain nonetheless. Dulled pain, pleasing pain, but still pain. I sat on a rock on the hill not far from the party. I sat on this hill not far from the water, not far from the sea. My place offered a beautiful view, another thing to lose myself into. In my mind, I danced and sang. I had fun while I drank, but here I was, sitting on a lowly rock, on a hill, away from everyone, away from the party, away from the fun. 

I felt and heard footsteps approaching me. I did not dare look toward that annoying presence, whoever they were. Anyone would be a bother to my drunken mind in this very moment, and therefore, annoyance seemed to be my only companion. I stiffened when I saw a glint of green hair. I did not school myself into acting more proper, I did not straighten my back, nor did I hide the fact that I was drinking. I did not throw the glass in the grass, I did not accidentally spilled the complete content of the drink. Instead, I brought it to my lips, trying to make him understand his presence was undesired. Yet, he did not seem to understand.

"Maybe you should stop drinking, Lone... You've drank a lot"

"I have, thanks for letting me know. Though I did not know you were watching me"

"And I probably am the only one in this time of day. Indeed, I worry about your current situation"

"Why would you? Why would you go as low as to care for me in this very moment ; it is undesired, unnecessary and bothering, if you ask me"

"The drinking has brought out the rude in you, I see. The hateful one"

I scoffed. "'Rude in me', whatever are you talking about? I may have a hazed mind, but I seem to recall I have never treated you differently"

"Well, it may be because of my unhazed mind, but I do recall that you have softened around me lately"

"Are you sure you're not the one who has drank?"

"Says the person who is holding a glass full of... whatever the hell people have offered you"

"Why are you even here? After everything I've thrown your way, you still find a way to stay annoyingly close to me"

"Because your mean comments and rude attitude should be enough to push me away?"

"No, because my hatred in your character is flagrant and you seem to understand none of it"

"Sorry if I counter your words, young Lady, but I don't believe you"

My blood froze. I turned my head in his direction in a frenzy, my hair almost dipping in the contents of my drink. I yanked my head away, almost spilling the drink in the mean time. "Do not call me 'Lady'"

"I did not use the word as a title, Lone"

I returned my attention to my drink, to the sea, the grass, the setting sun and the rising moon. I pulled my attention away from his droopy eyes, his grinning face, everything that was him. "I don't care how you use the damn word, just don't voice it when speaking to me"

He did not say anything else, until he decided to make a mistake.

"Lady...", he tentatively said, which had me furrowing my brow.

"Fuck off, Jae-ha"

He laughed. He laughed. Which did not help my annoyance. It only grew. Then, from the corner of my eye, he willed his face to seriousness. I knew my next words might hurt him deep, but if it were to become the only words to push him away completely, perhaps I might not regret them at all.

"I'm surprised you're not taking advantage of my situation. I would assume you would flirt your way to a woman's bed mostly when they were drunk", I saw it. I saw the moment it struck. The expression in his eyes shifted. He turned toward me and as his fingers wrapped themselves around the glass in my hand, I barely had the time to react that he stole it away from me. He brought it to his lips and drank. He did not empty the glass, but he did not give it back to me either. 

"You have drank enough tonight, Lone. Go to sleep. Are you even old enough to drink, anyway?"

"Probably not"

He seemed surprised, as if he waited for me to say that I had every right to be holding that cup when I was not. He turned toward me, frowning.

"How old are you?"

"17", I said. 

"Oh, what the hell, you're just a child!", he shouted, slapping his face with his empty hand.

"What the hell did you expect me to say, anyway? At least, I know it will keep you from my bed for a couple of years"

"That's not-", he started but stopped, already giving up on what he wanted to say. I did not push him to reveal more ; I had no interest in wanting to know more.

"But, anyway", I said, taking the glass away from his hand and into my own again. "Technically, there's only a couple of weeks before I turn 18. So I'm okay with drinking", I turned toward him and brought the glass to my lips. "And for all I know, you're not my father, so you have no opinion in what I do", I finished as I drank the rest of the glass.

"No... I am not your father..."

I put the glass on the grass and contemplated the horizon. The silence almost made me believe he was not by my side anymore, but I could still see his green hair in the corner of my eyes. I wished I could erase that part of my vision, or will the guy to go away and leave me alone with the simple demand of my silent mind, but he wouldn't hear. And he probably wouldn't even listen to me if I voiced those thoughts. 

"Maybe you should go to sleep. You look like you would need some rest, Lone", he was being honest and serious. There were no reproach in his voice, no hate, only concern and a desire to help. But the act of sleep reminded me of the memories I was trying to avoid. 

And maybe it was the alcohol speaking, but I said : "I can't go to sleep on my own, because I don't want to chose to see them and what I've done. I don't want to see it all..."

"What are you talking about? You're alive ; everything's gonna be okay"

I shook my head in disbelief. "I'm not talking about my death. I'm talking about other people's death... caused by me and my stupid and cursed mind"

He escaped a nervous laugh. "What are you talking about?"

"None of your business. I should get another drink", I said, starting to get up. "In the hopes that I don't let myself tell you more than you already know"

I felt his fingers wrap around my wrist and tug me back on the rock before I could take another step toward an awaiting drink. "You've gotten enough"

"It's not nearly enough. I can't even forget it. I just want to escape the horrors of my life only once. Once and I promise I'll stand up to it, I'll fight my way through this ugly life, I just want to forget everything... just for one night"

"Is it really that bad?"

"What?", I asked, my eyes staring at where the sun had previously been before disappearing below the surface, below the sea.

"Your life... your past"

"I can't answer for you, so may you be the master of your decisions. But I won't tell you any of it, anyway, so you can give up"

"What if I don't?"

"Then, I'll resume the threatening I started the day I met you. I might even make it real, who knows?"

In a move that I hope was the alchohol taking control of me, I let my head fall. I turned it in his direction, my point of view of his face being sideways. I examined him, squinted as if trying to see more, see better. He was looking at me with barely frowned eyebrows, but the crinkles were there and I could see the confusion in his eyes.

"You would look fine with short hair", I blurted out and I didn't feel any shame. I didn't reproach myself of anything. In this very moment, speaking foreign to my usual tongue wasn't bothering me. 

He looked surprised, but it was as if my brain didn't see it, didn't recognize his reaction. Though, my eyes did. "What?", he asked and I could see the hope appearing in his eyes. I lifted my head and propped it up in the palm of my hand and watched the sea and the slowly darkening sky. 

"Though, you still look fine with long hair. Doesn't push away the fact that I prefer it tied... Though untied is also nice"

I couldn't see if he was still reacting, didn't care, not even a little. But what I did realize, was that he wasn't answering. And so I continued on.

"I mean, you are attractive in general ; it would be a lie to say otherwise. Yet, I can't understand it, can't understand myself ; I've only felt this way only toward one person before and after what I've gone through, I never thought I would feel attracted to anyone before a longgg, long time. And maybe I hate myself for it. And maybe that's why I hate you too, because I blame you for my attraction, though I will have to agree with myself that it's your fault, but anyway... whatever, you're still annoying and you bear a perverted mind, which makes you way less attractive... in some way. It makes you creepy..."

I stopped speaking, stopped hearing the words go passed my lips, stopped feeling my jaw moving. I was tired of speaking, tired of talking. I wanted to sleep, but drinking seemed funnier, seemed like the right choice. I stood up in a swift move and started to make my way to the others, to get another drink. My previous companion did not accompany me. I made my way to a half-full drink, not giving any care in the world whose it might be. I picked it up and brought the cup to my mouth.

"Hey, pretty lady", a man said not far away, his words laced with drunk behavior. I lowered the glass and glared at him. 

"What the hell do you want? Though, using that word is not a good way to call after me", I said, which only made him seem more interested. I cringed and looked away, bringing the cup to my mouth again, hoping he would leave me alone.

"Well... how about you join me for a night of fun, huh? What do you say? We're both drunk, so we're not gonna remember anything"

I could see he was dangerously approaching me, but I kept thinking that if I showed him I wasn't interested, maybe he would go away. But as I felt his arms wrap arround my waist and grab my breasts, I felt a need to throw up. I struggled and fought against his strength, his hold, but the alcohol made my arms numb, my legs numb. I felt I was approaching the edge of exhaustion. I was almost screaming for him to let me go.

"Let me go! What the hell are you doing?!"

"Come on, we're gonna have fun. It'll just be the two of us"

"Leave me alone ; I said no!", and then, his arms were gone and a loud thud made its way to my ears. I turned, startled, toward the sound. I saw the guy, laying on the ground, out cold. And then, an arm wrapped around my shoulder and the other was rested against my cheek, turning my head toward whoever was trying to catch my attention. I saw green. I smiled.

"Are you okay? Did he hurt you? Are you hurt anywhere?", but I only looked into his eyes with recognition. And maybe it's the many many drinks that made me hug him. 

"Thank you...", I whispered, burrying my face in his chest. 

He seemed surprised, but he wrapped his arms around my shoulders and he squeezed me tight, as if protectively. The contact made my heart soften, made my senses calm. I felt in full security, I felt comfortable. It felt reassuring to feel this way. Since those days, I have never thought I would ever need this physical touch ever again. I have never thought I would appreciate it.

Chapter Text

Third Person POV

Lone had lost consciousness in Jae-Ha's arms eventually. He had not trusted anyone else to bring her safely to her room. He couldn't. After what he had witnessed, he could not possibly let another man handle her, so with an arm beneath her knees and the other holding her back, he walked away from the party. Her head was falling backward, the smooth and calm expression on her face taking hold of his very attention, of his desires. Her hair had succumbed to gravity. Every inch of her face was discovered and it was Heaven to look at. Once he put her down on her mat, he gently took off her boots and draped a thin blanket over her body.

"I mean, you are attractive in general ; it would be a lie to say otherwise. Yet, I can't understand it, can't understand myself ; I've only felt this way only toward one person and after what I've gone through, I never thought I would feel attracted to anyone before a longgg, long time. And maybe I hate myself for it. And maybe that's why I hate you too, because I blame you for my attraction, though I will have to agree with myself that it's your fault, but anyway... whatever, you're still annoying and you bear a perverted mind, which makes you way less attractive... in some way. It makes you creepy..."

It was replaying in his mind, over and over. The words became a song, and its melody was enough to make his mind wander elsewhere. Wander far away, but close to her. Her fingers were grazing his brain ; her mouth was leaving tantalizing kisses over his heart. It made him shiver, thinking about her, thinking about what she could do to him if she ever wanted, if she ever started to feel a quarter of what he was feeling everyday. It was not love ; that he knew. The Captain had always told him that he would know once he fell in love. He would know because his heart would sing with the birds in the morning, the butterflies would be dancing in his stomach, his body would be aching to be near that person. Everything about him would be made about her. And maybe, he just realized it was near that type of feeling. Maybe, he was scared now to realize that it might as well become that. Love. Though, in this very moment, it was deep attraction and a desire to protect her, a desire to make sure she was fine. And could he do that if she was gone with his master and the other dragons? Taging along with the dragons, with Yona only to make sure Lone would be okay, to make sure she wouldn't die, that she wouldn't be abused and unrespected like she was that night. He would follow them to see her smile and laugh. But he would also make sure she never disappeared away from his sight, that she stayed by his side, no matter where she was... no matter where he was. 

Beside him, she moved slightly, lifting up her sleeve to scratch at a tingle he could not see. But his eyes stuck on her skin and the many, many scars atop it. They were all perfectly healed, but the slight change of color, the small stitches of natural closing ; he saw it and recognized it. He could imagine a dozen other small cuts all over her arms and legs, her whole body. Could imagine the pain she went through and he grimaced. He frowned and his eyes traveled to her serene face. He reached up a hand to push away a strand of hair, his fingers brushing against her soft skin. She felt the light touch, because wrinkles appeared on her forehead and she turned away from his touch. She turned on her side, gathering her hands near her chest. The blanket slid down to her waist, revealing her upper body to the fresh air of night. He didn't pull it up to cover her arms, he only pulled on her sleeve to cover her skin. 

He then turned toward the door in a rapid movement, ready to strike whoever came in, but calmed down when he realized it was only Yona. 

"Jae-Ha?", she called. 

"Yes", he said, returning his gaze to Lone's face.

"What happened?", she asked, and he knew she was talking about Lone.

"She was drunk. A man tried to force himself onto her", he could see she straightened in the corner of his eye. "And she lost consciousness in my arms after I politely told him to leave her alone"

"Something tells me you were not polite"

He chuckled. "I kicked him. He's alive, just not awake"

She smiled and sat down on her mattress as she looked at her friend. "Thank you for saving her"

He frowned. "You know something of her past, don't you?", he asked.

Yona looked up at him, but nothing in her expression told him what she really knew. "I can't answer that question, Jae-Ha. I know you wish to know more, but it is not my secret to talk about"

"I understand... I just wished I could understand her", he whispered, returning his eyes to her calm face. 

Yona put a small hand on his shoulder. He looked up at her, then got up on his feet. "I was waiting for you ; I could not possibly leave her alone. I'm gonna go now"

She nodded, but didn't say anything else. Once he reached the door, Yona forced herself to speak despite sleep starting to take a hold of her. "Thank you, Jae-Ha. For looking out for her. I shall forever be indebted to you. She may have a cold expression, but she has a kind heart"

He smiled and left her alone with her friend. His feet brought him where the Captain was. He had realized her presence was missing among the others, so he had promised to himself that he would find her when he would be tired of the party. He found her finally and entered the room without knocking. 

"May I join you... beautiful?"

She was sitting at a table, drinking from a tiny cup. "Get lost, you lanky brat"

"No matter when I hear them, your harsh words are numbing, captain", he said in a sing-songy voice. "Captain is my ideal type of woman. If only I had been born 50 years sooner"

"The blow Kum-Ji received with that arrow was here, right?", she said, angling a knife to his face, while Jae-Ha stopped her wrist. 

"Oh my, the 50 years thing bothered you", the captain gave up her hold on the knife and brought the cup back to her mouth, smiling.

"I often tell you you're in a position to go with another woman"

"Oh my, I'm envious"

"Do you know... who that girl is?", he knew she would bring up Lone sooner or later, but for now, the conversation turned toward the red-haired girl, reincarnation to the Crimson Dragon King.

"Well... somewhat. I don't have a taste for girls that play the koto", he said, trying to bring her away from the girl whom he really felt attracted to. 

"That's harsh", the captain commented. "Are you following that girl... because you're one of the dragons of destiny then?", he offered once again his thoughts to her gentle face, a smiling, happy expression, one he so desired to see one day. Some part of him wanted to follow Yona because he wanted to protect her, because he wouldn't endure seeing her away, seeing her out of his reach, but it was his true heart, his true desires to follow them to protect Lone.

"... I have no idea. It's just... I won't be able to keep my cool if I can't keep my eye on her"

"It seems to me that you mean those words, yet your thoughts are not toward the red-haired princess..."

"That image of her shooting an arrow was fascinating", he said, trying to bring her away from a conversation he didn't want to bring up. "I'm a little envious that Kum-Ji was shot by her"

"It's great you're on such dropdead good terms", she commented, pouring herself another drink. "A pervert like you needs to hurry and get out of here. Don't bother coming back again", she seriously said, standing up, the bottle still in her hand as she walked toward the door.

"That's cold. Won't you say, "your home will always be here"?

She stopped in her tracks and turned toward him. "I can't say that, because when I recall the face you bore when you tried to bring her back to life, home is much more by her side than it is by mine"

"I don't know what you're talking about", he said, bringing the other bottle she had with her to his mouth. He drank a mouthful. 

"You don't? I remember your face, the pleading in your eyes. You can't tell me you tried to bring her back to life only because you generally care about women. You will be lucky if you are to have her heart. With everything she went through, I would imagine trusting anyone with her heart, her body would not be the easiest thing for her"

After a few seconds of assimilating her words, he realized that she was speaking of her past, a past he tried to get out of Yona. When he looked up at her, in the hopes of asking for what she knew, her absence could not have been obvious enough. He smiled, escaped a small laugh and shook his head in disbelief. 

Lone's POV

"Lone", someone called my name. It was a familiar voice and yet, I couldn't place a face or a name on it. Couldn't recognize who it belonged to. 

My mind was blurry. There were bits of conversation here, unwanted touches there, mixed feelings everywhere. I couldn't understand what my brain wanted my heart to know, to recognize. I remembered comfort, gentleness, shared words, truth and the drinks. Each and every one of the substances I let down my throat, their disgusting taste, but the comforting feeling they brought. 

"Lone"

Who was calling for me? I was tired, exhausted. Why was someone trying to disturb this calmness? And then I opened my eyes, and I slowly adjusted to the light. I looked around, stretching and realized Hak was sitting on Yona's bed, looking at me. So he had been the one trying to wake me up. "Whatever you want, can't you leave me alone for a few hours? I don't feel like doing anything right now", I said, turning on my side, offering him my back to stare at.

"That's not very ladylike of you"

"Bring this up again, and I will take pleasure in separating your head from your body"

He laughed. And it reminded me of another one. Another laugh that did not belong to him. I had felt outraged when I heard it, yet felt a warm feeling settle inside me at the sound of it. I waved away the thought.

"Yesterday night was rough, huh?", he asked, a grin tugging on a corner of his lips.

"I don't know, Hak ; ask someone who actually saw me. I don't remember anything after I accepted the first drink someone offered me"

"I did ask droopy eyes about what happened, he didn't want to tell me ; said it didn't matter"

"Droopy eyes? What the hell does Jae-Ha have to do with this?"

"He was the only one who approached you last night. In the last hour of your delusions, that is"

"I guess you couldn't care less if I got drunk and misplaced?"

"It's not that. Yona did keep an eye on you. As for I, I tried to stop you, but Yona told me to leave you alone. Said that as long as we kept an eye out for you, you would be fine"

"Mhm"

"What happened to you?", he asked.

"I don't know", I said, and then remembered it all. Remembered how I died, remembered my mother and the truth of what happened at Hakkon House the night my family died, remembered the blood and the knife and the murders and the innocent lives I took. I turned toward Hak as I started seeing stars. My vision was blurring. I felt my stomach ready itself to make me regret all of what I had consumed the night before. 

"I feel like I'm going to throw up", I said, putting a hand to my chest. Unexpectedly, he brought a bucket to my face and I almost uglied the floor beneath as I threw up the contents of my stomach. When I was finished, he took the bucket down and I sat up, feeling slightly better. My head hurt though. I wished I could go back to sleep. I brought two fingers to my temples in a failed attempt to make the hurting disappear.

"Usually happens when you drink more than your stomach can handle. It's the first time it has happened to you, hasn't it?" 

"Yes, and the last time"

"I said that, too, after my first hangover. Believe me, it'll happen again"

"Nope. I just wanted to forget everything for one night. And that's what's gonna happen. It was just one night"

He lifted his hands up in the air, giving up on trying to dissuade me.

"Anyway, Yona disappeared early this morning. I've been trying to search for her, but couldn't find any trace of her presence. Would you mind going into town with me?"

"Sure. Why not?", I said as I threw the blanket off of me. I put my boots on. Hak was watching me, lifting up an eyebrow. "What?"

"You kept your clothes from yesterday?"

"Why should I care? I don't remember yesterday and drunk as I was, I can't possibly tear off my clothes from my body. Though, my boots, I have no memory of taking them off"

When I was done tying them, I stood up and walked to my sword. I wrapped it around my waist and looked toward my friend. "Ready? We're going to find Yona", I said as I walked toward the door. I heard him jump onto his feet as he made his way to me. We walked side by side in the long corridor leading to the deck.

"Any idea why she would want to wander alone into town?", I asked.

"I mean, the town is safe. And when I woke up, the others were slowly waking up as well, so I would guess she woke up first and decided to go into town for a walk"

I shrugged. "I hope she doesn't encounter anyone that might want to hurt her"

He stayed silent. And then, his heard turned in my direction. 

"You leave your hood down, now?", he asked, surprised.

"Yes", I simply said.

"Why?"

"Because I have no wish for my face to remain hidden anymore"

"Weird. I thought you would delight in the makeup Yoon put on your face. I thought you would prefer the normalness to the scar"

"What is the point in being normal if normal is not me? I have it, it makes me who I am ; if I cover it, I am no longer what it makes me. It's a part of me ; I don't want to forget it"

He nodded, bringing his attention toward the path in front of us. I stopped, making him stop as well. "Maybe we should separate ; we'll cover more ground that way", I said, already going a different way than we were heading toward.

"You're right. Let's meet back at the boat in an hour"

"Okay!"

And he went his way as I focused my eyes on where I was heading. I was looking around, hoping to spot red hair, but in the mean time, I was avoiding the glances and taking deep breaths, trying to control my anxiety. It was hard keeping the hood down ; because it discovered something I was most scared of people seeing. It was ugly and it changed my face in a way others wouldn't expect to see on a woman's face. No one would expect a woman to be a warrior, hence the damn glances in my direction. They were not subtle and I tried my best to ignore them. Suddenly, cries and screams reached my ears as I stiffened, stopping in my tracks. I recognized that voice ; it was Yona. I turned left, running toward where the sound was coming from, but as I met his eyes, my back hit the wall in an attempt to hide. But it was too late. My heart was hammering against my chest, remembering the cold calm resting in his gaze. Our eyes had met for a split second, but I knew he recognized me ; the way his eyes began to widen before I violently tugged myself away from his line of vision. I put a hand to my chest and regained control over my body as I crept away from there and away from him. I couldn't allow myself to be found, not after all the things I had gone through. I waited for him to pass, accompanied by General Joo-Doh and two other men. I could not see them, but I could hear them. 

"Your Majesty, what are you on about now?", the General asked, temper rising in his voice.

"Did you see something, Your Majesty?", one of the men asked, more gently.

A few seconds passed before Soo-Won answered. "No, I'm sorry. I didn't mean to bother you. Shall we be on our way?"

"We shall", the General said in a harsh tone.

I started breathing normally when their footsteps had gone silent. I found my way to the path I had been following and tried remembering where I had previously heard the sound of cries. I walked and walked, until I stopped short. There they were, the Princess and the Thunder Beast ; my dear bestfriends. Hak was looking up, probably where Soo-Won had headed toward after his altercation with the Princess. He was looking at me, now, with dark eyes. I returned the same look, nodding slowly, confirming what he feared. 

Soo-Won was in Awa.

Chapter Text

Many, many things have changed in my life, and in a short amount of time as well. I have felt as though I had lived a lifetime. In 17 years, I have gone through more than I can handle. I have lost my family, my home, I have betrayed the crown, the King was killed and the blame was put on my innocent bestfriend, who also took this opportunity to kidnap the daughter of said king ; I have fled a castle, where I could have become Queen and live in security until my last breath ; to the world, I was dead, I had encountered a priest, who had once been chased out of the castle, and I have heard of a happy future, I have listened to him telling me of many tales described in swift and weak words ; I have been kidnapped myself, tortured and raped, but I found a way to escape ; I found my bestfriends who had been confirmed dead in a city where I thought my life could happily end, but we were recruited by pirates to help them get rid of the Port's evil Lord ; And in the last fight against him, in which he died, I had also succumbed to the same faith and in death I have learned of my crimes ; and finally I had been brought back to life. And maybe after all of this has happened, I still can't be the woman I had hoped I would become. 

Only because I have been raised a fighter by my father, that the only person able to defeat me was the Thunder Beast himself, I had thought I was invincible. I had thought I was strong and that my life as a woman had great meaning, but in the end, I was weak. My lack of experience with the outside world had driven me weak, had made me realize that my training had never been enough to save me in a world I hadn't grown up in. 

But maybe... as I go on in life, I might become strong enough to become history, to bear enough strength that everyone who would approach me would fear my wrath.

"Do I wish to be feared?", I asked myself. 

I was looking at my reflection, at my barely covered breasts as I was slowly unwrapping the bandages. Once I had thrown away the used cloth, I felt cold. My wound felt cold. It was uncomfortable, but I didn't shiver. I stared at the scar below my breasts. I admired for a few seconds how fast it was healing. And wondered as my eyes shifted to my cheek, if it could have healed better with the senjusou. But it was something I could never get to know. The long scar had healed completely ; it was useless to hope. Then, my attention wandered back to the other one ; the one I was supposed to be tending to. I had refused any help after they took care of me when I came back to life. I couldn't stand other people taking care of me, not when I had been alone for weeks. And then, I found myself staring... staring at how thin I was. I had been worse, but I was barely better. My body was not as strong as before. It was a long journey... recovery. And I would have hoped I understood that before. 

I snatched the perfectly rolled set of bandages and took the next minutes concentrating on this task. Wrapping it around my body, I made sure it was not too tight, but not too loose. I was taking deep breaths throughout the entire process. It was challenging, taking care of one's wounds. But I would get accustomed to it. Once I was finished, I put my clothes back on, tying the sash in place. I looked at myself now and realized how much it really covered. These clothes weren't originally mine ; I had bought them after I survived my kidnapping. They were not cheap, but also not for the rich. I had no desire to waste all my money on high quality clothes while I starved. But it was fine enough for my liking. I stood up and sheathed my sword at my hip. As I was preparing myself to leave the room, the door opened. It was Yona.

"Oh, Lone. I was searching for you"

"I was just changing my bandages", I said, putting a hand on my stomach.

"Is it better?"

"What?"

"The wound. Does it look better?"

"Oh, yes. It's almost completely healed. I'm glad we had the senjusou"

"Me too. But anyway! Would you like to follow me? I wanted to go for a walk"

"Sure, why not? I was heading out anyway"

A smile appeared on her face at the words. And so I followed her. We stayed silent as we made our way off the boat. Some of the pirates greeted us on the deck. Yet, not one of our party members were to be seen. I shrugged it off, though ; I had a moment with Yona, alone. A heart-to-heart, maybe? At least, I hoped...

"You changed out of your other dress", I remarked.

"Yes... Embarassing story that I do not want to recall"

"Does it have anything to do with your meeting with him?", I didn't want to speak his name, couldn't dare to. We were both affected by what he had done, both in different ways, but for the same reasons in the end. I watched her straighten from the corner of my eye. It was a sensible subject of conversation. I remembered our eyes meeting. By now, he should think it was just an illusion, that he imagined it. I was dead to the world, and so dead to him. I hoped it stayed that way. 

"Maybe... I am still... surprised by what happened"

"Surprised?"

"Fine. Startled, angry, sad"

"I get it"

"Of course you would. Up until some time ago, you were in love with him. I would understand if what he did broke as much your heart as it did mine. He was family to me, but he could have been more to you"

"Some time ago? It precedes the death of my parents. It has been over a year even. I am glad I lost feelings..."

"But why did it happen? You were searching for a love match... you had it"

"Because the dead, as much as they traumatized me, warned me away from him without my realizing. When I took notice, it became different. Somehow, I had always thought he would find someone else, and I thought myself that I should find someone new that I don't know and leave him alone. I forced myself to forget about him and I fell out of love. Maybe... maybe it wasn't true love then"

"But you were close"

"And yet far away. We were completely, utterly different ; him and I. We still are. I would never wish such ill intentions over the people I love", I felt anger shadow my view. I knew I looked scary and menacing enough to make anyone back off. But not Yona. She put a hand on my shoulder, softening my expression. I smiled sadly at her. It was a sad fact to realize what our childhood friend had become. It was ridiculous and ugly, but it was like this nonetheless, whether we liked it or not.

I suddenly stopped in my tracks and I turned myself toward the horizon. The view reminded me so much of what I had seen in a state of dizziness, blurryness and utter non presence. But I couldn't remember what happened, could only recall the feelings that overwhelmed me while I was getting drunk over drinks so multiple I didn't know I could handle them all.

"What is wrong?", Yona asked me. 

"Blurred memories..."

"Ah", she said and then her eyes brightened when she recognized the place. "You were seated on that rock last night. I watched you and then Jae-Ha joined you and I felt my shoulders lighten so much then"

"You trust him", it wasn't a question ; it was a fact.

"Yes. He kept an eye on you while you drank and kicked a guy unconscious after he grabbed you... in unnecessary places"

"Yeah. I remember the unwanted touches on my breasts. I was sure it was Jae-Ha taking advantage of me. Guess I was wrong"

"He would never do that... certainly not to you"

"Why would you say that?"

"Because, deep in his heart, he has a feeling about what happened to you"

"What? You told him?!"

"No. He came to me. He knows, Lone"

"What the hell did I say to him yesterday?", I asked, mostly to myself.

"Apparently enough to make him guess correctly"

"Ahh, I hate myself", I whined, slapping myself in the face.

"Shall we sit?"

I slid my hands away from my face. And then, I followed her as she ran in the grass, passing by the rock I sat on yesterday and plopping herself on the grass. I walked to her and smoothed the back of my dress so I could sit properly. And then I realized she was holding someone else's clothes. I hadn't really taken it into consideration, but now that the familiarity of its color and texture flashed before my eyes, I could not erase its presence.

"Isn't this Hak's?"

"Yes...", she answered, ashamed. "I spilled some food over my dress and began undressing before everyone. Hak fortunately dropped this on my back, told me to go change in the Captain's room", she was completely red as she was speaking the words. I couldn't stop a smile from reaching my lips. I chuckled. "This isn't funny, Lone! It's embarassing"

"Hak stopped you. He was kind to do so, Yona. I just find it somehow... funny that you lost yourself so far in your thoughts that you couldn't stop your actions from being touched by them"

She didn't say anything else ; she just stared away at the horizon. Her gaze softened, sadened. 

"Pukkyu!", Ao let out, which had me realizing her presence. I offered her my hand and she jumped into it. I brought her up to my shoulders, on which she nestled against my neck in a comfortable position. I smiled. 

"A lot of things have happened... since I came outside...", she said and my eyes dragged toward Hak's body as he laid down on the grass, hands behind his head. 

"You're right...", he said, which surprised Yona.

"Whoa!", she screamed. "You surprised me, Hak! You're everywhere, aren't you?"

"Yeah... Everywhere you are", he said, sitting up. "This morning I was negligent... and fell asleep, but... Since I'm originally your exclusive bodyguard, I'm by your side to the point where it's annoying. If anything happens, please call me"

I smiled lightly at the words and I turned my attention toward Yona. "And even if I'm not yours, I'm still your friend", I said. "Call my name, as well"

"...okay", she said after a while, smiling as she looked toward the horizon once again. "Hak, Lone, I am leaving this place"

I tore my eyes away from the sea and turned my head in her direction. Ao shifted on my shoulder and I felt she was listening too. 

"Come with me", she looked at us then and my answer was etched on my face, in my traits, I knew it.

"...Okay", Hak simply said. 

"Of course, Yona"

Rustling came to our ears. The odd sound was coming from behind and I watched Yona turn as I did the same. 

"You guys-! What are you doing?", she asked, which had me giggling. I brought a curled fist to my mouth, smiling against it.

"Ah! I- well", Ki-Ja started, crushing Yoon under his dragon arm. 

"Hold on, Yona", Yoon said, getting up from his position behind the rock, as well as everyone else. "Tell that sort of thing to us, too"

"Huh?", she made a sound, visibly confused.

"Don't "huh me. I'm talking about the departure. It's not fair if you don't say that when everyone is around!"

"That is right, princess!", Ki-Ja shouted.

I stood up, Hak following my movements. I patted away the grass and dirt as I lifted my head up to look at everyone. 

"Pukkyu!", Ao shouted and I brought my finger up to her rounded cheek and petted her. 

"We four dragons would go to the ends of the earth if you ordered us to!", Ki-Ja confirmed as he wrapped his arms around Shin-Ha.

"You can go home now", Hak nonchalantly said, scratching his ear with his pinky finger.

"Whaaaat?!"

"There are only two of you "four dragons" in the first place"

"Shut up!", Ki-Ja screamed, grabbing the hilt of Hak's glaive. Behind him, Yoon and Shin-Ha were trying to calm them down. 

"Everyone!", Yona shouted, bringing their attention toward her. "Tomorrow, I am leaving Awa. Could you... come along with me?", she asked, which made me smile once again.

"Together!", Ki-Ja said after a while.

Shin-Ha kept quiet and Yoon seemed exasperated. "What a pain.."

"What?!", Yona cried.

I shook my head in disbelief as I approached my bestfriend. I put a hand on her shoulder and once she was looking at me as well, I spoke. "Don't worry, Yona, we'll come with you, no matter what"

And I found myself thinking of his green hair and his cocky grin, his flirtious expression and words. He was annoying, but if it weren't for him, I wouldn't have seen another day. I am grateful... whatever I said.

The next day, when it was finally time for us to leave, pirates and villagers were gathered before us. I had put my hood back on. I couldn't risk anyone recognizing me on the road ; being discovered could cost me my life. 

"Are you finally leaving, Yona?", one of them cried. 

"Boy, come again! Make sure you come back! Come back even if you're dead!", a guy shouted, patting Yoon on his back.

"Ow!"

My eyes dragged over to my two bestfriends, but they stopped on Yona. She also had her hood on, for security matters, same as mine - and also because her red hair was suspicious -, but I could see her head moving, as if she were looking around, searching for something... or someone. 

"What's wrong, princess?", Hak wondered aloud. 

"Jae-Ha isn't here", she started and I rolled my eyes. "There were a lot of things I wanted to thank him for"

"Not seeing him for one last time is actually for the best. I say "good riddance", to be honest", I openly complained, which earned me her elbow in the ribs. I flinched against the small pressure near my wound. 

"You have nothing to say. Most of the things I want to thank him for is for everything he has done for you" 

"I mean, Lone's right. Who cares about that droopy eyes?", Hak said.

"That's not nice! He helped me a lot!", Yona whined. "Without him, who knows what would have happened to Lone or me! Parting like this is just...", but her eyes landed on a familiar woman, smoking from her pipe. "Captain Gi-Gan! Do you know where Jae-Ha is?"

"Who cares about that droopy eyes?", she repeated.

"Whaaaaat?!", Yona screamed and I chuckled. 

"Jae-Ha, huh? Oh well, you should come by Awa again some day"

"Okay..."

"Don't forget, all right?"

"Okay"

"If you ever need a boat, talk to me. I'll have one prepared"

"Thank you"

"The swelling on your face hasn't gone down quite yet"

"I'm fine", Yona answered with a smile.

"The frail girl who looked like she'd go flying if the wind blew has become strong, hasn't she?"

"Frail girl?", she asked, confused. "I'm not that bad!"

"No, when you had just arrived here, you were a frail girl who couldn't do anything. Well, even now, you flat-out can't clean, do laundry, or cook. Hurry up and learn. Nobody will take you to be their bride if your only redeeming feature is your recklessness"

"That's none of your concern!"

"It won't be a problem if Lady Yona finds a husband who will do the laundry in the river while she cuts grass in the mountain"

"Hak, be quiet!", she shouted, irritated. 

"Yona, the main cuisine of Awa is fish", one of the pirates said. "If you can roast one, you'll be alright!"

"Oh, if you have no where to go, come to my place", another one said.

"I won't go! Jeez, you're all being rude! I'm leaving!", she said, storming off in the direction leading out of Awa. 

"Ah wait!", the Captain stopped her. "Take this", she said, offering her a bag full of senjusou.

"Oh! The senjusou!", Yoon shouted, surprised. 

"Don't catch a cold", Gi-Gan warned, patting Yona on the head.

Yona's eyes soon started to water. I watched the captain's head turn toward me and she approached me, cupping my face in her hands. "As for you, your strength as a woman is something I would only dream of. Don't tire yourself, girl, but never give up. Recovery takes a lot of time, but you can still live through it all. And if ever you want someone to talk to, come to me"

She freed my face from her hands and I smiled at her. The connection that had built itself between us was warm and familiar, but also welcoming. She reminded me of my mother.

"Goodbye", I said. "Thank you"

"Thank you for everything", Yona added. And we walked away with the cheers of goodbyes following us. But then, Yona stopped in her tracks. 

"...Yona?", Yoon called. We were all turned toward her, surprised at her sudden stop. The guys that stood behind Gi-Gan stopped cheering and watched. And then, she turned toward them, tears flowing out of her eyes and ran to the Captain, arms wide as she wrapped them around her, hugging her. I smiled at the warm embrace that startled the old woman. She smiled as she watched her cry. And I smiled as well, because Yona really did care for all of these people, no matter for how much time she knew them.

And I did, too. In my own way.

But now, where were we headed to? What would follow? I had a long way to go before I would ever forgive myself and truly live up to what other people thought I deserved. I had to accept each thought that appeared in my mind. And in this very moment, I asked myself how it would be possible. How would it be possible to forgive myself, with all I have done? How can I live with such guilt? Will I ever be able to sleep in peace? Will I ever be able to smile happily? What's in store for me? Will it become worse... or better? Who is this so called love Ik-Soo was talking about? Who would know? Only the future will be able to tell us... and I'm slowly heading toward it.

Chapter Text

"Yona... stop crying already!", Yoon cried out.

"You are crying, too, Yoon", Ki-Ja called.

"You're the one crying the most, White Snake", Hak stated. 

How the hell did we end up here? Hak looks toward me as I lift my eyebrows. I shake my head in disbelief. From the corner of my eye, I can see he's doing the same. We're both so confused as to why Yoon and Ki-Ja decided to join Yona in her sorrow. Though, I stopped asking questions a few minutes ago, when it was clear they wouldn't stop.

"But... I wasn't able to say goodbye to Jae-Ha after all", Yona said, even more tears spilling down her cheeks. 

"Jae-Ha? I thought we were over him", I said and I was going to add more to it, but Ki-Ja stopped me. 

"Jae-Ha? He became our comrade, did he not?"

I frowned, my head slowly turning in his direction with murderous intent. "What the hell are you talking about, Ki-Ja?" I asked.

"Eh?", Yona said, confused.

And behind us, Shin-Ha unsheathed his sword, making us turn in his direction as he cut down a tree. Next thing we knew, screams were dangerously approaching the ground until a loud thud landed not far away from our group. 

"Oh, you have to be kidding me", I muttered under my breath.

"Jae-Ha!", Yona screamed, somehow relieved to see the green haired man. 

"Hi, Yona dear!", he greeted in a sing-songy voice. 

"Why...?", Yona asked. And I might have asked the question as well if she hadn't herself. 

"He was close by... all along", Shin-Ha explained as I brought my fists to my hips.

"So not only are you a damn pervert, but you're a stalker", I said, turning away.

"Hi, Lone!", he called and I rolled my eyes as I kept ignoring him. "Well", he continued as he sat up. "Since I now have a bit of free time, I was thinking that traveling around with Yona may not be such a bad thing, but.. you looked like you were about to cry as you were looking around for me and I become unbearably agitated. Oops! I missed the chance to call out to you", I frowned at his words, completely and utterly disgusted. 

"He's as perverted as ever", Hak commented.

"Say that louder, Hak, for the people in the back", I said, loud enough for everyone to hear. 

"I feel like he gives off the same smell as you, Thunder Beast", Yoon added.

"God, Yoon, you've gone one hell of a nose", I chuckled, looking at him with disbelief in my eyes.

"Oh? But...", Yona started, surprised and teasing. "You said you didn't like being bound to the decree of the Four Dragons. To go that far..."

"This has nothing to do with the Four Dragons", Jae-Ha countered, serious, and I raised an eyebrow. "Up until now and from here on out, as well, I'll simply follow the path I wish to choose for myself. Nothing is violating my principles of beauty. Right now, I just can't leave you alone. Take me... Yona", he said, taking her hand in his.

"Don't make up excuses", Hak called out, hitting him with his cloth covered glaive.

"That's right", Yoon confirmed. "Since you're not just traveling with Yona, you'll need to introduce yourself to the rest of us, too"

"What an embarrassment", I whispered, amused by his current situation.

"Sorry about that", Jae-Ha said. "Well then, again... My name is Jae-Ha. I'm the beautiful monster that carries the dragon within his right leg. I hope we'll get along from here on out"

I was seconds from laughing and I really wanted to escape that. So I looked up toward the other, a fist lifted up to my mouth to hide my amusement. "We already knew that, green head, now if it wouldn't bother you all, I'd like for us to be on our way", I said, rotating on my heels as I walked farther away into the forest, and farther away from Awa.

We had already stopped for a while before I finally heard Jae-Ha footsteps approach the camp. We had each taken a small shower and Yoon was getting ready to prepare dinner. The green-haired man threw the animal on the ground and clapped his hands as if to signify a job well done. I would bet he's proud. I rolled my eyes. And I knew, when I looked at him again, that he had seen me. I did not look away. But before he could say anything else, Yoon walked over to him.

"Wow! It's a fawn. Nice catch!"

"It was difficult trying to jump while carrying it", he said, visibly trying to make someone pity his "poor" condition. Mister I'm-the-cleaniest-and-most-perfect-and-can't-endure-not-having-any-eyes-on-me-at-all decided it was his time to shine. I rolled my eyes again, though this time, he did not see me. But still, there was an edge to his body and face that told me he still wanted to confront me. 

"Jae-Ha's legs are really amazing", Yona stated.

"He suddenly jumped off into the eastern sky. So I thought he had finally been summoned to the Heavens"

"That fact is overrated, Yona", I said, sighing. 

"Ready to do better, Lone?", Jae-Ha suddenly asked. "Go right ahead, show me what you got. You win if you bring the biggest beast"

"No thank you, I have no interest in battling in something as insignicant as this... and immature"

"Well, I made full use of this power when I was a boy to fly all around Kouka", he said, as if in a daze, ignoring my comment, remembering the old memories.

"By the way, you ran away from the village of Ryokuryuu, right? Why?", I looked back at Jae-Ha, slightly curious as well. The question came from Ki-Ja, though.

"Why?", he said, as if the answer was obvious. "Would you consider it acceptable if both your hands and feet were bound by chains?", he said, and I winced, looking away. I had been in a similar situation, though only for a couple of days. 

"Chains?!", the White Dragon exclaimed. 

"As an innocent, young, beautiful boy, I was tied up in chains. My milky white supple body was exposed to the curious gazes of the adults and I was blinded and assaulted within a cage day after day", he recited, as if from a poem.

"You're no poet, that's for sure", I commented. 

"Hold on, don't overlap the pretty boy character, okay?", Yoon stopped him, and I chuckled.

"Eh?! Eh?! What?! I do not understand the village of Ryokuryuu", Ki-Ja cried.

"Don't believe him so easily. There's probably some wild delusions involved", Hak finished, making me laugh. 

Jae-Ha spared me a glance, as if to glare at me. "That's generally the fate of the Ryokuryuu as soon as they're born" 

"Generally?!", Ki-Ja screamed. 

"Well, it's that, isn't it?", Hak asked, unimpressed. "It would be hard for the Ryokuryuu to stop themselves from jumping around"

"Actually, that's it" 

"But since you're so quick, we'll be able to track down and find Ouryuu no matter where they are", Yona said.

"Oh, I had forgotten about the Ouryuu", I said, getting up. I kneeled again in the dirt and placed my bag against a rock. 

"You were too busy thinking about me, I bet?", Jae-Ha teased.

"You wish. Actually, I was busy thinking about Ki-Ja's perfect face and Shin-Ha's mysterious eyes", I answered, leaning back on the ground, hands behind my head as I fell on the bag. 

"Well, anyway, since I've come so far, getting a look at Ouryuu's face might not be so bad", Jae-Ha said, turning the conversation in another direction. "I'll find him"

"No. Leave that task to me. Wait.. Perfect face..?", Ki-Ja said, way to excited. 

The three dragons began to argue over a subject I was not particularly interested in, while Yoon asked Hak to start the fire and went to discuss with Yona. I closed my eyes, trying to relax my mind and body as much as I could. Sleep wasn't getting better these days and I was exhausted. But the important part was I ate more than enough and sometimes, Yoon would leave more food for me, because he knew how thin I was. I was also training, regularly. I was taking back my strength and the habits I had lost. It felt good to get started again, but it was not for the weak. My limbs were more sore than before and because of my physical condition, I got tired easily. But I was working hard. Hard to become stronger and fiercer. I didn't want to fall in the hands of ennemies again ; it felt too much like a nightmare, and only the Heavens knew how much I had those every night. 

And suddenly, stomach noises reached my ears. I slightly opened an eye when I realized it wasn't me who was making that sound and then, my eyes stopped on a yellow clothed male, sitting right beside Yona, praying with his eyes closed, hands together before his face. As a reflex, I brought my hand to my hip and unsheathed my sword in a swift movement as I stood up and approached him. My blade was but mere inches away from his face. Unbothered, he turned to look at me, a smile on his innocent face. Unlike him, I was frowning, distrust painting my face. 

"Well, how violent you are, Miss", he said, as a way of greeting, and then, looked at Yona. "That's splending, but... everything that lives will return to heaven someday", he explained, probably talking about the small thanks that Yona had murmured a bit before Lone opened her eyes. "You put your hands together and thanked him. He will forgive you"

Drool started to go down the corners of his mouth and he did not seem bothered by it. I cringed and straightened, but kept my eye on him. "You're drooling...", Yoon said, visibly confused by who this man might be and what he was doing in their camp. "And your stomach is growling. Anyway, who are you?" 

"Oh, no need to be concerned. Just passing through. Drool always comes out", I cringed again, frowning.

"Wipe it off!", Yoon screamed, as if it had been obvious from the first time he remarked it. 

"There was a tasty smell. So I came!"

"It still smells like raw meat and blood", Yoon stated.

"You doing that a lot?", I asked.

"Do what a lot?", he asked, looking toward me again as he wiped the drool off.

"Passing through unknown camps?"

"Oh, well, it's a current hobby of mine, since I can't seem to do anything to survive", He said, laughing it off. 

"Anyway, are you hungry?", Yona asked. 

I gave her a look, an eyebrow raised. "Unnaturally hungry", the guy responded. 

A while later, the food was ready. Yona, Hak, Yoon, the stranger and I were seated around the fire, ready to dig in. Though, the presence of the other three dragons were very obviously missing. 

"Ooh, it looks good", Hak sang. 

"Eat as much as you want today, there's plenty", Yoon explained. 

"This is great. It's been a while since we've had meat", Hak beamed and then looked up at me. "You gotta be happy. It's gonna make some to put on your bones"

I rolled my eyes. "What's wrong with the miss?", the guy asked, looking at me. 

"Trauma", I simply answered, wishing to wave away the conversation as quickly as possible. He didn't say anything else. 

"By the way, who is that?", Hak suddenly asked, pointing at the guy. 

"Oh... a wanderer? I don't know either", Yoon answered. 

"Since he looked hungry, I invited him", Yona explained. 

I watched as Yona offered the stranger a cup of water. "By the way, Ki-Ja ; do you know anything about Ouryuu? Where he might live?", Yoon asked the White Dragon. "Or any special characteristics he might have?"

"According to the country's founding legend, he's the one with the strong body, right?", Yona said, excited. 

"Is his body made of scales?", Yoon asked, purely curious. 

"Or is he a sturdy man?", Hak proposed. 

Realizing Ki-Ja might not answer anytime soon, I turned toward the three dragons gathered a few feet away and called after them. "Hey, you guys! Come over here and eat!"

"...What do you think?", Ki-Ja asked, visibly uncertain of something. I frowned. 

"Hmm. There's no mistake about him", Jae-Ha confirmed. 

"Huh? What's up?", Yoon asked, confused.

"Well, how should I put it? It's about that boy there that's been eating meat for a while now. We think... he's Ouryuu", my eyes widened at the fact and I turned toward the yellow guy.

"What?", I let out. "He's the yellow dragon of legend?" 

"Hm? You called?", the guy said, as if it were natural. 

"Oh! On closer inspection", he started, examining the three figures standing before him. "There's Hakuryuu, Seiryuu and even Ryokuryuu! This means... everyone is together now", he finished with a bow, crossing the meat sticks over his head. 

"Whattttt?!", we all screamed and then they rushed him to answer questions. I was stunned. 

"You're all so restless. Zeno is properly sitting down and eating. Isn't Zeno a good boy?", he asked. "Oh, Zeno is my name"

"What's with that lazy self introduction?", Yoon shouted.

"I had a feeling Ouryuu was nearby", Ki-Ja shared. "But he was so close, I doubted my feeling"

"Right?", Jae-Ha agreed. "You didn't notice we were close by?"

"It's not about noticing or not noticing... Zeno is just leisurely traveling. Without a real care about the other dragons"

"You don't care...?", the Green Dragon asked. 

"You, on the other hand, really did care about the other dragons", Hak teased, visibly sarcastic.

"You're just traveling at your leisure?", Ki-Ja asked.

"Yep"

"Alone? What about your village?"

"Left it a long time ago"

"Our master could have come to meet you! Yet you wandered about aimlessly?! Right! Your master... Don't you feel anything when you look at Lady Yona?!"

"Master?", Zeno asked, confused. 

"This is Princess Yona!", he said, introducing her. "She is the master of the Four Dragons!"

"No need to be so theatrical, Ki-Ja love", I said, patting his shoulder. "Yona can introduce herself"

"'Love'?!", he screamed, blushing, hands covering his cheeks. 

"Princess... Master...", he whispered and Yona waited, as if uncertain what to say or do.

"Don't feel anything? Now that would be rude! She's super cute! Zeno's heart is pounding!"

"I know that! That is not what I mean! It can't be... he didn't feel that initiation", he said, which had me frowning.

"That initiation that even had me thinking, "Boil me, take me, do whatever you want already"...?!", Jae-Ha explained.

"What kind of initiation is that?", Hak asked.

"Right?", I let out, sharing a look with my bestfriend. 

"Is he that strong..?"

"Or is he just very simply minded...?"

"But if you left your village to leisurely travel alone like this, isn't that...", Yona started.

"That's what?"

"Asking you to join us... may be difficult. We're looking for the dragons to ask them to lend us their power. If you..."

"Okay"

My eyes widened in surprise and I crossed my arms over my chest. 

"Huh?", Yona let out.

"It's fine. Zeno is just traveling wherever Zeno wants. There's no particular destination. And nothing to do! Above all, your food was super delicious! It's a precious hobby, to be grateful for the food"

"That should be a principle", Yoon commented. 

"It's nice to meet you. And here's to more delicious food from tomorrow on!", he exclaimed, shaking Yoon's hand in respect.

"What the... He wandered in and became our comrade the fastest", Ki-Ja sighed. 

"Or maybe because he was just starving", Yoon said. 

"He broke your record, White Snake"

"Ouryuu Zeno", Ki-Ja called instantly. 

"Huh?"

"I am Hakuryuu Ki-Ja. I possess the power of the dragon within my right hand. If you are a dragon that protects the princess like us, show us your power"

"Power?"

"That is right"

"Ah, Zeno isn't very powerful, but my body is sturdy!"

"Oh. So it was that, after all"

"Somehow, I still doubt that would be your power", I let out, bringing my fingers to my chin, trying to think.

"How sturdy are you?", Hak asked, a meat stick in his mouth as he punched the poor guy in the face. He flew away like a fly would have died. I put my hands over my mouth, shocked. "Did that hurt you?", Zeno was holding his cheek, on the verge of tears. 

"Your body is weak! You're just a regular person! Are you really Ouryuu?", Yoon shouted.

"No, no, he's just weird", Zeno cried, defending himself. "The strength his arm has is outrageous"

"I'm often hit, too", Jae-Ha added. "By Hak's strong fists"

"You don't count, Jae-Ha", I said.

"You always look like you enjoy it for some reason", Yoon said and he approached Zeno, holding his arm up. "Your body isn't particularly tough. Your skin is squishy"

"Zeno's skin is smooth. It gets dirty sometimes, though"

"The Thunder Beast's body is rock solid. I'd be convinced if he claimed he was Ouryuu"

"I have kept quiet until now, but I am actually Ouryuu", Hak said, dead serious, arms crossed.

"If you were a dragon, you would be the evil dark dragon!", Ki-Ja screamed and Hak grinned. "Aren't you mortified?! He is threatening your position! Remember your pride as a dragon!!"

"Okay, okay, fellow friend", I started and put my hands on his shoulders, stepping in between him and the yellow dragon. "Don't put such uncanny thoughts in a mind so innocent ; we wouldn't want Ouryuu becoming a little too much like White Snake, now, would we?

"But!", he screamed, looking over my shoulder. "You neglected to train your body, didn't you? The Four Dragons must always keep their powers refined and sharp for the sake of their master"

"Hold on", Jae-Ha stopped him. "Ouryuu has his own life to live. Pushing your values onto others isn't one of your good points!"

"But- The Four Dragons... the four brothers of ancient time have finally gathered. For the first time since time of the legend... we have met for the first time in thousands of years. It has finally... been fulfilled... in our time! I...! That's amazing if you really think about it. But it feels a little too anticlimatic"

Jae-Ha and Shin-Ha were surrounding Ki-Ja, trying to reassure him. While, not far away, Yona looked toward Zeno as I did the same and we watched him smile slightly. Not the innocent smile of the boy we met earlier on. There was something else about that smile... nothing not so innocent. 

I was laying on the ground again, head turned up toward the sky, stargazing. The little miniscules spots of light were so many that I couldn't keep my eyes on just one. And yet, the spectacle was as amazing as it always was. I heard a loud thud beside me as I turned my head. I hadn't seen him coming, but Zeno had took a seat right beside me. 

"I do not desire to offend you, but may I ask how miss ended up with the group? I am rather curious... of your story", he asked, then he turned his head toward me. I could see, in the shadows of his eyes, that he was watching my scar.

"I am not offended, but I also do not intend to answer that question fully. I would guess that you want to know what happened to me, but the only way you could know is if you could somehow guess"

"Anything the miss can tell me, I will be satisfied with"

I sighed and smiled, returning my eyes to the dotted sky.

"I have grown up with Hak and Yona by my side. My parents died after the King and I was supposed to marry the current King for politics. I ran away before that. It was a long journey that followed, before it led me to Awa, where I finally rejoined with the rest of the group"

"So you were not with the other miss and mister since the beginning"

"Nope"

"It is quite a coincidence that you were to find their group in Awa... of all places", he said, and his suspicious tone averted my eyes, making me look at him. I frowned.

"If you would rather think of ill thoughts toward me, I would assure you not to. It is not a plea, but a warning. I have no desire to start a fight, but if you ever accuse me of treason, actually send me to the castle"

"Why would I do that?"

"Because I am accused of treason to the crown and to have killed my entire family as well as having burned down my house"

"Are the accusations true?"

Before, I would have immediately said no, because I had been persuaded that I was innocent, but now...

"It is complicated"

"I see... You know, it is rare to see a noble woman take up a sword"

"Noble woman? How-"

"You are Lady Lone, aren't you? The Lady who has lost everything, the one who was presumed dead in a city of Wind. You really are a reason for talking, even now, miss"

"I never wished to be. If things had stayed the way they were, all this wouldn't have been necessary"

He shrugged. 

"By pure curiosity, do you ever ask yourself why you're still alive after your family died? After everyone died...?", there was another meaning to his words that I couldn't quite understand. But..

"Yes, I do. On a daily basis, indeed. It is torture"

He didn't say anything else. He just looked up at the sparkling sky and stared and stared. This boy was a wonder to look at. For now, it was too early to ask, but he was hiding something. To go from completely innocent to having another whole personnality in less than two seconds is something I cannot fathom. 

"You were the only one who acted on their impulse when you saw me", he pointed out.

"If Hak would have seen you first, he would have beheaded you on the spot"

"But it was the Miss who was there", he said and then looked at me. He smiled and stood up. "I like you"

I watched as he walked away. This boy was a wonder, indeed...

Chapter Text

I wanted to sleep this morning, but it looked like my new companions didn't agree with my plans. I started to twist and turn under the thin blanket, trying to rid my ears of the unwanted noises that happened outside of my head. But before I could realize it, I was already awake. I kept my eyes closed, hoping that it would keep whoever was fooling around from bothering me this early in the morning. What time was it, anyway? 

But before I had the time to do anything, heavy weight landed on my legs, which made me open my eyes in a frenzy. I sat up, the body still laying against my legs and watched as the Blue Dragon was rubbing the back of his head, as if I had been the one to hurt him. 

"What the hell is this racket at this hour?", I screamed, looking around. 

"That was your alarm ticking on, beautiful", Jae-Ha sang.

I glared at him, ignoring his comment. And then, Shin-Ha got up on his feet and ran to Zeno. Jae-Ha and Ki-Ja enventually got tangled up in the mess. I took my time standing up and rubbing my eyes. Stretching was a blessing in this very moment. 

"BE QUIET, YOU ANIMALS!!", Yoon shouted, which made me interrupt my early morning wake up. I opened an eye and rubbed the other as I looked at them all. "And pay attention!"

"What a scary boy..", Zeno said.

"This self-proclaimed pretty boy has more right to speak than the rest of us", Hak added, arms crossed.

"Our first goal has been reached", Yoon continued on. "We've gathered the Four Dragons", as he said the words, the others seemed so proud it made me giggle. I had nothing to do with this gathering, for my purpose had never been to find these dragons alongside my friends, who I once thought dead. "Now... There's still one thing that's been on my mind. It's Ik-Soo's prophecy"

"Oh, Ik-Soo?", I said. "The priest that gave me your drawing"

"Indeed", he found himself saying, looking a little sad, as if he had been trying to avoid feeling like this. 

"He saved my life on multiple occasions without even knowing. I owe him a lot"

"Really?", Hak asked, visibly confused.

"Nothing you can top, Thunder Beast", I commented.

"But anyway! According to the prophecy, once the Four Dragons have finished gathering, the sword and the shield that protects the King are supposed to awaken", Yoon went on. "I think the king it's referring to is Yona"

"Me?", my red-haired friend asked. 

"I thought something was supposed to happen once the dragons came together, but nothing special occured"

"Is it saying we need to find a sword and a shield that Yona is supposed to use?", Ki-Ja asked.

"Yeah, because it is that easy", I let out.

"Huh?"

"I hope you understand how dumb that plan sounded like, Hakuryuu. I doubt the sword and shield is something you can easily find in an armory. It has to go deeper than that"

"Though, if the king it's referring to is Soo-Won", Yoon added, making me tense. "We'll have to rethink what we should do"

"That man is a traitor who took the throne by force and expelled the Princess from the castle. He is not the true king", Ki-Ja countered.

"Even if Soo-Won is the "king" from the prophecy... we're going to Ik-Soo, to hear what he has to say about it"

I nodded in agreement. "You're just worried about that carefree priest, aren't you?", Hak teased. 

"No!", Yoon defended. 

And we were on our way shortly after. It took us a few days of sleeping and walking to finally arrive in the northern mountains of the Wind Tribe. It was quite serene to walk on for a long period of time. I would barely talk. Jae-Ha and I didn't talk ; we didn't even end up alone somewhere together, and I felt reassured. I wasn't exactly scared of him, I was more scared of myself, of what he could do to me. But my thoughts were always worsened when I found him staring. The way his eyes wandered from my eyes to my lips and traveled down my body felt way too intimate for me to endure. I couldn't stop my cheeks from flushing raging red. But as long as he was not approaching me, or speaking to me, I hoped I could stay sane.

"We're here!", Yoon finally said after we had been in the forest for a couple of hours. I spared a look toward the valley where I learned a lot of things about my life and then continued on with the others. I would very much love to be coming back here later. 

"It hasn't even been three months since we left, but... it feels as if we haven't been back in years", Hak said.

I only contemplated the fact. It truly felt as if an entire lifetime had separated the moment it all begun and today. 

"You said it as if you were about to pick up something you forgot like it was no big deal... so I was under the impression it was close by", Jae-Ha let out.

"We have to walk around discreetly, so we went the roundabout way", Yoon explained.

I watched as Ik-Soo's place came into view and Yoon ran to the door, screaming his name in anticipation. I saw his expression change to worry as he realized the spectacle unfolding before his eyes. I arrived at his side and noticed the damage that had been done to the place. 

"What... is this?", Yoon asked.

"Yoon!", Yona shouted.

"Ik-Soo!!", Yoon screamed as my eyes landed on his body laying on the ground. He seemed to be bleeding. "Ik-Soo! What happened?! Was it thieves?"

I kept looking at them, worry stealing a part of my mind, my heart. I couldn't move. The sense of danger was too important. But then, Ik-Soo spoke as Yoon put his arm underneath his head, holding him up. 

"Huh...? Yoon..?", I took a deep breath then, reassured to see him alive and breathing. 

"Ik-Soo! Hold on, I'll treat you now!", Yoon said as he turned his head toward me. He was asking me to help him, and so I headed over where they kept the water. 

"I was so hungry... that I knocked everything over", I stopped in my tracks, startled by his words, but I kept on going as Ik-Soo realized everyone's presence. The water was almost empty, but there was enough to drown a cloth in it and give it to Yoon so he could wash Ik-Soo's wounds. We tidied the small house and Yoon wrapped Ik-Soo's head. I heard the young boy shout at his friend in anger, before Ik-Soo turned toward us.

"It's become so lively", he said and it made me smile. "It looks like the princess has gone through a lot of experiences, too", his eyes wandered from Yona to me. "And the other young woman as well. I am glad you found your people", I nodded in thanks and he returned the nod. 

"Ik-Soo", Yoon called. "The Four Dragons are assembled"

I felt someone approach me from behind, but I didn't turn around. From the corner of my eyes, I saw green hair fall over my shoulder. I crossed my arms over my chest and waited.

"You know him?", he asked and I frowned. 

"Of course I know him. He saved my life"

"Mm, interesting", he whispered and backed away. I then concentrated on what the others were saying. Yoon continued on.

"What are the sword and shield that protects the King? Is the "King" Yona? Or is it the current King, Soo-Won?"

Ik-Soo's lips parted, searching for an answer. He took a deep breath and spoke.

"It seems the sword and shield meant to protect the King both need a little more time to appear. When the time comes, you'll definetely know"

"Hm...", Yoon let out. "So the time isn't now, huh? Then, what should we do? If we can't go out and look for the sword and shield, then..."

"I want to enhance my powers a little more", Ki-Ja cut in.

"Oh, you wanna go?", Hak asked in a teasing voice.

But I agreed. It would be a good time to take back the strength I lost and take more. I was not used to this world, but I could learn to get used to it, to its horrors and everything. 

"I can't guarantee you will live", Ki-Ja spoke out.

"Oh?", Hak asked, as if debating his words. 

"...Say?", Zeno said, which had me looking in his direction with a raised eyebrow. "Why are you all avoiding the real issue at hand?", I frowned. 

"Miss... what did you want to gather the Four Dragons for?", I spared a look in Yona's direction, hoping I could see even a glimpse of an answer, but instead, I looked back at Zeno as he continued speaking after Yona showed her misunderstanding. 

"You and that guy over there were kicked out of the castle, so it's understandable if you need the power to fight"

"It was to survive", Yona countered. 

"But... then what? Are you going to run away forever?", Zeno asked. 

"No", Yona answered.

"No? Then... are you thinking of overthrowing Soo-Won who stole the title of the King to take back Hiryuu Castle and the throne?"

I saw Yona's eyes go blank before I felt the shivers go down my spine. I straightened and stiffened. What he was saying... was he serious? I've seen that expression on his face the day we met him for the first time... I wondered what it hid. 

"Th- that's impossible! No matter how many dragons we have, we can't attack the castle with this many people..!", Yoon complained.

"It's not whether we can or can't", Zeno continued. "It's whether we want to or not. Besides... If we Four Dragons use our powers seriously, it won't be impossible for us to take down one castle", his words made me reach for my sword in reflex. Not that I felt threatened, but I didn't feel secure. Hak and Yona visibly couldn't hide their surprise as their eyes widened. But then, the Yellow Dragon bursted out laughing, bringing a hand behind his head.

"But Zeno doesn't have that kind of power, anyway!", my hand fell away from my sword and I raised an eyebrow in concern. 

"You-", Ki-Ja approached him, as if ready to tear off his head. 

"The newbie is sorry! Sorry", Zeno apologized. "Zeno wasn't suggesting we do that. It was just a simple question about what we're going to do. It was Zeno's own decision to come along. Miss is free to think what she wants, too. More importantly, Zeno is hungry!" 

"You are so restless... I guess I should make some food for now"

"Ya-y! Food!", Zeno exclaimed, a big contrast to his serious demeanor just a few seconds ago. Though, my stomach reacted to his words also. His timing couldn't be more perfect.

I was sitting on the edge of the cliff, overlooking the valley. The waterfall looked infinitely beautiful. Yona was by my side, watching the same spectacle as I was. The stars were illuminating the sky, alongside the shining moon. She was hugging her knees to her chest. My legs were folded on one side, my opposite hand resting on the ground. Footsteps approached and I heard the rustling of leaves. But before I could fully turn around, the person was speaking. 

"It's a lovely night, isn't it?", Ik-Soo asked.

"Ik-Soo?", Yona called, slightly surprised. He came to sit beside us.

"Have you been thinking about what happened earlier?", Ik-Soo asked. "Ah, but... it looks to me like your face isn't showing any doubt"

"I... for the first time in my life, I talked to people outside the castle, held a weapon, which my father didn't allow... and walked until I was worn and tired. What I heard was the voices of bitter resentment toward my deceased father and the unchanged state of the country. It was painful. Because this country wasn't the happy one of my peace-loving father at all. The more I found out, the more painful it was. It was because I was too weak. But when there were people who desperately reached out their hands for help, there were people there to grab them. When they didn't have enough strength, there were people who turned around and lent them a hand. In this country... there are many people I want to protect. I don't regret taking down Awa's overlord, Kum-Ji"

"Princess...", the priest called, but I only stared. I had been thinking all along how difficult it had been for me, but I had never considered the feelings my bestfriend held. I had never considered the horror she went through. 

"I've been thinking... since the battle in Awa ended. There may still be towns like Awa in Kouka. So from this point on, I'll stand upon the ground and look out over the country of Kouka. I want to help people who are being crushed in situations of crisis. And... I'll never be able to do this from within the castle", she was looking up into the sky, as if it held her future within its constellations. And maybe it did.

"Ik-Soo. I think it's apparent to you, so I'll say it. I met Soo-Won in Awa. I thought I resented him... I thought I couldn't forgive him. B-but... I couldn't pull out the sword", I put a shaking hand upon hers.

"No matter how foolish and incomprehensible it is, certainly there are sentiments that can't be thrown away", Ik-Soo said. "Even if you try to stop your heart by cause of being unable to forgive yourself, there will be times when the heart starts running again much to your despair. King Hiryuu said it, too. 'I am human. Even if I am despised and betrayed by humans... I still loved them'. That is why I think people are endearing"

"They are endearing...", I repeated. "Yet, most of them, you can't find a reason to find them endearing"

"Then, what do you think of it?", Ik-Soo asked.

"They're hateful, so much that you can feel they searched for it"

"They searched for your hate?"

"Yes... they did", and I knew that he knew I was thinking of the five people who ruined my life. He knew. "And revenge tasted like a sweet piece of fruit. It has never tasted bitter"

"Do you feel you haven't done enough? Do you feel you haven't made them suffer as much as they made you suffer?"

I hesitated. I looked down at my hands and watched as my fingers fidgeted. Of course. 

"No matter how much they would have suffered, it never would have been enough", a single drop slid down my cheek. I couldn't fight the pain or the sadness, my anger. 

"But you found comfort", he said, and I knew he meant Yona. I nodded. "I'm glad you opened yourself up"

I giggled. "It never would have happened if the Princess wouldn't have been the Princess..."

Yona smiled. And I smiled... despite the urge to cry on her shoulder. For once, I would fight the tears and smile truly. Smile through it all, because I knew I couldn't suffer for the rest of my life. 

Chapter Text

My sleep was again disrupted by undesired horrors. But since it was an early hour where some people usually woke up, I decided to start my day earlier than I usually did. I stretched and yawned after I sat up on the small mattress. I looked around and noticed everyone was asleep. I stood up and silently made my way out of the small room after sheathing my sword around my hip. Rubbing my eyes, trying to rid them of the fatigue that was still overtaking me, I eventually tumbled on in the main hall. 

It had been a few days since we've arrived at Ik-Soo, and our days did not consist of a lot. We usually rested and helped Ik-Soo around the small house, but I mostly asked Yoon to teach me what he knew about medicine and cooking and laundry and everything he usually did alone. And since Yona started asking around if they could show her swordsmanship, I took matters into my own hands. So I've also been teaching her the sword at the end of the day. 

I arrived near the water basin and realized we were low on water. Refilling it would probably be something to do today. I still plunged my hands in it and doused my face in its cold temperature. Afterward, my eyes didn't feel as tired and my face as dry. 

And then, from outside, I heard a loud thud, as if something had been put down. I approached the door and opened it, peering out. The sun blinded me for a few seconds, but then I could see Yoon and Ik-Soo standing not too far away from each other. Yoon had his fists on his hips. 

"I think that'll be enough", he said, proud of his work. Just in front of him lay a large cart full of food and supplies. I fully got out of the house as Yoon started pulling on the handles, bringing him and the cart away. But Ik-Soo stopped him. 

"Yoon", he called, making him stop in his tracks. He turned toward his friend, not realizing my presence not far behind. 

"Where is everyone?", Yoon asked.

"Still sleeping", the priest answered. "Are you going?"

"Yeah", the boy answered, which had me approaching them. 

"Where are you going?", I asked and they both turned toward me. 

"To the nearest village, to give food and supplies", he answered. 

"Oh, can I come?"

"Of course. You can help me"

"Can't I go, too?", Ik-Soo then asked. 

"No! You stay here. I'm this kind of self-satisfying hypocrite after all"

"No", the priest countered and hugged his smaller friend to his chest. "No. You're a kind boy, Yoon" 

I smiled as I saw him tear up a little, and then we were on our way. I kept my hood on as we entered the village.

"Oh, it's Yoon", the children exclaimed. 

"He brought someone with him", one of them said, approaching me. "Who are you, miss?", he asked, pulled on my hands.

"I'm here to help Yoon", I answered and the child suddenly pulled on one of my hands, letting go of the other.

"Come with me, then, I want to show you something"

"Sure. Lead the way"

The little guy started showing me around the village and a couple others joined him in his touring. I smiled through it all, and eventually, I found myself pulling the hood off my head, as if to see everything brighter. 

"Miss, what happened to your face?", one little girl asked me. I smiled at her, and kneeled before them. 

"Miss has had an accident a while ago. That's why", I explained calmly.

"Was it bad guys?", one of them asked.

"Yes. Bad, bad people", I answered, keeping my smile on. 

"Is it gonna happen to us, too?", another girl asked.

"No, I promise. I will make sure nothing happens to you", I told them. Her little hands were between mine, a reassuring move that made her face shine. Joy was back on her features.

"Hey, miss, wanna play with us?", a little boy asked.

"Su-", I started to say, but I turned around as an old man spoke to Yoon.

"By the way, are those people behind you friends of yours?"

"What?", Yoon let out and turned. I realized at the same time as him that everyone was standing there, behind him like the old man had said. I smiled, escaping a small laugh. But then, I felt little hands tug on my sleeve.

"Miss, do you know them?", I turned toward them at the words.

"Yes. And I should go see why they've joined us. I promise I'll play with you later, though"

"Promise?", another asked, looking a little deceived.

"I promise"

And then he beamed again, as well as all the others. They each went running away, letting out excited sounds. I got up on my feet and approached my friends, who were already speaking with an angry Yoon. 

"You can't! You'll attract attention!", Yoon was shouting. I arrived beside him and put a hand on his shoulder.

"Calm down, Yoon, you'll alarm everyone. They can help us if they want, it'll offer an extra hand. Also, I think everyone's hungry ; shall we prepare breakfast?"

"But they are suspicious!", he kept on arguing and I shook my head in disbelief. "This place has sick people and isn't safe. It isn't the kind of place a princess should come to"

"Yoon", Yona cut him off. "It is because I am Kouka's Princess and especially because I am King Il's daughter that I think it is a place I should come to. I want to know the effects of the things my father did", Yoon looked genuinely suprised, but everyone else looked proud. 

"I get it! Help me out", he shouted then. 

During the next hours, we helped Yoon as we provided for the village. I would personally walk around and ask people if they wanted some help to do something  or any medicine or treatment as Yoon prepared breakfast. I arrived near the next door and I knocked, peering my head in. The old man was laying on a futon, relaxing. 

"Hey, old man, can I get anything for you?", I asked, fully entering the room. 

"Uh, yes", he hesitated. "Can you help me get outside? I'd really love it if I could get a little sun in"

"Of course", I answered and went to kneel at his side. With his help, I sat him up, and then I helped him walk to the door. He stopped before we got out, leaning against the door frame. 

"It's been a few days since I haven't gotten out of this house"

"Come on, let's sit you somewhere so you can benefit of the good weather"

"You are so kind, young lady"

"The pleasure's mine", I told him as I brought my arms away from him. "Are you comfortable this way?", I asked, straightening my back as I got down the small step. He looked up at me. 

"Yes, I am. Thank you for your help"

"Would you like anything else before we serve breakfast?" 

"No need to trouble yourself even more, I am fine for now"

"No problem, then, I'll bring you a bowl of food when it's ready. Call for me if you ever need anything, old man"

He waved a hand at me as I walked away. I joined Yoon where he was preparing food. Yona was kneeling on the ground not far away. "Is food ready?", I asked.

"Yeah, but let's feed the village before the other idiots. I'll go tell them, start pouring bowls"

"Yup, smart pretty boy, I'm at it", and I watched as he approached each and everyone of our friend and they each told him they had already eaten and were not hungry anymore, but the rumbles of their stomach sounded out right after. It made Yoon angry, but they had good intentions. He soon came back.

"Yona, you'll eat, right?", Yoon asked.

"Oh, my stomach's also fu..-", and her stomach grumbled. "Could you hear that?"

"Yep, I could", Yoon answered, and I watched as they both bursted out laughing. I smiled as I stared. Zeno was still showing Ki-Ja how to silence the rumbles of a stomach, but the White Dragon was definitely embarassed at how easily he was failing. 

"Excuse me? May I bother you for a second?", someone asked and I turned around. The spoon fell from my hands and I put the bowl down, bringing my hands behind my head to bring the hood up as I realized what their uniforms meant. They were Fire Tribe officers. "Where is the village chief?"

"Shit...", I whispered and grabbed Yona by the arm, hurrying her away to find the others.

"Th-the chief is over there", Yoon answered and made sure we were walking away. 

"Hak! Jae-Ha!", I shouted and saw them turn around. "Officers have come ; we need to hide"

"Officers?", Jae-Ha asked.

"Really? Let's see", Hak said.

"Hell no! Don't you understand what this means?"

I heard footsteps approach us and when I turned around in a frenzy, Yoon was running in our direction.

"It's bad, you need to hide", he shouted. "You absolutely cannot show your faces!"

But then, sounds of shattering and rattling reached us. I turned around, a hand on my sword. 

"You can't pay, you say?", an officer said. "You want to go without paying them again?" 

"I'm sorry. I'm sorry!", the chief begged on his knees, head down to the ground. "But the rice crops this year didn't produce much, and we hardly have enough to eat for ourselves. Taxes on top of that are..."

But he was interrupted by a foot to his head, pushing him down again. "Hold your tongue! If you can't pay, sell your children off!"

"N-no, I couldn't!"

I felt anger come up to my face, burning my senses. The hand at my sword fully turned around the handle and I unsheathed it, ready to strike. I couldn't see Yoon, but I heard him trying to calm us down. "C-calm down, Ki-Ja. If you come out with that hand, they'll take you away even if you don't do anything. Right, Yona?"

Yona had already pulled an arrow and was ready to shoot, but I kept my attention solely on the officers and the harm they brought to the villagers. If ever I could interrupt without causing any trouble... "Y-Yona, you can't, okay?", Yoon tried to dissuade her. "Because if they find you, it will be the worst, okay?!"

"Master Dol-Bal, there's food over here", an officer revealed, approaching the cart Yoon had brought. 

"See? You had some, didn't you? It looks like you don't have rice, but this will do, right? Carry it out", I felt my feet were burning beneath my weight. I wanted to jump forward and stop them from doing these horrors, but then, I watched as a little girl, one that had asked me to play with her, pulled on the robes of one of the officers. 

"No!", she screamed. "Yoon and the lady brought those for us!", the shivers that went down my spine were of pure fright.

"Move. You're in the way", one of the officers ordered, pushing her away with a small kick of his leg. 

"No!!", the child screamed again. 

"This is just the right amount, isn't it?", the officer asked. "Let's take that child, too"

"Let's sell the child to make up for the insufficient tax", the master announced and I could barely care about the consequences now.

"Please have mercy...!", a poor villager stepped in, trying to save the child. "She's a child who knows nothing of this" 

"Father! Noo, let go!!", the child cried. 

"If you don't want this, prepare some rice or money! Let's go!"

"Lone, no!", was the last thing I heard when I realized I was actually running toward them. 

"Gya!!", an officer cried out as an arrow hit his shoulder, blood sputtering out. I kicked at his boots as he fell to the ground and I brought the child to my chest protectively as I pointed my sword at the officers. 

"What kind of monsters proposes to sell off children because your own Lord can't even comprehend the poverty his own villages suffer through?"

"A woman?! Pff! Bring her as well! We won't tolerate such actions of rebellious intent!", the Master shouted. "Find the one who shot the arrow!"

"Heeereee! It's me!", Jae-Ha called out, a hand in the air. My eyes widened.

"Who are you? You aren't a part of this village, are you?"

"Me? They call me the soaring Green Dragon", he exclaimed as I rolled my eyes, shaking my head in disbelief. 

"Be careful! He's a fool", an officer shouted. 

I slightly heard Yoon complaining about Jae-Ha's show of strength before he stared at me with anger. I offered him the same glare, because whatever Jae-Ha had said, I was agreeing with him. 

Hak was the next to come out, Shin-Ha's fur covering his head. "An even stranger one has appeared!", the officer shouted. 

"Is he a demon?"

"A mountain man?"

"Moreover, is his stomach growling?" 

"Something is living on his head"

"Oh, me?", Hak said. "They call me the Dark Dragon"

"Ah! I recognize that long sword", one of them realized, but Hak had already thrown it away. 

"He chucked it?!"

"What?! That man doesn't need to hold on to his sword?"

"You-", Ki-Ja started and I ripped my eyes away from my friend. "You demons... You are frightening the villagers, aren't you?!"

"Uwaaa! What's with his hand?!", one shouted in horror and fear. It left the White Dragon stunned. 

"A monster?!"

And lastly, I saw my childhood friend head out of her hiding place, stepping in front of our entire group. "You snot-nosed good for nothings!! Are you aware that you are causing havoc in our territory?!", 

Our territory?! The officers were as stunned as I was. 

"Another woman?"

"Your territory?" 

"Are you bandits?!"

"That's right!", Yona shouted in agreement.

"The food over there", she pointed toward the cart and then to me, to the child in my arms. "That child and these villagers' things all belond to us! If you understand, turn tail right now and don't come back! You brats!"

"Pff-ha!", Hak let out and I glared at him, even though he couldn't see me. 

"Don't laugh at me, Dark Dragon"

"Excuse me"

"May I ask you something?", Jae-Ha said. "That voice kind of sounded nostalgic"

"It's an imitation of Captain Gi-Gan", Yona explained and it made me smile. 

"They're a foolish group. Throw them out", Master Dol-Bal ordered and my traits went severe again. 

"Yonaaaa...", Yoon cried out. 

"Yoon, I'm sorry. I've been prepared to fight for the people of Kouka for a long time", and I felt his eyes on me next.

"Lone?! You're the most reasonable person here!"

I smiled up at him, proud of my actions. "I will never be reasonable when people's lives are threatened"

"That being the case", Yona continued. 

"It can't be helped, can it?", Hak asked. 

"Boss?", Jae-Ha said. 

I stayed back, the child holding on to my arm with a strength I never thought one could possess. And I witnessed each and every one of the officers be trampled on like a mere ant. "Do.. you people think... you'll get away with this?!", Master Dol-Bal asked, angry. 

"You're the ones who should learn your lesson", Yona spit out, visibly content with this. "Don't come near this village again. If something happens to this village next time, we..."

"... the Dark Dragon...", Hak started.

"...and the Happy Hungry Bunch...", Zeno continued.

"...will make you pay for it!", Yona finished.

I stayed still as the officers emptied the village of their presence and then from the corner of my eyes, a lumpy character found his way to me, nearly falling to the ground in the mean time. He kneeled beside me and then lowered his head to the ground.

"Thank you, miss. I owe you a lot! Thank you for saving my sweet daughter!", he thanked me and I felt the child struggle against my arms. I let her go and smiled at the man as he looked up at me. 

"Of course. I promised I would never let anything happen to them, after all"

Chapter Text

"Well, I wonder if it'll be fine to become a bandit just once in my life", Yona asked herself, a finger to her chin.

"Yona dear, didn't you give out our bandit group name just a moment ago?", Jae-Ha asked my friend, a smile plastered on his cocky face.

"Oh, that's right", Yona let out, realizing his words. 

"What's with that lightness as if you're just changing jobs?!", Yoon screamed, outraged by the show of power we have performed.

"There's no getting around it. I've already given them our name", Yona tried to put sense into our friend. 

"What idiotic things are you saying?! We have to hurry and run away! They said they would definitely come again. Next time, they'll bring a horde of soldiers with them!", Yoon shouted, and I approached him, putting a hand on his shoulder.

"It's gonna be okay, Yoon. We got this. Moreover, it could offer us a possibility", I said.

"What possibility?!"

"Lone's right", Yona added. "Yoon, there are many villages like this in the Fire Tribe, right?" 

"That's right..."

"And everywhere is impoverished and has heavy taxes?"

".....Yes", he finally answered after a long pause, as if reticent to give in.

"Then, we will become unruly bandits", she added with a smile. "And expand our territory. If we do that, we'll be able to protect the people who has had heavy taxes unjustly levied upon them"

"The problem isn't that simple!", Yoon countered. "If they fall behind in collections, they levy even stricter taxes! Meanwhile, if we manage to pull it off poorly, the soldiers from Saika Castle will make their move!"

"They can come anytime", she said, serious. And as he saw the expression on her face, Yoon knew he could not try to persuade her anymore... no matter what he would say. 

"If they desert impoverished children and the sick in order to protect themselves from danger, they have their priorities backwards. Besides, I don't think I'll lose to them. As long as everyone's here"

"But-!"

"Yoon. Surely you should understand, Yoon. You know how to efficiently move to make the officers come under pressure"

"Well, now that it's settled!", Zeno shouted. "Let's start the revolt of The Dark Dragon and the Happy Hungry Bunch!"

"First of all, that name won't pressurize them!", Yoon complained.

"But it's nice", I added. "And it's fun. If we use unfunny methods, than what is our purpose anyway? We want to restore peace in the Fire Tribe. Isn't it your home, Yoon? Shouldn't you want this?"

"Yes, but... not this way...", I smiled slightly. I got his point, but not everything could be achieved legally.

"Sometimes, we have to use our own ways to make things happen. Yona has that power and the dragons are willing to help her. Hak and I would do anything for Yona and I would do anything for these children, these people. But anyway, you should appreciate what she's doing, since she won't turn back"

"No... she sure won't"

I smiled and stared down at him. He was looking at a faraway point, thinking. I put a hand on his shoulder and left his side a few seconds later. 

It's been three days now, since that conversation. Since Yona stubbornly countered the Fire Tribe's officers and argued with our youngest member about what was right and what wasn't. Despite the complains of our dear friend, we have been defending Fire Tribe villages for the past three days. We have been stopping the officers from stripping away every right a villager could have in his poor conditions. We have acted as bandits, only to protect the villages of this Tribe, the ones who were never taken care of. 

We had gotten rid of officers in the next village and given back what belonged to the village. We had reassured the children and kept our bandit mask on as we paraded through the streets. Yoon and Hak were sitting on a step, Yona was crouching on the ground, petting Ao, while Jae-Ha, Shin-Ha, Ki-Ja and I were standing not too far away. 

"Which village will we go to next, Yoon?", Yona asked. 

"Let's see. At this time, the officers are supposed to go to Shuu Village, too" 

"Is that far?", Hak asked. 

"Yeah, a little. What should we do? Officers might come to Katan Village again, too"

"Then I'll go guard Katan Village at once", Jae-Ha spoke. 

"Oh, that would be a big help", Yoon thanked him. "Yona will wait here"

"Hm?", she let out, surprised. "Why, I'm going too-"

"The next place is far", Yoon explained, cutting her. "We don't know if officers will come. For our fighting force, the Thunder Beast and Lone and... right, if Ki-Ja is there, it will be fine"

"Then, Zeno will hold down the fort with the Miss!"

"Don't you just run around in the middle of battle? This time I will teach you the ways of fighting like one of the Four Dragons. Come", Ki-Ja announced, dark-eyed, a clawed hand on the Yellow Dragon's shoulder. 

"Shin-Ha, we're entrusting the Princess to you", Ki-Ja told him, to which Shin-Ha only nodded in agreement.

"I will stay, also", I added.

"What? You don't want to come to the next village?", Yoon let out.

"I'd rather stay here in case something happens", I lied, offering them a smile. We watched as they went. I was too exhausted to walk to another village. I was almost too exhausted to stand. I just wanted a break. We had been moving nonstop for three days ; I needed this.

We were all sitting on the edge of a step and Yona seemed to be bored.

"You know, you could have gone, too, Lone", Yona said. "No need to stay back for me"

"It's fine, Yona. Really. I need a break anyway"

Shin-Ha was petting Ao, unbothered by our conversation. "It couldn't be helped, I guess. It was out of my control", Yona said. "Say, Lone, can I practice with your sword?"

"You sure? You've been practicing with small knives until now. Are you sure you want the big sword?"

"Yes, I'm sure", she said, her face lighting up, even just a little. And so I stood up and unsheathed by sword. I walked away from the step, away from Shin-Ha and she followed me. I offered her the handle and when she took it, she slightly lost her balance before placing herself.

"Woaw...", she let out, impressed.

"What's wrong?", I asked, lifting an eyebrow.

"It's heavy!", I giggled.

"Well, yeah... Swords are usually forged for men, and it was the weapon my father had planned to entrust to his son, but I got it instead, so it's quite heavy"

"How much time did it take you to be able to lift it up and fight accordingly to its strength?", she asked, starting to swing the blade around using the techniques I've been teaching her. 

"My father offered it to me at age 7. I was able to lift it at age 9, though. Then, it was experience and everything that helped me through the years"

"You've had it for ten years, then. How old is it?"

"It has a couple decades, that's for sure"

I was looking at her when she turned her gaze towards our dragon friend. "Shin-Ha... Why did you first start learning the sword? You already have the power of the dragon eyes"

I saw as he lifted his head, but didn't say anything. "You don't have to talk about it if you don't want to", Yona added. 

"The one...", he started, which surprised me. "The one who taught me swordsmanship told me I must not use the power of the eyes"

"Why?", I asked. 

"Because they're a double-edged sword" 

"Is that because they hurt you, too?", Yona asked. "What on earth kind of powers are yours, Shin-Ha?", he seemed to remember then what it felt like, as if he once used it, despite his teacher's warnings. He brought his hands to his mask and fell on his knees to the ground. Yona fell to the ground as well and let his head rest on her shoulder as she spoke his name. "Shin-Ha. Shin-Ha", she said in a soothing voice, trying to calm him down. I just stared. She lifted his head up and she looked him in what should have been his eyes and pulled her forehead to his. "Sorry, Shin-Ha. I won't ask again", but then, she tried to lift his mask, which made him break the contact. "You can't remove your mask?", she asked. "Shin-Ha. You don't have to use your power. It's just... I want to look you in the eyes when we talk", I smiled. "It'll be fine someday. Let me see your smiling face, okay? Lift the edges of your mouth and perk up a smile. I'm sure it will be lovely"

And as he was about to try, a little boy screamed. "The Dark Dragon... and the Happy Hungry Bunch-'s boss lady"

"Wh- what's up?", she asked, putting on her bandit mask. 

"Give me some candy", he looked hungry, starved. It was a sad image to look at. 

"I... don't have any more", she timidly answered, her stomach growling. "Hold on. I'll shoot down a bird for ya", I watched as she walked away, an arrow knocked, ready to shoot it. 

"She said... smiling face", I heard and looked back at a confused Shin-Ha. He looked down at Ao and then tried to copy her smile by lifting up to corners of his mouth with his fingers. I stared at him in wonder and hoped he would get it right. When, suddenly, kids attacked him.

"The Dark Dragon and the Happy Hungry Bunch!", said one of them. 

"Bandits have appeared! Let's get rid of them!", chimed another. "I got his sword!", he screamed, lifting up Shin-Ha's sword in the air. I watched as Shin-Ha carefuly stood up, worried and trying to get his sword back. But the children ran away, and so he ran after them. I stayed back, taking a seat on the step, staring at my image reflected on the blade of my sword.

After a while, I realized Hak and the others were taking a lot more time than usual. Everything was silent. Until... 

"KYAAAAA!", a child's scream, I realized. I straightened up and noticed it came from where Shin-Ha had gone toward. I stood up and ran toward the noise. I freezed when I saw the small boy that had teased Shin-Ha not long ago. Blood was dripping down his mouth and standing up not far away from his body was bandits.

Real bandits. 

"Tae-Sik! Tae-Sik!", the mother called, hopelessly shaking his body to wake him up. My face distorted. 

"Hey, hey, 's not your fault", who seemed to be the leader said. "That kid pointed a sword at us a minute ago"

I gritted my teeth, angry at his words. How could he kill a harmless kid? He was innocent. I felt a presence approach me from behind and I turned to notice it was Yona.

"Bandits?", she asked.

"Stay back, I'll take care of it"

"No. I'm not letting you fight alone"

"You don't have a choice, Yona. I won't let you endanger yourself"

"I do have a choice. And it's mine to take", she said and ran away.

"Yona!", I whisper-screamed at her, trying to bring her back, but turned my attention to the bandits. 

"Well, whatever. Round up all the alcohol and meat in this village. If ya go against us, you'll end up just like this kid"

I walked toward them with a strong foot. "How dare you 'whatever' this village, you stupid brats. I've endured idiots like you before, and your worth is not much", I planted my feet and lifted my sword. 

"What?", he let out, lifting an eyebrow. Then, he laughed, putting a hand on his stomach. "A woman? You think you can fight us?"

"It's not that I think, it's that I know. And instead of underestimating us, maybe start showing us a little respect instead"

Then, they were all laughing. Every single one of them were laughing. And from the corner of my eye, I watched Yona as she climbed onto the roof of a house and pointed her arrow at the bandits. "GET OUUTTTTTTT!", she screamed, her voice traveling to my ears. She shot the arrow and aimed at his shoulder, making him fall to the ground. 

"That hurt!", he complained, a hand covering his arm as he sat up. "Dammit, who did that?! I'll kill 'em!"

"You're the ones who need to get outta here if ya don't wanna get killed!", she shouted. "This village is the territory of the Dark Dragon and the Happy Hungry Bunch! There's nothing you third-rate thieves can do about it!!"

"Dark Dragon and the Hungry- what? Sorry, what the hell was that?", one of them asked, visibly mocking us. 

"I won't say it again, you snot-nosed brat!"

"It's a woman", I heard one of them say.

"Hey. If ya don't get out right now, this arrow'll shoot right through your head this time!!"

"Hey, hey, calm down. What did we do?"

"Don't screw with me, you killed a child...", but she couldn't finish, because her leg was being pulled.

"Ah! Ahhhh!", she screamed and fell. 

"Yona!", I shouted her name and dared the bandits to look my way. The leader sent most of his men my way and I realized then, the strength that I currently held. I was exhausted... would I be able to make my way to her?

"YONAA!", I screamed again, trying to make sure she was okay after I heard a loud thud.

"Uh-oh, you were violent with her", I slightly heard, already concentrating on my opponents.

"Did ya kill her?", shivers. And a desire for vengeance. A desire to hurt.

"She's alive"

"Well, isn't she better than I expected"

"She'll be good. There's nothing but old ladies here"

"Leave her alone!", I screamed as I swung my sword, hitting a bit of skin, earning a cry. 

I saw his head lift up, and he stared gravely at his men. "Are you not already done with her?"

"No, sir, but we're at it!"

"Bring the alcohol! Bring it here!!", the leader suddenly shouted, returning to his business. But a lot of men were surrounding me ; it was overwhelming. I couldn't dare kill them ; it wasn't our purpose. But I knew my blade was sharp, and I knew that if I wanted to, I could kill them all in less than ten seconds, but I didn't want unnecessary blood on my hands... not now. I was leaving small cuts here and there and probably bruises a little bit of everywhere. I became fiercer when I noticed the leader throwing her body over his shoulder. And then, I started wondering where the hell was Shin-Ha and what had happened to him. The sword used to kill the small boy was his, after all. 

"Just take their food!", the leader shouted. "It'll be a pain in the ass if the officers arrive. Make it quick!"

And then suddenly, Shin-Ha appeared at my side and with a single swing of his hand, put down one of their men. I was distracted for a second, but rapidly brought my attention back to my opponents as I blocked an attack.

"Shin-Ha!", I cried. He looked toward me then. "Save Yona! I'm gonna be fine!"

He nodded and continued beating down the bandits while I turned back toward the men surrounding me. "Ya gonna be fine, ya say?", one asked.

I hoped so...

For the next minutes, as I tried to make them retreat, it felt like more were coming, it's like they were never backing down. I felt my body considerably lose its strength, I felt fatigued, exhausted. I found myself asking when the others would be back. Bandits were insulting Shin-Ha as he beat his way through the thick crowd of men. 

"Yona... that person... give her back!", he screamed and I heard. I could barely see because I had to concentrate on my battle, but soon after a horde attacked him, he could not defend himself anymore. He didn't have his sword... But I saw the sword plunging into his skin. I saw the blood errupting out of his body. And I couldn't help but fully turn toward him. 

"SHIN-HA!", I screamed and the next thing I knew, I was receiving a blow to the jaw. I fell to the floor, suddenly powerless. I could still feel the handle of my sword in my right hand, but I was seeing stars. "Shin-Ha... save Yona", I whispered, my mind hazy.

I could barely see through the slits of my eyes, I could barely stay awaken, but when I catched the sight that offered itself above me ; the multiple men standing just before me, it reminded me of them. It reminded me when they were only a few seconds away from making me go through hell. They were only a few instants away from disgracing my body, engraving their knives in my skin. They stood above my body exactly like these men were when they wanted to hurt me.

I don't know where I found the strength to lift up my sword. Maybe in pain, maybe in fear, but I grunted as I lifted it. I didn't want to go through it again, I didn't want to be as helpless as I was back then. I didn't want to suffer anymore. I swung it high as I sat up in the dirt. As I slit the man's throat, blood spattered my clothes and my face, landed in my mouth, almost blinded my vision. I heard screams of pain, before a loud thud. I heard my name being called. But my ears were ringing. I was swinging and swinging... swinging away the dark memories of before. They were all dying, they were falling to the ground like puppets, like dolls. I was completely drenched in blood, but I didn't care.

I didn't want to suffer anymore.

...

When I stopped slashing skin, my sight cleared and I looked around. I looked around at the disaster I had caused. "Hold her down!", I heard screaming as a man placed himself behind me and tugged on my arms, bringing them behind my back. I was too weak to fight back. I couldn't move, couldn't do anything when he kicked in my legs and I fell on my knees. My sword fell to the ground. But then, I saw... I could see everything. Shin-Ha was on the ground, unmoving. He looked dead. Yona was awake, trying to struggle out of the man's grip.

"No! Shin-Ha! Lone!! Don't kill them!! Please!", I heard her screaming. 

"Wake up... wake up, Shin-Ha. Save Yona", I whispered.

"He stopped moving"

"Did he die?"

"Leave the finishing blow to me" 

"Wait. Let's see his face before we kill him. That's one strange mask he's wearing. He must be scared and crying", he said as he bend down to take off the mask, discovering his eyes. 

"Wha..."

"Golden eyes?!

"Wha... what are they? This guy's eyes... I can't... look away"

"My body... my body... can't mo... move"

The screams that followed sent shivers down my every limb, down my back, reaching in every bone. I closed my eyes as he turned to look at me. The man behind me fell, screaming. I opened my eyes to look behind me... he was paralyzed. I looked back to Shin-Ha... to Yona. He was walking toward her. The screaming wouldn't stop, the loud noises either. It was torture to the ears. It was unbearable, horrible. I could see a man crying about his arm being cut off. Yona was confused. But I couldn't get up, couldn't do anything. Except, I only realized I had been moving when my back hit a wall. I couldn't back off more, I couldn't disappear... I couldn't, couldn't couldn't couldn't do anything. Even when I put my hands over my ears, I could not mute the voices, the excruciable screams of pain. Even when I shut my eyes, I could not erase the memories of their pain, written all over their faces. I can't escape this.. I can't, can't can't can't escape this. Can't can't can't can't can't can't. I can't do anything. I can't defend myself. I can't defend Yona. I can't defend anyone. 

I'm not strong. I'm weak. I can't stand. I can't fight. I can't move. I need my sword. Where is my sword? But there are men above me, men who are going to hurt me. Men are standing just there, over me, and I can't do anything. I can't swing my sword. I don't have it. I have to find my sword. Where is it? Panic. I can't defend myself. I feel panic. I don't have control, I can't do anything. I'm nothing without my sword. 

"You're nothing if you can't defend yourself in this world, son- daughter. You know that, right... Lone? Lone, are you listening to me? Lone?"

"Lone!"

It's my name. Who is it? I need my sword. I need to defend myself. I don't know who this is. Who is calling my name? Is it father? Is he going to say I'm worthless if I don't know how to fight? Is he going to punish me for not training? Is he going to hit me if he finds out I'm not a boy? But no. No no no. It can't be father. He's dead. 

Remember? He's dead, Lone. Your father's dead, remember? He can't do anything to hurt you... not anymore. 

I need to defend myself. I don't know anyone. I don't know anyone. I can't trust anyone. I need my sword. I need my sword. Where is my sword? I can't breathe. I can't think. I can't move. I need to move. I need to find my sword. I need to fight. I need to... I need to fight. I need to protect... I need to protect Yona and Shin-Ha and the children. That's right... I need to protect to protect the children. I can't let anything happen to them. But I can't breathe. I can't think. 

I can't do anything.

...

The screaming has stopped. But I can't hear anything else. I can't see anything. What is happening? What is going on?

"What is happening?", I let out in a cry. 

Panic. Panic. Panic. 

"Yona!", I know this voice. This is... this is Yoon... 

But I'm screaming. I can feel my hands covering my ears. I can feel my eyes shut tight. But I can hear everything now. I can hear myself screaming. I'm screaming, I'm crying. I'm panicking. And yet, I need to find my sword. Where is my sword? I need to get it. But there are men... the men are there, right in front of me. They are above me. There are cutting me... I'm bleeding, I'm suffering. I'm back in the shed, I'm hungry, I'm hurt, I'm sad. I need to get out. 

"I NEED TO GET OUT!!!"

"Lone! Lone! Come back. Come back to me!", hands are grabbing my forearms, my eyes are shutting open. Green. This is a man. I need to fight. Where is my sword? I'm panicking. I can't defend myself. I'm struggling. I'm fighting. "LONE! It's me, Jae-Ha. You're gonna be fine!"

Jae-Ha. I'm gonna be fine... I'm gonna be fine. I don't need my sword. I don't need it. Not this time. Because... because there is a man... a man? Protecting... protecting me? There is a man protecting me?

"You have to listen to me, Lone. Most men are dangerous ; you must know to defend yourself against every man, even when they seem kind, gentle. No man will want your safety. No man will ever protect you. You must do it yourself. And now that you're 7 of age, I will give you this sword. The one that will protect you"

But... father, this man... this man is protecting me. I feel... I feel calm. My heart is beating slower. Panic is declining. I'm safe. I feel safe. I'm safe...

And I see dark. I hear static. I can finally sleep. 

Chapter Text

"She looked crazy. What the hell happened to her?", I heard a voice ask.

"She was panicked", a feminine voice said.

"That's what you call 'panicked'? She looked like she was ready to rip her ears away from her skull! That's not normal behavior", Hak. This was Hak's voice. I would recognize the harsh tone and deep voice everywhere.

"You don't know that!"

"Oh, and you do?", they were all panicked, worried words, but they were also angry and fearful. They didn't know why I suddenly reacted this way. And to be honest, neither did I.

"I know what she's gone through!"

"And what is that? This is not our friend, Princess, you have to see it!"

"Maybe it would be better if we left her alone to rest?", Yoon.

"I don't care about her resting! We need an explanation! The Lone we knew would never have reacted this way!"

"The friend I know went through horrible things that you wouldn't even be able to endure!"

Silence. Utter silence. My mind took this opportunity to fully wake up, as if silence was more bothering than loud screams and cries. I slowly opened my eyes and watched as Hak stormed out of the tent as Yona followed. Other than them, there were only Jae-Ha and Yoon. I sat up on the ground and brought a hand to my head as a headache showed itself.

"Lone! You should rest!", Yoon screamed, throwing himself on the ground, kneeling beside me. 

"I'm fine", I said, unable to force a smile upon my lips.

"No, you're not", I lifted my head up, my eyes staring into his. I looked away, ashamed. They had all seen me, seen me panicked and shocked, and almost mad, the crazy sort of mad.

"What exactly happened?", Yoon asked with a calmed and reassuring voice.

All that had happened flashed through my mind. And maybe my reaction to such violence became clearer to me. I felt like I was fighting alone. I had to save my bestfriend, while trying to save myself. I had to save Shin-Ha and Yona when I couldn't even save myself. That's right... Yona and Shin-Ha.

"Are Shin-Ha and Yona fine? Are they alright? What happened to the bandits?", what happened to the ones I killed. What happened to the ones that tried to torture me. Again and again. 

I saw Yoon facepalm himself and escape a sigh of disbelief. I frowned, suddenly feeling guilty for a reason I wasn't aware of. "After all that, you still care more about other people's situation than yours. But, to answer your question, Shin-Ha is still paralyzed ; he's resting. Yona's fine. Though, for the bandits... Half of them were found dead, their throats slashed, or their head separated from their body. For the others, they were paralyzed... We left them not far on a road so the officers can find them"

"I wasn't able to save them..."

Yoon and Jae-Ha frowned, looking at each other as I stared down at my clean hands. 

"Is that why you reacted like that?", Yoon hesitated. "Because you thought you were helpless?"

I didn't answer. Only recalling their presence standing above me, my father's words echoing in my head, through my every thought, my sword laying so far away from me, I felt my life ending. I was scared, helpless, panicked, shocked. I was everything I didn't want to be. I realized I had my lips parted when I closed them. And then, Yona erupted in the tent, landing on her knees at my side, her arms around my shoulders.

"Lone! Thank God! You're awake! I was so scared for you! Never do this to me ever again!", I smiled and as I looked up, Hak was staring at me from the opening of the tent, a dark aura surrounding him. I returned the look, but offered a heartwarming smile to my bestfriend when she pushed me at arms' length. 

I had not been out for long. I had to fight my way through the thick wall of orders that was Yoon for me to get out of the tent. I could not possibly rest, not after I had remembered what I had done. And yet, I could not stop myself from thinking that maybe it would have been better to stay in the tent, where this horrible view was hidden from me. I could feel Yoon's body standing right behind me, staring at the same horror I was lividly looking at. Bodies laying on the ground, lifeless. Blood everywhere. There were heads separated from their bodies. It was unnerving to look at, confusing, ugly and horrific. 

"The bandits were thrown out on the road. Eventually, officers will pick them out", he explained, his voice stern.

"You mean, the ones I didn't kill"

He didn't say anything, but I knew what I had to do.

"I'm gonna take care of it", I let out.

"No, you should rest. Let us take care of it", he countered, but I wouldn't give him reason.

"It is my mess!", I shouted, angry. Angry with myself for lashing out, angry with those men for bringing ugly memories to the surface, for triggering my trauma, angry with Yoon for not letting me do the one thing I should do in this very instant. I shouldn't even be arguing with him. "I will take care of it. And I will do it alone", I said more calmly, my voice almost a whisper. I took a step forward and I was glad to notice he did not follow me. Though I could still feel the breaking of a small vein in my heart. I did not want to do this... but I had to. It was my responsibilty, whether  I liked it or not.

It was hard starting a fire when I knew it was for the people I killed. Piling wood logs upon wood logs became my first task. I then watched as I light another wood log and threw it amongst the unlit ones. I watched as the fire spread and grew. I watched as the smoke lifted up into the skies. I turned around and began cleaning. I brought their dead bodies, grabbing them under the armpits, to their cremation. Their weight was considerably heavy, considering I had been exhausted just a few minutes ago when I fought the same monsters I was bringing to their closure, to their freedom. But then, I caught sight of someone beside me. This someone was pulling on something and when I turned my head in their direction, straightening my body, I realized the old man was bringing the dead man's body to the fire as well. I stayed shocked and our eyes met and he offered me a smile.

"No, mister, let me take care of it! You need to rest!", I screamed, angry.

"I seem to have heard that you are fragile as well, miss", he countered, his smile never leaving his lips. He then leaned over the body and continued to pull.

"No... This is my fault. I should be the one correcting it"

"You saved our lives. You protected this village with your life. We owe you that, at least", a woman said as I turned around toward her. She was pulling one of the corpses by the legs, leaving a trail of blood where his head should have been. 

"This is not right. This is disgusting... I can't accept for you to get your hands bloodied because of my... my fear, my panic"

"You don't have to accept anything", the woman said.

"This is our choice", another man added.

"But...-", I didn't know what to say. I visibly couldn't say anything that would change their minds... and I couldn't stop them physically. I looked around, shocked and full of incomprehension. I didn't understand why these kind-hearted people would help a cursed child like me. But I had to continue cleaning this mess up before the villagers did most of it. It was still my mess... afterall. For an hour, we threw corpses in the fire, headless figures. We threw their missing heads among the other parts. We went to fetch water not far away. I helped gather some for the village to drink or to use to bathe, while the rest we used to throw on the bloodied grounds of their village. It had been a disaster, but with the help of these selfless people, we have been able to restore some kind of beauty to the village. I was not proud of what I had done, I was not proud of the mess I had done, but looking right into the eyes of the fire, I knew that even if I couldn't excuse my actions, and the reason behind them, the villagers could. And I would very much like that it didn't always resort to this, each and every time I did a horrible mistake. I had to learn not to depend on my trauma and act because of it. And Hak was right, I would never have reacted like that before...

"We're back", I heard. It was Hak and Jae-Ha. I stared as the latter offered Yoon a bird he had caught. But before I could approach them, I felt a tap on my shoulder. I turned to see another woman, a sad expression upon her face. She was dark-haired and she had rimmed eyes. I lowered my head, silently apologizing for something I didn't even know I could have done, but I was sorry still.

"The man who killed my son did not get the punishement he deserved", she started and I lifted my head in surprise and confusion. "I will forever be grateful for what you did to save our village. But as a mother to a newly deceased child, I would wish the same fate would have ended the man who ruined my life"

I felt tears blooming in my eyes. They did not fall, but I felt them. Felt the pain they brought with them. I felt sorry for what I couldn't do for this mother's child, and for her as well. 

"I would like for you to attend his burial"

"Yes, with pleasure", I said and I could see the glimpse of a smile appear on her lips.

I attended his burial, just as I had promised. The sun had set. The bonfire burning in front of us was a gift to this child who lost his life prematurely. I felt sorry, as if I could have prevented the events of his death. I was shocked to realize the villagers actually were grateful for what I did for their village. In the beginning, it was all about Yona, or Shin-Ha. It was all about not killing to avoid consequences. It was all about not letting my emotions take the upper hand. But I had never thought about these poor villagers, what I had saved them from, in my own way. Even if I was fighting my fears in the end, they were only thinking about my stepping up to these bandits. They were only thinking about the fact that I stepped up and fought, even when I could not control myself at some point, even when I lost control. They were not thinking about that part and it left me staring at nothing. It left me thinking about what I had thought I was. 

I was Yona's and Hak's bestfriend. I was the dragons' companion. I was Yoon's student. I was part of this group, and I had always thought that I was in this group with the purpose of protecting Yona with my life, like Hak had been entitled to do for the rest of his life. I thought the reason I was walking this earth was because I had to help my friend accomplish her purpose. But what if...

What if I have my own? What if my life doesn't revolve around her? What if it's because of that fact that Ik-Soo told me a completely different story, one only assigned to me? What if I'm actually here to have a life of my own, and not someone else's entirely?

"Oh, that's right. I can't use the tent today", I heard Yona say. I lifted my head up, taking my attention away from my sword, which I was sharpening, and stared at my friends.

"Sorry. Shin-Ha still hasn't recovered, so I'll tend to his side", Yoon explained and I returned my eyes to my sword as I continued to slide the rock along the sharp edges of the blade.

"It's fine. I'll sleep outside"

"Oh no, Princess... You can't sleep outside", Ki-Ja countered.

"Yona dear, come to my side!", Jae-Ha chanted. 

"I'll be fine. Because I'll sleep with Hak", she said and I freezed, stopping my movement. I realized we were all startled by what she suddenly said, Hak precisely. The wood logs he had been transporting fell to the ground in a loud clatter. "No?"

"It's not a problem", Hak finally agreed, taking the logs back from the ground into his arms. 

"Yona dear, that's dangerous. The Thunder Beast is a beast!", Jae-Ha shouted, earning him a log on the head. 

"Don't group me with you, Droopy Eyes", Hak added. Ki-Ja looked disturbed.

"Miss, sleep with Zeno for a change!", Zeno screamed, wrapping his arms around Yona's shoulders. 

"Sorry, Zeno. Hak's good", she said and I lifted an eyebrow. I eventually returned to sharpening my sword. 

"Is that so? Then Zeno will sleep close to Ryokuryuu!"

"I'll pass", Jae-Ha answered, pushing the Yellow Dragon away. "I'd rather sleep next to Lone, anyway"

"Not in a million years", I openly responded. 

"Yoon, I have an emergency. My chest hurt terribly", Ki-Ja cried. 

"I can't fix that..", Yoon unbotheredly answered. 

"It's an incurable disease!!", Ki-Ja countered. 

A few minutes later, as everyone had installed themselves, I sheathed my sword at my side and leaned on the tree, closing my eyes. But after hearing what I was sure was twigs snapping, I straightened and opened my eyes, frightened. It was suddenly cold as I looked around to see that everyone was asleep. I rubbed my arms in an attempt to warm my body, but it was pointless. I stood up cautiously as I heard another sound coming from the forest. 

"Hello?", I called, my voice echoing. "Is someone there?"

I stepped farther into the dark of the trees and walked and walked and walked until I was so far from the camp that I feared I would never find my way back. When my fingers began tracing a path to my sword, I felt slightly safer, until I realized that it was not hanging at my hip. My heart doubled its speed and it became difficult to control my breaths. And then suddenly, a colder hand on my shoulder, forcing me to turn around. 

"Is this what you were searching for?", a familiar voice as my very own sword was stabbed through my skull, causing me to drop my jaw as I tried to scream but nothing seemed to come out. My sword was pulled out of my skull and when I touched my face, breathless, I was unscathed. I lifted my head up, trying to catch a glimpse of the man who had been haunting the every corner of my nightmares, the every spots the dark covered, but the only thing I saw was me. I was standing at a doorway, bloodied sword in hand, my clothes almost completely ripped. And as I looked around, I saw their bodies, scattered everywhere. But when I looked up to see my old self, she was not there anymore. I ran then. I ran toward her, but she was so far away I could never reach her. And I followed her in an inn, but when I pushed through the door, fire was surrounding me. I was no where to be seen. And I recognized the place to be Hakkon House. Fire and smoke was everywhere and as I looked down to see what I felt was in my hand, I could see blood and a knife. When I looked up again, I saw my dead parents, my dead sister, and the horror I had done. I let the knife fall to the ground and brought my hands to my face. I couldn't breathe. I felt paralyzed. I backed away into a wall, closing my eyes, trying to calm myself, but when I reopened them, I was panicking. I couldn't see anything, I was crying, and screaming and searching for my sword. I had killed everyone, everyone... There was even more blood on my hands and...

"Lone!"

...and there was someone calling my name. 

"Lone! Listen to me!", Th- this was my father. I turned my head and I found my self standing in front of my father. My eyes dragged down to my sword, that I was gripping tight. "Lone! This is not the way you have to swing it. Have you not listened to what I kept telling you?! Over and over again you keep ignoring what I tell you!"

I felt my bottom lip tremble, tears threatening to fall. 

"Lone, I have not raised you effortlessly this way only for you to act like a girl! You are supposed to be strong and invincible! You are supposed to act like a true man! As my son, you should be able to do what I tell you!"

I looked down again and I noticed my small hands barely able to hold on to the sword and I looked up at my father again, only this time I was taller. And when I looked down, I was keeping the sword at my side, a stern expression on my face. 

"I am not your son", I said. I watched as his expression went from stern to sorry and pained. 

"Right. But you understand, right? That I'm doing this for you? Right, Lone? Right... Lone?"

I was walking away, turning my back on him. I had to escape, and yet, I never felt free. I offered him one last look, filled with pity and pain, but when I turned around again, I was stopped short, a sword plunged into my stomach. But I didn't have mine. I couldn't defend myself... not as I was pushed overboard. I was falling... falling and falling into an endless pitch... until I hit water. A cold shock, even colder than the cold of the forest. Even colder than the hand on my shoulder. And I felt this coldness penetrate my lungs, and take away my ability to breathe. But soon enough, I stopped breathing. My heart stopped beating. 

I woke up, my first breath like a gasp. I was sweaty, but cold. My heart went wild and I put a hand on my chest. I forced my breathing to slow down, forced my body to realize I was safe, forced my mind to understand it was just a bad dream. I looked around to see if I had woken anybody up, and my eyes met his. He was staring, worried. I looked away, ashamed and I stood up, making sure my sword was still sheathed at my hip, and I made my way out of the camp. 

At each of my side, I could see the dead. Multiple of them, surrounding me. I couldn't know if it was to protect me, or to warn me. I didn't know and I didn't feel like caring. Except for one, one I had forgotten about. Aro. For a while, I have been trying to call for his name, but he never answered, never appeared. And I found myself missing his presence at night, his reassuring words.

And as I heard footsteps approaching, I felt my heart race again, my mind suddenly nervous. I turned around and brought my arms up in front of me and the moment I saw the presence approaching way too close, I extended my right arm, offering to the man a punch to the nose. But I realized too late that it was actually Jae-Ha.

"What was that for?", he shouted with a low voice.

"I thought you were someone dangerous!", I exclaimed, borrowing his tone. 

"In a forest?!"

"Well, yes, what do you think? That I thought we were in an inn and you were following me to kill me?! No!"

"You're so on guard for nothing, God! The only people at this hour is our party sleeping not far away anyway. You only have to scream and they'll be at your side"

"I can take care of myself, thank you", I spit out, angry. 

"I can see that. But anyway, what are you doing out of bed?"

"I could ask you the same question"

"You were talking in your sleep. It woke me up"

"Well, sorry about that, you can go back to your beauty sleep now. You don't have to worry about me, anymore"

"What tells you I was worried about you?", he asked me, taking me off guard.

"Why did you follow me?", I asked, almost timidly.

"...because you worried me"

I didn't answer to that comment. I kept my mouth shut and I soon realized that this was the first time we spoke to each other since we left Awa.

"Do you remember?", he hesitantly asked.

"Remember what?", I impatiently responded.

"The night of the party where we celebrated the pirates' victory"

"The night I got drunk", I realized aloud.

"Yes", he let out, a little bit of hope illuminating his voice.

"No, I don't remember anything apart from my pain and bits of undesired feelings"

"...", I could see he wished to speak. He wished to tell me about that night. I lifted my head up toward him and I stared.

"What are you not saying?", he was taken by surprise by my words.

"Nothing!", he immediately answered, on the defensive. "It's better if you don't know what happened", he looked slightly sad as he spoke, but I only frowned, confused. "Goodnight, Lone"

I could not wish it back to him, as confused as I was. I kept thinking though, what he could be hiding. I remembered the day after that night, Yona... or was it Hak? That told me something was weird with Jae-Ha and that when either Yona or Hak asked him what happened the night before, he did not answer. I could not stop thinking about what had been said between us two. But eventually, I went back to the camp and slept on these thoughts.

Chapter Text

Hot delicious food was being danced before my nose, before my mouth. This was a drastic change from the unfeeling, uncanny, disgusting dream I was having. And yet, it was not nearly enough to wake me up. I just wanted to sleep, just for a little more time. 

"Lone! Wake the hell up! You've slept enough!", the loud scream just beside my ear was too much for my mind to handle. I opened my eyes, shooting up forward, suddenly scared and on my guard. On my right side, Yoon backed away, a concerned look on his face. "You didn't need to react that way". I turned toward him, offering him a mean look, showing him that he just made a grave mistake.

"You too, Yoon. Don't put the blame on me for something you did", I said, my eyes dropping to the bowl of food he had in hand, a piece of it between two chopsticks. I tore it away from him and started eating.

"God, what a foul mood this morning, Lone. Woke up on the wrong foot?", Hak asked, almost angry, as if still moody from yesterday. 

"Hak's right. You sleep for long periods of time these days. What is going on?"

"That's none of your business", I answered coldly.

"Maybe tonight the comfort of an inn and tranquility the forest does not know would do you well. Lady Lone needs comfort after all", Hak commented, mocking and I had to force on a calm expression for I didn't want to explode. Hak was in a fouler mood than I was, and just because he didn't know what changed me, he took the right to trigger such change. Though, I was not taking part in his game, for I knew that no one would be the winner.

"Hak, leave her alone. If she sleeps a lot, it means she needs that sleep", Yona jumped in, defending my cause.

"That's no exc-"

"It's okay, Yona", I said in a soft voice, looking up at her. "He's not worth it", I kept a smile as I saw his body straighten from the corner of my eyes. He was insulted. I returned to my meal as the others started getting ready for the day. I stood up, walking to Yoon as I helped him wash the dishes. Though, remembering Hak's words and the anger in his voice made me uneasy. My silence only now made me want to explode. I tried to take deep breaths but it seemed I needed to get this anger out before I killed someone. I let down the bowl I had been washing and dried the water off my hands with a cloth. 

"I'll be in the forest ; I need to train", I simply said as I turned away to leave. I met Hak's gaze as he lifted an eyebrow. I tried to ignore it and entered the forest, going deeper and deeper when I finally unsheathed my sword. I took a deep and long breath as I took position, closing my eyes. I started swinging, fast and hard. I didn't care that my legs felt tired already. I didn't care that I wanted to scream. I let out a scream, that almost sounded like a cry, as my sword hit a tree. Birds flew away the more trees as I hit and the more I screamed. But each time, it didn't feel enough. I felt even angrier. I wanted to scream until my voice dried out, until no air could enter my lungs. I wanted to swing, swing and swing until my sword fell to the ground. 

I was tired of being underestimated. I was tired of being judged for things that I couldn't control. I have had enough of people thinking they knew better. I was tired of people saying they wanted me to act different for their own sake. I was tired of everything. I was tired of the nightmares and the attacks when I woke up. I was tired of my trauma and my lack of control over my own body. I have had enough. But it's never enough. I always have to be more of something I am not and less of something I am. I am tired of being angry. And I am angry that I'm tired. 

When I finally opened my eyes as I heard a loud thud, I undid my formation and looked at what I had done. I stared at the fallen tree just a few feet away from me. I felt alone among the trees. Until... Until well, I was not anymore.

"Lone... are you okay?", Yona asked, and when I turned to look at her, my breathing was heavy. I lifted my sword, its weight feeling heavier. My hands were shaking and I felt panicked once again. The sword fell to the ground and I brought my hands to my heart, as if it would be enough to calm it down. I slid my hands up to my face, hiding my eyes as the tears started going down my cheeks. "Lone...", she called and through the small holes my fingers were offering, I could see her approaching slowly, yet hesitantly. 

"I can't, Yona", I said, taking my hands away from my face. I felt to the ground, my arms close to my chest. "I can't control anything", I let out as she fell to the ground beside me, her hands encircling my body. "I'm too weak. I don't know how I can survive in this world"

"You're not weak, Lone. You are the strongest woman I know. You just cut down a tree with a sword!", she let out the last line with a surprised tone, but she was impressed.

"I'm not talking about my strength. I'm talking about my head. I can't go on living life with tears in my eyes, fear in my heart and anger on my face. This is not living"

"You will be able to go through it, Lone. You alone can overcome this pain and you know it, because you wouldn't be here right now. Healing is a long journey, but we're in it together"

"You'll stay with me?"

"Yes... every step of the way", her words were a song to my ears. Her voice was a smooth melody. It was reassuring and motherly. It reminded me of her mother, of her fragile, yet gentle mother. A beautiful and caring woman. 

Yona offered me a smile as we approached the camp where everyone was still gathered. My sword was sheathed at my hip once again and I fought the pain and sadness that had overwhelmed me just minutes ago. I entered the camp with my head high as I ignored the looks in my direction. 

"What the hell happened in there?", Yoon asked, visibly worried.

"Nothing. I'm fine. We should start the day, shouldn't we?", I said.

"Your eyes are red, Miss", Zeno said aloud. "Have you been crying?"

"Perhaps. Perhaps not. Shall we?"

"But if you don't feel good enough to work today, you can fall back, you know?", Yoon said.

"I don't feel good about staying seated on my ass, Yoon. You can't stop me from working", I answered coldly, dropping my smile. I walked away, my feet dragging me toward the village as I felt prepared to work and help. As long as it was not me I was helping or working on. As long as I had a distraction. Footsteps followed behind me as I walked and when I saw blue clothes join my side and dark hair flow over my head, I knew I was in deep trouble. 

"What's wrong with you?", he asked, but not with heartwarming affection. 

I didn't answer his question, for I didn't see the purpose of it. I didn't want to, either. And so I didn't. I turned my head toward him as I kept walking and offered him a smile. He stopped in his tracks, brows furrowed. I left him behind and I continued on my way, because I had better things to do today, and arguing with my childhood bestfriend in this very instant wasn't my priority. 

Chapter Text

The next days are rough. It's not always an easy task to find something to do. My priorities, these days, lay with my health. Whether it is entertaining the children with theatric stories, or a game or chores, or helping older people get the medicine they need, the care they want, or the services they desire, I found it easy to go through days with so many people surrounding me. I also helped Yoon to the point of exhaustion. Some might say my priorities lay at the wrong place... and Yoon, my new private professional doctor, would agree with said people. But I refused to even acknowledge that there was any other problem than the Fire Tribe villages that I needed to take care of.

Well, anyway, at the end of this day, I found myself desiring of some relaxation, just enough to take me away from all I've been doing these past few days, but not close enough to really bothering thoughts. My feet eventually dragged me at the edge of the forest, just on the verge of the village, where our group had already lit a fire. Only, my lips pursed into a grimace when I noticed my bestfriend, whom I was in a fight with, leaning against a tree, his hands behind his head, looking the image of perfect disdain. I immediately ignored his antics as I also realized another presence. His face was familiar, but I didn't dare look in Hak's direction for answers I could find by myself... if ever they were useful.

The man looked slightly terrified, and surprised, but mostly shocked and scared. And yet, I could not bring my mind to remember where I had once seen his face. I kept a suspicious look on him as I took a seat before the fire, my sword not too far from my reach. 

"...What's wrong?", Hak asked, talking to the man. "You're shaking. Stay a while"

"Well, Hak, trying to scare off the villagers? Not really our purpose in this time of day", I nonchalantly said, sarcasm coating my tongue. He spared me an angry look, but I didn't meet it. Instead, he turned back toward the man. 

"I'm not sure why you're here but, you're not used to camping outside, right... Young Master?", my eyes immediately dragged toward the man's posture and how he seemed uncomfortable. But even then, 'uncomfortable' might be an understatement. He was definitely suspicious. But how much suspicion did he carry exactly? 

"What are you talking about? I am but a poor traveler", he said, all the while trembling as if his life was on the line. Meanwhile, Hak had a terrible and maniacal smile plastered on his lips. But then, Yoon's words soon accompanied his footsteps.

"Hey- Thunder Beast, Lone. About who's on duty tomorrow... Huh? Who's there?", he asked as the man stood up, clumsily making stuff fall out of his bag as he did so. And soon, as a firework hit the flames, it flew into the night sky, illuminating the black of night. By instinct, my hand was gripping the handle of my sword in a mere second as I was standing up, rather slowly I might add, as I threw the blade in his direction. And then I recognized who this man was. 

Kan Tae-Jun, son of the Chief of the Fire Tribe. The man who called on the King when I was still living in the Castle, only to announce him that he had killed Hak and Yona. Back then, I had been accompanied by a fury I couldn't possibly have described. Joo-Doh stopped me before I did considerable damage to his body. 

Though, in that position, I was, in no way, able to attack him, so I let Hak take care of him when he started running. Throwing his guando between his feet, he fell to the ground in an attempt to run away. 

"Signaling to your allies, huh?", Hak asked, unwrapping the cloth from around the blade of his weapon with his teeth as he kept the general's son under his grip. 

"You can't kill him!", Yoon ordered.

"Why not? It would be one less enemy", I said, remembering the anger I was holding against him. And yet, Yoon stayed the most realistic.

"And it would make one more", Yoon countered. 

"If you're a spy, I have some questions", Hak asked to the man. 

"Don't kill him", Yoon repeated more calmly.

"You're heavy! Get off!", Tae-Jun screamed, trying to fight Hak off of him. 

"Do you know him, Thunder Beast?", Yoon asked. 

"I don't know this guy, this second son of some guy", he merely explained. 

"Are you sure you don't know him?", I asked, raising an eyebrow as I moved in front of him and the man he was crushing under his weight. "Surely you would remember the man who tried to kill you. On my part, I remember well"

"Ah, yes. And you were there since when?", he asked, visibly trying to hurt me. 

"I never said I was there. Only that I know that he came to the Castle pleading to be...", I crouched before Tae-Jun, meeting his eyes. "...to be 'punished' for his crimes. And yet, when I tried to claim your life, you were saved. Lucky man, right, Kan Tae-Jun?", I whispered as I swung my sword flat against my shoulder. 

"Kan Tae-Jun? He's the General's son!", Yoon shouted. 

"If you don't release me, something terrible will happen", he said and I snickered, rolling my eyes. 

"Huh? Did you summon the entire Fire Tribe army?", Hak asked, still unbothered. 

"No-! Not to that extent... But a lot are coming"

"It seems like you don't even know how many exactly" 

"He-y!", a familiar voice greeted and I stood up, turning around to realize someone had joined us. "It seems the whole Hungry Family is having a meeting. Oyo? Aren't you the ginger soup guy from earlier?", Zeno said.

"What is it?", Hak asked, curious, yet confused, but then proceeded to explain to Zeno the situation. "This guy is a spy. He revealed our location to his allies"

"Hmm... Now that you mention it, Seiryuu said there are a ton of soldiers marching towards the village"

"Say those things sooner!", Yoon scolded. "We figured something like that was going to happen. This is bad. Jae-Ha's not in the village, right now... and Shin-Ha's still injured"

"White Snake and I are just going to have to take care of it ourselves", Hak said and I frowned in confusion. 

"I will help, too", but his glare in my direction stopped me short. 

"You're in no shape to fight, Lone. You should relax", he said the words with disdain, but I could still see the worry in his eyes. It might have just been a glimmer, but it was there. 

"Zeno will also try his best!", Zeno added, calming the atmosphere. 

"Yeah, yeah, have fun with your competition", Hak mockingly said. 

"What are we gonna do with this guy?" 

"Well, for now he's our hostage"

"P-please!", he shouted, making us turn our heads in his direction. "Please! Release me! Shooting the signal flare was an accident! I'll go stop the troops, so please! Release me!", he pleaded again. Hak approached him, kneeling on one knee before him and pulled on his hair to raise his head. 

"You should have said that sooner! Sorry for everything! We leave everything in your hands! Did you seriously think we would say that? You halfwit!", he said, dreadful. 

"There's no way we'd release you", Yoon said, stepping in. "We're going to negotiate with you as our hostage! Luckily, since you're a big shot, as long as you're here... those guys probably won't attack the village recklessly"

"This guy tried to kill us before", Hak added. "If we return him, he'll tell the Fire Tribe chief and Hiryuu Castle that we are alive. Before that happens, I'll kill you without hesitation"

"Just now... did you just say 'us'", his response slightly took me by surprise, but I kept my eyes on him. "Is... is that person... is Princess Yona... is she still alive?! Tell me! Please! I promise! I won't tell anyone! I don't have to see her. I don't even have to speak to her! That person is...!"

"Alive!", Zeno enthusiastically answered, crouching before him. "The Miss is the liveliest of us all!", at his words, Tae-Jun started crying. 

"Is that so? She's lively... Is that so... she is alive", I watched as he brought a hand to his face, either trying to hide his tears, or the realization. I could feel his relief and his happiness. Sound from behind us made me turn and to the familiar thud of her footsteps, I already knew who it was who had joined us. 

"Hak. Hak! Lone, Yoon. Come quickly. There's an emergency", I frowned, welcoming her into our circle. On the ground, at our feet, Tae-Jun was bowing. "Eh.. uh.. who are you? Please raise your head? Hak?"

"...The second son of the Fire chief, Lord Kan Tae-Jun"

"What? Tae-Jun...", she called, dragging her eyes down to him. 

"Kan Tae-Jun is... the one who sent his soldiers after the Princess, right?", Ki-Ja asked. 

"This person shot up a flare to call the soldiers", Yoon explained. "But he's also saying that shooting the flare was a mistake and that's why he wants to be released. It's to tell the soldiers to stop", and yet every time I tried to reason with myself, my mind kept telling me he was dangerous, and not trust worthy.

"How ridiculous!", Ki-Ja shouted. "Normally, you would have had your head chopped off by now!!" 

"I- I know that! I know that asking you to understand is ridiculous... but, among the soldiers that are currently surrounding the village, there are bound to be a few that recognize the Princess. If that many troops report it at once, they'll have to report it! My- my father Kan Soo-Jin will found out that you are alive!"

"Wouldn't you be the first one to report it?", Hak asked, as suspicious as I was. 

"I will not report it to anyone!!"

"You mean to tell us that you would betray your own clan?", Hak asked again, even more suspicious now. "How are we supposed to believe that?" 

"I... I don't know. I don't know, but I- I am going to stop the soldiers, and then, if for some reason I cannot keep my promise, no... even if you think I am suspicious at all, please kill me! If it's you, then I don't care if I am killed!"

"As suspicious as you were when I first saw you a few minutes ago, I say you should already be dead", I unbotheredly declared.

"...Why?", Yona let out. "You damaged Capital Fuuga, and even tried to kill Hak. Why are you... saying these things now? Lift your head. Look into my eyes and tell me", when he finally lifted his head, his tears almost seemed to deform his face in an unrecognizable way. Yona was left stunned. 

"I'm... I'm so sorry...", he cried out. "My... my vision is... distorted. I-I don't know... where... your eyes are... Princess. I don't know... why I'm saying these things... or why I'm doing these things. I'm so confused... It's just that... I'm so fortunate... For a sinful person like me, to once again, be talking to you like this. I can't help but feel... so fortunate! Thank you so much... for being alive! Thank you...!", his words took me by surprise... But he was truthful, and I felt it.

"Pft-", Yona let out, making me smile. "Ahaha!"

"Princess", Hak called, as if to bring her back to the serious matter at hand. But Yona was not taking this as seriously anymore. 

"Haha, sorry Hak... can we release him?"

"Does it matter what I say?", Yona only stared at Hak, a gentle smile atop her lips. 

"Tae-Jun, we'll release you. Your troops are already in our line of sight. If they continue forward, there will be casualties even among the villagers. If it comes to that, we will have to crush the soldiers with all of our strength. This does not exclude you, since you are the leader of our enemy. If you don't fulfill your promise and the villagers get hurt, I will shoot you without mercy. If you are prepared for that... go and stop them with all your might!", she ordered, seriousness now back on her face. I looked from Tae-Jun to Yona a couple of times, before smiling. 

"This man wouldn't bother being shot by you, as much as Jae-Ha wouldn't bother being killed by any woman, so that's saying much", I said sarcastically, perfectly knowing no woman has ever tried to kill him before... well, of course... except for me.

Chapter Text

Yona's watching the horizon, a neutral expression on her face, while Tae-Jun's fear has him shocked and scared. Whether it is because of the consequences that await him once he joins his army or the consequences he might suffer if he betrayed Yona, I cannot tell. Only the sun peaking above the hills will let us know. 

"What's that sound?", Yoon asked as we all heard the thumps of heavy footing hitting the ground. 

"A warning march", Hak answered. 

"Bring it on, then", Ki-Ja threatened.

Yona turned her head toward Tae-Jun, determined to make this end before it has even started. "D- don't worry, Princess!", Tae-Jun shouted. "I'm going to stop them right now!"

Proud and smiling through her neutral eyes, she said : "Yes. I'll be watching you. Show me that you're serious", I could see the general's son's cheeks inflaming.

"What's wrong, Shin-Ha?", Ki-Ja asked and I turned toward our masked friend. 

"Fire arrows", I stiffened.

"What?!", and as we heard the loud detonation of one of the officers's voice, we all prepared ourselves to defend this village. 

"This is a warning shot! Aim for the front of the village!", we heard faintly, yet it was enough for us to be on our guard. 

"Princess, stand back!"

"Princess... thank you for believing in me!!", I heard Tae-Jun say as he ran away toward our enemy. 

"FIRE!!!", someone ordered, and we saw the fire arrows as they were shot, but none followed. And slowly, we watched as the lights retreated and I smiled as we all noticed that Tae-Jun had kept his promise. 

"They're going back", Shin-Ha said.

"They left...", Hak added, slightly surprised. 

"Will that man really be alright?", Ki-Ja asked. 

"Perhaps...", Yona answered, a smile on her face, her eyes pinned on the horizon. "If he's absent-minded like the time he shot the flare"

"That seems like him", Yoon commented. 

"Let's hope now that we don't have to see him again", I thought out loud. "I'd rather not, to be honest"

"Don't you think we should go hunt for today's food?", Yona asked.

"It would be good distraction. Moreoever, I feel like we would need this", I answered. 

"Well, I can help you two if ever you need my help!", Ki-Ja beamed, proud to offer his help. "Uh, wait, Hak! That's-"

I turned around to see Tae-Jun, draped in finer clothing than yesterday, clutching food against his chest, as Hak carried him around by his clothes. I lifted an eyebrow. "Hey! Let me go!", he shouted and then his eyes stopped on the Princess. 

"You're here again?", Yona let out, as if surprised. 

"'Again'?", I said. "And here I thought we would never see him again. Guess I was wrong"

"Anyway, I am visiting today to...", he started but then lifted his head, only for his whole face to go red. "U-u-u-um, to give you a gift", his voice was trembling ; he was visibly nervous. Meanwhile, beside him, Hak was unwrapping the boxes the general's son obviously wrapped with care for the Princess. He approached Ki-Ja, food between fingers.

"White Snake, open your mouth"

"Huh?", Ki-Ja let out, but greeted the food with anticipation. 

"How is it?"

"It's rather delicious"

"Okay, you can eat it Princess", Hak offered the meal to Yona, and I realized then that he used our White Dragon to test if it were poisoned. And he visibly wasn't dumb enough to not realize it himself. 

"Wow!", Yona beamed as she noticed the amount of food in the boxes. "I'm delighted! Thank you!", but then as Tae-Jun started dancing around, Yona turned toward the villagers. "Get in line, everybody! It's only a little though"

"Princess! I wanted to give that to you", Tae-Jun said.

"They've all had almost nothing to eat since this morning, so this is helpful", she said and I approached the general's son. 

"Princess! Aren't you getting enough to eat?"

"Me? I'm fine. I'm healthy. I had the luxury to last anyone a lifetime when I was a child"

"That's..."

"I've been thinking about it lately. If the extravagant things I had thrown away back then... were brought here. If that had happened... would that have made the country more equal...? As if. I've come to understand that even something like that is not so simple"

"Mister... is there any food for my mother?", a small child asked, tugging on his robes. 

"That was all I brought. There's... no more", sad, the kid started to leave, but Tae-Jun put a hand on his shoulder and said : "W-wait. There's water"

"Water? Thank you", he said, taking the small bottle in his freil hands. 

"I only have this for now but... t-tomorrow I'll bring your mother's food, too", he said and it made me smile. 

"R-really?"

"Yeah"

And the child ran away, probably to his mother, a smile on his face I was never expecting to see again. "I am surprised, Young Lord. You learn fast", I said and he jumped in surprise. And as he turned toward me, he frowned.

"You're the woman who was there with the Thunder Beast yesterday...", he realized. "Your face is familiar. Have I seen you somewhere before? Have we ever met?"

"Only briefly, I'd say. And I almost killed you for murdering my bestfriends back then"

"I don't recall..."

"My name is...", I hesitated. "...Lady Lone"

"Lady Lone?", he let out, confused and I pushed the hood off of my head, revealing my face. His suddenly lit up. "You're the woman who has been declared dead weeks ago!", he exclaimed. "...Killed by Water Tribe officers who couldn't stop her from running away. How are you here?"

"Like Yona and Hak ; a miracle", I only said. 

"You were going to marry the King..."

"Enough about me now ; I have no interest in talking to you about what could have been. What I wish to tell you, is that you learn fast"

"Why so?"

"Because it took you only mere minutes in this village to understand what lacked. We, who have grown up with three meals a day, enough food on the table to nourish an entire village, different clothes for every day that passed and jewels that had so much value a commoner wished to land hands on one only so they could eat and drink"

He didn't say anything, and so I continued. "There is a difference between the rich and the poor ; we see a diamond and we say : "Oh well, it would look good as a pendant", while the poor only see the amount of food it could put on the table. Since I have lost my family and have been forced to live among the beasts of the forest, I have always asked myself why our status should change how much we eat in our life and how fine we can dress and, and, and... you know"

He nodded. He understood. "I never knew it could be that hard out there"

"And I hope you acknowledge it now. You made a promise to that child. I hope you realize how much it means to him and his mother. Please, do not disappoint me... or the Princess, might I say", was the last thing I said before leaving him alone with his thoughts. And as I walked away, a piercing gaze met mine. Droopy blue eyes watched my every movements with hot fire and cool ice. His eyes, as they skimmed down my body, made me stop. So he was back. It is not that I was uncomfortable ; I might even say I wasn't at all, but his sudden attention surprised me. I shook my head, ignoring this confusing sight and walked away with the purpose of helping villagers. 

The next morning, I smiled as Tae-Jun distributed to the villagers each a portion of food. I watched calmly, happy that he kept his promise. I was surprised when I found he was coming my way. He handed me a box. "Here, this is for you, Lady Lone"

"Thank you, but I am no longer a Lady. That title perished long ago"

He nodded, taking note of it. "I'm glad to see you kept your promise"

"Yes. The child was very happy to see he had food"

"I have no doubt he did"

"Well, I'll be joining the Princess now", he said and I offered him a smile. And suddenly, a presence sat beside me and approached himself near enough that his shoulder was touching mine from behind. And even when I tried to drop the smile I already had on, I failed and so I kept it as I turned my head toward this undesired visitor.

"And why do you find yourself near me, again, I wonder?", I let out as his eyes met mine. The sparkles in them sent butterflies down my throat to the very own pit of my stomach. I tried to hide the effect he had on me, but he grinned when he saw the slightest shift in my expression and movements. If I hadn't been sane, I might have just leaned against him.

"I heard this guy is someone very fond of Yona. And since you were talking with him yesterday and he, just now, offered you food, I am wondering if maybe you two didn't have a story of some sort"

"What kind of story are we talking about here? Because... I mean", I started, only to see the expression that would blossom on his face if I triggered his jealousy in any way. And his traits did drop for an instant, before I continued on. "I did almost kill him when I learned he had technically murdered my bestfriends"

"Oh, so he is one of the lucky guys who have found themselves under the unpredictable and irresistible threat that you and sword represent", he said and when I opened my mouth to speak, I only scoffed at his words upon realizing what he meant. I slowly unsheathed my sword and put the tip of the blade under his chin. He didn't falter, did not move as his seductive gaze stayed glued to mine. 

"Would you mind being one of them... again?", I asked teasingly.

"My, my, Lone dear, I wasn't expecting that coming from you"

I shrugged and pulled the blade away from his neck. I sheathed it and stood up. "I guess I am as unpredictable as you say I am", I answered and walked away. And I was sure his eyes followed me, glued on my back until I disappeared. And I knew that I didn't need confirmation or to look over my shoulder to know if it was true or not.

Chapter Text

"Yona!", Yoon shouted and I watched as my bestfriend was struggling to lift the buckets of water. "Yona, come on. It's too much for you!" 

"Princess, you look like a newborn fawn", Hak teased her and I offered him a death stare. 

"Princess, I can...", Ki-Ja offered.

"I'm okay...", Yona struggled to get out as her feet were slowly giving out. While on my part, I had the same amount she was carrying, though it was obviously easier for me to stay on my legs. It was order from Yoon to carry this amount anyway ; since my body was too fragile and less educated than before, which makes me incapable of lifting the weight I would have been able to before. And I made note to always listen to my private doctor these days. And since we don't have as much food as we would like to fill our bellies, my journey into getting better is braking... and hard. It's hard to train when you don't have anything in your stomach, but I managed. Once we're done with the Fire Tribe villages, I'm sure I'm gonna get better. "I need.. to build up my strength", Yona continued, a determined look on her face. "Besides... even one container is a lot. They need water, right?" 

"PrinceSssSssSsSSss", we heard from afar. And I guessed that accompanying the clop clop of the horse, a certain general's son had arrived. "Princess, did you come here, too?", he asked, a smile on his face.

"Tae-Jun", Yona realized.

"To be able to meet you in a place such as this. It must be fate", it's only at his last words that I frowned. What the hell is he even talking about? "Even taking the effort to ride my horse such a long way was-", he got cut off.

"White Snake, drag him off", Hak ordered and Ki-Ja followed with an 'okay' as he gripped Tae-Jun by the head with his clawed hand. 

"You're just in time, Tae-Jun. Come with us", Yona said, unbothered by the level of violence her companions were using on him. 

"Yes! Of course! I'll hold your baggage", he beamed, happy to be of help.

"I see. I'll leave it to you", Hak said.

"Great! We have ourselves a cart!", Yoon exclaimed, sarcastic.

"Who said I would carry yours?!", Tae-Jun screamed, outraged.

But when we finally arrived at the decrepit village, Tae-Jun was no longer my priority when I realized he was hurt by the spectacle unfolding before him. It was horrible, I admitted, but that's why we were here. 

"We bring water everyone!", Yona shouted so everyone could hear. 

Yoon made his way over to me and offered me a bunch of medicine. "Let's test your knowledge, Lone. I'm sure you remember what each of these plants do"

"Yes", I said as I was examining the ones he gave me, and then I started pointing and naming. "This one is to control the fever, this one to stop the bleeding. That one if I remember right must be for relieving the pain. And that last one is... oh yes! To make them fall asleep"

"Great! Now, you only give the last one if they are in a critical state. Then, you call for me, I'll tend to his bigger wounds"

"Got it!", I exclaimed and I was on my way then. As I walked around the village with Yona, I examined the patients while Yona gave them water and if needed, I gave them the medicine they needed. Thankfully, I didn't use any anesthesia on any villagers, which was a relief. Throughout the day, I helped Yona with changing the bandages of the villagers as we made them take a bath. It was pure hope to look at them as they smiled and thanked us. I would always remember what I did to help them, and even if it wasn't just me, I still had a part in it that I loved to call mine. 

But then, Yoon was ordering us to leave the village. I did, following the others, but when I realized Yoon and Jae-Ha had climbed into a tree and were watching the group that had penetrated the village with Tae-Jun just moments ago, I decided I would join them. So I started climbing and when I arrived at their level, I stopped. I didn't need to make myself known ; both of their heads turned in my direction after hearing the cracks of the branches below my feet. 

"Well, look who's here", Jae-Ha said as a greeting.

"I thought you were going back to Katan Village with the others", Yoon added, as if in reproach.

"I was, until I decided to climb up that tree I saw you both in. But anyway, it's interesting... what Tae-Jun's doing. I would never have imagined it would have come to this, honestly"

"Yeah... me neither", Yoon confessed.

"Did you propose this, Yoon?", Jae-Ha asked.

"Yes. He said he wanted to help Yona. But I'm worried. The soldiers basically tyrannize commoners. Ah! You see that?", and I turned my head toward where he was pointing. What I was seeing was infuriating, but I couldn't intercept. A soldier was kicking away a villager with his foot with such violent force and words that had me angry and almost mad to the point of crazy. 

"Out of my way!", we could hear him scream. "Don't get near me!"

"S-stop!", Tae-Jun shouted, running towards him. 

"But- Lord Tae-Jun! He was coming at me with his filth!"

"I will not allow any harm to be inflicted on the commoners!", Tae-Jun ordered, a leader-like voice gripping onto his words. I was surprised. "From now on, anyone who inflicts harm on any of the commoners will be severely punished!", we continued watching as the general's son brought a hand to his mouth as he examined the newly built building. I couldn't tell what it would be used for, but it was still rather interesting ; the amount of cleaning this could bring to all the villages of Fire. 

And then, not far away, clattering reached our ears and we followed the sound while Tae-Jun did the same. A soldier had fallen. "Woah! Kil-Sung?!"

"What happened?!", Tae-Jun screamed as he ran toward them.

"It seems one of the soldiers collapsed"

"Kil-Sung! Are you okay?!", but from where we were perched, all we could see was a body laying on the ground. What had happened exactly was a mystery to us.

"Did he catch an illness?"

"He was working in a place like this, so..."

"M...maybe I'll catch it, too"

"The doctor. Where's the doctor?", Tae-Jun asked, visibly worried.

"They won't make it today. By the way, I haven't seen anybody around here lately. They ran. They definetely ran away"

"Then, I'll take him", Tae-Jun announced as he lifted the guy and threw him over his shoulder. "Prepare a bed in the lodging"

Words became a blur to my ears as Yoon, who was still on Jae-Ha's back, spoke. "Bring me down, Jae-Ha. I'm gonna help them. They'll need a doctor", and so I watched as the Green Dragon brought our young friend down on the ground and came back up, curious as to what exactly he was getting into. But the images spreading below us were taken away from us as they entered the new building that had just been finished.

"I think I've seen enough", I stated and started climbing down. "This is promising. I hope it developps well for the future of Fire"

"Wait, I'll bring you back", Jae-Ha announced and as he was leaning down to take my hand, I stopped him. 

"No need. I'll be fine with walking", I refused and continued down the tree. My way back to Katan village was uneventful, but refreshing still. When I arrived in the village, a few villagers came to greet me. 

"Oh, it's Lone. She's back", one of the older men said. 

"Yes, I am, people. What do you need? I'll immediately bring it for you", I stated and started packing a bow and arrows, readying myself to go hunt. 

"No, we're fine. Actually...", the same man continued and I lifted up my head, confused. He was approaching me with a bowl between his hands. 

"We wanted to offer you food", a woman added and I frowned, genuinely confused.

"No", I said and I lifted a hand up to refuse the delicious meal the man was offering me. "You need it more than me. Eat it, I'll find something else to eat later"

"No", the man said, harsher than my own thoughts and words. "This is for you. You need it as much as we do, maybe even more"

"You tire yourself out every single day", a woman said.

"And you've been helping us until exhaustion", another added. "We can't let a child run under the small pieces of food she succeeds in getting"

"Food is important for growth. And you have already done a lot for us. I feel like you're never gonna stop even if we tell you to relax even for two minutes, so I say you need food to continue working"

"Because otherwise, you'll just fall unconscious. Now, now... what good are you to us if you can't even work", he said with a big smile on his lips, lifting the bowl up to me. "You need that meat on your bones, child. You deserve it"

I ended up picking the bowl from his hands reluctantly. And I couldn't stop the tear from sliding down my cheek in protest. This was touching and I knew I would return the favor a million times better than this. 

Chapter Text

It had been clear to every one of us that the violence the officers brought with themselves had significantly declined these past few days. Thanks to the influence of the second son of the Fire Tribe chief's efforts and work, he had been able to control the situation in each village with ease, which had given us more time to breathe and for me, to put some meat on my bones. What happened a few days ago with the villagers, I will never let that happen again. It might not be because I was taking food away from them, but more because when I was desperately trying to get better, get stronger, I appeared as weak and incapable to the people I needed to help as a duty.

"Recently, the number of violent officers has gone down", Yoon voiced out. "I wonder if it's because of the second son's leadership"

"There's still nothing in store, though", Ki-Ja pointed out.

"It's not something that will be solved overnight...", Yoon explained. "We need to find vegetation that will grow in this land", after a little while, his voice resonated again through the silence. "Hey, Yona, I... I think I'm going to leave the land of the Fire Tribe for a little while...", I raised an eyebrow, my arms crossed over my chest as I looked over to my friend who seemed slightly nervous.

My eyes stopped on them as I finally spotted their presence. My steps broke off as I recognized the faint chant of someone's familiar voice. And just as I was about to lift my head up into the sky to peer up the tree, I noticed the Yellow Dragon making his way into the village. He was juggling with little pouches of whatever, entertaining the villagers around, plastering a smile on their faces, forcing a little laugh out of their mouths. And when he started giving hugs around and Yoon had probably disappeared to give treatment to whoever needed it, I lifted my head up and noticed my favorite dragon leaning against a branch far up the tree, slacking. I climbed and climbed, until I finally arrived at his level. I joined him on the same branch, lifting one of my legs over the branch and letting myself fall on the thick part of the tree. He turned his head toward me, and he didn't look startled at all. He definitely knew I was coming.

"Not bad, you know. I hadn't noticed you until you started climbing", he teased, as if trying to upset me. And in a way, it worked... and well.

"I was not trying to sneak up on you, Pervert. I was only trying to admire Zeno's and Yoon's work from a higher point of view"

"Sure, you were", he let out nonchalantly, returning his gaze to the village below us. I lifted an eyebrow, confused by his words.

"You say this as if I can't stand by my answer. What's wrong with it?"

"Nothing. You can also just admit that you wanted to spend some time with me", I frowned at his words as he looked toward me with a grin.

"I can also see that a civilized conversation with you today is pointless, since you'll make sure to harass me in the mean time", and now, he's the one confused by what I had said, looking hurt by my words.

"I'm not harassing you", I laughed at that. "And what are you laughing at, now?"

"You, Pervert. You're annoyingly funny"

"And why so?"

I swung my leg over the tree branch, looking ready to jump down. 

"I think I'm gonna take my leave now. The sun will soon be down and I want to spend some time in this village"

"Wait! What if you're recognized? Or killed?"

"Then, keep an eye over me, will you?", I asked, winking as I climbed down the tree until my feet hit the ground. And then I found my way to the center of the village, where Zeno was dancing and chanting. I sat, looking like a poor villager having fun. When Zeno's eyes met mine, he nodded, saluting me. I returned the nod as I continued enjoying his presence.

I didn't know when exactly he noticed my presence, but when he handed me a bowl full of food, I took it. But he did not leave.

"Why are you here, Lone?"

"I'm enjoying Zeno's spectacle", I only answered.

"It's dangerous. You could get recognized"

"I will not. I'm acting as one of the villagers"

"With your hood down..."

"Exactly. Bear with me, Yoon, I left my sword with Yona ; that has to count for something. Moreover, a face like mine in this Tribe doesn't attract much attention now, does it?"

He stayed silent, yet did not budge. I lifted my head to see his serious traits, telling me he was worried. I smiled, trying to reassure him. "I'm gonna be fine, Yoon. You don't have to worry about me"

"I'm not worrying"

"Then, why are you still here?"

"I'm contemplating Zeno's art", I smiled at his answer and he finally walked away as he continued giving food around. I started eating mine, and my belly instantly felt fuller by the first spoonfull. It tasted as magical as it always did and I was tempted by another spoonfull and another, until I realized my bowl was empty. When the officers started encircling Zeno, I left my bowl on the ground and left the village, unlooked and unnoticed.  

I realized that Jae-Ha's presence was missing when I passed by the tree. I continued deeper into the forest, until a hand stopped me on the arm. Alarmed and sensing danger, I gripped the man's hand, pulling him to me in a swift move as I shoved a knee into his stomach, making him fold in two in pain. I gripped his shoulders, bringing his head to meet my knee. The sheer force of it all brought him stumbling on the ground, and I kicked him in the face as his back hit the ground. Without my sword, I only put a foot on his chest, waiting for him to let a single sound out. The dark of night took away my ability to see, but since he wasn't fighting back, I assumed he was not strong enough to put me down. 

"Damn, Lone, I was just trying to tell you something", I heard Hak grunting. I stepped back and lifted an eyebrow he couldn't see.

"Don't put the blame on me ; you were the one who surprised me"

We were still in a fight and our conversations weren't intimate or friendly as they would have been before. And so we didn't bother saying many words, but this must be the most I've said in his presence in a long time. We stared at each other, as we realized what we had finally exchanged. My body was still tense though, as if some danger could come from my bestfriend. But he seemed on edge also, and I did attack him a few seconds ago. He slowly got up, not breaking eye contact in the thick dark of the night. I waited until he spoke.

"Yona is still at the village. We need to get back to the other", he simply said and I turned on my heels.

"I'll find her. I'll see you back at the village", I simply answered, running in the opposite way toward where I previously left Yoon and Zeno. I suddenly stopped when I heard voices reaching my ears. They were not far, but were far enough for me to have to walk over there. I stood in the shadows as I listened to what Yona was saying. She was standing, leaning against the tree, and I guessed, when his name pushed passed her lips, that she was talking to Tae-Jun, who was probably on the other side of the tree. 

"Tomorrow morning... we will leave this land", she explained. "Yoon said he wants to find a crop that will grow on this land. We're planning on going with him"

"Does that mean you're coming back here?", he asked.

"Yes. One more thing, Lady Mi-Rae... has passed away", I lowered my head at her words, reminding myself of her peaceful expression when her eyes closed and I saw her soul flying towards the Heavens. I smiled when I realized no regrets coated her life... and Yona knew this. 

"I see"

"It was this morning... I'm sorry for not letting you know sooner. The lady was ill for a very long time. Yoon was worried about her, but..."

"Is that... so... When I return to Saika someday, I was going to find her son...", he whispered his last words with hurt and strain. He was deceived and pained. 

"It's not just Lady Mi-Rae... You'll never know when you'll see someone again... There are still many people you need to support, Tae-Jun. I wonder if I can rely on you. Please... protect the people of the Fire Tribe"

"To give a task such as that to someone like me...", he mumbled. "... is the highest honor"

I approached my dear friend, walking over the herbs, and the tree roots. "Yona", I called her name. "It's time to go"

Her eyes met mine in the dark of the night and she smiled slightly as she joined me.  

"Huh? I don't see Yoon!"

"That dancing boy, too!"

"Yoon-?"

They called contiuously as their voices faded to our ears. The realization that Tae-Jun had just been discovered pushed these thoughts only to be smothered by new ones. Necessary ones. We were back on our way to the other village, where they all waited for us. Tomorrow was a new day, tomorrow was a new destination. But most importantly, tomorrow was the continuation of my journey to healing.

Faded Memory - 1 year ago

It's been a few months now. A few months since I haven't had any news on Soo-Won. He hasn't come to visit us at the caslte and he hasn't written me any letters. Hasn't sent anything that would make me believe he still wanted a chance. After he kissed me, he told me he would make me his bride one day. He told me he would love me so much he would make me Queen somehow. I laughed and laughed, but I smiled despite it being completely ridiculous. My feelings were returned, but there was still something odd about that character I felt so much for. 

He felt foreign, no matter how you saw it. He said I would become Queen, and I hadn't thought about it back then, because I was too blinded to realize that Yona was the real successor to the throne. My head was spinning with millions of possibilities, trying to dissuade these possibilities with impossibilities, but I was still haunted by heartfelt promises and stories of love and fairytales like I've always wanted them, to think about it even more. But now, when I once believed I would sit in Yona's place, a crown on my head, I think about how I will stand at her side, my husband standing by my side. By law, I would be her cousin, and we would be even closer than before. 

I've been thinking about him until the point of insanity. I've been dreaming about what could be, about the ring on my finger, the dress so white it could blind. I've been hoping for love, waiting for it all my life, and there it was, and I could finally live my happily ever after. At least, that's what I thought... until I received this letter. The only letter he has sent to me. And when I opened it, I knew I could never forgive myself for hoping, for loving something that could really never be mine. 

"Dearest Lady Lone,

I could never be more sorry than I already am. Sorry for the worry I've brought you over the past few months. But I have made realizations on my own and I've thought about it. I thought about telling this to you face to face. And I tried to reason with myself that it was for the best, but I cannot bring myself to come to Hakkon House only to announce to you these heart wrenching news.

I cannot bring myself to ask you in marriage. I cannot make you my wife. I will never be able to explain it to you, and yet I know you deserve an answer. It would be a betrayal toward your bestfriends to be married to someone as dangerous as me. I do not deserve you and never will, but if somehow, life puts us together in the end, I shall forever cherish every moment we'll have to the two of us. But until then, if ever then happens, I wish for you to live the greatest of love you would have wished for, even if it isn't me.

Have a wonderful day my sweet Lady Lone.

Lord Soo-Won"

...

Chapter Text

Long... Long Ago

The little dots of light felt foreign. Hakkon House had always stood on a patch of grass, miles away from the Castle. It was rare for me to step foot out of my home to wander to a place far more comfortable and rich and welcoming. 

And getting away from Father's screaming tone and apologizing words, where the sincerity was completely forbidden. He only ever wanted us to understand that we were failures, I more than my sister, for I was the last of their children and I was not born a boy. And somehow, from the age of 8, I did understand the hate he had toward us and the contempt he felt for us. Sometimes, I wished I was born like my bestfriend - with red hair that she hates, with jewelry instead of an old sword, with a father who doesn't imagine you were the son he never had - but I wasn't.

"It's always lively outside the castle!", Yona shouted, tearing me away from my thoughts and back to the flashing little lights that settled upon the city. "It's brighter than the stars in the sky. I wonder what's happening"

"Me too", I let out. "It must be wonderful to wander in the city"

"Yona, Lone, you've never been to the town of the Castle?", Soo-Won asked and I turned toward the two boys - my bestfriends.

"The Princess has no sense of direction, so she'd get lost", Hak teased, food in his mouth.

"Who has no sense of direction?!", Yona shouted, throwing things at him, causing a mess. 

"I'm glad you two are such good friends", Soo-Won commented. 

"How can you see it like that, Soo-Won?", Hak then screamed, utterly insulted.

"It's because you two are such a heartwarming sight, right, Soo-Won?", I asked, my hands joined in front of me. 

"Indeed they are", he responded in his usual sweet and innocent voice. 

"I've only seen the Castle's town from here", Yona continued. "Father says I can't go because it's dangerous", I smiled when she said that. And I hoped that my father could be as kind and protective as the King, one day.

"Really?", Soo-Won asked, looking surprised. 

"Yes", Yona let out timidly, as if ashamed.

"Do you want to go?", Soo-Won proposed and I raised my eyebrows in question. 

"Huh?", was the only sound that came out of her mouth.

"Do you want to go see the Castle's town?", he proposed again, to which Yona flushed red. 

"I- I can't! Father has forbidden me from doing that! Because it's dangerous outside. First of all I don't really... want to go outside", I stayed very still at her last words, more because she's been wondering about the city's lights and people and streets for a few days now... since I've arrived at least. 

"Shall we go?", Soo-Won asked, closing up this case.

"Maybe tomorrow?", I added. "It's dark out, we wouldn't want us to lose each other"

"Good idea, Lone!", Hak exclaimed. 

The rest of the night was a blur. Everything after this conversation went in the back of my mind. Whether it was a dream that lightened my night or a nightmare that haunted my head, I couldn't remember. The morning before we left the Castle, I couldn't remember if I ate, or if I did anything for that matter. Except, when we successfully escaped the King's and the soldiers' sight and guard. We were only steps away from the city when Yona stayed behind the door. 

"Yona", I called.

"Yona, come on", Soo-Won encouraged her. Her cheeks were red with child-like fear of making a mistake. "It's okay"

"But...", she let out, as if in any position to have a fight with the three of us. 

"If you stand there trembling in fear, you'll bring attention to yourself", Soo-Won said.

"You chatter horribly loud at the Castle, after all!", Hak shouted, mocking her. The next second though, Yona was on the other side of the door, joining us as she pushed her way towards Hak.

"I don't chatter horribly loud!", she countered, her wrists restrained by an unbothered Hak.

"You came out", I told her and she stilled, realizing what she had done. The next steps in the city felt more familiar to our Princess. She was amazed annd impressed by the amount of people wandering the streets and the action taking place below her palace. It was like Heaven atop the world to her. The delicious food and the beautiful sound of the music was enough to have her looking everywhere for more. As for Soo-Won, Hak and I, it felt like daily life, despite never have been to the Castle's town for myself. 

"There's so many people!", Yona let out, surprised, stars shining in her eyes. 

"There's a Five Tribe Meeting going on right now. Let's play around until the meeting ends", Soo-Won explained.

"But you know some bizarre secret pathways, huh?", Hak asked him. 

"It's a daily adventure!", Soo-Won exclaimed, red flaming his cheeks as he suddenly became excited.

"Do you two come here often?", Yona asked, seeing as to their friendly conversation didn't seem familiar to her. Neither did it to me, for I have never seen Hak and Soo-Won outside the Castle. 

"My grandpa brings me once in a while", Hak said.

"That sounds great. I want to come with General Mundok, too", Soo-Won added.

"I bet the General regrets it every time he steps foot in this city with you in tow, Hak", I let out, knowing my bestfriend more than he might think.

"It's just noisy", Hak only said, practically ignoring my words.

"How about Soo-Won?", Yona asked.

"I've come just a few times", he answered and my attention was wholly turned toward him as he spoke.

"Now then, let's go! Let's go!", Yona screamed, tearing me away from Soo-Won, surprising myself when I realized I wanted to know more about his adventures here. Yona ran forward, stopped by a wave of people blocking her way, where two people were blocking the view she desperately wanted to see. Hak approached her and lifted her up onto his shoulders. I watched a smile grow on her lips and suddenly, a hand slid into mine.

"Come, Lone. We're gonna have fun", Soo-Won told me, pulling on my hand. I followed him to where Hak and Yona were and walked from there, watching the booths multiplying beside us. Yona was perched atop Hak's shoulders, her arms laying on his head as Soo-Won's hand was still firmly holding mine. I couldn't hide my smile and how happy I truly was in this moment, with my three bestfriends.

"In Fuuga, there are a lot of smaller kids", Hak said. "You guys are easy compared to them"

"I'll take that as a compliment", I let out.

"Hey Hak, what's that?", Yona asked, pointing in a direction I couldn't quite see. Hak walked toward a booth and Soo-Won pulled on my hand so we could follow. I didn't recognize what type of food he was selling exactly, but it looked delicious. "It's the first time I've seen food like this" 

"Do you want to try it?", Soo-Won asked her. 

"Welcome ! These are deep-fried dumplings, and they're good!", the merchant shouted, as I let go of my friend's hand and leaned over.

"Ooh, they do smell good", I sang. 

"Do you want to try it, too, Lone?", Soo-Won asked, turning his head toward me. 

"Sure! Why not? I can try some with Yona!", I exclaimed, lifting my eyes to the Princess.

"I can't eat this stuff", she said sadly. "The poison tester isn't here, either. I'll be scolded by Father"

"Then I'll taste it for poison", Hak proposed.

"Hak, you're so cool!", Yona beamed again, a smile spreading on her face. The man handed us a stick of dumplings and Hak tasted one. The look on Yona's face was funny as her little hands tried not to reach for the stick. And then suddenly, Soo-Won pushed us onto the ground.

"Get down!", he shouted into a whisper.

"What's wrong?", Yona asked, as she kneeled on top of Hak, the boy being crashed under her weight.

"It's Joo-Doh", Soo-Won said and my eyes froze. He's been training me for a few years now and he can be mean when he wants to. And this situation would be the perfect reason for him to scold us heavily. "It seems he came to find us"

"Those damn brats!", we heard him shout. 

"Captain, watch your tongue", another of his soldiers said.

"Joo-Doh is a quick-tempered person, isn't he?", Yona asked, a little fear in her voice.

"Visibly", I let out, frozen by fear.

"Hak!", Soo-Won then called and we all turned toward our friend. 

"Hak!! Is this... poison?!", Yona called, worried.

"Is it poison?!", I asked again, terrified now.

"This is terrible, he has to throw it up! Yona, hold him up so I can hit him in the stomach!", Soo-Won exclaimed as Yona went behind our friend. I stayed kneeling on the ground, unsure what to do.

"Got it!", Yona responded.

"Yona! The pit of his stomach is here!", Soo-Won shouted, getting ready to hit him, but it came to my mind that Hak might not really like this intervention and I leaned over, stopping Soo-Won's fist. 

"That's not a really good idea", I let out. "What if you hurt him badly!"

"But- but he was poisoned!", Soo-Won countered.

"No, he was not!", I screamed and then turned toward my friend. I raised my hand in the air and brought it to his cheek in a swift move, bringing him back to reality. "Come back to yourself, future General of the Wind Tribe!", I ordered as Hak's eyes suddenly cleared. 

"Unbelievable...", Hak let out, a cup of water in his hands. "You guys are worse than the kids back home"

A shadow loomed over us still and we looked up to stare at the menacing presence of the merchant. "You're making a complete ruckus in front of my store with talks of poison and whatnot. Do you brats have any money?", he asked us, ready to throw fists.

"Money...", Hak mumbled. "Soo-Won, do you have any?"

"Huh..?", Soo-Won was embarassed by the situation, even more than Hak actually was. "I always have some, but..."

"In other words, you're saying you don't have any now?", he asked, looking angry. 

"Understood!", Yona screamed. "Come to the Castle la-", she started but I stopped her, clamping a hand over her mouth. I reached into the small of my sash and got out a few coins, enough to pay for more than we took. 

"Here you go, mister. Thank you for your kindness", I sincerely said, an embarassing smile on my lips as I pushed my friends away from his booth.

"Wait!", he screamed back and I looked toward him as he handed me a couple other dumplings. I took them with a smile and I pushed my friends away from the scene they had caused. 

Munching on the little pieces of meat that Hak generously tried for poison, we each savored the delicious taste of what we were eating. "It's delicious. He put plum bean jam inside these, right?", Soo-Won said with a full mouth.

"Yeah. The jam is good", Hak agreed.

"Yona, Lone, is it good?", he turned toward us.

"Delicious", I answered, turning to my bestfriend. She had stars in her eyes and drool sliding down her mouth, looking like she was about to melt from the taste. She gasped when she realized she was being watched. 

"You're so cute, Yona", Soo-Won then said as we continued on our way. 

"You're cramming your cheek pouch with too much", Hak said, patting Yona on her head.

Our walk through the city kept its rhythm as we listened and watched as we went on. "The music of that musician earlier was pretty. I want to let Father listen to it, too", Yona said. 

"I want to listen to it with my father, too", Soo-Won added, and I couldn't help but thinking about how mine wouldn't even listen to me once I came back home. It was all about training and training and training when we saw each other, and sometimes about how I couldn't be the son he always wanted to have. 

"Are you alright, Lone?", Soo-Won asked and I jumped, surprised that I had gone too far in my thoughts.

"Of course, I am", I answered.

"Okay. Then, what about you?"

"Hmm?", I let out.

"Would you like to listen to the music with Lord Han-Rae?"

"Father isn't very much fond of music", I answered.

"What? No! That's so sad", Yona exclaimed, shocked. I shrugged.

"I'll listen to it with my mother", I smiled and I could see my bestfriends smile as well. They were smiling for me... despite everything. At least, until Yona slammed into someone. 

"Hey, you", he called, turning around. His robes, his hair, his face... This was a Fire Tribe member and since there is a Five Tribe meeting being held, I would like to guess that he was either a noble or a soldier. "Don't you have something to say about bumping into me?", he set his eyes upon us and then lifted an eyebrow. "Hm? Kids? I've seen your faces somewhere"

Hak immediately placed himself before the Princess, hiding her from him. "Sorry, she's my little sister. Please pardon her"

"I will not!", he shouted, and I could guess through those words that he was from noble blood. Who he was, still was a mistery to me. "Because I am... the Second Son of the Fire Tribe's General, Kan Tae-Jun", Good Lord... we had to bump into a damn General's son. "Listen to me, you little brats! If I tell my father about you, you'll get two lashings!"

"Two lashings for bumping into the Second son of a General? Surely, as we are very important citizens of the Sky Tribe, you'll have to go through the King first", I explained, a smile plastering my face the entire time. As for him, he looked shocked at how I was speaking to him. How dare I, huh, Kan Tae-Jun? 

"Very important citizens of the Sky Tribe?", he asked, mocking me. "Who the hell are you, I don't even recognize you"

"I am Lad-", I started but got interrupted when Hak's hand slammed against my mouth.

"Let me do this", he said, then turned toward the General's son. "Sorry, there, I said it"

"It's "Lord Kan Tae-Jun, I apologize. Please, have it in your heart that's deeper than the sea to forgive us!" Kneel on the ground!!"

"I'm zorry", Hak mocked. 

"I'll beg when I'm no longer sitting on the throne", I joked and grimaced at the man, then started to leave.

"How dare you address me this way, you brat?!"

"It's 'Lady', you big fat lump", I answered back. 

"Huh?!", he exclaimed, angered.

"Master Tae-Jun, calm down. I'll give you a dumpling", Soo-Won jumped in, trying to improve the situation.

"I don't want it!!"

"Now that we are finished here, Young Lord, we would like to go back to our activities"

"Heavens, Lone!", Hak whispered. "You've rarely been that mad"

"Whatever", I turned on my heels and then stopped when I realized there was no stack of red hair no where near us. "Uh, guys... Yona's gone"

"What do you mean 'go-'", Hak started but stopped. "Holy. We need to find her!", he shouted as we started running, desperately trying to search for her, as well as leaving the Young Lord behind us. 

"Wait!", he screamed, as if an order from him would make us stop. "I'm still talking to y-"

We were almost flying through the nearest streets, running like our lives depended on it. "How far could she have gone?", Hak asked, more to himself than to us.

"It's not like we can call out her name loudly, either", Soo-Won said.

"This is bad. With the Princess being that small, she'll be swept away in this crowd", Hak added.

"What do we do? This could mean the worse", I said, deeply worried.

"Let's not try to think about that for now. Let's find her first", Hak countered, leaving my words for what they were... words.

"Hak, Lone, come with me", Soo-Won called and we followed him. We walked until suddenly the change of decor seemed distrustful. It was suspicious and now that we were in a dark alley filled with filthy people, more bad things could happen to us. Though, watching Soo-Won, I guessed he seemed used to this place.

"Hey. It's kinda getting more and more dark", Hak said and I was relieved that I wasn't the only one who realized. 

"Won!", someone suddenly called and I lifted my eyebrows in surprise. Hak looked as equally convinced this didn't make sense. "It's been a while. How've you been?"

"Hey, kid. Come here", another called.

"It's been a long time, guys", Soo-Won said.

"Won...", someone sang, visibly controlled by alcohol. "How old are you? Want to drink with us?", he asked and I couldn't help but cringe.

"I can't drink", Soo-Won only answered as if it was a normal question to be asked at such a young age. Though, in this moment, Soo-Won did look like he could be in his late teenage years.

"Hey, who are these drunkards?", Hak asked, low enough that I almost didn't hear.

"They're a group of old men who talk with me whenever I come to town", Soo-Won responded simply, as if this wasn't unusual.

"They talk with you?", I asked, confused. 

"So they're not a group of scoundrels", Hak came to a conclusion that whoever talked to Soo-Won wasn't a complete nobody and I couldn't help but frown.

"They're all good people", Soo-Won assured, still patient. 

"...You were lying when you said you only came a few times, weren't you?", Hak asked and now that I thought about it, Soo-Won did seem brief when we talked about our visits to the Castle's town. 

"But I can listen to a lot of interesting things they say", he said, then turned toward the group of men. "Um, we're looking for a lost child. She's a red-haired, six year-old girl"

"Have you seen her?", a drunk man asked to another. 

"No"

"Haven't seen her"

"Ogi, did you see her?", we turned our heads to the man who had been called. He was playing a game, drinking alcohol. He had long hair and his robes were partly opened, revealing his chest. He brought the cup of sake to his lips. 

"I don't know. I've been gambling at Ogi all day, today", he answered before taking a sip. "AHHH! DAMNITT!!"

"You shouldn't talk to him. He keeps losing and is on edge"

"But a lost girl? Isn't that bad?"

"Bad?", Hak asked, confused. 

"I hear there has been a kidnapping operation in the area that targets kids", the man explained and I froze, feeling my legs crumble under my weight. If we hadn't been so preocupied with the damn General's son, we could have stopped her before she wandered away. I shoved my friends away, and walked to the table Ogi was seated at. I put a hand on the board he was playing on, making the pieces jump and slightly move. He looked down to me, surprised and shocked. He was confused as to why I had reacted this way. 

"Okay, old man. If you want to play, game on, but since you've got nothing else to do than lay on your lazy ass all day, maybe you should get up and help the people who need it. We need to find someone and soon, or else, it's not only big trouble that awaits us, but I can also put you in it. Also, she's an important friend of ours, so you better be quick", I said, my eyes blank as I stared at him. He leaned back on his chair, bringing his eyes to another small person behind me.

"She's tough, young man"

"May I ask ; what happens to the children who are kidnapped?", Hak asked and I turned toward him, equally as interested in the question.

"There's a rumor they're sold to Kai"

"Disgusting", I mumbled.

"Mr Ogi, I have a favor to ask of you", Soo-Won let out, looking serious.

"I think your friend here might have filled me in on with what my job seems to be", the man said, looking down at me for two seconds before looking back at Soo-Won.

"Why do we even need his help?", Hak asked.

"Because Mr Ogi is the "face" of the East District's Underside. It might have been obvious to Lone that he was important, that he could help us find her. Mr Ogi, if it's you, there shouldn't be any difficulties finding a small girl in this town"

"...I want to eat some roasted pork", I frowned, and sighed heavily, making him look right at me as I crossed my arms over my chest. "Got a problem with that, young lady?"

"Actually, yes", I stated, looking him straight into his eyes. "We're kind of in a rush. So what about you help us and we discuss method of payment later?", but he only shook his head at my words and slowly brought his attention back to the board. I waited for a few seconds, but ended up deciding he couldn't be bothered to answer.

"Ogi, you don't have any more moves, right? Give up!", the man he was playing against said. My frown deepened and I was a few seconds from exploding. 

"Shut up! Wait a second!"

I looked to the board and made sense of the game in a matter of seconds. I brought my fingers to the board and moved one piece, making him win instantly. "Checkmate", I let out. I watched as his eyes traveled over the board, surprised. "Now that I've made you win, we can go search for our fr-"

He stood up, putting a foot on the table as he shouted : "What?! WOOO!! I wonn!!" and I rolled my eyes.

"Technically, I did, but anyway", I whispered as I backed away toward Hak and Soo-Won. Dancing on his feet, Soo-Won approached me. 

"I saw it, too", he said into my ear and I flushed red.

"Are you kidding me?! That move is...", his opponent screamed. "No fair, Ogi!"

"Please! Mr Ogi!", Soo-Won called.

"I'm no match for you", the man said, looking at me with a bright smile. "Men! We have a kid to find! Cooperate with those of the others districts, too! If you find even a little information, pass it on to Won immediately!"

"Thank you!", Soo-Won screamed and I looked toward him then. Somehow, he looked smarter than he always shows to be. It's as if he was controlling these men. It's as if he was their leader. I never thought Soo-Won would have this kind of blood flooding his veins, I would never thought my sweet, calm and innocent friend would be as leader-like as I've just witnessed. 

Chapter Text

Forget about what I did. Forget about Yona's disappearance. Forget about the men's kindness.

What about Soo-Won? How did he know these men? Why did he look so confident? Why did he look so leader-like that it startled me? I hated this. 

"We're looking for a six year-old girl", the man started. "She has curly red hair up to her shoulders and wears a peach colored kimono", he then turned toward us. "Hey. What's the girl's name?", he asked and Soo-Won lifted his arms up to form an "x". "She's nameless! Does she have any other features?", he shouted, though the meaning of hiding her name was very important to us. We couldn't let anyone know that the Princess had been kidnapped.

"Her eyes are large and cute!", Soo-Won exclaimed.

"Is that going to help at all?", Hak asked, confused.

"All right, boys! Look for a girl with eyes that are large and cute!", Ogi ordered and the men beamed, encouraged. "There's a chance she ran into some kidnappers. Move carefully!"

My eyes moved upward and around me. I was extremely surprised how many men were among us. How many men were helping us find only one person. I found it spectacular, found it extraordinary, impressive. For the next hours, we kept receiving news about Yona's whereabouts and what people heard from her and where they'd seen her last. 

"Won, in front of the Dumpling Shop, someone saw a red-haired girl on someone's back"

"The band players saw a little girl apparently"

"She disappeared after that. Let's search the surrounding area"

"In the southern district, I asked Ok-Hee and he said there was no one suspicious"

"Information from the west hasn't come back yet? There are a ton of back alleys in that area"

"Won, we searched the shops in the western streets, but we didn't find the girl"

"Are there any hidden rooms or hidden passageways?"

"Won, in front of Hion-Dan's decoration shop, there was a girl matching that description"

"...Give me more details"

Ogi joined him on the bridge, Soo-Won his legs close to his chest as he stared at sprinkling water that flowed under the bridge. Hak and I were up on a rooftop, listening to everything that happened below. "I asked the store owner. The girl was stopped by a man", the man started. "Apparently the man offered to buy something for the girl but she declined"

"What does that man look like?", Soo-Won asked, his mouth hidden beneath the sleeve of his robes.

"It was a large dark-skinned man", Ogi shared. "The business of abducting got darker..."

"Ogi. In between the eastern upper district and the other districts, can you create a blockade at the gate and the communication passageway for a little while?"

"A blockade?", he repeated and I straightened, suddenly curious if he could do it. "That would be complicated"

Soo-Won let his legs dangle from the bridge as he looked back at his friend. "You can't do it?", he asked and Ogi looked pensive for a few seconds. As for my bestfriend, he didn't seem to be insulted by his incapability ; he was still smiling despite it all. He kept a calm I never would have been able to keep in such a situation.

"Tsk! Who do you think I am? Wait a bit, I'll talk to some people. It'll be quick", Ogi finally let out, walking away as he scratched the back of his head.

"Please and thank you!", Soo-Won shouted back.

"A blockade?", Hak then asked.

"Yeah. At the eastern and the communication passageway", a man explained. "They're going to search people's luggage"

"Smart", I let out. "But if the guy who did it has already fled, it's futile..."

I looked toward my dark-haired friend as I realized his cheeks slightly turning red. He was impressed. And as much as I was. By Soo-Won's leadership at our age. I don't think I could ever achieve that, even when I'm older. Hak suddenly leapt off the roof and landed perfectly on the ground. Surprised by his sudden disappearance, I followed behind him as he ran toward Soo-Won. When he noticed our presence, a large smile appeared on his face.

"We're currently searching people around the gate and the communication passage", Soo-Won explained as I neared the duo.

"So you're looking for suspicious people", Hak said.

"As much as suspicious goes though, the man who did this could be looking as innocent as a child", I said. "That's why you're searching everyone"

"That way, we'll definitely find Yona", Hak added.

"Of course!", Soo-Won shouted, the look on his face nothing familiar to the serious one he sometimes put on.

We made our way to the gate where the inspection had some trouble starting. People were shouting to let them through and Hak had disappeared through the throng of people to try and find a dark-skinned man... a suspicious one. When we noticed him jumping onto some people's carriage, we ran up front. Hak was already beating up the men, which made me think that Yona had been found. Beside me, Soo-Won was looking at his bestfriend in awe. And the next words that were exchanged couldn't reach my ears, because of how much reassured I was. I sighed and closed my eyes, contemplating the immense stress we've been through. Until Mundok interrupted, defending Hak, leaving him speachless. Until Joo-Doh arrived and the men tried running away. Until Yona finally woke up and started crying.

"Soo-Won! Hak! Lone!", she screamed.

"'Sup!", Hak let out and I watched them. "Are you awake, Princess?"

"Hak!", she shouted his name as her small arms encircled his shoulders. Until Mundok grabbed Hak by the collar, scolding him. Until Joo-Doh appeared behind Soo-Won and I.

"What is going on here, Hak?!", Mundok screamed.

"I finally found you...", he grumbled, visibly angry as an embarassing smile appeared on my lips. "Princess Yona, Lady Lone and Lord Soo-Won..."

"I even told you to sit still until the Five Tribes meeting was over...!", the general exploded.

"I asked you over and over again not to go outside!", and Joo-Doh followed.

"You put the Princess in danger! That's punishment by death! That's beheading!", Mundok continued screaming at Hak, while Joo-Doh had a finger pointed down on us, deeply angered.

"Exactly how did you sneak out!", but neither Soo-Won, nor I could answer his question. 

"It's fiiine", the Earth Tribe's General said. "They even caught the kidnappers"

"Please be quiet, General Geun-Tae!", he screamed again, ready to rip yet another one's head.

I was sent back early to Hakkon House, back to my despicable father, whom I ignored, but couldn't do quite the same when their shadows appeared again in the corner of my room. I was looking out of the window, seated on the small couch in my room that offered a great view of the night sky. I watched the stars glimmer with blinding light... but the moon alone shone brighter than anything else. I hoped Soo-Won stared at the same sky as I was. 

I slowly pushed my legs away from my chest as I rose from the small couch. Draped only in my nightgown, I walked to the door and opened it. The hallway was dark, but no shadows lurked. I left the room with a lamp in hand as I made my way to the armory. I quietly opened the door, pursing my lips when it creaked. When it was wide enough for me to go in, I slipped through the crack and made my way in. My feet pushed me where I knew the sword was waiting. I put down the lamp, staring at the big sword that would one day be mine to hold until I died. I put my hands on the hilt, encircling it with my fingers. I put my entire strength in my hands and tried to lift the sword. But I was still too weak and the sword only slightly moved under my weight. 

I sighed as I gave up for the night. Tomorrow, I would try again. And I would try until I could finally lift it. I suddenly jumped as the door to the room creaked open. I turned toward the shadow standing in the doorway.

"Son?", my father called and I pursed my lips in regret and disgust. He sometimes called me 'son'. I didn't know why. I didn't know if my father was becoming crazy over the loss of a child he couldn't have, or if he just thought I could be the son I wasn't.

"It's me, father. Lone. Your daughter", I finally responded.

"Right", I heard him say as he slammed a hand on his face, sliding it along his features. "I'm sorry. What are you doing?"

"I was trying to lift the sword"

"Go to sleep, Lone. We'll train tomorrow"

"Yes, father", I said as I took the lamp and exited the room. 

Sometimes my father was my worst nightmare. Sometimes, his innocent and crazed words made me think I would never be enough living as a girl. Sometimes, I think about how it would have been better to have been born a boy, so I didn't have to live with the fact that my father was deceived of who I was. 

Chapter Text

Whack! Whish! Clack! Clack! 

The sounds were a mirror of the previous ones. The clashing of their wooden swords was filling the forest. I had my arms crossed over my chest as I overlooked Hak's training. Well... Hak training Yona. Until Hak offered a hit and Yona's sword flew up into the sky, scaring off the birds. It fell back to the ground with a loud thud, piercing the earth. Yona was on her knees shortly after, panting. 

"Shall we end it there for today?", Hak asked, his sword drooping at his side. "Princess?"

"I- I'm not done yet!", she shouted, taking her sword up again. 

"I said we're done", Hak added, his fist connecting with the top of her head, without hurting too much.

I headed through the trees first, finding my way back to the camp, putting a hand on the pommel of my sword at my hip. 

"I'm exhausted", Yona chanted. "But I think we should train more seriously. Lone's harsher than you, Hak", she said, which made me smile, snorting. Hak and I were still not talking to each other, but the look he offered me was the closest thing to friendly I had received from him. As for myself, as long as he didn't apologize for his reaction, I wasn't going to start conversations.

"P-Princess!", Ki-Ja called as we entered the camp. "You're..."

In fact, Yona might be slightly bruised from the training. "Ah! I'm hungry", she let out, her face none the disgusted one. "Yoon, where's diner?"

"Hold on, I'm not your mother!", he screamed, his cheeks turning red.

"Ye-y, food!", Zeno shouted, excited.

Yoon handed me a bowl and I smiled as thanks. 

"Hak! What did you do to the Princess?", Ki-Ja asked, turning to Hak, who was already eating what Yoon had given him.

"Oh? I was training her, you should know that", Hak mumbled.

"Aren't you hurting her? And you, Lone, why aren't you doing anything to stop it?!", he continued screaming as if Yona making an effort was ridiculously outrageous. I lifted my hands in the air, food in my mouth.

"Yona, turn this way", Yoon ordered her. "I'm putting ointment on"

"It looks like the Miss was sent flying and kicked around without being able to stop Mister's sword", Zeno chanted.

"KI-", Ki-Ja panicked. 

"I won't kick her", Hak nonchalantly added.

"He could, though", Yona said. "This is training for me to become stronger. There's no point if he doesn't do it seriously"

"Seriously...?! You're fighting the Princess with all your strength?!", Ki-Ja screamed again as I reached my hand toward my boot. I could throw it at him if he didn't stop screaming like it was the end of the world. 

"Ki-Ja, if Hak was being serious with her, Yona would die instantly", Jae-Ha said.

"Die instantly...?!", he let out and I could almost see his soul leaving his body.

"I was thinking of building up my strength until you decided where to go", Yona said, turning toward Yoon. 

"Sorry", he responded. "I'm deciding on that right now"

"It's not urgent", I said. "Take your time" 

"Well, anyway. I was just about to go survey the land around here on Jae-Ha"

"Am I a horse?", the Green Dragon cried, and I couldn't help laughing. 

"We'll carry on with the objective, but- it's a little complicated. We can't leave right away", Yoon explained.

"Well then, Instructor Hak", Yona called. "I'll be in your care tomorrow, too"

Hak nodded after her words and the Princess stood up, her wooden sword in a hand. "Understood", he said.

"Instructor Hak?!", Ki-Ja beamed, stars in his eyes. "Hak, if anything happens to the Princess!", Ki-Ja began but Hak popped a piece of food in his mouth.

"Shut up, White Snake. Eat a loquat"

"Come on, Ki-Ja. Don't judge him. Nor his state of mind", Jae-Ha started. "For the training, he has to point a blade at his beloved Yona dear", I chocked on the food currently in my mouth.

Hak's blade went swinging toward the Green Dragon before the guy could even notice it. Thankfully for him, he stopped his Quando with his dragon foot.

"Hm. Did I say something wrong?", Jae-Ha asked and I turned toward him. 

"You actually do not care about your life. You're a real suicidal", I said.

"And I would... correctly guess that you do, huh, Dear Lone", he teased and I dropped my smile as I turned my back on him. 

"What's going on? A fight?", Yona asked.

"An execution", I corrected.

"Don't worry, Princess. For now, go swing your sword over there a hundred times", Hak merely said and Yona walked to a spot and started swinging.

"You're so sluggish, you should tell her quickly", Jae-Ha said.

"Don't tell me to say it, Pervy Droopy Eyes"

"You acknowledge she's your Beloved", Jae-Ha chanted, a smile decorating his lips. And I couldn't help staring when he looked so vulnerable and yet so strong. I slammed a hand on my face as I realized what kind of thoughts were running through my mind. I turned my back to them and walked toward my friend. I didn't listen to the rest of their conversation.

"Whoa! Yona!", I heard from my seated place outside their tent. "You have scratches on your legs, too!"

"Huh?", the Princess let out.

"Don't give me that"

"My body is tingling in pain everywhere, so I can't move anymore"

"Put the medicine on your body yourself, okay?", Yoon nervously answered.

"You called?", Jae-Ha shouted as he started walking toward the tent. "Big Brother gently putting medicine on you would be satisfying"

Hak pulled him by his hair as he gritted his teeth. "She didn't call for you, Bro"

I rolled my eyes as I stood up and entered the tent, pushing the flaps away from my face. I leaned over Yoon and picked up the medicine from his hands. "Move, Pretty Boy, let me do this", to which he nervously stood up and exited the tent. I sat in his place a mere second later. Gently, I offered a hand to Yona. "Give me your leg", I said and when I looked up toward her, she was looking at me with wonder in her eyes. I put on a reassuring smile and she returned it before extending her right leg to me. 

I brought the medicine filled fingers to her wounds and she flinched to the coldness of the texture. I smiled and started applying it along her small scars when she stopped moving. Gently rubbing it on every red spot, I began humming a song my mother used to sing. After a while, when I started putting the medicine on her other leg, her voice sounded through the melody.

"It's such a beautiful song", she said and I stopped singing as well as I stopped moving. And then, I continued. "Where did you learn it?", she asked.

"Mother used to sing it to me to put me to sleep", I answered.

"I love it"

"I do, too. This is one of the many things I miss from her"

She stayed silent for a while and my voice hummed through the silence. My thoughts moved away from this moment, and I surprised myself thinking it would have been nice to have had a person like this... to take care of my wounds like I was taking care of hers. Taking care of her wasn't very much different from taking care of myself, and yet, it felt different nonetheless. 

"Do you see her?", she asked hesitantly. "I mean, have you seen... my mother"

"Queen Kashi...", I called and she nodded, sadness creeping in. "No. But I know she's up there, happy and proud of you. I can't feel her wrath, either from this Earth or from the Heavens"

She smiled at my words. And a tear escaped from her eye.

"I wish I could talk to her", I didn't answer to those words. I didn't think it necessary. I wished I could tell her that she was right beside me. I wished I could tell her what she wanted to say. When, finally, I was done applying the medicine, I gently put her leg back on the ground as I rubbed the medicine off my hands with a cloth. "Thank you", she murmured. I leaned over to her and put a hand on her cheek. She looked up at me. 

"You know I'll always be there for you, Yona", she nodded once more, her eyes filled with unfallen tears. 

It was day and night. It was horror and heaven. It was death and life. Looking at the vast stretch of sea ; a blue immaculately pretty and magnificent. Whether it was a sunset or a sunrise, I couldn't tell, but the colors spraying the sky were beautiful nonetheless. A hand touched my shoulder then. I felt immense relief at the touch. I couldn't quite place the feeling, but I felt in security. A voice reached my ears, so familiar and yet unrecognizable.

"Come. Come, Lone", I turned toward the voice. But all that there was was nothingness. It was blurry. My eyes felt foreign. The view felt confusing. I couldn't see their face, but I somehow knew who this was. The blur of green surrounding his head was answer enough. "Come home, Lone. You need to come home", I frowned. It was unrealistic enough for someone like him to say that to me.

"What...?"

"You need to come home"

"But... I don't understand". His hand gripped my shoulder harder. So much that it started to hurt. I winced and looked up at him. "You're hurting me", I said as I brought my own hand to meet his. "Jae-Ha, it hurts"

"Come home, Lone. Come home", he said, louder each time. 

"Jae-Ha!", I called, trying to take his hand away from my shoulder before he crushed bones. 

"Come home!", he started screaming, shouting, crying. "Come home! Come home, Lone!", his voice was distorted. And when the blur disappeared from his face, horror creeped into my body. It was blood and flesh. It was death itself. I opened my mouth but no sound came out. The hand on my shoulder slipped away and I fell backward, my back hitting the ground... hard. I straightened on the grass and looked around, but there was no one, no sea. It was dark. 

"Hello?! Someone?", I shouted, suddenly feeling fear entering my every bones. "Someone?!"

"Come home, Lone", I heard faintly, an echo of a whisper. It was a female voice.

"Come home... Come home", I heard again, from someone different now. 

"You need to come home!", someone screamed and I brought my hands to my ears in an attempt to make the voices go away. But even deaf, the sounds reached my very brain.

"Stop! Please, stop!", I shouted, desperate.

"Come home, Lone!"

"Come home!!"

"Where is home!?", I asked, lost.

"Close your eyes...", a whisper, a blow in my ear. I gasped and looked to my side. In the horizon, I could see a house. It was Hakkon House.

"What is going on?", I asked, more to myself.

"This is home", someone said, more clearly now. I turned toward the voice and Yona was standing a few feet away from me, draped in a royal dress. Her hair was longer.

"Home?", I asked, pointing at the house standing far away. "My home burned down long ago..."

"No. Not this home", she said as she pointed in the other direction. Even from here, Hiryuu Castle was visible. It was almost a dot in the horizon. 

"The Castle? I don't get it"

"You need to come home"

"Go home? This is not my home. And why are you dressed like this?"

"What do you mean? You are dressed finely, too", I frowned.

"What?", I let out as I looked down. My frown deepened as I took in the dress I was wearing. It was a royal wedding dress. "What is going on?", I asked as I looked up again at my friend.

"You don't remember? You killed your family and you were supposed to marry the King"

"I'm not fated to this now"

"Wrong. It is still very real"

"I chose a different path"

"Mmh... If you had the chance of changing your choice, would you still have fled the castle, knowing what awaited you, or would you have decided to marry the new king and live in security, in riches for the rest of your life?"

"I don't know...", I realized as I brought my hands to my head.

"What life would you love the most?", her taunting voice sounded again.

"I don't know!"

"You need to choose. You still have a choice. What do you think would suit you better, Lone?"

"I said ; I don't know!", I screamed, lifting up my head. But a hand gripped my throat, suffocating me. I brought my hands to my neck as I tried to pry the fingers away. Soo-Won was right before me. My eyes widened.

"Come home, Lone", he said, almost begging. I felt tears welling in my eyes and I fought so hard to not let them fall. "You need to come home"

"No...", I finally said, his hand crushing my throat. And the next thing I knew, his serene and innocent face turned to a tortured and ugly sneer as he plunged the sword in my heart.

I woke up, disoriented. I was sweating, as usual. My breathing was fast, my heart racing. When I felt calm enough to stand up, I sighed as I pushed myself to my feet. I started walking, feeling as disgusting as I always felt after waking up from a nightmare.

"You look pale, Miss", someone said and I lifted my head to see Zeno sitting atop a rock.

"I don't doubt it"

"Are your nights always so full of horrors?", he asked and I looked down on the ground, my eyelids dropping with exhaustion.

"Always... They always are"

"Surely, you should get out of this one day"

"I hope so"

Silence followed the air flowing between us. The bright moon above us was surreal. 

"Your aura is imprinted with fear and death, Miss. It is no secret to someone like me. In this serene place, where the moon shines to brighten the earth, you darken it despite yourself"

"I'm sorry, then. I wish it were differently"

"I hope you know you are loved despite everything. People respect you, I respect you. You can't go without respect in this life"

"I envy you. You seem so innocent and yet ancient"

"We both should not envy each other. The Miss wouldn't want to follow in my steps"

I looked up at him, but I didn't question his words. He looked sure enough that I couldn't bring myself to say anything. I trusted him...

"I bet we could understand each other if ever we decided to share our story", I let out despite myself. I was about to take it away, but Zeno, despite his surprise, answered.

"I have no doubt about that fact being true. But I really hope that, unlike me, you get your happy ending"

"You speak as if your life would end soon, yet you seem so young. Don't you think you still have a chance at happiness?"

"I don't think so, Miss, but thank you. I've been waiting for too long for a happy ending ; and it's never going to happen"

"I'm sorry"

"You don't have to be sorry"

"Thank you for this conversation, Zeno", I said after a while.

"You're welcome, Miss. I hope you spend the rest of the night without interruption", he said and it made me smile.

"Thank you. It usually is what happens", and I turned on my heels, leaving him alone in the dark of the night.

Chapter Text

"I know this is sudden, but... I will announce our next destination", Yoon suddenly said as I lifted my head in his direction, cheeks full with the breakfast he had just prepared. "I want to go to the Kai Empire for a little while", I'm pretty sure my eyebrows lifted without my brain even thinking they would. I had no more control over the traits of my face. It was silent for a few seconds.

"We're going to the Kai Empire?", Yona asked.

"Yeah", Yoon nonchalantly answered, as if knowing we would have to either say yes or just decline and not go with him. He seemed pretty decided and anything we said would go over his head. And I was more than a little in the same boat as him. Because why not? What else exactly could we do?

"Are you serious, Yoon?! That's an enemy Empire!", Yona exclaimed, unbelievably shocked.

"It's not like you! You're usually very cautious. Why Kai?", Ki-Ja shouted beside Yona.

"I am cautious, but there is something in the Kai Empire that piqued my interest. This isn't just a passing interest. It's Land North of the Fire Tribe, so it is colder. I'm curious as to how the citizens of the Kai Empire are surviving. Just maybe, there might be a plant that can be cultivated even in the Land of Fire", from the corner of my eye, I could see Jae-Ha lifting the book over his eyes to peek down at us. Even up in a tree, my eyes still found a way to look at him discreetly. Then, I turned my attention fully toward Yoon.

"Cautious or no, I say why not?", I said, then let down the carefree expression I had on my face. "With the current King sitting on the throne, there's bound to be a war sooner or later, whether we want it or not. Let's form a semblance of alliance so we can get what we need... under cover. I feel like this is a good idea", I couldn't even say his name. I found it pathetic, but the more I avoided thinking about him, the better I actually felt. 

"Isn't it dangerous for the Princess, though?", Ki-Ja asked, visibly worried, but also protective. I hated when they all took it upon themselves to protect her.

"Yeah. That's why I was hesitating", Yoon said. "We already stand out as is"

"It's not Yona's red hair that's gonna betray her. We've been walking around for weeks ; you're not gonna tell me we've almost been discovered because of that. If there is a problem, it's Ki-Ja's hand, Shin-Ha's mask and a jumping green dot in the sky. As for the rest of us, we look a lot less suspicious", I exclaimed. 

"Says the one with a big ass scar on her face", Jae-Ha teased from up in his tree, a flirtatious smile on his face.

"How's that giving you a point, Droopy-eyed Pervert?", I called, but before Jae-Ha could answer, Yoon stepped in.

"Well, anyway. That's why I thought best for Yona and the Thunder Beast to stay at Ik-Soo's place", Yoon added. "Now if only Jae-Ha, Lone and either Shin-Ha or Ki-Ja came..."

"I don't expect you saying yes if I chose for you, child", I said, looking straight into Yoon's eyes. He whitened. The next thing I knew, Yona was placing herself in front of me, so she could get Yoon's attention.

"Don't tell me you're going for the sake of Kouka right? I'm going if you've already decided Yoon"

"That's what I thought you'd say", he whispered and my lips slowly pulled on either end. "Well then, let's go to the Kai Empire"

We started walking shortly after that. Baggage on and ready to head into an unknown territory, we only stopped when we arrived at a hanging bridge.

"After we cross this bridge, Kai Empire is over that mountain", Yoon explained, pointing to a mountain just before us. "This suspension bridge is very old though..."

"I found it when I was jumping around this area", Jae-Ha said and I frowned, grimacing.

"Unnecessary information, Greeny", I commented, lifting a hand into his face when he tried to counter me. Instead, I put a foot on the bridge and started walking, only because I wanted to avoid him. But unluckily for me, he followed.

"'Greeny'? What's that name, now?"

"I'd say it's a step-up from 'Pervert'"

"Anything is a step-up from 'Pervert' when you know you aren't one"

"Good for you, then. Then, how about you feel satisfied with what I call you? You should feel lucky I'm even giving you nicknames"

"Oh, so I have a special place in your heart", he teased and I turned my head, staring at him with contempt.

"The planks are rotting", Ki-Ja said as if we already didn't know this. "It looks like it's about to fall apart"

"If it's Lone, Yona or Yoon...", Jae-Ha started, but a crunch from behind me sounded, telling me someone had broken through a plank. I turned as screams reached my ears. Ki-Ja had fallen. Jae-Ha had saved him in time, though. "If it's Lone, Yona or Yoon, I would save them even if they fell, the rest of you guys will have to deal with yourselves... is what I was going to say. Of course it's like this"

I scoffed, bringing a fist to my mouth to hide a small laugh.

"Are you all right, Ki-Ja?!", Yona screamed.

"Yes...", Ki-Ja's voice shook as he was lifted up on the bridge. "My life flashed before my eyes like a merry-go-round... it was quite an enlightening experience. My life was full of old ladies"

"Cool. Nice to know your type of women, White Dragon", I said and I quickly earned a completely flushed Ki-Ja.

"How dare you, Woman! This is unethical!"

"This is completely the type of thing you would say", I whispered under my breath, finally reaching the other end.

"What was that?!", he shouted, ready to strangle anyone who pissed him off. He really made me think of a damn prince to whom we owed everything. 

"I had a feeling something like this was going to happen, so I brought a large plank. I'll pass it up front so put it in the gaps"

"Good going, Yoon!", Yona beamed.

"Who the hell thinks about that kind of thing?", I let out, too far for anyone else to hear me.

"Yoon, isn't there a different path we can use?", Ki-Ja asked, shaking.

"There is but... It's the border which is all flat lands. We would stand out way too much. The patrol guards at the border are Fire Tribe soldiers and Kai Empire soldiers. Actually, right now, there aren't that many"

"Huh?", Hak let out.

"I went with Jae-Ha to scout out the area, but there weren't that many patrol guards"

"That's kind of unsettling", Hak commented, keeping a hand on Yona's head.

"Yes, it is", Yoon agreed. "I thought it was normal that there would be a ton of armed soldiers so it was discomforting. However, there's a high chance that there would be soldiers there. That's why I picked this route instead"

"Isn't there a chance we'll lose our lives here, though?"

"The Kai Empire is a power known for its vast territory and their large military force, but I don't know anything specific", I heard more clearly from Yona as the group finally reached the end of the bridge where I was waiting, arms crossed over my chest.

"There are a lot of things I won't know until we get there. For now, I'll talk about what I know while we travel", Yoon explained.

We stopped by a river, where a waterfall landed in it. Ki-Ja went to take water and Shin-Ha started cutting the vegetables. I helped Yoon mix the ingredients, until it was time for us to eat. He filled each bowl equally and offered one to each of us. When we were all seated in front of the fire, eating our food, Yoon began.

"Unlike before, the Kai Empire's current force is a shadow of its former self. Once, the Kai Empire had a huge territory that they were proud of, but now the south and the north have separated. Because of that, the northern part of northern Kai has been continuously attacked by nomads. The Empire's army's hands are full from protecting a few areas. Instead, in various places in northern Kai, many powerful families have gained power and are basically controlling the land. You can't really call it an Empire right now", I raised my head from my bowl after letting his information sink it.

"How about the south?", I then asked, my cheeks full of food.

"The south has nobles, bureaucrats and merchants that moved over. Compared to the north, the climate is stable and the land is fertile", Yoon added. "In the south, the King's cousin is currently sitting on a temporary throne apparently"

My attention turned toward Zeno, who suddenly spoke up, chicken in his mouth. "The Royal Family lost power so the surrounding powerful families gained power. It's similar to King Il and the Tribes in this country", I squinted, emotion leaving my eyes. Jae-Ha and Ki-Ja came over to the boy and put a hand over his mouth, hurrying him to stop talking. Apparently, Hak, too, seemed to want to rip someone's head off. I turned my eyes back on my meal.

"Also, the place we are heading to right now is the territory of Sen Province", Yoon said. "Here, the nomads' attacks won't reach and it's far away from the centers of power, so the noble Li Hazara is steadily gaining power. He controls this area"

"Is there any danger?", Ki-Ja asked, his hand still over Zeno's mouth.

"I wanted to first go to a small rural area", Yoon announced. "I think it'll be all right if we stay quiet. If we stay quiet. If we stay quiet"

"He said it three times", Ki-Ja realized aloud. And each time he said it, he put intention in his words, is what I wanted to say.

"It's because it's important", Jae-Ha explained, and I could have made a sarcastic comment about how "smart" he was, but I just decided to keep my mouth shut.

When dinner was over, I watched as they pulled out a big tent and started stretching it. I guessed rapidly that they were all gonna sleep in that cramped space, so I automatically sat down and leaned against a tree, closing my eyes. Until someone called out my name. 

"Yo-, Lone. You aren't helping us?", Yoon asked, visibly confused, even maybe a little irritated. 

"I'm not sleeping with you guys", I simply answered. "I'm fine with sleeping out here"

"Oh. But you could sleep with Yona in the smaller tent", he proposed but I had already decided to sleep outside, for small and cramped unbreathable spaces were not my thing.

"No thank you, I'm fine"

"Are you sure? It's rainy and dangerous in the mountains"

"Nothing I can't handle"

I kept an eye on him as he walked back toward the others and they finished setting it up. "Ki-Ja, pull that side"

"Yes"

"Finally", Yoon said, wiping his forehead. "The tent is finished"

It was poorly executed but still was something useful up in these mountains. But I didn't regret declining his offer. I would never be able to breathe correctly with so many men by my side in a cramped space like the small cabin. My nights would be worse than they already are.

"Amazing!", Yona beamed. "When did you make it?"

"In the mountains, you need this because it's cold and rainy", he explained, proud.

"Yay! We were always in the tent, so I always wished that there was enough room for everyone!", Yona shouted.

"We have a lot of members. I finally got my hands on a large piece of cloth so Ki-Ja can rest with no worries", he said, which brought Ki-Ja to grab his hands, stars in his eyes.

"I'm so grateful, Yoon...! You're a genius!"

"Then, let's rest, Yoon", Yona said.

"Ah, I'll sleep in this tent today. Yona, you sleep with the Thunder Beast in that tent", Yona went red after those words and I couldn't help but smirk.

"EH? W-why?"

"Since there's a chance a bear might appear, if it's just you and me, we won't be able to fight against it"

"If- if it's because of that, then Ki-Ja should be fine!", Yona exclaimed and I lifted an eyebrow.

"I- I'll be with the Princess?!", Ki-Ja screamed, about to faint. "I- I- I cannot do some- something so rude..."

"Yona, let Ki-Ja sleep peacefully", Yoon said, slightly irritated.

"Then, I will", Jae-Ha added, his gaze turning toward me, as if anticipating a specific reaction from me. 

"Zeno, too! Zeno, too!"

"Yellow, you have no powers so it's dangerous! With Green, it'll be dangerous in another way!", Yoon shouted, ready to rip heads.

"Then, Shin-Ha..."

"Will there be... something wrong with me?", Hak asked, lifting an eyebrow. Yona went livid.

"What's wrong, Yona? Before, you were saying that you wanted to be with Hak. Did you have a fight with him?", Jae-Ha asked.

"No... we didn't... We didn't but Hak does weird things", I frowned, confused. I looked toward my bestfriend, but there wasn't any hint.

"Huuh... What do you mean by weird things?", Jae-Ha worriedly asked.

"It's nothing", she whispered lightly, blushing, disappearing toward the tent. 

As for myself, as things became quiet, I lifted my head up into the sky, gazing at the little dots of light. The half of the moon shone despite missing pieces. I brought my hands to my arms as a wind passed by. Yoon was right ; it was cold. And then, suddenly, someone threw a blanket in my direction. I looked down and realized that Jae-Ha was standing not far away. I could feel my cheeks slightly blushing and I thanked the night that he couldn't see it. I looked away, crossing my arms on my chest.

"What do you expect me to say ; thank you?", I let out.

"If you don't want to say it ; maybe you could tell me why you stubbornly decided to stay out of the tent", I looked back toward him and he was staring so seriously at me that I lost my amusement.

"Well then, I suppose a 'thank you' isn't so bad. So thank you for the blanket"

"Okay. But I still want to know why you don't want to sleep in the tents, even when you could sleep with Yona"

"It's none of your business", I answered, 'stubbornly' refusing to tell him my reasons.

He stayed silent for a little while, and I hoped he would just go back to the tent with the others, but he walked toward me instead. I stared him up and down as he sat beside me, taking the blanket and putting it over himself, too. "What are you doing?", I alarmingly asked, trying to move away.

"You won't answer, so I'm gonna keep you company"

"Does this mean I have to answer your question for you to leave me alone?"

He shrugged. "Maybe"

"Go away!", I shouted, pushing him on the arm, trying to get him to move, but he wouldn't budge.

"No. I'm staying"

"God, I hate you, you know that?"

"Well, it's a step-up from 'I want to kill you'"

"Just shush!", I ordered and he did shut his mouth, so I sighed, closing my eyes. The heat coming off his body was enough to warm mine. I felt safer, despite not wanting to admit it. And eventually, I felt my head falling on his shoulder, and I didn't really care since I was too asleep to even think about caring.

Chapter Text

"It's visible! The Kai Empire", I heard Yona shout in awe. A small smile on my face, I watched as she stared ahead. "There's a small village", she realized.

"Yona...", the Blue Dragon let out. "Someone has collapsed", he said and I looked up, as if I could possibly see where this person had lost consciousness.

"What! That's horrible", Yona exclaimed as she started running and we followed. Hak arrived there first, kneeling on the ground to make sure the woman was fine. He took her in his arms.

"Hey. Hey, you. Are you okay?"

"Nnnn...", the woman sounded out. "Eh! Oh no!", she loudly let out, seemingly fine now. Her hands were covering her mouth. "Who are you?! You're so nice!"

The next second, the next thing I knew she was fangirling over Hak. I rolled my eyes, slamming the palm of my hand over my face. 

"Hak", Yona called. "Is she okay?"

"Are you feeling unwell?", Ki-Ja asked.

"Eat a loquat, missy", Zeno said, handing her the fruit.

"Young Lady, let me pick you up and carry you", Jae-Ha chanted with his usual flirty voice. But I didn't want to hear more, and the worst my ears could go through right now, would be if he spoke another word to that woman, so I approached him and pulled on his clothes, making him back up effortlessly.

"Back up, Jae-Ha. You're gonna give me a headache if you continue"

"What now? Are you jealous, Lone?", my cheeks flamed at his words but I kept my anger raised at him.

"Contrary to the others, you're way too aware of your flirting ways to attract a woman! This woman is definetely not the type of woman you should get entwined with", I explained, sparing an annoyed look toward the woman. 

"Now, you're acting like my mother. Chose a side, love"

"Whether you want it or not, we're travel companions, so bear with me, and shut the hell up!"

"Oh, but I would want to be way more than just travel companions", I could feel my cheeks heating the more he spoke and he kept approaching me the more he talked.

"Okay, Green head!", I shouted. "Get over yourself!"

"Or what, love?"

"You know what"

"Say, entertainers. Why not come to my village? Today is a special day", the woman said and we turned our attention toward her at the same time.

"Special?", Ki-Ja asked.

"We are holding the Fire Festival tonight", she beamed.

And I couldn't be more curious. We arrived right on time for a festival taking place in the Kai Empire. 

"Aro! Who are they?", a woman excitedly asked, but I could feel my spine straightening at the mention of this name. It reminded me of my late brother, to whom I hadn't spoken to for a long while. I wondered about him for a few more seconds before the squealing disrupted my thinking.

"Such good-looking men!"

"Right? They say they're traveling entertainers! This man held me when I collapsed!"

"Kya-! No fair, what's with that!"

"Where are you from?", a woman asked Jae-Ha and I looked up at him, glaring.

"It's a secret", he answered, not missing a beat of the fun. I hit him in the ribs with an elbow.

"I've never seen someone with skin this beautiful!", I heard another speaking to Ki-Ja.

"Come on! Show us your face!", another woman beamed, multiple others trying to pry Shin-Ha's mask away from his face.

"So cute!"

"You're the cute one, miss!", Zeno responded as I made my way to my two other friends, left out of the group.

"The people of this land are... pretty lively", Yoon commented.

"Yes, they are...", Yona agreed.

"They are annoying and unbearable is what they are", I added, joining them.

I stared as Yoon started walking away. He was enjoying the view, that was for sure. I rolled my eyes as I brought my attention back to the group of women encircling the many men. I lifted my hands and brought them around my mouth so that my voice would echo loud enough to make their squealing disappear into the wind. 

"Okay, women! These men are ours for the taking, so I would like for you to stop staring at them as if they're a show! Leave them alone!", the women all stopped speaking as they turned around toward us. I could feel Yona wanting to disappear.

"Who is she?"

"She looks so confident and hot!", a squeal.

"Right?! Doesn't she look badass with that scar?!"

"Oh, to be like them!"

"Imagine walking around with a sexy crowd of men like them!"

My lips pursed and my discouragement washed my confidence away. Here I tried to make their squealing vanish and yet it increased rather fast and it got worse in a matter of seconds. But eventually, we got to be alone among each other.

"Yeah. I wondered what kind of village this would be. Isn't the Kai Empire the best?", Jae-Ha beamed.

"Speak for yourself, Greenie", I let out.

"Oh, come on ; you got praised like a goddess, you should be as happy as I am", he spoke.

"I'm not as perverted and attention-seeking as you are, dumb face"

"You're the only one who is enjoying this, Jae-Ha", Ki-Ja weakly said, looking exhausted.

"You're so naive. The girls are close and friendly, so try to enjoy it"

"Well... when I was in my village, granny brought heaps of marriage partners for me", Ki-Ja started explaining, whitening the more he spoke. "Before long, they would all fight over me, which would end in bloodshed"

My eyes widened and my lips pursed in shock.

"Sometimes, strong ones would appear naked in my chambers and charge at me. My feelings toward pro-active girls ever since then has been..."

"I suddenly have an interest in the village of Hakuryuu", Jae-Ha said and I glared at him with disgust. I watched as he walked over to Yona, who was sitting on the ground, her head resting in her palms.

"What's wrong, Yona? You seem quiet", arms crossed over my chest, I approached her as well.

"Hak is... more popular than I thought...", I looked as my eyes roamed over the scene before us.

"Hak being popular, isn't so surprising", Jae-Ha said.

"Really?", Yona wondered aloud.

"Even from my perspective, I think Hak looks good. If I were a woman, I would charge at him"

"Stop", Ki-Ja mumbled as I spared him a look.

"Now that you mention it, I feel like when we were at the Castle, the ladies of the court were excited about him"

"Are you envious?", I raised my eyebrows.

"What?"

"I mean, are you jealous?", he asked again and I frowned.

"No", Yona answered and I bit the inside of my cheek, confused.

"Yona!", Yoon screamed as he rushed in our direction. He was dressed in a funny way.

"Yoon, you look so cute! What's the deal with that outfit?"

"It's awful, sorry to say! I need help! I found a good crop in this village called the Iza Seed"

"As expected from you, Yoon ; you work fast!", Yona beamed.

"An old man who manages the Iza Seed won't give it away, but... he told me he would let us eat Iza cooking if I wore this and became a dancer at tonight's festival"

"A dancer! That sounds great!", Yona chanted, excited. "I want to see you, too"

"I don't know how to dance!", Yoon exclaimed, embarassed. "Though I don't really mind wearing a wedding dress, having an evening drink and indulging him... But I want to try the Iza cooking! So if it's useful, I'll visit the villages of Sen Province one by one! Yona! If I recall, dancing and the harp are your forte, right?"

"Hm?", Yona sounded out, suddenly mute. "I never said they were my strong point. Just that I can do them a little"

"You can, right?!", Yoon asked again, looking pressed.

"But that old man wants to see you dance, right? There's no point if it's not your cute appea-"

"You're the cute one, Yona!", he shouted, but became red when he realized the words he had spoken. "Uh... I mean.. no... that's not what I mean... Anyway, please! Dance, Yona!"

"She can dance alright!", I chimed in, earning a look from my bestfriend. 

"Nice! Can you dance, too, Lone?", he suddenly asked and I lifted an eyebrow.

"I beg your pardon?", I let out, knowing perfectly what he wanted me to do, but Yona went first.

"You wouldn't actually imagine how good of a dancer Lone is! Each time we had lessons as kids, she would always overshine me!"

"We made a perfect duo, Yona ; there was nobody overshining anybody", I said, crossing my arms.

"So you can dance?", Jae-Ha let out and I looked toward him with a lifted eyebrow.

"My talents do not resume to swordsmanship, Greenie. I will remind you that I was once a Lady, too"

"You're going to dance, Princess?", Hak cut in, a smile pulling on the corner of his lips. "Are you sure you wouldn't rather stop? That waddling chick dance-", he started, which almost earned him a big hit.

"I'll do it", she firmly answered. 

"Thank you, Yona!", Yoon beamed, stars in his eyes. "I'll learn how to dance by next time for sure! And you, Lone? Will you participate? If you want, we can put makeup on your face again to hide the scar! Just please, help!"

"Even if I wanted to, I would never allow makeup in the same room as me. I refuse to dance. Don't you already have Yona to help?", I shrugged, even though a part of me wanted to dance once again. 

"Please! You just said Yona and you made a wonderful duo. Please, join her!"

"Please, please, please, Lone. It would mean a lot to me", Yona chimed in.

"Moreover...", I heard a voice and I could feel my nerves relax as I realized Hak was speaking. "you dance so incredibly together that you would barely realize that you're dancing for a public. It would be fun for you two to dance together once again, don't you think? Also, it would be captivating. Make their jaws drop"

I had to restrain a smile. If he were to speak so charmingly of me... of us, despite our fight, it was because he really wanted to see us dance. And this might have meant the snap I was waiting for. I took a deep breath and rolled my eyes, my arms still crossed over my chest. I looked away, ignoring their faces, their reactions when I said ; 

"Fine. I'll do it"

Chapter Text

I could hear the laughter and the enjoyment from my place hidden in the tent. I could hear Jae-Ha playing the flute and the fire crackling. I had to resist the urge to part a flap of the tent to spare a look to all that gone on. The dances, the music, the ale being passed. I wanted to be part of that fun, to drown in its exquisite feeling and forget about everything all over again, because even when I didn't want to admit it, that night back in Awa after I had learned that I was actually the one to have killed my whole family, was not enough. Not when I was suffering day and night, and the spots of daylight were not enough to keep them away. They were becoming less and less important, less dangerous, less significant the more time passed, but I could not forget, when I looked in their eyes, the pain and the fear they brought me as a child.

And after a while, when the echoes of their voices were the only thing reaching my ears, my head shot up as I looked at them all, confused.

"And what about you Lone?"

"Pardon?", I let out, previously lost in my thoughts.

"We need to check for hair ornaments!"

"My head is heavy", Yona said and I greatly agreed with her. If I could just tear that damn thing off my head ; I probably looked like a fool anyway.

"What are you talking about? Since you're a dancer, it has to be flashy!", one of them said and I wished the hat-looking thing was the only thing I wanted to rip into shreds. They acted like our pain was completely normal and we had nothing to fuss about. Yeah, right.

"That's right! Especially since two dancers have come all the way to Senri Village!"

"So why is your hair so short?", one of the girls asked Yona. "It's a shame because your hair is so beautiful! You should grow it out!", I couldn't help but smile. It was true, what the girl was saying. Yona had grown up hating her hair, yet it held so much more. 

"If you have short hair like a boy, you won't be able to attract men", says the woman whose village has been ridden thin of every young man. But of course, I couldn't say that ; they still fancied me for my 'badass' scar.

"But doesn't this child have a lot of good men surrounding her?", another added. Yona became red, visibly wanting to skip that part of the conversation.

"Oh, my. That's true"

"Hey, is there anyone you're dating in that group?", she asked, gripping her shoulders. Her intentions were clear. Maybe not to Yona, but it made my eyebrows lower. 

"No", Yona simply answered.

"And you, Lone?"

"Fortunately for me, no", I offered with a smile.

"Then, do they have girlfriends?"

"I don't think they do, but...", Yona started but got interrupted when the women started jumping in excitement.

"Did you hear that? She said all of them don't have girlfriends!", a woman said, blushing to the ears.

"Looks like the God of Love has come to visit the Fire Festival!", another woman exclaimed.

"I love the white-haired man!", one started calling. "Even though he's a man, he's so beautiful and elegant", and so annoying.

"I like the green-haired man!", another said and I felt myself blushing. I couldn't shake that feeling of jealousy crippling inside of me. I hated it, but for some reason, I didn't feel the need to brush it off, because it disappeared when I surprised myself thinking about that pervert that way. "He's kind, good at talking and has such a sexy voice!"

"Have you seen the eyes of the man with the mask?! It's so beautiful, it sucks you in!"

"I want to see it!"

"Zeno and Yoon are total cuties!"

"It's Hak, hands down for me!", another woman said and Yona stopped giggling.

"I know what you mean! He's so cool"

"I figured Aro would say that so I didn't dare bring it up"

"Ufufu! Don't go near him"

"Tonight's a battle. If it's Hak's child, I don't mind bearing them!", Yona's eyes almost bulged out of her skull and I slammed my palm to my face. If ever Hak could hear the unsanity these girls were talking about.

"No way, Aro! You're planning to jump him?!", a woman shouted and I just grinned. She won't succeed. This man has eyes for only one person and it's not you, woman.

"Hey, you're frightening the little dancer!"

"My, my, but you must understand the feeling of being embraced by the person you love, right? You at least have someone you love, right?"

I lost my smile after those words. His face came to mind, but it was destroyed a second later. I wondered what would have happened if ever I hadn't stopped loving him.

"The person... I love..."

"Oh, but Lone's thinking about someone!", I raised my head, bringing my hands before me in defense. 

"Yeah, but he was someone I loved...", silence fell upon us. Then, she clapped her hands.

"Let's stop this talk. Evacuate! Evacuate!", she screamed, making me jump. She ran over to me and squeezed me tight. "I'm sorry! It must have been a tough love! We got too excited, because such good men have visited our village! Since such fine company rarely comes here! All the men here are so rough!"

"Is that so?", Yona asked.

"The men who occasionally come to our village are like soldiers. They're violent and scary. Oh? Is this yours?", she picked up a box and opened it. It was Yona's hairpin. "Wow...! This is gold! What a beautiful hairpin! You're not going to wear it? It suits the color of your hair perfectly"

"I won't wear it", Yona simply said. "I won't wear that hairpin ever again"

Her face became blank, her eyes empty. Until she came back to reality.

"Hey, do you have a sword?", Yona suddenly asked, making me frown.

"A sword? There's only an old and rusty one", she said, offering Yona the said sword. "It was used in the last war"

She placed the blade before her face, hiding her mouth from where I was standing. She looked to me then.

"Lone, match with me", I got what she wanted to say. She wanted us to dance with swords. And mine perfectly fitted the vibe, looking similar to the one she was holding. I smiled.

The fire was crackling. The many gazes weren't yet on us. The voices still echoed through the night. I closed my eyes, took a deep breath, prepared myself for this dance. Until the music changed. I felt Jae-Ha's eyes on me, drifting down and up every second. I could feel him gaze after whatever beauty loomed over us. Because yes, in this moment, I found myself the prettiest I've ever looked. And Yona was better than me. We dropped to the ground at the same time, gasps reaching our ears in anticipation. 

The giggling of the jewels dangling from our dress, our necks, our wrists and ankles. I could see why the hat was a most desired piece of our dance. It flowed with each of our movements. It was utterly beautiful. It felt surreal to be here. The music stopped, but the silence was our rythm. I could see their jaws dropping beneath my closed eyelids. I could feel their eyes brighten with stars and getting bigger with surprise.

I knew our mirrorred dance moves were surprising and executed with perfection even beyond what we hoped it looked like. 

Their eyes were pinned on them. Either it was Hak on Yona or Jae-Ha on Lone, both had the same intentions. They wanted to keep them for themselves. Any other view, any other voice was so foreign to them that they weren't even curious to hear about it. It was as if their beauty shoved down any other possibility. Even for the green-haired gentleman whose manners and life circled around women and treating them with respect and love. Hak would have turned down any woman who would have tried to seduce him, for his heart was already spoken for. But Jae-Ha, for whom his heart had always been guarded, it was an unthinkable action to even think of turning down a fine woman, whatever were her intentions. It was impossible for him to only look at one, when so many walked this earth with such beauty. He didn't budge, didn't flinch when a petite and short woman tugged on his sleeve. He was in another world, his mind was not his own. 

The giggling of the jewels suddenly stopped as they both sat there, on the ground, their dance finished. But Jae-Ha's gaze didn't turn away. He kept staring at her with realization, with sorrow and impossibilities. But he knew one thing ; it was impossible for him to tear his eyes away from her. 

When we stopped moving, the cheers and cries cut through the silence. It was a loud rumbling through the night. Yona looked toward me, smiling as I copied her. Tears went down her cheeks, but she was proud and happy and cheerful. 

We parted ways after that. I didn't know where she went, but I hid in the tent, keeping the heavy costume on my body, exhausted. The rustling of the tent was practically silent, and so when I turned around, I merely jumped at the sight of the dragon standing before me. I kept a blank expression and he only stared. He kept staring with eyes I couldn't recognize. I wondered if he were actually acting like himself. 

"I brought you some Iza soup. Apparently, it's a speciality in this village. Yoon earned it thanks to you... and Yona. Thanks to your dance"

I offered him an empty smile as I nodded. "I'm glad Yoon got what he wanted"

He approached me and handed me the bowl. "Here"

"I'm not hungry, but thank you"

"You're lying", he said, taking a seat next to me, putting the bowl down on the ground. I jumped as he did, his proximity a surprise I wasn't waiting for. I didn't answer, didn't say anything. "You know, you were wonderful tonight. Your dance... it was immensily magnificent"

"Such pretty words"

"I like the green-haired man! He's kind, good at talking and has such a sexy voice!", it was an echo through my head. And even now, I wanted to rip off that girl's head. I knew all of that, knew it first, directly when I met him. I knew all of that, had hated it, and still did, yet why did I feel that way?

"Well anyway, all the girls keep fussing over me. I can't forget Shin-Ha's and Ki-Ja's expressions after that many girls were practically kneeling at their feet", some hint in his voice told me he might have been trying to trigger some sort of feeling in me. If ever that was his purpose, my face stayed neutral. I had no energy left feeling like whatever right now. 

"I bet you feel fulfilled", I let out, sadness coating my tongue, despite my very desire to not let it show.

He leaned over so I could see his face. “Not when the woman from whom I want attention is not even batting her eyelashes in my direction”, I frowned, then when his words got to my brain, when I processed them, I could feel the heat spreading over my face. I looked away. Of course I would not look his way when he kept teasing me in a humiliating way. I didn't want to hear it from him, whatever he had to say. 

"Please, leave me alone. I don't feel really good right now. I need to breathe"

"You know, breathing the fresh air of the outside world would be far more better than the stiff air of this tent"

I didn't answer and I ignored him when he tried to lean in more, his side glued to mine. I hated however I felt when I was near him, but he finally stood up and walked away. I knew he turned back to me before leaving the tent. Because when he pushed away the flap of the tent followed a silence of a few seconds before the rustling when it fell to the ground. And despite everything, despite how I felt in his presence, despite what I said, I still felt some sort of emptiness when I was left alone. I took the crown-looking thing from my head and threw it to the ground in an angry toss. 

Chapter Text

I woke up to chatter outside the tent. Unlike the previous days, I've been sharing the smaller tent with Yona, due to the cold weather. My eyelids part slightly, enough to realize the princess's absence near me. I propped myself on my elbows and forced myself to stay awake. After my usual midnight stroll after sweats of horror, I had some difficulty going back to sleep. Not a surprise, if you asked me, but in any case, I finally got up on my feet, and walked out of the tent.

The very first view presenting itself to me was the princess standing not too far from the edge of the cliff, and the other guys following after her. I made my way to them, standing beside my bestfriend as I looked down at the people below us.

"Princess!", Ki-Ja called. "If you're spying, I can.."

"It's fine", Yona said, cutting him off. "I'll only look at them from a distance. I have to confirm they're the Sen Province's soldiers"

"Yona, that...", Shin-Ha started, pointing in the direction I couldn't see. I squinted, and slowly started to realize who really stood below us. 

"Wait a minute", Jae-Ha let out. "Those guys are.."

"They're Fire Tribe soldiers", I cut him off, completely shocked. "What the hell are they doing here?"

"Yona-!", a voice called, shouting in our direction. It was Yoon coming back from wherever he had disappeared to.

"Yoon...! Listen, there's trouble!", Yona shouted back and I rolled my eyes as I walked to them.

"Listen, listen! I got the Iza Seeds!"

"What?! Really?! That's awesome!", Yona exclaimed as I neared them.

"Right? It's amazing, right? That old man is an incredibly great man! It seems the villagers liked your dance, too!"

"Really! Thank goodness-", I clamped my hand over her mouth before she even had time to finish. Jae-Ha was silencing Yoon.

"I really appreciate all that you're saying, darlings, but we really got to lower our voices", I whispered, relieving Yona of my hand.

"What is it?", Yoon asked as Jae-Ha released him as well.

"That", Jae-Ha answered, turning his attention toward the soldiers assembling not far away.

"Fire Tribe soldiers..!", Yoon exclaimed. "Why are they in the Kai Empire?!"

"What's more, it looks like they wander around like this a lot", Yona explained. "I thought for sure the Kai Empire's soldiers were coming"

"Before, I heard a rumor that the head of the Fire Tribe was buying weapons from other countries", Hak said.

"But how can our country's soldiers stride into another so confidently?", Ki-Ja asked. 

"What are we going to do?", Jae-Ha wondered.

"It's unsettling that the border's defense is loose", Yoon thought aloud. "Shall we watch them for a little longer?"

It wasn't long, though, before we separated into two groups to investigate. I ended up with Hak, Ki-Ja and Zeno. We were walking around in a village, looking like normal peasants. But the village was empty of emotions ; nobody looked inclined to tell us anything, friendly or not friendly. They all looked like their heart was ruined to the core. And as I turned around in an alley, a dark shadow stood in the middle, standing rather suspiciously. 

"Hey, you! Stop there!", but as I took a step in their direction, the presence started running and the Green Dragon landed right before me, stopping me in my tracks. I jumped back, my heart racing with fear. "Gods above! Don't ever do that again, green head"

But he was smiling ridiculously. I looked over his shoulder, only to notice the man turning a corner. "Great, you made me lose my target"

"I don't care. We are going back to Kouka. Yona's orders", I rolled my eyes and turned on my heel. 

"Yes, sir!"

The smoke was almost suffocating. I couldn't understand how someone could possibly breathe in a place like this. But I guess, most of the people were drinking and smoking. Our ways to stay alive definitely differed a lot. I turned my head toward the entry, as Zeno and Yoon made their way in. 

"Hey! Whadya want, kid?"

"You lost? Come over here. We'll play with you", the last one said as I strode over to them, fighting the urge to rip them to shreds. 

I put an arm over his, silently demanding them to release the boys. I smiled, though my face was hidden by the hood of my cloak. I could see his eyes roaming over me. "They're with me", I let out, then dropped the smile. "Let them go"

I don't know what exactly made them release my friends, but I didn't lift a finger in protest. I urged the boys to join the rest of the group and when I turned around, Ki-Ja and Jae-Ha were standing behind me, ready to make bones crack. I joined the others as we sat around a table. If that's what they called lying low.

"Who are those guys...?", someone asked, his voice trembling, a whisper in the wind.

"Don't mess with those guys. They showed up all of a sudden yesterday in the Saika Slums. I don't why but they've been asking around about information on the Saika soldiers. They're frightfully strong. Yet, the woman is a hidden jewel. They don't let her strike, but if she did, she would make you shiver in fear. Also, there was someone who tried to touch that girl in the middle. The guy with the bandages over his eyes almost cut off his arm"

"Welcome back, Yoon", Yona said. "How was it?"

"The only thing I found out was that even with our faces covered, we still stand out"

"What were you expecting? It makes us mysterious. People fear it, but it makes them more curious", I said.

"But I never thought we'd come back to Capital Saika. Not to mention a back alley with scary people going in and out"

"It's easier to hide in places like these", Hak explained. "There are also a few information brokers as well. You can quickly find what you need to know"

"You know a lot, Thunder Beast", Yoon said. "Do you come to places like these, often?"

"When I was at Kuuto, there was a guy that often went into back alleys", I knew who he was talking about and I didn't need to hear him say his name. Indeed, I'd rather he kept his mouth shut about everything that was him. 

"How are the Saika troops doing?", Yona asked.

"It seems like nothing has changed", Yoon answered. "Yona, this area seems too dangerous. It would be best if we left as soon as possible"

"Yeah... you're right... But... there's something bothering me. The soldiers we saw in the Kai Empire and Sen Province's Li Hazara. Something is making me feel uneasy"

And she was right. Because, when a loud thud followed a few minutes later as the door opened and the guy fell to the ground in a hurry, we turned toward them, merely spectators. 

"You're so loud, what is it?!"

"Did you drink too much booze?"

"It's... It- it- it's a disaster!", he shouted, and I already knew that whatever he had to say would be shocking. "Ka- Kai Empire... All of Kai Empire's troops have... broken through the border! They've come to invade Kouka!", my eyes widened and my view blurred. What the hell is that supposed to mean?

"What are you saying..."

"It's information from the northern village, Hil. There's no mistake. The powerful family from Sen Province, Li Hazara is leading a large army. He's advancing towards Saika!"

And as the day went on, the information kept spilling in the room. 

"Hey! Apparently, the Rokka Fort have been breached!"

"Are you serious?!"

"Even the Saika citizens have realized it. The rumors have been spreading. A little while ago, General Soo-Jin lead an army toward Kah-Sho Fort"

"The situation is moving toward an unthinkable direction", Ki-Ja said.

"I wonder if the surrounding rural areas will be alright", Yoon wondered.

"The Sen Province army is pretty strong!"

"The strong Rokka Fort fell in such a short period of time!"

"At this rate, isn't Saika in danger?"

Is it only Saika, though? What does Soo-Jin plan to do? How exactly are we gonna win this battle? Because, somehow, all of this situation is suspicious. So suspicious that it doesn't make sense. Yet, in a way no one in this room can understand, it does make sense. We just have to wait until the water clears and we can see through whatever scheme is going on between the Fire Tribe and the Kai Empire.

Chapter Text

We kept leaning an ear over people's shoulders. Their conversations were far too important for us to ignore. It fed us on all the things we needed to know about what was happening out there. Where this was all going. 

"It seems the troops from Sen Province have reached Kah-Sho fort"

"Is General Soo-Jin finally confronting them?"

"If they're fighting with Lord Soo-Jin's forces, then I reckon that even if the troops from the Sen Province win and arrive here... the soldiers should be exhausted"

"Lord Kyo-Ga's elite forces are at the castle. They should be able to wipe them out, right?"

"Do you think it will end like this, Yoon?", Ki-Ja asked.

Another loud thud reached our attention. Someone had barged in the room, looking like he had seen the end of the world happening before his very eyes.

"H- hey! We've got trouble!"

"What happened?!"

"The Sen Province's army... it seems... The Sen Province's army has come even closer to Saika!", my eyes widened at his words.

"What?!"

"What's the meaning of this?!"

"Was General Soo-Jin.. was Kah-Sho fort overwhelmed?!"

"It couldn't be that General Soo-Jin..."

"It's strange. Things are moving too quickly", Hak realized.

"It feels all planned", I let out.

"Planned by who?", Yoon asked. I kept quiet, because really, who knew what was really happening out there except for Soo-Jin and his army. "Maybe the troops have separated"

"Separated?", Yona let out. 

"I think Soo-Jin's troops are still fighting. The Sen Province troops separated to go against Soo-Jin's troops and Kyo-Ga's troops. The soldiers that still have enough strength are heading here", Yoon explained. "The capital will become a battlefield before long. I was going to gather a little more information, but... we won't be able to go out now"

"It's okay, Yona dear. I'll pick you up and run away if we have to", Jae-Ha mused as he approached the Princess.

"I see, thanks. I'm in your care, too", Hak added, leaning over him as the others joined.

"Me, too", Yoon called.

"Zeno, too"

"You weigh too much", Jae-Ha whispered.

"Even though the soldiers are closing in, it sure is quiet", Yona realized.

"It's night. They've set up camp and are waiting for morning", Yoon said.

"But they're blending into the night", Zeno added.

"Lone", Hak called and I turned my head in his direction. "Go find an inn for us to sleep in", he demanded and I rolled my eyes before I found my way out of the bar and into the streets of Saika. It wasn't a hard task to find an inn, and I didn't bother doing it, as long as it got me out of that stinky bar. But the way Hak ordered me to do it ; I could have plucked his eyes out of his skull. 

I was leaning against the wall, looking outside the window, keeping watch. A few times here and there, I would check if everyone was fine, my eyes traveling over the room. It was quiet and calm tonight, despite what was waiting for us at dawn. And I caught myself thinking about my brother. The brother who would come to me when I needed him most. I hadn't seen him in a long while and I missed him. I couldn't call him, couldn't find the desire to see him, not after all this time. I felt ashamed, I felt bad for pushing him away. Yet, I didn't want to have to apologize. I didn't know if he kept an eye over me despite me not calling for him. I really hoped he did. 

Perhaps it was selfish. That I wished he would look over me when I didn't even bother calling for him. It made my eyes sting. He did everything he could for me. He kept me hoping life was worth it. He was my only companion when I thought I had lost everything and everyone. He saved my life in that shed. And I've hidden so much from him. I thought he was too innocent and too young to know the horrors of life, but maybe it's me that's too innocent. Maybe he's the more mature one. 

I could feel the tears slowly falling over my cheeks. I brought my hands to my face as I sniffed, wished my sadness to disappear so I didn't wake the others accidentally. I could feel the cut beneath my finger tips. It had completely healed and it didn't annoy me as much as before. I ran my fingers along it, until they hit my jaw. I closed my eyes as I remembered his voice calling to me, calling for me to keep on living, to keep on fighting. It was him and adrenaline that saved me that day.

"Thank you, Aro", I whispered, low enough for the others to keep on dreaming peacefully. 

I lifted my head and opened my eyes just in time to see a shooting star cutting the sky in half. It made me smile. It was a sign. It was a sign from Aro, telling me that he was with me. Telling me that he would never leave me alone.

I awoke at the same time everyone else did. Hak had relieved me of my post yesterday and I was finally able to get some sleep. 

"Has the fight... has the Sen Province army attacked yet?", Yona asked.

"Actually, the area surrounding the gates in the capital have been blocked off for normal citizens. There hasn't been any new information coming in", Hak explained,

"It's definetely unsettlingly quiet now", Yoon pointed out.

"If only we could find out what's on the outside... what if the fight already reached the capital", Yona realized,

"Well then, I'll take a look", Jae-Ha let out.

"Oh, right! Jae-Ha can jump!", Yoon exclaimed. 

"Ryokuryuu! Bring me with you! Zeno's bored!"

"Little children should still be asleep", Jae-Ha said.

"Jae-Ha. Wait a second", Yona called.

"What's wrong?", he asked, leaning over her. "Want to come with me?"

"Yes, please take-"

"Fine with me!", Jae-Ha shouted, but when Shin-Ha ended up in Jae-Ha's arms, I had some difficulty holding in my laughter. "Eh?... What? What's this? What is this?"

"Please take Shin-Ha with you!", Yona asked.

"I see... if you take Shin-Ha with you, his eyes will definitely be convenient", Yoon explained.

"Shin-Ha, be sure to fulfill your duties", Ki-Ja shouted and I had to restrain myself from punching him in the face.

"Two large men with one holding the other princess-style... if it were me, I'd shoot them down", Jae-Ha said and I rolled my eyes.

"Jae-Ha, my bro, don't forget to hold him tightly", Hak teased.

For a few minutes, we were left alone until their return. And for those few minutes, what haunted me most is how Jae-Ha talked to Yona. I wanted to erase those thoughts from my mind, but before I could succeed, the boys came back. 

"Ah. They've returned", Yoon said. "How was it?"

"It looks like the situation is going in a strange direction", Jae-Ha started.

After a while, when they had finished explaining what they had seen, we were all left surprised and shocked. 

"General Soo-Jin's been defeated?!"

"They're currently requesting for reinforcements and they're on the run", Jae-Ha explained.

"What's the military situation between the Saika troops and the Sen Province army?", Yona asked.

"About that..."

"There's no battle taking place?!", Yoon shouted, surprised.

"Well, it's more like the Sen Province army isn't attacking", Jae-Ha added. "They're staring each other down in front of the Saika gates"

"I thought it was too quiet, but this is...", Yoon whispered.

"However, the Sen Province army was continuously breaching gates. To stop attacking here is...", Ki-Ja said. "I wonder if it's some sort of plan"

"Shin-Ha, how many troops were there in the Sen Province army?", Yona asked.

"Around 2000", he said. 

"2000?! Hak?", Yona called out. 

"According to the information I got from the back alleys, Li-Hazara is leading a force of 10 000 men. To come with only 2000 to attack the Fire Tribe's center, Saika Castle...", Hak revealed.

"I heard that Kan Soo-Jin led a large army out of the area. Didn't Li-Hazara divert a large portion of his army to fight that army?", Ki-Ja said. 

"That point also bothers me", Hak let out. 

"What does?", Ki-Ja asked. 

"...well. If we take a look at it. Li-Hazara broke through the Fire Tribe's border, and also breached the Rokka Fort, then he split his army into two. He sent 2000 to Saika and the rest to Fort Kah-Sho, the place Kan Soo-Jin was protecting. He defeated Kan Soo-Jin. Kan Soo-Jin called for reinforcements and retreated. It seems like the troops in front of Saika's gate are there to stop Kyo-Ga from leaving. The real force is currently pursuing Kan Soo-Jin. Li-Hazara should be there"

"If Kan Soo-Jin retreats back to Saika Castle, Li Hazara probably plans to regroup with the forces here and take Saika castle immediately", Ki-Ja said. 

"Possibly..", Hak hesitantly added.

"I wonder if Kyo-Ga will send out reinforcements", Yona wondered aloud.

"Since the Sen Province army is camped outside of Saika, I don't think he can easily send them out", Yoon pointed out.

"At this rate, even if General Soo-Jin wants to return to Saika, he won't be able to. If he does come, he'll be surrounded by the 2000 troops here", Jae-Ha added.

"Kyo-Ga can't even help turn the tides because he can't leave the gates", Yona whispered, thinking. "Yoon, is there a way we can leave here?"

"Huh?", the young man let out.

"We will go out, and scatter the 2000 soldiers outside of Saika", she said, fire burning in her eyes. It took us a moment, primarily taken by surprise, until feral grins appeared on our faces. 

"What are you saying, Yona?!", Yoon exclaimed, alarmed. "Thunder Beast, Lone, is this the right occasion to be smirking?!"

"What are you talking about? This is the perfect moment", I teased him, my lips pulling toward my ears more and more.

"Leave it to us, Princess!", Ki-Ja shouted.

"Put away your hand, you beast!"

"I don't approve of all of General Soo-Jin's methods, but if they're hit by Li Hazara, Fire Tribe will descend into chaos. If we do something about the Sen Province army surrounding Saika, General Soo-Jin can return to Saika and Kyo-Ga can start to move", Yona said.

"But if we cause such a disturbance", Yoon worried.

"It will be fine as long as we pose as bandits", Ki-Ja smirked. 

"I guess it means the Dark Dragon and the Happy Hungry Bunch will make an appearance", Jae-Ha mused.

"Since Zeno became friends with a bunch of people in the slums, they told me a secret passage that leads outside-", the yellow dragon beamed, as if it was totally usual for him to do that.

"When did you do that?!", Yoon exclaimed. "But it's 2000 soldiers we're talking about..."

"Yoon...", Yona called. "Let's go. We'll definitely protect it. You and your homeland"

"I understand. I also... don't want you to be in any danger, too", Yoon said, gripping her hands in his as he put his forehead against hers. My smile softened.

"Yeah. I know"

We left shortly after. After discussing of a plan that would get us there and the fight that would ensue, we found Zeno's passage and walked underground until we reached the other end. Ki-Ja did us the honor of opening the door. We casually started walking about the army, as if we were some of their men. 

"How frightening!", Ki-Ja shouted. "That passageway is full of spiders and webs! Jae-Ha, remove them from me please"

"Pfft, Hakuryuu you're covered in webs...", Zeno sang.

"I rather not touch anything that isn't beautiful", Jae-Ha countered. "I leave it up to you, Shin-Ha"

"Ah", the blue dragon let out.

"Shin-Ha, are you a spiders' nest? You're covered in spiders"

"Who... who are you guys?", a man asked.

"Ahh, greetings Sen Province soldiers from far away", Jae-Ha saluted. "We're sorry, but the camp you set up is causing trouble for the people in Saika. Could you please withdraw?"

"What a polite way to ask, Green Head", I whispered in his direction. He looked down to me, smiling. 

"If you retreat without a fuss, we won't have to hurt you", he added.

"You bastards!"

"Who are you?"

"We are monsters", Jae-Ha finished, grinning.

"You're too noisy, White Snake!", Hak shouted as Ki-Ja continued whining. Let's just say Jae-Ha's words made me forget about the White Dragon. And all thoughts of everyone flew away as the Sen Province army attacked us. Defend or attack, whatever suited what we had to do. I was swinging my sword around, slashing flesh and taking life. Their camp became a house for chaos in a short amount of time. 

"If we do this much, the Sen Province army should panic. General Soo-Jin should be able to return to Saika", Yoon said. "Now we just have to look out for General Soo-Jin's return. We should retreat now"

"The army...", Shin-Ha said, lifting the band from his eyes.

"Have they come?", Ki-Ja asked.

"Good relief", Jae-Ha let out. "Well, it's about time to withdraw", but Shin-Ha wasn't saying anything. I approached him.

"Shin-Ha?", Ki-Ja called.

"The army is...", he started. "The army... isn't coming here"

"What?!", I exclaimed. 

"The Fire Tribe army... and... Sen Province army are...southwest... are heading southwest"

"What the hell is going on?", I asked.

"They aren't coming back?! Why...?", Yoon asked. "If he's retreating and calling for reinforcements, then wouldn't he return here first?!"

We had finally withdrawn and stood by the forest, talking. 

"I wonder if he thinks he'll get surrounded so he's avoiding it?", Yona wondered. 

"Soo-Jin's army was heading southwest apparently", Ki-Ja said.

"Southwest?", Yona asked.

"Southwest from here is... Hiryuu Castle?!", Yoon shouted.

"He's asking for reinforcements from the King", Yona realized. 

"If he goes to Hiryuu Castle, he can definitely get strong reinforcements", Yoon said. "But..."

"This isn't... something I want to think about", Yona let out.

"What is it?", Yoon asked.

"Even if it's Kan Soo-Jin, he wouldn't go this far... is what I thought but..."

"What? What is it? Thunder Beast? Lone?", he sounded again. 

"Hak? Lone?", Yona called. 

"There's something that's been bothering me this whole time", Hak said and it made sense. "Kan Soo-Jin took a large army to go and suppress the Sen Province army. Before looking at the situation, he lead an army that's larger than his son's army out of Saika. If you follow common military strategy, the Fire Tribe's essential structure, Saika Castle, needs the largest army to protect it. Then he's easily defeated. If you think about it, the first fort, Rokka, fell way to easily. And one other thing. Shin-Ha just said that the Fire Tribe troops and the Sen Province army are heading southwest. Shin-Ha. How were the Fire Tribe troops? Were they injured? How about the palace they fought at?"

"I didn't see... many injured... it didn't seem like they... fought much. But... the two armies are rushing towards the southwest"

"Moreover, I've also heard a lot about the Fire Tribe's history and beliefs", I added, as it made more sense the more we were saying. "In their stories, the royals of the Fire Tribe would be the real descendants of King Hyriuu, which also meant... that the castle belonged to them"

"So? What's happening?", Zeno asked.

"Basically, Kan Soo-Jin has joined forces with Li-Hazara", Jae-Ha said. 

"And their real goal is to overthrow the current King, Soo-Won", I let out, chills traveling down my back, my neck, reaching my arms. It felt foreign, ugly and disgusting. 

"Soo-Jin has commited treason by allying with an enemy country. And they're after Hyriuu Castle and Soo-Won's head", Hak added, as if to confirm what we were thinking.

"Kan Soo-Jin is doing something absolutely shameless. He's one of Kouka's pivotal five generals, at that!", Ki-Ja said. "Inviting an enemy nation's army of ten thousand into our country... and seeking help to overtake Hiryuu Castle on top of that... That is playing most foul... isn't it?"

"The ones I feel sorry for are the soldiers who offered up their lives to defend Saika. They have no idea their own leader has joined forces with an enemy nation", Jae-Ha shared. "What should we do? Scatter the troops of Soo-Jin and the Sen Province this time?"

"That's obviously impossible", Yoon countered. "We finished intimidating the Sen Province troops that were here before, but Soo-Jin and the Sen Province's troops are twenty thousand in total. Besides... Besides... Yona... let's step back and watch the situation for now. We coudn't win even if we tried. Yona", Yona thought for a little while, until she raised her attention toward Hak.

"...Hak. Can you prepare some horses? We're going after General Soo-Jin and Li-Hazara"

"Yona! That's absurd! That's twenty thousand soldiers! Also..."

"Soo-Jin's actions will plunge this country into chaos. I will not ignore it!", she finished, decided.

There were four horses, and I didn't realize I'd have to share one with another person until it slapped me in the face. And the worst is, Green Head didn't lose a second before he came over to me. As the others were discussing, I acted as though I hadn't seen him and decided to pet the horse instead. 

"Come over here, Lone. I'll help you get on", he said, teasingly. I turned to him, rolling my eyes. That was not even close to being hot. 

"As if I'd need help", I said as I walked to the horse's side, put my foot in the stirrup and pulled on the saddle as I lifted my right leg over the animal, sitting on its back flawlessly. You could even say I was impressed by myself. But before I'd even realized it, there was someone behind me in an instant. "Get off, pervert!"

"You can't ride alone, anyway, so you got to live with it now", he said, bringing his hands before me as he gripped the reins. Their presence on my thighs was alarming and I felt myself blushing until my very ears were red. I tried to ignore it. "You can even lay against my chest if you want to", he whispered in my ear, his proximity making me self-conscious more than I'd like. I ignored his antics until we were ready to go. 

Chapter Text

The fight has started. The fight between Soo-Won, Kouka's King and Kan Soo-Jin, the Fire Tribe's General has started. The Earth Tribe has joined with the Sky Tribe Army.

Kan Soo-Jin's plan to attack by surprise has failed and he now has to face his mistakes. And knowing the difference between the two armies, Kan Soo-Jin believed he could win this battle and reclaim what was rightfully his own. But what he didn't know was that Soo-Won was prepared for this.

Lone and her group were galloping, the battle taking place far far in front of them, their presence a mere dot in the horizon. And what the group realized wasn't of any problem for them. Approaching not far away from the Sky Tribe's army was the Earth Tribe's army. Geun-Tae had come to help Soo-Won.

"Sorry to keep you waiting, Sky Tribe", Geun-Tae said, his sword resting on his shoulder as his army behind him crushed into the Fire Tribe's.

"The Earth Tribe's flag", Soo-Jin winced. "Is that Geun-Tae?"

"Impossible! Reinforcements?!", Li-Hazara shouted.

Geun-Tae looked down upon them, ready to kill as Soo-Won smiled in victory. "Well, it's been a while since we've had a battle", Geun-Tae exclaimed. "Storm the enemy to your heart's content. Go forth!!!"

Screams shattered the battlefield as death multiplied rapidly. Thanks to Geun-Tae's reinforcements, the Sky Tribe had a new chance of winning this battle. Soo-Jin was shocked and slowly realizing he had just led his own troops and Li-Hazara's to a certain death.

"Send three squads over to His Majesty!", Joo-Doh shouted. A slash cut through an enemy's back as Geun-Tae appeared after the body's fall, revealing his presence to the General.

"To think I'd see your twin sword's style on the battlefield again", Geun-Tae said.

"Hmph... Your portentousness is showing", Joo-Doh called out.

"Really?", Geun-Tae let out, a shadow appearing over his shoulder. He only punched the soldier in the face before the two Generals started arguing... like always. "It was more flashy back then, though"

"Your tribe is loud, as always"

"And what's this?! That funny looking tiger-horse you have!"

"Shut up! I didn't even want to make my cherished horse wear this stinky hide!"

"Was that part of the Majesty's plan, too?" 

"Yes. The pits don't really exist, either. Making them think they're there is enough", Joo-Doh explained, which surprised the Earth Tribe's General.

"Oh..."

"The fight has been settled", Joo-Doh said.

"Seems that way. The Sen Province's army is retreating"

"The battle was already decided. From the point we set up our encampment", Joo-Doh whispered in the wind, staring at the horizon, at the many men running away... back to their country.

"Hm", Geun-Tae smiled. "What a frightening person", he added, thinking about the sweet-looking face of the King he now served.

"Retreat! Retreattt!", the claims were loud enough for Li-Hazara to hear them and so, as he gritted his teeth, showing his anger, he responded.

"Ngh! And we came all this way, what the hell?!"

"General! Shall we retreat?!", a Fire Tribe soldier asked his General, who was almost dying of fear on his horse. "General!"

"No...", he only said. "Not yet... We're not finished yet... Kill him... Kill King Soo-Won!!"

The shouts continued as the Sen Province's army retreated. Li-Hazara made a good choice, but at what cost? It would still earn him some kind of punishment. As to Kan Soo-Jin, maybe at the very end of this battle, he would have earned his punishment by the King himself. Who knows...?

"Lord Hazara! Our resources have run out!"

"Don't worry! We'll take some from the villages close by!", he screamed, anger coating his mouth, his tongue, his very lips as he spitted the words out. "Trample them! Burn them all down!! Otherwise I won't calm down!"

"What's going on? A battle?", a villager worriedly let out, sweat rolling down her face as she looked at the army approaching her village.

They were charging in her direction, swords at the ready, their only motive being their boiling blood. Until horses... many horses stopped them in their tracks. The strongest man of the group was swinging his guando as if it were a magic wand and the scarred lady was slashing flesh well before she touched the ground. Their arrival wasn't a part of Li-Hazara's agenda. Turning around on her feet, Lone warned the villagers to run away before they got mixed up in all of this, which they did. She then turned toward Li-Hazara and his army.

"You aren't soldiers from the Wind Tribe, are you?", Sen Province's ruler asked.

"Sen Province's Li-Hazara... be still", Yona started. "You invaded Kouka Kingdom. In addition, if you frighten the citizens, don't think you'll get off lightly"

"Get rif of them", the man merely ordered.

"Yes", the young soldier answered as he ran toward the group. Ki-Ja's hand stopped him dead in his tracks as he flipped him to the ground. 

"Wha-" 

"What's with that hand?!"

"Mo-Monster!", the people were shivering, shouting nonsense in their fear. It was delightful to watch.

"Shoot! Shooooot!", they screamed. But Jae-Ha was already upon them.

"He- He's flying?!", were the only words the soldier let out as he threw his daggers at them. Shin-Ha and Lone joined the fight as well. Li-Hazara was left sweating as if he somehow knew he was going to die.

"Are there any movements in the Fire Tribe's main forces?", the King asked as he sat on his horse.

"Not at the moment", his soldier said.

"I don't believe someone like Soo-Jin would retreat so easily", Joo-Doh voiced out. "The reason why the Fire Tribe army lost so quickly earlier was because the Fire Tribe lost their morale, and that was the quickest way to end the battle"

"It's about time... the troops are at their limit", Soo-Won said.

"General Soo-Jin! The Sen Province Army is retreating one by one!", a soldier shouted, scared and desperate. "Some of our troops are captured by the Royal Army! We can't hold on any longer, General! Retreat... no... We should surrender!"

"What... did you just say?", that man had his head cut off a few seconds later... by his own General. "Surrender? Surrender?! You said surrender?! Impossible! That is out of the question! I am King Hiryuu's descendant! Are you telling me to bow down to a false King?! If you are true Fire Tribe citizens, if you are truly King Hiryuu's people, until your last breath, you should give your life to fight for the King! It's not over as long as that imposter is still alive! I am still here! Hiryuu Castle is... that red castle is, still standing there! Fight! Fight!! Fight!!!", he screamed, his desires coming to his head as they almost made him crazy, mad.

"Pull back your troops, General Soo-Jin", Yona ordered, her soft voice a fierce demand. The group was all standing behind her, facing the Fire Tribe General.

"So you were alive...", Soo-Jin voiced, his eyes going from my friend, to Hak and then Lone. 

"Who are they...?", whispers amongst the soldiers.

"Even though you are one of the Five Generals of Kouka Kingdom, you committed a serious crime. On top of that, you decapitated one of your own soldiers. Are you going to let his death be in vain?"

"Heh- A little girl's lecturing me? Right now, as King Hiryuu, I am taking back what is rightfully mine, Hiryuu Castle... my soldiers will gladly pave a path for me... That is what it means to be an honorable Fire Tribe citizen!"

"Don't be so full of yourself. You don't even know what you make your people live through", Yona said, her comrades forming a circle at her sides. "You are not fit to be King"

"...Kill them", Soo-Jin ordered. "Kill them! This girl... these people here... erase them from my sight!"

Fire Tribe soldiers were surrounding them now, swords unsheathed. They were ready to fight. And so was she... so was Lone.

"I wonder if we'll be able to get out of here alive-"

"Don't say that, Jae-Ha!", Yoon shouted, cutting him off.

"What are you saying? This will be an easy victory", Ki-Ja merely said.

"That oddly positive outlook is your only redeeming quality, White Snake", Hak added and Lone shrugged.

"Agreed", was the only thing Lone said.

"Zeno will cheer for all of you!"

"Soo-Jin, there is one thing I want to tell you. Right now, Tae-Jun is leading the Fire Tribe people with a completely different method. I want to show you what he looks like now"

The fight broke out. But our purpose wasn't to kill these people ; we had to make the minimum of casualties amongst the Fire Tribe people. 

"Ki-Ja, if you don't hold back...", Jae-Ha called out.

"I am already! Killing the misled soldiers is not the Princess' real goal!"

"Princess and Yoon, get behind me", Hak ordered.

"Yoon, it's alright, I can fight! I can...", Yona shouted as Yoon protected the Princess with his body.

"Right now the only thing I can do is become your shield", Yoon said.

Yona was holding out her bow, Hak was swinging his guando, Ki-Ja was swaying his clawed hand, Jae-Ha was going on a merry dance with his throwing knives, Zeno was holding up a shield as Shin-Ha and Lone were swinging their own swords around, fighting off the enemy. And then, a whistle made freezing chills go down Lone's, Hak's and Yona's backs. Lone looked up to see a familiar bird flying and then it flew downward, downward and downward, until it reached the King's shoulder. It was Gulfan...

Soo-Won met with Lone's eyes first, then with Yona's. The two women were standing side by side. But as his stare returned to Lone, his eyes shone bright with relief and surprise and shock. He had never wanted her to be dead and there she finally was. He had not dreamed back then in Awa, when he thought he had seen her shadow, her ghost. 

"Princess, Lone, what are...", he stopped in his words as he turned to watch the same spectacle we were watching.

Behind him, General Joo-Doh and General Geun-Tae were arriving. 

"Your Majesty!", Joo-Doh shouted.

"How many are in the group with the amazing strength?!", Geun-Tae asked with curiosity. They all froze as they stared down at the trio standing in front of them. 

"Yona, let's retreat!", Yoon fearfully screamed.

But the Princess was glued to the ground. As well as Lone and Hak. It was something she wanted to miss. Lone had forever wanted to never see him again. But then, there she was... there they all were. Lone could see the relief in the King's eyes, the pain in Joo-Doh's. 

"Yona!"

"We're retreating!", Yona ordered as Lone turned her head away. "Hak, Ki-Ja! Create a pathway!"

"Leave it to us!", Ki-Ja agreed.

"Hak", Yona silently murmured as he was still staring up at our old friends.

"Understood", Hak finally said.

"Jae-Ha! Take the Princess and Yoon!", Ki-Ja shouted.

"Ah! But I'd rather take Lone!"

"Don't say shit like that in the middle of the battlefield, idiot!", she screamed, turning around. "I can take care of myself!"

"Got it, dear!", I rolled my eyes at him as he flew away with our friends.

"Seiryuu, are you bringing up the rearguard? Zeno will, too"

"Zeno, go on ahead"

"Okay!"

"General Joo-Doh, I can't see very well from here, but that man with the long sword... and the woman with the old one... could they be...", Geun-Tae started. "Should we capture them?" 

Joo-Doh's eyes widened and then he waited for the King's order.

"They're just unknown bandits. They probably got mixed up in the battle. Leave them alone", Soo-Won decided.

"But-", Geun-Tae cut in.

"Right now, capturing General Soo-Jin is our first priority. Don't mind the bandits", Soo-Won added.

"Yes!"

The unknown bandits were already away. But Lone had spared a look over her shoulder before departing with her companions. She had met Soo-Won's gaze and lowering her own eyes, she turned her attention forward and rode away.

"Hey! What are you doing?!", Soo-Jin screamed. "Go after them!", but the King was slowly approaching.

"His Majesty...", a Fire Tribe soldier cried out.

"His Majesty Soo-Won...", another let out.

"Him! Release your arrows at Soo-Won!! It's our victory if Soo-Won is killed! What's wrong?! Hurry and do it!", he waited and realized his soldiers would not lift a finger. And so he raised his bow and pointed an arrow at the King. "You cowards!"

"Stand back, Your Majesty!", Joo-Doh shouted, bringing an arm in front of Soo-Won. "Geun-Tae!", he screamed again as the General took off.

"This is the end! Soo-Won!!", were his last words before a sword plunged through his heart.

From afar, standing atop the hills, Lone was watching. She was watching as the man fell at the hands of one of his own soldiers. It was indeed the end. 

It was the end of this battle, of this war that never began. But what would be of Lone and her group now? What would happen now that Joo-Doh, Geun-Tae and Soo-Won knew they were still alive? Lone didn't give herself time to think about any possibility of a future as she got back on her horse and rode away, not turning back again. Because she forever said bye to the opportunity to ever see him... ever see them again, and yet... and yet, her demands to the Heavens had been denied. If she dared do it again, would they refuse it again? She didn't know the answer and she realized she never would. She pushed away the thought and ignored him... ignored everything about Soo-Won as she joined her group not far away. 

Chapter Text

I could see her watching the sky, her hand hiding her eyes from the sun, while she followed the bird’s course, almost hoping that it was Gulfan, that flying loyal friend. At least we knew whom he was most loyal to. I averted my gaze, tending to my many bruises and cuts. Contrary to the others, my injuries were much less important.

"Yoon, how are everyone's injuries?", Yona asked.

"Well..."

"I'm already healed!", the White Dragon beamed, bandages encircling his head and his unclawed hand, his clothes bloodied and ripped.

"Liar!", Yoon screamed, hitting Ki-Ja in the back of his head. "Ki-Ja, you're the most injured and fatigued. Rest!"

"You're horrible at using your strength, Ki-Ja", Jae-Ha let out. 

"What...?! Why would you say that...?"

I watched the Green Dragon as he spoke.

"You always stand in the front and immediately attack with all your strength. If all you do is overexert yourself, you'll die someday"

"You say that as if the dragons are immortal", I said.

"They are", Ki-Ja turned to me, almost insulted. I rolled my eyes.

"I wasn't talking about the dragons in you ; I was talking about you, your bodies, your souls"

"Well anyway, if I can protect the Princess like that, I'll gladly die!", Ki-Ja beamed.

"Still, I'm surprised Hak and Zeno have so few injuries", Jae-Ha said, turning the conversation in another direction.

"Zeno was just cheering everyone on!!"

"Seriously, you could try acting like one of the dragons just a little...", Ki-Ja let out.

"Zeno was protecting me", Yoon mumbled, as if hesitating. Zeno looked surprised. Yoon continued, louder this time. "Zeno held a shield in front of Yona and I, who couldn't fight, and protected us. He did a really good job"

"Thank you...", Zeno said, only a murmur in the wind. He was still clearly shocked by Yoon's statement, but not for long. "Wow, being depended upon is making me bashful"

"I wasn't depending on you much", Yoon added.

My attention turned toward Yona, who was walking up to Hak. She took a seat in front of him and started bandaging him. I watched for a while and then decided to join them. Hak looked up then, smiling faintly. I smiled as well, happy that our friendship was taking up more colors as the days went by. 

Yona looked toward me, too, and smiled as well. I sat. After a short silence, Yona spoke up.

"Gulfan was... at the battlefield, right? The falcon that... you two and Soo-Won raised together long ago", the spoken name had chills running down my spine to my limbs. I hated that name.

"I dunno. I've forgotten", Hak answered, his gaze lost and dark, as if shadows of pain and sadness were stealing his memories.

"I do remember", I said. "And I wished it wasn't like that. The past, the present, whatever"

"What will happen now?", Yona asked, then turning to me. "You have committed real and serious crimes against the Crown ; what will Soo-Won do now?"

"If he decides to put up my face and description in every city across Kouka, then I'll just have to accept it. He knows I am alive, Geun-Tae and Joo-Doh, too... This is a weapon they can use against me... against you"

"He won't do it", Hak countered. We turned toward him in unison, as if we were the same person.

"Why do you say that so confidently?", Yona asked.

"Because why would he do it? What does it bring him to do that? I think that until now, he has done nothing less and nothing more than the necessary... for his plans, for whatever. You were a possible ally back then, but he knows you. He knows you won't help him no matter what, he knows you'd rather die than help him. Moreover, I doubt he'd lose time running after you with the only intention to kill you. It wouldn't make sense"

"Still ; I cannot bring myself to think past it. He saw us, got confirmation I was alive. I'd hate to still be there to see what comes next, but I don't want to die either. This life just continues to offer us nothing but hell itself"

"We've lived through a lot", Yona started, putting a hand on mine, resting on my knee. "We've experienced enough of hell to be able to go through it all, to go through the rest, no matter what. We've got each other, remember"

I smiled and brought my curled fist in the middle. Yona immediately brought hers near mine, her knuckles barely hitting mine. Hak did so, too, our fists connecting then. Despite the missing fourth fist, I tried to keep my lips pulled up in a smile ; I tried to fight the urge to go back in time. To make it so all that never ever happened.

Maybe I wasn't the only one to hope that going back in time would someday be possible. Even after I lost my feelings for him, for his kind and perfect heart, that reality was still easier to endure than this one. Now, it's just endless pain and a reality none of us were expecting to see... ever. We had never wished for Soo-Won to betray us, yet we had never prayed for that part of the story to be erased. I still wonder to this day, though, what could have pushed him to push us aside as if we were as useless as a dead insect. I still wonder what happened for him to become cold as winter and dry as the Fire Tribe's land. I hate him.

And everything's ruined because of him. Even after my family died and Hakkon House burned to cinders, I could have lived with Yona and Hak at the castle ; Soo-Won could have continued to visit us. We could have continued to be friends and smile at each other every time we passed by the other without so much as a thought for the evil part of them. It didn't even exist in that reality either. Because for our story to never have happened, we would have to go back to the very beginning. What, exactly, caused this to go down so badly? I wished I knew, but with my deep desire to never see him again, the only person who really knows the truth, I will never know. And I really hoped I died, breathed my last breath, without knowing a single thing. 

And then, there was the General of the Sky Tribe, my once swordsmaster. Joo-Doh never had soft spots... for anyone. But in those last few days before I ran away and that last time under the rain in the cover of the night, he seemed gentler, kinder. I wished our friendship had not gone down as it did ; only because his King made him do it. Maybe he, too, knew the truth. But going near him meant approaching my nemesis. He had never been as sweet as Soo-Won, but he had always had good qualities and intentions. He always had been loyal and honest. And maybe, in that impossible dreamlike reality of mine, we continued to spar every day as friends and we fought on the battlefield together. 

Maybe in that other reality, I could look in a mirror and not see that damn red line rushing from under my eye to my jaw. Maybe, I did not have to close my eyes every time I had to wash. Maybe I didn't hate my body and my soul. Maybe I didn't hate how I was born and what I lived with. Maybe... maybe my mother was still with me. 

And it struck me then ; how I had never thought about all these before. How, after all this time, I ony now decided to contemplate life and take a moment to remember the fallen, the forgotten, the enemies. But with everything that daily ruins my life, with the dead people walking around that nobody else sees, with the nightmares so horrible they wake me up in the middle of the night as I was sweating like a pig and shaking as if an earthquake hit Earth and breathing as if I was going to die. And with the reminder of my scars, my battles against my past trauma and my growing attraction toward another particular person, I hadn't really had the time to think of anything else... except a thought or two to Aro everyday.

I watched them, my new friends, sitting around the fire, Yoon, our new mother, playing babysitter with the too-curious ones as he was finally distributing our portions. I smiled ; and I really did smile. A real one. And after all this, I caught myself thinking about how, maybe, this reality wasn't too bad in the end... after you crossed hell and ended on the other side. Yes, there was another hell coming, but right now, in this very moment, I could walk without risking to be burned or killed. It was peaceful, despite our daily adventures. We were a happy group and I was glad to be part of it. 

"Loooonee", a voice called from right beside me, a song in my ears. I jumped, turning toward him. Jae-Ha was grinning, that proud smile something I couldn't escape. 

"What do you want, now?", I asked, turning away.

"For you to come eat. It's time for diner", he said and got up. He offered me his hand and I contemplated whether I should slap it away just then and walk away like a queen or if I should just take it and live with the consequences. After a few long seconds, I finally put my hand in his, and the smile that appeared on his face then was pure happiness. And I was glad that not everything had been ruined in this world in the end. 

I was glad I didn't ruin this chain of thoughts by slapping that damn hand away. 

Really.

Chapter Text

"Today I'm... going into town for work", Yoon shared, his backpack already over his shoulders as we, the whole group, stood there surprised.

The fight between Hak and Ki-Ja stopped, Ki-Ja's claws narrowly missing Hak's head ; Zeno leaning over a sleepy Jae-Ha ; Shin-Ha swinging his sword as Yona was petting Aro, who peeked an eye open. 

"For work?", Yona asked, confused.

We ended up following our dear friend into town. The streets were filled with merchants with different products resting on their carts. Food, jewelry, weapons, anything that could catch an eye. Zeno was way too amazed at everything that was offered that Jae-Ha had to stop him from creating chaos.

"There are a bunch of different stores", Yona commented, her eyes roaming over the many people and carts present. 

"I heard that the market opens for a limit amount of time", Yoon started explaining. "Wandering merchants and travelers are free to open up their own shops"

"What are you going to sell, Yoon?"

"I'm going to sell medicine as usual. I picked a ton of herbs on the way here", I turned toward our friend, realizing then the purpose of his little collection since we left earlier. I had fun naming each one of them and their properties in my head. "This is when it gets important. As you all are probably aware, we're broke. We've somehow been able to have meat because we hunt it, but we also want rice, salt, weapons and clothing... right?! That means, we need money no matter what! Soooo, you guys need to go and bring customers in"

"Wouldn't it be better if we didn't stand out?", Hak asked, which made me offer him the kind of stare that nobody wanted. But in my experience, not from me at least.

"Normally, but...", Yoon started. "Merchants from other countries and travelling entertainers come here so I think people won't care about even Shin-Ha and his weird mask"

"But I've never tried to solicit customers before...", Ki-Ja said.

"If you don't drag customers here... you don't get to eat", Yoon stated and I watched as the group turned around, announcing that they were immediately going for a customers' hunt. I took a seat on a small stool and watched as Yoon lifted an eyebrow.

"I thought you would be the first one to go fetch people", he said.

"I don't need to run after people for them to come", his eyebrow stayed lifted, confused, as if telling me to prove myself. I watched as Jae-Ha brought the first customers in. I grinned and then took off my cloak and tied my hair up. Some stray hairs kept falling around my face, but it added a bonus to my costume. I put on a smile and put my hands around my mouth and started screaming. I was spilling my knowledge over this market and people were slowly rushing towards Yoon. It was surprising how many people desired medicine, as if it were vital on a daily basis. A woman approached me, genuinely curious. She was slightly younger than me, though.

"Excuse me, I need help with something. My sister is pregnant, and I would like to ask if you had anything that could be helpful so we can deliver the baby smoothly. She's almost to term and we want to help as best we can"

Yoon and I kept adding information after information on any medicine that he brought could help. The woman ended up buying a few different ones with a list of how to use them in a decent amount. Yoon and I weren't worried ; her sister was gonna be fine. And then, multiple people were encircling Yoon and I. My eyes searched for his green head, but men and women alike started encircling me as well, pressuring me to answer their many questions. A man took my hand in his, quieting the others.

"Miss, miss, your knowledge about medicine and your beauty are two incredible qualities. I would like to ask you to become my wife as of now, but I fear it's too much of an unnofficial way to propose, so how about we start courting!"

"Miss, I would like for you to work for me, maybe you can help me accomplish great things for my business. Of course, you'd profit of  it, too"

"Miss, I'd very much need your help for something. Is it possible for me to inquire your private service?"

"I'm sorry ; we're only selling medicine at this booth, but thank you for all the compliments"

Screams started echoing. The people were persistent and I feared I might have to explode if they continued to get closer. A hand on my arm tugged me hard enough to bring me away. I yelped, surprised. 

"I'm sorry, beauties and misters, but this miss is already taken. But if you want, we can discuss business", a flirty voice echoed from behind me. I glared up at my unwanted savior and shrugged out of his hold. He ended up stealing my customers.

"I got five customers. How's that?"

"Stupid fool, you stole three of mine", I let out, anger creeping in.

"You have some strange abilities. How did you do that?", Ki-Ja asked.

"You go up to a woman's ear and...", the rest was whispers in Shin-Ha and Ki-Ja's ears and I could see the next seconds happening in my head.

"How can I say something like that?!", Ki-Ja shouted, as Shin-Ha only remained confused. 

"Huh? What? What?", Yona beamed, curious.

"You don't have to listen to that, Princess", Hak said and I nodded, heavily agreeing with his advice.

"Ah, really... Besides your strength, your only good points are your youth and beauty, so...", he turned them around and litteraly offered them to the women standing near. "C'mon, smile-"

He took off Shin-Ha's mask, but the blue dragon remained frozen. "Put up with it for three seconds, Shin-Ha", Jae-Ha, told him. The women began their chirping soon after that. "Three customers are coming-", Jae-Ha announced, the mask still out of reach for the blue dragon.

"You should give Shin-Ha's mask back to him before he starts distrusting people", Hak announced.

"See? Ki-Ja and Shin-Ha worked very hard so can you praise them, Yona dear?", Jae-Ha pushed.

"He said three seconds...", Shin-Ha mumbled, putting his mask on, shaking.

"Did... did I... help at all?", Ki-Ja asked, mixed feelings creeping up to the surface.

"Zeno also brought a yound lady", the yellow dragon announced and I brought my fist to my mouth, restraining a laugh as I realized the old woman perched on Zeno's back.

"Oh? You did well, Zeno-", Jae-Ha said before he saw him. "That's a fine lady you have there"

"My arthritis has gotten worse lately...", the woman said, sitting before Yoon's many plants.

"Ah. If it's that's the case, then take that leaf and brew it in...", Yoon started, then his words got out of ear reach.

"A young man just called me a "young lady"", two other old woman chanted, laughing. I smiled, finding this moment wholesome. 

"If there are this many here already, more will wander over later", Hak stated. "Well then, I'll go and take a look at the weapons"

"Wait a second", Jae-Ha chanted, stopping Hak by putting a hand on his shoulder. "You need to also bring some in, Hak. Young ladies"

"Why is it a "ladies only" restrictions", Hak asked, displeased.

"I'm interested in how many would come if you called them up. Yona dear, is it alright if Hak talks to other ladies?"

"Huh?", Yona let out, confused. "Why are you asking me? It's for customers, right?"

"That is true, but... Hak, you've gained permission", Jae-Ha said.

"Hey", Hak started, probably wanting to counter him. 

"No food! Remember?", Jae-Ha teased.

"Tch!", Hak sounded out, walking away. 

"He ran to an old man", Jae-Ha realized, even more bored than he already was. I was standing next to Yona, as curious as both of them. "Oh. Wait"

My eyebrows rose as a woman joined Hak to the same booth and they started talking and laughing. I straightened as I tried to decipher Yona's reaction. And then, many other women joined and an entire group joined behind him when he approached us again. He pointed behind him then. "I brought a person with me"

"That's not a person. That's definitely not one person", Jae-Ha countered.

"Uwah!", Hak shouted as he turned around. 

"Hey, mister, are you alone?", a woman asked.

"Where do you come from?", another beamed.

"What do you do?"

"If you would like, why don't you come to my store?"

"Huh? What is this line? Kyah! What a cool looking guy!"

"Anyway! Line up and buy something expensive", Hak shouted and I slapped my hand in my face, because what kind of demand is that, Hak?!

Yona turned her head away and I decided to ignore Hak as I followed Yona.

"Yoon, how are we doing?", Yona asked.

Yoon could have looked like a little boy on drugs. It felt almost as if he was gonna jump around like a bug. "With this, we can make a decent living for a while"

"All right, then! I'm going to go grab some customers in, too!", Yona shouted as she swung her bow and quiver over her head.

"Ah! Ah! It's fine, Yona! Just sit here", Yoon ordered and I picked up my cloak, putting it back on.

"Would you ladies care for some apples?", a woman merchant asked, handing some of the fruit over.

"Thank you", Yona and I thanked the lady, accepting her offer.

"Are you guys wanderers? Where did you come from?", she asked.

"We came from a lot of different places. We came through the Sky Tribe lands", Yoon answered.

"Wow, the Sky Tribe...", a man spoke, visibly in awe. "Just the other day, they battled against the Fire Tribe apparently. Didn't you get caught up in the fight?"

"Ah, yeah, we managed", Yoon lied and I couldn't help but spare him an innocent glance.

"Well, that's good to hear", the woman said.

"I heard the head of the Fire Tribe just changed", the old man said.

"The new head, Kan Kyo-Ga and the Tribe Leader's representative, Kan Tae-Jun", the woman added and Yoon spit out his apple. "What's wrong?"

"Nothing", Yoon rushed out, cleaning around his mouth.

"It would be good if the Fire Tribe became a better place", Yona shared.

"Yeah. That place had bad public order for a long time. It was such a shame"

"If we're talking about bad public order, recently, it's been pretty bad in the Water Tribe's territory", the woman added and it caught Yoon's ear I could feel it.

"The Water Tribe is known for its greenery and water, and is the most beautiful territory within Kouka Kingdom, right?", Yoon asked,

"Yeah", the man confirmed.

"I would like to go there once to see it. Was there some kind of an incident?", Yoon demanded.

"I don't have any details, but I heard that there's a weird group of people in town. You can't freely do business there anymore. It's better not to go to places where there's uncertain information coming out. That's just my instinct, though", and ours was telling us to go check on the Water Tribe's people.

I stood up then and started walking away. It was fine to get some money, but the amount of people that were present around us was making me feel nauseous. My heartbeat was sky-rocketing and I had to get some air. I was walking around, looking at the many stores around me. I wasn't considering buying anything since I didn't have any money, but it reminded me of when I was younger and I would look over what these people would sell and enjoy every single moment, even when I could not buy anything. My father was always there, offering money to the merchant for something I wanted, but I ended up refusing because I was so embarassed. It made me smile just then. And before I had even realized it, time had passed and I met with Hak and Yona as they were checking out weapons.

"Hey, Lone!", Yona beamed, smiling as she saw me. I waved at her, dodging rolling carts and running children as I did my best to join them. Then, her eye caught on something. "Hey. What is that?", she asked and I turned toward what seemed to be an archery contest.

"It's a shooting range where you gamble", well at least, I was somehow right...

"Gamble?"

"You bet on where you think the challenger is going to hit the target", Hak explained. People were shouting, their bets clear in their words.

"Sounds fun!", Yona shouted.

My eye caught on something else interesting and I missed the rest of the conversation. Not far away, there was a ring put up where people were fighting. Well, that's barbaric. But exactly the kind of thing I would wind up in. People were betting, too and as I approached, the mister standing in the ring with the two bloodied up man turned to me. 

"Is it possible for me to participate?", I asked, dead serious, but the man only raised an eyebrow.

"You want to participate? Look, girl, how about you go find a man to fight for you"

"Right", I let out, dropping my innocent stare. "How about I break your nose here and there?"

The man started sweating and he had some difficulty swallowing his saliva in the next seconds. "Fine. You'll be up next, then. Barely anybody has been wanting to fight against this man. He's the strongest in the ring, been for the last few days at least. Be careful, young lady"

I scoffed, turning away. "He should be the one to be careful", I let out.

A few minutes passed before the match finally finished. And then, the ring's winner took a few for himself before he fought again. Hak and Yona arrived a few minutes later, standing just below the ring. I bent over so I could talk to them. 

"What have you enrolled yourself in, now?"

"A fist fight", I answered. "It'll be fun"

"Wanna bet? If you fight, you might get recognized!", Hak complained. 

"You have the money to bet, Hak. And by the way, nobody knows a woman who can fight barehand and win. So I'm fine"

Hak rolled his eyes. I grinned and I knew the look in my eyes offered him a challenge he could not refuse.

"Let's go, then", Hak said.

"Be careful, Lone", Yona added. I blew her a kiss and turned toward my opponent. 

"Misters and Misses! Please welcome into the ring our forever Winner!, Oran!", shouts echoed all around me. They already knew they would win this bet.. again. I grinned ; if ever they knew. "And welcome our new fighter! Miss Alna!", the people shouted in confusion, but to my surprise, they didn't go silent. The mister approached me. "Miss, I'm going to have to ask you to take your cloak off. We can't risk you having hidden weapons"

I nodded and took off my cloak. My sheathed sword at my side glinted in the sun. I took off my belt and threw them at Hak and Yona standing not too far. "And now! For the bets!"

"2000 rin Oran beats her in 10 seconds!", someone shouted, laughing.

"500 rin the man beats her in a bloody pulp in a minute!"

"1500 rin for her to surrender under 30 seconds!"

"1000 rin!", Hak shouted and I turned. Visibly, he made some money gambling for Yona. He's gonna make a lot more right here and then. "1000 rin for her to win in under 30 seconds!"

I shook my head, realizing what he was saying. Great, let's just make this end in twenty. He was robust... my opponent, but I was stronger and more determined. The others around were laughing at Hak's bet and I was only grinning. When the bets were done being made, the master of the game put an arm between us two and lifted it, declaring the start of the fight.

My opponent didn't waste time as he ran for me and tried to land a punch, that I avoided easily, ducking low into a crouch. I saw his foot coming in my direction before he even lifted it. So, with the side of my hand, I hit his knee, and he stumbled backwards in pain. I got up and kicked my foot up in the air, but the man was fast and he blocked my attempt to hit the side of his head. The audience was completely silent. 

I brought down my foot but he was already swinging his fist, intending to land the blow in my left opened side. I caught it in one hand and used my other hand to, again, hit him karate style in the crook of his arm. He cried out and I used this opportunity to jump and twist, bringing my left foot in his face to deliver the final blow. He fell to the ground after my kick and did not come back up.

"And the victor of the fight is Miss Alna! The man was down in 15 seconds!"

"Oh, man! My money!"

"She cheated! It's not fair!"

"Bring somebody else! She's not that strong!"

"Ah!", I let out loud enough for everyone to hear. "It's been long since I didn't fight againt somebody. I lost some strength, too. It feels good, though", the crowd stayed silent and I could feel, could see the dropped jaws and rounded eyes.

I only laughed and got out of the ring. I took back my sword and cloak. The people were angry and shocked. But we didn't stay long enough to hear them any more, because we took our well won money and left.

Chapter Text

It was raining. Our clothes were drenched and I could feel the cold penetrating my very bones. Hak knocked on the door to an inn and I couldn't wait to get to a dry space and get warmer. Our travels had been uneventful and nature had been clement. Well, until now. 

"A place to stay?", the man wondered aloud.

"The cheapest room you have for eight people to stay overnight"

"..Hm. I'm vacant. That will be one for 600 rin", the man offered and we finally sighed, reassured to have a place to stay tonight.

"Thank you", Yoon spoke out.

"The lush, green land of the Water Tribe... It's too bad. I was looking forward to seeing it, but all I see is rain", Yona said as she stared out the window. The men in the place were all changing out of their clothes.

"The land of water drenched in rain is rather elegant and beautiful, too", Jae-Ha commented.

"Shisen. It's a prominent port town in the Water Tribe, too, right?", Hak asked.

"Yeah", Yoon answered. "After we went to the market, I heard a few rumors. It seems there's been some unrest on the coasts of the Water Tribe"

"I heard the people of the Water Tribe were temperate", Yona shared. "I can't imagine there being unrest"

"There are a lot of outsiders who go in and out of port towns", Jae-Ha added. "It's only common for there to be a few disputes"

"Anyway, it's this rain", Yoon let out. "We probably won't be able to move any further, so let's get some rest"

"...by the way... Lone and I also want to take off our drenched clothes, so get out for just a bit", Yona said and Jae-Ha seemed to be prepared to stay.

"Jae-Ha, you too...", Hak ordered, pulling on his ponytail.

When the door closed finally behind the boys, I sighed, feeling as if I finally had a break. After all this walking and the stress from the last few days, I couldn't stop thinking and thinking. Except, with chatting people surrounding us all the time, I couldn't think as much as I wanted to. But the silence between Yona and I as we changed became practically unbearable as the time stretched. So I was glad when she walked towards the doors when we were both done and she opened them. 

"I thought it would be fun if we went together", I heard from Jae-Ha, which made me raise my head in their direction. 

"Where are you going?", Yona asked.

"A shop with girls", Jae-Ha answered and I felt my blood freeze. I turned away, trying to ignore the rest of the conversation.

"Bastard!", Hak called.

"...See you later", Yona timidly bid.

"I'm not going", Hak only said and I kind of wished that it had been Jae-Ha who had said those words. But, as I slid down against the wall, hitting the ground at last, I realized I had no place to think about whatever he would be doing and hating him for it.

"Really?", Yona's voice came out.

"Then, I'll go take a stroll by myself", Jae-Ha said and before turning away on his heel, spared me a look. A smileless look. I only took my attention away as I focused on a random point on the wall opposite me. As long as I wasn't looking at him as he left.

"Jae-Ha!", Yona called, loudly. "Be careful!"

And yet, I couldn't help but let my heart ache as he left the building. I stood up then and went to stand near the window. I looked down toward the street directly as his green head appeared and then disappeared away in the rain. I hated how I felt. I hated that he decided to get out those doors only to go get other women's comfort. I hated that I felt like a nail was trapped inside my heart. I hated him for making me feel that way. 

A few minutes passed before everyone was in the room, seated anywhere or standing. I unsheathed my blade a while ago and have been swinging around aimlessly. My gaze on a distant point in front of me, trying to fix through the wall was enough for my concentration to go flawless. Otherwise, any other trick and I knew I might lose myself in undesired thoughts. Again. I might have started to see black dots forming in my vision from staring too long at something. I might have even closed my eyes at some point as I swung my sword around. Anybody in this room should be smart enough not to approach me in this very moment. And so I used this knowledge as I moved in my spot, as if keeping a circle of my moves, perfectly knowing I would not hit anyone.

Maybe it's anger that's pushing me to act like this. Anger at me, at anyone that exists. I wouldn't know, not when I'm trying to forget. And just when I think they might all come rushing back to my mind, I swing faster, hit harder. Imagine there's an enemy in front of me, all around me. Imagine His dearest Majesty encircling me. I imagine anything else, everything else except his green head and what he might be doing in this very instant. I knew I closed my eyes even harder and I could feel the emotions becoming more intense as the seconds passed. And I might, at some point, not be able to make the difference between what was real and what was not. I couldn't remember who was sitting in the room with me, couldn't remember what I was angry for. And maybe this is what I wanted. And I enjoyed it. Could feel myself smiling. Could almost hear myself giggling. I did not open my eyes and I kept swinging my sword around, a distraction amongst so many in this very moment. 

And something too good, a freeing distraction only could make me feel like crap, make me feel as if I were failing again. I kept pushing everything away and my problems were just getting bigger and bigger, taking much more space as I erased one, ignored it. And I could feel my eyelids filling with water, with tears. And when I finally opened my eyes, they fell. They dropped on my cheeks and tumbled down until they raced down my neck or fell to the ground. Until I heard a voice and my spinning stopped. The blade was pointed toward a throat I knew too well. And when I realized who was standing at the tip of my sword, I retracted it. Yona's expression was nothing sort of scared, as if she somehow knew she shouldn't be scared. Not ever. Her eyes told me enough to know she didn't care.

"I'm sorry", I whispered out, my voice almost shaking. Behind her, a shadow of Hak was standing, a black aura surrounding him, as if he were ready to unleash his anger on me. His impatience. I backed away until I hit the wall near the window and slid down to the ground, hugging my knees to my chest. What was happening to me?

"Ki-Ja, Shin-Ha and Zeno tell me Jae-Ha's presence feels more and more strange", she finally let out and I raised my head in alarm. And I slowly realized what that meant. I was up on my feet in an instant.

"Where is he?", I asked, walking to the door.

"He said he was headed to the Red-Light District", Hak said, the anger still not seeped out of his tone. Of course. I should have known that was where he would go. When I finally passed the doors, Ki-Ja ran up to me in a matter of seconds. 

"You need to calm down ; we don't know what is going on!"

"Just lead the way. Show me where his presence leads", I said and he pursed his lips before deciding to listen to me.

Everything felt wrong in his head. Everything felt like it was a blur, like it hurt and dulled his pain at the same time. He would not stop hurting this way much time sooner, that he knew. He was internally screaming and maybe, he tried to convince himself, taking the drug-filled liquor was not a good idea. 

Flashes of undesired memories came back to his mind, making his suffering a thousand times worse. And yet, while his body lay on the ground, he could only feel cold, cold, cold... The pain, the sadness, the shame, all of it dulled by the drug. And yet, he was cold and cold and cold. And things he didn't want to remember kept bringing him back to reality.

Huh...? What's with my life flashing before my eyes?

I don't want to.

I still plan to live to the fullest...

Dying from gulping down a drug myself and then failing to jump is way too stupid.

I need to hurry... and go back...

Oh my...

I already completely consider...

that place...

Home...

He saw their faces then, each of them flashing with a smile. But one shone the hardest. Her black hair falling below her shoulders. Her light green eyes illuminating her face as she smiled. She was smiling... smiling at him. His lips curved as he rested on the hard ground. Oh, how he wished she had been the one to tell him to be careful. How he wished she had told him not to go. He wished she would come now. Would come to beg for his apology, come to make him believe he still had a chance.

And maybe it was a dream, but as he opened his eyes, his face dripping with the cold rain, he could have sworn it was her standing not far away. He could have sworn it was her that fell to the ground and took his face in her hands and shouted his name. 

"Lo... ne... love...", he whispered. 

"Jae-Ha, are you all right?", she screamed. Or maybe it wasn't real. Maybe it was his mind trying to convince him with these images before he died. 

"I wish... wished...", he started then, but could not finish. 

I wished you were the one who had been there to tell me to be careful. I wished it was you.

The cold is... fading away...

Ah... what should I do?

I... I can't help it.

I want to be by their side... by her side... forever...

He brought his hand to her cheek and rested it there, until he tried to sit up. With all his strength, he tried to reach for her face. He approached his mouth to hers, but stopped merely centimeters away, merely seconds away from what he hoped was heaven. Lone could not move. Lone was frozen with surprise. She didn't know what to do, what to think. His eyes met hers and he couldn't help but think about the possibility of it being a dream. Maybe the only reason he was seeing her just now was because it was his last wish. Something he would never like to change... not ever.

He stared at her, hoping this moment would never stop. He was drowning in her gaze and he enjoyed it. 

"We need to get back to the inn", she finally said, and her voice was as angelic as it was in real life. "We need to get you to safety, Jae-Ha"

Jae-Ha. She hadn't called him by one of his nicknames. Nicknames she chose. He knew then he was safe. Whatever it meant, if it meant she was escorting him to heaven or bringing him back to the inn to take care of him, he didn't care. As long as it was her by his side. And so, he let himself fall, let himself break the contact between them and fell unconscious, his head hitting her lap.

Lone was shocked ; she couldn't quite know what had just happened, but she felt like it was a unique moment she would never ever let herself forget.

Chapter Text

I didn't know what took possession of me then. I didn't know why I did what I did. I couldn't even think about the words, about what happened. Not when we were dragging him back to the inn and his screams were shattering the air, making my heart ache the more I heard them. And yet, I couldn't leave him alone as he kept howling in agony, could not be tore away. I had to see if he would be okay. I had to, and I wished I knew why, exactly, I felt that way. 

A hand pulled on my arm, trying to bring me away. I turned toward Hak, and tugged, offering him a dark stare, my eyes veiled. He kept trying to pull me away, but when I finally freed myself from his hold, I turned away from him, completely ignoring him. I knew he still stood behind me, still had that angry look on his face, that shadow in his eyes. But I didn't care as I layed down on my side, beside him, tucking my hands under my head. I stared and stared, wishing he would stop screaming, wishing he would stop hurting. I stared, until Hak walked out. I stared until murmurs reached my ears... until the screaming stopped and I could finally close my eyes.

It was bliss, yet it was pain. It felt wrong, yet it couldn't have been more right. Everything was a blur, even more when he opened his eyes. It felt foreign... to be back on this earth. As if the demons of hell had abandonned the idea to keep him. He had never thought he would end up in the Heavens. Never. And he didn't care.

It was day when he came awake. He felt like he had been pulled from unconsciousness. His head turned to a breathing figure by his side. Lone was sleeping next to him, as if keeping close, making sure everything was alright. His heart beat slowed as he suddenly felt in security, in control. The place felt serene, despite what might have happened. And he thought about it, tried to think about what had happened to him, but he realized that it would be a waste of time to try to remember what he knew was agony. Except when his mouth had been so close to hers and she hadn't pushed him away, hadn't pulled away. She had been so beautiful from up close, had been even more beautiful and he knew that after he saw her, he knew he could trust her with his life. So he fell and slept. Except, everything afterward was still a blur.

And then, from over her shoulder, he could see Hak seated, his back against the wall. The Thunder Beast was staring at him ; as if he were the problem. 

"You should be grateful ; she was the first one to jump on her feet when she heard you were feeling bad. I watched as she searched for you ; she found you first, tried to reassure you best she could and even helped bringing you back. She stayed with you all the time ; she never left your side, even when I tried to pull her away", he didn't know why, but if it had been out of anyone else's mouth, he wouldn't have believed it. His eyes dragged back over her face and he contemplated Hak's words.

"Did she, now?", he said as he propped himself on a shoulder and almost leaned over her. He brought a hand to her face and let his fingers slide along her cheek. She grimaced at the touch and grabbed his wrist as she opened her eyes. She was staring at him with dark eyes. Once she let go of his wirst, Jae-Ha only stared as she sat up, slowly monitoring his moves.

"Do not touch me", she merely said and went to sit against a wall, far away from him. Hak finally stood and approached him. With the pommel of his blade, he repeatedly hit Jae-Ha with it.

"It's unlike you, being so careless. Going to the Red-Light District and being forced to drink something bad", Hak said and Jae-Ha might have agreed were it not for the woman sitting in the corner. Were it not for her existence that he felt like he needed to get away.

"What's this? You're angry, Hak?", Jae-Ha asked teasingly, then took up a serious face as Hak brought his weapon away from his face. "I wasn't forced to drink anything. I chose to drink it"

"Even if you have a reason, you can't"

"...sorry"

"Jae-Ha! You're awake?", Yoon exclaimed. "How are you feeling?"

"Yeah. I'm fine", he said as he tried to sit up more. His hand shook beside him and Lone wasn't the only one to notice as Hak shoved him back down.

"Sleep", he ordered.

"Yeah! Sleep!", Ki-Ja shouted.

"Go to sleep!", Yona ordered as well.

"Likewise...", the green dragon let out.

"We tried to make you throw up what you drank, but...", Yoon started. "It didn't really go well"

"Yeah, I took my fist and punched you right in the stomach"

"That's why I felt like my bones were going to break earlier..."

"Be grateful... the White Snake was originally supposed to do it", Hak merely offered. "I thought you'd die so I took over"

"No, even a punch from Hak would kill a normal person", Jae-Ha said. "I wouldn't have died from the drug, it would've been because I was beaten to death"

"If it's a strong drug, symptoms might come up later", Yoon added.

"It's fine, I'm used to drugs", but as everyone stared at him in shock, he added : "Ah, no. I lied"

"You're too dangerous, Jae-Ha"

"Huh?"

"Dangerous. Dangerous", Zeno chanted. 

"It's probably best if we don't let you go outside", Ki-Ja said.

"What?", Jae-Ha let out. 

"We need to discipline you so you won't do something stupid like that again", Hak explained.

"Wha..."

"Shall we tie him up?", Yoon proposed.

"Eh...?"

"For the time being, today you're going to sit still and sleep", Yoon added.

"Shall I make you unconscious again?", Hak asked.

"We also have anesthesia", Yoon said.

"Wait just a... With my current strength, I wouldn't be able to resist", Jae-Ha defended himself.

And the next thing he knew, he blacked out.

"We're going to the Red-Light District", Hak announced, so I stood up, prepared to leave.

"You're staying here with him", Hak added, turning to me.

"Hell, no. I'm coming with you", I immediately said, refusing his order.

"If you come with us, you're gonna tear down every building in the district", Yoon added, as if in for a fight. I only grinned.

"Maybe they do deserve to have everything destroyed"

"You know what, never mind", Hak said. "Shin-Ha, you stay instead"




"Last night, Jae-Ha fell unconscious around here", Ki-Ja said. I looked around, taking in the surroundings, until more voices came to ear.

"What's wrong, Yona?", Yoon asked.

"Something... It feels like someone's watching us"

"Yona's right", I let out. "It doesn't feel right"

"Huh?", Yoon let out.

"I wonder if it's just my imagination", she wondered.

"I don't think it is", I added.

"Miss, it looks like there's something over there", Zeno called and we hurried toward it.

We froze just before the edge, where a river flowed. A dead man was floating in it. 

"He's dead?!"

"What happened to this person?!"

"He probably lost his footing and slipped because of yesterday's rain... Move aside, I need to clean it up"

The body was dragged out of the water and a long and large cloth was shoved on it. Only his feet remained uncovered, but it didn't take us long before we were on our way again.

"That man... his fingernails were discolored and his teeth were falling out. I wonder if just drowning causes you to become like that", Yoon wondered aloud.

"The people living here are really strange", Hak commented and looked around. I felt forced to do the same. Because he was right.

"Even after someone died right beside them", I added. "No one is surprised at all. Not a single person is even batting an eye"

"UWAAAAAAAA!!!! AHHHHHHHHH!!!!! AAAAAAAHHHHH!!!!!", screaming. Even worse, even louder than what I kept hearing all of last night. We all immediately rushed in the direction of the sound. 

"What's wrong?!", Ki-Ja asked.

"STOOOOOOP! STOP! DON'T COME HERE!!", the man screamed, bringing an arm over his head, as if to defend himself.

"?! Calm down!", Ki-Ja shouted.

"Stop scaring them, White Snake", Hak called out.

"It's my fault?!", Ki-Ja shouted, shocked.

"DON'T COME HERE! EEEK! AAAAAH!", he kept scratching at his head and it felt like he was becoming madder and madder.

"It's not your fault, Ki-Ja. This person isn't sane", Yoon shared.

"Tell us something we don't already know, pretty boy", I let out, my lips pursed as I watched the man.

"He's probably the same as Jae-Ha yesterday. This person is also...", Yona said. "This town... What's happening here?"

"You guys...", a voice called out and I jumped, turning toward it. The old man standing not far away from us bore an enormous bucket on his shoulders. "Are you travelers?"

"Yes...", Yona answered.

"Then you shouldn't stay in this town for long. You should leave quickly", I frowned in answer. 

"Um... what happened in this town?", Yona asked.

"Didn't you see that man before?"

"That man... he's a drug addict, right?"

"People and corpses broken by drugs... It's not an uncommon occurence in this town"

"I heard security around here was bad, but... I didn't think drug addiction was rampant", Yoon shared.

"This place is one of the better ones. There are worse towns in the coastal areas in the Water Tribe"

"What? Worse than here?", Yoon asked.

"Why the coastal areas?", Yona wondered.

"It's because they are on the coast. Kai Empire... or should I say Southern Kai's merchants have been... smuggling in a drug called "Nadai" into the Water Tribe coastal towns"

"Southern Kai?!", Yona shouted.

"Nadai... It's a drug I've never heard of", Yoon murmured.

"It's a drug that isn't circulating in Kouka Kingdom. That's why no one knew of its viciousness at first. Right after taking it, you feel immense pleasure and your pain in dulled, but... little by little, you start seeing hallucinations, feel a pain as if your whole body is breaking apart, and eventually go berserk"

"Is there an antidote?", Yoon asked. "One of our friends got involved with it"

"What was that?!", the old man asked, shocked and nervous. "The only solution is to make him throw it up quickly or he'll have to go through intense withdrawal symptoms. If a person falls to Nadai even once, no matter what kind of outrageous price it costs, they'll try to get their hands on it. The Southern Kai merchants are using those people as rats to spread Nadai around. Once you realize it, many people in Shisen are already past the point of no return"

"It looks like you haven't taken any Nadai, but aren't you going to run away?", Yoon curiously asked.

"I've been doing business here since I was born. No matter how rough it gets here, it'll always be my hometown. I can't easily throw it away. Also, those Southern Kai bastards have expanded their dominance. The market around here is in shambles though"

"I can't believe the Water Tribe, known for its peacefulness and its beauty is being chipped away by this kind of disease", Ki-Ja shared.

"Let's look into it a little further", Yona said, but then suddenly, Jae-Ha appeared before we could take another step. "Jae-Ha! ... and Shin-Ha", in fact, the blue dragon was pulling on the green dragon's clothes, dragging on the ground behind him. 

"It was a rough game of tag", Jae-Ha said. 

"Sorry, Yona", Shin-Ha whispered.

"Jae-Ha, you shouldn't be moving around", Yona said. 

"You as well. Why aren't you staying put?", Jae-Ha shouted. "Stop sticking your nose into this town's business! It's too dangerous!"

"Jae-Ha..."

"The darkness here is much more dangerous and uglier than in Awa. We should leave this town immediately. If you get involved in this, you could die", Yona only shook her head in response. He then looked in my direction, but I crossed my arms on my chest and looked away.

"Listen to me!", Jae-Ha screamed, clenching his fist. Everyone stayed silent as Jae-Ha's words echoed in our heads.

"Even if I avoid this danger now", Yona started. "It'll eventually become a threat to the country. It's not only Shisen. All of Kouka Kingdom's coastal towns... even the place where Captain Gi-Gan is, Awa, might face this danger. I can't back down. I am only travelling because I want to fight the people's suffering. And also, I can't forgive Nadai, the thing that hurt you"

"That's unfair, putting it that way. I understand", he finally finished and I was glad that we didn't have to argue some more. And even after that, as we returned to the inn, I could still feel eyes on my back, watching my every move... ever since we arrived into town.

"It's like she's a totally new person", Jae-Ha finally let out, Hak standing beside him. It was just them two, no women or dragons in sight. "I didn't know she could protect so fiercely, as if her own life depended on it. I've learned so much from just this time"

"There's a lot of things about her that you don't know... and that I don't either"

"There musn't be that many. You've known each other for your entire lives..."

"Yet, it felt like another lifetime between the moment we separated to when we found each other back in Awa"

"I wonder what she was like... before I mean"

"Kind. Loving. She was an angel. Her father turned her into a stone, but sometimes her funny and friendly side resurfaced... when she knew her father was not around"

"I wish I could know everything that you do", he was staring at her, she standing not far from Yona.

Hak stayed silent.

"I'm gonna have to talk to her about what happened. That behaviour isn't normal... even to me who barely knows her", he sad the last four words thinking the wind might blow them away before they sounded out.

"I can't deny it"

Chapter Text

A day had passed and I had done everything in my power to avoid him. Avoid any type of conversation that might bring up what I did to save him. And I might just be regretting saving his dumb ass, if only because of the consequences afterward and the embarassement that came with it. 

But right now, as we stood regrouped in a street, almost utterly alone, Shin-Ha's gaze stayed fixed on a certain point. I looked at him, then at the place he stared at, and noticed the person's presence. She was looking at us, as if spying. That's the presence I've been sensing for the past few days. A few seconds later, Shin-Ha was telling the group and walking toward the trio not far away from us, Yona in tow. And I watched as the trio just walked away, as if in a hurry. So they really were spying...

"Yona... Should I chase after them?", Shin-Ha asked.

"It's all right, Shin-Ha", Yona responded.

"Yona. I've negotiated with a store where people seem to assemble at night", Yoon said.

"Thank you", my friend said. "Even if we ingestigate like this, we won't make much progress"

"But... it really is dangerous, right Jae-Ha?", Yoon let out.

My eyes turned to my green-haired companion. And before he could answer Yoon, he looked to me, as if the answer would be a reminder of what I did and what was to come. But he seemed to see no answer, no reaction in my eyes, because his words weren't specifically to me. And if ever it was, in any other way, I wouldn't know. "I can't tell her anything now. But if I decide your life is in danger... I'll take you and run away no matter what you tell me", he kept his gaze on me while he spoke. A message. To Yona, but to me also. Whatever it meant. He finally tore his eyes away from mine, after long seconds of silence, as if it took him no small amount of strength to stop looking at me.

"I'll be careful", Yona only whispered.

"Well then, let's begin..."

A hand landed on my shoulder, making me jump.

"Then, I guess I'm gonna take you with me", Jae-Ha said, his smile annoying enough that I rolled my eyes.

It didn't take him five seconds after we parted from the others before he started talking. 

"I'll go straight to the point, Lone ; why did you help save me?"

"Because it was the right thing to do. Everyone helped"

"You know I'm not talking about your part in this as if you were some background of my past situation. I'm talking about how you reacted"

"If you're worried about me acting like that again, then don't be. It won't happen again. I'll be the background next time"

From the corner of my eye, I could see him frown as he turned toward me. We were still walking and I could feel eyes on my back, but I could not ignore Jae-Ha. It would send the wrong kind of message. And I didn't want his teasing right about now. "It didn't bother me by the way... the way you reacted. I don't care about that. But I just want to know why you did it... if you hate me so much"

"It's not about liking, loving or hating, it's about you saving me back in Awa. I owed you"

"Well, that came out of nowhere. How much time did it take you to remember that?"

"It keeps living on in my mind every single day I'm alive"

"Why? Because it was me who saved you?", he sang, his teasing back to annoy me once again.

"Because I died. And I came back to life"

"But even then, I thought you would have forgotten that I saved you. Maybe even make up another story, imagine another person had saved you"

It made me angry, whether he intended it as an insult or not. I stared back up in answer and stared at him in anger. "Go to hell"

"I'm sorry"

A few seconds of pure silence stretched on before I spoke again. "I don't make up stories... not anymore"

And I could see him watching me with wary eyes from the corner of mine. I only ignored him.

It was unsettling. Whether it was my clothes, whether it was his proximity or the plan in general. I understood Yona's part of it, but why did they have to put me right beside him, moving like a snake slowly and dramatically getting out of a box, in rythm with the melody of a distant flute... my music his. I hated it, yet enjoyed every second of this performance. You could say I hated the fact that I liked it. 

I watched our people around me. I felt more than saw the rustling of the curtain behind me, where Yoon hid. Zeno was entertaining people in his usual and practical way and Ki-Ja and Shin-Ha were our ears and eyes, our bodyguards posing as one in the crowd. Hak was acting as a normal client of this bar, his eyes roaming over the room, keeping an eye over our dearest friend, whose clothes were as revealing as mine. She was the center of the plan, the center of the show. 

A simple band of cloth circled our breasts. A long skirt ran down our legs, a slit growing from the left hip and growing depending on how we moved, either showing a lot of the skin beneath or barely any. A darker piece of cloth covered our arms with big sleeves and covered barely anything of our back. Our head was adorned with a flat hat, a flower atop it, tied by a string under our chin. A fan in her hand as mine was empty. Chic and simple shoes added some elegancy to the outfit. Beautiful, yet highly revealing. Not my usual attire, but I had no doubt the friend at my side could only wish to turn his head in my direction and stare until his eyes bled.

My thoughts were clear. Nothing poisoned them, nothing steered me away from the reality of what we must do. My eyes were closed, trying to keep the act on, keeping concentration as best as I could.

"L-let go!", I heard and my eyes shot opened. "Who do you think I am? I said stop!"

That's when I spotted them ; the girl who's been spying on us and the Nadai addict harassing her.

"That hurt...", the man forced out then grabbed onto the woman's shoulders.

"Stop....! No..! Let go...", she said before he punched her in the face.

"Jae-Ha! Over there!", Yoon shouted and Jae-Ha stopped his music as I stopped dancing. Before I even knew what was happening, I was running, escaping the swings of arms and the kicks of the legs of people moving around. I brought my foot into his stomach, making him bend in two, as Yona's own made contact with his head, bringing him to the ground before he could lay another hand on the woman. The anger flashing in her eyes told me enough about how she felt about this situation.

"You over there? Are you all right?", Yona asked, a hand on the edge of her hat, looking down at the young girl. "Can you stand?", Yona asked as she took the girl's hands in hers, helping her get to her feet. 

"Ah..."

"Let's get you treated", Yona let out, the girl's arm slung over her shoulder. As for myself, I scanned the surroundings, making sure the people went back to their business. I watched as the man got back on his feet. I frowned, confused.

"He got up... that man... didn't you beat him?!", the girl asked, shocked.

"Like I thought, it didn't affect him much"

"You came flying out even though you're weak?!", the girl let out.

"Yeah, since you had blood coming out of your nose"

"Wha... I'm not bleeding from my nose!"

"You can't rub it!"

"It's not about strength, girl", I only told her, keeping wary eyes on her.

But then, men started grabbing onto Yona, bringing her away from us. I was about to get her out of that mess when grips on my arms, shoulders and waist brought me away as well. The strength in the hold was unexpected and took me by surprise.

"What happened, dancing girl?", I heard the man speak to Yona, his mouth lingering by her ear. "Dance some more"

I tried to wiggle my way out of their grip, trying to tear my body out of their hold, but it seemed no amount of small movements would get me away from them. I turned my head in time to scent a stinking breath closing in on my ear.

"Why did you ruin our night, girl?"

I started punching and pushing, trying to move away, until I stilled, spotting another man as he broke a bottle of sake and started stabbing people, blood spraying. His ugly smile turned evil as he noticed the girl's presence and then he ran for her.

"Run!", Yona and I shouted in unison.

"Stoooooooooooop thaaaaat!", Zeno screamed, landing on the man's shoulders, his arms hiding his face, his eyes, stealing his senses away from him.

"Run away, miss...", he struggled out. "Huh?!", was his last sound before he was thrown to the ground.

"Zeno!"

The violence in the bar was becoming more and more unbearable and undeniably dangerous. We needed to get out of this. "Mister!", Zeno called out. "If you want to punch something, come over here!"

The girl was weeping again, uncontrollably. She was defenseless. I turned to Yona, realizing she was still stuck in the men's grip. I finally ripped out of my bullies' hold, pushing them away before they could again grab onto me. I ran for the stranger and kneeled before her. I made sure she was fine before I headed over to Yona.

"Let go... unless you want your head to be crushed", Ki-Ja threatened, his claws encircling the man's head.

"Ki-Ja!", my friend called.

"I said let go", the white dragon repeated.

"Ki-Ja, calm down. These people are..."

"Yona", Shin-Ha let out, his sword at the ready. "Can I cut him?"

"Shin-Ha, don't! Because of the drug, these people are...", but before she could finish, the man holding her squeezed her arm, hurting her. The next thing we knew, Hak was punching the man unconscious... or he would have been normally... if it weren't for the drug. I unsheathed my dagger, ready to hurt, but the pommel of it connected with a man's skull as I felt his presence arrive behind me. I watched as he fell to the ground with a thud. And when, finally, I arrived toward the others, I crossed my arms over my chest.

"Seriously, guys. You could have left some for me", I let out and the two men spared me a look before Hak looked to Yona.

"How can you say that after you did a flying kick to one of your customers", Hak irritatedly asked.

"Really. What kind of teaching do you get as a Princess", Jae-Ha added.

"I tried to imitate you, Jae-Ha", Yona explained.

"Oh, so you're the bad example", Hak sarcastically said, talking to Jae-Ha.

"That's why it was such a beautiful kick", Jae-Ha mused.

"Thunder Beast! Jae-Ha! Lone! Stop the people that are going berserk in the store!", Yoon shouted. An order.

"It seems like a fire has started from the commotion just now", Jae-Ha pointed out.

"Basically, they're all going through withdrawal", Hak added after giving his cloak to a timid Yona as I was left standing in my revealing clothes.

We watched as a man was thrown violently to the ground but got up on his feet in a matter of moments.

"These guys can't feel pain?!"

"It just shows they're taking Nadai", I commented. "Their senses are dulled"

"Grab the people that seem like they're involved in Nadai!", Yoon ordered again. "We'll ask them questions", I spared an incredulous look in his direction.

"It would be good if they were in the condition to talk", Hak said.

"Be careful not to hurt them too much because they're commoners", Yoon added.

"Yoon, what do we do about the person over there that lost himself to rage?", Jae-Ha asked.

"Ki-Ja! Calm downn!"

"Be careful not to hurt them, huh", Jae-Ha let out. "He really says difficult things"

We were all reunited. At least, Ki-Ja, Jae-Ha, Yona, Yoon, the stranger and I. Yoon was tending to her wounds. "Even though it was because of Nadai, to hit a woman... they should be punished", Jae-Ha angrily said.

I looked toward him in judgement, not adding any ounce of shame to it. He only smiled back at me.

"Luckily your nose wasn't broken", Yoon explained. "With this, the swelling should go down in a few days"

"I'm glad", the girl let out, her face completely flushed with shame.

"What is your name?", Yona suddenly asked and I realized I've been wondering the same. "You were watching us the whole time, right? Will you tell us why?", so my feeling was correct.

"Isn't it normal to name yourself first?", the girl let out, still trembling. "You guys are suspicious. You're wearing strange clothing...", that I agreed with. I couldn't wait to change out of these. "...and you're going around town investigating things! I thought you were a danger but then you go and flying kick someone!"

"That's you, Yona dear", Jae-Ha called out.

"Ehh! Jae-Ha, you're wearing Kai Empire clothing!"

"It's probably Shin-Ha's mask", Ki-Ja wondered aloud.

"Says the guy with his clawed hand out", I said.

"No. Why don't you guys notice already? You're all suspiciously-looking", I turned toward Yoon.

"Just a reminder that you were the one who made me wear these", I pointed out, fisting my hands around parts of the skirt.

"And you look ravishing", Jae-Ha complimented, an hungry look on his face.

"Shut up, you pervert!"

"My name is Yona. For various reasons, we're traveling around. We heard that drugs have run rampant in this area so we came to investigate"

"Yona... it's the same name as the Princess who disappeared from Hiryuu Castle", the girl mumbled. "Now that I think about it, someone called you "Princess" as well", the look on Yona's and Ki-Ja's face was pure shock.

"Yeah! She has the same name as Princess Yona. As a joke, we all call her Princess", Yoon lied.

"Hmm..."

"I thought it was something like that. You guys came up with a ridiculous nickname", Yona laughed.

"So you said that you were investigating the drugs", the girl brought the conversation back to the real subject. "But for what reason..."

"Hey", Hak greeted as he came back. "I tied those guys that went berserk with a rope, but they are definitely heavy users. They're still going wild, asking for drugs"

"Any news?", Yoon asked.

"A few of them got it from random places, but the rest... Hey, droopy eyes. The store called Suirei ; that's the place where you were giving the drug before, right? Those guys said that they bought it from there"

"It seems like we have to go to that store, Jae-Ha", Yoon muttered. 

"You wouldn't really tell us the location of the store", Hak went on.

"It's in the Red-Light district. It must not be so hard to find. Narrow it down", I added.

"Even if you shut your mouth, we can ask those other guys", Hak continued.

"...I got it", Jae-Ha finally answered. "However, when we go inside, you need to obey my orders"

"Thank God I'm not going", I sarcastically let out.

"That's fine. Tomorrow let's raid the place", Yoon said.

"No. I don't want to hurt the ladies inside the store", Jae-Ha countered. "First, we'll sneak into the place and explore the place"

"Huh... what? What are you going to do?", the girl asked. "I know you said you were investigating the drug, but..."

"There's a store that gives out Nadai to its customers. We'll locate the ringleader and stop the operation", the girl's expression went grave instants later. "What's wrong? Do your wounds hurt?"

"You... you're not from this town, right?", the girl asked. "You're not even from Shisen. Why are you going out of your way to stick your neck into something so dangerous? You're not even that strong, but you threw a flying kick. I don't really understand you"

"That's true. I'll practice my flying kicks", was Yona's only answer.

"No one's telling you to increase your practice. Are you also going to the store?"

"Yes", Yona answered and I shot her a glare.

"Let me say this now. You're not participating in the plan tomorrow, Princess", Hak let out.

"Huh? Why? I'll go too!", Yona countered.

"It's dangerous", Hak said as he turned his head away, refusing to start a fight over this.

"Yona dear, leave this matter to us this time and hold down the fort"

"No way... You're all going to be fighting", Yona complained.

"It's fine. We're leaving Yoon and Zeno too. And Lone decided to stay anyway"

"Why are you leaving Yoon and Zeno and me here?", Zeno beamed and I rolled my eyes at his stupidity.

"Yona, do you know what kind of store Suirei is?", the expression on Yona's face told me enough of what she knew. And when she blushed, it confirmed it even more. 

"But it's part of the plan, right?", Yona let out, on the defensive. "We're not going to fool around there, right?"

"Nope", Hak answered. "It's hard to do it in that kind of store with you around, Princess"

"Hard to do what?"

"The plan, obviously", I cut Jae-Ha a glare as he restrained himself from laughing out loud, but utterly failed. "What are you laughing at, Droopy Eyes! Anyway, the people that are going are him, me, and the White Snake barely made the cut... Shin-Ha... better not"

"Why did I barely make the cut?", Ki-Ja asked, but didn't get an answer.

"Yona. Jokes aside, it's too dangerous. We'll quickly go over there and investigate, so just wait", Yona just sulked, dipping her chin to her chest.

"Lady Lili!", someone called. 

"Lady Lili! Really now! We were looking all over for you!", I turned in time to see two women halt before us. A light-haired woman with visibly heavy and full breasts and a dark short haired woman by her side, two swords sheathed at her hip.

"Ayura! Tetora!", the girl named Lili shouted. So that's what her name was.

"My, my, well, well. Which gentleman was it? The one who injured Lady Lili", the light-haired woman asked, as they both prepared to defend who seemed to be their lady. A title I once had. Though, bodyguards... never.

"Can I return the favor three times over?", the dark-haired one said.

"You're wrong. There was a commotion... and they saved me...", Lili said, tugging on her bodyguard's clothing. 

"I see..."

"We have greatly imposed on you! Thank you for taking care of Lady Lili!", both of them said, bowing to the ground in thanks.

"It's a good thing your friends have come. Now you can get home safely", Yona said.

"I can get home by myself", Lili defended herself.

I watched as the interrogation came alive in Hak's eyes and he wondered where he had heard that name before. And as the light-haired woman approached him, both of them seemed to have questions appearing in their mind. And I might have had some too, if it weren't for the fact that these two women were familiar. Ugh... Whatever.

"We're leaving, Ayura, Tetora", Lili ordered and the two women followed. 

When silence finally fell among us, Jae-Ha slowly turned toward me. Even if he was towering over me, he was barely an head taller than me still. He approached his hand to my mouth. "You have a small cut on your lip, Lone love", he said and I slapped away his hand before his thumb reached my bottom lip. I knew damn well my lips were just fine. Flirty, teasing bastard. 

"Don't touch me", I ordered then twisted around, and started walking back toward the inn. "Finally, the night is over. I can get out of those clothes, now"

And I knew his gaze was roaming over my body as I walked away. I couldn't see it, but I felt his eyes on me, especially on the uncovered parts of my body...

Chapter Text

I didn't know if the choice I made would ever be regretted. I coudn't think clearly ; that would be my excuse. I left them behind, left them to take care of that mission alone, because I wanted to do my own research. I couldn't tell if it was selfish or just completely dumb. I would guess that for a friend of mine, leaving my best friend behind with no protection whatsoever wouldn't be welcomed, and even less if something happened to her. But I didn't care anymore. I didn't give myself the chance to. Because he didn't deserve that attention. Not when he was not willing to understand despite my silence.

And so, for a reason that lead to a decision I couldn't quite understand, I woke up at sunset and made my way out of the army of sleeping bodies and started my day walking through the many streets of Shisen. I remembered leaving the small paper by Yona's side, hoping she would be the only one to see it. I remembered crouching beside her as I stared into her resting face and wished for us to go back to a time where our lives were almost perfect. It took me no small amount of sheer will to leave her side. She was my friend, I really cared for her and when Hak was not by her side, I trusted no one else than myself to do the job. But I told myself ; or more like tried to convince myself that nothing would ever happen to Yona as long as she kept low. She'll be fine and I'm sure she would pretty much be insulted if we thought she needed our constant protection. So I left, with every thought angling toward that angelic face as I left the building, hoping no one saw as I departed. 

Today, my mission was elsewhere in this city. I had sent word the day before that I would be visiting, though I kept from mentioning my name. I didn't know if that said friend would have guessed who, by now, had sent that letter. And maybe it was waryness, or fear or something else that tugged at my heart, telling me this might not be a good idea. But as I lifted my fist in front of the door, I told myself there was no use fighting it as I knocked three times. I waited.

And when her familiar face peeked through the open door, her eyes wary, I couldn't help but smile beneath the hood. She had not changed one bit, though it had been a few years since we had last seen each other. Both our fathers knew each other, well enough to be considered friends. And so, their children followed in their paths. I watched as she looked around suspiciously, as if my presence here was abnormal.

"Who are you?", she asked, almost spitting the question at my feet. She lifted her eyebrows. "Are you the one who sent word?"

I brought my hands to the hood covering my face and pushed it over my head, letting it fall against my back. "Hello San. Long time no see", she couldn't hide the smile that grew on her lips as she beheld who now stood in front of her.

"Lone!", she screamed, before bringing her hands to her mouth in realization, as if not meaning to be so loud. But then, she encircled her arms around me and I did the same as I embraced her. She had been a good friend of mine as I grew up. As we both did, I should say. When, finally, she tore herself away from me, she took my hand in hers, tugging me inside her house. "Come in! We're gonna have some tea while we talk, for old time's sake"

I hadn't fought when she took my cloak away from me and put it away. I watched her as she prepared some tea and lay some pastries on the low table in the middle of the room. She invited me to take a seat, which I didn't feel the energy to refuse, so I did. And when she walked back to the table, put down the tray, poured tea in both cups she had brought and offered me one, I only touched it, but never brought it to my lips. When she finally sat down, she didn't take a sip either as she stared at me. "How are you?", she suddenly asked, a smile growing on her face. "I heard you had died. I couldn't believe it. And when news reached us that you had supposedly killed your family, I knew it wasn't true"

A small smile spread across my lips, mostly at the way she was acting and at the short glances she spared the cup between my hands. "Well, yeah. Some long story"

"Some people say you felt too much guilt afterward that you escaped the castle only so you could kill yourself", she let out and took a pastry from the plate in the center. And when she looked up again, her gaze traveled down my scar. "How did you get that?"

"Longer story. Not a pleasant one", I sighed, stretching slightly as I looked around the room. I could feel eyes watching. But I couldn't ask any questions, not now. I had to get her to trust me, even when I knew I doubt I'd get her to.

"I don't doubt it", she said, shaking her head as she stared into her cup.

"Where is your father?", I dared ask.

"Out on some business trip", she answered, rather swiftly. "You know, after I heard the news, I tried to get him to go to Kuuto, to see if the news was real", I stared at her more intently as I tried to see if she weren't the one trying to get me to trust her and then stab me in the back right after. She was hiding something. I only wanted to come here to see if she knew anything of this town's business, but now... I was not so sure. I looked down into the cup. And then, I brought it to my lips. I didn't dare look up to see how she would react, but then, my suspicions about something being very, very wrong pulled at me again and I brought the cup away from my lips, not having taken one sip. I looked up in time to see her face go from an expression to another in a matter of seconds. I acted as if I didn't see and set down the cup.

"Do you know anything about a drug called Nadai?", I asked and I watched as nervosity reached her face. But then, her face darkened, as if every bit the back-stabber I thought she was the moment she gave me that cup of tea, suddenly appeared.

"So that's why you knocked on my door", not a question... but a realization. She was connecting the dots... and so was I.

"I only came here, hoping you would give me some sort of lead on the information I seek, since you live at the center of this whole mess... But maybe, I could ask you different questions... depending on where you stand in this filthy business"

"That's a grave accusation you swing in my face, dear old friend"

"Care to prove to me they are false, or... do you plan on getting rid of me like you would get rid of anyone that gets in your path", but she kept her expression neutral, which told me enough. "So, either you're a loyal client or a trusted, vile merchant", I slowly said the last words, emphasizing each one. 

And then, either from the tap of her foot below the table against the floor, the way she leaned away from the table or how she spilled her tea onto the wood, dripping to the floor that I knew I just got myself in some deep shit. And so, less than a second before men encircled us, I had unsheathed my sword, the tip already at her throat, ready to strike. The tea had been a ruse... to bring my attention away.

"I'd suggest you lower your sword, Lady", one of the men snarled, a long, ugly scar running from above his eyebrow to the middle of his cheek, taking away his ability to see from his left eye. 

"I'd suggest you do the same", I said. But then, I turned toward San. 

"I might not be working for the new King. But I have no way to believe you're not, Lone", she spat out, angry. I only grinned, the rest of my face echoing its cruelty.

"I fled the castle for a reason. I'm only here to help my friend get rid of the Nadai"

"You can't get rid of it. It's too deep inland, too present in people's lives. It's too late for you to try to stop it"

"You don't know what I got rid off before. You don't know what I can do, or what we can all do. So tell me the answers I need"

"No. Though, I doubt you'll even make it out of here alive"

I looked around and sized up every man that surrounded us. It was nothing I hadn't taken on before. And as they leaped in my direction, swords swinging to kill, I rotated mine in a way that kept San unscathed, for I still wanted to talk to her. In a matter of minutes, they were all down, some dead, the others gravely injured I doubted they made it out alive. And so when I finally turned toward my friend, her back against the far wall, her expression a veil of fear as she shook and trembled like an innocent child, I couldn't contain any pity as I approached her, my sword again tipped at her throat.

"Now, tell me ; San. Where is your father?"

Her fear drifted to anger and sorrow. Pain. Pain I recognized well enough. "He killed my father and then threatened to do the same to me if I didn't cooperate"

"Who is he?"

"His name is Hiyou. He owns a lot of places in Shisen, but he can use other places, other owners to do the job. My father didn't want to help, but I had no choice. I was helpless. So after I did everything he asked and accepted the... drug to be a part of our service, he gave me men to protect me"

I turned around at the men laying dead around me. "So these men were Hiyou's cronies?", I asked as I turned toward her once again. She leaned against the blade, looking up at me.

"Their veins laced with Nadai", she spat out.

I stared at her, at the emotion in her face and when she leaned back, I continued on. "What does he look like? That man?"

She rolled her eyes, but then tried to remember. "Light-headed. He also has that distinct scar on his forehead"

"Thanks", I let out as I straightened up and turned toward the door. 

"Oh, and one last thing", she said and when I turned around, steel flashed as she angled a knife toward my heart. And I didn't have time to think before I swung the blade across her throat and blood sprayed out. She fell to the ground, gripping my clothes with a fist, silently begging for me to help. I looked down at her, sorrow painting my features.

"I'm sorry you had to become that sort of monster, San", I let out and took my cloak before I departed. The sun was setting, the darkening sky was still empty of any sparkling dots. I hadn't realized how much time I spent in the streets of Shisen before I made my way here. It wasn't easy finding where she had moved. Giving the letter to a messenger, paying both for his secrecy and his service, was easier... since her name and business were so well-known everybody familiar with the town would know where to find her. I wasn't sure I was right. I hoped I wasn't. But she deceived me... and hurt me. But in the end, I was the only one to blame ; I had searched for her, I had ran after her. I could have stayed by Yona's side, but I didn't. It was my fault. 

And without further thought, I let my feet guide me over to the Red-Light District.

Chapter Text

Yona's POV

"You really are learning how to swing a sword", Lili asked as she approached me. I was practicing. Ao stood atop her arm as she took a seat. "You look weak, though"

I grunted in effort as I swung.

"Isn't that cute-", Tetora started but got cut off as Ayura followed.

"...your swings look good though"

"Really?", I wondered aloud, interrupting my training.

"Yes. You have no wasted movements. You have a good teacher", Ayura continued, surprising me.

"Hehe!", I let out, chuckling as I realized Lone and Hak got praised. But then, thinking about them now reminded me of their absence. I lost my smile. "...Hak and the others... They're late"

"They're in the Red-Light District, right? They won't come back until the morning", Lili pointed out.

"Even if they don't come back, that's part of the plan, too. But Lone should be back by now. She only had an errand to run"

"What has she gone to do?"

I looked toward the entry to the inn and hoped I could see her arrive, if only because I didn't have any idea what she had gone to do. I only had the note she left me to prove she wasn't in danger.

"She probably found another way to gain information. She's unpredictable sometimes", even if I trusted her, I had difficulty leaving her to the horrors of this world.

"I'm really glad that Lady Lili has made a friend", Tetora commented as Lili's face faded to red.

"Wha-", she said as if going to counter her bodyguard.

"Ever since you were little, you haven't had any friends", the light-haired woman kept on. "Even if there was another lady around your age, you would quickly start fighting with them, remember?"

"Be quiet, Tetora. Besides, this country girl isn't my friend", Lili responded nonchalantly.

"That's right. We aren't friends", I agreed, even though my own words kind of felt foreign to me. When she looked back at me with disbelief, I only watched her in question.

"I don't need any friends. If I need someone to talk to, you and Ayura are enough", Lili stated.

"You really shouldn't depend on us like that", Tetora teased. "We're currently getting money from your father after all. Nevertheless, the moon tonight is really beautiful. I will go ask the staff at the inn for some tea and sweets"

"Oh-", Lili began as if wanting to cut her off.

"Hehe. For some reason I'm pretty exicted", I let out, smiling widely. "Conversations between women are really fun, aren't they?"

"Oh, that's right", Lili agreed, smiling as well.

"I'm going to go call Yoon and the others, too"

"Men are going to infiltrate this place?! You just said that talking with women was fun... Wait a second! Tetora needs to get more tea and sweets!", she shouted at my back as I swaggered away.

"I will go", Ayura suggested. "It's fine"

"Wait here, Ayura", Lili ordered.

"Yes"

Third Person POV

Tetora didn't know Yona had the intention to invite boys to this tea party between what she intended was between women.

There was also something Ayura couldn't stop thinking about as she carried the tray of pastries and tea back to her Lady and the young girl whom Lili had recently met. Since they had met and Yona's closest companions had been introduced, the tall dark-haired guy had been just a thought since then, but the young woman seemed more of a Lady than anything else, if only because she reminded her of a little girl who used to hide in her father's shadows, as she did with her friends. But then, as she was about to remind herself of their current situation, about her Lord and her Lord's daughter, and about going back to Suiko, Tetora heard voices... and halted.

"Please stop it!", she turned as she heard a loud thud that sounded like someone had fallen to the ground. She heard a grunt and then... "Please! This is a long-established inn with prestige and tradition. I cannot illegally sell Nadai to my customers. If I do that, the inn's original purpose will be completely lost"

"Lord Hiyou!"

"Oh no. My cut is... What a completely useless person you are. The only reason why this old, run-down inn has managed to stay in business is because I was assisting you... right? You are still in debt. Thankfully, there are powerful people that are customers here. Don't you think it's about time some collateral passed my way...?", Tetora realized with ease that the man's voice seemed cruel and void of any humanity.

"In the first place, you were the one who... distributed the Nadai in Shisen which threw everything to he-", the man got cut off by something or someone that Tetora could not see.

"So noisy. Stop shouting please"

"Lord Hiyou. You're acting up again"

"Huh", the cruel man bluntly let out. "....Anyway, all you need to do is do your job like you have been. The rest will be handled by us. Soon, we're making a deal with Southern Kai merchants at Sensui...", she couldn't hear the rest as she weighed all that she had just learned. But then, just as her thoughts brought her back to her young Lady, to her safety, she felt a presence arrive at her back.

"This is- a place restricted to formal customers, you know", her blood freezed in her veins as she assessed what she could do to get her out of this situation.

"...Oh", she turned around, her eyes empty. A casual smile then appeared on her face. "Oh my, pardon me. It seems I have gotten the wrong room. I am returning so can you please move?", she passed the man but could feel the blow before it landed as she let go of the tray and avoided the punch. She brought her leg up, her knee meeting his face as his nose sprayed blood and he swayed.

He fell to the ground with a thud, but easily sat up.

"Oh my... What's this...? It's the first time that move hasn't worked on somebody...", Tetora started sweating, slowly realizing what presented itself before her. "I wonder if your body is numbed from Nadai as well", but before she could even realize it, a sword cut through the door and stabbed her at her back. The blade yanked free and she could feel the blood dripping down her legs as the red liquid stained her clothes.

"Gee... I was wondering if someone was at our door. I guess I was right?", a man said, peering from behind the door where he hid. 

"You... You are...", the bodyguard let out, confused by the new wound at her back. "...the... Nadai... smuggl...er?", she stammered as blood dripped and dripped to the ground, slowly pooling at her feet. "What if you had... stabbed your... ally...", she sagged.

"Nothing really. I would've prepared a replacement drug addict puppet"

"Lord Hiyou, it's in the open... your scar", a man murmured from beside him, as if his presence was necessary only for this purpose.

"...it's troublesome so just kill her and throw her in the ocean please"

"Yes", he answered as he approached the woman.

"KYA.....!", a woman cried out. "Tetora!", Lili shouted, Yona by her side. 

"Lady... Lili... run...", the woman ordered, lying on the ground, weak.

"This isn't allowed. This area is off limits", the man standing above her said.

"Tetora...!", Lili called her name as she made to run for her bodyguard but Yona restrained her, grabbing her by the shoulders.

"No! Step back!"

"Yona... take Lady Lili and run...", Tetora ordered again. "This person is... the Nadai... He's the ony who brought Nadai into the Water Tribe... The smuggler..."

Yona lifted her eyes to the man standing near Tetora's dying body and chills rocked her body as she made the connection. She stared as she internally argued with herself. As she tried to order herself to take Lili and run. But another part of her needed to stay there, try and save them all, because if she didn't... she knew Tetora would die.

"Hurry up and take care of those two", Hiyou ordered, rearanging his hair once again. Yona didn't waste time as she unsheathed her sword and threw the scabbard away.

"Move aside. If it's a sword, then I'll go", one of the men said, unsheathing his own sword.

Metal met metal as the fight started. But the man's strength overpowered Yona's as she was pushed to the ground, her back hitting the wall.

"Y...you!", Lili tried to call out as she watched Yona stand back up, not without struggle.

"Hmph... You took out a sword so I was wondering what you were going to do with it but...", the man insulted as he stared at his own reflection in the small mirror he held.

"St... stop it... it's impossible with just you...", Lili begged, trying to change Yona's mind. But the man struck again, and his balde met hers. She trembled against his grip, but she kept her fear from being unleashed. His sword slid across hers and he almost stumbled to the ground.

"You brat...!", the man called.

"What is that guy doing, playing around with that little girl?", the smuggler asked as the sounds of swords clashing continued echoing. Lili was crying, helpless and scared. She was blaming herself.

"Lili. Don't move away from me!", Yona shouted and Lili looked up, surprised.

"You sneaky litte-! Who do you think you can protect? You're already at your limit defending against my attacks! The victor is already determined!", Yona let out a grunt as she fought off another hit.

"You're right... I'm not strong... but your blade is dull. I know... of a sword that is a hundred times faster and stronger than yours... And it is not held by a man"

Yona thought of Lone, thought of how she wanted to be like her, like her friend. She thought about how she wanted to be strong, strong like her... so she could defeat her enemies and defend her friends. She heard her voice when she shouted at her when they trained, heard Hak's. All those orders, those voices helped her defend as best she could. And thanks to those voices, as she ducked, avoiding a kick, she slashed across her oponent's leg and he fell to the ground with a cry.

"Gyaaaa! My leg...!"

"Tsk", the Lord let out.

"Lord Hiyou, I will", his "Scar Man" stepped up.

"Y-you...", Lili continued crying, her hands covering her mouth as she stiffled cry after cry. A move in her peripheral vision had her slightly twisting her head. She pushed Lili out of the way as she realized what was coming for her. "Watch out!"

But it was already too late. It was too late when the blade slashed across her back.

"Kyaaaaaa!", Lili screamed in horror as the Princess landed in her arms. "N-no way.. I don't want this... Get yourself together! What... are you doing...? You became my shield even though you have no strength or technique... Why... How can you do something so self-sacrificing?! There's something wrong with you!"

"...self-sacrificing? Me?", Yona let out, struggling to get to her feet. "I fight so I can survive. I have no desire to bow down to unjust power", she stood. 

Yona stood and Lili watched, marveling at her will, at her mental strength. But Yona was thinking about Lone. She was wondering what she would do in her situation. She was wondering how she would handle it. She was her idol, when she didn't even know she herself was one... for the woman at her back, staring up at her.

...

"You can rest now, Yona", a voice came from beside her and Yona looked up. Beside her, Lone stood, sword at the ready. She was smiling and for a minute, Yona was wondering if she was dreaming. She placed herself in front of the Princess, bringing a hand to her cheek as she brought her brow to hers. "I'm so sorry I wasn't there. But I am now. So rest"

I've killed plenty of people today and a few more weren't anything I would walk away from... as long as it meant I was protecting my friend. My friend, who fought... despite knowing she had little training.

But I had started shaking as soon as I left her house, San's house. And then, I felt a void in me starting to create as I slowly made my way to the Red-Light district and it got worse when I learned where my friends were and when I suddenly felt a feeling of hurry, of worry, of alert. And now, despite this hurt, despite this pain, I turned myself blind to it as I offered myself to the men in front of me.

Sounds went silent, images blurred. 

The first man went down at my blade, but then a blue figure joined the fight and silent voices reached us. I turned, feeling as if I would faint. Zeno... and Yoon. I turned back immediately as I kept slicing the remaining men. And I watched as the Blue Dragon halted in his movement to kill the last one. The one with a scar on his forehead. And I didn't know where I had seen that before, or was it something I heard of...? But I watched as the dragon dropped his sword at his side and Yona approached. I could only stare as she cut yet another line on his forehead. A twin to the one he already had. And the screams that followed were extinguised for an unknown reason. I couldn't hear anything. I could barely see anything. And I could only watch as the man fled. The Blue Dragon went to run for him, but halted. And then, echoes.

Distant ones...

Yet...

"Miss...! Miss!", a yell and I turned toward Zeno who was leaning over Tetora. I came back to reality and assessed our surroundings. I took a breath and met his gaze. "You need to help us. Both the misses are in danger!"

It felt like an inner fight. It felt like I had to battle my emotions and my thoughts. I brought a hand to my mouth, remembering the events of today as the three men- returned from the district - assessed what presented itself before them. I looked down and stared at my hands that were uncontrollably shaking, as if something bad within me was approaching. I could feel the explosion nearing, and nothing the soft sounds of the rain pouring outside could soften the thundering of my heart, or the shaking of my entire body.

"Princess-!", Ki-Ja shouted. "How did she get injured like this?!"

"They slashed her back. She's lucky it was only slight, but..."

"What happened...?", Ki-Ja asked.

"A smuggler named Hiyou was having a secret meeting here. It seems Yona happened to be there"

"Hiyou?!", Jae-Ha wondered.

"He's the owner of Suirei"

"And the main smuggler of the Nadai", I added.

"Where were you all day, anyway?", the Green Dragon asked but I only looked away as our eyes met.

"So he had an influence over this inn, too", Ki-Ja let out.

"What happened to him?", Jae-Ha asked, as if deciding it would be fair to leave my matter alone.

"He escaped. He's probably not in the area anymore", Yoon answered. "Sorry... if we had just been there...! We thought Yona and the others were in the bath..."

The door to the room beside this one slid open and Zeno appeared. "Kiddo! Come help with the miss over here!"

The voices went silent once more as the lines between reality and falsehood blurred. I brought fingers to my temples as I rubbed them, as if it would ease the pain. I opened my eyes then and started walking toward the door in a hurry to get out of here. I would explode if I didn't get out. But then, a hand encircled my wrist and pulled me toward its owner. My head almost slammed right into Hak's as his grip hurt the harder he held me. His eyes were dark and mean and angry.

"Where do you think you're going?"

"As far as I'm concerned, you're not my dad ; so the answer is not any of your business", I spat out.

I could see the restraint in his face, could see how much he wanted to hurt me, punch me for my absence.

"If you had been there, none of this would have happened", I could feel tears building up behind my eyelids, could feel the blame in his every words. "I don't know what's going on with you, but I don't care. You need to get yourself together"

I wanted to scream the truth at him, scream it and not give a fuck. But I only pulled myself out of his grip and ran out of the inn. I hadn't realized I had a hand on the hilt of my sword before I took it off.

Once I arrived outside, the rain cold against my skin, panting, I stopped. I wanted to scream, in pain, in anger. I was tired, tired of it all. I couldn't continue living like this, where even reality slowly became a nightmare in itself. I could not continue living hoping I would wake up. Hoping I would wake up from in between my parents at Hakkon House as if none of this really happened, as if it was just another silly little nightmare. But I knew... knew damn well that this was reality. I made to walk, made to run away, as far as I could. I meant to get far, far away from here, far from everyone and everything and just avoid everything that was my sad reality. But a hand landed on my shoulder and vulnerable as I was, I grabbed the hand in mine- male -, squeezed it as I unsheathed a small dagger at my hip and brought it to the stranger's neck. But as I noticed his green hair amidst the pouring rain, I stopped. I didn't slash his throat like my mind was begging me to. I didn't harm him in any way. And I didn't know what he saw that made hope sparkle in his gaze, but it disappeared the moment I backed away from him.

A look of resentment replaced the anger on my face as I let the tears fall on my cheeks, joining the rain splattered on my skin. My breaths were heavy. I was scared and broken. I turned away from him, hoping he could understand the meaning in my move.

"This is not the time, Jae-Ha. Really not the time...", I whispered the last words as if not knowing he could not hear me in the heavy pouring. "Go back inside"

"What if I don't want to?", he half-screamed and I turned toward him in disbelief. Impatience was growing within me and I didn't know if I could contain it all a moment longer. 

"Just... just go back inside, Jae-Ha. I don't want to play dumb little innocent girl and her savior. Not tonight"

"I'm not here to play", he said, approaching a step. I backed away and he stopped advancing. I looked up at him and I couldn't tell if he knew I was crying.

"Please", I begged. "I need you to go back inside"

"You need me to, but you don't want me to"

I shook my head, turning away from him. "It's not the time for that sort of talk. Leave me alone, please"

"If you really wanted to be alone, Lone, you would have ran away by now, don't you think?"

"Running is futile when I know you'll follow me despite my protests!"

He didn't say anything else. I turned back toward him, and I couldn't tell if my heart wanted him to answer, wanted him to keep soothing it, slowly but surely. 

"Can't you see that I'm unwell?! Don't you understand why I want to be alone?!”, I asked desperately.

“I know that it’s not that you wanted to be alone, it’s that you didn’t want anyone to see you in this state”

“You count as one of those people, asshole”, I screamed at him, wanting him to understand. And maybe my heart was fighting my mind in this very moment, because I couldn't decide what I wanted. 

“I don’t want to count as one of them, though! I don't want to be the reason of your pain ; I don't want to run away from it! Please, enlighten me! I want to understand!"

“You can’t!", I howled back at him. My hands were shaking even more uncontrollably now. My heart was pounding against my chest. I felt as if I was going to explode and any minute, I felt consciousness leave my body. My dagger fell to the ground and I brought my hands to my head in an attempt to extinguish the pain, the agony. "You will never understand me, Jae-Ha! No matter what you do! It hurts everywhere ; in my mind, in my heart, in my soul! I can’t stand living like this every day and waking up in the middle of the night feeling as if I just died, again and again-!"

Surprise lashed through my body as arms encircled me and a hand landed on the side of my head as it rested on his chest. I went silent, straightening. I was shocked. But as exhaustion started to take control over my body and despite what I wanted to think... I felt better in the comfort of his arms.

Chapter Text

It was another inner battle to get back to the inn. Hak's eyes were following me everywhere and it was almost like he wanted to kill me ; which scared me. Because if it ever came to that, I didn't think I'd be able to duel my own best friend. Even though I didn't know if that title was still of use. I really had thought that it was getting better, that our friendship was getting better. But it seemed that everytime I had even a little difficulty with my past and my current situation, which made my emotions show apparently too much, well he put up the wall again and treated me like worse than crap. And I would like for him to understand my pain, but I didn't want him to know any of the reasons of that pain. It made it worse, but I couldn't speak to him about it, couldn't dare look him in the eye after I told him everything. Even then, it would probably lead to telling everyone else ; a situation I'd rather avoid and a conversation I'd rather not have.

So that's why, after escaping his looks and the blade of his guando, I made my way to the other room and sat beside Tetora, Lili's bodyguard. She was laying on her back, contrary to Yona and her eyes were closed. She was stable, not out of death's claws yet, but if nothing happened that could disturb her healing, she should be fine, which I really hoped she would be. Because in the end, it really was my fault. If I had been there, she might have escaped that wound and it might have meant Yona was left unscathed as well. If I had been there, everything would have been different. Because my little quest didn't mean anything if we got to know everything anyway... without the information I got. And maybe through all of that, I had a thought or two left for San, that friend I liked very much and whose death was - I hoped - not in vain. As long as it saved my ass... selfish I know, but I knew where my priorities lied. 

I eventually looked down to her resting body and I stared at her pale face. I searched for her hand, laying by her side and took it in mine. 

"You deserved better. I might not know who you are ; I might not be your friend or your ally, but you didn't deserve that... getting injured for the sake of my friends. I should have been the one who was attacked, not you. But even then, what is done is done. I understand how you feel ; I understand that pain and I wish you didn't have to go through that"

From the corner of my eyes, I could see movement. When I lifted my head toward the source of that movement, I immediately saw her eyes fluttering open. She turned her head toward me then and she wasn't surprised to see me there.

"You blame yourself for something none of us saw coming. I don't blame you"

"It's not about you really"

"Hmm. That dark-haired man...", she whispered lower, as if wanting to escape that man's ears. "He follows you with that constant wary look on his face. He looks at you as if he wanted to torture you, kill you, lead by pure rage"

"It's really sad that it has come to that"

"How long have you been friends? If you don't mind me asking..."

"Since childhood. Birth, almost. We grew up together ; him, Yona and I"

"Like you said... it's sad that it has come to that...", her gaze traveled to the ceiling and stayed there. She was continuously blinking, which meant she had not fallen back asleep. But even then, I felt shame take over me ; for stealing whatever rest she could get. I was going to get up and leave when she spoke again. "You're so young... but you look like you have lived through much more than the average teenager", I looked at her in shock, but as my traits softened, I let out a chuckle. I then offered her a sad smile.

"I wished you hadn't said that ; if only because I wished it wasn't true. I don't wish to appear older than I really am, rather go back to a time when I didn't have to worry about anything", her eyes met mine again and she frowned.

"How old are you?"

"I'm 18. My birthday was not long ago", she then closed her eyes and I knew then, she was going to venture back to slumber. But before it was clear, thanks to her breathing, that she had fallen asleep, a smile curved the corners of her lips.

The next day, when I finally joined the others after some exploring and time alone, Yona was getting dressed after Yoon probably covered her back in medicine. They were talking about going somewhere, so I frowned.

"Where are we going?", I asked, looking around, from the flush on Ki-Ja's cheeks to the big happy smile from Zeno. I did my best at avoiding Hak's look, even when I knew his gaze was piercing my very soul.

"Sensui", Yona answered, looking at me with a small smile. No resentment or shame in that face of hers, so I smiled as well. "But anyway, what kind of place is Sensui?", she then asked.

"It's another harbor city like this one", Jae-Ha explained. "Before, it was a beautiful town for sight-seeing, but now..."

A cry came from the entry as Ao jumped from Shin-Ha's shoulder to Lili's head. "Yona...", she called, hesitating. The girl was slightly blushing, as if embarassed.

"Lili!", Yona shouted.

"How are your wounds?", the girl asked, approaching swiftly. Yoon was concentrating on tying the ribbon at the back of her clothes.

"It's not a big deal", Yona casually answered, even though the dark-haired girl looked down to the ground, not quite sure if she should believe my friend or not. "More importantly ; how is Tetora?", to that, I kept my gaze on Lili's blushing face. But the red soon disappeared when her bodyguard was mentionned. 

"Tetora needs to stay in bed for now. Her life's not in danger anymore, though", after I had discussed with her yesterday, I had hoped so.

"I see... I'm a little relieved"

"About that. I'm planning on bringing Tetora to Suiko-", Lili then said, sighing. "Oh. My house is in Suiko. I plan on letting her rest there"

Yona brought fingers to her mouth, as if she were thinking about what our new companion just said. "Capital Suiko. It's definitely going to be safer there", Yona pointed out as Zeno commented on how rich she was and Yoon showed no restraint to hide his surprise.

"Speaking of Capital Suiko", Yoon started. "Even though the Water Tribe coastal areas are in this state, I wonder what the Tribe General is doing", I watched as her eyes went empty. I frowned, wondering what her reaction was about.

"General An Joon-Gi", Hak spoke. "I don't know what he's doing, but... He's a calm and cautious person. It's the Kai Empire. You can't make a move carelessly"

"But his own tribe is in this state already", Ki-Ja pointed out.

"Lili... we're planning on going to Sensui", Yona shared.

"Sensui...?", Lili wondered aloud, questioning filling her voice.

"Hiyou is doing business not only here, but apparently also in Sensui", she explained.

"Indeed, Sensui's public safety has been getting worse lately and I've heard that people can't do business there", Lili added. "That man is in Sensui...", she brought her thumb under her chin as her forefinger rested on it, as if she were thinking... about what it meant.

"The damage from Nadai is probably spread around just as badly, if not more, compared to Shisen", Yona continued. "We'll stop Hiyou no matter what. That must be the first step to saving the Water Tribe. So Lili, here's where we'll part", the last part, her voice softened as she turned her attention to Lili. The latter's eyes widened. "It'll be okay. We'll definitely drive them out of the Water Tribe. You need to quickly get to a safe place, Lili. For always getting you involved in dangerous things, I'm sorry"

As she muttered a few words and as she left, I was not looking nor listening. My eyes moved and met his. Met his dark, angry eyes, full of hate and anger and misery. I held his stare, if only because I was scared that if I looked away, he would come down on me with that blade of his. But even then, I still couldn't understand why my pain had to drive him this mad, why it had to become his burden more than mine. I looked away finally. And I did not die.

I couldn't have known why I waited ahead of everyone else, why I crouched atop a hill and waited for my friends. Watched as Lili arrived for the final goodbyes. And I might have smiled, were it not for the presence I felt behind me.

"You're not gonna unsheath your sword this time?"

"I'm getting used to your presence now, I don't need to defend myself against someone who'd rather get in my pants than put his hands around my throat to kill me", I said, standing up to face him as I realized Yona and the rest of the group were heading for us.

"You're getting used to my presence? How? Have I failed at something?"

"At making me scared? From the very beginning, Green Head, you've looked more like a peasant"

"Me? A peasant? Do you realize what you're saying?"

"No", I said, grinning up at him. "But I guess you rubbed off on me. I'm starting to say shit I don't even get the purpose of, myself. How good of a pair are we?", I added, patting him on the shoulder as I started walking. I swore I saw a grin form on his face as I tore my eyes away from his.

"Yoon. Yoon. Yoon", Shin-Ha repeated and when Yoon finally heard him, he jumped, letting out a scream as red rushed to his cheeks.

"Whoa! You startled me! It's unusual for you to speak up to me. What is it?"

"...Take a look... at Yona", I heard and then turned my head toward my friend walking ahead.

"Huh?", Yoon let out, suddenly alarmed. He approached her. "Yona, does your back hurt?"

"I'm fine", she shrugged the question off easily.

"Yona, you look... pale...", Shin-Ha added.

Hak's hand suddenly laid on her forehead, analyzing. "You have a little fever"

"I'm fine", Yona repeated, red coating her cheeks.

"Your face turned red, so your fever must be going up", Hak added and Yona stared forward, hiding her face with her hood.

"It's not red...!", she screamed.

"What should we do? Sensui is still a little ways away... And there are no inns in this area", Yoon pointed out.

"Then shall I go ahead and carry her to an inn in Sensui?", Jae-Ha suddenly proposed and I couldn't help but feel a squeeze around my heart as he spoke the words.

"Oh, that'd be great", Yoon said.

"You guys... can track down my presence, right?", Jae-Ha asked, turning toward the Dragons.

"Sorry, Jae-Ha", Yona said as she made to get onto his back.

"You can sleep on my back without worrying too much, Yona dear", and then he was off.

As we started walking again after their departure, it didn't take long that Yoon's hand covered my shoulder, attracting my attention.

"Are you fine? You've been really silent these past few days. You almost feel like a shadow. You've been absent a lot ; mentally and physically", I rolled my eyes and shrugged his hand off my shoulder.

"I'm fine. I can take care of myself just fine. I don't need a babysitter"

"Are you gonna do anything about Jae-Ha?", Yoon then asked, as if hesitating. I stopped in my tracks, turning toward him.

"What is this question? I've got nothing to do with Jae-ha. Is this some kind of ruse to get me to react a certain way?"

"No. She would never", Hak suddenly cut through. I turned my gaze in his direction, wondering about what he would possibly say. Malice and anger shone in his eyes. "She's too busy fussing over her problems she won't talk about. She's too busy waking up in the middle of the night to go take a breath, but she won't say it's because we're suffocating her", it actually felt like he punched my heart right here and there. I backed away a step and I could actually feel the tears building up in my eyes.

"You will regret it if you one day discover why I'm fussing over my problems I won't even talk about, why I wake up in the middle of the night! And not because I can't stand you! It's because I can't stand myself. But the story is none of your business. The next time you pull on my strings, you're gonna hear me fussing and admitting you're suffocating me. If my fear of you killing me in my sleep was enough, I'd be gone", a tear had fallen on my cheek then, and when I realized what I had just said, I brought a hand to my opened mouth. I took a trembling breath, before I closed my eyes and pulled the hood over my head. I started walking again, not daring to look back to see if they were following me, or see the expression on Hak's face.

Chapter Text

"You guys sure are late", Jae-Ha commented as we finally found our two friends.

"No one thought you would be hiding in a place like this", Hak added, running up to the duo, under protection of the rain.

I stopped just before the roof, staying where the water continued to drench the coat I was wearing. Rain splashed down my face as the light wind moved the hood only slightly as I examined our surroundings. This town didn't look in much better state than the previous one, only worse. My attention turned toward the group gathered below the roof and I advanced a step under it to hear them better.

"...attacked by people who seemed like some of Hiyou's assassins", Jae-Ha explained and my gaze lingered on his face. Then, my eyes traveled to Yona's, who seemed paler.

"Huh?!", Yoon exclaimed.

"Since it was too dangerous to look for an inn, we waited here for you guys", the Green Dragon continued, his eyes still not meeting mine.

"Yona, your face has no color", Shin-Ha pointed out, approaching Yona close enough for them to share breath.

"It was just a little cold", Yona let out and I stared at her for a few seconds, trying to assess her true feelings. Zeno took the opportunity to encircle her with his arms as he urged her to get warmer.

"If we can't look for an inn, then we'll have to camp outside again... how troublesome", Yoon disappointedly realized.

"It's nothing we haven't done before", I let out.

"What's wrong?", Yona then asked, but as I turned toward her, I realized rapidly she wasn't talking to me, so my eyes traveled to Yoon's face.

"When we entered Sensui, we had a brief look at the town, but...", he stopped but got interrupted by a loud scream.

"KYAAAA!", my head snapped to the direction from which the loud noise came from and I was running before Jae-Ha could get on his feet. I couldn't hear the others' suspicions as I was already assessing the situation. Two men were harassing a woman and it didn't take much for me to act as I ran to her and my fist met with one of the men's face. He fell to the ground, knocked unconscious a mere second before Jae-Ha kicked down the other man. It took me a few more to realize how similar this situation was to the one in Awa, where I met Jae-Ha for the first time. I turned toward him then, trying to see if he showed any sign of remembering, but he already was making sure he young woman was alright... which should have been predictable, since it also happened in Awa.

"Are you hurt, young lady?", Jae-Ha asked.

"N-no", the woman stuttered, shaking coating her lips.

"Exactly what happened?", the Green Dragon asked.

The woman still had fear written on her face. With the rain splattered on her hair and face, I could still tell she was blushing from the fear and the humiliation.

"I don't know... All of a sudden... They tried to kidnap me using a lot of force... Saying 'She doesn't have red hair' and 'Take her away for now'...", the realization slammed into Jae-Ha at the same time it did me.

After we had recovered the lady back to safety and made sure nothing else would happen to her, we ended up sitting around a fire a few hours later, the night dark and even darker with barely a moon to be seen. The fire in the center of our circle filled that darkness and I slowly hugged my legs to my chest, staring into the orange and red glow of the burning flame.

"They're searching for women with red hair?"

"It's definitely Yona", Yoon pointed out.

"So those assassins from Hiyou earlier were after the Princess?", Ki-Ja asked.

"Probably", Jae-Ha added. "It seems as if Sensui might be more involved with Hiyou than Shisen was"

"Yes... the town seemed more wild in Sensui compared to Shisen", Yoon continued.

"Damn you, Hiyou! Harassing women indiscriminately", Ki-Ja let out, angry.

"So he's harming unrelated people while going after me, huh...", Yona whispered, thinking. They all looked toward her, as if they had somehow guessed what she had planned to do. If it had been my life that had been concerned, none of them would have given a shit like they did now.

"...Yona, you can't. Your wound is still...", Yoon started.

"Yoon, can you replace my bandages for me?"

"Uh... Ye.. Yeah", Yoon hesitated but agreed.

"Yona", Jae-Ha called, as if ready to argue with her.

"Everyone. I am still inexperienced so I may cause trouble for you now, but... I want you to lend me your strength", Yona asked, that same unfailing determination on her face.

"Of course!", Zeno beamed.

"There is no reason for us to decline", Ki-Ja added.

"Just how Hiyou is searching for us, we are also searching for Hiyou", Yona kept on. "If that's the case, let's go wild. Let's us show him that the red-haired woman is here"

Indeed. For days and days, Lone could only marvel at how Hiyou might be reacting after they wrecked every one of his men and sent them ramping back on his door step, begging for forgiveness. And she might have started to make a name for herself, for Yona wanted to keep her, especially her, by her side. Lone didn't know what to think of it, but still she could hear the many obscenities the men said, about what they would do to her and her friend if she didn't drop her weapon. But Lone fought. Lone fought with assurance and strength she never thought she should have or deserved. 

And through those actions, she knew Hiyou was writhing within his household, no matter how big it was, because she - as a woman - kept defying the scariest man present in the Water Tribe and she knew that her defiance would not be overlooked, as Yona's had not been either. So for days, blood sprayed, bones broke, but they stayed stronger than the men whose very souls were laced with Nadai.

"Isn't the White Snake's hand too conspicious?", Hak asked.

"Why should we mind?", Ki-Ja let out, unbothered. "Injuring the Princess and going after her on top of that. Those two grave sins... I'll carve them into his body"

"Ki-Ja, don't make that face", Jae-Ha called out.

And they fought and fought against his men... until they stopped coming.

Night had fallen again on another tiring day.

"It's been a day since then... the assassins stopped coming", Yoon pointed out.

"Hiyou is still in hiding", Ki-Ja added.

"We're stumped. The assassins were stubborn and wouldn't spill Hiyou's location, either", Jae-Ha continued.

"That's what you would expect from Nadai loyalty", I finished.

"Yona, how are you feeling?", Yoon suddenly asked and my attention turned to my bestfriend.

"Fine", Yona responded with a smile.

"Not", Hak countered. "There's no way you got better by straining yourself, moving around and exposing yourself to the rain. That much I'm aware of"

Yona pouted in anger.

"Then, let's stay at an inn, tonight", Yoon proposed.

"What?! I'm fine. Let's sleep outside", Yona countered.

"Yona, you won't be able to move in the next battle if you're tired", Jae-Ha persisted.

"...Alright", she finally said and we headed for the nearest inn.

*-*

"Eh? You're full?", Yoon whined.

"I apologize. With the guests who just checked in a moment ago, it's full", the man explained.

"What's with that? It was small and seemed like the cheapest inn", Yoon continued. The man let out a nervous and timid laugh. But then, Hak approached and showed him the card that listed the prices, to which Yoon realized it might not have been so cheap in the end.

"There's nothing we can do about it, Yoon. Let's go", Yona urged and I followed without arguing.

As we walked out, Jae-Ha announced he would be going back in to investigate the Nadai's possible presence. And so we waited.

"A store on 3rd street called Utsuro?", Yona wondered aloud after Jae-Ha had explained what he had learned.

"Right. That isn't where Hiyou is, but...", Jae-Ha let out. "The owner told me that was where he bought the liquor laced with the drug. We'll try to investigate it. There's probably something to gain from there"

"Right", Yona agreed.

The next day, as we finally made to leave for the Utsuro store, Shin-Ha's gaze traveled to the sea and examined the horizon. I stared at the group that followed Shin-Ha, Hak and Zeno staying behind. Yoon and Yona urged me to follow, but I lifted a finger in an attempt to make them understand my confusion. They eventually left as I stayed not far behind the trio.

"What is it? Is there something out at sea?", Hak asked, and when I realized Yona had been left alone without Hak's or my presence, I made to turn and join the others, but hesitated.

"...Ships are coming...", Shin-Ha suddenly said and my eyes widened. I slowly approached the trio, swearing to myself that I would follow Yona directly after making sure what he was saying was real.

"Ships?", Zeno wondered aloud, staring ahead as if trying to see the same thing as the Blue Dragon.

"...From the sea. Many... many ships... are heading this way", and it had been the last thing keeping me there before I ran in the direction in which the others had gone. When I finally spotted their presence, I ran and halted at Yona's height. I lifted my head in time to see Lili running toward us. 

"Lili! What are you doing here?", Yona asked, her hands emprisonned in Lili's in mere instants.

"Isn't it obvious? I came to beat up Hiyou!", she shouted, determined. Her words made a tentative smile appear on my face. 

"What?! Where are Ayura and Tetora?!", Yona asked and I was wondering the same thing.

"It's fine. I hired some bodyguards", Lili started and turned around toward the people that acted as her bodyguards. "Look, they're over there", she added and my eyes followed. I could hear Yona's words but my brain did not register any noise other than pure silence. The smile dropped as I realized who our new friend had been talking about. My heart thundered through my head and fear and anger glittered in my eyes as I met Soo-Won's.

Chapter Text

I couldn't move. Couldn't even think clearly. Freely. What was I supposed to do? What if I moved or talked or blinked and I was back in Kouka, shackles binding my wrists behind my back. What if I was about to die yet again and there was nothing... no one to stop it. So I didn't move, didn't talk. I felt bile rushing up my throat, but I didn't throw up, couldn't let anyone know I was feeling bad. So I let the nausea burn my insides, for as long as I let it, for as long as my own stomach allowed it.

I couldn't stop my head from turning sharply to Yona as she spoke. "Lili... Who are... these people...?", I felt the stinging in my eyes and before the tears could form, I suppressed them... as best as I could.

"Oh, I'll introduce you", our dear friend said, cheerly. I wanted to say it wasn't necessary, and I wanted to run away, run far. Run where he could never catch me, because visibly, even in death, I was still within arm-reach of him, of Kouka, of the fate I tried so hard to avoid. I didn't try to hold eye contact with my enemy, tried to avoid looking at them entirely ; even when Lili introduced us. "These are my bodyguards ; Won, Joo-Doh, Mu-Ah and Gyoku", I felt my head turn then, I felt my eyes drag to Lili's face. Because it was an alternative to looking him in the eye, the boy whose name was another one from eternities ago. "Won. These are my... f-frien... acquaintances ; Yona and the happy performance group. Won came here to do some business. He saved me when some thugs assaulted me"

I turned my attention back to Yona and I saw her gaze, saw the heaviness that lay within, saw the pain and terror. Saw everything that I could not muster to feel when looking in his eyes. Which I could not do either.

"Hey, you're...", Jae-Ha started and I tensed. "We met last night, right?", he continued and I slowly lifted my head toward him. His eyes met mine for a brief instant and then, he was looking up at them again. I could not look away as fear, pure undiluted fear spread over my face, reached my eyes.

"Someone you know?", Yoon asked and I thought he was talking to me ; only because I knew myself the inescapable answer to that question, which I chose to avoid.

"Last night we met at an inn. I didn't know you were Lili's bodyguard", Jae-Ha answered and I found myself looking toward Yona yet again. I pulled on her cloak, forcing her to look at me. When her eyes met mine, I tried to show her my fear, the message in my eyes. What should we do? Should we discover our relations to these people? Should we betray ourselves, only to escape it once more? Should we free Lili of this burden? Slowly, she shook her head and I felt the burden on my heart growing as the seconds went.

"They really are a flashy bunch, aren't they?", Lili wondered aloud. "...Won?", the name made me jump, making me remember in whose presence we were.

"Huh? Ah, you're right. Yes..."

"Hey, did you guys figure out Hiyou's location?", the young lady asked.

"We only have a lead towards a shop called Utsuro", Yoon answered.

"Is that so..."

"Miiiisses", a familiar voice screamed and we all turned toward it. Rather it was fear or reflex, I found my hand reaching for the pommel of my sword ; just in case I needed it, especially in this particular situation.

"Zeno", Yoon called, realizing his presence. "Huh? Where's Thunder Beast and Shin-Ha?"

"It's probably a big problem", Zeno announced and I approached, only slightly.

"What do you mean probably?", Ki-Ja asked, confused.

"In the sea, there is...", he stopped suddenly, his eyes landing on the people at our backs. I frowned, looking over my shoulder to see if they were doing something suspicious, but they hadn't even moved. I kept a wary expression, but I turned toward Zeno still.

"What about the sea?", Yoon asked, making Zeno turn. He was surprised and soon realized he had been lost in thought.

"Oh, right right. From the other side of the sea, a ton of ships are coming here", which was an information I knew, but I felt Zeno knew more than I.

"What did you say?", Jae-Ha exclaimed.

"Where are the ships from?", Yoon asked.

"We haven't gotten that far", Zeno announced. "Mister said that Hiyou might come out so they're guarding the area", he continued, speaking face to face with the Green Dragon.

"Hiyou's trading partner, huh?", Ki-Ja wondered.

"But bringing many ships isn't usual", Jae-Ha added.

"Lili!", Yona called loudly, which made me jump in surprise as I turned toward her again. "Is there an elevated spot near here where I can see the sea?", she asked and before she even got the answer, took my hand in hers. When I showed restraint, she turned toward me, offered me a gentle smile and nodded, asking me to trust her. So I did.

"Yes", Lili answered. 

"Show me the way", Yona ordered and let go of my hand as we ran, following the dark-haired lady.

When we finally reached the spot Lili was bringing us toward, our steps faltered as we reached the edge. My hands immediately went to the rail, supporting my weight, stopping me from going over. From where we stood, a thick dark mass was already forming on the horizon. Shin-Ha had been right. Chills slowly ran down my spine as our friends joined us. My hand traveled to my sword as I felt Soo-Won's presence arrive by my side.

"It's far away and I can't see clearly, but that's...", Ki-Ja started.

"Those are definitely ships coming from Southern Kai's direction", Jae-Ha announced.

"There are too many ships for just trading", Yoon pointed out.

"I wonder if it's a group going on a tour", Zeno let out and I turned my head in his direction, restraining myself from making a comment.

"Are they trying to start a war?", someone said.

"This is a problem", Yona exclaimed, claiming her right to speak, her voice ringing over the others. "They've brought such a large fleet without sending a notice to the General or the King. We already have our hands full with Hiyou over here"

"We'll have to make them return home", Soo-Won announced and I felt the growing ball of anxiety in my stomach hurt my insides even more. 

But to his statement, everyone just stared at him as if trying to understand how, exactly, he came to such a drastic decision. Surely... it couldn't be as easy as that.

"You're right. Let's make them go home", Jae-Ha loudly agreed and I spared him a look.

"Hiyou will make an appearance eventually", Soo-Won pointed out.

"Wha- Wait a sec", Lili shouted, as if getting what seemed like our best plan for now.

"The nearby residents will be bothered by it, too", Ki-Ja added.

"Wait, how are you going to do that?", Lili asked Soo-Won, approaching him. "With that number of ships"

"I see, let me think...", Soo-Won freely let out.

"Lili", Yona called, a small reassuring smile on her lips. "Don't worry. We'll do something about it. You should go somewhere safe and wait"

"N-No!", the lady shouted, bending in two, putting her hands on her knees. She had me frowning, confused. "I... I also... I also came here to figth! I might... have no strength, but... the Water Tribe is my precious place! Let me fight with you!!"

"Lili...", Soo-Won called, but my eyes immediately wandered to where his hand lay... upon her shoulder. And it seemed Yona realized it as well, because anyone sane would have been scared of her expression. "The person with the best strength to save the Water Tribe within this group is you, Lady Lili"

"Huh?", the lady let out.

"Even though it's not much, I will help you, too", he continued on.

"Get away from Lili", my blood froze. "What exactly are you thinking?"

"Yona...", Lili called, slightly embarassed. The others were surprised, but as I stood beside Yona, I wasn't ready to leave her alone in this mess.

"I believe what I am thinking right now...", Soo-Won started. "...isn't very different from everyone else here", his eyes met mine for just a brief instant, but I knew he saw the defiance in my gaze, the hate and fear.

"Lady Lili, do you know of any people in this town that are very rich?", Soo-Won asked, turning toward Lili.

"Very rich...?", the young lady asked.

"We are going to be lending a few ships from them. Can you do it?"

"I'll see what I can do"

"I would also like to talk to this town's fishermen"

"No way. You aren't planning on asking that organization for ships head on, are you?", Jae-Ha asked.

"No. But if we don't go out into the sea, we cannot ask them to leave"

"Ask them to leave... huh. I got it. Then we'll go negotiate on that end"

"Ah", Soo-Won let out. "Then, there is one more thing I would like to ask of you"

"What is it?", Jae-Ha wondered.

"Yona, let's go", Yoon called, but stopped when he realized she wasn't present... at least mentally. "Yona?"

"Yoon. I'll stay with Lili. Yoon and the others should go negotiate with the fishermen"

"Then I shall stay with you, Princess", Ki-Ja announced and I could do nothing else but stare at my friend, wondering what she was about to do.

"Ki-Ja, your strength will be needed over there. You should go as well", Yona added.

"I cannot do that. That's...", the White Dragon started.

"If you're worried about our well-being, my bodyguards are pretty skilled. They'll definitely protect Yona", I turned my head in Lili's direction, sparing her a grave look.

"The miss will have Zeno with her!", the Yellow Dragon claimed, jumping on Yona's shoulders.

"You are...?", Ki-Ja asked, surprised, yet not totally convinced.

"Yeah! Zeno will protect miss with his life!"

"But-!"

"If Zeno says with his life... nothing dangerous will happen to the lady... on the name of Ouryuu", Zeno explained in such a wise voice, I wondered once again if it was the same person speaking.

"...I shall believe in you", Ki-Ja finally conceded as he joined Jae-Ha and Yoon. I myself turned toward Yona, who was already watching me. I could see the guilt in her eyes but she approached me, tugging on my cloak.

"Go, Lone"

"No. I refuse to leave you alone"

"Join them. Don't tell Hak about this"

I felt scared then... Of what she was asking of me, what she dared think I could do, with all the burden I bore. But I could not contradict her. So I lifted my eyes to my old friends, looked back toward Yona, who nodded, and then ran after the others. I didn't know what I had just done ; I didn't know if these last moments in the Water Tribe would be my last, because if Soo-Won didn't bring me back to the castle to finish me off. Then, Hak will. 

And I swore, as I ran, I felt a sharp pain in my chest starting to take form and instead of running after Yoon, Jae-Ha and Ki-Ja, I ran toward where Hak and Shin-Ha surely awaited. And when I arrived where they kept, I felt the burden ease, even just a little. But even then, the nausea continued to grow and my head spun so bad I didn't know if I could keep walking. Sooner or later, my breaths would shorten, becoming uncontrollable, and I would lose myself entirely. But that was only if I didn't control myself before then. Standing beside my old friend, I couldn't say anything, couldn't bring myself to reveal the truth, even when Yona told me to stay quiet. I still wondered why she told me to hide it, if I even heard it wrong, and she indeed asked me to tell Hak so he could save her. And so, as my head started spinning and spinning, and the nausea threatened to make me throw up, I looked down to the ground and slowly crouched over the grass. Keeping an arm around my legs, I put the other to the ground, supporting my weight.

"What-", Hak started, but got interrupted.

"Hak!", Jae-Ha shouted, but I couldn't bring myself to turn around.

"You've returned"

"Yeah, it's really gotten lively, hasn't it?", Jae-Ha sarcastically let out. "I wonder if it's time to rampage again"

"And the Princess?", Hak asked and I felt the sharp feeling of a stab going through my chest once again. I pursed my lips, the pain unbearable.

"We met with Lili on the way", Yoon explained. "They're going to gather the ships so we split up for now"

"Wait a sec. Droopy eyes and White Snake are over here", Hak exclaimed, alarmed.

"Lili has some skilled bodyguards with her", Jae-Ha added. "Not to mention we have to go up against that fleet"

"Bodyguards? I can't trust people that I don't know. I will go.."

"You can trust him", Ki-Ja stopped him. "Zeno swore on the name of Ouryuu that he would protect her, so it's fine"

I couldn't bring myself to get up, couldn't bring myself to open my eyes... because it would mean confronting him, confronting the truth I was not revealing and I knew... I knew very well that when he got to know the truth, he would kill everyone, even me... especially me.

But I also knew that if I told him everything, I would go against Yona, and I couldn't imagine going against my bestfriend.

Chapter Text

My stomach hurt. Nothing could stop the burning pain destroying my insides. I could not roll on the ground, could not hug myself. The only security, the only salvation I had was the end of it all, the end of this battle. I wanted to cry from the weight of it all, the fear and the pain and the anger and everything in between. I could not, would not cry ; I couldn't show that something was wrong. I couldn't let my emotions get in the way of what mattered most ; push Kai's troops away from Kouka and erase the Nadai presence. 

But her sweet face appeared in my mind as she asked me for the impossible. I could not excuse my actions, could not accept my own apology. I had run away from her, left her in his presence, in his company, with others that betrayed us. I wanted to run, run back to her, protect her, but I couldn't. Not when I knew his face and his name would be my last straw, would kill me and destroy me. I could not betray myself like that... even when I was betraying my own bestfriend. Both of them. By not telling Hak about this secret, about everything Yona was doing and who she was with, I was breaking his oath for him, I was breaking and unexistant oath I made... to Hak, to the King, to my father, to the Princess. I was breaking something already so fragile. 

But I needed to fight ; needed to fight them, to fight the pain and the fear, even when I wanted to curl up and die, disappear. But I could not disappear, not when Yona was protecting Lili, unguarded. I could not be a coward, not when Yona showed more resolve than I, showed less fear and more determination. In this moment, despite any physical strength, she was stronger than me... and I could not allow that. Because she hadn't been raised to be a protector, she hadn't been raised like me. So she deserved the life promised to her with her birth. And so, with those thoughts, I would not fail.

3rd Person POV

"Hey...", Hak mumbled, staring at the crowd of young women just beside them. Lone was looking at Jae-Ha with a wary eye. What the hell had he been thinking, exactly? "Are we really taking them on board?"

Shin-Ha was standing far from the group of women, hiding. "You musn't look down on them!", Jae-Ha cheered as the young women screamed and shouted in excitement. "They're Sensui's traditional divers!"

"We look forward to working with you!!", a few girls sang and Lone smashed a hand on her face. At least, that would have distracted her for a while, however short it represented. And for once, she wanted to slap the women slightly more than she wanted to hurt Jae-Ha. 

"'Look forward to it', they say", Hak repeated. "If this is a group date, save it for later"

"Now Hak, this wasn't my idea", Jae-Ha chuckled and Lone raised an eyebrow.

"Lili's bodyguard was the one who told you to take the divers on board, right? What kind of person was he...?", Hak wondered aloud and Lone felt the tug on her stomach come back with strength and force, threatening to spill all of its contents here and now. 

"Hm..", Jae-Ha thought, bringing a fingers to his chin as he thought about it. "How should I put it? He wastes nothing in his direction. I have the impression he's used to giving orders. My instinct told me I could trust him", Jae-Ha explained and she kept her eyes on Hak's expression, hoping for the right reaction from him... for him not to realize who Jae-Ha was actually talking about.

"Excuse me... Are you Lady Lili's acquaintances?", someone asked and she turned toward the group of men standing just behind them. A group of divers and now, a group of bandits...

"Uh... that's right", Yoon mumbled, searching for words. "But who are you guys?"

"We're the soldiers stationed in Sensui", the man announced and she frowned. Soldiers... as bandits?

"What?!", Yoon exclaimed, shocked.

"We'll depart from here to fight off that fleet", the man continued as if Yoon had not reacted like a total freak. "We were ordered by Lady Lili to follow your orders in case of a battle"

"Lili?!", Yoon shouted once more. "For her to mobilize the soldiers... Just who is Lili?"

"Are you guys... really Water Tribe soldiers?", Hak asked the group, turning toward them. 

"Oh...", the man trailed off, clinging to his clothes. "This is..."

*

They sailed finally, boarding the boats. Hak, Jae-Ha, Ki-Ja, Shin-Ha and Lone stood atop the same boat, staring at the fleet far in front of them. They were slowly approaching the fleet and eventually Ki-Ja climbed on Jae-Ha's back as they prepared to leave... in their own way. And so, as Jae-Ha jumped, departing their boat, Lone stared at their disappearing shadow, soaring in the sky. 

She made sure she ignored Hak, ignored his stare and his stance. So Lone unsheathed her sword and prepared herself to fight. And as they approached close enough, a man who looked like a noble spoke, terrified. 

"Th-they're neither... soldiers nor fishermen?!"

"We're pirates", she heard as the Green Dragon announced.

"Arrows fire!", Yoon ordered and arrows flew. Arrows tipped in flame. They landed, the fire slowly spreading as screams reached their ears.

And so, standing back to back with Hak, Lone fought on a boat, swinging to kill. If she could not cry and vomit and die, then she'd use her anger another way, she'll destroy instead of being destroyed, even when she knew the outcome would be as gruesome as all this, maybe even worse... for herself. Hak watched her with curious eyes. He could not allow himself to feel worry for this woman who didn't look much like the version he cared for, could not allow himself to ask himself about her well-being, because she was hiding things from everyone. But the way she fought, it made him question everything. She was stronger and fiercer than before. She was faster, deadlier and he found himself wondering just what his bestfriend went through that made her so... different. So he promised himself he would ask questions later. He would get the truth out, no matter what.

The fight kept on as the diver women placed their bombs, making ships explode. They kept fighting, even when Lone got separated from Hak and even when she should have been overwhelmed, she fought and fought like no woman before... like no human before. She didn't care if she got hurt, didn't care if she ended up so bloody she couldn't wash it off. She didn't care if she died, because what came after all this would be much worse. She didn't want anyone to rescue her, couldn't allow anyone to do so.

"There! Drug puppets, kill them!", the noble shouted right when the Water Tribe men jumped on board. 

"Captain Ramul!", one of the men shouted when they saw his captain two seconds away from the death the drug puppet promised him. But as he screamed, preparing to defend himself, Hak jumped in, slashing across the man's abdomen. Blood splattered, and then Hak turned toward the soldier. 

"Th- thank you", Ramul said. 

"This doesn't suit you, does it?", Hak asked. "That get-up. It may be due to General Joon-Gi's training that a lot of the Water Tribe's soldiers have good manners"

"Yeah... you're right. Pretending to be a ruffian is very difficult"

"Was this a strategy Lili's bodyguard thought of, too?"

"Yes. He said if the Water Tribe mobilized their soldiers, it would give South Kai over there a good reason to start a war. He said we should dress and act as bandits just to chase them off. But... what on earth are you all...?"

"Oh, just think of them as a strange entertainment performance"

"Performance...? Huh. Honestly, I thought it would be impossible with only this much fighting power, but... I'm glad I trusted what Lady Lili and the others said"

"Really? Did a red-haired girl say that?"

"No. One of Lady Lili's bodyguard said... We wouldn't lose because the Thunder Beast would be here", Hak thought he heard wrong.

"...What?", but before Hak could get an answer, a loud boom echoed over their heads.

"Look! A ship exploded!", screams went out as the divers continued to place the bombs and Yoon hurried them on board. 

"Hak!", Jae-Ha called. "Don't just stand there! Could you help me out over here?!"

"Yeah", Hak responded, grabbing on to a rope and crossing the gap between the two ships. He landed before a man armed with the big and long, large knives. 

Because the Thunder Beast will be there, they said?

"Amazing", someone whispered, impressed, at Yona's and Joo-Doh's backs. "They really did overwhelm the fleet with only those forces", he continued as they stared at the horizon, the fleet completely on fire. "As I thought Thunder Beast must be...", he started but got interrupted when Joo-Doh shot him a warning look. "...Ah"

"Well then...", Soo-Won started. "Mr Hiyou should be gazing at the sea around now"

But he could not know, could not possibly know what he thought right now. But Yona imagined. She imagined countless scenarios, trying to convince herself that what she asked of Lone was the better thing to do. She recognized the danger her bestfriend was now in, but she couldn't do anything for now. She tried to convince herself she was doing it all for Lili, and it was true, but what about that ancient presence, that old and bad presence?

"-iss. Miss", someone called and she turned toward Zeno, who was bending forward, his arms swung at his back. "Get on. Get on Zeno. The injury on your back still hurts, right? Zeno will give you a piggy back ride"

"What?", Yona let out, surprised and frozen.

"Zeno is stronger than he looks"

"Yona, your injury from that time still hasn't...", Lili started, but got interrupted by Yona.

"It's fine"

"What's wrong?", Soo-Won asked, and Yona turned a wary glance in his direction. 

"Well, you see"

"Lili, it's fine", Yona said, trying to stop Lili, but it was already too late.

"Yona's injury on her back that she got from Hiyou cutting her hasn't healed yet. Hey Won, you're pretty skilled, right? I'm healthy, so can you guard Yona instead?"

"Lili!", Yona shouted, as Soo-Won and Lili both turned toward her. "I'm really fine"

"No, you aren't", Lili countered. "You always push yourself too much"

"Miss", Zeno started with a smile, but then immediately lost it as he felt something was wrong. He looked sideways and he caught a glimpse of the archers at his back. "Get down!", he shouted as he placed himself before Yona, instantly protecting her with his body. "Arrows are coming!"

Lili, Joo-Doh, Soo-Won and the rest of his men turned toward the enemy. Arrows flew and as Zeno held on to Yona, Soo-Won slid in front of them and shielded them. But before the arrows reached their target, Joo-Doh had cut them down, placing himself before His Majesty.

"Fall back!", Soo-Won ordered, turning toward Zeno and Yona.

"What?", Lili shouted.

"It's an enemy attack! Stay hidden!", Soo-Won explained.

"Have they found out that we moved the troops?!"

"No. The one they are after is...", Soo-Won started but didn't finish. But even then, Yona knew who he wanted to say. She knew better than anyone present that Hiyou had been searching to capture her and kill her for a while now. Arrows flew again.

"From behind!", an echo sounded and Yona turned, plucking an arrow out of the ground and knocking it into her bow. But before she could even choose her target, Soo-Won was at her back, a hand on hers, stopping her. 

"Stop it. You'll get an arrow punctured through your head"

"Let go", Yona whispered.

"Also, that arrow. As I thought, it's a poisoned arrow. It's best if you don't touch the arrowhead. Stay back", he ordered to Zeno and the Princess as he stood and walked away. Yona wanted to scream at him, wanted to shout and counter his command.

"Miss, Mister is right", Zeno spoke. "You can't move around carelessly"

"Mu-Ah and Gyoku, I leave Lady Lili and the others up to you", Soo-Won announced, barely turning around.

"Yes"

"Joo-Doh, you take the back and I'll take the front", Soo-Won ordered again.

"Yes", Joo-Doh answered and he ran a way as Soo-Won ran the other.

Zeno watched Yona as she looked to the ground, a shadow hovering over her eyes. He rubbed the top of her head, trying to soothe her anger. "What is it, Zeno?", Yona finally asked.

"It's because Miss isn't calm when that Mister is around", he pointed out. "The reason why Mister stopped your bow earlier was because he was concerned about the Miss' back injury"

"That's impossible", Yona mumbled.

"Mm... Well, what Zeno wants to say is... Right now, the Miss only has one enemy. Miss is smart. If the Miss truly decides to make a move... Zeno will help", so he did. He did not stop her when she raised the bow again. She caught Soo-Won's presence up on a balcony. An arrow flew above his head a few moments later and she searched for the man who had shot that arrow. She pointed her next one in his direction and shot, the arrow landing in his heart.

"Miss", Zeno called again as she turned, meeting Soo-Won's gaze before she walked away. She continued shooting at the enemy, Zeno at her back, keeping an eye on their surroudings, until Joo-Doh arrived near them, his twin swords unsheathed.

"I would like it if you didn't move around as much", he said, stopping in his tracks.

"...I will move according to my own decisions", Yona said, not meeting his eyes. "I am the one being targeted. It would be best for you not to be close to me"

For a moment, Joo-Doh remembered the times when they were younger, when she was just a tiny spoiled child. He used to hate how she was, how her Princess blood really suited her. But now... he found himself missing those times. How he never wished for her death, her fate to happen. He had prayed and prayed for her to be alive, somewhere his eyes couldn't reach. But as he took a fighting stance, an enemy approaching, he realized he could not get out of the path he had chosen, he could not betray Soo-Won, not when his true loyalty lied with him.

"What is it?"

"Another brawl...?"

"Look! What is that?"

"The ships off the coast are burning!"

Citizens started to pour around them and soon, they were not alone anymore.

"I guess the scuffle off the coast would make the citizens alarmed", Soo-Won let out.

"We need to quickly find Hiyou or else", Lili pointed out.

"If we think about the fleet from Kai... Hiyou must have lost a majority of his men. However, he also put a small amount of his men over here", Soo-Won continued, his chin between his index finger and thumb.

Yona started to sway, closer and closer to unconsciousness, closer to slumber.

"Kill"

"Kill"

She heard, turning around, searching for that feeling that something was going to go wrong. Murmurs encircled her, becoming more and more persistent.

"Kill"

"Absolutely"

"You can't run"

She continued to dance on her heels, searching for the voice among everyone's cruel face.

"I will never forget your face"

And before she could see it, Zeno was jumping in front of her. "Miss!"

To his voice, the people turned and could only watch as the man with a scarred forehead ran, delirious with revenge, toward Yona, a sword in his hand.

"Ze-!", Yona screamed, but got cut off when steel met flesh. She stared, waiting for the moment of truth and then allowed her eyes to watch what really happened.

Before Zeno, an arm raised, Hak had taken the hit. Rage and revenge shone in his eyes. Lone, who arrived mere seconds later, watched the scene develop. She kept her eyes on his face, frozen as she assessed everything. Terror slowly sparkled in her eyes as she realized what it meant, soon taking possession of her whole being. And as Hak met her eyes, she could have sworn she saw her own death mirroring off his eyes.

Chapter Text

I knew.

I knew what I did was not right.

I knew I'd regret it...

And here we were. I was scared. Scared to my blood, to my bones. I was scared for my life... Truly.

Silence envelopped us as everyone took in what had happened. Hak, standing there, a sword in his arm, looking like he might rip someone's head off.

Mine... more likely. 

"Wha...", Hiyou nervously and furiously let out as he tried to pull the dagger out of Hak's arm. "It... it won't budge. S-step back!", blood was dripping to the ground, but even through the pain, I knew Hak had eyes only for revenge. "My... My business is with that girl!"

It took only one punch from the Thunder Beast for the man to go flying back, a promising bruise on his cheek, teeth and nose likely broken. Blood everywhere, once again. Screams. And then nothing. The others arrived at my back a few seconds later, but I couldn't turn toward them, couldn't do anything. I watched as Hak yanked the dagger out of his arm and chucked it to the ground. He stayed still, standing.

"Hak, you're bleed-", Yona started but stopped when her eyes laid on his face, on his gaze, on his expression. His attention stayed with Soo-Won, but he did not move, as if hesitating. He then turned toward me and the air got sucked out of my lungs so suddenly. His eyes pierced into mine, destroying my very soul. I stayed still, even when my legs wanted to flee. In this fight-or-flight situation, I could do nothing else but accept my fate. He hated me now. He wanted to kill me even more. I had destroyed everything. 

It was my fault...

So he advanced toward me. But my feet only allowed a single step backward before his hands were around my throat, suffocating me.

"You knew. You knew!!", he screamed, the rage in his eyes dangerous and fearless, bottomless. "You knew and you left her in his presence! How dare you choose him over her?! You call yourself our bestfriend, but you can't even act like one!", he screamed, his words a threat and a last moment. I thought I heard shouts, screaming for his name, for my sake, but my mind could not form the words. My eyes were wide open as he slowly pulled the life out of me. My hands gripped his wrists. But then, his fingers loosened as he pushed away someone... I didn't know who. His hands were on my shoulders then, shaking me violently. I could barely think, could barely restrain the pain in my stomach. I felt dizzy and angry... I felt hands around my throat even when there weren't any.

But I couldn't speak. I couldn't answer him. When the shaking finally stopped and he turned on his heels, my legs gave out completely and I fell to the ground, hands around my throat. A hand landed on my shoulder and I whirled around, slapping the touch away, fear blinding me. I turned toward Hak as he tried to make his way over to Soo-Won.

"W-wait!", one of Soo-Won's men shouted.

"Halt! We won't allow you to go any further! I said halt!"

But Hak punched the guy away. He bled and slid on the ground before his head hit a wall. I got up, trying to hold myself together and I walked toward Hak. I ran, placing myself in front of him, a hand on his chest, trying desperately to change this course of actions.

"Stop this, Hak! It's more complicated than you think! If you can't understand that... if you can't understand it all, then you're a coward!", pain lashed down my throat, my voice hoarse. I felt disgusted at the fact that I was standing in front of that man, feeling like I needed to explain myself to him. 

"If there's one coward among us, Lone, it's you", his voice was ice itself, a calm too dangerous I wanted to run. "You've been hiding in your shadows since the very beginning, looking like your life had been taken away from you before it ever was! You need to move on", the only thing I wanted then was to cry and run, but I couldn't. Because he won't pair me with Soo-Won, he won't direct his anger toward both of us, not when we were not in the same boat. I would not allow him to use this as an excuse to his actions.

"You can't always have your way, Hak! You will never understand how it is to be a woman in this world!"

"I don't care, Lone. What you did was selfish", the next thing I knew as his fist met with my jaw and I stumbled to the ground, was that there was only one way to get past this.

Soo-Won's other man appeared at his head and Hak grabbed his wrist, breaking it instantly, earning a cry of pain from him. It was brutal. Joo-Doh appeared then, slashing with his twin swords across his chest. "HAK!!!!", Yona shouted as he stumbled backwards. But Hak only kicked him in the stomach and Joo-Doh fell back, flying through the air as blood soared once again. Blood dripping to the ground and a determination I did not know him, he stared at Soo-Won and then approached him, a fist raised in the air. Hands on the ground, I pushed myself up as blood entered my mouth.

I could only watch as Jae-Ha stopped Hak's hand from reaching Soo-Won. I used the sleeve of my cloak to wipe away the blood.

"Get out of my way...", Hak said, a coldness to his voice.

"...Do you know them?", Jae-Ha asked and I felt myself freeze. I had forgotten... they did not know. "You might have some kind of reason for this, but... they're Lili's bodyguards. They cooperated with us in this fight. They were on our side"

Hak blindly turned his head toward Jae-Ha. "Our side... Our side, you said...?"

"You need to get yourself together, Hak. Lone didn't deserve this. She deserves your apology"

"That bitch is nothing but a traitor"

"You're gonna talk better about her"

"Or what?", Hak murmured, but got no answer. "Let me go"

"No"

"Let me go!!", he howled, punching the Green Dragon in the stomach, sending him flying as well. A hand clutching his abdomen, Jae-Ha looked up toward Hak. 

"That's quite a face you're making. Well, shoot... I can't leave it like this", he said, grinning, and sent his Dragon leg to meet Hak in the face. Hak stumbled, but did not fall. "Can't you faint for me?"

I couldn't leave him to take care of my mess. I couldn't continue to watch them like this. It was my problem to deal with. I refused to back down, not until it was in his damned skull. And so I didn't care who knew at this point, I might as well scream it all out. And so, before Jae-Ha could take up his fight with Hak, I placed myself in front of him, creating a line where stood Soo-Won and Jae-Ha on one side and Hak on the other. 

"Lone", Jae-Ha started, a plea escaping his mouth.

"It's gonna be fine, Jae-Ha. This is my fight"

"No, you can't. He's too caught up in his anger!"

"I can", I said firmly, turning slightly toward him. "And I will", I did not offer any smile, did not offer any hint that I would succeed. I might as well die here. But one thing I had now was determination, motivation. Standing between him and his enemy, I approached him. 

"Get out of the way", he ordered.

I felt the burning in my eyes before I even realized what it was. I closed my eyes, forcing the tears away as I finally, truly, met Hak's stare. "Do you really want to know the truth, Hak?", for an instant, I saw the anger he had for Soo-Won vanish entirely. As I thought, I had found the only true thing that could make him forget about his revenge. I raised my fist then, my hand meeting his jaw. He stumbled backwards again, but still did not fall to the ground. It felt like payback, but still didn't feel like it was enough. "Do you want to know the truth about why I changed so much?!", I struggled to get out most of the words, the cry in my throat threatening to make me throw up. If I wouldn't let the tears weaken me, then the growing ball in my throat would be its own master.

As he turned toward me again, I could feel his revenge for Soo-Won had been put away... for now. His anger was now completely turned toward me. His eyes were clear. "I dare you, Lone. Say it... Say it!", I hesitated, trying to convince myself this was the better idea. The silence lasted for two seconds before he spoke up again. "WHY?! WHY?!", he did not care about how I was feeling in this moment. He didn't care if my bottom lip trembled, trying to contain a cry, he didn't care if fear and pain shone in my eyes. He would never care. Not for his bestfriend.

"Because!", I answered, anxiety overcoming me. "Because..."

"Lone... don't", Yona's voice cried out. I turned toward her, meeting her eyes. She had never pressured me for the truth. She had been her gentle and innocent self and I had felt comfort in telling her everything, telling her my biggest secret, my biggest lie. Since the very moment she knew everything, she never treated me any differently. And I had not fought for her as I should have. So I would not let her fight for me either.

"I'm going to be fine, Yona", I called, trying to force a smile to my lips, but could not even manage a reassuring grin. "It's going to be okay"

And so I turned toward him, the burning in my eyes returning. They would come, I knew. But as long as they fell later, it was better.

"Why. Why, Lone?! Why?!!"

"It's because my life is a fucked-up mess!", I finally screamed, a weight lifting from the balance. His mouth closed and silence fell. Everyone was listening. "The beginning of it all...", I stopped, closing my eyes. "I'm the fool my father would have ordered assassinated if he knew everything I was! I'm the fool my mother loved so fiercely, despite everything that happened! Despite my ability to see the dead. Despite my mistake, one night a few months ago, despite my nerver-ending desire to be different, to be normal ; to be everything that I was not! And my father couldn't even stand not siring an heir, so he tried to convince himself I was his son, tried to convince himself putting a sword in my hands would solve his problems"

As if in a call for help, in a hope that he could hear me, at my side, in my peripheric, I could see his small figure standing, a phantom hand reaching for my shoulder. But I could not turn, could not look in his eyes, not after everything. I could not bring myself to look at him. "This is only the beginning", I continued, trying as hard as I could to keep the tears in a little while longer. "And because of those demons, I lost my family, I lost the place I loved to call home, the place I was proud to call home. Because of a stupid, non-existant dream, a non-realistic nightmare, I ended up being the lie I did not know I kept. So people were right. They were right to accuse me of murder, of everything they claimed that I was, because it was true! But that's not important, right? No, it's no reason to be scared shitless of the person I am. But maybe what happens next in my big fairytale of a life will persuade you, Hak", I could not see his reaction, not yet. I could not face him, could not face the disgust and everything that came with it. "And so afterward, I found a way to disappear, to die. And after all of that... I was kidnapped", I let out the last word in a whisper.

An unwelcomed tear fell down my cheek, grazing the scar full of unhappy memories, but full of promising ones to come. Yet, the weight was lifting off my shoulders... slowly. No matter the pain, no matter the embarassement, the only thing that mattered in that very moment was being free.

"I was kidnapped for a reason that is not worth mentioning", I closed my eyes, trying to erase the thoughts of it all, even when I had to tell it. So I yelled it, yelled it so I didn't have to hear my own thoughts. "I was tortured! I was being kept, my hands tied to a ceiling in a small cabin! I was raped! Countless times a day, I was raped! I barely ate! Barely drank! I could do nothing while they cut me, while they burned me, while they beat me! But to you all, I could not hide my empty stomach, could not hide the ugly scar on my cheek and the many that still popuated my skin! I was weak... But I never gave up! I fought for a future I believed existed! Even when I didn't have anything to fight for! Even when I thought I was utterly alone! I ended up surviving. And I killed them all... without sparing one. I could have let myself die! I could have let myself rot! But I took the opportunity, because I was strong! And when I finally arrived in Awa, right when I thought I didn't have anything left, when I thought I was left alone in this crazy, messed up world... I found you. I found comfort in your lives being very, very real... I had realized that I had not fought for nothing in the end. I realized, unknowingly, that I had fought for the hope that I would find you one day. But then, I died... I actually died. I learned the truth about Hakkon House, learned the truth about myself... that I was a monster. I died, Hak. I drowned. But I wasn't saved by you, no... Not my bestfriend... not my childhood friend. I had been saved by someone I had met merely days ago! Saved by someone I barely knew, but who seemed to care more than you! And after all that... you dare! You dared ask me for it all. You treated me like shit! I did not deserve that, Hak! I was just a child!", I started hitting him in the chest, in the stomach, repeatedly, over and over. I started spilling my anger out, right onto him. The tears were blocking my throat now, filling my cheeks with a salty touch. 

"I never doubted your past! I never doubted the pain you went through when your bestfriend betrayed you! When he killed the previous King and blamed it on you! When he accused you of kidnapping the Princess! But I was betrayed by him, too. I was lied to, I was used for thier own benefit. I went through hell!, yet I never thought that what you went through wasn't hell itself either"

I stopped, both my fists slamming against his chest just one last time. Sobbing, I raised my head and froze as I noticed the tears sliding down his own cheeks. My anger, my fear and my pain dissolved into nothing, dissolved into surprise and utter shock. And before I knew what was happening, his arms encircled me, pulling me in a hug. I could not move, not as his mouth moved against my ear, in my hair.

"I'm sorry...", his voice was a strangled mess. "I'm sorry, Lone. I regret it so much ; I should never have done that. I'm so sorry. I am so so sorry"

My head rested against his chest as I closed my eyes, a small smile slightly turning the corners of my lips. And suddenly, all the weight I had felt pressing down on my shoulders disappeared in a matter of moments.

Chapter Text

The fight eventually ended. And so I left. I didn't know if my previous explosion was enough to stop anyone from following me, but I hoped that for long enough, I would be left alone... unbothered. So I let my feet guide me. I let them guide me wherever they wished to go. I stopped only when the balcony rail presented itself to me and the ocean spread on the horizon. I didn't know if it was seconds, minutes or hours before I felt a presence at my back.

It sent chills up my spine, danger spreading from my mind to the soles of my feet, reaching every muscle, every bone. My hand was over my sword in a mere second as I unsheathed it, the blade pointed toward my enemy, no veil hiding the anger in my eyes... the pain. I knew no hesitation lay in my eyes, in my expression. 

Soo-Won lifted his hands up in the air as surrender... or to prove he did not mean harm. He didn't have a sword with him, at least none that I could see. But I bet that there was none hiding behind the flaps of his cloak. 

"What, exactly, stops me from plunging my sword into your heart, which would inevitably kill you?", I whispered, the wind taking my question to him.

He did not smile, did not falter. He, as well, had no hesitation clouding his judgement. "Nothing is stopping you, Lone"

"Do not speak that name", I let out, my voice a growl.

"I just want to talk to you. Nothing else. I promise I will leave afterward. Truthfully"

Hidden behind a nod, my chin thrown toward him, I urged him on. I let my arm fall down to my side, but I didn't sheath my sword still. I invited him to speak - I did not allow him to approach me. And he made no move to do so.

"I- Despite everything that happened between us, I still feel the same about you... Lone", he explained, no flush reddening his cheeks, only pure and undiluted truth. He meant every word and I didn't know if they were meant to hurt me or use me. I didn't know if it was because he only wanted me to know. And so, I could not hide my surprise as my eyes widened and my traits softened. But in a matter of moments, I willed my face into neutrality.

"Mine, however distrusting, have vanished a long time ago"

"I'm glad that you built yourself a new life... really. You seem happy... despite everything that happened", I raised my sword again in his direction, a threat in every move. 

"Those words were not meant for your ears, King, so I'd advise against mentioning any part of it"

"I'm glad you found someone else, is what I wanted to say", my eyes widened once again, but only for a brief instant. I knew who he was talking about, but I couldn't possibly guess how he had known about Jae-Ha. I didn't say anything.

"When we meet again, you will probably drag me back to Hiryuu Castle to throw upon me the consequences of my crimes", I randomly spat, lowering my sword.

He shrugged, as if enough of an answer to my question. "I wouldn't know. Bye, Lone", he turned on his heels and disappeared in the dark of the corridor. He had left.

I didn't have time to tell him never to say my name ever again. I didn't have time to say anything really. But everything would come eventually. Everything, including my public execution, would come eventually.

It took mere minutes before she left her perch. But she couldn't join the others, no, not yet. She was not ready, not nearly ready to face them. So she went down the hill and sat in the grass. For infinite minutes, she only stared at the drifting sea, at the setting sun. Until her heart dulled to the sound of his voice, until he sat next to her.

"Go away, Jae-Ha", she found herself saying, pushing him away as always. "I want to be alone for a while"

"We can be alone together, then", he mused, a grin displayed on his lips. She slowly turned toward him, offering him an incredulous look.

"It doesn't work like that, Genius"

"Wow, now you're calling me a genius. I'm starting to think you're complimenting me, Lone Love", he teased. She let out a shy laugh, trying to hold it in. Silence fell.

She didn't want to talk, didn't want the pressure of having another presence at her side, but she felt serene in this moment, felt in security, in control. She allowed her eyes to close, even just for a few seconds as she smelled the sea-salted air. She breathed in as Jae-Ha watched, what he didn't know was envy and care and maybe a little bit of lust among other things. Maybe a small hint of love. Then she finally opened her eyes, meeting his. 

"What?", she let out.

"Nothing", he responded, tearing his eyes away. She shrugged it off, her eyes returning to the eternal beauty of a sunset above the sea. But it didn't last long before he turned his head toward her once again. She could feel him looking into her very soul, could see him in the corner of her eyes. Uncontrolled, a laugh came out of her mouth, disrupting their peace. She looked back toward him, red drawing near her face, her cheeks. But she couldn't do anything as her eyes met his and he didn't even answer. He didn't say anything, didn't react at all. He only stared at her with those eyes she felt immensely drawn to.

"Stop looking at me like that", she said, her voice serious as she felt the flush deepen.

"I'm not looking at you in any special way, Lone Love", he said, his gaze still pinned on her, awe dancing in his eyes.

She lost her smile then and turned toward him once again. Seeing the look in her face, Jae-Ha leaned back in the grass, putting his weight in his arms. "You know, if you continue looking at me like that, you might make me fall for you", to that she only rolled her eyes and shook her head in disbelief. She rose to her feet then.

"You should stop saying shit like that ; it's becoming less and less funny", she said, no conviction in her voice.

She decided only then that she would join the others. Jae-Ha's reaction would have been a push in her back, trying to convince her that not everything in life deserved to be looked down upon or distrusted. She felt free. After everything, the burden of pain and deceit and everything in between had lightened so much she wasn't sure how it could be possible. And yet it was.

She lost her smile as she realized that whatever happened between her and Jae-Ha... she wasn't ready to love like that... not yet. Maybe soon, but not yet. Maybe with someone else, someone that wasn't Jae-Ha. It is true that she feels a strong attraction toward him and thought earlier that these were feelings she was developping toward him, but maybe it wasn't a good idea to get attached. He was much older and the kind of guy who could tease and make any girl fall to his feet. Why would she settle over a guy would look at anyone else when she wasn't around? Why would she stoop so low? And he knew the truth about her now, which made any reality where he loved her impossible.

Yet, it wasn’t true. Knowing her story, her past had made him understand her pain. If more than that, it had made him care more. It had made him realize she needed to be cherished more than she let on. He might have developed a need to protect her, to cherish her, to care for her like his life depended on it. He wanted her to be his. He wanted to love so fiercely she could not believe it herself. So when he said he thought he was falling for her, he was truthful and it made him realize no amount of rejection or pushing him away over and over would make him back down. Because he did care too much. And he might have already been in love, before he even realized that he was falling.

He didn’t realize yet that he’d already hit rock bottom.

Chapter Text

"What?", Lili let out. I turned around to the sound of her voice, my eyes landing on Yona before dragging toward the other young lady. "You're leaving tomorrow?"

"Yep", Yona answered, a small smile on her lips. "Our fight with Hiyou ended and there are more soldiers, too"

"R-right... Actually, I'm returning to Suiko soon, too"

"Oh, is that so? Well then, Lili, take care"

"You, too", Lili left with a sad expression on her face and I met with Yona's eyes a moment later.

"Well, that was an abrupt goodbye. Don't you think it should have been smoother, Yona?"

She looked like regret was gonna plague her at any moment. She was hesitating about how to feel.

"It's okay, Yona", I said, putting a hand on her shoulder. "You can invite her to have a meal with us if we see her again"

I left her alone, deciding it might be best if she chose on her own. I joined my dark-haired friend, with whom my relation was similar to before. Arms crossed, I stood at his side, a grin plastering my face. He half turned toward me, eyeing me with playful wariness.

"What's that mischievious expression for?", he asked, a smile of his own appearing on his face.

"What do you think of it all?"

"What do you mean?"

I turned my head in his direction, meeting his eyes, disbelief inked all over my face.

"In the end, what are your thoughts? After all of this?", I dragged my gaze away from his and he did the same, eyeing the woman he loved from afar.

"A lot happened. It's difficult to have anything to say on so many things"

"It's not, really"

"Then, what are your thoughts?"

"I think...", I eyed Yona as she turned toward Yoon, who had called her name, a smile on her face. "I think the future is going to be easier. I think that whatever is ahead of us... it will be easier"

He escaped a loud laugh, putting a hand to his chest. I turned to him, offering him a long dark look.

"What the hell was that for?", but before I knew what was going on, his arm was around my shoulder, imprisonning my head. Like a child, he ruffled my hair. I tried to fight my way out, but he was slightly stronger than me... and I was laughing uncontrollably.

"You're too serious, Lone. You need to cool down"

He finally freed me and I took the opportunity to punch him in the arm. He continued laughing, rubbing the spot I had punched. "I hope it leaves a bruise. I was trying to be contemplative after everything we've been through, stupid"

He continued laughing, the sound a rumble through the earth, in the space between us. I shook my head in disbelief, looking away from him. 

I couldn't hide the joy in my face ; didn't have the strength to. Not after so much effort spent fighting my inner self. It felt good to finally be able to feel so happy, so light. Even when I knew a simple kick in the legs would send me to the ground, I still stood.

"Lili!", the call came from my friend's mouth. I turned, happy to see the lady appear, flanked by her two bodyguards. Beside her, Zeno greeted them, a hand in the air. "Ayura and Tetora, too!"

The bodyguards fell to the ground, bowing before us.

"It's been a while everyone. We're very grateful to you for helping Lady Lili", Tetora said.

"I'm glad we got to see you", Yona said as the women got on their feet.

"Great timing. We were about to go and find Lili", Jae-Ha suddenly said.

"Eh?", Lili let out, confused.

"Parting like we did was so dreary. Let's have dinner together tonight"

"Yona...", Lili started but eventually started screaming. "You were the one who said, "Take care"!"

"Eh?"

"Don't say it was dreary so casually! Your "what's the problem?" face is making me mad!!"

"Eh? It was actually Lone's idea, though. I'm sorry for the misunderstanding", Yona added, a smile stretching to her ears.

*

"Shrimp, crab, clams...", Zeno chanted, seated before the food Ayura and Tetora had brought.

"Lili and her girls sure threw in a bunch", Jae-Ha said, adding another bowl of food to the mix.

"Wow, you're good at this", Tetora mused, leaning over Yoon's shoulder.

"It's fried noodles with pork and onion", Yoon explained, stirring the food, excitement coating his every word.

"Hold on! You should put Kashou sauce ont that!", Lili exclaimed. "It's a staple spice of the Water Tribe"

"Got it. I'll go buy it in one leap", Jae-Ha followed, disappearing.

"Now, I want soup, too", Tetora cried out.

"How about some boiled Gyoza Soup?", Ayura suggested.

"Oh my! That sounds good Ayura. Should we make the Water Tribe's boiled Gyoza Soup specialty?", Tetora added.

"That sounds good! Teach me!", Yoon beamed, approaching the women.

*

"Ta-dahhh!", Yoon chanted as he presented the food to us. It wasn't long before everyone had a bowl in their hands, enjoying the meal that had been prepared for us tonight. 

"These spicy pork and onion noodles are yummy, yummy!", Zeno shouted. "Bring on the boiled Gyoza soup!"

"Ki-Ja, the clams won't attack you. It's fine", Jae-Ha said as the White Dragon stayed contemplative in front of his plate.

"I never thought I'd have food... so effortlessly delicious like this...", Yoon whispered, a tear sliding down his cheek.

"What kind of eating habits do you usually have?", Lili asked.

I loosed a smile as I approached Hak in a secluded corner. He didn't say anything as I took a seat by his side and started eating. Eventually, he took up a cup of ale, drinking from it. The next thing I knew Tetora was approaching us.

"Lord Hakkk!", Tetora sang, a bottle of liquor in her hands.

"Would you like a cup? What about you Lady Lone?", she poured Hak a cup, but I raised my hand in the air, refusing her offer. I offered a smile, stopping myself from saying anything on how she called me.

"Are the oysters to your taste?", she asked, eyeing the both of us.

"They sure are delicious", I responded.

"Yeah. As one would expect of the Water Tribe's seafood", Hak said, bringing the cup to his lips.

"I hear you can catch fish that you can't here in the harbor towns of the Wind Tribe", I looked up from my bowl, eyeing her calmly.

"....What are you getting at?", Hak wondered.

"Nothing. I was just thinking that I wanted to try going there. As well as visit the land not far away from Hiryuu Castle, in the Sky Tribe. Apparently, the crops in that land are magical and for sale", I raised my head in her direction, watching her now with a wariness I previously had not.

"Indeed. Since the previous family at Hakkon House is dead ; I hear they put the land for sale...", I let out, telling her what I knew.

"But... I do remember seeing that blade and that old beautiful sword. I wonder, was that from the martial arts tournament... at Hiryuu Castle when the late King Il was alive?", I sighed then, lowering my bowl. Mmh... she had discovered our identities then. "The person they called the 'Thunder Beast' and the young girl who apparently cheated to get second place. You truly did wield power as fast as lightning... and skills so impressive for a girl that age ; the ones that gave you the title of 'Cheater'. Me and Ayura were there"

"I hear she's the Water Tribe leader's daughter", Hak said, voicing both of our thoughts.

"Oh my, we've been found out", Tetora faked her surprise, bringing a hand to her mouth.

"Because the soldiers here were able to stand together because of the Water's Golden Seal... What're you going to do? Will you report it to An Joon-Gi?", Hak asked.

For a while, she searched for words. But soon, rain started pouring and shouts were heard. The people were scared the get the food wet. And so I watched as Lili and Yona went to hide in the small tent and we were suddenly all in the same one, dragged away by the two bodyguards. My back stayed against Jae-Ha's chest. He did not say anything... and I did not try to move.

"What's the meaning of this?", Yoon asked, staring at Tetora and Ayura. Tetora was looking from Hak to me repeatedly.

"..This is about our conversation earlier. I've devoted myself fully to Lord An Joon-Gi and Lady Lili. I do anything that benefits Lord Joon-Gi. However... I don't believe in idiotic things like... "As long as Lord Joon-Gi and Lady Lili are okay, it's all fine". The Water Tribe owes you all. I had heard the Princess of Hiryuu Castle had been taken away and killed by her attendant. And the Lady of Hakkon House had been assassinated by Wind Tribe soldiers as they ran after her. The truth... is not easily obtained... I am sure you had many hardships... or so I guess. So, to you, who are precious to Lady Lili and us..."

There was no longer any sign...

Of the 16-year-old Princess who knew nothing...

In Yona's calm look...

"...on your journey from here on out. Please... please take care...", they finished, bowing over their knees.

And there was no pity and hesitation and regret...

From my 17-year-old self...

...that was left.

Chapter Text

I couldn't say if it was a realization among others. It was more a feeling than anything really. It was like breathing in fresh air, opening your lungs as you closed your eyes. It felt like renewal. It felt like another chance. 

I guessed all of that also meant I felt lighter, better. It was as if yelling all of my past, my trauma out loud had eased the pain. The fact that everyone knew made me realize I didn't care anymore... I preferred it that way.

A hand over my eyes, covering them from the sun, I was looking up at the sky, admiring the beauty of above. A bright and large smile was sketched over my face. The pain felt divine. The pain of smiling too big, yet it also meant I was happy... truly happy. And maybe, now, I could finally walk forward, walk toward a permanent healing point, where I didn't have to pretend to be someone I wasn't... with everyone... with all my friends by my side. 

A tall figure arrived near me. I lowered my head, turning my attention to the green-haired idiot standing behind me, slightly losing the smile on my face.

"Are you ready?", he asked me. I scoffed, then grinned. I turned toward him, punching him in the arm as I walked toward where everyone waited.

"I'm ready for everything the world has to throw my way...", I stopped, realizing he wasn't following me. I threw my head over my shoulder, watching him standing in the sun on the hill. My smile brightened. "Now that you're all with me..."

It was hard to say goodbye to a world you grew up in. I knew that. Better than most.

I once had to do it... thrice. Once when I felt it in my soul, the other time when I felt it in my bones and the last time when I felt it in my lungs. The first time, I tried my best not to think about it. The second time, I thought I would die after endless pain. There was no joy that accompanied my goodbye, only the hope of better days in death, with everyone that I lost... because I had thought I was alone. 

The last time... I had known peace and bliss and revival. I got to know everything I already knew... but better. That last goodbye was a sacrifice for a better world. A better world I would never be in. 

From the corner of my eye, I could see a small presence. His, no doubt. But it was daylight. My hopes had been answered anyway.

"Aro", I called as I turned toward him. He was smiling like a child should.

"Lone..."

"I'm glad you answered my silent call"

"I'm glad you led the way in"

"I thought you would be gone... I thought you would have given up on me"

"Never", he said as he lowered his head. "I have been looking over you since we stopped talking, sister... If I had known the immensity of your past, I would never have pushed you for the truth. I'm sorry."

"There's no need to be sorry. It was only normal for you to react that way"

Silence fell. I wanted to ask him something, but I felt it was a subject way too fragile, an emotionless question to ask. I hesitated for a while, but I finally spoke.

"What is your unfinished business, Aro?", he raised his head, surprise glinting in his eyes. "Why did you not go to the Heavens?"

His expression saddened. It was a heavy weight on his shoulders... I felt it. I was going to tell him he didn't have to tell me, but I didn't have the time to.

"I want to live a human life. When I was in Mother's belly, I heard your voices, your excitement. I saw your shadows and imagined how it would be like to meet you, to live a life by your side. But it was always just imagination. I lost my life before I even got out to see the light, to see the sun and your faces. Before I even got to know you. I didn't go to the Heavens, because I couldn't forgive death for taking a life I never got to live away from me, for taking everything I wanted to live away from me, for taking your faces, your voices, your family away from me. I grew up in death, but it never filled the whole within me. It never equaled my expectations of life"

I couldn't say anything. I stayed still, my eyes fixing a far away point, trying to assess everything he never told me. He raised his head, and his eyes met mine. 

"Maybe... maybe you could gather the courage to forgive death one day..."

He smiled slightly.

"Maybe, in the end, once you're up there, with all of our family, you will be able to live"

"What about you? What if you get stuck in here?"

"Then, it will happen. You can't stop fate from happening, Aro. You should know that"

He lowered his head again and his smile slowly disappeared. He was hurt, in ways I could never understand. I hoped he would find his salvation. If I had only one wish in the entire world, it would be for my brother to be happy... to have a life he never got to live. And I would give mine if it didn't go to waste.

Chapter Text

It had been weeks. Weeks since we departed the Water Tribe, since we left it all behind, since I spoke it all. It was no secret to anyone, not anymore. Not even to Soo-Won, who stayed in the Water Tribe with all my others thoughts. I hadn't spoken to anyone since... not really. I didn't care, though. I felt at peace with what happened, felt at peace with myself. I didn't have that heavy load upon my shoulders, didn't feel the need to explain myself to everyone anymore... I felt better. So it was a few weeks later, without any special adventure whatsoever, that we finally set foot in a small village somewhere along the border in the Earth Tribe.

"Really...", Jae-Ha let out, watching the spectacle around us. Chatter flew over us and there was a throng of people walking and buying and conversing. "I've been around, but the Earth Tribe villages have been full of life lately"

"I hear there are more merchants now because a valuable stone has been excavated from the Udo Mines", Yoon shared.

"That old man scored a big one", Hak said and I lifted my head to look at him, a laugh escaping my lips.

"I came thinking I could buy some things because this place is doing well", Yoon added, ignoring Hak's words. "There are tons of people, so we won't really stand out"

"Hey kid, I'm hungry", Zeno made known, scratching the back of his head. "Let's buy some meat buns! Meat buns!!", he sang the last part as he started jumping.

"Hold on, I brought food", Yoon announced, getting rice balls out of his bag. "Here, salted rice balls"

"Heh heh", Zeno chanted, clasping his hands together as the others joined him.

"Thanks for the food", Ki-Ja whispered.

"Even though you only prepared this rice, we're impressed with your strive, Yoon", Jae-Ha said, taking his rice ball. I took mine and only clutched it harder as I watched a shadow go behind me. Whoever it was kept his steps silent. 

"Yey, Yoon's rice bal-", Yona started, but the next second, her rice ball disappeared from her hands. Great, we got a thief on our hands. I watched as the little boy ran away.

"Yoon's rice ball was taken", she let out and Yoon started screaming near her.

"WHAT?!", I started laughing then, bringing a fist over my mouth. 

Ao went flying toward the boy and landed on his face. I looked down to my rice ball and started eating it slowly as I watched the show. The boy fell on the ground, a hand coming up to his face.

"Ow, ow, ow"

"Hold it right there", Yoon ordered, holding out his hand. "Give back the rice ball. Huh? It's a kid", I followed the group as they joined Yoon, a mouthfull of rice filling my cheeks. The boy tried to run away again, earning a loud reaction from Yoon, but we were there, stopping him from going any further. The boy flinched, Ao still clinging to his face. He sat down on the ground, intimidated by our presence.

"Are you hungry?", Yona asked, bending on her knees. When she realized he wouldn't answer, she looked to the sky and drew her bow. "Hold on just a bit", she shot an arrow and a bird went flapping down to the ground, his fall a loud thud. The boy was in awe. "Here", she offered, the bird in her hand. "You can have it. You can buy a little with it from the shop over there"

"A- amazing!", the boy shouted, impressed. "You're a cool girl", he added, making the whole group grin in "proud". "I like you. Come be my bride!", I almost choked on my rice at that moment. "It's okay. My village is on the other side of the river, and I can get married when I'm 13! We can just be engaged for now!", the boy announced, pulling on her hand.

"H-Hold on!", Yona said but Yoon grabbed onto the boy's arm, stopping him. Yoon and Ki-Ja leaned over him, their expressions as menacing as they could be. I felt bad for the boy.

"What's with 'we can just be engaged'?! Yona can't do that!", Yoon screamed. 

"You... though you are a child, I won't allow such discourtesy toward my master!", Ki-Ja added, ready to tear him apart.

"He's a worthy opponent, Hak", Jae-Ha announced, standing beside him. I stood on his other side, munching on my rice ball. 

"And he's already asked her to be his wife. You should take him as an example", I added.

"For what?", Hak responded, unbothered by our teaming.

"What, are all the men here yours?", the boy asked.

"No", Yona merely said.

"What about me? I like robust women! I'll treasure you!", he said, her hand between his.

"See, Hak? Shouldn't you say something?", Jae-Ha pointed out yet again, but I had nothing more to say so I just took another small bite of the rice ball.

"You say it if you wanna, Droopy Eyes"

"I can't marry you, I'm sorry", ooh, she's good.

"She shows no mercy, surprisingly", Yoon commented.

"NO!!", Blunt. 

"Listen to her!", Yoon shouted, anger clouding his face. "Yona won't give herself to you. Go pick someone else"

"I'm not giving up!"

"Give up and I'll give you a rice ball", Yoon added, handing a rice ball over to him.

"You're nice! Come be my bride", amused, I brought a hand to cover my mouth, restraining a laugh. 

"I may be a great beauty, but I'm a guy", Yoon responded, completely neutral.

"What a susceptible kid", Jae-Ha said.

"Already better than you, Green Head", I said, but Hak spoke before he could say anything. 

"He'd probably hit it off real well with you"

"You've got it all wrong, don't you?", Jae-Ha mused and I raised my head toward Hak. Our fists bumped against each other in triumph.

"-Say", Yoon started as we went on walking. "A little while ago, you said your village was on the other side of the river, right?"

"I did"

"Is it south?"

"No. West", Yoon stopped in his tracks and I only raised my eyes from my food.

"The Kai Empire is the only place there", Yoon pointed out.

"It is the Kai Empire", the boy stated and I could only blink repeatedly in answer.

"You came from the Kai Empire?!", Yoon shouted.

"Yep", the boy responded, as if unbothered that he had broken laws.

"All by yourself? Where's your family?", Yona asked.

"They're by the river"

"Why did you come to Kouka?", Yona continued.

"I wanted... to see... what kind of place Kouka was...", the boy said, looking into the distance.

"Kouka?", Yona wondered.

The boy didn't react, but his mood suddenly changed. "Anyway, I had been walking around for ages, and I was so hungry I felt like I would pass out. So I stole your rice. I'm sorry"

"It's fine now", Yoon assured.

"It was the first time I had something so delicious"

"Guess you can't help it. Then, how about I give you this rice cake, too?", Yoon offered, his ego getting petted.

"Anyway, I learned that Kouka has good food and great women", the boy announced.

"Hak, did you hear that? He said I was a great woman", Yona mused, her awe showing in her smile.

"By that he meant you were a spirited girl who shot down a bird and gave it to him", Hak said, a smile appearing on his lips.

"Thank you. My father and the others must be worried, so I'm going back"

"Will you be all right?", Jae-Ha asked. "There's patrol near the border, so it's dangerous for you, isn't it?"

"It's fine. When I left...", he didn't have time to finish as Shin-Ha pushed us aside, making us fall to the ground. My rice ball rolled a few times over and so I turned toward him, offering him a sharp look. He had ruined my meal.

"Ow..."

"Wha- what is it?!", Yoon wondered, on guard.

"Seiryuu's telling us to hide", Zeno explained and I pushed myself up, sitting on the ground, looking ready to kill someone. I realized then that Jae-Ha was being me. I had landed on him...

"Say it out loud, Shin-Ha", Jae-Ha complained.

"This is not fun anymore", I shouted, getting on my feet. "Whoever's fault it was made me lose my lunch. I'm ready to throw hands at whoever made that happened", Yoon's arms rolled around my waist, pulling me away before I had the time to unsheath my sword. I fell back down on my ass.

"What's wrong, Shin-Ha?", Yona asked and the Blue Dragon stared into the distance. 

"Near the river... many soldiers... are coming"

"About how many?"

"About... one hundred"

"One hundred?!", Yoon shouted. "Where are they going?!"

"When I left, there weren't that many!", the boy complained. "I slipped onto a merchant's ship but it was fine!"

"Shin-Ha's eyesight is good"

"That's odd. What's going on at the border?", Hak asked, looking toward where Shin-Ha was looking.

"If they're just here to help out with the mines, it should be peaceful", Jae-Ha pointed out.

"What should I do?", the boy panicked. "I... can't go home?!"

"Jae-ha", Yona called. "Isn't there a path somewhere?"

"Hm", he said, bringing his fingers to his chin, thinking. "If you're with me, I'll manage to come up with a path", I rolled my eyes.

"What's your name?", Yona asked.

"Kalgan"

"Kalgan, we'll escort you to your village", Yona announced, bending over her knees once again.

"Eh...? Is that okay with you?", he asked, suddenly filled with joy. "So you'll come be my bride?"

"She can't", Yoon and Hak pointedly said, standing side by side, looking like they might rip out his head.

So we walked and walked, until we reached a cliff. Standing at its edge, we looked down the beautiful rainfall falling in the river below.

"Wow...", Yona murmured. "I see. It's impossible for ordinary people"

"It's like I said, if I'm here, I'll manage a path, right?", he said and then Hak jumped on his back.

"Sorry. I'm in your care"

"Whoa, Hak, you're heavy", Jae-Ha said, ready to throw him off. Each one after the other, they all hopped on his back and got to the other side safely. I stayed behind, delaying and delaying the moment I would have to jump on his back. I dreaded that moment. So when he came back, a wicked grin covering his lips, I knew what was coming. 

"Ah, you wanted to be last so you could whisper some sweet words to me before we joined the others, hm, Lone Love?", I uncrossed my arms and walked toward him.

"Let's get this over with. If you say anything weird or stupid again, I'll make sure we both die when I make us fall", I got on his back reluctantly and rested my chest against his back. I realized then that it was the first time this happened. And so, the ride down the cliff felt like a ride to heaven. 

I immediately got down when we arrived near the others though and I walked away, ignoring his stupid expression.

"Now then, we'll rest here for the night", he announced and I took a seat on a log.

The sun had disappeared and dark was slowly settling. I was seated before the fire, my ancient blade resting on my leg as I sharpened its edges. I was waiting for dinner, my belly rumbling beneath my clothes. After a few minutes, the boy approached me and took a seat not far away from me. He kept an eye on me for a few minutes, and then he finally talked.

"You look scary, you know", he said and I laughed. "I never thought a woman could look as scary as you do"

I raised an eyebrow and I knew he could see my expression. My hood was off, the fire against my skin revealed everything. Every trait of my face was offered to him. "Is that supposed to be a compliment, boy, or an insult?", he shrugged at my reaction.

"I never thought women could fight. I thought you were a man at first. You look like a fighter, that's why I say that", his eyes traveled to my scar next and he tried to hide that fact as he immediately met my gaze again. I smiled, raising a finger to it, pointing at it. 

"Oh, because of that? I got it a long time ago, it doesn't bother me anymore. I even like it"

"What's not to like about it? I actually thought it made you look badass", I frowned.

"You wouldn't understand... not at your young age"

"Do your friends know how you got it?"

"Of course they do"

"Is it bad?", I looked up at him and smiled.

"I'm not going to bother you with gruesome details. It's not really that interesting"

Silence fell and I soon realized I did not know why he was scared of me. I raised an eyebrow and looked him in the eye again. "If it isn't the scar that scares you, then what does?"

"You have an aura around you, protecting you. Maybe it's how you hold yourself, or maybe it's the sword. Or perhaps, maybe, it's because of the other guy", I frowned, the movement of the rock against my blade stopping. I looked at him intently, searching for an answer. 

"What are you talking about?"

"The green-haired guy. He keeps looking at you, wherever you are, wherever he is ; as if he would panic if he lost you. Maybe it's that guy's gaze I'm scared of, maybe it's not really you"

"Why do you say that?", I asked, slightly offended.

"Because if anyone would dare lay a hand on you, or approach you too close, without his permission, I have a feeling he would hurt anyone who did"

"How would you know that?"

"You should try looking him in the eyes more often, to understand him, because visibly, I'm seeing something you aren't. He's obviously being protective of you", I rolled my eyes.

"Then, how are you so close to me now?"

"I don't know, because he respects you and knows you wouldn't like that very much", I squinted, trying to understand what he was saying. I had to fight every muscle in my body to try and search for his eyes.

"Anyway, I should remind you that I can take care of myself. You said it yourself, boy", he shrugged, getting up.

"That makes you look scary, Lady", he finished and I didn't even have the strength to counter his words... when he called me 'Lady'

Aye, they used to say "The truth comes out of the children's mouth".

Chapter Text

I couldn't sleep. I didn't know why. I told myself it couldn't be because of the nightmares I feared so much, since I had gotten used to them, even if they continued to wake me up in the middle of the night. I had embraced that horror ; so I could live on. I had embraced the terror, the sweat sliding down my back, my forehead, my breaths so uncontrollable I felt like dying. I had accepted all of that ; and I did not wish to go back. 

But it wasn't the dead encircling me that scared me out of sleep's embrace either. I was more used to them than I ever was with anything... If anything, I didn't care at all about them, even if they sometimes made me jumpy. I tried not to think again on what Kalgan told me earlier ; tried to convince myself it had nothing to do with that, told myself that with everything, Jae-Ha couldn't be the one thing that stopped me from sleeping... it was ridiculous. Unbelievable with all the reasons I could have to keep me from closing my eyes.

My thoughts turned toward Aro, toward my brother's innocent face. His absence since Awa had been hollow. It had left a hole in my chest, leaving me to feel more alone as the days passed. But when I felt his presence over my shoulder a few weeks ago, his comforting return, trying to help me through it all, I felt fulfilled, safe. I ignored him back then and couldn't summon the strength to call out to him. I couldn't even voice his name. I was scared of what he might think of everything I said. 

But then, something... or more like someone tore me away from those thoughts. I didn't have to raise my head to know who it was ; I knew instantly when my fingers didn't immediately reach for the sword at my side. I felt more than saw him taking a seat beside me. 

"I thought you were on one of your midnight strolls... but you never came back to sleep", he said, making me take a deep breath.

"I never even went to sleep. I can't... for some reason", he didn't say anything else, so my thoughts continued to flow with the silence, bringing me back to what Kalgan said that evening. I connected it all with Jae-Ha's presence by my side. "Why do you care if I'm not sleeping?"

He looked up to the sky, a small smile on his lips. I turned my head, looking up at him. He didn't meet my gaze. "I just wanted to make sure you were fine, is all", he said, only now looking at me. I tore my eyes away, watching my feet wiggle their toes.

"I'm fine... really", I hesitated, but I didn't know why...

"Do you mean it?", I turned an annoyed look in his direction and he raised his hands in the air in surrender.

After a few seconds of silence, he finally talked. "Do you see them?"

I knew what he was talking about, but I only sighed in answer. "I'm not going to tell you... in case it scares you", from the corner of my eye, I saw his face move which I assumed was a frown forming.

"I wouldn't have asked if I didn't know what to expect", even with that, I didn't answer. I saw him lean further forward, his head turned toward me. He was trying to meet my gaze. "I'm not scared of you, of what you are, of who you are", I turned fully toward him, laughing it off.

"Why would you be scared of me? I'm only a young, vulnerable woman"

"You know what I mean ; and you know that's not true", I sighed again, turning away once again. I kept silent. I watched him as he slowly moved to look at the sky. The darkened mass of our limits of the world, billions of tiny dots flickering in and out everywhere. The moon was nowhere to be seen.

"I could be the one chasing those demons away", he finally said, making my whole body tense in surprise. For a moment, my body betrayed me, but I took up my neutral expression, pushing him away once more.

"They are my demons, I should be the one chasing them away", I responded, countering him, his intentions. I was looking at him now.

"How are you not tired of fighting for yourself all the time?", he wondered calmly, meeting my eyes. "Why won't you let another person take care of you?"

"It's because I wasn't raised that way, Jae-Ha. Because no one but myself will ever fight for me, no one but myself can do a better job at it. Because no one was there before and I shouldn't expect anyone to ever be there"

"You could trust me, you could let me be there", distrust plagued my face. I offered a pained smile.

"And what if you go? What do I do then?", he didn't say anything, because he knew he could not persuade me... at least, not with words. "I was raised so I could be prepared for that day. I have been waiting for it my whole life, just so I could prove to my father that his training, his efforts weren't for nothing. I have been waiting... for someone like you to come along... and try to seduce me the way you have been trying to for a while. I can't trust anyone, because even my own father wasn't able to protect me the way I wanted to, like a father should... always. But he never did"

"What do I have to do for you to trust me, then?"

"There's nothing you can do, Jae-Ha. I'm a closed door and there is no key to open it"

"Then, I guess I'll just have to forge one", he said, turning his head away, staring at the sky again. I was watching him with anger so fierce I could not hide it from my eyes. 

"What didn't you understand?", I said, trying to force him with some unexistant magic to look my way so he could understand what shone in my eyes. 

"No. You're wrong ; I understood it all, Lone Love", he was smiling ridiculously, as if proud of himself. "I guess I'll just have to prove to you that I deserve to be the one forging that key"

I couldn't say anything else. Not as I stood up and found my way elsewhere. Not as I ran away from him... yet again.

Chapter Text

I didn't know how much sleep I got. The only thing I knew was that exhaustion took me away from reality and nothing else. With my thoughts buzzing worse than bees, I was certain I would never close my eyes.

"Kalgan, what's wrong?", the alarming tone Yona used to call his name had me awake in less than a second. I had my eyes opened as I sat on the ground, searching for the boy and my friend.

"I'm a little tired", Kalgan said as I caught them. I rose to my feet and slowly approached them, realizing with surprise that he seemed more tired than I was. Zeno and Jae-Ha kneeled before him, joining Yona.

"He's been walking this whole time", Yona pointed out.

"It was hard on him, so I'll carry him on my back and go", Jae-Ha proposed. To his surprise, though, Ki-Ja stepped in and let the boy get on his own back.

"Leave Kalgan to me. You're worn out from yesterday, right?", Ki-Ja asked him, looking over his own shoulder. Jae-Ha's surprised face turned to a smile, happy that Ki-Ja had taken his efforts into consideration. The peace in his eyes got me staring for a little more than a second.

"No, I don't particularly feel that way?", Jae-Ha cut in, getting up, walking past me.

"Shin-Ha, carry Jae-Ha", Ki-Ja ordered and the Blue Dragon actually lowered to the ground, offering Jae-Ha the chance to get on his back.

"No, I'll pass...", Zeno was looking down at Shin-Ha, smiling as he always did. I was watching them, something like happiness glowing on my face, in my eyes.

"I'm sorry about this", Kalgan said. "I've done nothing but causing you trouble since we've met"

"Carrying you is easy. Don't worry about it", Ki-Ja told him, earning him a smile he could not see.

After a while of silence as we walked through the woods, Kalgan spoke up. "It was only for a little while, but Kouka was fun. My village is closed off, so... I don't get the chance to talk to outsiders very often", and soon, as he continued talking through the journey, we reached a vast naked plain, leaving the forest. "Even though I told my father and mother I wanted to go to Kouka, they refused to let me. If I was able to meet such good people, I should have left sooner"

"It's splendid that Kouka has become a place of fond memories for you", Ki-Ja said. "However... you must not ignore the words of your father and mother. They will not be around to scold you forever. You should treasure the times they teach you important things", to those words, a small sad smile appeared on my face. Kalgan didn't have anything to say to that and silence came back. Until...

"Oh!", Yona shouted, pointing to something looming on the horizon. 

"Once we go over that hill, we'll be at my village!", Kalgan announced.

"Ohhh", Zeno sang. "We'll be there soon"

"Thank goodness", Yoon said, letting out a reassured sigh. "But Southern Kai is rather warm, isn't it?"

Near my ear, short and loud breaths reached me. I couldn't place it, but for a few seconds it seemed only like Yoon was breathing with difficulty because of the hill. Something that would happen to him. But words followed. "Shin-Ha...", I turned around at the same time Shin-Ha did to receive Kalgan in his arms from Ki-Ja. "I'm sorry but...  take care of Kalgan", I frowned as Jae-Ha only stared with a neutral expression. Then, an amused smile appeared on his face.

"What? Are you already worn out?", Jae-Ha asked, almost laughing. "Even with your inhuman strength, you really don't have much stamina", he finished, only for Ki-Ja to fall to the ground moments after. He dropped the smile.

"Ki-Ja?!", Jae-Ha screamed his name as he caught him before he reached the ground. I immediately ran to him, crouching at his side.

"Ki-Ja?!", I shouted as well as Yona.

"What happened?!", Yoon shouted, running towards us.

"I don't know, he passed out suddenly", Jae-Ha said, bringing his hand to the White Dragon's forehead. "What a terrible fever", I looked up at Yoon, who met my eye. When he saw my confused face, he knew he would not get any answer from me.

"We need to hurry up and give him a place to rest", Yoon announced.

"In that case, come to my house", Kalgan said, Jae-Ha taking Ki-Ja in his arms. "It's close to here"

"Really? That'd be a great help", Yoon let out.

"Yeah. I am indebted to you guys a lot anyway. Dad and the others are sure to welcome you with open arms"

"Kalgan!", who seemed like his mother called out.

"Mom! Dad! I'm back!", the boy shouted, running up to his parents.

"You! Where were you!", the mother shouted, her arms open to let him in against her chest.

"Sorry... Apart from that, I kind of brought some guests over", he said as he turned to us, his parents lifting their gaze as well.

"Guests?", the father repeated, confused. "Who are they?"

"I became friends with them in the Kouka Kingdom", Kalgan announced.

"Kouka Kingdom?! As I thought, you were in Kouka Kingdom!", his father slowly lost his temper. "We told you so many times not to already!"

Kalgan let out a wobbly answer I could not quite understand. But he spoke his next words louder. "Let's leave the talking for later! There's a person who has fallen from a fever! It's fine to let him rest at our home, right?"

"Those questionable people?! Are you kidding?!", his father shouted again, as if we were not right in front of him.

"Wait a second. I was really taken care of by these people when I was in Kouka. They are good people, so please!", Kalgan pleaded, tugging at his father's cloak. The father hesitated, looking at Ki-Ja, then at Kalgan, over and over.

"...I got it", the father finally said as murmurs slowly went around, people stopping to hear better. "Guests, come this way. We will prepare a bed for you"

It didn't take long before Ki-Ja was lying down as Yoon and I tended to him. My movements were slow and I wasn't the only one to know it. Yoon realized it as well. He whispered something that made me look up, but I ignored his pleading look. 

"Hakuryuu...", Zeno called, worried. "His fever won't go down, will it?"

"Sorry about my mother and father", Kalgan said and I looked over my shoulder at Yona and him, sitting side by side. 

"Don't worry. They're letting us rest, and giving us food", Yona responded, offering a smile as I turned around. My attention turned to the door as I noticed for the hundredth time the people gathering out of the room. 

"I guess they're worried about people who came from another country", Jae-Ha let out.

"This area...", Hak started. "Kin Province used to be Kouka Kingdom's territory. Isn't that related somehow?"

"...Yeah", Kalgan finally answered. "Because of war, it's currently part of Kai, but my father and mother... everyone in this village are Kouka Kingdom citizens. No one says it but they miss Kouka Land and their friends that still live there. That's why I wanted to see it. Father and the others' homeland"

"I see...", Yona whispered, a sadness creeping over her eyes, shadowing her face.

"Don't talk about such things, Kalgan", a grave voice said. I only had to shift my eyes for me to realize Kalgan's father's presence. 

"Father...", Kalgan called.

"No matter which territory this land is in, it doesn't matter anymore. During the reign of King Joo-Nam, this land was part of Kouka Kingdom, but before that there were times when it was a part of Kai. Even though the location of the village doesn't change, the fickle countries take or discard this place. We realized that it's useless to struggle"

"But father, you and the others are always looking... to the other side of the river"

"Anyway, just forget about Kouka Kingdom. You guys should hurry up and leave", he turned and left.

Later that day as I changed the cloth upon Ki-Ja's forehead once again, Yona peared over his face.

"Ki-Ja, how are you feeling?"

"Princess... I apologize. To stop because of me..."

"You don't have to worry about that"

I leaned back on my feet, my eyelids drooping. Without me realizing, Yoon approached me, putting a hand over mine. I looked up, meeting his eyes. I nodded, giving up as sleep slowly but surely was taking me away. I took a spot not far away from the group and fell asleep before I even had the chance to think about anything.

*

Through my light sleep, I could hear screams and shouts, but I could not make out the words. It didn't wake me up... until silence took over. 

"Ki-Ja. How is your dragon's arm?", someone asked.

"Dragon's arm?"

"Can you put your strength into it?"

"Well, it won't go as it normally does..."

"There has been a new dragon born in the village of Hakuryuu", the words took me by surprise ; I thought for sure I was dreaming. I could feel my brows furrowing, knowing it wasn't in my sleep. "You're not going to say something like that, right?"

A short silence, then : "No. That's not possible. It's not that kind of feeling"

"I see... that's good"

"Why did you ask so suddenly?"

"It's not that sudden, is it? My predecessor died when he was 27. I will soon be that age. Sooner or later, a new dragon will be born. And these powers will wither up and die. It wouldn't be strange at all, would it?", I recognized the voice then. Jae-Ha. I opened my eyes, feeling as if someone had plunged a knife in my heart. Why did I feel that way?

"How... rare... for you to bring up such things", Ki-Ja muttered.

"Really...?", Jae-Ha wondered.

"It makes me feel better", Ki-Ja said, sitting up. "When you talk about such important things"

"You're annoying because you bring up these topics"

"You're right... the four dragons do not live long", a twist of the knife. "However, I am always prepared to give up my life for that person. How long I live is not something important"

"That's definitely something you would say", Jae-Ha said and I sat up. At the same time, water splashed.

"Yoon...!"

"Ah...", Yoon let out, twisting the knife even more in my heart as I knew something similar plunged into his. "I spilled... the water..."

I had to restrain tears I didn't know wanted to fall. "Really?", I let out and Jae-Ha turned to me in horror, realizing what I'd just heard. "You... you don't live long...?"

"Is it really true?", Yoon continued.

"Come here, you two", I stood up and sat beside Jae-Ha.

"It's not something you have to pity. No one knows when they're going to die, right?", Jae-Ha said, trying to convince us it wasn't really bad.

"That's true... but...", Yoon whispered, lowering his head. 

"Yoon, don't worry", Ki-Ja beamed. "Even if a new dragon was born, we wouldn't die suddenly"

"Yeah, the previous Ryokuryuu lived for 12 years after I was born", Jae-Ha announced, putting a hand on Yoon's back.

"That's amazing!", Ki-Ja exclaimed. "Not to mention, my strength hasn't deteriorated at all with the fever!", Ki-Ja announced, punching Jae-Ha in the face so hard the Green Dragon fell back, blood jutting out of his nose. I watched as he fell to the ground with a thud. I couldn't restrain a small laugh.

"Ki-Ja, you don't seem the type to die even when someone kills you", Yoon said.

"Of course!"

"Then, it's fine", I returned my attention toward Yoon, watching him with a sad smile of my own. "Then... it's fine, but...", when he lifted his head back up, tears were falling along his cheeks. "I beg you, stubbornly live, you monsters"

I smiled slightly... wishing his begging stopped the cycle from happening. I didn't know why though, I wasn't supposed to care for them, especially not the green-haired idiot.

"Please don't tell Yona about us", Jae-Ha demanded and I nodded. I only nodded, aware that I could not say the words. But they meant the same, because I knew if I wasn't the one telling her, she would know eventually anyway... the brutal way or the easy way. What she would do about that, though... I had no idea.

The sun had set a few hours ago and I found myself unable to fall asleep... once again.

What a hindrance...

My hands a solid cushion behind my head, I rolled my eyes at the ceiling. I was not tired at all. When I finally took them from behind my head, I brought them before my eyes, examining them in the thick darkness of the room. Only my eyes had adjusted, for they had been opened for hours. I stared at my hands, at my fingertips, as if I could see the tingles walking up and down my nerves. I sighed, letting my arms fall at my side. I eventually swung myself up, sitting on the ground now. I got up and made sure I didn't wake anyone as I left the room.

I unsheathed my sword, advancing in the night, hoping to get some stress out so I could finally go to sleep. But I could not go really far before I heard steps behind me and a voice call someone's name.

"Jae-Ha!", Yona screamed and I turned to see her approaching a limping Jae-Ha. I frowned, slowly going back in my tracks. He almost tripped on his own two feet and I fastened my steps suddenly, letting my sword fall to the ground.

"Jae-Ha...", I called, worried.

"Lone...", he called back, pain coating his tongue. I could not see his face because of the night, so I could only guess. Yet, his voice alone made me run in his direction. I caught him in my arms before he fell to the ground. His soon encircled me tightly as he burried his face in my neck. I could only go still as my knees buckled, not ready for his weight to be pushed on to me.

"Lone... Love..."

"Jae-Ha?", I called, not knowing what to do more. 

"Lone... I-I'm sorry...", he started to fall to the ground, his own two feet barely able to lift him. I tried to force him up, but it only brought me down with him. And so, when I landed on the ground with a thud, Jae-Ha's head lied on my lap, his breaths ragged and short.

Chapter Text

"Jae-Ha!", I called, but his face features were hardened by pain. I didn't know if he could hear me. Steps approached us and I raised my head to realize Hak's presence behind Yona.

"Hak!", Yona called. "Jae-Ha has fainted!", Hak crouched at her side, poking Jae-Ha in the head with his glaive.

"Did you die, Droopy Eyes?", he had no alarm whatsoever in his voice ; he felt completely unbothered by the situation.

"Hak... is it just me or are you handling me a little roughly...?", Jae-Ha muttered.

"Have I ever handled you with care?"

"He has a fever. Could it be that he caught Ki-Ja's sickness?", Yona wondered, worried.

"...Are you dead, Droopy Eyes?", Hak asked again, sharper this time, as if hoping he would be.

"Well, you're really putting my flushed body through the wringer...", Jae-Ha shakily let out, as if closer and closer to fainting again.

He was bedridden right after that.

For hours, I stayed by his side, curled up on the ground. And when I finally fell asleep, thanks to Jae-Ha's incident that made me spend a lot of energy plus the damn information from which the Four Dragons did not have a long lifespan, I woke a while later, not knowing how much time I'd slept and what time it was. But when I opened my eyes, one thing I knew for sure was that Jae-Ha was staring at me. I watched him for some time, watched him blink and I soon realized the cloth had slid from his forehead, which surely did not help his condition. I sat up.

"Heavens! Stop moving, stupid!"

"How could I stop myself from moving when a beautiful lady was sleeping by my side", he said, his voice a ragged mess. I blushed, not looking away as I pushed his head to be straight and replaced the cloth over his forehead.

"It's not the first time this kind of situation happens", he said when I was finished, a small grin on his lips.

"You never learn, do you? Shut up and sleep", I said, finally getting out of the house, leaving him and the other dragon alone.

Third Person POV

It didn't take long before Hak decided he wanted to train. They didn't spar but he suggested they watched how the other did and if they saw some small defaults in the formation... well, to tell the other. Hak looked at her movements firsthand, realized that she could fair well on a battlefield if ever they were to fight in a war one day ; something he was certain would happen. He knew his bestfriend had always had a training not adapted to the battlefield, but now that he had seen how she had grown, he thought that maybe it wasn't all for nothing. But soon, he frowned, realizing the change in her movements, how faster they were, how much strength she put that wasn't there before. He soon realized that the amount of these details compensated with the lack of formation. A lot of her sides were unprotected, completely open. 

That was one weakness he could not tolerate. He looked up to her face, hoping to see an answer written on her traits. He couldn't have felt more right. She was lost in thoughts, her expression looking unfeeling, unbothered, lost. She felt a certain way and those emotions that took over her blocked out any other senses, which meant she was not concentrating at all ; why she used all strength and speed to attack and no movements to defend herself in the mean time. And it didn't take much longer for him to realize who, exactly, had put so much disorder in her thoughts.

"You care for him, don't you?", he said and it seemed it was enough to bring her out of her own mind. She whirled on him, her sword immediately dropping at her side.

"What are you talking about?", she asked, frowning.

"Droopy Eyes, obviously. You care for him", she raised an eyebrow, looking him up and down, ready to verbally defend herself if her feeling was right about what he wanted to do.

"You're one to talk. You know I'm not the only one who know about your never ending feelings for her anymore", he rolled his eyes, releasing a loud sigh.

"One thing you have in common, I see. But you're avoiding the subject, also not contradicting me as fast as you would have before"

"What if I do contradict you? You would still not believe me"

"The fact you're not even fighting to defend yourself tells me enough actually"

"It's useless when I'm talking to you"

"But I could use that against you", he suddenly said and she frowned, her heart suddenly beating faster. "...I could tell Droopy Eyes everything you've just said"

Her gaze hardened, piercing into his soul. "Do that and Yona won't be as oblivious as she still is, Hak", she said, a smile now decorating her lips. He lost his wolfish grin. And once she again took up formation and started swinging her sword around, he couldn't help but notice she didn't get lost into her thoughts again ; and if she did, it didn't show.

Kalgan's father barged in the small house and we heard screams and shouts. Soon, the dragons were getting out, one after the other. I got up from where I sat, interrupting Hak and showed him what was happening. He followed me when I made my way to the house. We arrived in time to see Shin-Ha look toward the horizon, as if noticing something.

"What's wrong, Blue Dragon?", I asked, stopping right in front of them, Ki-Ja glued to his side.

"Horses", he mumbled. "...and soldiers. Lots. Something... far away... Seems like... a battle"

"A battle?", Yoon reacted. "Maybe the clans are fighting each other"

Loud steps, then... "We've got trouble!", I turned my head, noticing the nervous villager running around, fear in his face, in his eyes. "There is a battle!"

"What?!", an older woman exclaimed.

"A battle?", the other woman at her side let out.

"Kouka...", the man continued. "It appears Kouka is attacking. They'll crash with Kai's army soon"

"What did you say?"

"Why would Kouka...?", the woman couldn't continue as sobs took possession of her throat.

"Is it because the King changed?"

"Shin-Ha!", someone called, desperate for an answer. I turned around, noticing the Blue Dragon on the ground, Ki-Ja standing over him. "Shin-Ha. Hey! Shin-Ha!"

Chapter Text

Screams from afar took my attention away. Beside me, Yona and Kalgan's father were turned in the same direction as I was.

"Again?", the old man wondered aloud. 

"The village will be fine if it doesn't spread here", Yona said.

"The King and distinguished people never get hurt. The ones devastasted and trampled over... are always us, the common people", I frowned, turning toward the man. 

The battle went on for a few days and the villagers stayed wary and worried the whole time, tense and angry. 

"It seems the battle has ended", an old man announced, putting his weight into his cane.

"It looks like they got close, but...", a younger one continued. "In just a matter of a few days, Kouka's forces won overwhelmingly"

"I see. It came to an end without dragging us into it this time"

Yona turned away and I followed as she walked toward the group.

"Yoon", she called, joining them. "How are Shin-Ha and the others?"

"Well, their fevers have gone up", Yoon answered and I could see Yona's head dipping to the ground. She was obviously worried.

"I see..."

"It's okay, Miss", Zeno beamed from right beside Yoon. "The Four Dragons use their explosive abilities, so it's easy for their bodies to feel weakened by them. All they need now is a little bit of rest"

"Are you okay, Zeno?", Yona wondered then.

"Zeno's health is the only strong point he has as Ouryuu"

"Oh...", Yoon let out, his surprised expression as funny as it could get.

"Zeno will tend to them"

"Is... that so?", Yoon asked, unsure.

I walked again with Yona, following her without rest. I didn't know if it bothered her for me to do so. But I didn't stop when I saw Hak standing next to the tent. And when she finally got in, I followed her still, taking a seat in front of her, at the other extremity. Hak took a place beside her. I sat cross-legged as Yona hugged her legs to her chest. Hak, beside her took the rest of the space, the sole of one of his boots resting on the ground and his other leg lay down, partially going through the arch made by his other leg. 

"They said... Kouka won, but...", Yona started but stopped. I raised my head, hoping to look her in the eye, but she was staring at the base of the tent. "I wonder if Soo-Won went up against Kai... because of the conflict the Water Tribe had with South Kai"

"No. I'd expect that taking back this place was planned from the beginning", my gaze travelled to Hak and I slowly realized where he was going. "If anything, the situation in the Water Tribe was just a good reason for it"

"So by taking back Kin Province, he gains even more of Geun-Tae's trust", I said, earning a nod from Hak.

"And it also raises the morale of all the Five Tribes. This battle probably wasn't for the sole purpose of expanding territory"

"Hak...", Yona called, her voice a whisper. Then, louder... "You know what King Soo-Won is thinking, don't you?", my eyes clung to her now. I wanted to say that nobody would know what he was thinking ; he became somebody else entirely in the span of a few days. But Hak spoke.

"I don't know... I don't want to either"

A moment of silence, then Yona spoke again. "If... if there are tears in Kouka that were made by my father... I want to mend those"

"You don't need to... bear that burden...", Hak whispered, as if ashamed. "You... don't have to continue the journey as if it were an atonement", I stared at Yona until a small smile grew on her lips.

"I want to do my best. However, I've been thinking about... whether Kouka was justified... or not. To the people here, the "enemy" is war. Even if Soo-Won is a good King to Kouka... I can't bring myself to side with either Kouka or the Kai Empire"

Her words made me think. As I lowered my head, my eyes dragged with it. I was staring at my hands, hoping to see or understand something that I could not. I could never understand Soo-Won's motives, because they have brought hurt to too many people I cared for. But I thought I was starting to grasp the things he was doing for Kouka ; things the previous King could not and would not do. In the last few months, traveling with Yona, from Awa, to the Fire Tribe, and to the Water Tribe, I have realized things by myself that I never would have before, sitting in my bed in the luxury of Hakkon House. But now I did understand... Kouka could not only live without Soo-Won, but it would simply disappear without Soo-Won. 

Third Person POV

"Retreat! Retreat!", screams, shouts echoed along the battlefield, traveling over corpses and over the land. "Hey, what are you doing? We're retreating!", the horseman rode beside his companion, estranged despite them fighting side by side. The man was desperately trying to pull on the body of his late comrade.

"Please lend me a hand! I'm trying to put him on a horse!"

"Don't be stupid! That man is already gone. Leave him and...", the horseman spoke, but before he could even order the man to retreat once more, a sword plunged through his chest.

The man fell to the ground, clunging to the body of the fallen. "Ah... Ahhh... Ah... Damn it!", he cried. "Damn you... You bastards from Kouka Kingdom!"

Soon, the men still alive assembled, their injured soldiers bloody and dirty. "It's already over for Kin Province. It has been stolen by Kouka Kingdom..."

"This place is going to slowly become Kouka Kingdom's too"

"Unforgivable... Curse the Kouka Kingdom! We won't just sit quietly and retreat like this! If it's going to become Kouka's we might as tear every last bit of the land apart...!"

Lone's POV

"How are Ki-Ja and the others?", Yona asked to Yoon as I stood beside her. I had been forbidden to see the dragons as well, so we had to ask Yoon for updates.

"Mmm... They aren't doing well. They throw up everything they eat", Yoon explained.

"I see..."

"I can't get my hands on any medicine in this area"

"What do you need? I could go take a look at the nearest village", I let out.

"That would be a great help", Yoon added. "I'll give you a list"

"Thank you. I'll depart later today"

"I'm coming with you, then", Yona exclaimed and I nodded.

*

Later, as we prepared to leave, pulling Yoon's saddlebag over my head, letting it rest at my hip, Yona at my side, I was walking towards Yoon but shouts reached me before I made another step.

"Kalgan! Kalgan!", searching for the source, I realized Kalgan's mother standing not too far. Yona ran to her and I followed.

"What's wrong?", Yona asked.

"My son...! Kalgan is gone", she explained and I stopped in my tracks, immediately looking around to make sure he wasn't just hiding. "That child probably went off somewhere again..."

"I'll go look for him", Yona said and I pulled the saddlebag off me, running to Yoon and thrusting it back in his hands. 

"We need to search for Kalgan ; his mother says he disappeared. I'm gonna come back later", I said, joining Yona.

When she finally stopped abruptly in her tracks, I almost ran into her. I raised my head, looking in the direction she was staring toward. Kalgan was running, panting.

"Kalgan!", Yona shouted. But behind him, a soldier on a horse was riding toward us, his sword drawn. Bringing a hand at my hip, I unsheathed mine, grabbing it with my other hand as well.

Yona unstrapped the bow from her back, tucked an arrow in and shot it, directly into the man's shoulder. He fell backwards, falling to the ground with a loud bam. Yona ran to the small boy.

"Kalgan, where were you?"

"Medicine...", he whispered out, his breaths a complete mess. I frowned at his single word.

"Medicine?", Yona wondered.

"I wanted to give it to Ki-Ja and the others. Sorry... I gave everyone my sickness"

"You didn't have to...", Yona started and I stood up tall when I heard stomps coming in our direction. Another soldier was coming straight at us. I placed myself before Yona and Kalgan, ready to defend them, ready to fight.

"You bastard!", the soldier screamed, rage distorting his face. Many of his friends followed at his side. "Are you the one who shot the arrow?!"

"Run away...", Kalgan said. "They're stragglers from the Kai Empire"

Yona's eyes widened. "The Kai Empire?", I let out, as surprised as my friend.

"They lost the battle and now, they're pillaging the neighboring towns and villages!", Kalgan shouted. At my side, Yona prepared another arrow, ready to shoot. But before she could even shoot it, Hak swept in, swinging his blade before him. It met with soldiers, slashing through them. They fell to the ground, a bloody pool creating itself around him.

"Are you hurt?", Hak asked as I placed myself at his side.

"No", Yona answered.

"Kinkan village was being attacked by these guys", Kalgan explained, pale. "Eventually, here too..."

My eyes dragged towards the man bleeding out on the ground. He was whimpering, sounds of pain and agony coming out of his throat.

"Curse the Kouka Kingdom... If Kin Province is going to be a part of Kouka Kingdom... then I might as well burn it to the ground...", the man said, freezing the blood in my veins, as he breathed his last.

"Th-that!", Kalgan claimed, pointing to the line of the horizon. I raised my head, staring at the mass of soldiers amassing far away before us. "They're coming over here!"

Hak turned his head toward me, making me look into his eyes. I could see in his gaze, his silent order for me to fall back. I slowly shook my head, showing him that I would not retreat.

"Princess, take Yoon, Zeno, and the dying idiots with you and run", Hak then said, his back to Yona.

"Hak?!", Yona called out.

"We'll deal with this"

"Wh- Even if it's you two, doing it alone-!", Yona started.

"The only ones that can fight right now is us", Hak said.

"I will fight", Yona announced. "I can also fight"

"There's no way you could fight", Hak said as I stared toward the army sweeping in our direction, closer and closer with every second.

"Hak... please"

"If you fight with us... you'll just get in the way. Hurry and go", I straightened at his words, but I did not have the strength to turn around and stare into the hurt of Yona's eyes. "Please, don't cry"

"I wouldn't cry from just your words", I turned around slighty, watching as Hak bend down and kissed Yona's cheeks. A smile pulled on one of the corners of my lips.

"I apologize", Hak said, straightening. "Please excuse me. Just this one time"

Hak stood up and walked away from the Princess, swinging his arm up and down. "Well now, I'm all fired up!"

"Wha-", Yona let out, her face red.

"I'm all fired up!", he repeated.

"What?"

"Please go", Hak said then, with a more serious tone. "Your job is to protect Kalgan"

"Kalgan, let's go!", Yona called, turning away.

"Well...", Hak said, walking towards the enemy. "Then..."

The handle of his spear resting against his shoulder, I swung my sword in my right hand over and over, restless. He stopped in his tracks and I did the same.

"What should we do about that, Lone?", he asked, plain unbothered.

"I guess we should get rid of them for good", I announced, smiling.

"I agree. Three..."

"Scatterr!!!", they screamed.

"Two..."

Their stomps became louder and louder the more they approached.

"One..."

I crouched, ready.

"Let's go", he said and I jumped at the same time as he did. I arrived before him, hitting a soldier well before he did, his body falling to the ground. Blood splatterered... The battle had officially commenced.

Screams of pain as blade tore through flesh. Shouts of surprise when they previously thought they would cut through us with no difficulty. My eyes tore away from Hak as I concentrated on making them fall. After a while, I realized I should have been overwhelmed by now, I should have been dead. But I kept fighting, the strength in my legs, in my arms not faltering. I kept swinging, hearing the threats the men whispered, the things they would do to me once I was caught. 

"Stop this, woman, you're gonna regret it"

"You're probably gonna be sold to the highest bidder anyway once they get rid of you"

"Come with us ; you're gonna be fine"

But my anger only doubled over, my rage simmering in my blade, slashing throats as I went. I used technique after technique to kill them one by one. When I finally caught Hak in the corner of my eye, I realized he was fighting on a horse, while I was still on foot, striking and fighting and darting, not leaving a single one behind. And suddenly, as I felt my body weaken considerably, thanks to the weight of the number of people I killed, thanks to the amount of strength I alone just spent, I stumbled slightly.

I got distracted, even though for just a second as I layed my eyes on Hak, realizing the man's presence right behind him, about to hit him. Hak sloppily turned around, swinging his guando with him. He failed to reach him. I could only stare as the man stopped moving and then fell to the ground. I gasped when I realized Ki-Ja's presence. But I had realized the soldier's presence at my back a little too late, so when I whirled around, trying to avoid the man's hit, a blade flew, landing in his arm, bringing his killing blow away from me. 

I turned my head around, toward the direction of the blade and realized with terror and reassurance that Jae-Ha was there, anger flashing in his eyes. When his gaze finally met mine, it softened. He turned around after a nod, assuring himself that I was fine and then jumped up in the air.

"Hak. Ki-Ja. Watch your heads!", Jae-Ha said and I finally went back to fighting. Slowly, so slowly, I tried to fight my way toward my friends. I watched, from the corner of my eye, as Shin-Ha ran through the crowd, his own blade slicing through an enemy's.

"Why aren't you running away?!", I heard Hak scream. "You death tottering-morons! You're all wobbly on your feet!"

"You're the one who's wobbly, Hak", Jae-Ha said. "Why don't you go to sleep?"

"We're sick of sleeping. We'll take your place, Hak"

I was as mad as Hak when I finally arrived near them.

"As if. You're all crazy fools. What is your problem?!", I exploded, swinging my sword around as I shook. Jae-Ha ran up to me and put a hand against my cheek. I didn't have the strength to move away. 

"I couldn't let you fight all alone, now, could I, Lone Love?"

I shook my head, turning away from him. Soon, I could only see red, and the anger, the fatigue reaching my limbs only made me swing faster and with more swiftness, because I knew that if I slowed, I would drop dead. 

"GYAAAA!", I turned around, desperately trying to search for the source of the scream. I caught Ki-Ja defending himself, a sword clashing across his back.

"Ki-Ja!", Jae-Ha called.

"You did it! Finish him off!", an enemy ordered.

Far away, my gaze going from Jae-Ha to Ki-Ja, my eyes emptied once I realized Him standing over his unmoving body. Clad in black, Death hovered above my companion. I looked around, realizing that I was the only one close enough to defend him from a killing blow. So I ran, slashing my opponent's throat, leaving the others chasing for me. I stepped in front of the White Dragon, slicing through the men trying to tear him down.

"Leave us alone!", I screamed, desperately trying to cling to consciousness, beheading the one arriving at my side, knowing I left my other side completely open. I stumbled to the side as Shin-Ha pushed me aside, taking the hit that was supposed to come for my heart. The sword landed in his back. My face paled as I realized he had just saved me.

"Shin-Ha!", I called, sweat sliding down my brow. I watched as he turned around, killed the man that had hurt him.

I stopped for a brief instant, assessing my surroundings ; Ki-Ja was injured on the ground, Shin-Ha was deeply injured, barely able to stand, Jae-Ha was still fighting, but because of the fever, he could fall any instant. And Hak and I had been fighting for much longer ; exhaustion could only wait for the opportunity to take us with it. So I watched, in that split second, as Shin-Ha chose his next move, removing his mask. 

"Shin-Ha, stop!", Jae-Ha shouted. "If you release your power in your condition now...", Shin-Ha froze, staggering, and then collapsed to the ground. Near me, I could hear the soldier's words. 

"N- Now! These guys are at their limit! Rush for the village! Slice the villagers to pieces!"

NO! But I couldn't do anything. I was forced in the middle of battle, trying to protect the two dragons' bodies with my blade alone. Jae-Ha and Hak joined me as they realized I was fighting alone, some of my sides barely covered. 

I noticed, at the same time as Hak that some of the soldiers were riding toward the village, but also toward Yona and Yoon, standing not too far atop the hill. 

"YONAAAAA!!! YOOOON!!!", I howled, but I could do nothing where I was. I could only watch as she knocked an arrow. 

"RUN AWAYYY!!", Hak screamed as well. Beside, Ki-Ja was trying to get on his feet, Shin-Ha was trying to reach for them. The Princess was about to shoot, but Zeno stepped in front of them, screaming something I could not hear. He ran, jumping on the man's horse. But behind him, another soldier rode beside his companion, using his sword to clash through Zeno's back. Zeno crashed to the ground face first, but stood up. 

"MISSSS!!!! RUN AWAY!!!", I faintly heard Zeno scream, running again towards the soldiers, towards the army.

"Zeno! NO!", Yona begged. My sword stopped swinging when I saw a blade cutting through Zeno's chest. I froze, could only watch in horror as my ears started ringing. Then, silence to my ears. My eyes widened in terror, in fear and pain. 

"Ze...no?", I called, my legs weak. I could almost hear when his body fell to the ground in a loud, deadly thud. Everyone had stopped, shocked, trying to comprehend what had happened. My eyes went glassy, emptying.

Blood splattered Yona's cheek before she started calling out his name, collapsing to her knees by his side, calling, screaming his name. A hand to his mouth, Yoon couldn't contain his fear. From where I was, I saw an enemy approaching Yona, but Yoon stepped in front of her, protecting her. Though he was kicked out of the way. I winced, unable to get out of the fight, unable to run to them. A sword was pointed at her face, but I couldn't hear what was being said. Yona clung to Zeno's body, refusing to let him go. Yona got up, swinging her sword at the soldier, his own falling to the ground, burried in the earth. I couldn't see what was happening, but I could feel her anger, her pain. I was angry myself that I could not reach her. 

Zeno's hand lifted and reached for Yona's cheek. And slowly, he got to his feet. I blinked and blinked again as I realized his wound was closing by itself, completely disappearing from his skin... the death that was surely to come for him now entirely out of his reach.

Chapter Text

The battle around us had stopped while the only thing any of us could do was watch. The enemy had stopped to watch as well, as horrified as us. I brought a hand to my mouth in horror as my eyes began to sting. What... was... happening?

"The Ouryuu won't die... I am the dragon that was born to be your shield. If Ouryuu, your shield, protects you... you will never... be injured"

I could only stare at his destroyed clothes, the dried blood, his bones peaking from his skin ; he was so thin, so small... how could someone bear that much strength? Screams started echoing over the battlefield. The soldiers facing Zeno were arguing, shouting histerically, trying to make sense of any of this.

I could only stare and watch as they ordered him killed... again. Yona called for his name, but when the blade punctured his heart once again, I gasped, feeling the blood leaving my face, leaving my extremities. My heart was pounding unbearably, uncontrollably. What was happening? But when the enemy took his sword out again, we all watched as the wound closed once again. Death had evaded him... again. 

Zeno pulled on his scarf, ridding himself of the piece of clothe. He spoke words I did not understand as the enemy screamed in horror, in terror. They knew they were going to die. I could only stare blankly at the scene developping itself before my very eyes ; I could not believe it wasn't a trick of the mind.

"What is this guy...?!", the soldier screamed. "His injuries... His body...! This is a joke! I've seen my comrades die with their innards splattered countless times! Something this ridiculous... can't happen!"

The soldier swung his sword, cutting through Zeno's arm. My eyes widened, my other hand joining the other at my mouth as I felt my stomach rumble before this disaster. 

"I'll cut you to pieces!"

Zeno muttered something I could not hear as he offered a hand to Yona. His second arm got chopped off as well, and the first tear slid down my left cheek. Blood gushed out like a water fountain. And as the enemy believed this was the end, Zeno's arm came flying through the air, a sword in his hand. I stumbled on my feet, almost falling, but strong arms caught me before I could fall. I did not have to turn around to see that Jae-Ha was standing behind me.

"A- Ah...!", someone let out.

"What-?", the soldier said, turning his head toward his companion. "GYAAAAAAAA!", the blade landed in the soldier's back, and he fell to the ground, dead.

Zeno's arm reconnected with the rest of his body ; skin, muscle, bone, tendons. Everything happened like it was merely natural. Silence was so heavy now that I could hear what Zeno was saying. 

"His arm... moved... and stabbed him?!"

"If I am terrifying... could you please go back home?", he asked casually, poison lingering in his voice. "I don't have any strength... so I can't give you special treatment. If you harm the miss, I'll aim for your vitals"

"So- Someone! Someone... Kill this guy- this monster!", someone shouted - ordered. 

Zeno turned to Yona, offered her a smile and then ran toward the enemy.

"ZENO!!!", Yona called desperately, a sob caught in her throat.

His other arm returned to his body and my eyes followed his every move. I could only hear the screams of terror as some met their end at his hand. He stabbed enemy after enemy, until a soldier came up behind him, swinging his sword at his face. The sword cut through his jaw, his cheek. Screams followed as the wound healed. A blade plunged through his back and I stumbled once again against Jae-Ha. What were they doing to him? Multiple swords continued to pierce him from many directions and I could only feel the pain he might be feeling this very instant. It didn't matter if he died and came back to life ; the pain lingered and I found my arms clutching to my middle, desperate to not relieve previous pains of mine. 

"DROP DEAD!", a soldier screamed, swinging his sword in the air.

"STOP IT!", Yona shouted, called as the blade went down and beheaded our friend, his head flying in the air and falling to the ground with a thud. His body joined, flopping to the ground. I turned around, hiding in Jae-Ha's chest. I did not see his reaction, but I knew he kept his head lifted as his arms encircled me. His hand rested on my head, holding on to my neck and finally slid to my back.

"Did that kill him...?", I could hear. 

"I cut his head off..."

"No matter how you slice it...", his voice was poison. I turned my head against Jae-Ha's chest, watching from my peripheral. Jae-Ha's hand rested against my cheek, holding on to me. I watched as he raised to his feet, his head joining his body. And yet again, screams... unending screams that could ruin the ear. It was awful. 

"What the hell are you?!"

"How are you still moving?!" 

"How are you still living?!"

Zeno brought a hand to his clothes, clutching the hem in his hand.

"No matter how many times you tear me apart... I will be everyone's shield"

He dashed, pushing his weight off the ground as he ran toward the enemy.

"G- get away!", the soldier howled, bringing his sword up and bringing it down upon Zeno's head. But it met steel, as if Zeno's head had hardened.

"What! My sword... won't slice through..."

"Yeah. You... can't pierce me anymore", Zeno whispered loud enough for everyone to hear. Zeno's hand approached the soldier's face and he crushed him to the ground. Another tried to swing for him, but Zeno grabbed the blade in his hand, completely shattering the sword. And then he kicked the enemy in the stomach.

Screams as they fled. Screams as they ran or rode away from our friend.

"Wh- what's going on?", one of them asked, only now arriving. 

"Zeno...!", Ki-Ja called and I tried to search for him. I tried to search for them all, but I couldn't, Jae-Ha's hand still holding onto me.

"It- it's that monster!", another shouted in warning as Zeno ran up to him. "It's coming this way!", he jumped, so fast I could not follow his movements. He landed upon the man, his weight breaking his armor as the horse galloped away. He landed on the ground... and then got up, his never-faltering smile plastered on his face now.

"Hi! Is everyone okay?", he asked.

"Ze... no...", Ki-Ja called, still on the ground.

"There, there, I'm still alive"

"You... what on earth..."

"Unless I'm attacked... I'm the odd one out who doesn't have any powers", I found the strength then to free myself from Jae-Ha's grasp. I stood up, my legs barely able to withstand my weight. "However... when it regenerates... this body... turns into steel... Right now, I have brute strength like Hakuryuu, and can kick like Ryokuryuu. Unlike you, I have no limits. I can go on fighting for hundreds of years. Come at me... I have all the time in the world", he said his final words as he stared at the enemy, challenging them. But they fled. They retreated on their horses, avoiding death. 

Zeno bend down, retrieving something of his. I watched as they all ran to him. "Zeno...!", Yona called. "Zeno...!", she called again and he turned around. 

"Oh, miss", he said, smiling. "Are you okay...?"

Yona brought her arms around his neck as Ki-Ja and Shin-Ha joined them. Yoon was a little behind, but eventually, they fell to the ground in a big hug.

"...Hey, hey... You're all hurt", Zeno said. Yona was crying uncontrollably and I could barely stand on my legs, slowly approaching the small group. "It's okay. I'm alive. You're all adorable"

I could only stand before them, could only watch. I knew Hak and Jae-Ha were standing at my sides. I fell to the ground, my knees hitting the dirt with a thud. Tears fell down my cheeks as my sword fell at my side. I closed my eyes and everything went black.

Chapter Text

"How is everyone feeling?"

Yoon had asked the question, putting a hand to Ki-Ja's forehead, seeing if the fever had gone down.

"Much better. It must be because of Kalgan's medicine", Jae-Ha answered.

"It's also because of Kalgan's medicine but, ever since we returned to Kouka Kingdom, it feels like I got a lot better", Ki-Ja added.

"Your fever went down but your wounds haven't healed yet", Yoon said. "Go rest a little more. Especially you, Ki-Ja"

"That was a pretty harsh battle", Jae-Ha let out and I turned toward him. "The only thing I regret is... Shin-Ha took off his mask but I didn't even have the time to look at his eyes", I face-palmed myself at his words. 

"He truly is desperate when it comes to that", Yoon added and I smiled, taking my hand away from my face, sparing a look in Shin-Ha's direction.

"Please, stop it. Shin-Ha is troubled", Ki-Ja said, defending the Blue Dragon.

"But aren't Shin-Ha's eyes more beautiful than anything else in the world?", Jae-Ha wondered.

"...That's not... true...", Shin-Ha mumbled.

"To see whether or not that's true we need to check, right?", Jae-Ha teased, approaching Shin-Ha, a hand lifted in the air, ready to pluck the mask away from his face.

"Jae-Ha", Ki-Ja called in warning.

"You guys are really lively", Zeno cut in and I turned my head in his direction, suddenly remembering his presence.

As I looked at him, images of what happened on the battlefield came back to mind. His arms cut off, blades piercing through his body, his head cut off. And how I had hidden in Jae-Ha's chest when all of that happened. I felt my cheeks heat under the memory. I had to hope Jae-Ha was not staring at me in that moment. 

"Even though, you guys were wounded so much. Ahhh- very good, very good"

Jae-Ha walked up to the Yellow Dragon and put a hand on his wrist, pulling his sleeve away from his arm. His skin was unharmed, completely smooth and perfect, no trace of scar or anything. 

"What is it?", Zeno asked. 

"The one who was most injured was you, you know?", Jae-Ha spoke.

"There are no wounds or scales", Yoon pointed out, grabbing onto Zeno's arm.

"After some time passes, it turns back into normal skin", Zeno explained, his bright smile never faltering.

"Do you... really not die?", Yoon asked, as if hesitating.

"I won't die"

"...Hey...", Yoon mumbled, his face going pale. "How old are you, Zeno?"

"17", Zeno answered and I frowned. 

"Liar", Hak let out.

"Did you not say you would fight for hundreds of years?!", Ki-Ja exclaimed. 

"How many years did you count out?", Jae-Ha wondered in a teasing tone. 

"Hmm", the sound was out between the pressed lips of the Yellow Dragon as he thought. "I don't remember the exact year... since counting is a pain"

"Basically, you've been living for so long, you don't want to count", Jae-Ha said. 

"Zeno are you...", Ki-Ja started, earning Zeno's attention. "... the first generation?", my eyes widened and landed on our companion, waiting for the answer.

"That's right", chills went down my spine. "I am the first dragon, the one who served King Hiryuu. Ouryuu Zeno", the look in his eyes as he said that reminded me of the small amount of times he let that look show. Since the beginning, he was always hiding his emotions, his feelings... his real self behind smiles and laughs and idiocy. I never thought much of the looks he let show ; it was only curiosity. But now... it all made sense. 

"The dragon from the same time period as... the legend", Yona whispered. "You got bestowed with the blood from the dragon god?"

"Something like that might've happened", Zeno said, scratching the back of his head. "Back then I was just some brat that could hear the voice of the gods a little bit"

"Voice of the gods?", Yoon wondered.

"Yeah. Just like the Shinto Priest Monks"

"Have you been in this form ever since before?", Yona asked.

"Ever since I drank the dragon's blood", Zeno confirmed. "A person who possesses an immortal body... that's the Ouryuu"

"What about your village? You said that they left a long time ago", Ki-Ja said. 

"They did leave a long time ago. The village I was born in, that is. There isn't even a shadow of what was once there. If you're talking about something similar to the Hakuryuu village, then there isn't anything like that"

"Then... you've been alone this whole time?", Yona asked.

"Ah... There was once a time when Zeno was married", the words left me in a surprised state. My jaw dropped, and I had millions of questions poping in my head.

"Huh...", Hak let out. 

"Marri-", Ki-Ja started.

"Married...?", Jae-Ha mumbled.

"If you've lived a long life, getting married is common", Zeno said and I closed my mouth again, a question on the verge of my lips.

"I... suppose...", Jae-Ha let out, heavily hesitating, confused. 

"But... I'm sorry for asking...", I cut in, the first time I spoke since the conversation began. "If you don't want to answer, it's okay. But... did you ever fall in love afterwards? I would guess that once... after being married and being hurt... you wouldn't do it again knowing full well that you would outlive them... am I right? You knew that, didn't you?"

He looked at me with sorrow in his gaze, pain in his traits. A small sad smile appeared on his lips. "Because of how unbearable it was... no, I didn't realize at first... but then, I did. It was the first and the last time I have and ever will be married"

I nodded, glad he answered my question. I couldn't imagine the pain he felt when she died and left this world, couldn't imagine the agony he kept living to this day. My eyes snagged away, landing on a small figure, standing not too far. She was smiling, looking at Zeno with tender eyes. Then, she realized I was looking at her, realized I could see her. She smiled at me and I realized, in this very instant, that she had never stopped looking after him. I smiled, but decided not to tell him that.

"But anyway. I don't have a village so... since I have this body, I traveled around... from place to place. Lots of people, lots of dragons born and died. I saw good Emperors and bad Emperors. Within those... the one who was the reincarnation of King Hiryuu, the one I was waiting for, was you"

"Me...?",Yona let out, her eyes going blank. "King Hiryuu's reincarnation?"

"...That's right! Just as I thought", Ki-Ja beamed. "Then, how come as soon as the Princess needed the Four Dragons you did not appear by her side?"

"This is going to sound mean, but... I was testing her. To determine whether she was worthy of the power of the Four Dragons. When she was chased out of the castle, when she went to the Hakuryuu village... When she went to the Seiryuu village and when she faced danger in Awa, I saw it. And when she left Awa, I thought if it was this miss, it would be alright. I went to meet her"

"When you say the reincarnation of King Hiryuu... I have no type of powers", Yona said, looking down at the ground.

"King Hiryuu was also just a human", Zeno added, making her look in his eyes. "It's not like you have to follow in King Hiryuu's footsteps or anything, miss. I just decided that I wanted to follow you around. Well then! Are there any more questions? Are we satisfied? Then, we're done, we're done! Let's have lunch"

"Wait a second!", Yoon exclaimed. "That's it? You've been living this whole time. After meeting Yona, isn't there something you should tell her?"

"Was there... something...", Zeno wondered, confused, holding onto Ao.

"Why did you stay quiet until now?", Hak wondered.

"It's because nothing changes whether or not you know. Zeno's powers don't activate until there's a large injury anyway"

"Zeno married, huh...", Jae-Ha let out, still not over it, looking up at the sky.

"Where are you looking?", Zeno wondered, standing beside his companion, looking at the sky as well, a hand over his brow, searching. "C'mon, food food...", he sang.

I was sitting by the river, looking up at the star filled sky and the full moon hanging over the water. The sounds of birds chirping, leaves rubbing against each other, the soft vibration of the water. I closed my eyes for a brief moment, taking the energy in, contemplating the peace surrounding me. It felt private, silent, calm, serene. It felt good, so perfect, so unique. I was smiling, and it required no effort. And when I made to open my eyes, a shadow at my side made me scream.

A loud noise came out of my mouth as I pulled away, bringing a hand to my lips when I realized Jae-Ha's presence. Just... how did he take a seat without me realizing? I hadn't felt anything, I hadn't heard anything. Just... how did it happen?

"Heavens, Jae-Ha! Don't sneak up on someone like that"

"Why not? You were just beautiful to look at. You seemed so calm and relaxed"

"I'm not very calm and relaxed now thanks to you, stupid"

"At least, I got to witness what you look like when you are not on guard, Lone love", he whispered, a sweetness to his voice. "It was worth it"

"While it lasted, I bet. You ruined my mood"

"The pleasure's mine"

"The pleasure's nobody's. I swear to the Heavens, if you don't get up and leave right this moment, I'm going to kill you"

"Why? It was just getting comfortable"

"Me being comfortable means being alone... which also means without you, Greenie"

He sighed, finally getting up. "Fine. I'm leaving. Enjoy your time alone", he looked back at me, winking. I rolled my eyes, his smile tingling at something in my brain as he left. I did not close my eyes again, I did not lose myself to the elements again. I just let the silence settle and I did enjoy my time alone... while it lasted. Steps echoed at my back.

"Jae-Ha, I swear-", I turned around, but my gaze didn't land on the tall, handsome figure of my friend. It was... "Zeno"

He smiled and approached me. Standing by my side now, he pointed to the grass. "Mind if I join you?"

"Not at all", I said, gesturing for him to sit. When he had taken a seat, he kept his eyes on the water.

"You know, in all my years on this earth, I've never seen a dragon fall for anyone", I straightened, turning my attention toward him. 

"What do you mean?", I asked, my heart beating a tad faster.

"I mean that the Green Dragon is falling for you... well, if he hasn't already"

"I... I don't understand"

"Relations between dragon and another person were always arranged... it never was love. It never bloomed... because they were always perceived as monsters. But you, miss, as well as the other miss, have never treated the dragons any differently than any human being. The dragons have always... and I mean, always, ever felt love towards their master. It never was custom for them to feel anything for anyone, only because there was only one purpose that clouded any other thoughts"

I did not know what to say. I was speechless. For him to be so opened... so truthful... I could not ignore his words, could not push them away, even if I wanted to.

"The feelings the Green Dragon has for you are what exists beyond the blood that connects them to the King... to King Hiryuu"

Silence fell for a while, until he spoke again. "I have a feeling you don't believe me. But I also have a feeling that his own might come to light soon... by his own desires. And I hope... for him... that you feel the same"

I stared at a far point across the river. There it was again, the girl looking at Zeno. Short dark hair, a style that very much looked like Zeno's... She seemed sweet and gentle. I hadn't realized Zeno was looking at me, until he spoke.

"It's the second time I see you looking in a specific direction with that look of wonder in your eyes", he said. "I know miss can see the dead... but who are you seeing exactly?"

I turned toward him then, and I smiled. "Her name is Kaya... she tells me"

His eyes widened and I felt my heart beat faster as I realized what I'd said. "I'm sorry... I should have asked you if you wanted to know. She seems very special to you"

"She was", he said, pain drawing across his face. "Did she say something?"

"She has always kept an eye over you... Since she left this world, she has been looking over you, she has never left your side"

He smiled then, a tear falling on his cheek. "You know... when a soul keeps to the earth after it has died, it means they either couldn't forgive the one that killed them, or because they have unfinished business... the two are usually related"

"What do you mean?", Zeno asked, looking at me as I stared at Kaya across the river. I smiled. 

"She couldn't forgive the illness that took her away from you. She regrets not spending more time with you. She would have loved eternity... and she couldn't settle for a small while..."

He didn't say anything else. I didn't add anything else. She never left. She stayed there, staring at him. It was... intriguing... love. It was wonderful and unique. It was beautiful and yet painful. She looked radiant in death, and reminded me of my brother, who kept looking over me as well. She didn't bear the corrupted soul of the others, the ones who haunted me, who taunted me. She was extraordinary... I understood why he fell in love with her, and why he still loved her to this day. Why he still spared a thought or two for her every day. She was special... maybe... like Jae-Ha was special to me...

Chapter Text

Water Tribe Territory Ryusui

"I'm sorry kid", Zeno apologized for yet another time as he clamped his hands together and bowed forward.

"I can't believe you", Yoon muttered. 

"I won't do it ever again", Zeno said carelessly. Of course he would do it... if Yona was in danger, he would do it. If anyone was in danger... he would do it. I didn't know if Yoon believed him, though.

"Really. You've already made your clothes tattered and bloodied several times already. I've sewed them over and over again but it's useless"

"Which is why we're buying Zeno-kun's clothes right now", Jae-Ha added.

Zeno bowed his head yet again. "Thank you"

"Here's your allowance", Yoon said, handing the boy some money. "Use this money to buy whatever clothes you want"

"Yes", he accepted, a smile on his face.

"If you ruin them again then you can cover yourself with leaves next time"

"Looks like the day I become a nudist is not far", the smile still stuck on his face, Zeno whispered the words as if enjoying the idea.

"I don't want to wash clothes covered in blood anymore", Yoon complained aloud, but seeing the wise smile that now decorated Zeno's lips, I knew he understood the boy.

"Zeno, you look really happy", Yona said, a piece of clothe in her hands. I stood not far, arms crossed over my chest.

"It's because the kid really worries about me"

"Speaking of which, this really is such a beautiful and peaceful little town. This is what the Water Tribe should really look like", Ki-Ja said. 

"The shore area is pretty much empty now", Jae-Ha added, looking towards the shore.

"Yona", Shin-Ha called and I turned my head to see what he was doing. He put a flower hairpin in her hair... it made me think of the hairpin Soo-Won had gifted her... the one Hak told me she got on her sixteenth birthday, the exact same day our friend betrayed her.

"How pretty", Yona beamed, taking the pin in her hands. "Shin-Ha, where did you find this?"

"There...", he pointed toward a merchant sitting on the ground in front of a towel or a blanket filled with jewelry of multiple sorts. The merchant looked at Yona warily, as if wondering if she was going to run away with it. 

"Wow, it's merchandise!", Yona realized, approaching the stand, sulking about how she didn't have any money. "Although... I did get some money from Yoon"

"It's fine once in a while, right?", Jae-Ha let out. "To buy a pretty hair accessory", I could feel his words targeted in my direction. I felt the urge to flip him off here and now but I stopped myself.

"Princess, there's some really pretty hair accessories here too", Ki-Ja said, heading toward another stand.

"Wow, it really suits you Ki-Ja!", Yona exclaimed as she put the accessory around the dragon's neck.

"No, I don't need anything", Ki-Ja refused her, still a little confused.

"This blue gem over here is a guardian that can heal and bring happiness", the merchant explained, pointing to another jewelry. 

"This stone is...?", Ki-Ja asked, pointing to another as Yona picked up the blue gem.

"This here is a longevity stone"

Maybe if I gave it to Jae-Ha, he would live beyond his dragon lifespan. I shook my head in a desperate attempt to rid my thoughts of his face, of his name.

"Jae-Ha", Yona called, which made me almost look in her direction with a dark glance. "Do you know where Hak is?"

"Over there", he said, pointing to the bench on which Hak was sitting... sleeping. 

"He's sleeping?!", I stood up, going to stand by her side. A smile appeared on my lips.

"Yesterday, it was Hak's turn for nightwatch. So he seems to be a little sleep deprived", Jae-Ha said and I huffed a laugh, staring into the calm mess of Hak's usually stern expression. 

"How rare...", Yona whispered.

"Yeah", Jae-Ha laughed, bringing a fist to his mouth. "No matter how tired he is, I never thought Hak would show such a relaxed face"

"It's because Hak really trusts everyone", I smiled at that, trying to remember a time where he did calm down around everyone. 

"...Eh", Jae-Ha sounded out, surprised, looking down at my friend. "I heard something interesting, I'll use this against him next time", he muttered. I rolled my eyes as I watched Yona run toward Hak.

After five seconds of utter silence, I turned my attention to look at him sideways. He was already half-turned toward me, a grin plastered on his face. I rolled my eyes, heaved a sigh and crouched back before the jewel merchant, staring at the many pieces. Jae-Ha lowered himself to crouch by my side, his annoying smile still on his lips. 

"Are you going to pick something for yourself, Lone Love?", he asked.

"Gods, no", I exclaimed, getting up. "I haven't worn jewelry since Hakkon House burned do-", I started to say, but a sadness crept over my expression. "Never mind", I added, walking away.

I hadn't really thought of the last time I wore jewelry. Because it reminded me of the way I lived at Hakkon House, full of riches, peacefully. Now... my life was no where near that level of rich and peace, it was chaos and pain. Wearing jewelry after all this time would just betray my family ; as if I could allow myself to wear jewelry, to be my old self as I had been with them. This was their part of me... no one else's. 

I spent the next few minutes searching for Zeno and Shin-Ha, who had gone searching for something to wear for Zeno. Once I had found them, Zeno looked like he was ready to spend Yoon's entire well-deserved money.

"Wow, you look like a king", I said, arms crossed over my chest.

"Thank you, miss!", he beamed.

"I hope this is just a costume parade. I don't think you could buy this with the small allowance Yoon gave you"

"Yeah... I guess that's the problem...", Zeno muttered, painfully contemplating the options.

"Hee hee", a sound. A laugh. I turned my head in the direction from which it came from. "Then, why don't you let big sister buy it for you?", a tentative smile pulled on the corners of my lips. 

When we finally arrived back where Yoon had made camp, Zeno was pulling on the scarf, reveling in his comfortable warmth. 

"Uh, hey", Yoon greeted us hesitantly, taking one look at Zeno's new clothes and seeming confused. "Was your money enough for that?"

"Nope", Zeno blatantly answered. 

"Then, how did you buy that?!", Yoon screamed, panic taking control of his voice.

"Big sister bought it for me", Zeno explained and I rolled my eyes.

"What big sister?!"

"Big sister as in Tetora, in the Ayura and Tetora duo", I announced, half-turning toward our two friends.

"Hee hee. We bought it for him", Tetora chuckled, bringing a hand to her mouth.

"Ayura! Tetora!", Yona exclaimed, walking up to them.

"It's been a long time", Ayura pleasantly greeted, bowing as Tetora did the same. 

"Thank you for taking care of us last time", Tetora added.

"I didn't think I would see you guys in a place like this", Yona truthfully said. 

"It's great to see you all so lively and well", Tetora beamed.

"Where's Lili?", Yona asked.

"Ah... Miss Lili is a little...", Tetora began. 

"Ah, that's right, she went back to Suiko, didn't she..."

"So Tetora, it was you two who bought those clothes for Zeno?", Yoon wondered suddenly.

"Yup, it's a gift"

"Is that alright?", Yoon timidly asked, a bit ashamed.

"I'm just doing what I can for these cute boys. Also-", she said, holding up a bottle of liquor. "To celebrate our reunion, I have another gift. Would you like a cup?"

After seating ourselves around on tree trunks, Tetora started pouring everyone a cup, Yona and I being the only ones to refuse.

"With beautiful girls here, the wine also tastes much better", Jae-Ha let out, sparing me a look. I met his gaze, unflinching.

"That's how you drank the drugs, huh?", Hak wondered aloud.

"Bringing that up again?", Jae-Ha continued.

"Hee hee. This red wine is made with the water that's the Water Tribe's specialty. Of course there's no drugs in this", she said, but as I spared a look towards the White Dragon, I had my fair doubts on that.

"Is everything fine now with Shisen and Sensui?", Jae-Ha then proceeded to ask.

"...yes", Tetora answered. "I guess so", I frowned when I realized the expression on her face. It was a mixt of hesitation and something else... as if she wanted to ask us something. "But it's great how we can meet everyone here"

"-Why don't you cut to the chase?", Hak asked, cutting her off. I jumped, my back straightening. So I wasn't the only one who had realized. "Stop trying to bribe us in a round-about way. You came to find us because there's something you need, right?"

I slowly traveled my gaze from Hak to Tetora, awaiting her answer. My eyes went up toward Yoon as he muttered a small "Eh?" of surprise, then went back down to our friend.

"Lord Hak really is sharp", Tetora started then put a hand on the ground. Ayura had already bowed her head down when Tetora joined her. "To be honest, there's something we would like to ask of you regarding Miss Lili"

"What's wrong with Lili?", Yona asked. 

"Right now, Miss Lili is in exile from Suiko", the eyes of Yoon, Yona and Jae-Ha widened in horror. "That itself is nothing to worry about. But just as you'd expect, she wouldn't just sit around and do nothing. This time, she said she wants to go to the country of Sei", my eyes widened only then. 

"Sei?", I wondered, surprised.

"Yes", Ayura continued. "We can't stop Miss Lili anymore with just us two. Which is why, even though it's a lot to ask, we would still like to ask everyone to go to Sei with Miss Lili as her bodyguards"

We had agreed of course. What could a little adventure to the Country of Sei do to any of us, right? Right?! 

When we arrived at the place she was staying at, we caught the end of her conversation with a guard that involved her desire to go to Sei. Tetora cleared her throat.

"Oh ho ho, Lady Lili. We can't relax for even a second around you", she said and I saw her back straighten in surprise. 

"So you're back Tetora...", she started, then turned her head around and stopped in her sentence when she saw who stood with her two bodyguards. 

It didn't take long before Lili dragged Tetora by the sleeve to the inside of the mansion as we stayed outside. We were all seated by the edge of a semblance of pool, except for Hak and Jae-Ha. Zeno was pointing recklessly in a direction in the water, as if he had seen something as Yoon yelled at him to be more careful. So when they got out from the mansion, Lili had been forced to stand before Yona.

"Lili, don't hesitate to ask us for any favours! We'll help you!", Yona beamed. And Lili was crying... "Oh my? What's wrong?"

"She wanted to help Lady Yona, but she's always the one receiving help, so she feels very frustrated", Ayura explained.

"Ayura!", Lili shouted, embarassed. 

As I stood beside Ayura, I lifted my attention in her direction. "Do you always know her so perfectly? Do you always betray her feelings that way?", I asked and Ayura offered me a smile.

"I would rather think of it as making the people she's talking to understand her expressions better, even when there are some things Lady Lili would prefer to keep hidden", I nodded at her response. Seemed fair to me.

"There's no need for you to be bothered by that", Yona assured, patting the Lady on the head. Lili went red with embarassment. 

"...Actually...", Lili started. And then she told us everything she knew. 

"Merchants from Sei are smuggling in Nadai?!", Yona exclaimed.

"I'm afraid so", Lili let out. "No matter how much Nadai is destroyed in Sensui, more just keeps popping up. The trade route from South Kai should already be severed. I asked some merchants in Sensui to ask around. And there's apparently rumours that merchants from Sei are selling Nadai to the Water Tribe through the black market"

"Black market...", Yona whispered.

"The other thing is... There have been multiple cases of people going missing on the border between Kouka and Sei"

"Wow, that's a little scary", Yoon commented.

"In conclusion, Sei is definitely planning something suspicious", Lili added. "If we just leave it alone, the Water Tribe will face danger yet again. I want to stop that from happening no matter what"

After a few seconds, Hak eventually let out a laugh, visibly amused.

"Hey, you", Lili called. "Why are you laughing?"

"Ah no, sorry", Hak apologized. "I just thought the second princess has appeared"

"Hak", Yona warned, losing her smile. 

"It must be really tiring for you", Jae-Ha muttered, standing beside Tetora.

"It really is...", Tetora answered. 

"Tetora!", Lili shouted again.

"Lili, we will definitely help out", Yona said. 

"Yona..."

"I will go with you, too!", Ki-Ja beamed. 

"We can't really let bad things happen to Kouka, right?", I asked, putting a hand on Lili's shoulder. She looked up to me, tears sparkling in her eyes yet again. 

"So tomorrow, let's go to the town along the border and investigate first", Jae-Ha proposed.

"Lady... Yona, Lady Lone", Tetora called and we turned. 

"You don't need to add the 'lady'", Yona said. I nodded in answer. 

"Thank you so much for listening to our selfish request"

"No problem, I'm very happy you asked for our help", Yona reassured her.

"Originally, I should have been the one helping Lady Lili with everything I've got", Tetora continued, putting a hand to her stomach. Reminding me of that night sent a tinge of guilt along my spine. If I had been there... "But because of that fight, that is no longer possible... Please take care of Lady Lili"

"We will", I responded.

Later, we had finally changed into some pajamas Lili had lended us and we all decided to cuddle up in the same bed. 

"Can we really sleep here?", I wondered. 

"Of course. Although the place isn't really big. But you probably can't fall asleep with those rowdy guys, right?"

"We manage", I shrugged. "It's become a habit, really"

I lifted the sheets on Lili's right side as she lay on her belly. Yona lifted the sheets on her left side, taking the other side. 

"Then, we'll join you"

"Please, go ahead"

When we were finally installed, all laying on our bellies, our elbows lifted on the bed to support us, Yona spoke. "Lili, when I heard you were exiled from Suiko, I was really shocked. It's such a relief that you look fine"

"Of course", Lili brought a hand to scratch the back of her head, as if wondering why exactly we would be worried. I mean, she did look comfortable enough in here, even if it was 'small'. "Father will probably scold me for what we're doing this time too. But just watching silently from the sidelines is torture"

"I understand... I mean, the feeling of being powerless", I let out before I had even realized what went past my lips.

"Right... I bet you, maybe better than anyone else, would understand...", Lili said, because she knew. When I burst out, when I screamed everything for everyone to hear, she heard it too.

"Let's not talk about that, shall we?", I said, forcing a smile on my lips. I watched as Lili's eyes lingered on my cheeks and then, went dark with sadness. 

"Right now, if I could just discuss directly with that King, perhaps he would listen to a little bit of what I have to say", chills traveled down my spine at her words. As her eyes widened, I knew she'd understood her mistake. Not just on my part, but on Yona's part as well. "Ah...", she let out. "...Sorry"

"...It's alright", Yona assured, her voice small. "To be honest Soo-Won, he... probably will take some sort of action"...

... so I hadn't been the only one to think so. Even after he changed so much, I still knew him better than anyone.

"...That person... he's your cousin but he usurped the throne didn't he?", Lili asked, directing the question at Yona. "To you, he's like an enemy... right? That's how it is... But you can still say something like that? You should really hate him right...?", she asked, but as she received no answer from her, she turned toward me. "And you? What was he to you? Do you hate him, too?"

I didn't answer either. I couldn't... "...sorry", Lili let out after a while. "I really shouldn't have said that"

"Father...", Yona started. "Just after father was killed and I escaped out of the capital, all I did was grieve. And I thought I would never be able to forgive him. I thought why would such a gentle person...", my heart tugged at my chest. Pain. Pure pain. "But... after understanding a bit more about this country, witnessing the Fire Tribe's betrayal, and at Sensui... meeting that person... I started thinking maybe Soo-Won wanted to protect this country using a different method than father"

"I knew that, too", I whispered. "That's why I fought so hard to protect him from Hak", I could feel the tears burning in my eyes, but I bit down on my tongue to restrain them. "But now, the only thing I can think about is his betrayal and how he used me to get what he wanted"

"Don't you want to find him and exact revenge?", Lili asked and my eyes widened at the question.

Exact... revenge? 

"...This country needs a strong leader", Yona said. "If I fight against Soo-Won because of my personal feelings, it will plunge the country into chaos. If Soo-Won created a tyranny because of his own greed, I might have fought against him. But right now, what I need to do is not seeking revenge"

"I never thought of it...", I whispered. "I never wanted to fight him... I only ever wanted to stay away, to protect myself, but also to protect the old image I had of him. His sweet, innocent soul... I guess I never could accept the hard truth", I said, feeling my eyes water slowly but painfully.

"That... might be the case, but...", Lili started.

"I... did once think I had to get revenge. But... actually... Even if I think I should never forgive Soo-Won...", Yona said and then turned her head toward us, meeting my eyes across from Lili. "I never truly wanted to kill him. The gentleness that person has shown in front of Hak, Lone and I, no matter what... I just can't feel like it's all fake", Lili looked back and forth between Yona and I and stared longer at the tears in my eyes.

"Lone... did you possibly...", she didn't say the words ; she didn't have to. "...towards that person?"

I offered her a smile. "It's been a long time. I have other things now clouding my mind. Right now, all I want is to follow Yona"

"And even through all that", Yona started. "I want to understand that person. What is that person thinking, what does he want to achieve? What should I do then after I know all this? Using a completely different feeling than the one I had in the Capital, I want to understand him"

"But... what about that guy?", Lili asked.

"What..."

"You know, Hak..."

"Hak will never really forgive Soo-Won...", I let out, because I knew. After I fought him as he tried to fight through me to get to him, after I saw the anger and the despair, I knew that whatever happened, he would never forgive him. 

"Even if to this country, Soo-Won is a righteous leader,", Yona continued. "Since Hak, more than anyone... more than anyone else, trusted Soo-Won, his grief will never be healed"

"And his anger will never be fought", I ended.

We ended up going to sleep afterwards. I fell asleep quite fast... It took mere seconds, as if exhaustion really pulled at my mind... or had been.

Glimpses of dark hair... of sea blue eyes. The feeling of the salty air in my hair, through my fingers, the sound of it through the grass, the singing of the forest at night, the sunrise and sunset by his side... I woke up, panting. Beads of sweat rolled down my forehead, my cheeks. Thankfully, it didn't dampen the sheets. Well, that didn't feel like a nightmare at all, now did it?

What...

What did I just dream about?

I thought...

I thought I had forgotten...

I thought I had tucked that memory deep in my mind...

I brought a hand to my mouth, trying not to wake my friends with my heavy uncontrolled breathing. 

What does that mean? After all this time?

A few minutes later, as I contemplated the ceiling, my eyes having adapted to the dark, I heard the ruffling of the sheets. I lifted my head up, watching as Yona slipped out of bed.

"Yona", I whispered, trying not to wake Lili. She turned around in a jump. "Where are you going?"

"It's okay, Lone. I just need to breathe some fresh air"

"Scream if you need help", I could detect the smile hint of a smile on her face as she finally left.

I spent the next minutes thinking back on the dream I just had. It reminded me of stolen kisses, of long embraces in the night... it reminded me of promises left unfulfilled. Something so young and so painful I promised I would never think about it again, would never talk about it to anyone. My father never got to know... My friends either. I still couldn't believe it happened mere months ago... right before Hakkon House, right before...

...right before I knew he still had feelings for me after...

I closed my eyes, trying to push the memories away, trying to ignore them. What did it mean anyway? After all this time, after I forced myself not to think about it, why did it suddenly come back? I tried, multiple times to close my eyes and sleep, but his face came back everytime I did. When I had finally given up, Yona came back into the room, pulled on the sheets and went back to sleep in a hurry that told me she didn't want to talk about it... 

And I knew then what it was... Something had happened with Hak.

But it still didn't help me to go back to sleep... What was my heart trying to say after all this time? I didn't want the unfulfilled promises to be filled right now... it was the last thing I wanted... 

Especially after everything that happened.

Chapter Text

Maybe after Soo-Won, that felt like true love. It felt different... better even. It was heaven and miracles. It was joy and smiles. It was fun and laughs. I had never met anyone like him before. He seemed like the love of my life. Right by my side he was, unlike Soo-Won, and I could actually see him there for so long afterwards.

We traveled all day on foot and arrived in the bordering town as the sun met with the horizon. The town in itself looked jovious and happy. I jumped the moment I heard pops souding overhead.

"Fireworks...", I whispered.

"What?", Yona let out, confused.

"It's fireworks", Yoon repeated, surprised.

"Tonight in Tousui, there will be a festival for the Water God", Lili explained.

"Eh-- Festival..."

"There is a festival held here annually. There's music and fireworks. It's very lively", Lili continued. 

"Is it this town where there are merchants from Sei and missing people?", Hak asked.

"About that...", Lili started but the ringing of her name called from not very far.

"Lady Lili", it wasn't familiar. It was old and feminine. We all turned as Lili walked up to the old lady.

"Ah, Tsubaru", the Lady called.

"You came again?", the old lady giggled behind her hand.

"It's fine. I want to solve this problem, too"

"Thank you very much"

"Ah, let me introduce you", Lili turned, presenting her friend. "This is Tsubaru, an acquaintance. A week ago, Tsubaru's son went missing around here"

"Eh?", Yoon let out, as if shocked. "How old was he?"

"15... he left home one night and never came back...", the woman sobbed.

"Although I'm also collecting information", Lili kept on. "There have been no clues so far. Our border with Sei is very long. I'm not sure whether this has anything to do with the Nadai or not, but I want to start investigating from Tousui"

"I understand", Yona clearly said.

"Lady Lili, these are...?", the old lady - Tsubaru - asked. 

"Ah. These are people who will help me investigate"

We bowed our heads, and Zeno offered a smile. "Please take care of us--"

"Thank you for your help! Lili really has a lot of weird friends"

'These weird friends will be in your careee'

"Tsubaru owns an inn", Lili explained as Zeno and Jae-Ha helped load the baggage on a cart. "I met her when I was fighting to ban Nadai. Ah. I'm here as a nobleman's daughter from Sensui", Lili let out just before the gong sounded from afar. Music started ; trumpets, drums. People threw flower petals everywhere they went. Parades followed.

"The festival has started", Ki-Ja announced.

"The crowd is also gathering, this will make things harder", Hak mumbled. 

"No... this is like when we were dealing with the Nadai problem in Shisen. Maybe it'll actually make things easier", Jae-Ha explained.

"This is the perfect opportunity for people to go missing", I added.

Masked people jumped and danced around, following the rhythm of the parade.

"Shin-Ha won't stand out like this"

"That's true"

"Maybe there are also merchants from Sei mixed in there", Yona said.

As Ao jumped from Shin-Ha's shoulder, the Blue Dragon caught her before she could go too far.

"Ao... you can't go", he warned under his breath, his voice barely audible.

"Is it because she's hungry?", Yoon asked. "There is the smell of toasty food floating around after all"

"Kid-", Zeno called as he licked from his lollipop. "This candy is good. You want some?"

"Start acting like your age, you forever 17. Wait a minute- where did you get that money?!"

"It was from me...!", Tetora sang. "Don't worry about it!"

"Geez, sorry for all the trouble our idiot caused you", Yoon apologized, bowing his head.

"Shin-Ha, that's what a good mother is supposed to look like", Jae-Ha said, pointing at Yoon from beside Shin-Ha. I stared, shaking my head from side to side in disbelief.

"Well, it's rare that you're all here", Tetora said, clapping her hands. "Let's all just enjoy ourselves tonight"

"Please, stop spoiling that guy!", Yoon begged as he slowly noticed the fox mask hanging to the side of his head and your usual toy windmill stuck in his hair.

"Well then, I'll blend in with the band to look around a bit. Zeno-Kun", Jae-Ha announced, his flute in his hand.

"Okay. You too, Seiryuu", Zeno pushed, pulling the mask over his face.

"Alright then, I'll just carry you guys around like this", Ki-Ja said as Jae-Ha sat on his hand, Shin-Ha on his shoulders and Zeno right on top, juggling. 

"Stop sticking out like a sore thumb you four rare beast brothers", Yoon warned, a really unpleasant expression on his face.

I smiled and turned around. Hak walked right in front of me and I offered him a death stare as he grinned at me ; the bastard was trying to make me slip. My eyes caught on a bit of jewelry at his neck. It was a necklace, no doubt about it. I recognized the stone hanging from it though. It was the gem the merchant said was a guardian that could heal and bring happiness. Oh, so she ended up getting it for him after all. I figured she might have given it to him yesterday when she got out of bed. I lowered my head, contemplating their new-found relationship. No, Yona didn't know about Hak's feelings. But I bet Hak had no idea about Yona's new emotions either.

I stared at the duo as Hak finally took her hand in his and pulled her away from the crowd. I stood there for a few seconds before I turned around and actually knocked into someone this time. I backed off, took in Jae-Ha's presence and lost the smile.

"You've been waiting there for a while, haven't you?", I asked, rubbing my forehead.

"Yup", he answered, a grin pulling on the corner of his lips. Gods, was he attractive. I suddenly looked away as I felt the heat rushing to my cheeks. "Wh-"

He started but I brushed past him as I joined the dancing crowd. "Shall we dance?", I shouted, smiling as I started twirling around. The music was divine, excruciatingly good. It made me want to dance to it until it stopped. But I never wanted it to stop. I could feel the dizziness reach my head, but I didn't care. As long as I kept moving, as long as I kept dancing, I would not fall. I ended up in the arms of a man. He made me move around in a frenzy and eventually sent me twirling to yet another man's arms. I kept being shared around, but the smiles and the genuine expressions of these men only made me smile more, only made me enjoy this moment more. I giggled and threw my head back, then laughed. I laughed, the sound feeling incredible and happy. 

When the music finally came to an end, I stopped and searched for him. I caught his gaze then. He was staring at me, a smile like no other I've ever seen before plastered on his lips. 

"You know, in all my years on this earth, I've never seen a dragon fall for anyone"

"What do you mean?"

"I mean that the Green Dragon is falling for you... well, if he hasn't already"

...

Those words were an echo in my mind. I couldn't stop replaying them. I took a step forward as the crowd around me started moving again. I walked towards him, desperate now. Well, until screams reached my ears. Nobody around me reacted. But Jae-Ha did. He lost the smile, he lost the stars in his eyes. I turned my head in the direction from which it came from and I ran. I ran like my life depended upon it. I recognized that voice.

It was Lili...

I reached her as she kneeled on the ground, a hand holding on to her other arm. She was bleeding.

"Lili! What happened?!", Yona shouted, arriving near me. Ayura and Tetora were looking around for whoever might have done that. I kneeled beside her and raised her arm to see the injury.

"I'm fine... it just... seems like someone cut my hand", Lili answered and I gathered the scraps that had been covering my body until now. I pulled at the end of my clothes and started wrapping her hand in the soft cloth.

"Lo- Lone! Don't! You're going to ruin your clothes!", Lili shouted, horrified. I looked up at her, dead serious.

"They're old rags ; they're not even mine to begin with. I need new clothes anyway"

"Who did it?!", Yona exclaimed then.

"It's just a scrape, nothing serious"

"'Just a scrape'?! Be kidding", I shouted, rolling my eyes. I stood up and joined Tetora who was staring into the crowd.

"They managed to escape", she murmured.

"It's no surprise. This festival is the perfect place to do something without being caught", I let out, turning around toward the sound of fireworks. They had exploded once more. But under its covers, screams of pain, of terror. Something was happening. Looking around, it was like nobody heard anything ; or just because they didn't want to acknowledge it. 

"Hak, Lone, did you hear that?", Yona asked.

"Yeah", Hak answered and I nodded.

"These guys...", I mumbled, anger creeping to my head.

"Screams that were drowned out instantly by the sounds of fireworks and laughter", Hak let out. 

"Is it a Nadai addict again?", Lili wondered.

"Well, there are rumored to be Nadai merchants from Sei in this town. So I wouldn't be surprised if that was the case", Tetora explained. She turned around, ready to walk away. "Lady Lili, please wait here, I'll go and..."

"Tetora, wait...", Lili called, but Ki-Ja had already placed himself before her, stopping her from going too far.

"Don't go", Ki-Ja ordered, blocking her. "It's our duty to fight. You bring Princess and Lili to the inn. It's better if you rest a bit longer"

"O...ok", Tetora seemed inclined to agree, light blush traveling across her nose.

"Let's go", Ki-Ja called as he turned around toward Jae-Ha and Shin-Ha.

"That was pretty cool, Ki-Ja-kun", Jae-Ha mumbled.

"Kid, come here!", Zeno called to Yoon.

"Eh, ok"

"There'll probably be a lot of casualties", Zeno added, mostly talking to himself. 

"I'll also-", Yona started but got cut off by Shin-Ha.

"Yona, no... It's dangerous"

"Then, I'll go... while Hak stays at the inn", I stepped up, clearing my voice. I thanked the Heavens nobody countered.